l''c-p ,.i"-^ r,.^ 
 
CORNELL 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
Cornell University Library 
 arV16182 
 
 A German grammarjo;,,.sch„c»ls„and^o^^ 
 
 3 1924 031 269 339 
 
 olin.anx 
 
Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of tliis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924031269339 
 
A GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 Scbools anb Colleges 
 
 BASED ON THE 
 
 PUBLIC SCHOOL GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 A. L. ^EISSNER, M.A., Ph.D., D.Lit. 
 
 Professor op Modern Languages in Queen's College, Belfast 
 Mitglied der Gesellschafi fUr das Siudium der neueren Sprachen zu Berlin 
 
 BY 
 
 EDWARD S. XOYNES, M. A. 
 
 Fkofbssok of Modern Languages in South Carolina Uhivbrsitt 
 
 THIRD EDITION 
 
 BOSTON, U. S. A. 
 
 PUBLISHED BY D. C. HEATH & COMPANY 
 
 1891 
 
Copyright by 
 
 D. C. Heath & Company. 
 
 1887. 
 
 VrJNTED by C. H. llEfNT^BMANN, 3P5TON, MaSS, 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 This book is based, by arrangement with the author and the 
 original publishers, upon the " Public School Grammar," by Dr. 
 A. L. Meissner, of Queen's College, Belfast (1885), which has 
 attained great popularity in the United Kingdom. 
 
 In the present book the material thus furnished has been 
 freely used and, where occasion seemed to require, freely modi- 
 fied The changed title will, to a great extent, explain the scope 
 of such modifications: The term " Public School Grammar " 
 would seem to restrict the original design to purely elementary 
 work. In this edition the attempt has been made to carry for- 
 ward the same method so as to include not only ordinary schools, 
 but high schools and colleges — in a word, to prepare a book 
 which should meet the wants of students of every grade — up to 
 the point where the demand arises for the higher study of his- 
 torical and scientific grammar. This higher study, let it be 
 said at once, is not included in the scope of the present work. 
 
 In carrying out this design there has been on the one hand 
 much condensation, and on the other much expansion, of the 
 original material. The changes in Parts I. and II. have been 
 both in detail and in arrangement ; yet the subject-matter re- 
 mains essentially the same. The Syntax (Part III.) has been 
 almost wholly rewritten, upon a scale more comprehensive than 
 that of the original work, to meet the more enlarged scope of 
 the present edition. Just what should be here included, and 
 what omitted, is a point on which perhaps no two would agree. 
 The editor, guided by his own experience, has sought to in- 
 
 iu 
 
IV PREFACE. 
 
 elude all that might be important for the student, and nothing 
 more. A comprehensive chapter on the Order of Words, a 
 brief summary of the Relation of German to English, an alpha- 
 betical list of Strong and Irregular Verbs, and Vocabularies, 
 covering al'l the exercises, have also been added. 
 
 The Exercises have undergone considerable change. After 
 Part I. those from German to English are omitted, on the 
 ground that the student should then be reading an independent 
 text; but those from English to German have been enlarged 
 throughout — not, of course, with the intention that the whole 
 exercise shall be used in every case, but with a view to selec- 
 tion, review, etc. The exercises on the Formation of Words, 
 which constitute a unique feature of the original work, will, 
 it is believed, be especially acceptable to teachers. On the 
 other hand the ©^sred^iibungen and jjragen have been omitted 
 entirely, on the ground that such materials can be found in 
 any text the class may be reading, by any teacher or students 
 capable of conducting such exercises ; and the space has been 
 used for purposes deemed more important. It is hoped that 
 the occasional suggestions to teachers will be pardoned, even 
 when not needed or followed ; and, more especially, that the 
 large use made of parallels and contrasts from English grammar 
 will be acceptable to those who, like the editor, have found 
 that, with most students, one of the chief obstacles to progress 
 in German is the want of a sound knowledge of English. 
 
 In the preparation of this edition, the editor has availed him- 
 self of the usual well-known German sources. Outside of these 
 he acknowledges with pleasure that obligation to Whitney's and 
 Brandt's German Grammars which no American scholar could 
 deny. Many helpful examples have been taken from Tiarks' 
 German Grammar. 
 
 The personal obligations of the editor are larger than he 
 could briefly express. Many scholars have kindly aided with 
 valuable suggestions. Where so many deserve mention it is 
 
PREFACE. V 
 
 difficult to discriminate ; but special acknowledgment is due to 
 Prof. Van der Smissen, of Toronto ; Prof. Sheldon, of Harvard ; 
 Prof. Primer, of the College of Charleston; Prof. Super, of 
 Dickinson College ; .and particularly to Prof. Fay, of Tufts Col- 
 lege, and Prof. Harrison, of Washington and Lee University, 
 who have read the entire proofs with painstaking and helpful 
 care. Dr. Meissner's own cordial sympathy has also been felt 
 at all times as a grateful encouragement. 
 
 For himself, the editor may say, in conclusion, that the labor 
 of this edition has been hardly less — in some directions, indeed, 
 greater — than would have been required for an original work; 
 and it has been performed in the midst of constantly engrossing 
 occupation. For this he asks no indulgence, but only that the 
 book be judged with reference to its avowed purpose : not as a 
 scientific or exhaustive exposition of the German language, but 
 as a working grammar, based on the experience of the class- 
 room, and aiming to present, in simple form and within 
 moderate limits, what is necessary for the use of pupils and 
 teachers in the ordinary school and college study of German. 
 If it fulfil this modest design, there will be ample room for its 
 usefulness. 
 
 South Carolina College, August 15, 1887. 
 
 Note. — The method of using the book will vary, of course, with the plan 
 of instruction and the views of individual teachers. For ordinary purposes, 
 however, the editor would suggest that Part I. should be first gone through, 
 with the exercises from Ge7-nian to English only, and that all translation 
 from English to German be deferred until the review is begun, and the stu- 
 dent is prepared to read an independent text; and, generally, that this inde- 
 pendent reading should be begun as early as possible, according to the grade 
 of different classes of pupils. This first study and the review, with the 
 reverse exercises, of Part I., will constitute a iavc first year's course in German, 
 sufficiently complete in itself, for younger pupils. 
 
In preparing this revised edition, I have carefully taken into 
 account all the suggestions kindly contributed by others, as well 
 as those found in my own teaching. At various points important 
 corrections and additions have been made — especially an Appen- 
 dix on the Declension of Nouns and on Prepositions — and no 
 pains have been spared to make the book pei;manently worthy of 
 the favor with which it has been received. With regard to some 
 features, already in part indicated in the first preface, I beg leave 
 now to add : 
 
 1. While the book is not intended expressly for the oral or *" natural " 
 method, yet its Exercises may be equally so used, and like exercises may be 
 indefinitely extended from the same materials. 
 
 2. On the other hand it is not implied that all the Exercises shall be 
 used with all pupils. Range was left, purposely, for. subdivision, selection 
 and review, according to the wants of classes. I should not need to add, 
 that the Exercises are intended not for literature, but purely for the appli- 
 cation of the grammatical forms. 
 
 3. Likewise the Paradigms are, for convenience, given entire, without 
 implying, however, that they must needs be so learned at once — or, indeed, 
 at all. Of this — as of all the details of method — each teacher will be his 
 own best judge. T 
 
 4. I beg leave to repeat and emphasire the suggestions made in the Note 
 to the first preface, both as to the Exercises and as to the early use cf an 
 independent text. It was with the latter view that all reading exercises, 
 outside of the grammar lessons, were omitted. By a judicious selection of 
 leading topics, the way may be prepared for such reading in from twelve to 
 twenty lessons, according to the grade of the pupils. 
 
 5. I desire especially to ask the attention of teachers to the reasons 
 given, in the introduction to the Vocabulary, for not giving the inflections (in 
 a, grammatical vocah\i\a.ry) where these are perfectly regular, and for not 
 repeating the conjugation <^ the strong verbs in the Alphabetical List. This 
 method is founded upon long experience, and I am happy to say has gained 
 the suffrage of some able teachers to whom it was new. I only ask for it a 
 fair trial. 
 
 6. After carefully weighing the able — and to some extent just — criti- 
 cisms that have been made upon the chapter on the Relation of German to 
 English (XLV.), I cannot secure my consent to any change in the plan of 
 that chapter, which was intended exclusively to help English-speaking pupils 
 to recognize and rem.ember German words. For this purpose I feel sure that 
 the present plan — amended now in some of its details — is the true one. 
 
 Finally, to all friends who have helped me in the revision, hearty 
 thanks — especially to Prof. Hugo Schilling, of Wittenberg Col- 
 lege, to whose learned and careful review in the Modern Language 
 Notes I am indebted for many valuable suggestions. 
 
 •Note. — The A52V<f edition is also carefully revised — without, however, 
 interfering with the use of the different editions in the same classes. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 PART I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ACCIDENCE. 
 
 PAGB 
 
 Alphabet i 
 
 Pronunciation 3 
 
 Accentuation 12 
 
 Use of Capitals .... 15 
 
 LESSON 
 
 i. The Definite Article. First Class of Strong Declension . 19 
 
 II. The Indefinite Article. Second Class of Strong Declension . 24 
 
 III. Declension of biefer, etc. Third Class of Strong Declension. 
 
 Present Ind. of fetll 28 
 
 IV. The Weak Declension. Past Ind. of feitt . . " . -32 
 V. Peauliarities in Declension. Perfect and Pluperfect of feitt . 36 
 
 VI. Declension of Proper Names. Future of (ein .... 40 
 VII. Declension of Foreign and Compound Nouns. Future Per- 
 fect of feiti ' . ■ 42 
 
 Synopsis of Declension of Nouns 46 
 
 Gender of Nouns 47 
 
 VIII. Strong Declension of Adjectives. Present of ^obcn . . 48 
 
 IX. Weak Declension of Adjectives. Past of ^abeit . . . S' 
 X. Mixed Declension of Adjectives. Perfect and Pluperfect of 
 
 §a6en SS 
 
 XI. Comparison of Adjectives. Future of ^afaen .... 60 
 XII The Predicate Superlative. Future Perfect of ^aben. Prepo- 
 sitions governing the Dative 64 
 
 -'■XIII. The Auxiliary Verbs 67 
 
 < XIV. The Auxiliary l^abcn. First Rules of Position. Prepositions 
 
 governing the Accusative ; and Dative or Accusative . . 71 
 " XV. The Auxiliary Jeilt. Personal Pronouns. Address ... 78 
 '' XVI. The Auxiliary Verb ttjerben. Contraction of Article with Prepo- 
 sitions. Possessives 85 
 
 vii 
 
vin 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 LESSON 
 
 XVII. 
 
 XVIII. 
 XIX. 
 
 XX. 
 
 XXI. 
 XXII. 
 
 XXIII. 
 
 XXIV. 
 
 XXV. 
 
 ■y XXVI. 
 
 r( XXVII. 
 
 , XXVIII. 
 
 - XXIX. 
 
 - XXX. 
 
 " XXXI. 
 
 XXXII. 
 
 XXXIII. 
 
 XXXIV. 
 
 XXXV. 
 
 XXXVI. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Weak Conjugation of Verbs. Rules of Position. De- 
 monstratives 9' 
 
 Weak Conjugation, continued. Interrogatives . . 99 
 Strong Conjugation of Verbs. First Class of Strong 
 
 Verbs, First Subdivision 104 
 
 First Class of Strong Verbs, Second Subdivision. Rela- 
 tive Pronouns no 
 
 First Class of Strong Verbs, Third Subdivision . .115 
 First Class of Strong Verbs, Fourth Subdivision. In- 
 definites 119 
 
 Second Class of Strong Verbs. First Subdivision. Sec- 
 ond Subdivision 122 
 
 Third Class of Strong Verbs. First Subdivision. Second 
 
 Subdivision. Reflexive Verbs 126 
 
 Mixed Conjugation and Irregular Verbs. Synopsis of 
 
 Strong Verbs 131 
 
 Auxiliary Verbs of Mood 136 
 
 The Passive Voice. Use of the Passive . . . .141 
 
 Inseparable Verbs. Spurious Prepositions . . . 146 
 Separable Verbs . . . ."* . . . .150 
 
 Verbs Separable or Inseparable. Compound Prefixes . 153 
 Impersonal Verbs. Use of \)abai and (eitl . . .156 
 
 Cardinal Numerals. Expressions of Time . . . 160 
 
 Ordinal Numerals. Dates, Measures, etc. . . 164 
 
 Adverbs 167 
 
 Conjunctions. Interjections 171 
 
 Order of Words : Summary and Synopsis . . . 177 
 
 PART II. DERIVATION AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 XXXVII. Derivation of Verbs i86 
 
 XXXVIII. Composition of Verbs igo 
 
 XXXIX. Composition of Verbs (continued) 195 
 
 XL. Derivation of Nouns igS 
 
 XLI. Derivation of Nouns (continued) 202 
 
 XLII. Composition of Nouns 206 
 
 XLIII. Derivation of Adjectives and Adverbs .... 210 
 
 XLIV. Composition of A,djectives and Adverbs .... 216 
 
 XLV. Relation of German and English : Summary . . . 220 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 IX 
 
 PART III. SYNTAX. 
 
 LESSON »AGE 
 
 XLVI. The Artides 229 
 
 XLVII. Additional Remarks on Nouns 233 
 
 XLVIII. The Cases : Nominative. Genitive .... 238 
 
 XLIX. The Genitive (continued) . . . ' . . . . 241 
 
 L. The Dative . 244 
 
 LI. The. Dative (continued) 24S 
 
 ^ LII. The Accusative 251 
 
 ^ Prepositions with Cases. Summary .... 254 
 
 ^ LIII. Adjectives 255 
 
 _ LIV. Personal and Possessive Pronouns 260 
 
 . LV. Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns . . . 263 
 
 -- LVI. Relative and Indefinite Pronouns 267 
 
 LVII. Subject and Predicate. Tenses of the Indicative . .271 
 
 - LVIII. The Subjunctive. The Conditional 275 
 
 Modal Idioms. Summary . , 280 
 
 ^ LIX. The Infinitive ... 283 
 
 LX. Infinitive Equivalents. The Participles .... 287 
 
 LXI. Adverbs. Adverb Idioms^ Adverb Clauses . . . 293 
 
 Repetition: Summary 299 
 
 Idiom: Summary 300 
 
 Continuous Passages, English-German 302 
 
 Alphabetical List of Strong and Irregular Verbs . . . 312 
 
 Orthography: The New Rules ' . 321 
 
 Vocabularies 323 
 
 Appendix: Nouns; Prepositions 367 
 
 Index of Subjects 379 
 
 Index of Word-Forms 383 
 
 The German Script 38s 
 
PART I. 
 ORTHOGRAPHY AND ACCIDENCE. 
 
 ALPHABET. 
 
 I. The German alphabet consists, like the English, oi 
 twenty-six letters. 
 
 (a) The type in which German books are usually printed is a 
 variety of the Roman alphabet, and is that form of it which was 
 used by the earlier printers throughout Europe. The Roman char- 
 acter, called in Germany the "Latin," is used in scientific works, 
 and is gradually, though slowly, superseding the old "black-letter."* 
 
 GERMAN LETTERS. 
 
 ROMAN LETTERS. 
 
 GERMAN NAMES. 
 
 91, tt 
 
 A, a 
 
 ah. 
 
 S,6 
 
 B, b 
 
 bay. 
 
 ©, c 
 
 C,c 
 
 tsay. 
 
 %^ 
 
 D, d 
 
 day. 
 
 @, c 
 
 E, e 
 
 ay. 
 
 i.f 
 
 F,f 
 
 eff. 
 
 @, 9 
 
 G,g 
 
 gay. 
 
 §.1) 
 
 H, h 
 
 hah. 
 
 S.i 
 
 I, i 
 
 ee. 
 
 %i 
 
 J.J 
 
 yot. 
 
 * In like manner the Latin script (our ordinary English handwriting) is 
 coming into more general use, and is universally understood in Germany. 
 It may be left to the discretion of the teacher, to allow this to be used in 
 German exercises or to require the German script — at any rate until the 
 student has acquired some familiarity with the printed language. A copy of 
 the German script, with reading exercises, is given at the end of the book. 
 
 (0 
 
ALPHABET. 
 
 ^,i 
 
 K, k 
 
 kdh. 
 
 S, I 
 
 L,l 
 
 ell. 
 
 9R, lit 
 
 M, m 
 
 emm,^ 
 
 %n 
 
 N, n 
 
 enn. 
 
 0, 
 
 O, o 
 
 oh. 
 
 ^^P 
 
 P.P 
 
 pay. 
 
 O, q 
 
 Q.q 
 
 koo. 
 
 %v 
 
 R, r 
 
 err. 
 
 ®, f, 8 
 
 S, s 
 
 ess. 
 
 %,t 
 
 T,t 
 
 lay. 
 
 U, tt 
 
 U, u 
 
 00. 
 
 a?, ti 
 
 V,v 
 
 few. 
 
 as, hi 
 
 W, w 
 
 vay. 
 
 a^.y 
 
 X, X 
 
 ix. 
 
 ?).t) 
 
 Y.y 
 
 ipsilon. 
 
 S.J 
 
 Z, z 
 
 tset. 
 
 The so-called " round " g is used only at the end of a word or 
 of a syllable. 
 
 2. («) Besides the simple letters, the following modified 
 vowels are used : 
 
 Ste or % a De or h, 't He or U, ii 
 
 (J)) and the diphthongs : 
 
 Sli, at @t, ei @u, eu 9tu, au Steu or tu, au 
 
 (c) and the following consonantal compounds — digraphs 
 or trigraphs : ^, d, ttg, ^f, i^\ qu, fc^, ^ (fs for f§), tf), ^ (tj for jj). 
 
 Note. — For a reading exercise, see p. 6. Nouns begin with capitals' 
 
PRONUNCIATION. 3 
 
 PRONUNCIATION. 
 f Vowels. 
 
 3. The vowels are either short or long. 
 
 («) A vowel followed by a double consonant is short : 
 ^atte, fteHen, foUen. 
 
 (^) A vowel is usually short before two consonants, 
 but a long root-sound is retained before affixes. As : balb, 
 Sitb, bunt (short) ; but : roti=te, STcig^S, Sab=jat (long). 
 
 (c) A double vowel is long, with the same sound as 
 the simple long vowel, as, §aar, 95eet, 95oot. 
 
 (d) A vowel followed by t) in the same syllable is long; 
 as, 3If)n, fe^r, t£)m, @of)n. (See also tf), § 42.) 
 
 4. 9t, a, is pronounced like a va. father. Long a: gab, 
 nat)m, Stat. Short a : gaH, fann, rannte. 
 
 Note. — a has always this broad sound ; other sounds, as in English hat, 
 hate, etc., are to be carefully avoided. 
 
 5. (£, e, when long, sounds like English ey in they, or 
 long a in hale; as, getjt, SJfef)!, fef)r, §eer, and in the first 
 syllable of beten, geben, jeber. When short, it sounds like 
 our short e in set ; as, benn, {)ell, fd^neC, and in the first 
 syllable of ftellen, felten, rennen. 
 
 In unaccented final syllables it has the obscure sound 
 as in over — nearly the sound of u in but ; as in the last 
 syllable of lobte, lobten, SKatrofe, SKatrofen. 
 
 Note. — Be careful here, and especially in final e, to avoid the sound of 
 e in set ; also not to make final e silent, as in English lobe. 
 
 6. %, t, long, has the sound of i in machine, or ee in 
 seen ; as, mir, bir, tl)m, Sgel. Short i sounds like i in pin ; 
 
4 MODIFIED VOWELS. 
 
 as, bift, tjt, ft|en. The long sound of t is, however, generally 
 represented by the combination te ; as, bte, Stebe, ©teb. S 
 is never doubled. 
 
 7. D, 0, long, sounds like our in hold: SKoo^, tDOl)I, 
 fojen. Short, nearly like o in off; as, ®ott^ fott^ gto^en. 
 Never the sound of o in hop, do, done, etc. 
 
 8. U, u, long, has the sound of 00 in boot: gut, U|r, 
 Short, has the sound of 00 in good: §unb, fummett. Never 
 the sound of our u in but, muse, etc. 11 is never doubled. 
 
 9. ^, ^, is found only in a few foreign words and has 
 the same sound as i. But some prefer the sound of ii 
 (§ 13.) Ex., S;^rann, It)rifc^. 
 
 Modified Vowels. 
 
 10. The vowels 0, 0, u, and the diphthong au, are modi' 
 fied, that is, they are changed into a, 6, it, du, respectively. 
 This change was produced originally by an t sound in the 
 following syllable, which now often appears as e. For 
 instance: ^ctnb, ^anbe; ©o^n, @i)f)ne; gefunb, gefunberf 
 §au§, §au)er. 
 
 («) This vowel modification, _known as Umlaut, is a most 
 important process in German inflection and derivation, as 
 will appear hereafter. 
 
 ib) It was customary to express the modification of the vowel by 
 a small e, printed in the case of capitals after, and in the case of 
 small letters above, the original vowel. The small e was gradually 
 reduced to a couple of strokes or dots over the small letters, and 
 finally also over the capitals. According to the iBodern official 
 spelling, only this latter mode is to be used for indicating the 
 modified vowel. 
 
 \i.: 2le, ft, «f long, is between « in hak and (? in hc^n^. 
 
DIPHTHONfiS. i; 
 
 (Sage, ^Jragen, ma^en. Short a like the English e in set: 
 t)atte, SBader, 9Kanner. 
 
 12. De, £), 6, sounds like the French eu in feu, peu; 
 but the sound cannot be exactly represented in English. 
 Place the tongue as if to sound a in fate ; round the lips 
 as if to sound o in so. Long in : (S6f)ne, ©tronte, fc^fin. 
 Short in : f5nnen, offnen, Drter. 
 
 The English sounds in burn, burnt, are perhaps the nearest equivalents 
 for long and short o. 
 
 13. Ue, U, u, sounds like the French u in du,plus. This 
 sound also, cannot be represented in English. Place the 
 tongue as if to sound ee in see ; round the lips as if to 
 sound u in rule. Long in : §ute, @(i)uler, Ubel. Short in : 
 ^iitte, fitCen, S5ur[te. 
 
 14. Steu, 9Iu, ait, sounds like the English oi in oil, and is 
 always long : traumen, ^tauter, 95aume. 
 
 15. The modified vowels are never doubled; hence sub- 
 stantives which have a double vowel in the singular are 
 spelled with only one vowel, when modified by the ending 
 of the plural, or by a derivative suffix : @aal, <SaIe ; §aar, 
 ^ard^ert. 
 
 Note. — It is important to remember that only 0, 0, u, au, are capable 
 of this modification (Umlaut). 
 
 Diphthongs. 
 
 16. The diphthong au has been classed with the modi- 
 fied vowels. 
 
 The digraph ie is not properly a diphthong, and only represents 
 the long sound of i (§ 6). When occurring in unaccented final 
 syllables,, in a few foreign words, \ Jjgfpre % PQWds like y ; a?, 
 
 ^j)ani?n, %\m (as ? in Imar)^ 
 
6 CONSONANTS. 
 
 17. Sit, ot, is pronounced like at in aisle : Wax, ©atte, §otn. 
 
 18. ®t, et, is pronounced like at : Slet, !ein, §etterfett. 
 The old forms a^, e^, are now rarely used. 
 
 19. 2tu, QU, is pronounced like the English ou 'va. found: 
 ■0au§, laufett, ^erau§. 
 
 20. @u, eu, is pronounced like au, that is, like English oi 
 m oil: S^raume, ®aule, fauft ; @ule, I)eulen, treu. 
 
 All diphthongs are long. 
 
 EXERCISE IN VOWEL PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 (Consonants as in English^ 
 
 1. Monosyllables, an, Stvt, 2tft, SRaft, feil, nutt, SReft, gatt, 
 glui aSIatt, Dft, Su[t, D^r, ll^r, i^m, bife, bunn, !DI, tief, bidE, 
 nett, nal^, 3Kal^I, bumm, !ann, 6raun, fret, ^lee, SSier, ©[a§, treu, 
 au§, mu^, lief, trinf, %mx&, Soog, log, Baar, ^ern, toH, !autn, 
 §atn, ®i8, §eu, §ut, tnir, SRod, me^r, ber, bte, ba§, ben, benn. 
 
 2. PF5'/A accent on first syllable. ®nbe, aber, alter, rufen, 6aben, 
 Saber, D:pfer, Dfen, Sfen, unter, Uber, §iitte, Sautter, 3Jliitter, 
 jJaHe, bauen, Sautne, @fel, effen, Siebe, lieben, @ier, iibel, feller, 
 §5tte, §lttte, SK^rte, 9lebel, iSbe, au|er, guteS, bittet, ^atte, 3Jline, 
 il^nen, guHe, fetter, §aibe, l^oren, §5fe, freuen, geben, meine, tl^r, euer. 
 
 Note. — These exercises should be continued at will by the teacher, 
 until the sounds of the vowels and diphthongs are perfectly familiar. At 
 Dresent only examples should be used which present no difficulty in conso- 
 nants or in accentuation. Let the most difficult sounds (as b, ii) receive 
 special attention. 
 
 Consonants. 
 
 Only those sounds will be given which depart from the 
 usual English pronunciation. 
 
 21. 35, 6; %, b, at the end of a word, or of a syllable 
 preceding a consonant, terminate in the sounds of /, t, 
 
CONSONANTS. 7 
 
 respectively ; as, ai, ®ra6, get6, o6ge6en, gefiaBt ; ntttb, 5Ibenb, 
 ^nblein (as if ahp, milbt, etc.). 
 
 22. (S, c, which occurs as a simple consonant only in 
 foreign words, is pronounced like ts (German g), before 
 the vowels e, i, t), or a, 5; as, ©afar, ceberit, 6t)^3ru§, ^roce^ 
 (or ^Projefe). Elsewhere like k : as, gato, Sobej, Sultur'. 
 
 23- ®, Qt initial, and always when doubled, is pronounced 
 like g- in go, get ; as, gekn, ge=gen, gtagge. But at the end 
 of a word or syllable, or before another consonant, some 
 authorities give an aspirate sound (like d), § 33); others allow 
 this sound only in final -ig, retaining elsewhere the initial 
 g sound; others give the final g a sound like g! (§ 21). 
 There is great diversity of usage. 
 
 (a) When an inflection is added to a final g, some retain 
 the aspirate sound ; but other authorities give the initial g 
 sound. Let the examples be carefully practiced with the 
 teacher; as, Stog, ©atg, SKagb, Bog, Srug, trieg, ^omg-, 
 Sage, 6oIgett, 66ge, ^uge, ^rtege, Sonige. 
 
 {b) Both g and \ are fully heard before n ; as, ©ttobe, ^na6e. 
 
 24- §; \ is aspirated like the English h at the beginning 
 of a word or a syllable ; as, jammer, ,g)ol5, metfler'^aft, gaiil= 
 I}eit, gef)i3rfom. Following a vowel in the same syllable, it 
 marks a long vowel, but is not heard : |)i)[)e, fef)en, S'Jdfie, 
 ftatir, fa|. 
 
 25. S, i, sounds like,;' (consonant) xn.yon; as, ja, jeber. 
 
 26. 3?;, r, must be pronounced distinctly with the tongue, 
 especially when preceding another consonant : 3tab, SRutter, 
 Sort, ®e6urt. 
 
 Note. — Be careful not to change the vowel sounds before r, as in 
 English her, bird, fur, etc. As : \tX, §il't, ^wxi — each vowel clearly sounded. 
 
8 CONSONANTAL DIGRAPHS AND TRIGRAPHS. 
 
 27. @, f, §, has the sharp or hissing sound only wher 
 final, doubled, or preceding a consonant ; as, ^au@, bte§ 
 effett, Siaft. Elsewhere it has nearly the sound of z in zeal 
 or s in desire ; as, ©onne, §afe, S5e)"en, §ftufer, Oldfer, btefeS 
 
 28. ©, f, initial, before )f or t, is by the best authorities 
 pronounced with a sound nearly like sh (German fc§) 
 as, f^jrtngen, ©pule; fte^en, ©taC. 
 
 29. SS, t), occurs in German words mostly at the begin 
 ning and is there pronounced like the English /.• SBater 
 boU, bier. In foreign words, or following a vowel, it is 
 pronounced like the English v: SSettuS, ^JtoSember, btbi 
 biren, ©Habe ; but final, always like/: hrat), relatib. 
 
 30. 3B, tD, is pronounced like the English v ; excepi 
 after consonants, especially fc§ and 3, when it has a sounc 
 intermediate between English v and w : tDoHen, SSerf, ttiaS 
 jtotfc|en, jtoet, ©(^icamm, @(i)toefter. 
 
 31. 3£, J, has the sound of ks, even in the beginning 
 of a word : ^nij, 9ljt, §eje, 3£erje§, 26eno)3fjon. 
 
 32. 3r I, always has the sound oi ts: gu, Jte^eit, ^erjog 
 
 Consonantal Digraphs and Trig^aphs. 
 
 33. ©1^, ^, is a guttural aspirate, which has two diffe 
 rent sounds. It has a harsher, more guttural sound, wher 
 preceded by the vowels a, 0, u or the diphthong au; anc 
 a softer, more palatal sound, when preceded by any othei 
 vowels or diphthong, or by the liquids I, ni, It, r. Examples 
 of the rough guttural 6) : S5ac£), Sod), ^ud), aucC), S£o(^ter 
 Examples' of the soft palatal c^ : td^, reid], rted)en, fted)en, 
 Std)t, manc^er, Setc^, gurc^t. 
 
CONSONANTAL PIGRAPHS AND TRIGRAPHS. g 
 
 («) The aspirate sounds of g are similar, under like 
 conditions ; but with much diversity of usage. (See § 23.) 
 
 Note. — These guttural, or palatal, sounds of d) and g are highly charac 
 teristic of German, as their absence is characteristic of English. They musl 
 be carefully practiced. Especially care must be taken to avoid, on the ona 
 hand, the sibilant sound of sh (j(^), and, on the other, the closed sound of J. 
 Thus : Sod^, not SBofcf) nor SSntf ; ii^, not ifd) nor it ; ^itd^e, not JEtrf(i)e. 
 
 34. 6)% is pronounced like ks, when it forms part of the 
 root of the word, as : S)qcI;§, Suc^§, %v.<i)%, 2)ad)fe§, ^^ui^ff^i 
 2it(f)fe. But when the g is inflectional, or belongs to the 
 second part of a compound or derivative, or to another 
 word, d^ has the aspirate pronunciation. For instance : 
 ba§ '^a&j, gen. be§ Sac^e^, contracted Sac^S ; burd)=fuc£|en ; 
 §aug=c&eit ; 9?od^=[i^t ; icf)'g for id) e§. 
 
 35. d occurs only in the middle or at the end of a word 
 and is simply a double k, shortening the preceding vowel : 
 guriid, bucEen, britden, ftecEen. 
 
 36. ng has a nasal sound, as in the English sing, singer, 
 never as va. finger: jung, ftngen, ^Knge, Idnger. But in com- 
 pounds, when belonging to distinct words, n and g will be 
 pronounced separately ; as, an^gretfen, etn=ge:^en. 
 
 37. ^f, pf, is a combination of the sounds /.and _/! 
 Each must be heard, but with quick pronunciation to- 
 gether : «Pferb, «Pfeffer, 5pftug. 
 
 38. «pf), pl, has the sound of/: 5pf)iIofopt)te, $|3f)tlt;i)3. 
 
 39. Qu, qu, is pronounced like ftl), with the intermediate 
 sound of h), as § 30 : OueUe, Qual, Quartter. 
 
 40. @(^, fd§, is pronounced like the English sh: @c§iller, 
 @cp|e, fijraukrt, gtfd), raufd^en. 
 
lO DOUBLED VOWELS AND CONSONANTS. 
 
 41. §j pronounced ss, is written always instead of f§ at 
 the end of a word. When not final, § stands after a long 
 vowel or a diphthong ; the double ff after a short vowel 
 (§ 3, a) ; but ^ always before a consonant. This rule is im- 
 portant in inflected and derivative forms. As (long): guJ3, 
 giiBe; m, fliefee; (short): glufe, gtiiffe; l)affcn, but f)afetc, 
 f)a^tid^ ; (long changed to short) : ftte^en, floffe ; (short to 
 long) : effen, afie, etc. 
 
 Note. — In printing or writing German witli Roman (English) letters, % 
 is generally represented by ss, as Fuss, Fiisse ; but sz is sometimes used. 
 
 42. %^, t^, has always the sound of t, never of i/z. Initial 
 tf) is used to mark the long sound of a following vowel 
 when not otherwise indicated ; as, %i)at, tf)un, Si^on. 
 
 Note. — Otherwise, the use of tl) is now restricted to a few proper names 
 and foreign words ; as, iBert^a, Sat^eber, K^ee (see p. 322). 
 
 43. ^, pronounced is, stands for gj after a short vowel ; 
 as, §i|e (fieijen), 5pia|, pIo|Ittf). A few foreign words have 
 
 35 ; as, (gftj^c 
 
 Remark.— The digraphs, except as expressly mentioned, count as single 
 letters. Hence before d), fc^, ng J)^, a vowel may be long or short. 
 
 Doubled Vowels and Consonants. 
 
 . 44. Doubled vowels are pronounced as long vowels. 
 Examples : Soot, <Saat, 95eet. 
 
 Note. — Doubled vowels are not now so much used as formerly (see 
 p. 321). For the modification of doubled vowels, see § 15. 
 
 45. Doubled consonants are pronounced like simple 
 consonants. They serve mostly the purpose of indicating 
 the short quantity of the preceding vowel. Examples : 
 bitten, renneit, ttenrt (compare teen). 
 
 46. But vowels or consonants, apparently doubled, which 
 belong to distinct parts of compound, derivative, or inflected 
 words, must be kept distinct in pronunciation. A<; ■ 
 
FOREIGN WORDS. II 
 
 6e=erbtgen, ®enugt'^u=ung, Slnie=e ; 3I6=6iIb, an=nel)men, t)cr=ra= 
 ten, SOfit=tag. 
 
 (a) Occasionally by composition or inflection triple letters may 
 occur. As: 33ett=tud^, ©titt4eben, ©(^icimtn=meifter ; 3rrmee=en. 
 
 Remark. — In general, letters belonging to different word-elements are 
 kept distinct in pronunciation, and do not affect quantity; as (compounds). 
 
 Foreign Words. 
 
 47. Foreign words, even if they are words in daily use, 
 have preserved more or less of their foreign pronuncia- 
 tion. For example : 
 
 («) ® has frequently preserved its French sound, as in : ©enie, 
 logieren, Soge, and some others (like z in azure) . 
 
 (6) ^ likewise has preserved its French sound in : journal, 
 ^aloufie, and a few others (like z in azure). 
 
 (c) (S§, in words derived from Greek, is generally pronounced 
 like^, as in : g^aralter, 6^or, 6^rift,_6^roni{. Sometimes it has the 
 aspirate sound, as in : 61^trurg, 6{)emie ; and in words from the 
 French the sound of sh : gl^ef, S^iffre, S^arabe, S^auffee, 6f)ar)3te. 
 
 (if) t before unaccented t preceding an accented vowel in 
 words derived from Latin, is pronounced like j (fy) : (Station, 
 ^Patient, SSenettaner. The corresponding words give the sound s^ in 
 Enghsh. 
 
 (e) Other foreign sounds will be learned by experience. In 
 general, both in pronunciation and in accent, foreign words are 
 much less fully naturalized in German than in English. 
 
 EXERCISE IN CONSONANT PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 I. Monosyllables ; the initial Consonants, ©etft, ©netft, 5?naH, 
 3tnn, S'l'^I/ '^^^, ©0^, toenn, h)o, boH, %\ioX, t^un, bor, toa§, ja, 
 ^a^r, ^jfiff, fd^nett, @ier, ging, jel^n, ©^srung, ©taE, foil, rauf), ro^, 
 quer, Dunl, ©trol^, @)3ur ; from Greek : g^or, Sl^rift; from French ; 
 
2. The final Consonants, ok, 33ab, S^ag, fog, £od^, auc^, id^, 
 .^rieg, STet^, §oIj, Dd^§, taugt, 2:alg, ©^tlb, ^aI6, ipferb, ©rab, 
 aiot, rot, ©ieg, fic^, fta^ <a:|3e(I, ®a^, ©c^erj, milb, glei^, SBad&S, 
 3u^§, bod^, bid^, faugt, l^oc^, ®k§, gteb. 
 
 3. Promiscuous German words ; accent first syllable, geben, 
 iCoc^ter, Xi>&iiix, SSater, SBdter, SSetter, SSetter, effen, Sefen, tro^en, 
 y^)ringen, ftel^en, trogen, fragte, ®id^tung, gegen, @nabe, ^nabe, 
 jeber, jjinger, alfo, %^xi.vx., Ic^tung, gud^fe, junger, SC^iire, 3;i^aten, 
 l^ei^en, l^etjen, jogen, f(3red^en, lefen, gie^en, fd^erjen. 
 
 4. Foreign; accent as marked, gitro'ne, ©a'ge, ©ente', 9iation', 
 national', gl^emie', Sournal', ^afoufie', ^atienf, 6|ro'ni!, 6]^a= 
 rafter, Dfficter', gl^ara'be, goncert'. 
 
 Accentuation. 
 
 48. In words of more than one syllable, a greater stress 
 is laid on one syllable than on another, and, in compound 
 words, one word is pronounced with greater force than 
 another. This greater or less stress of voice is called the 
 accent. 
 
 49. A syllable may have the full (principal or tonic) 
 iccent, or a subordinate or secondary accent, or be unac- 
 cented. We give only the most important rules : 
 
 50. In German words of more than one syllable (not com- 
 pounds), the full accent is laid on that syllable which con- 
 tains the root, prefixes and suffixes being unaccented, or 
 having only a secondary accent. For instance : lie'Oen, 
 geltebt', tteb'Uc^, cin'bern, beran'bern. 
 
 51. Excepted are (a): the negative prefix un; as, un'treu, 
 Un'ftnn (with a few exceptions). Also the prefixes ant, erj, ur ; 
 as, Stnf toort, ©rs'engel, Ur'Iaub. 
 
 (V) The noun suffix -ei ; as, ©d^etd^elei', 3«wberet' ; in con- 
 sequence of its foreign origin (§ 56). 
 
ACCENTUATION OF FOREIGN WORDS. 1 3 
 
 52. The use of the secondary accent, or accents, must be 
 learned by practice. Unaccented are, in general, all endings of 
 inflection, and prefixes and suffixes whose vowel is (short) e ; as, 
 ©efa^'ren, gefal^r'lid^^ ; gefa^r'li(j^'er, ^o'nigV, etc. 
 
 53. In compound words, each component word receives 
 its proper accentuation ; but the principal accent is laid on 
 the determining component ; that is, generally, in com- 
 pound substantives, adjectives and verbs, on the first 
 component ; in other parts of speech, on the second. As : 
 aSerf'seug, @c^ut't)au§, lieb'retd^, eI)r'to§, ban!'fagen, teit'nct)= 
 men, Ie'6en§=(uftig, 5EQ'fd^en=tud;)er ; berg^an', ba=mtf, h)0=bon', 
 ju^fol'ge. (Lessons xxxix., xlii., xliv.) 
 
 54. The separable prefixes, in compound verbs and their 
 corresponding nouns, etc., form proper compounds, and 
 always take the principal accent ; the inseparable prefixes 
 leave the accent on the root : au§'gef)en, an'fangen, Sln'faK, 
 an'faaig ; 6efte'f|en, entloffen, bermif'fen, ®e6raud£)', gebrfiuff)'* 
 tid). (Lessons xxviii., xxix.) 
 
 55. In general, accentuation in German is much more logical 
 and simple than in English. The few exceptions are easily learned 
 by experience. Examples are : alt=ein',alt=ma^'ttg (compounds of 
 aa=), leben'btg (from le'benb), toa'^rl^afttg (from toal^r'^aft), and 
 a few others. In a few words, a difference of meaning is distin- 
 guished by change of accent ; as, ba'6ei and ba6et' ; bar'utn and 
 barum' — as will be learned hereafter. 
 
 Accentuation of Foreign Words. 
 
 56. Foreign words usually take the accent on the last 
 syllable, unless they have become quite germanized : SRe= 
 ligton', Stbbofat', SKufif^, aKat^ematif, ©tubenf, JBibttot^ef, 
 Station', SIKetobie'. / 
 
57' But the accent is laid on the penultimate in : 
 a3ota'ittf, ©ramma'ttf, SKedja'nt!, So'gtf, &t^it, 5profef'for, 
 S)o£'tor, S^araf'ter, and others. 
 
 58. Some foreign substantives shift their accent when 
 derivative or inflectional suffixes are added. For instance : 
 national', melo'bifd), ^rofeffo'ren, S)D!to'ren, S^arafte're. 
 
 59. Verbs ending in -ieren (-iren), from French, or 
 formed by French analogy, keep the accent on the syllable 
 -ier (-it) throughout all forms ; as, ftubie'ren, ftubiert'. 
 
 Note. — The general principle is, that foreign words retain the same 
 accent as in their original language. As most of them are from French with 
 final accent, or from Latin or Greek with an inflectional syllable dropped, 
 the accent is, generally, on the last syllable. The same principle will also 
 generally explain the exceptions to this rule, as well as the change of accent 
 when suffixes are added (as above). But there are many irregularities. 
 
 60. In some cases foreign words are completely naturalized, and 
 then take German accent, as ^Jenfter (La.tm, /mesira) . But, in 
 general, foreign words retain their distinctive accent, and are thus 
 not so fully naturalized in German as in English. On the other 
 hand, they are far less numerous, and are, for the most part, easily 
 recognized. As a general rule, it may be added that they are 
 usually words which, being derived from a common source,'have 
 the same or nearly the same form in German and in English. ' 
 
 General Remark. — The foregoing rules on Pronunciation and Accentu- 
 ation aim to give only the simplest and most general directions. No written 
 rules can here take the place of skillful oral instruction and careful practice. 
 Let it be remarked, by way of caution to both student and teacher, that a 
 good pronunciation, if not acquired at first, is far less likely to be ever 
 acquired afterwards. This subject should continue to receive the most care- 
 ful attention, with every lesson. Of course it is not implied that such rules 
 should be studied endre, before the grammar proper is begun. 
 
 EXERCISE IN ACCENTUATION. 
 
 Note. — As the principles of accentuation depend on the significant form 
 of words, of which the beginner is as yet ignorant, the formation is indicated 
 
USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. 1 5 
 
 in the following examples. These principles should be carefully illustrated 
 and applied hereafter, with each lesson. 
 
 1. German words with prefix ; accent root. SSeruf, @m^fang, 
 (Srfa|, aSerluft, entgtng, mi^Iang, erfut)r, berlor, gelang, ©efcraud^, 
 ©eleit, jem^, SSertag, geliebt, be[teKt, berftanb. 
 
 2. German words with suffix or suffixes ; accent root. 3tc^tung, 
 e£)rlid^, teben, lebenb, SCugenb, artig, fur^tfam, g^retfjeit, SSofinung, 
 aSo^nungen, fibung, Ubungen, reinlic^, Steinlti^feit, finfter, g:infter= 
 nt§, ^onigS, ^onige, ©o^neS, ©o^ne, 9tebelg, guteS, fc^oneS, 
 fd^onereS, furjeS, lurjefte, grei^eit, g^reunbf^aft, freunbf^aftlid^, 
 banlbar, 2)anf6arleit, Iteben, Itebten, g^rebel, frebel^aft. 
 
 3. German words with prefix, and suffix or suffixes; accent 
 root, berufen, emjjfangen, erfe|en, tierloren, entgef)en, 3«legung, 
 3erlegvtngen, jerrtfjen, geliebte, ©rfa^rung, ©rfa^rutigen, gelegen, 
 ©elegentieit, ©elegen^eiten, Derfte^en, SSerftanbnig, Serftanbniffe, 
 t)erf4itoenben/ berfc^toenberifc^, grf^sarntg, (grfjjarmfje, gebraud^en, 
 gebrau(^lic^, ©ebrauc^Iic^feit, beerbigen. 
 
 4. Compounds. 3ln=fang, an=fangen, 33ei=ftanb, bei=fte^en, 
 3lu§=gang, aug=gel^en, Dft=tDtnb, 9Jtunb=art, 3"=f"nft, W,--ma&jt, 
 ©onnen=fd^ein, @rD^=mutter, gro^=mutterIic^, auf=fte^en, auf=geftan= 
 ben, 3l)3fel=baum, 2Ij)feI=baume, Iteben§=tourbtg, Sieben§=lt)urbtg!eit 
 [Adverbs) ba=bei, J)er=tior, ^ter=mit, 'oox-nhtx, 3u=tt)iber. 
 
 5. Foreign; accent as marked, ©olbaf, ©tubenf, ftubte'ren, 
 ftubterf, regierf, Stegitnenf, $oef, Sec'tor, Secto'ren, ^armonie', 
 g^ami'Iie, Sari'uS, SKa'rtuS, aJlarie', ©mi'Iie, Station', national', 
 3lationaIitaf. 
 
 Use of Capital Letters. 
 
 61. With a capital initial are written the first word of a sen- 
 tence, or of a direct quotation, and usually also the first word of 
 each line in poetry. Also : 
 
 62. All nouns, and words used as nouns ; as, ber ®ute (ad- 
 jective), the good (man) ; ein Steifmber (participle), a traveler 
 
1 6 USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. 
 
 ba§ Strefien (infinitive), the effort, etc. Such uses are much 
 more common in German than in English. 
 
 63. The pronouns of the second person in epistolary corre- 
 spondence ; and, always, the pronouns of the third person plural 
 when used for the second person (except the reflexive fid^). 
 
 64. Adjectives and ordinal numerals after proper names : 
 jjriebrid^ ber ©ro^e, Frederick the Great; §etnrid^ ber SBieite, 
 Henry the Fourth. 
 
 {a) Adjectives and pronouns in titles : ba§ ^oniglid^e SKufeum, 
 the Royal Museum ; (Seine SJlojeftdt, His Majesty. 
 
 (b) Adjectives derived from names of persons and places, 
 having a restricted, personal or local meaning : bie ©rimmyd^en 
 3Jlav(^en, the Grimm stories ; ber ^filner !5)om, the Cologne cathedral- 
 
 (c) But adjectives derived from names of nations and 
 countries are to be spelled with a small initial : ^jreupfc^, 
 Prussian ; englifc^, English. Except when used as nouns ; as, 
 beutfc^, German; but ber 3)eutfd^e, the German. ^ 
 
 65. All other words are spelled with a small initial. Nouns, 
 when used adverbially, for instance : tnorgenS, in the morning; 
 abenbS, in the evening; but beS aJtorgenS, be§ SlbenbS (as nouns 
 with the article). 
 
 Also indefinite pronouns, as, tVmn%, something ; nxd)t§, nothing, 
 etc. But ettoaS ®ute8, something good (the adj. as noun). 
 
 66. When capital 31, D, U are modified, the modification is to 
 be marked by two dots or strokes : 3t, 6, ti, and no longer by a 
 following e ; ^tnter, not 9lemter, as formerly. 
 
 The foregoing rules apply, of course, equally to the printed 
 and the written language. See footnote to p. i. 
 
 Smphasis. 
 
 67. The emphatic force of our italic letters is expressed in 
 
 German by printing the letters apart (gef^errt) ; as, e t n SBort, 
 
 one word. 
 
 Note. — The marks oi punctuation are, in general, the same as in English. 
 But the punctuation is usually stronger, especially in the more frequent use 
 of the comma, to mark subordinate clauses, etc. ; and, generally, more than 
 in Engliiih, to indicate the grammatical construction. 
 
HYPHEN. 17 
 
 Division of Syllables. 
 
 68. Syllables are, in general, divided according to pronuncia- 
 tion. The following points may be noted ; 
 
 (a) A single consonant between vowels goes with the latter ; 
 as, tre=ten, le^fen, ©e=gen. 
 
 Note. — Even words like fe=]^en (§ 24) will be thus divided, though § 
 properly belongs with the foregoing vowel. 
 
 b) Two consonants, or double consonants, between vowels will 
 be divided; as, greun=be, §er=ren, ^ar=ter, ftel=len, ^a]'\tx, 
 feg=nen. But not a mute and a liquid ; as, 3l=J)riI'. 
 
 . ^ VC 
 
 {c) The signs, c^,,yd^, J5l^, iij, ^ are treated as single consonants : 
 Io=d^en, 3l=f^e^t iDr=t]^o=gra=^)^te'' M=^en. 
 
 Note. — In other compound consonants, there is diversity of usage ; as, 
 SC«<)fel or at)=fri ; Sitosfpe or Sno8.})e ; ifa«flen or ^a8=ten ; Sra=(3ett or S.xaU 
 gen, etc. 
 
 d) But compotinds, and derivatives with consonant suffixes, 
 will be divided according to their constituent parts. As : 3tug= 
 ii^jfel, bar(fau§, SonnerS^'tag, i3oH=enben, SRog=($en, ^rd^^Iein. 
 
 Note. — TJhie chief application of these rules is in the division of words 
 })etween two lines. In doubtful cases, such division is best avoided. 
 
 The Hyphen (Sinbcfirift). 
 
 6g. The division of the syllables of a word between two lines 
 is marked, as in English, by the hyphen. The hyphen is also 
 used to mark special compounds, usually proper names, titles, 
 and phrase-compounds ; also compounds of unusual length, and 
 sometimes for sake of distinction ; but not in ordinary compounds. 
 As : 3ung=©ttIImg, Dber=3taK«n/ ^at[erIi(i^=^ontgItc]^ ; baS Stetts 
 bid^=ein ; Dberlanbe§geri(^tg=ipraftbent, ^rb^SlxtiJen (dist. from er= 
 btiitfen), etc. For a special use of the Hyphen, see § 392. 
 
1 8 APOSTROPHE. 
 
 The Apostrophe. 
 
 70. The apostrophe is used to mark the omission of a letter ; 
 as, id; lieb' tl^n, tft'S (for i^ lieBe t^n, tft eS) — especially often in 
 poetry, as ©renabier', ^eil'ge (for ©renabiere, l^eiligc)^ etc. The 
 apostroptte is not to be used with genitives in -§; as, ^arlg, 
 SllejanberS; but will take the place of -§ where this cannot be 
 added; as, 35emD§t^ene§' SReben. It is written also in the more 
 unusual contractions of the article, as, brad^'S (ba§) 3io§Iein ; 
 um'g (be§) §tmmelg toillen, etc. ; but not in the regular contrac- 
 tions with prepositions, au§, etc. See § 191. 
 
 REVIEW EXERCISE. 
 
 3trmut tft !eine ©d^anbe. 
 Poverty is no shame. 
 
 ©ebutb' iibertDin'bet alle§. 
 Patience overcomes all. 
 
 SJJor'genftun^be ^at ©olb im SKunbe. 
 Morning-hour has gold in the moutb- 
 
 SKiiffiggang' tft aKer Softer 3ln'fang. 
 Idleness is of all vices beginning. 
 
 SSeitn ©i'genftnn^ tft !ein ©etuinn'. 
 In [the] obstinacy is no profit. 
 
 SBtHft bu immer toeiter fd^toeifenf 
 Wilt thou ever further roam ? 
 
 ©ie^, ba§ ©ute liegt fo nal) ; 
 See, the good lies so near ; 
 
 Serne nur ba§ ®IM ergreifen. 
 
 Learn only [the] happiness (to) seize, 
 
 ®enn ba§ ©liicE ift immer ha. 
 
 For [the] happiness is always there. 
 
THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. IQ 
 
 LESSON I. 
 Declension. 
 
 71. («) There are in German two numbers — the Singular 
 and the Plural. 
 
 {&) Four cases : — the Nominative, the case of the sub- 
 ject ; the Genitive, representing, besides the English pos- 
 sessive, most of the relations expressed by the preposition 
 of; the Dative, the case of the indirect object, often ex- 
 pressed by io or for; and the Accusative, the case of the 
 direct object. 
 
 {c) Three genders, — the Masculine, the Feminine, and 
 the Neuter. But the gender of nouns does not in all cases 
 depend upon their meaning. 
 
 The Definite Article. 
 
 72. (a) The definite article is declined as follows : 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 masc. 
 
 fern. 
 
 neut. 
 
 masc. fern, neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ber 
 
 bie 
 
 bag, the 
 
 bie, the 
 
 Gen. 
 
 beg. 
 
 ber 
 
 beg, of the 
 
 ber, of the 
 
 Dat. 
 
 bem 
 
 ber 
 
 bein,/(' the 
 
 ben, to the 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ben 
 
 bie 
 
 'ia^,' the 
 
 bie, the 
 
 {b) The following remarks are important : 
 
 1. The declension, horizontally, exhibits mainly the distinction oi gender; 
 vertically, the distinction of case. The forms should be learned perfectly, 
 both ways, and the following points should be noted : 
 
 2. In Gender : The definite article has in the nominative singular a 
 distinct form for each gender. Hence these forms are conveniently used 
 to mark the gender of nouns; as, ber %i\&i (masc), the table; bie jEiute 
 (fem.), the ink; bo8 Suc^ (neut.), the book. 
 
20 LESSON I. 
 
 In the genitive and dative singular the masculine and the neuter have 
 the same form ; and all the genders have the same form in the plural. 
 
 3. In Case : The masculine singular alone has a distinct form for each 
 case. Elsewhere the accusative has the same form as the nominative ; and 
 in the feminine singular the genitive and the dative have the same form. 
 
 Note. — Some of the forms of the definite article suffer abbreviation in 
 colloquial or poetic language — especially '8 for baS — less frequently 'n for 
 ben. For the contraction of the article with prepositions, see § 191. 
 
 Declension of Nouns. 
 
 73. (a) There are two declensions of nouns in German, 
 the strong- and the weak. Nouns which form their plural 
 in en or n are of the weak declension ; all others are of 
 the strong. 
 
 Note. — The sirong- is the older and more complete declension ; the 
 weaialatei form. The two are usually defined by the genitive singular; 
 but the definition by the plural is more convenient for feminine nouns. 
 
 (6) Feminine nouns remain unchanged in the singular. 
 
 (c) In all other nouns, the strong declension forms the- 
 genitive singular in e§ or §; the weak, in en or n. 
 The other cases of the singular are known from the 
 genitive. 
 
 ((f) The dative plural of all nouns ends in n. Othei 
 cases of the plural are like the nominative. 
 
 (e) Hence, generally, to decline a German noun, we must 
 know the genitive singular and the nominative plural. 
 
 Note. — As will appear hereafter, the following points are important in 
 the declension of nouns : 
 
 1. The gender — this is of capital importance. 
 
 2. The ending — which sometimes determines the declension. 
 
 3. The number of syllables — whether monosyllable or not. 
 
 4. The accent — as marking foreign words. 
 
 5. The root vowel — whether modified (if a, 0, u, ou). 
 
STRONG DECLENSION — CLASS L 21 
 
 The strong Declension. 
 
 74. Nouns declined by the strong declension are sub- 
 divided into three classes. 
 
 (a) The ^rsi class contains nouns which take no addi- 
 tional termination in the nominative plural. (Sometimes 
 called the contracted form of the strong declension.) 
 
 (b) The second class contains nouns which take in the 
 nominative plural the termination e. (Sometimes called 
 \.\ie. primary form of the strong declension.) 
 
 {c) The ihird class contains nouns which take in the 
 nominative plural the termination er. (Sometimes called 
 the enlarged form of the strong declension.) 
 
 Each of these classes will now be more particularly de- 
 scribed. 
 
 Xirgt Class (Comtrm^A J?orm,) of the Strong Declension. 
 
 75. {a) To the first class of the strong declension belong 
 all masculine and neuter nouns ending in el, em, en, er, d^en, 
 letn, fel ; all neuter nouns beginning with the prefix ge and 
 ending in e;/and one masculine in e, ber Safe, the cheese.\ 
 
 (b) Here belong also, by the ending -en, infinitives used as 
 (neuter) nouns, including also the contracted fein, t^un, and such 
 as ^anbeln, rubern (§ 2 14), — always then written with capitals. 
 
 76. In the singular the genitive adds §, ; other cases, like 
 the nominative. The nominative plural adds no ending ; 
 but about 20 masculines* in el, en, er,/£nd the neuter "ba^ 
 Mofter, the cloister, modify the root vowel. The dative 
 plural adds n, except to nouns ending in n. 
 
 * See Appendix. 
 
22 LESSON I. 
 
 77. The two feminines, bte 5Kutter, the mother-, and hie 
 SlodElter, //^^ daughter, form their plurals after this declen- 
 sion : aJJiitter, Soc^ter; but, like other feminines, remain 
 unchanged in the singular. 
 
 78. Nouns ending in c[)en or tein are diminutive deriva- 
 tives, and are always neuter ; as, ba§ 9Kabct)cn, the girl 
 (from bte a>Jagb, the maid); bag graulein, the young lady, 
 Miss (from bte grau, the woman). 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Singular. 
 N. ber ©:t)aten, the spade. ber 3Sater, the father. 
 
 G. 't)t%<S))^fx's.iV&,of the spade. 'S)iS,'^aXtx%, of the father.* 
 D. bem ©)3aten, to the spade.- bem SSater, /<? the father* 
 A. ben ©jjaten, ^/4« spade. ben Sater, the father. 
 
 Plural. 
 N. bie ©JJaten, M^ spades. bte SBater, the fathers. 
 
 G. ber ©)3aten, «/" 2'/^^ J?>afl5?j. 'iitx'^a.ttx, of the fathers. 
 D. ben (S!paten, ^0 Y/^s spades. ben SSatern, j^^ the fathers. 
 A. bie ©Jjaten, Mi? spades. « bie SSater, the fathers. 
 
 Singular. 
 N. ba§ ©emalbe, the painting. bie SKutter, M^ mother. 
 G. "bt^ ^tmaVi)i%, of the painting, 'tiix'^vi.iix, of the mother. 
 D. bem ©emalbe, /'o the painting, ber SO'lutter, ^o />^^ mother. 
 A. ba§ ©emalbe, the painting. bte 9Kutter, i?/4^ mother. 
 
 Plural. 
 N. bie ©emalbe, the paintings. bie iKiitter, i^/^i? mothers. 
 G. ber ©emalbe, of the paintings, ber 3Jlutter, (J/" ^/^^ mothers. 
 D. ben ©emalben, ^«? the paintings, ben 3!Jlilttern, /^ //%<? mothers. 
 A. bie ©emalbe, the paintings. bie SHiitter, M^ mothers. 
 
 * With names of living things, the genitive is often translated by the 
 English possessive, /As father^s, etc. And the preposition is not always 
 required in translating the dative, I 
 
STRONG DECLENSION CLASS I. 2$ 
 
 Decline, v^thout vowel change in the plural : ber Stmertf aitcr, 
 i/te American; ter ®nglanber, the Englishman; ber Slbler, the 
 eagle; ber^Jlaler, the painter ; ber Secret, the teacher ; ber ©dottier, 
 the scholar, pupil ; ber §immel, the sky, heaven; ba§ 93aumd^en, 
 the little tree; ber S^Iugel, the wing; ba§ jjenfter, the window. 
 
 ^ Decline, modifying the vowel : ber Sider, the field; ber ®ar= 
 im, the garden ; ber 2l^3fel, the apple; ber SSogel, the bird; ber 
 ?KanteI, the cloak; ber Sruber, the brother; baS ^lofter, the 
 cloister. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 ( The words are found in the foregoing Lesson.) 
 
 I. 5Der ©^jaten beS 93ruberg. 2. Sa§ ©emalbe beS 3SaterS. 3. 
 S)ie Se^rer ber 2lmeri!aner. 4. ®te S^Jjfel be§ ©artenS. 5. ®em 
 SSater beg (SnglanberS. 6. Sen SSriibern beS (Sd^iilerS. 7. S)ie 
 g^enfter beS ^tofterg. 8. 5Der fjliigel be§ SSogelg. . 9. ®te !Kutter 
 ber SJlab^en. 10. ®ie SlJiantel ber SCoc^ter. 11. 25te t)3fel be§ 
 Sautn^eng. 12. ^n ben ((/<2/w^) ©arten ber Stmerifctner. 13.3" 
 bent Slofter — in ben ^toftern. 14. S)te Sel^rer beg g^rauleing! 
 
 I. The pupils of the teacher. 2. The paintings of the Amer- 
 ican. 3. The apples of the garden. 4. To the gardens of the 
 Englishmen, 5. To the birds of (the)* heaven. 6. To the 
 teacher of the scholars. 7. The wings of the birds — of the 
 eagles. 8. The windows of the cloister — ofjhe cloisters. 9. 
 The mother of the girl — of the girls. 10. To the teacher's 
 4aughters. 11. Of the girl's cloak — of the cloaks of the girls. 
 32. The apples of the little trees in (with dative) the gardens 
 of the Enghshmen. 
 
 Note. — The genitive, especially of names ot- persons or living things 
 [possessive genitive), will often'precede the governing noun, and then excludes 
 the article ; but only when no ambiguity may arise'thereby ; as, beS SJJabdjenS 
 
 abutter, for bie SKutter beS iKabii)en«, etc. 
 
 * In the Exercises, (-) indicates that the equivalent should be supplied ; 
 [-], that it should be omitted. "" 
 
24 
 
 79- 
 
 
 
 LESSON 
 
 II. 
 
 
 
 LESSON 11. 
 
 De 
 
 clensloi 
 
 a of the Indefinite Article 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 N. 
 
 ein 
 
 eine 
 
 ein, an, a. 
 
 G. 
 
 eineg 
 
 einer 
 
 eineS, of an, of a. 
 
 D. 
 
 einem 
 
 einer 
 
 einem, to an, to a. 
 
 A. 
 
 einen 
 
 - eine 
 
 ein, an, a. 
 
 The indefinite article, being originally the numeral ein, 
 one, can have no plural. 
 
 8o. The declension of the indefinite article differs from that 
 of the definite article (Less. I.) in having only two forms, instead 
 of three, in the nominative singular — the masculine and neuter 
 having no ending. Thus the indefinite article does not here, 
 like the definite, distinguish the gender of masculine or neuter 
 nouns. 
 
 Note. — Like the definite article, the indefinite also, but more rarely, 
 suffers abbreviation in colloquial or poetic language ; as, 'ne for eine, 'nett 
 for etnen, etc. 
 
 Second Class (Trxmary Form) of the Strong Declension. 
 
 8i. To the second class of the strong declension belong 
 most masculine, and some neuter, monosyllabic nouns * ; 
 most masculines and neuters of more than one syllable 
 (not in Class I.) ; and, in the plural, a few feminines end- 
 ing in ni^ (nt§) and fat, and about thirty feminine mono- 
 syllables.* Feminine nouns all remain unchanged in the 
 singular. 
 
 82. This class includes the majority of masculine nouns, — 
 and especially nearly all masculine monosyllables, — and is 
 the largest and most heterogeneous of all the declensions. The 
 
 * See Appendix. 
 
STRONG DECLENSION. — CLASS IL 2$ 
 
 neuter monosyllables are about thirty-five, besides eight in -r. 
 The feminine monosyllables are all primitive German words. 
 
 83. The form of the declension is as follows : 
 
 (a) The genitive singular adds e§, the dative e, the accu- 
 sative being like the nominative. The nominative plural 
 adds e. Nouns ending in m§ double the § (ff) before all 
 endings (§41). 
 
 (6) Monosyllables, if masculine, will in the plural modify 
 the root-vowel generally ; if feminine, always ; if neuter, 
 never.* In words of more than one syllable the root- vowel 
 is generally left unmodified. 
 
 84. As will appear hereafter, compound nouns whose 
 last component is a monosyllable, count as monosyllables 
 in declension; as, ber 9lpfeI6aum, the apple-tree ; plural, 
 9lpfet6aitme ; ba§ SSfirterbud^, the dictionary ; plural, 9B6rter= 
 biicf)er, etc. 
 
 85. The e of the genitive (eg) and of the dative singular 
 may be omitted, when euphony permits, especially in words 
 of more than one syllable. The omission is more usual in 
 conversation and in familiar writing than in formal style. 
 
 Note. — It is the regular omission of this e, as well as of the ending of 
 the plural, that distinguishes the first class (or contracted form) of nouns. 
 At first the omission was purely euphonic. Like examples will be found 
 § 94; in adjectives, §§ 139, 150 ; in verbs, § 214, etc. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Singular. 
 
 N. ber ©D^n, the son. bag 3a^r, the year. 
 
 G. be§®ol^ne§, (y^if-ww. biS '^a^xiS, 0/ the year. 
 
 D. bent ©o^ne, to the son. bem ^a^re, to the year. 
 
 A. ben ©ol^n, the son. bag %<i!C}X, the year. 
 
 * But see § 105. 
 
26 
 
 LESSON n. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. bie ©o^ne, the sons. 
 
 G. ber ©D^ne, of the sons. 
 
 D. ben ©bl^nen, to the sons. 
 
 A. bie ©o^ne, the sons. 
 
 bie Sa^re, the years. 
 ber ^a^re, of the years. 
 ben Qa^ren, to the years, 
 bie '^oiiixi, the years. 
 
 ^er 33tonat, the month. 
 
 
 !Sa8 ^inbcrniJ 
 
 \, the obstacle. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 N. bergjlonat. 
 
 
 ba§ §inbermg. 
 
 G. be§3Jlonat§, 
 
 
 be§ §inbemiffeS, 
 
 D. bem aJJonat;. 
 
 
 bem §inbermffe. 
 
 A. ben SJJonat. 
 
 
 ba§ §inberni§. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 N. bie 9}?onate, 
 
 
 bie §inb 
 
 erniffe. 
 
 G. ber SKonate, 
 
 
 ber ^inbernifje. 
 
 D. ben SJlonaten, 
 
 
 ben |)inberniffen. 
 
 A. bie SWonate. 
 
 
 bie §inberniffe. 
 
 Feminines : 
 
 
 
 
 !Sfe ^ani, the hand. 
 
 
 !Sfe Sui), the cow. 
 
 N. bie §anb, bie §anbe. 
 
 bie ^u^. 
 
 bie m^i. 
 
 G. ber §anb, ber §anbe. 
 
 ber ^u^. 
 
 ber ^ii^e. 
 
 D. ber §anb, ben §anben. 
 
 ber ^u^. 
 
 ben Riii)m, 
 
 A. bie §anb. bie §anbe. 
 
 bie ^u^. 
 
 bie ^ii^e. 
 
 With the indefinite article 
 
 : 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 ein 9reunb, a fHend. ®ln<; ®an»,a. goose. 
 
 ein SStcer, a sea. 
 
 N. ein^Jreunb, 
 
 eine 
 
 (Song, 
 
 ein SKeer, 
 
 G. eine§ greunbeg. 
 
 einej 
 
 ; ©ang. 
 
 eineg aJleereg, 
 
 D. einetn jjreunbe. 
 
 einer ©an§. 
 
 einem ?iJJeere, 
 
 A. einen greunb. 
 
 . eine 
 
 ®an§. 
 
 ein 5Keer. 
 
STRONG DECLENSION. — CLASS II. 2/ 
 
 Decline with modification of vowel in the plural : ber ©tu^I, 
 the chair; ber glu^, the river; ber gu^, the foot ; ber B"^"/ ^^^ 
 tooth; ber ©aft, thegti,est; ber £o))f, ;"/%.? head; ber 9lodE, the coat; 
 ber ©tD(f, ^y4^ j^zV^; ber Sanj, the dance; ber Saurn, M^ tree. 
 
 Also the following feminines : bte 33anf, /"/^^ i5^«f^ ,• bte SUlagb, 
 the maid-servant ; bie ?Jad^t, the night; bte ©tabt, M« /i7Z£/«/ bie 
 Suft, M^ a/;'; bie 3)Jau8, ^/^^ mouse; bte ?Jru(^t, the fruit; bte 
 giu^, ^y4^ «K// bie SBraut, //z^ ^r/^i?. 
 
 Without vowel modification, the masculines : ber 3trm, the 
 arm; ber §unb, the dog; ber ©d^uf), Mi? j,^^?^; ber 2^ag, the day ; 
 ber ^iinglitig, the youth ; ber Dfftgter', M^ ^«r. The feminines : 
 bie SeforgniS, the care; bie S^rftbfal, the trouble. 
 
 And the neuters: ba§ §aar, Mi? ^«?V/ baS^eft, Mi? note-book; 
 ba§ $ferb, Mi? horse; ba§ $aar, M^ /a/r/ ba§ ^funb. Mi? pound; 
 ba§ ©d^tff, the ship; ba§ St^or, the gate; ba§ 3fwS/ ^'^'^ •''^^^ 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 I. Ste ©o^ne be§ 3Sater§. 2. ®in ©ruber berSKagb. 3. ®te 
 §anb eineg greurtbe§. 4. ®ie Suft be§ ®eBirge§. 5. jDte Kuf) be§ 
 ©nglanberg. 6. 5Die g^ii^e ber ©anfe. 7. ®ie Stotfe ber ©afte. 8. 
 2)te 3;]^ore ber ©tabt — ber ©tabte. 9. ®te ©^u^e be§ ©afte§. 
 10. 5Die ©tode be§ SiiitglingS. 11. 3tuf {dat^ ber San! in bent 
 ©arten. 12. 2luf ben 93an!en in Sen ©arten. 13. ®ie ©c^tffe ber 
 (Snglanber. 14. Sluf ben ©c^tffen ber 2tmert!aner. 15. ®te !!)lagbe 
 ber Sraut. i6. ®te Seforgntffe ber SKittter. 17. S5ie iPferbe bet 
 Dffijiere. 18. ®ie SKonate be^ ^al^re^. 
 
 .1. The trees of the garden. 2. To the brothers of the maid- 
 servant. 3. The air of the town. 4. The guest of a friend. 
 5. The gardens of a convent. 6. The coats of the son. 7. The 
 teeth of a mouse. 8. To the friends of the brother, g. The 
 dances of the guests. 10. The benches of the garden. 11, 
 
28 LESSON III. 
 
 The chair of the maid-servant. 12. The chairs and (unb) the 
 benches of the scholars. 13. A night, a month, a year. 14. 
 The officer's shoes. 15. The fruits of the trees. 16. The 
 bride's brothers. 17. The mothers of the brides. 18. The 
 days and the nights. 19. The fruits and the nuts. 20. The 
 troubles of the youths. 21. On (auf, dat:) the officer's ship. 
 22. On the officers' horses. 23. The air in the towns. 24. 
 The teeth of the mice. 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 86. The adjective pronouns : biefer, btefe, btefeS, this ; 
 jener, jene, jeneS, that {yon) ; toelc£)er, tt)efc£)e, loelc^eS, which, 
 what; jeber, jebe, jebeS, each, every, are declined as follows : 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 masc. fern. neut. m.f. n. 
 
 Nom. btefer, btefe, biefeS^ btefe. 
 
 Gen. biej e§, btef er, btef e§. btef er. 
 
 Dat. biefem, biefer, btef em. btef™ 
 
 Ace. btef en, btef e, . btef e§. btef 
 
 er. 
 en. 
 e. 
 
 87. This declension is like that of the definite article in 
 giving three endings — one for each gender — in the nominative 
 singular. But it differs from that of the article in having e 
 instead of te in the nom. and accus. of the fern, singular and 
 of thd*plural ; and e§ instead of a§ in the nom. and accus. of the 
 neuter singular. With these exceptions, the remarks on the 
 def. art., Less. I., apply to this declension also. 
 
 Note. — The general statement — often made in German grammars — 
 that these (and other adjectives) are declined like the definite article, must 
 be taken with this important correction. 
 
STRONG DECLENSION CLASS III. 
 
 29 
 
 88. Like the indefinite article are declined the posses- 
 sives: metn, metne, metn, my; betn, betne, betn, thy {your); 
 fein, feine, fettt, his, its; unfer, unfre (uttfere), unfer, our; 
 euer, eure, euer, your; 'Hcjt, t^re, it)r, their (or her) ; and also 
 fetn, feine, fetn, not a, no. In the plural these are declined 
 like biefer. 
 
 Third Class (Enlarged. Form) of the Strong: Declension. 
 
 89. To the third class of the strong declension belong 
 the great majority of monosyllabic neuters, with a few 
 ♦Tiasculines ; nouns ending in turn (old spelling t^um) ; and 
 a few other neuters of more than one syllable. They form 
 the genitive and dative singular in eS, e, like Class II. ; and 
 the nominative plural in et, with vowel modification. 
 
 {a) Observe that the nouns in turn modify, not the 
 radical vowel, but the vowel of the sufifix. 
 
 {b) The e of the genitive and dative singular may be 
 
 omitted under the same conditions as in the preceding 
 
 declension. (§ 85). 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 !Sa< l^aai, the house. 
 
 3)09 giirflcntum, theprineii 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. 
 
 ba§ §au§. 
 
 bag prftentum. 
 
 G. 
 
 beS §aufe§. 
 
 be§ gitrftentumS, 
 
 D. 
 
 bem §aufe. 
 
 bem j^iirftentum. 
 
 A. 
 
 ba§§au§. 
 
 ba§ {Jurftentum. 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 bie §aufer. 
 
 bie prftentiimer. 
 
 G. 
 
 ber §aufer. 
 
 ber g^itrftentumer. 
 
 D. 
 
 ben §aufem. 
 
 ben g'itrj'tentiimem. 
 
 A. 
 
 bie §aufer. 
 
 bie {Jtoftentiinter. 
 
 In the same manner: ber ©eift, the spirit; bet ©Ott, the god; 
 ber 2etb, the body; ber 9Jlann, the man; ber Dvt, the place; ber 
 
30 LESSQN ni.' 
 
 9tanb, the edge, margin; ber SBalb, the forest ; ber SBurm, the 
 worm; ber SSormunb, the guardian; ber '^xtX\xm.,the error; ber 
 Seid^tum, the riches. ' 
 
 Note. — This important list of the masculines of this class should be re- 
 membered.. A few others are sometimes so declined. (See Appendix.) 
 
 The following examples of monosyllabic neuters : bag 3Imt, 
 the office; ba§ S&o!^ the bath; ba§ 58Iatt, the leaf; baS 33ud^, the 
 hook; ba§ ®a^, the roof; ba§ ©orf, the village; bag g^elb, the 
 field; bag ®elb, the money ; bag ©lag, the glass ; bag ^inb, the 
 child; bag Sanb, the land; bag Sieb, /^d' song; bag (S(|)Id^, />5^ 
 /(7<r/5, castle; bag 2^f)al, //4i? valley ; bag 33oH, the people. 
 
 And the following neuters of more than one syllable: bag 
 OJemad^, the apartment ; bag ©emiit, the feeling ; bag ®e[i^t, ^/%if 
 face; bag ©ef^Iec^t, /".^i? J(?a;; bag ©ef^jenft, the spectre; bag 
 ©etoanb, the garment; bag SRegimenf, the regiment; bag ©ipitol', 
 or §of!pitar, the hospital. 
 
 Note — These three are the only foreign nouns so declined. For other 
 nouns with @e-, see § 8i. For some double plurals, § 107. 
 
 This class includes no feminines. 
 
 90. The Verb feilt, to be. 
 
 Present Indicative. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 id^ bin, / am. ■ toir ftnb, we are. 
 
 bu bift, thou art. iJjr feib, you are. 
 
 er ift, he is. fie ftnb, they are. 
 
 fie ift, she is. - 
 
 eg' ift, it is. bin id^, am 12 
 
 etc. 
 VOCABULARY.* 
 gut, good. gro^, tall, large. 
 
 fd^Ied^t, bad. flein, small, little. 
 
 * Other words used in the exercises occur in the preceding Lessons ; or 
 they may be found in the Vocabulary at the end of the book. 
 
STRONG DECLENSION — CLASS III. 31 
 
 lalt, cold. jung, young. 
 
 toartn, warm. alt, old. 
 
 1^0^, high. neu, new. 
 
 grun, green. flei^tg, industrious. 
 
 gi. Observe that adjectives standing alone in the predicate 
 remain unaltered. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 I. ^d^ bin etn ^tnb. 2. 2Bir finb ^inber. 3. S)ie 33Ud^er ber 
 ©d^iiler finb llein. 4. HDie Slcitter be§ S8aume§ finb gritn. 5. 
 S)tefer SKann ift ber 58ater jeneS Sinbe§. 6. ®ie Sriiber metneS 
 3Sater§ finb fctne g^reunbe. 7. ®inb bie JDorfer gro^? 8. gft 
 btefer 5!JJann ber 93ruber betneS 33ater8? 9. 3ft fi« bie 2;od^ter 
 biefeS ?Kannei ? 10. ©tnb bie ©driller flei^ig? n. S)ie §aufer 
 be§ SorfeS finb alt. 12. ®ie 93auine be§ SBalbeg finb l^od^. 13. 
 ©eib i^r bie tober biefeS SWanneg? 14. ®ie 9)?agbe unfereS 25ru= 
 berg finb jung. 15. aSelc^eg §au§ ift bag §aug unfereg g^reunbeS ? 
 16. 2)ie 93u^er biefeg ©d^iilerg finb neu. 17. ®ie 3!)6rfer unb bie 
 ©4lIoffer biefeg Sanbeg finb !Iein. 18. ^eneg §attg ift alt ; b'efe 
 §aufer finb neu. 19. ®iefe 9Jlanner finb unfere g^reunbe. 20. ^ie 
 SBogel finb in ben SBalbern. 21. 2)ie ©lafer finb auf bent Stanbe 
 beg^ifc^eg. 22. ©inb jene SJlabd^en bie Sod^ter unferer ©afie ? 
 23. ^n tpelc^em 2;§ale finb bie jjelber jeneg SJianneg? 24. ®te 
 35ormiinber biefer ^inber finb in biefem ©orfe. 
 
 I. Art thou a child ? 2. Are you children ? 3. We are the 
 children of thy friends. 4. The daughters of this man are tall. 
 5. The houses of the village are small. 6. The trees of the 
 forest are green. 7. The scholars of this teacher are indus- 
 trious. 8. The sons of our friend are young. 9. This song is 
 old. 10. These books are new. 11. Are these children the 
 sons of my friend ? 12. The roofs of the houses are high. 13. 
 She is the daughter of my brother. 14. The fields are green. 
 15. The air is cold. 16. The bath is warm. 17. The sons of 
 
32 LESSON IV. 
 
 my guest are Englishmen. i8. In which lands are those vil- 
 lages.' 19. The fields of these valleys are green. 20. These 
 baths are cold. 21. The birds of the forest are industrious. 
 22 The apartments of the king's castle are large. 23. The 
 officers of these regiments are old. 24. The songs of the people 
 — of the peoples. {See notes on the'Exercises, preface pp. V, VI ^ 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 The Weak Declension. 
 
 92. _ The weak declension comprises all nouns of the 
 feminine gender (except SKutter, 3!oc^ter, and those of the 
 second class of the strong declension); most masculines 
 ending in e ; a few masculine monosyllables which formerly 
 ended in e j and many foreign masculines accented on the 
 last syllable. No neuters. 
 
 {a) This declension includes, therefore, all feminines of more 
 than one syllable, except those in -ni§ and -fal (and the two 
 words SKutter and 2;Dd§ter). 
 
 {S) Feminine monosyllables are nearly equally divided 
 between this declension and the second class of the strong 
 declension. The weak declension includes all foreign or 
 derivative feminines, and those that once ended in -e. 
 
 (c) Foreign masculines are also divided between the same 
 two declensions. Those in -al, -an, -aft, -ier, belong to the 
 strong; most others, including all that once ended in -e, 
 belong to the weak declension. 
 
 {d') Hence, words in either of the foregoing groups must 
 be carefully observed. 
 
 93. Nouns of this declension form their plural in -en 
 or -n. The feminines remain unchanged in the singular. 
 
WEAK DECLENSION. 
 
 33 
 
 but the masculines take the termination -en or -n also in 
 the singular, for all cases except the nominative. 
 
 94. Nouns ending in e, et, er, and or unaccented, take 
 the termination tt ; all others take en. Thus : bte SBtume, 
 bie ©lumen ; bte 9'idbet, bte 9'Jabetn ; bie geber, .bte gebern ; 
 ber llngar, bie Ungarn. But : bie Sugenb, bie ^ugenben ; bie 
 Station', bte ©tatton'en; ber ©tubenf, bie ©tubenfen (§ 85). 
 
 95. Feminine derivatives in -in double the n in the 
 plural ; as, bie t^u^ftin, the princess ; pi. bie ^^urftinnen. .(§ 3, a). 
 
 For a special form in feminine singular, see § 106. 
 
 96. No noun of the weak declension modifies the root- 
 vowel in the plural. 
 
 iBfe Stume, the flower. 
 
 N. bie 93tume, 
 
 G. ber Slume, 
 
 D. ber SSIume, 
 
 A. bie Slume. 
 
 N. bie Slumen, 
 
 G. ber 33Iumen, 
 
 D. benSlumen, 
 
 A. bie SBIumen. 
 
 EXAMPLES, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 iBcr Snabe, tfte hoy. 
 
 ber ^nabe, 
 be§ ^naben, 
 bem Snaben, 
 ben ^naben. 
 
 bie ^naben, 
 ber ^naben, 
 ben ^naben, 
 bte ^naben. 
 
 ®ie g^eber, the pen; gen. ber fjeber ; pi. bie jjebem, etc. 
 
 Monosyllables : bie 3lrt, the kind; gen. ber 3lrt ; pi. bie Slrten, 
 etc., — ®er §elb, the hero; gen. beg §elben ; pi. bie §etben, etc. 
 
 Foreign : ber ^oef , the poet; gen. be8 5poef en ; pi. bie $oef en, 
 etc. 
 
34 LESSON IV. 
 
 Decline like bte Stume : bte ©tu6e, the room ; bie ^^reube, tht 
 Joy ; bie ©d^ule, the school, etc. 
 
 Like bte jjeber : bie 3JabeI, the needle; bie SDlauer, the wall; bie 
 ©d^iiffel, the dish, etc. 
 
 Like bieSlrt : bie U^r, the watch; bie %^a.u, the woman, wife; 
 bie %\j<xi, the deed; bie 3;^ur, the door; bte '^oi)l, the number, etc. 
 
 Like ber ^naBe : ber 5Preu^e, the Prussian ; ber 9lffe, the mon- 
 key ; ber Steff e, the nephew, etc. 
 
 Like ber ^JJoet : ber Slbbocat, the lawyer; ber ©tubettt, the stu- 
 dent; ber 5pi^iIofo^)f), the philosopher, etc. 
 
 Like ber §elb: ber SBfir, the bear; ber (Shrift, the Christian; 
 ber ^urft, the prince; ber ®raf, the count; ber §irt, the herdsman } 
 ber SJJenfd^, {the) man; "ber SKoIir, 2*/^^ Moor; ber 3larr, the fool; 
 ber Dd^§, ^/^^ i?^,- ber ^rinj, the prince; ber S^fcor, the fool. -, 
 
 Note. — This, list — which comprises the most important masculine mono- 
 syllables of this declension — should be remembered. Apparently they would 
 belong to the second class of the strong declension; but -e has been 
 dropped from the nominative singular. (See Appendix.) 
 
 97. To this list belongs, properly, ber §err, the Lord, gentle- 
 man; also, Mr. or Sir. But this word adds in the singular 
 only n ; in the plural ett ; as, beg §errn ; pi. bie §erren, etc. 
 
 98. Past Indicative of fcin, to be. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 xiij tear, I was. 'ttir tnaren, we were. 
 
 bu tDarft, thou wast. i^r h)ar(e)t, you were. 
 
 er inar, he was. 
 
 
 
 fie toaren. 
 
 they were. 
 
 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 unb. 
 
 and. 
 
 
 
 too, where. 
 
 
 ober. 
 
 or. 
 
 
 
 tear i(|, was 
 
 17 
 
 a6er. 
 
 but. 
 
 
 
 toarft bu, wast thou t 
 
 
 
 W. 
 
 very. 
 
 
 
WEAK DECLENSION. 35 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 
 
 I. ®ie SSIumen be§ ©arteiaS finb bte 3=reube meiner 3Jlutter. 2, 
 gtirj'ten unb ®rafen finb SKenfd^en. 3. ®ie SKauern ber ©tabt finb 
 ^o(^ unb alt. 4. ®ie ©tubm finb flejn. 5. ®a§ Sanb unfereS 
 §erm, .be§ ^Jurften, ift ein 'giirftentum. 6. S)ie ^reu^en imb bie 
 Ungam toaren flei^tg. 7. Sie Dd^fen toaren grofe, aber bie ^ii^e 
 ioaren fe^r llein. 8. ®iefer Knabe ift ber ©ol^n beS ©rafen. 9. 
 5Die Ul^r biefe§ §erm tear neu. 10. S)iefe Uj^ten finb fe^r alt aber 
 gut. II. 3ft er ein 5Preufee ober einUngar? 12. S)ie Sl^aten be§ 
 §elben. 13. 3)te St^iiren be§ §aufe§. i4' 35ie 3ieffen be§ ©rafen. 
 15. S5ie §efte beS ©tubenten. 16. Siefe §erren finb ^Preufeen. 
 17. 3)ie^naben finb in ber ©d^ule — in ben ©d^ulen. 18. 5Dte 
 ^aifl ber ©tubenten ift gro^. 19. 35ie 2;^aten ber g^riften. 20. 
 2)ie ©tuben be§ §aufe§. 21. ®ie SBIumen ber ©arten. 22. 3)ie 
 ©c|uler be§ §errn. 23. ®ie SJlabetn ber SJlcibd^en. 24. ®ie 
 ©c()uffeln finb auf bem 2;if^e. 
 
 I. The Prussians and the Hungarians are Christians. 2. 
 These boys were pupils of my father. 3. The schools of this 
 town are good. 4. It was the deed of a fool. 5. The daugh- 
 ters of the count were old, but the sons of the prince were 
 young. 6. The hands of the ladies. 7. The doors of my 
 house. 8. Where are my needles ? 9. Where were the ladies 
 and the- gentlemen? 10. The boys were industrious. 11. 
 These dishes are new. 12. The deeds of the heroes. 13. The 
 watches of those gentlemen. 14. The number of the boys and 
 of the girls. 15. The lands of the count. 16. The monkeys 
 and the bears. 17. These princes are Christians. 18. The 
 teeth and the feet of the oxen. 19. A daughter of a lawyer. 
 20. The wife of an officer. 21. That gentleman is a Prussian. 
 22. I was in the room. 23. We were in the rooms. 24. Was 
 he the son of a poet? 25. Were they the daughters of the 
 lawyers ? 
 
36 LESSON V. 
 
 LESSON V. 
 Peculiarities in Declension. 
 
 99. The following masculines ending in e form their 
 genitive in -n§, and their other cases in -n according to 
 the weak declension : 
 
 ber S3u(^fta6e, the letter (pi the alphabet), 
 ber iJrtebe,/^a«. ber §aufe, .*^«/. 
 
 ber §un!e, spark. ber 5Rame, name. 
 
 ber @eban!e, thought ber ©ante, seed. 
 
 ber ©laube, faith. ber SSiKe, wih. 
 
 100. ®er ©(|abe, /zar»?, gen. ©(i^aben§, modifies the vowel in 
 the plural, bie ©d^aben, etc., usually; but also bie ©c^aben. 
 
 loi. 3)er ©d^merj, the pain, is occasionally declined in the 
 same way: gen. beSSi^merjenS, dat. bem ©d^merjen, etc. And 
 ber fjelfen, the rock, has also the shorter form, ber ^Jel^, gen. be^ 
 jJelfenS or g^elfen. But usually beS ©d^tnerjeS, etc.; pi. bie ©djinerjen. 
 
 1 02. One neuter, baS^erj, the heart, forms its genitive in -en§; 
 beS ^erjenS, dat. bem ^erjen, ace. bag §er5 ; plur. bie ^erjen. 
 
 103. Some of these nouns have also the nominative in -en, 
 and are then regularly of the first class of the strong declension ; 
 as, ber grieben, be§ jJriebenS, etc. 
 
 104. A few nouns of the masculine and neuter gender 
 follow the strong declension in the singular, and the weak 
 in the plural. The most important are : 
 
 Nam. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 ber ^avin, farmer, peasant. 
 
 be§ SauetS, 
 
 bte Sauern. 
 
 ber 3Jlaft, mast (of a ship). 
 
 be§ 3WafteS, 
 
 bie SKaften. 
 
MIXED DECLENSION. 
 
 37 
 
 Norn, 
 ber 9Jlu§feI, muscle. 
 ber ^Jad^tar, neighbor. 
 ber ^Pantof fel, slipper. 
 ber ©ee, lake. 
 ber ©taat, j/afe. 
 ber (Sta(j^el, j/2«^. 
 ber ©tiefel, (5^cA 
 ber Stral^I, (5i?a/«. 
 ber SSetter, cousin. 
 bag 3tuge, <>'«'. 
 ba§ Sett, bed. 
 bag @nbe, ^«//. 
 ■ bag §einb, shirt. 
 bag gnfeft^ /^j^rf. 
 bag D^r, ^«r. 
 
 Gen. 
 beg SWugfeIg, 
 beg g^ad^Barg, 
 beg ^Pantoffelg, 
 beg ©eeg, 
 beg ©taateg, 
 beg ©tac^etg, 
 beg ©tiefeig, 
 beg ©tra^Ieg, 
 beg SBetterg, 
 beg Slugeg, 
 beg Setteg, 
 beg ©nbeg, 
 beg §embeg, 
 beg Snfefteg, 
 
 Plur. 
 bie 3Rugfeln. 
 bte 9lac^6arn. 
 bie ^Pantoffeln 
 bte ©eeen, 
 bie ©taaten. 
 bie ©tad^eln. 
 bie ©tiefeln. 
 bie ©tral^Ien. 
 bie 2?ettern. 
 bie 3tugen. 
 bie Setten. 
 bie Snben. 
 bie §emben. 
 bie Snfeften. 
 bie D^ren. 
 
 beg Dlireg, 
 and the foreign masculine titles in -or. (§ 117). 
 
 These constitute what is called the mixed declension, in 
 which are sometimes included also the nouns, §§ 99-102. 
 
 105. Some of these words have double forms : beg Sauern, beg 
 3Jad§barn, beg SSettern ; bie SSettern, and (better) bie ©tiefel. And 
 there are a few other nouns in which usage is divided, in the 
 singular or plural, or both, between the weak and the strong 
 declensions, or even between different classes of the strong 
 declension ; as, ber SBaier, the Bavarian ; gen. Saierg or Saiern ; 
 pi. 33aier or 33aiern ; ber ®ern, the thorn ; pi. ®emer, 3)orne, or 
 Somen; ber ©^)orn, the spur; pi. ©^jorne or ©^jornen, or even 
 ©^oren ; bag Soot, pi. bie Soote or Sbte ; bag SRol^r, pi. bie 5Rol^re 
 or SRol^re, etc. And in some cases diversity of usage in gender 
 leads to uncertainty of classification; as, ber or bag 61^or, etc. 
 Such details must be found in the dictionaries. (See Appendix). 
 
 106. Some weak feminines retain the n of an earlier in- 
 flection in the dative singular, when immediately after a 
 preposition; as, auf (£rben, on earth; bor greuben, for joy. 
 
38 LESSON V. 
 
 Note. — Such phrases are also : ju <&lite«, in honor {of); jit Ounjleit, 
 in favor (of); Botl ©etten, on the part {of), andsome others. In poetry the" 
 form is sometimes found with the article ; as, in ber Srbett, etc. ; and, rarely 
 also in the genitive; as, ble ©liter biefer Evben, the goods of this earth. 
 
 107. A few words give two plurals in different senses, 
 having both senses in the singular. Such are : ha^ 95anb ; 
 pi. Sdnber, ribbons; ^onbe, bonds. S)te Sgonl ; pi. Satife, 
 benches; 93anfen, banks. S)a§ SBort; pi. SBiJrter, words 
 (singly) ; SSorte, words (connected). (§§ 424, 426). 
 
 NoT^. — Colloquially — in imitation of French or English — are found 
 plurals in 8 ; as, JlerlS, ©fibels, aKabcSjeiig, etc. 
 
 The Perfect and Pluperfect of feilt. 
 
 108. The perfect and pluperfect of the verb fetn are 
 formed by adding the perfect participle getoefen, been, to 
 the preseht and past tenses of the same verb. Literally: 
 / am been, I was been. 
 
 (a) Observe that fettt is here its own auxiliary, where in 
 English we use have. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Singular. Fhiral. 
 
 i^) bin getoefen, I have been. tcir ftnb getoefen, we have been. 
 
 bu btft getoefen, thou hast been, i^r feib getoefen, you have been. 
 
 er ift getoefen, he has been. fie ftnb geioefen, they have been. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 ic^ tear getoefen, J had been. totr toaren getoefen, we had been, 
 
 bu toarft getoefen, thou hadst been. \^x toaret getoefen, you had been, 
 er toar getoefen, he had been. fie toaren getoefen, they had been 
 
 (b) Observe that when the verb is used in a compound form, 
 the participle is removed to the end of the sentence. Thus : 
 5E)u btft gut getoefen. 5Der ^nabe toar fletpg getoefen. Sift bu 
 Sut getoefen ?' SSar ber ^nabe flei^ig getoefen ? 
 
PECULIARITIES IN DECLENSION. 39 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 m^, rich. ftarf, strong. in, in ( govern the dative 
 
 ixxm/pcor. fd^toad^, weak, auf, on \ when expressing rest. 
 
 tlii^lt^, useful, fd^arf, sharp. h)ie, aj-, like; ntc^t^ «»;*. 
 
 EXERCISE V. 
 
 I. 2)er aSater biefeS SauerS tear ber ^Jiad^bar meineS SSetterS 
 getoefen. 2. 5Die S^^i^e be§ g^riebeng finb bem Staate fel^r nii^It(^ 
 jetoefen. 3. S)ie ©tiefeln, bie ^Pantoffeln, bie §emben unb bie 
 Mode finb neu getoefen. 4. ®te Somen finb fd^arf toie 5RabeIn. 
 5. ®er ©ol^n meineg SRoi^&arg tear reid^ getoefen. 6. ^n biefer 
 Stube toaren bie SBetten ber ©d^iiler. 7. ®er Sruber unfereS 
 iBetterS tear reid^ getoefen. 8. ©eine 2lugen unb feine Dfiren finb 
 gro^, ober feine gU^e finb Ikin. 9. ®er griebe be§ §errn. 10. 
 iKeine 3lugen finb fd^toad^. n. ®ie ©d^merjen be8 ^erjenS. 12. 
 J)er jjriebe ber ©taaten. 13. ®ie Sanber ber SKabd^en. 14. Siefe 
 Bauetn finb JJac^barn getoefen. 15. ®iefe SBorter finb bie 9iamen 
 iener 3Jtanner. 16. ®ie SSorte [be§] ©laubeng. 17. 5Die 9iamen 
 ;ener ^nfelten. 18. Sie iBanfen finb in ben ©tabten. 19. ®ie 
 8anbe be§ g^riebenS. 20. ^ene §erren finb SBettern. 
 
 I . The masts of this ship are very strong. 2 . Your neigh- 
 3ors have been in this room. 3. The thoughts of the Chris- 
 ians. 4. The names of the peasants. 5. The brothers of my 
 ;ousin had been poor. 6. My mother's sUppers are old. 7. 
 The hearts of (the) men. 8. His ears are large, but his eyes 
 ire small. 9. The boots of my father, thg.; slippers of my 
 ;ousin, and the shirts of the boys are not very new. 10. The 
 )eds of the scholars had been in this room. 1 1. The thoughts 
 )f my cousin are the thoughts of a Christian. 12. The eyes 
 md the ears of a mouse are small. 13. The faith of the heart 
 s strong. 14. These farmers are my neighbors. 15. The 
 nasts of the ships are high. 16. The peasants of these 
 itates have been very rich. 17. The ribbons of my slippers 
 
40 LESSON VI. 
 
 are green. i8. The boots are on the benches. 19. The faces 
 of the neighbors. 20. The thoughts and the words of (the) 
 peace. 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 Declension of Proper Names. 
 
 109. Names of persons, places, and the neuter names of 
 
 countries, when inflected, usually take -§ in the genitive. 
 
 grtebrtd), Frederick, grtebrtd^S; ©lifabetf), (glifafietp; §ilba, 
 
 §ttba§; SCmertfa, 9tmeri!a§ ; ©tra^burg, ©trapurgS. But the 
 
 names of places in -g are not declined ; as, 5Port§, etc. 
 
 Note. — An earlier dative, or accusative, in -n or -etl sometimes occurs 
 colloquially ; as, $etev-It, 3u)l-Ett. (For plurals, see § 427.) 
 
 1 10. Names of females ending in e take in the genitive 
 -en§, and in the dative and accusative -en. @opf)te ; gen. 
 ©opf)ten§ ; dat. and ace. @o|)I)ten ; STmalte, SlutalienS, SCmotteii. 
 
 Note. — Masculine names ending in a sibilant (8, %, fc^, j, 3, ^) may do 
 the same : SfJJoj, SKojenS, SDiajen ; but if surnames, or foreign, they take 
 usually the apostrophe only (§ 70) ; as, SSog' SBerte. 
 
 111. In speaking of sovereigns and dignitaries, the pre- 
 position bon is used in such phrases as : ber ^dfet toon 
 ^u^ian'O; the Emperor of Russia ; bte ^finigtn bott Snglanb, 
 the Queen of England; ber Siirgermetfter toon 2}fagbe6urg, 
 the mayor of Magdeburg. This form may generally be 
 used instead of the genitive of countries or places. 
 
 112. And, generally, the inflection of a personal name 
 may be avoided by the use of the article ; as, gen. bei§ SCarl 
 ber @o:|3'^te, be§ ©c^tEer, etc.; or of an apposition with the 
 article; as, be§ ^iJittgg ^etnricE) (§§ 427-8). 
 
 113. The Latin nouns (S£)rtftu§ and SefuS usually retain 
 their Latin declension ; thus : 
 
DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 41 
 
 N. 6^riftu§; G. g^rtfti; D. g^ttfto; A. (S^riftum. 
 N. Sefug; G. Sefu; D. ^efu; A. ^efum. 
 
 The Future of the Verb fetn, to be. 
 
 114. The future of the verb feitt is formed by com- 
 bining with the infinitive fetn the present tense of the 
 auxiliary verb ttjerbett, to become. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 \i) toerbe fein, I shall be. toir toerben fetn, we shall be. 
 
 bu totrft fetn, thou wilt be. tl^r toerbet fetn, you will be. 
 
 er totrb fein, he will be. fie toerben fein, th^y will be. 
 
 (a) And interrogatively : toerbe id^ fein ? s/iall I be ? toivb 
 er fein ? will he be f etc. Note that the infinitive goes to 
 the end of the sentence; as, ic£) toerbe flet^ig fein; hiirb er 
 flei^ig fein ? etc. 
 
 Note. — These auxiliary forms, which are here given only for practice, 
 will be more fully explained hereafter. (Less, xiii.) 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ijKtx, here. aud^, also. 
 
 \jmii, to-day. batb, soon. 
 
 morgen, to-morrow. bte ©d^toefter, the sister. 
 
 geftern, yesterday. mit, with (governs the dative). 
 
 EXERCISE VI. 
 
 I. gl^arlottenS SJlutter tft beute l^ier getoefen, unb bet S3ater 
 aJJarieftS toirb morgen aud^ l^ier fein. 2. 3)er ^ontg Son ©)3amen 
 unb bte Sijnigin toon ^Portugal toerben morgen in 5!)Jabrib fetn. 3. 
 SDie g^Iitffe Slu^IanbS ftnb gro^. 4- Sft «i^ mit ©o^jl^ienS ©c^loefter 
 in atmatienS ©arten getoefen ? 5. ®r toirb mit ?Karien in ber ©tuBe 
 fein. 6. 3)ie 3Settern ^riebrid^S toerben aud^ 6alb ^ier fein. 7. ®ie 
 
42 LESSON VII. 
 
 §aufer bon ?Pari§ jinb grol. 8. ®er aSater unb bte SKutter [ber] 
 mam ftnb geftern l^ier getoefen. 9. SOBerben i^re Sriiber unb i^re 
 ©d^toeftern balb t)ier fein? 10. ®er Saifer unb bie ^dferin bon 
 Seutf^Ianb finb in Serlin. 11. 5Da§ Seben 3efu. 12. 5Die Sffiorte 
 ^efu ©l^rijli. (^Adverbs of time precede adverbs 0/ place). 
 
 I. I am Mary's brother and thou art Charlotte's sister. 2. 
 The sister of the Emperor of Russia will be here to-morrow. 
 3. He is with Mary in Frederick's garden. 4. The mayor of 
 Strasburg has been here to-day. 5. The deeds of Frederick 
 have been useful. 6. Will the father of Charles be here to- 
 morrow ? 7. He will be here to-morrow, and the mother of 
 Sophia will also soon be here. 8. Has the mother of the 
 Queen of Spain been here? 9. She will soon be here. 10. 
 The rivers and the lakes of Russia are large. 11. The son of 
 Elizabeth is a friend of our neighbor. 12. Mary's slippers and 
 Charles' boots are new. 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 Declension of Foreign Ifouns. 
 
 • 115. Nouns of foreign origin generally retain their 
 foreign accent (see § 59, note), but most of them are 
 declined like German nouns. Others retain some pecu- 
 liarities. 
 
 116. Like German nouns are declined such words as: 
 ber S8ifct)of, the bishop, bte 93ifd)Bfe; ber ^aplon', the chaplain, 
 bte ^a^jldne ; ber Snftinft', bie Su[tiu!te ; ha^ 9)fonunient', bie 
 TOonumente ; bog §o§^3ttaI', bie §o§pitaIer ; "liaS, 9tecitment', bie 
 SRegimenter, etc. ; and the foreign masculines and feminines 
 of the weak declension ; as, ber SlbBofat', the advocate ; bie 
 SRepubUf, the republic, etc. 
 
DECLENSION OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 43 
 
 117. The titles of male persons ending in unaccented or 
 take § in the genitive singular and en in the plural : ber 
 SDoItor, beg SoftorS, bie ©ottoren, etc. ; according to the 
 w«>^</ declension. (See § 104 ; for the accent, see §§ 57, 58.) 
 
 118. Latin nouns in um and turn add § in the gen. sing., 
 and change um to en in the plural ; as, baS ©tubium ; gen. 
 be§ ©tubiumS ; pi. bie ©tubten, etc. Some have dropped turn 
 in the singular, but retain ten in the plural ; as, baS SlbOerb' 
 (or Slbberbiunt); pi. bie Stbberfiten, etc.* 
 
 119. Neuter nouns in at' and it' take § in the genitive 
 singular and ten in the plural : ba§ SOfatertat', be§ 3Katertat§, 
 bie SlKatertatien; ba§ goffit', beg gof[it§, bie goffttien.* 
 
 120. Words from French, English, and other modern 
 languages usually take § in the genitive singular and in the 
 plural : SorbS, ®enie§; ©otoS, S)on§, 5paf(^ag ; but if ending 
 in -§ are not declined ; as, ber ^omtnig', i/te clerk (g silent). 
 
 (a) A few other foreign nouns, mostly of technical use, retain 
 foreign plurals ; as, gafu§, SRobi, ^Jacta, ©l^erubim, etc. And a 
 few others form plurals in en ; as, ba§ 5Drama, bie ®ramen. But 
 there is much irregularity. (See § 427.) 
 
 Declension of Compound Nouns. 
 
 121. Compound nouns are formed much more freely in 
 German than in English (as will be explained hereafter). 
 Such nouns are inflected according to the gender and 
 declension of the last component, the rest remaining un- 
 changed. Hence, as already remarked, such nouns as ber 
 2l|ifel6aum, the apple-tree, boS: 2Bi)rter6u(^, the dictionary, 
 ire inflected as monosyllables : like ber S5auitt, "baSi 93ud§. 
 
 * These groups from Latin neuters, pi. a, ia, are now nearly like the 
 nixed declension, A few other such nouns belong here ; also the German, 
 )o8 Steinol), pi. bie Sletnobieti (or ^lelnobe). 
 
44 LESSON YII. 
 
 122. There are a few exceptions : bie 3IntJt)ort, the answer, 
 pi. litttDorten (comp. of ba§ SBort) ; bie Semut, bie ®roBmut, 
 and other compounds of ber 5Kut ; ber Stbf^eu (comp. of bie 
 ©c^eu), and a few others. (See § 388.) 
 
 The Future Perfect of fein. 
 
 123. The future perfect, or second future, of fein is formed 
 by joining the perf. participle geioejen and the infinitive fein 
 to the present of the auxiliary verb tterbett. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 \&i toerbe geiuefen fein, I shall have been. 
 bu toirft getoefen fein, thou wilt have been, 
 CT Iriirb geiuefen fein, he will have been. 
 
 Plural. j 
 
 tDtr hjerben getoefen fein, we shall have been. 
 '■&IX toerbet getnefen fein, you will have been. 
 fie toerben geioefen fein, they will have been. 
 
 (ff) And interrogatively : toerbe td^ getoefen fein? etc. Observe 
 that the participle and infinitive stand together at the end — 
 the participle before the infinitive, reversing the English cfrder. 
 
 Note. — As will be seen § 172, these form the infinitive perfect (§ 108). 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ber Slugajjfel, the pupil (of the bag §erren^au§, the House of 
 
 eye). Lords. 
 
 ber StcEerSmann, the husband- ber ^nabente^rer, the teacher in 
 
 man. a boys'-school, tutor. 
 
 ber 33aumgarten, the orchard. ber Sanjk^rer, the dancing-mas- 
 
 ber SSIumengarten, the flower- ter. 
 
 garden. bie ^inberftube, the nursery. 
 
 ber ^elb§ w, the general bie ^nabenf (i^ule, the boys'-school, 
 
FORfiIGN AND COMPOUND NOUNS. 45 
 
 ba§ Sanb^&u§, the country-house. ba§ SSorterBud^, the dictionary. 
 
 bie ©artentnauer, the garden- 'ba§2a'boxatD'xmm,ihe taioratory 
 
 wall. bie Uniberfttaf , the university. 
 
 bie ©tabtmauer, the city-wall. ber ^ontg, ^'.^^ king. 
 
 ber §aug§err, M^ landlord. ,>L^iprey^en, Prussia. 
 
 ber 2t6t, />4i? a^iJ^^. " ,5 ber ©tubenf , the student. 
 
 ber ^a^jft, the pope. ju, /(? (dat.). 
 
 ^ EXERCISE VII. 
 
 I. ®iefe ©tabt tft retd^ an (in, dat^) 3JlDnutnente/i.' 2. 5Der 
 Kajjlan beS Sifd^ofg tft ein ©oftor [ber] SC^eoIogie. 3. ®te ^ajjlane 
 ber ^a^)fte finb Sifd^ofe. 4. S)te Sorbs finb in bem §erren^aufe. 
 5. 3n bem 3!)Jufeum traren g^offilien. 6. 5Da§ 2Borterbu^ biefeS 
 ^rofefforg ioirb gut fein. 7. ®ie ©ol^ne beS S)o!tor§ toerben mit 
 bem 2;an3le^rer in ber Kinberftube getoefen fein. 8. Unfere 9tegi= 
 menter toerben mit bem g^elb^errn an (at, dat^ ber ©tabtmauer fein. 
 9. S)'a§ SSud^ in ber §anb unfereS ^PaftorS ift ein SBBrterbvid^ ju ben 
 ©bangelien. 10. %v. bem Sdnb^aufe be§ ©rafen ift ein 3Jlufeum 
 bon goffilien. n. ®ie ©tubenten ber Uniberfitat finb in bem 
 Saboratorium beg ^rofefforS ber (Sljemie. 12. ®ie 3tnth)ort be§ 
 jjelbl^errn in bem §erren^aufe tear fe|ir gut. 
 
 I. The hospitals of this town are near (an, dat^ the city- 
 wall. 2. The kings of Prussia are rectors of the universi- 
 ties [of] Bonn and Berlin. 3. Here are the materials for (ju, 
 dat^ a dictionary of the gospels. 4. The professors and the' 
 doctors have been in the orchard of the pastor. 5. In the 
 museum of the bishop are fossils. 6. The dancing-master is 
 in the nursery with the sons of the general and with the daugh- 
 ters of the professor. 7. The monuments of this town are old. 
 8. These bishops are doctors of (the) theology. 9. The flower- 
 garden of the abbot is large. 10. The study of the gospels is 
 the joy of the student. 11. The professor of chemistry is in 
 the laboratory with the students of the university. 12. The 
 answers are in the dictionaries. 
 
46 LESSON VII. 
 
 Synopsis of Declension. 
 
 124. The following table will exhibit to the eye, for con- 
 venient reference, the chief forms of declension, all other cases 
 being known from the genitive singular and the nominative 
 plural, and there being no inflection in feminine singular : 
 
 A* Strong I>eclension, 
 
 Sing. Plur. 
 
 1. Class I Mm. — — , or, — ' 
 
 (Masc, neut.) Gen. — g. 
 
 2. Class II Norn. — — e, or, — e.' 
 
 {Afasc, fem., neut.) Gen. — (e)^ 
 
 3. Class III Norn. — — er.'- 
 
 {Neut., few masc.) Gen. — (e)§. 
 
 B. Weak Declension, 
 
 (Masc.Jem.) ^^m. — — (e)n. 
 
 Gen. — (e)it. 
 
 C. Mixed Declension. 
 
 {Masc, few neut.) Mm. — — (e)"- 
 
 Gen. —{^%, or, — (e)nS. 
 
 Remark. — The chief difficulty is in the formation of the plural; aTid 
 herein especially the question of vowel modification in masculines of I. and 
 II. Other points to be specially noted are: i. masculine: plurals in -El", 
 and, of monosyllables, in -en ; v.. feminine : plural, of monosyllables, in -e or 
 -en ; 3. neuter: plural, of monosyllables, in - e ; and the nouns of the mixed 
 declension. See Appendix. 
 
 ' The dots over the line indicate vowel modificjition. 
 
geKder of nouns. 47 
 
 Gender of Nouns. 
 
 125. The gender of nouns is important in itself, and, also, 
 because it largely determines declension. But, as already seen, 
 gender is in German to a great extent independent of meaning; 
 and as to the form of words, no sufficient general rules can be 
 given. The following are some of the most useful : 
 
 I. Generally: Sex names and appellations will follow the sex ; except, bo8 
 
 ^Ah, the woman ; baS SKenfli), the wench; and neuter diminutives in 
 -(f|en, -lein. 
 
 II. Masculine are: i. Nouns ending in -ig, -M), -ling, -m ; and most 
 
 nouns ending in -et, -en, -er. 
 ^. Most strong derivatives ; that is, derivatives formed by root-change 
 
 without sufKx. (See § 383.) 
 3. Names of winds, seasons, months, days, mountains. 
 
 III. Feminine are : i. Most nouns in -e, not of masculine meaning, and not 
 
 beginning with ge-. 
 
 2. Derivatives in -t, -et, -^eit, -feit, -fi^oft, -ung, -.in. 
 
 3. Most abstract nouns ; and most names of plants, fruits, flowers. 
 
 IV. Neuter are : i. Most derivatives with prefix ge-, and most nouns ending 
 
 in -nis or -tum. 
 
 2. All diminutives ending in -d^en, -lein. 
 
 3. Infinitives, and other parts of speech, used as nouns (unless denoting 
 
 .persons). 
 
 4. Most collective nouns ; most names of countries, places, metals. 
 
 V. Foreign nouns usually retain their original gender. 
 
 VI. Compound nouns follow the gender of their last component. (Excep- 
 tions, see § 122.) 
 
 VII. Some nouns have two genders, with a difference of meaning ; as, bet 
 SSanb, bo3 Sonb, etc. These will be referred to hereafter. (§ 426.) 
 
 VIII. As already seen (§ 106), some nouns are of uncertain gender, or ai 
 least of divided usage. These details must be found in the dictionary. 
 
48 LESSON VIII. 
 
 126. Vet, after all rules, the gender of German nouns 
 must be learned largely by experience. The subject should, 
 therefore, receive the constant attention of the student. 
 Especially it is recommended that the habit should be 
 formed o| associating with every noun that is learned the 
 appropriate form of the definite article, and of regularly using 
 the article when naming a noun; as, ber ^"9/ ^i* Bwc^t, baS 
 3eu0, etc. 
 
 LESSON VIII. 
 The l)eclension of Adjectives. 
 
 127. Adjectives used in the predicate — that is, in con- 
 nection with the verb — are not declined ; as has been 
 seen already. 
 
 128. Adjectives used appositively — that is after the 
 noun — are also not declined ; as, bte SBctume, gro^ itnb 
 griin, the trees, large and green. 
 
 Note. — This may be considered as a kind of elliptical predicate con- 
 struction, for the trees (which are) large and green. 
 
 129. Adjectives used attributively — that is before a 
 noun, expressed or understood — are declined. ^ 
 
 130. There are two declensions of the attributive ad-, 
 jective, the strong and the weak. The combination of 
 these forms the mixed declension. 
 
 Note. — The term adjective here includes only qualifying adjectives, not 
 the pronominals. 
 
STRONG DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 49 
 
 The Strong Declension of Adjectives. 
 
 131. When the attributive adjective is not preceded 
 by one of the articles, or by any other pronominal adjective 
 of like inflection, it takes the endings of btefer (§ 86). 
 
 Note. — It is usual to speak of this declension as like that of the definite 
 article. But see § 87. 
 
 132. These endings are (see § 86) : 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 masc. 
 
 fern. 
 
 neut. 
 
 m.f. n. 
 
 Nom. -er 
 
 -e 
 
 -e§ . 
 
 -e 
 
 Gen. -e§ '\ 
 
 -er 
 
 -e§- 
 
 -er 
 
 D*t. -em 
 
 -er 
 
 -^tn 
 
 -en 
 
 Ace. -en 
 
 -e 
 
 -e§ 
 
 -e 
 
 Note. — The declension of blefer is made by adding these endings to 
 the root bieS. Similarly, all adjective pronouns, except those in § 88. 
 
 With these endings decline in full, both horizontally and ver- 
 tically (see § 72 V), the adjectives gut, fc^led^t, olt, jung, neu, 
 gro^, Itetn, etc. Decline also with nouns, as follows (see§ 133): 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Masculine. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 N. guter SBetn, good wine. gute 28eine, good wines. 
 
 f ^■'G. gute^ 9Beine§, of good wine, guter SBeine, of good wines. 
 D. gutem 2Betne, to good wine. guten SESeinen, to good wines. 
 A. guten 2Bein, good wine. gute SBeine, good wines. 
 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 gro^e ^reube, great joy. 
 
 gro^e jjreuben, great joys. 
 
 G. 
 
 grower greube. 
 
 grower fjreuben. 
 
 D. 
 
 grower greube. 
 
 gro^en ^reuben. 
 
 A. 
 
 gro^e g^reube. 
 
 gro|e jjreuben. 
 
so LESSON VIII. 
 
 Neuter. 
 Singular. Flural. 
 
 N. feineS %vAi, fine doth. feine SCii^er, 
 
 , .-- fiv- feine|%ud^e§, feiner SCu^er, 
 
 D. "feinem 2;ud^e, feinen SEudjern, 
 
 A. fetne§ S^ut^. feine S^iid^er. 
 
 133. Before masculine and neuter genitives in e§ or g, 
 the adjective genitive now usually ends in en instead of 
 e§. Thus : guten 2Betne§, feinen S:ucf)e§, etc. 
 
 Note. — This is to avoid repetition of the same strong form. The form 
 -en should hereafter be generally used in paradigms and exercises. 
 
 Present Indicative of the Verb l^aBett, to hUve. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 t^ l^abe, I have. ictr ^aben, we have. 
 
 bu l^aft, thou hast. t^r ^abt, you have. 
 
 er l^at, he has. ' fie l^aben, they havK 
 
 fie l^at, she has. 
 
 e§ l^at, it has. l^aben toir, have wet ' 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 6I0U, Hue. fi^toarj, Wac/J. ber 51SIa|, the place, square. 
 
 gelb, yellow. rot, r^/f. lieb, </i?ar. bie §tttte, the hut, cottage. 
 
 toei^, zc/^zfe. breit, broad. bie glafc^e, M,? bottle. 
 
 EXERCISE VIII. 
 
 I. 3n ben ©arten be§ g^iirften finb gro^e, griine Saume unb 
 fd^one bkue unb gelbe SBlumen. 2. 2Bei|e§ S3rot tft gut, (i!o<a 
 fc^toarjeS tft aud^ gut. 3. 5Die ©otbaten ^aben blaue ober rote 
 g^ocfe. 4. ^ari§ unb Sonbon finb gro^e ©tabte. 5. §ier finb lange 
 ©trafeen unb breite %Va.%t. 6. ©ute ^inber finb bie fjreube i^re§ 
 SSaterS unb i^rer 2J{utter. 7. ^leifeige ©d^ttlev ^aben nU^Ii^e 
 
WEAK DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 5 1 
 
 iBitd^er. 8. §aft bu BlaueS ober toei^eS ^a)3ier? 9. gd^ ^aBe 
 roteg. 10. Jgat er rotes gSa^jter ? n. @r l^at hjei^eS. 12. 3)ietne 
 SSruber l^aben neue 9?D(fe unb neue ^Pantoffeln, a6er alte Sttefet(n). 
 13- 5Die §aufer reic^er ^iirften ftnb gro^, aber bie ^iitten armer 
 Sauetn finb fletn. 14. 2[lter greunb, ico bift bu? 15. SiebeS 
 tinb, neue SUd^er finb oft f4)lec^t ; gute SBud^er finb oft alt. 16. 
 ©ine glafd^e roten $B«ineg ift auf (on, dat>) bem 2;tfd^e. 
 
 I. The streets of large towns are long. 2. This (bie§) is a 
 day of great joy. 3. Young children and old men were in the 
 garden of the prince. 4. Have you new slippers, new hats, 
 and new coats } 5. The houses of poor peasants are often 
 small huts. 6. Dear brother, thou art the joy of thy father. 
 7. Dear sister, thou art the joy of thy mother. 8. Good 
 scholars are industrious. 9. Have these soldiers blue or red 
 coats ? 10. They have red [ones]. 11. Have you warm water ? 
 12. We have cold [water]. 13. My father has good old friends. 
 14. In the nursery are good beds. 15. Dear children, you are 
 industrious. 16. I am the teacher of industrious boys. 17. 
 She has sharp needles. 18. They have bottles of old wine. 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 
 Weak Declension of Adjectives. . 
 
 134. When the attributive adjective is preceded by the 
 definite article or an adjective pronoun of three termina- 
 tions (§ ^i"]), it loses its own distinctive endings ; that is, 
 it takes in the nominative singular of all three genders, 
 and in the accusative singular feminine and neuter, the 
 termination -e, and in all other cases of the singular and 
 plural, -en. This is called the weak declension. 
 
52 LESSON IX. 
 
 The combined endings, pronominal and adjective, will 
 then be (the former strong, the latter weak) : 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 masc. 
 
 fern. 
 
 neut. 
 
 m.f. n. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 -er -e 
 
 -e -e 
 
 -eS -e 
 
 -e -en 
 
 Gen. 
 
 -e§ -en 
 
 -er -en 
 
 -e§ -en 
 
 -er -en 
 
 Dat. 
 
 -em -en 
 
 -er -en 
 
 -em -en 
 
 -en -en 
 
 Ace. 
 
 -en -en 
 
 -e -e 
 
 -e§ -e 
 
 -e -en 
 
 These combined endings should also be learned both horizontally and 
 vertically ; for, though they occur in practice only before single nouns, it is 
 important that the adjective declension should itself be perfectly familiar. 
 Thus decline, masc. biefer alte ; fem. bie|e alte ; neut. biefeg alte. Similarly, 
 ber gutc, bie gute, bo8 gute (bearing in mind the peculiarities of the definite 
 article). For the adjective endings alone, see Synopsis, p. 67. 
 
 135. It will be observed that the declension of the adjective 
 itself is here less explicit, the forms of gender, number, case 
 being for the most part expressed by the foregoing pronominal. 
 It is therefore to the latter, chiefly, that in this combination the 
 student will look to determine the form of the adjective or of 
 the noun. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Siefer grune Saum, thia green tree. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 N. bte[er gritne Saum, biefe griinen SSftume, 
 
 G. biefeS griinen SaumeS, biefer griinen Sciume, 
 
 D. biefem griinen Saume, biefen grUnen Saumen, 
 
 A. biefen griinen SSaum. biefe griinen ^aume. 
 
weak declension of adjectives. s3 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 Scnc fd)one gfrau, that beautiful woman. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 N. jenefd^one g^rau, jene f^onen g^rauen, 
 
 G. jener fc^onen g^rau, jener fd^onen g^rauen, 
 
 D. jener f^onen grau, jenen f^onen ^rauen, 
 
 A. iene f^iine ^rau. jene fd^ijnen grauen. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 aScIdjeS alte <Sd)Iofi, wUleh old castle. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 N. h3eId^e§aIte-©c^Io^, toetd^e alien ©d^tijffer, 
 
 G. toetc^eS alten ©d^IoffeS, toelc^er alien ©d^toffer, 
 
 D. ioeld^em alien ©d^loffe, toeld^en alien S^loffern, 
 
 A. toeld^eS alte ©(^lo|. hjeld^e alien ©d^loffer. 
 
 Decline in the same way : jeber treue greunb, ber guie ^naBe, 
 bie Kebe 2;od^ter, ba§ neue ^au^, etc., etc 
 
 (a) The d^ of l^od^ is changed into ^, in all inflections, before 
 e (§ 156) : ber l^o^e 33erg, the high mountain ; ^o^e S^annen, tall firs. 
 
 Let the teacher add similar examples ; and also, such as the following : 
 Determine gender, number, case of be« oltcn 2)ionne8, ben fllten SUtoitn, ber 
 neuen iBilc^er, ben neuen i8iicf)ern, etc. And point out ambiguity of form; as 
 in bie alten SKfinncr (nom. or ace. pi.), ben guten SnaBen (ace. sing, or dat. pi.), 
 
 etc. Also, given the gender of the noun, decline, from root-forms only : bie{- 
 ^oth S8num, jcn- btau- iBIume ; or with the article : b- Icing- 3af)r, etc. etc. 
 
 Remark. — This is really a combined declension of the adjective with the 
 preceding pronominal. The adjective endings occur only when so preceded, 
 and the two together determine the form. For this reason the paradigms 
 have been given in combination. The same principle applies to the mixed 
 declension. (Less, x.) 
 
54 LESSON IX. 
 
 The Past Indicative of ^abm. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 id^ l^atte, I had. totr l^atten, we had. 
 
 bu ^atteft, thou hadst. i^r ^attet, you had. 
 
 er ^tte, he had. fie l^atten, they had. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 jtttei, two. ber Storben, the North. \tii, fat. 
 
 iixiSd^me, the snow. h'^'Su'bin, the South. pxtu^i^f^, Prussian. 
 
 bie @rbe, the earth, ber 3JlaIer, the painter. engltf(^, English. 
 
 world. \land. bebetft, covered. franjojifd^, French. 
 
 \i\i<^icj«)ix^, Switzer- htxix^mi, famous. unUv, under, 
 
 EXERCISE IX. 
 
 I. ®er junge ^Bnig unb ber atte g^iirft finb in bem gro^en 
 ©(|Ioffe be§ reic^ien ©rafen. 2. ^ene alte %xavi ^at ^tcei jc^one 
 %'d^ttx. 3. 2)ie fleinen ^naben l^atten neue 3to(Je. 4. 2)ie tiefen 
 Spier unb bie^ol^en ©ebirge [ber] ©d^iueij finb ntit grilnen S^annen 
 unb tnit tnei^em Sd^nee bebedt. 5. 5Dte ftarJen SBoHer ber @rbe 
 finb in bem lalten 3lorben. 6. ^n bem toarmen ©iiben finb bie 
 SKenfd^en fd^icad^. 7. ®te toarmen Saber ber fleinen aber alien 
 ©tabt ®m§ finb berii^mt. 8. Sie reic^en Sauern l^atten f(^one 
 ^aufer. 9. fatten bie £inber beg berii^mten i|]rofeffor8 ba§ gro^e 
 neue SBorterbud^ be§ [§errn] ©oftor ©c^toarj? 10. Sie l^atten bie 
 alte ©rammatif unfereS guten Sel^rerg. 11. Sie fetten Dd^fen 
 unb ^iil^e finb unter ben l^ol^en Saumen in bem grunen f$^elbe. 
 12. fatten bie fleifeigen Sc^iiler bie neue ©rammatif beg berii^mten 
 sprofefforg? 13. Unter ben l^o^en Saumen in bem gro^en SEBalbe 
 ift nod^ tiefer, tnei^er ©(^nee. 
 
 I. The young princes are with their old teacher in the new 
 castle of the king. 2. This high tree has green leaves. 3. The 
 famous old count had two young children. 4. The blue coats 
 
MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 55 
 
 of the Prussian soldiers. 5. The red coats of the English 
 soldiers. 6. The French grammar of this industrious boy. 7. 
 •In the beautiful houses of these rich ladies are the paintings of 
 famous painters. 8. The famous painter has been in the South 
 oif England. 9. The snow of the cold North is deep. 10. 
 Those white geese are in our rich neighbor's garden. 11. The 
 green fields are covered with white snow. 12. The warm beds 
 of the little children are in the nursery. 13. This Englishman 
 and this American have been on (auf, with the dative) the high 
 mountains of Switzerland. 14. The long streets of this old 
 town are broad. 15. The new names of the old streets of Paris. 
 16. This old teacher is the good friend of the poor scholars. 
 
 LESSON X. 
 The Mixed Declension of Adjectives. 
 
 136. It has been seen that when the distinctive endings 
 of gender, number, case, are expressed by the preceding 
 word, these are not repeated by the adjective, in the weak 
 declension. The same principle determines the mixed 
 declension. 
 
 137. When the adjective is preceded by the indefinite 
 article, or by one of the pronominals declined like it (§ 88), 
 it takes the distinctive forms of the strong declension 
 where these words are without ending; that is, in the 
 singular nominative, er for the masculine, e§ for the 
 neuter; and e§ also for the accusative neuter. In all 
 other parts the endings follow the weak declension. 
 
 138. The combined endings, pronominal and adjective, 
 will then be as follows : 
 
5& 
 
 
 LESSON 
 
 X. 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 mas. 
 
 /em. 
 
 tieut. ■ 
 
 m. f. n. 
 
 Norn. 
 
 — -cr 
 
 -e -e 
 
 CS 
 
 -e -en 
 
 Gen. 
 
 -eg -en 
 
 -er -en 
 
 -e§ -en 
 
 -er -en 
 
 Dat. 
 
 -em -en 
 
 -er -en 
 
 -em -en 
 
 -en -en 
 
 Ace. 
 
 -en -en 
 
 -e -e 
 
 eg 
 
 -e -en 
 
 — the adjective differing from the weak declension only in 
 the forms printed with heavy type — the entire feminine 
 and plural bfeing the same in both declensions. (See § 134.) 
 {S) It is this form of the adjective, partly strong and partly 
 weak, that gives rise to the term mixed declension. But it must be 
 observed that there are only two possible forms of the adjective 
 in any case — : one when not preceded by a determining ending, 
 and one when so preceded. In the former it is the adjective 
 itself, in the latter the determining word, that must be looked 
 to, for gender, number, case. 
 
 Note. — The three declensions of the adjective are sometimes known as 
 (i) Simple, (2) Definite, (3) Indefinite. The first, or strong, is the primar^ 
 form. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Masculine. 
 
 @in %o\>tx Serg, a high, mountain. 
 
 Singular. Plural {strong). 
 
 N. ein f^ol^er Serg, l^ol^e Serge, 
 
 G. eineS l^ol^en 33erge§, l^ol^er SBerge, 
 
 D. einem l^o^en Serge, l^ol^en Sergen, 
 
 A. einen l^ol^en Serg. l^ol^e Serge. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 SOtetnc Ifebe iSd)tt)eficr, my dea/r sister. 
 Singular. Plural {weak). 
 
 N. meine liebe ©d^toefter, meine lieben ©c^ioeftem, 
 
 G. meiner lieben ©d^toefter, meiner lie&en ©d^toeftem, 
 D. meiner lieben ©d^irefter, meinen lieben ©c^toeftern, 
 A. meine liebe ©d^toefttr. meine lieben ©d^toeftem. 
 
declension of adjectives. 57 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 Sein oonti ®lai, his full glass. 
 
 Singular. Plural (weak"). 
 
 N. fein bolleg ®la§, fetne bollen ©lafet, 
 
 G. feineg boHen ©kfe§, feiner tioKen ©lafer, • 
 
 D. feinem boEen ©lafe, fetnen Dotlen ©tftfem, 
 
 A. feitt botte§ ®Ia§. feme boEen ©lafer. 
 
 Remarks on Adjective Declension.' 
 
 139. Adjectives ending in the unaccented syllables el, en, er, 
 usually reject the e either of the termination or of the declen- 
 sional ending : ebel, noble, is usually declined ebler, ebte, eble§ ; 
 felten, rare, feltner, feltne, feltneS ; l^eiter, cheerful, l^eitrer, ^eitre, 
 ^eitre§; but sometimes (before n or m) ebein, l^eiterm (§85, note). 
 
 140. Adjectives used as nouns retain the declension of 
 adjectives. Thus: beutfd^, German; ein ©eutfc^er, a German; 
 eine§ ®eutf d^en, of a German ; eine Seutf d^e, a German woman ; 
 bie ©eutf^en, the Germans; bie Sllte, the old woman ; ber Stetc^e, 
 the rich man ; bie Sieid^en, the rich (persons) ,• baS (Sute, the good 
 (abstract). 
 
 141. Participles, when used attributively, are declined as 
 adjectives; as, Itebenb, loving; geliebt, loved; ein liebenber 
 SSruber, a loving brother; ber geliebte g^reunb, the loved friend. 
 Also when used as nouns : ein Siebenber, a lover; bie ©eliebte, 
 the beloved (one) ; bie ©eliebten, the beloved {ones). 
 
 142. Adjectives, generally, may be used, without inflection, 
 as adverbs : er fd^reibt fd^neE, he writes rapidly. 
 
 143. Adjectives in er, derived from names of places, are 
 indeclinable : ba§ ^etbelberger jjafe, the Heidelberg tun; ber Joiner 
 Sotn, the Cathedral of Cologne. (See § 395, 3). 
 
58 LESSON X. 
 
 144. ®anj, whole, and ]^al&, half, are indeclinable when used 
 alone before the names of countries and places, but are else- 
 where declined. Thus: ganj ©nglanb, all England; but ba§ 
 ganje (Snglanb ; l^db Sonbon, bte l^albe ©d^ioetj, etn ^alber S^l^aler. 
 
 145. The neuter termination eg of the nominative and 
 accusative sing, is frequently dropped in familiar conversation 
 and in poetry. Thus: Sitter Sier, bitter beer; alt ®ifen, old 
 iron ; fait SBafjer, ^^/</ water; ein fd^toer 3Serbrec^en, a heavy crime. 
 
 146. The declension of the adjective remains the same if its 
 noun is understood. In this case the English one, ones, are not 
 expressed in German; as, ein reifer 2lJ)fel unb ein unretfer; a 
 ripe apple and an unripe one. 
 
 147. Two or more adjectives under the same circumstances 
 will take the same declension ; as, metn Iteber, alter g^reunb, 
 my dear old friend; ber liebe, alte SKann, the dear old man. 
 
 Note. — Sometimes, especially in poetry, occurs a euphonic form in -e, 
 as l^eUe for l)eU , etc. 
 
 The Perfect and Pluperfect of !^aicn. 
 
 148. The perfect and pluperfect of the verb f)a6cn are 
 formed, as in English, by adding the perfect participle ge^ 
 l^abtj had, to the present and past tenses of the same verb 
 as auxiliary — position as § 108, b. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 vS^ l^abe gel^abt, I have had. totr l^aben gel^abt, we have had. 
 bu l^aft ge^abt,. thou hast had. i^r t)abt ge^abt, you have had. 
 er l^at gefiabt, he has had. fie l^aben gel^abt, they have had. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Ki) l^atte gel^abt, I had had. toir fatten gel^abt, we had had. 
 bul^atteft gel^abt, thou hadsthad. i^r Ijattet ge|abt, you had had. 
 er l^atte gel^abt, he had had. fie l^atten ge^abt, they had had. 
 
DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 59 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 bte 33t6Itotl^eI^ the library. glutfUd^, happy. 
 
 bag Sanbgut, the estate. angenel^m, agreeable, pleasant. 
 
 ba§ ^leib, the dress, garment. feiben, silken. 
 
 bie SBefte, the vest, waistcoat. \\x%, sweet. 
 
 bie 36it/ ^f''^ time. fauer, sour. 
 
 bie ^^itung, the newspaper. reif, ripe. 
 
 ber {Jronjo'f e, the Frenchman. unreif, unripe. 
 
 ber SRl^em, the Rhine. !6mglic§, royal. 
 
 bai &IM, fortune, luck. nic^t, not. 
 
 'iiK'B'pxaiji, the speech, language, xntmer, always. 
 
 • EXERCISE X. 
 
 I. Ser olte ©olbat §atte eincn roten Slod ge^aBt. 2. ®tn 
 f^hjarjer §ut, eine blaue. SSefte unb ein inei^eS §emb. 3. SRetne 
 ©c|)it)efter ^at ein feibneS ^(eib. 4. 3n ber foniglic^en 58i6Iiot^ef 
 finb englif^e, franjofifd^e unb beutfd^e Siid^er. 5. ^t^. '^'^^^ ^i" 
 beutf(^e§ SBorterbud^. 6. gjjeine ©d^luefter ^at ein franjofifc^eS 
 2Borterbu(^ ge^abt. -7. §at fie eine englifd^e ©rammatif ge^Bt? 
 8. ©in reifer Sljjfel ift fii^, aber ein unfeifer ift fauer. 9. 3)iefe§ 
 gro^e £anbgut ift ba8 ©igentum einer alten ®ame. 10. ©c^on(e8) 
 abetter ift 3llten unb ^ungen {dat.) angenel^m. 11. ®a§ ©tubium 
 ber ©^jra^eri ift fel^r niillid^. 12. ®ie Steic^en finb ni(^t immer 
 gliidlid^. 13. 9Jleine Sriiber l^atten gro^e§ ©liiif ge^abt. 14. §aft 
 bu bie Joiner 3eitung, mein guter ^nabe? 15. SBir l^aben leine 3«tt 
 gel^abt. 16. ein ©uter liebt (loves) baS ©ute, ein (jbler bag ©bie. 
 
 I. We have no German and no French books. 2. My English 
 dictionary is a good book. 3. My brother has had no time. 
 4. Has your ^ister no black dress ? 5. Masson's Grammar of 
 the French language is a very useful book. 6. In the royal 
 library are French grammars and English dictionaries. 7.. The 
 gentleman with the white hat is an old general. 8. In this long 
 street is a large old house; it is the boys'-school. 9. Ripe 
 apples are sweet, but unripe [ones] are sour. 10. The Rhine is 
 
60 LESSON XI. 
 
 a large river, ii. The language of the Germans is the German 
 language. 12. The language of the French is the French lan- 
 guage. 13. The old and the young were happy. 14. The Rhine 
 was not always a German river. 15. Have you had the Cologne 
 newspap^? 16. Had the scholars had new books? 17. Every 
 good child had had a beautiful flower. 18. All Germany is 
 under the noble old German emperor (da/.). 
 
 LESSON XI. 
 Comparison of Adjectives. 
 
 149. The comparative and superlative of adjectives are 
 formed by adding er for the comparative and eft for the 
 superlative. 
 
 150. Except after a sibilant ending {§, j, ^, fc£)) and b or 
 t, the e is regularly dropped in the superlative. Adjectives 
 ending in el, en, er, e, drop e before the comparative er (§139). 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 laut, loud, lauter, tauteft. 
 
 fii|, sweet, filler, fiifeeft. 
 
 fc^iin, beautiful, fd^ijner, fd^Bnft. 
 
 reic^, rich, reid^er, reid^ft. 
 
 ebel, noble, ebler, ebelft. 
 
 trcige, lazy, trager, trag(e)ft. 
 
 151. Most monosyllabic adjectives whose vowel is a, 0, 
 or u (not au) modify the vowel in the comparative and 
 superlative. 
 
 alt, old, alter, ftlteft. 
 
 rot, red, roter, rSteft. 
 
 lurj, short, lutjer, fiirjeft. 
 
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 6l 
 
 152. Some of the most important adjectives to be remembered 
 which do not modify the vowel in the comparative and superla- 
 tive are : — 
 
 T firaiJ, brave, worthy. raf^, quick. 
 
 J6unt, variegated, gay. ftolj, proud. 
 
 ^\cS\6^ , false. totl, mad. 
 
 r- fKOi^,/i?j/«/, happy. 'osM.,full. 
 
 tdl^m, lame. ja^tn, tame. 
 
 (a) A few adjectives use both forms ; as, frotnm, pious; 
 frotntner or frotnmer, fromntft or frommft. 
 
 153. A comparison of equality is expressed by placing fo or 
 eben fo (even so) before the adjective, and after it icie or al§, as. 
 §en; ©d^mtbt ift e6en fo rei(| toie §err ©d^ulje, Mr. Schmidt is as 
 rich as Mr. Schulze. §err §etnrid^ ift ein eben fo braber SKann 
 tote §err SKiiffer, Mr. Henry is as worthy a man as Mr. Miiller. 
 @r ift ntd^t fo ebel alg Itug, he is not as noble as prudent (§450, 2). 
 
 154. The English than is expressed by alS. Thus : 3)ie 2^age 
 finb longer itn ©ommer al§ int SSinter, the days are longer in 
 summer than in winter. 
 
 155. Comparatives and superlatives are subject to the 
 same rules of declension as the positive. Thus : ein 
 ret(f)erer 9JJann, a richer man ; ber rei(J|fte SK ann, the richest 
 man ; retc^ere SIRanner, richer men ;. metn iittefter 95ruber ift 
 retl^er ate td§, my eldest brother is richer than I, etc. 
 
 Note. — The er of the comparative must not be confounded with the er 
 of the adjective inflection ; as, veid)er may be either positive or comparative, 
 in different positions. Note also that the endings of inflection are added 
 after those of comparison. Also that all adjectives are compared alike, 
 without regard to their length. 
 
 156. The following are irregular : — ' 
 
 gut, good, beffer, beft, ber befte. 
 
 biel, much, tnel^r, meift, ber meifte. 
 
62 LESSON XI. 
 
 ^0^, high, changes d^ to ^(§ 135, a) in the comparative, l^ij^ei;, 
 l^D^ft, ber |)6d^fte. The -1^ of naif), near, na^er, becomes ii, in 
 the superlative: na(^ft, ber nad^fte. ©ro^, great, tall, grij^er, 
 is contracted in the superlative: ber grb^te, instead of ber 
 gro^efte. •> 
 
 157. From erft, le^t (ber erfte, the first, ber Ie|te, the last), 
 which are really superlatives, are formed the new comparatives : 
 ber erftere, the former, ber le^tere, the latter. Similarly, mel^rere, 
 several, from tne^r, more. (Compare the English lesser.") 
 SOttnber, less, minbeft, least, has no positive. 
 
 158. The following adjectives, derived from adverbs or 
 prepositions, are comparatives in form, but have the meaning 
 of simple adjectives. They form their superlative by adding the 
 superlative suffix to the suffix of the comparative : — 
 
 ober, upper ; ber oBerfte, the uppermost. 
 
 unter, under; ber unterfte, the undermost. 
 
 inner, inner; ber innerfte, the inmost. 
 
 ftu^er, outer; ber au^erfte, the outmost. 
 
 Mox'UlXffore; ber borberfte, the foremost. 
 
 l^inter, hinder; ber ^interfte, the hindmost. 
 
 mittler, middle; ber mtttelj'te, the middlemost. 
 
 The Future of !^aBcn. 
 
 159. The future of the verb t)aben is formed by adding 
 the infinitive !^a6en to the present tense of the auxiliary 
 verb toerben — the infinitive at end of the clause (as § 114). 
 
 \&l toerbe ^aben, I shall have. toir hierben ^aben, we shall have. 
 bu toirft l^aben, thou wilt have, i^r tcerbet ^aben, you will have, 
 er hjirb l^aben, he will have. fie toerben l&aben, they will have. 
 
 And interrogatively : toerbe id) t)a6en ? etc. 
 
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 63 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ba§ ©tfen, iron. ber Somtner, summer. 
 
 ber t^s^'er, //^if mistake, fault. bte Slot, M^ distress. 
 im (contraction of in bent), z« if-4^. ber ©todf, ^>5^ story, floor. 
 ber SBinter, wzw^^n ioenig, ///if/^,- pl./ew. 
 
 EXERCISE XI. 
 
 I. ®te reid^ften Seute ftnb nt^t immer bte gliidUd^fteti. 2. @r ift 
 ber retc^fte Mam in ber ganjen ©tabt. 3. SDie 5j:age ftnb furjer im 
 SBtnter al8 im ©ommer. 4. ®ie beften t)3fel finb nic^t tmmer auf 
 ben l^o^ften SBaumen. 5. 2Bir l^atten bte ^eiterften ®eban!en. 
 6. 2Sir toerben morgen ba§ fd^onfte SSetter l^aben. 7. ®ie Slrmen ftnb 
 oft fro^er aU bie 9teid^eren. 8. 5Da§ gifen ift ba§ ntt|li(|fte mttaW. 
 9. SKetn SSruber l^at einen langeren Srtef al§ t^. 10. 5Dte ©ebirge 
 [ber] ©d^hjeij ftnb l^o^er alS bte ©ebirge ©eutf^Ianbg. 11. S)ie 
 l^oc^ften ©ebirge finb in 3tfien. 12. ^n meinem ©jercitium finb 
 bie toenigften g^el^Ier. 13. ^^ toerbe morgen toenige jje^ler in 
 meinem ©jercittum ^ahtn. 14. 5Dte bunteften SSogel finb ntd^t 
 immer bie fd^onften. 15. 2)a8 §eiligfte tear im ^nnerften beg 
 3;em^3elg. 16. SReife j^ritd^te ftnb beffer all bie unreifen. 
 
 1. When shall we have the longest day and the shortest 
 night? 2. Frederick was the greatest and most famous king 
 of Prussia. 3. She has two younger sisters. 4. He is with his 
 elder brother in Berlin. 5. He is taller than his brother. 
 6. His younger brother has been [a] soldier. 7. This little book 
 is better than that big [one]. 8. We shall soon have the most 
 beautiful weather. 9. Ney was the bravest of the French. 10. 
 The poorest peasants are in Russia. 11. Henry will have a 
 longer letter than his younger brother. 12. The houses of 
 (the) towns are larger than the houses of (the) villages. 13. The 
 house of my father is in the longest street of the town. 1 4. We 
 shall next month (ace.) have the shortest days and the longest 
 nights. 15. The best cows are in Switzerland. 16. They were 
 
64 LESSON XII. 
 
 in the utmost distress. 17. My room is in the uppermost 
 story. 18. Henry is the first and Charles is the last in the 
 whole school. 19. We were the foremost. 20. The largest 
 rooms are not always in the largest houses. 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 The Predicate Superlative. 
 
 160. The uninflected form of the superlative cannot, like 
 the other degrees (§ 127), be used alone in the predicate. 
 Instead of this, there is a special form made up of an bent, 
 contracted into am, at the, and 'the dative of the super- 
 lative, which is used predicatively. Thus : Sm SBtnter 
 ftnb bie jTage am liirjeften unl im ©ommer om langften, in 
 •winter the days are shortest and in summer longest ; i. e., 
 at the shortest, etc. 
 
 161. This form, however, must be used only when the 
 adjective is the true predicate. If the noun is understood, or 
 the superlative is definitely limited, the regular inflected form 
 will be used; as, bie S^age im SBinter jinb bie lUrjeften (S^age) 
 be§ ^al^reg, the days in winter are the shortest {days) of the year. 
 For further distinction, see § 450, 3. 
 
 162. {a) Many adjectives are derived from nouns : — 
 miitterlic^, motherly. ^tivxih^xi), friendly, pleasant, 
 
 bixtixli^, fatherly. ^errltd^, splendid, lordly. 
 
 {b) Others are derived from other adjectives : — 
 blault^, bluish. iDei|li(^, whitish. 
 
 rotltd^, reddish. griinli(|, greenish. 
 
 (e) Many are formed by composition (see Less, xliv.) : — 
 eiSlalt, cold as ice. f euertot, red as fire. 
 
 fd^neetoet^, white as snow. lo^If(|toarj, black as coal. 
 
ADJECTIVES. 65- 
 
 The Future Perfect of !§aiien. 
 
 163. The future perfect of t)a6en is formed by adding the 
 perfect participle and infinitive of f)a6en, to the present 
 tense of the auxiliary verb toerben. The participle and 
 infinitive go to the end of the clause, as § 123, a. 
 
 id^ toerbe gel^abt l^afcen, I shall have had. 
 bu toirft ge^abt ^a6en, thou wilt have had. 
 er toirb gel^abt l^aBen, he will have had. 
 toir Soerben gel^afit l^aben, we shall have had. 
 VcjX toerbet gel^aBt ^johm, you will have had. 
 fie ioerben ge^abt ^a6en, they will have had. 
 
 Prepositions governing the Dative. 
 
 164. The following prepositions always govern the 
 dative : — 
 
 aui, out of, from. Jtad^, to, after, according to. 
 
 au^er, without, except, besides. feit, since. 
 
 bet, by, near, with, at the house toon, of, from, by. 
 
 mtt, with. [of. ju, to, at, in, for, to the house of. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ber Dnlel, the uncle. ^ei^, hot. 
 
 bie 2;ante, the aunt. fii^I, cool. 
 
 ber ^rii^Iing, spring. bebedEt, covered. 
 
 ber §erbft, autumn. ge^en, to go. 
 
 bie %okiXi%^i\i, the season. !ommen, to come. 
 
 bag SSetter, the weather, toann, when ? 
 
 bie SSoIfe, the cloud. niemanb, no one, nobody. 
 
 baS §aar, the hair. t)on §aufe,/w/« ho7ne. 
 
 bie ©efal^i'^ the danger. ju ^aufe, at home. 
 
 t>\iX,four. ju (adverb), too. 
 
(^ LESSON XII. 
 
 165. When a sentence is introduced by any word or 
 words modifying the verb, an inversion takes place ; that 
 is, the verb, instead of following, precedes the subject, 
 ©eftern toor td^ gii ^aufe, instead of id) tnar geftern gu §aufe; 
 but never, geftern i^ tear ju $aufe. 
 
 EXERCISE XII. 
 
 I. %m g^m^Kng .unb tm ^er&ft ift baS SJBetter ant fd^5nften. 
 2. (S8 ift nid^t gu l^ei| unb nid^t ju lalt. 3. ®te ^naben lommen 
 au8 ber ©d^ule. 4. SKein SSrub'er ift nid^t ju §aufe. 5. SJleine 
 jiingere ©c^itoefter ift tion §aufe; fie ift ki einer alien S^ante. 
 6. 3lu^er nxeinem Dn!el toar niemanb ju §aufe. I1. S3ei btefem 
 l^ei^en SSetter tear ber ^imntel mit rbttid^en unb icei^lid^en SSoIIen 
 bebedt. 8. 3flad^ bem etgJalten SBetter Iiatten toir ben ^errlid^ften 
 g^rii^Iing. 9. 3<^ ^<i6e !ein ®elb bei mir. 10. SBir lontmen toon 
 5]Sari§ unb gel^en nacj^ Sonbon. 11. 3)ie bier %o!ciXZ%%i\itv. finb: ber 
 grii^Iing, ber ©ommer, ber §erbft unb ber SBinter. 12. ®er fiel^rer 
 ift mit feinen ©c^iilern in ber ©d^ulftube. 13. ®ein Sruber ift au^er 
 ©efa^r. 14. ®te neuen ©tra^en Don ^arig finb bie fd^onften in 
 gan^ @uro;pa. 15. Stac^ bem ©ommer finb bie SCage nid^t fo lang 
 tuie im ©ommer. 16. SHeine jiingfte S£od^ter ift bei il^rer Stante (at 
 her aunt's). 17. ®er g'ru^Iing ift bie befte ^al^reSjeit be§ ganjen 
 ^al^reg. 18. ^m g^riii^Ung ift ba§ SSetter am angenel^mften. 
 
 I. She had a snow-white dress. 2. No one is here except 
 my teacher. 3. Spring, summer, autumn and winter are the 
 four seasons. 4. When will your brother be at home ? 5. He 
 has been from home the whole day {acc^. 6. He has been at (bet) 
 my aunt's. 7. The children are in (the) school with their books. 
 8. A cool night is agreeable after a hot day. 9. The boy with 
 the blue eyes and the very datk (lo^Ifd^toctrj) hair is a son of 
 our English teacher. 10. The sky is red-as-fire. 11. Hast 
 thou money about thee (bet bir)? 12. When is the weather 
 most beautiful? 13. It is most beautiful in summer. 14. The 
 
AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 67 
 
 weather is coldesf in winter. 15. They will have had no money. 
 16. The children will have had a pleasant evening. 17. A good 
 son is the greatest joy of his father and of his mother. 18. The 
 highest mountains in all Europe are in Switzerland, ig. In 
 the summer the days are longest and the nights shortest. 
 20. My older children go (ge^en) every summer (acc^ to their 
 uncle's (ju, dat^ in England. 21. In (the) winter the days are 
 the shortest of the whole year. 
 
 166. Synopsis of DecleBsion of Adjectives. 
 
 
 Strong. 
 
 
 Weak. 
 
 
 Mixi;d. 
 
 
 m. f. n. 
 
 pi. 
 
 m. 
 
 /. n. 
 
 pi. 
 
 m. 
 
 / n. 
 
 pi. 
 
 N. 
 
 er e e8 
 
 e 
 
 e 
 
 e e 
 
 en 
 
 er 
 
 e c5 
 
 en 
 
 G. 
 
 e8(en) ev e8(en) 
 
 er 
 
 en 
 
 en en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en en 
 
 en 
 
 D. 
 
 em er em 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en en 
 
 en 
 
 A. 
 
 en e eg 
 
 e 
 
 en 
 
 e e 
 
 en 
 
 ett 
 
 e c« 
 
 en 
 
 Note. — For further details on the Adjective, see Part III., Less. LIII. 
 
 LESSON XIII.* 
 The Auxiliary Verbs. 
 
 167. The conjugation of verbs in German, as in English, 
 is made up of simple and compound forms. 
 
 {a) The simple forms are those which are expressed by a 
 single word ; as, (tcE)) \:)o!ot (I) have; (icf)) tear (/) was, etc. 
 
 id) The compound forms consist of two or more 
 words, and are formed by the hefp of auxiliaries; 
 
 * With brief explanation, this Lesson, and the detailed verb-paradigms in 
 the three Lessons following, might be omitted, with pupils of some maturity. 
 
68 LESSON XIII. 
 
 as, (ic^) f)ahe gef)a6t, (/) /lave had; (tc§) toerbe f)a6en, (/) 
 shall have; (i^) luerbe get)a6t I)a6en, (/) shall havehad, etc. 
 
 1 68. The verbs used as auxiliaries in conjugation are 
 l^afien, to ^ave; fetit, to be; toerben, to become. These are 
 employed, as in English, in connection with the participle 
 or infinitive of a verb to form its compound parts. Hence 
 it is necessary that the uses of these verbs as auxiliaries, 
 and their conjugation, should be given in advance. 
 
 Note. — The simple parts of ^aBen, fein, luerben, have been in part given 
 already. For convenience of reference they are placed in the paradigms 
 § I75> § i8i, § 190; and they should now be thoroughly reviewed. 
 
 i6g. Remark. — i. Remember that Robert, fein, toerben are 
 themselves verbs, which are often used independently, as well 
 as in their auxiliary function. The two uses should always be 
 distinguished. 
 
 2. Remember, also, that the auxiliary is itself the verb, or 
 asserting part, of every compound verb form. As in English, 
 for example, / shall go : shall is the (auxiliary) verb, go the 
 infinitive object ; I am loved: am is the (auxiliary) verb, loved 
 the participle complement. 
 
 Note. — This remark is important, to correct the false habit of 
 considering such forms as made up of an auxiliary and u. verb. Such 
 is never the case. 
 
 3. Hence, whatever rules are given for the verb will apply, in 
 the compound forms, to the auxiliary, or finite, part thereof. 
 
 170. As has been seen, in compound (auxiliary) verb 
 forms, the participle or infinitive stands at the end of the 
 clause. If a participle and an infinitive are combined, the 
 infinitive will stand last. (§ 163.) 
 
 But special circumstances may require the auxiliary verb 
 itself to stand at the end, as will be seen hereafter. (§ 177.) 
 
AUXILIARY VERBS. 69 
 
 The Auxiliary !^afeen. 
 
 171. §a6en is used, as auxiliary, with the perfect 
 participle of all transitive and some intransitive verbs to 
 form the whole system of perfect tenses. Its use is the 
 same as that of have in English, except that it is not so 
 generally extended to intransitives. Each form of the 
 perfect is made by employing the corresponding part of 
 the auxiliary. Thus : 
 
 1. The present perfect — or perfect tense — by the present tense 
 
 of l^aben; as, x&i l^afce (je^abt, I have had; id^ l^abe geltebt, / 
 have loved, etc. 
 
 2. The past perfect — or pluperfect tense — by the past tense 
 
 of l^aben, as, id^ l^atte ge^abt, I had had; id^ l^atte getiebt, T 
 had loved, etc. 
 
 3. The infinitive perfect, by the infinitive of ^aben ; as, gel^abt 
 
 l^aben, to have had ; geKebt ^aben, to have loved, etc. 
 
 4. As will be seen § 173, a, the perfect infinitive is used in 
 
 forming the perfect of the future and conditional ; as in 
 English: I shall — have loved ; I should — have loved, &tc. 
 And similarly for the subjunctive forms. 
 
 Note. — It thus appears that ^aBcn as auxiliary is used in the con- 
 jugation of ^afien as an active verb. 
 
 The Auxiliary feitt. 
 
 172. @ein is used as auxiliary with the perfect participle 
 to form the perfect tenses of most intransitive verbs. 
 This use was formerly much more extended in English 
 than at present ; for example, / am come, for / have come, 
 etc. (See Lesson xxxi.) 
 
 As in the case of f)abett, each perfect form is made by 
 employing the corresponding part of the auxiliary ; thus ". 
 
70 LESSON XIII. 
 
 1. The present perfect — or perfect tense; x^ bin gefomtnen, / 
 
 Aave (am) come; i^ bin getoorben, I have (am) become, etc. 
 
 2. The past perfect — or pluperfect; id^ 'max ge!ommen, I had 
 
 (was) come; \6^ 'max getoorben, I had (was) become, etc. 
 
 3. The infinitive perfect — gelommen fein, to have {be) come; ge= 
 
 toorben fein, to have (be) become, etc. And this form is used, 
 as above, in forming the perfect future and conditional.- 
 
 Note. — The verb fein forms its perfect tenses by the use of 'fein as 
 auxiliary; as, ic^ bin geWefen, I have been: literally, I am been, etc. So, 
 also, does hjerben. 
 
 The Auxiliary Inertiett. 
 
 173. SBerben is used as auxiliary with the infinitive of 
 all verbs to form the future and conditional tenses. 
 
 1. The future, by the present tense of toerben and the infinitive 
 
 present; as, t^ toerbe \)0&)^v., I shall have; fte tcerben fein, 
 they will be, etc. 
 
 (a) The future perfect, by the same form with the 
 infinitive perfect; as, id^ toerbe gel^abt ^aben, / shall have 
 had; fie tcerben getoefen fein, they will have been. 
 
 2. The conditional, by the past subjunctive of iuerben, with the 
 
 infinitive present ; as, id^ totirbe ^aben, T should have; fie 
 toiirben fein, they would be, etc. 
 
 (a) The conditional perfect by the same form with the 
 infinitive perfect ; as, ic^ ttiiirbe ge^abt l^aben, / should have 
 had; fie hjiirben getoefen fein, ihey would have been, etc. 
 
 The conditional is thus, by its form, a past (or imperfect) 
 subjunctive of the future. 
 
 Note. — It thus appears that TOerben in its auxiliary uses with the 
 infinitive corresponds to the English auxiliaries shall, will ; should, would, 
 respectively, according to persons. But this is true only when these words 
 are used as mere future or conditional auxiliaries, in certain persons. 
 When used outside of these persons, in their original proper meaning — 
 
AUXILIARY VERBS. 7 1 
 
 as, you shall go, I will arise, he should not act thus, etc. — these words are not 
 represented by lDerbett,but by foUeil and motten respectively (Lesson XXVI.). 
 
 174. SSerben is also combined, in all its parts, with the 
 
 perfect participle of transitive verbs to form the complete 
 
 passive conjugation. (Lesson XXVII.) 
 
 Remark. — Hence, for the conjugation of any verb, it is only necessary 
 to know the simple parts, and whether ^a6en or fein is the auxiliary of the 
 perfect tenses. All the compound parts can then be formed by general 
 rules, as above. But in the following paradigms, for convenience of study 
 or reference, the full conjugation is exhibited, as usual. 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 
 The (Auxiliary) Verb l§aBcn, to have. 
 
 175. Remark. — i. The forms of translation given in the 
 paradigm - are sometimes only representative. In English, for 
 example, there are auxiliary forms of tense which do not exist 
 in German ; as, / do have, am having, etc. The infinitive is 
 translated sometimes to have, sometimes have, or having. In 
 these cases the most usual forms only are given. 
 
 2. In the subjunctive especially there is no form in English 
 that suffices to represent, or even to suggest, its various uses 
 in German — the subjunctive itself being rarely used in 
 English, except in the verb to be. The forms here given are 
 therefore only some of the many forms of translation. 
 
 This remark applies generally to other verbs hereafter. 
 
 Note. — The infinitives and participles are given first, because they are 
 to some extent used iii the following conjugation. The perfect infinitive 
 also shows whether l^aben or fettl is used as the perfect auxiliary. 
 
 Present Infinitive. Present Participle. 
 
 l^aben, to have. l^abenb, having. 
 
 Perfect Participle. Perfect Infinitive. 
 
 gel^aftt, had. ge^a6t l^afien, to have had. 
 
72 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 id^ l^abe, I have. 
 bu ^aft, th^u hast. 
 er l^at, ^^i? has. 
 totr l^aben, w? ^(zw^. 
 
 fie ^aBen, //^^^ /^(zz"-?. 
 
 td^ ^atte, I had. 
 bu ^otteft, //%^« .^a^j'/. 
 er l^atte, he had. 
 totr l^atten, we had. 
 il^r ^attet, you had. 
 fie l^atten, //^c'' ^"■'i- 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 bu l^obeft, thou (mayst) have. 
 er ]^a6e, >^^ (may) have. 
 h)tr l^aben, ze/^ (may') have. 
 t^r ^abet, j'l??^ (z^ajv) ^a&^. 
 fie f)aben, they (may) have. 
 
 Past Tense. 
 
 td^ l^atte, I had, or, might have. 
 
 bu ^atteft, ^/5^«, etc. 
 
 er ^atte, ^?, etc. 
 
 ioir l^tcitten, -we, etc. 
 
 i^r pttet, you, etc. 
 
 fie l^atten, zi^cV) etc. , 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 
 td^ |abe ge^abt, I have had. 
 bu l^aft ge^abt, thou hast had. 
 er l^at gel^abt, ^^ /^a^ -^a^. 
 Vcir l^aben gel^abt, we have had. 
 it)r ^abt ge^abt, you have had. 
 
 id^ %(&i ge^abt, I (may) have had. 
 bu l^abeft gel^abt, thou, etc. 
 er l^abe gel^abt, he, etc. 
 toir ^aben gel^abt, we, etc. 
 i^r ^abet ge^abt, you, etc. 
 
 fie l^aben gel^abt, they have had. fie l^aben ge^abt, they, etc. 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 
 id^ l^atte gel^abt, T had had. id^ ^atte gc^abt, T had had, eXc. 
 
 bu ^atteft ge^abt, thou hadsthad. bu ^atteft ge^abt, thou, etc. 
 
 er l^atte ge^abt, he had had. er l^atte ge^abt, he, etc. 
 
 toir l^atten ge^abt, we had had. toir l^dtten gefiabt, we, etc. 
 
 it|r Ijattet ge^abt, you had had. i^r ^attet ge^abt, you, etc. 
 
 fie l^atten ge^abt, they had had. fie l^atten gel^abt, they, etc. 
 
AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 73 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Future Tense. 
 
 td^ toerbe l^aben, I shall have. t^ icerbe i)a&en, I shall have. 
 
 bu toirft l^aben, thou wilt have, bu toerbeft l^aben, thou wilt have 
 
 er icirb l^aben, he will have. er toerbe l^aben, he will have. 
 
 h)irt»erben l^aben, we shall have. it)ir toerben ^aben, we shall have. 
 
 Skft toerbet l^aben, ymi will have. 'Hcfi toerbet i&aben, you will have. 
 
 fie tcerben §aben, they will have, fie toerben l^aben, they will have. 
 
 \i) toerbe 
 bu toirft 
 er toirb 
 toir toerben 
 i^r toerbet 
 fie toerben 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 I shall have had. id^ toerbe 
 thou wilt, etc. bu toerbeft 
 he will, etc. er toerbe 
 we shall, etc. toir toerben 
 you will, etc. i^r toerbet 
 they will, etc. fie toerben 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 / shall have had. 
 thou wilt, etc. 
 he will, etc. 
 we shall, etc. 
 you will, etc. 
 they will, etc. 
 
 id^ toiirbe l^aben, I should have. 
 bu tourbeft ^aBen, thou wouldst have. 
 er toiirbe i^aben, he would have. 
 toir toiirben ^aben, we should have. 
 'HcjX toiirbet l^aben, you would have. 
 fie toiirben l^aben, they would have. 
 
 Conditional Perfect. 
 
 id^ toiirbe gel^abt l^aben, I should have had. 
 bu toiirbeft ge^abt l^aben, thou wouldst have had. 
 er toiirbe ge^abt l^aben, he would have had. 
 toir toiirben ge^abt ^aben, we should have had. 
 ykjX toiirbet ge^abt l^aben, you would have had. 
 fie toiirben gel^obt l^aben, they would have had. 
 
74 LESSON XIV. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 l^aben toir, let us have. 
 l^abe (bu), have {thou). l^abt (tl^r), have {ye). 
 
 \^(&t er, let him have. ^Ben fie, let them have. 
 
 176. Remark. — i. Of these forms, only those of the second 
 person are properly imperative. The others are subjunctive, 
 but are, for convenience, added to « the paradigm. In th^e 
 imperative proper the subject is usually omitted. / 
 
 2. An infinitive may be directly preceded by the preposition ju, 
 to: jul^aben; gel^obt ju ^aben. This form, sometimes called the 
 supine, answers very nearly to the corresponding English form. 
 
 lyy. First Kules of Position. 
 
 1. In the normal order of words the verb stands next after 
 
 the subject, as in the paradigm. 
 
 2. In a question, in the imperative, and usually when the sub- 
 
 junctive is used as imperative, the verb stands before the 
 subject ; as, l^abe i^, have I? 'ijoiit (bu) ©ebulb, have {thou) 
 patience; \^abz er ©ebulb, let him have patience, etc. 
 
 ,3. The same position occurs when an inversion takes place (see 
 § 165) ; as, morgen toerbe id^ einen ^etertag l^aben, to-morrow 
 I shall have a holiday, etc. 
 
 4. But in a dependent clause, the verb is transposed to the end 
 of the clause. Such are clauses beginning with ba^, that; 
 Joenn, if, and other subordinate connectives generally : ber 
 Secret fagt, ba^ id^ morgen einen ^Jeiertag ^ben toerbe, the 
 teacher says that I shall have a holiday to-morrow ; ic^ toiirbe 
 morgen einen g^eiertag l^aben, toenn id^ ^eute meine Slufgaben 
 gema(^t ^citte, / should have a holiday to-morrow if I had 
 done my lessons to-day. (Exceptions § 350.) 
 
 Observe that it is the verb that changes position. (Less, xxxvi.) 
 
AUXILIARY VERBS. 75 
 
 Remark. — The position of the verb in inverted, as also in 
 transposed order, is of so much importance, and so unlike the 
 English, that the student should be frequently required to 
 recite the paradigms in these forms ; as for example : 
 
 then I should have, etc. 
 bann toijrbe id^ l^aben. bann toiirben h5tr l^aBen. 
 
 bann hjurbeft bu ^aBen. bann toiirbet t^r l^aben. 
 
 bann toiirbe er l^o6en. bann toiirben fie ^a6en. 
 
 ' etc. 
 
 if I had had, etc. 
 
 toenn id^ gel^abt l^atte. toenn totr ge^abt l^atten. 
 
 toenn bu gel^att l^atteft. toenn i^r gel^abt l^attet. 
 
 toenn er gel^afet §atte. Soenn fie ge^abt l^atten. 
 
 etc. 
 
 Prepositions governin6 sthe Accusative. 
 
 178. The following prepositions always govern the 
 accusative case : — 
 
 burd^, through, by. ol^ne, without. 
 
 ^X,/or. urn, around, about. 
 
 gegen, towards, against. totber, against. 
 
 Prepositions which govern sometimes the Dative, 
 
 AND SOMETIMES THE ACCUSATIVE CaSE. 
 
 179. The following prepositions govern sometimes the 
 dative, and sometimes the accusative case. They govern 
 the dative in expressions of position, or motion in a place ; 
 and the accusative in expressions of direction, extent, or 
 motion to a place. , Sometimes this motion seems in 
 English to be only implied. — Examples : %^ ft|e aitf etltem 
 toeti^eit <Stut)te, / sit upon a soft chair. S(^ fe|e xoXi) auf 
 einen met(^en @tu|I, / seat myself on a soft chair, ©ai? 
 
76 LESSON XIV. 
 
 95tlb f)angt an ber SBanb, ^.^^ picture is hanging on the 
 ■wall. Sc^ tjcinge ba§ S5itb an bie SBanb, T hang the picture 
 up on the wall. (£r get)t t)or ba§ 3;f)or, ^^ ^o^j (out) in 
 front of the gate. @r ge'^t bor bem 2;f)ore auf unb ab, ^i? 
 walks up and down before the gate. 
 
 an, at, on. neben, beside. 
 
 auf, ««, «/tf«, at. tiber, (^z'^r, above, beyond, about. 
 
 l^tnter, behind. unter, under, below, among. 
 
 in, «■», ««/tf. bor, ^g/^ri?, a^^. 
 
 jtoifd^en, between. 
 VOCABULARY. 
 Present Tense of legcn, to lay. 
 
 Singular. — id^ lege, bu legft, er legt. 
 Plural. — toir legen, i^r legt, fie legen. 
 
 Kegen, to lie. gelegt/ la^id- 
 
 fe|en, to set, seat. g?f£|t/ ^^^i seated. 
 
 fi|en, to sit. gelauft, bought. 
 
 ftei^en, to stand. gemaci^t, made, done. 
 
 \hUtn, to place. Qt^U\it, placed. 
 
 retten, to ride. gefunben,/^««^. 
 
 er reitet, he rides. gegeben, given, 
 
 ioamm, why. gefc^rieben, written. 
 
 fic^, himself, themselves. gefel^en, seen. 
 
 i)tel, much. gegangen, gone. 
 
 mel^r, more (indecl.). gefommen, come. 
 
 i8o. Some Uses of the Subjunctive. 
 
 1. Observe that the past subjunctive is used in expressing a 
 condition, when stated as unreal. Ex. 9, 10, below. 
 
 2. Observe that the subjunctive is -also used in indirect 
 speech — that is, in a statement made on the authority of 
 another. Ex. 11, iz, below. 
 
AUXILIARY VERBS. J-J 
 
 EXERCISE XIV. 
 I. Sa§ i?inb |t|t auf einem !Ieinen ©tul^te. 2. gr fe|t baS 
 ^inb auf einen l^o^en ©tul)!. 3.,ajJettie 33ruber ftel^en bor ber 
 Sr^itre. 4. Unfere ^re'iinbe fteCCen \\&i (themselves) tjor bie 
 3:l^ure. s. Sie Siic^er liegen auf bem Sifd^e. 6. ^d^ lege bie 
 Sud^er auf ben SCtfd^. 7. SDer Snabe fi^t auf ber Sanf neben 
 fetner ©d^toefter. 8. ^^ fe|e ba§ tinb auf bie 33an! neben 
 beine ©^toefter. 9. 2Bir iourben me^r SSergniigen gel^abt ^aben,- 
 toenn toir fd^bnereg SSetter ge^abt l^atten. 10. ©ie tourben me^r 
 Seit ge^abt l^aben, toenn fie ni(^t ju lange auf ber Sibliotl^e! 
 gefc^rieben l^atten. ii.gr fagt, ba^ fein Sruber biel SSergniigen 
 gel^abt l^abe (j«^y.). 12. S)er ©c^iiler fagt, ba^ er biefcS SBud^ 
 in ber ©d^ulftube gefunben l^abe. 13. ®er SSater §at eine neue 
 U^r fur feinen jiingften ©o^n gelauft. 14. 5Die dnglanber ^oBen 
 biele ^riege gegen bie g^ranjofen gel^abt. 15. 5Die ©c^uler ^ben 
 M "w ben Se^rer gefe^t. 16. ®er ^nabe \oX baS gro^e SBud^ 
 auf bie l^ol^e SSanI gelegt. 17. SfBir toerben morgen bid SDer= 
 gniigen l^aben. 18. 3Sir toitrben geftem biel SSergniigen ge^abt 
 l^aben, toenn toir mel^r 3eit ge^abt l^atten. " 19. §eute toerben toir 
 einen jjeiertag l^aben. 20. SBarum fteEt ber ^nabe bag ©emalbe 
 jointer bie 3;^ur? 21. S^ixlt ©ebulb, mein liebeS ^inb. 22. aSir 
 toerben geit ^ben, toenn toir ®ebu(b ^aben. 23. D^ne meine 
 jjreunbe toerbe ic^ lein SSergniigen ^ben. 24. ®ie ©olbaten 
 reiten burd^ bie ganje ©tabt. 
 
 I. The boy sits upon a high chair. 2. The scholars seat them- 
 selves on the benches of the school-room. 3. He rides behind 
 his father. 4. The soldiers ride into the town. 5. We lay the 
 books upon the table. 6. The child is sitting under the table. 
 7. A little garden is before the house. 8. He sits beside his 
 sister. 9. He has placed the chair against (an) the wall. 10. Pots- 
 dam lies between the towns [of] Berlin and Brandenburg. 11. This 
 boy says that he has {subj.) a gold watch. 12. He would have 
 had more pleasure if he had had more patience. 13. We should 
 
78 LESSON XIV. 
 
 have much pleasure if we had to-day no school. 14. The boy 
 climbs upon the bench behind his father. 15. The little child sits 
 upon the bench beside its mother. 16. I should be glad if I had 
 a gold watch. 17. You would have a better opinion of (bon) this 
 general if you had seen him (i^n) with his soldiers in the last 
 war. 18. The last war of the Prussians was against the French. 
 
 19. Shall we have a holiday to-morrow if we have good weather? 
 
 20. The teacher says that we shall have a holiday if we have 
 done our lessons. 21. Have patience, ray dear little brother; 
 you (bu) have time. 22. Yesterday we should have had more 
 pleasure if we had had more time. 23. The soldiers ride with 
 the general through the longest streets of the town. 34. The best 
 scholar has written this exercise without a mistake. 
 
 Remark. — The teacher will use discretion as to dividing the exercises or 
 lessons, according to the grade of pupils or the necessity for review, etc. 
 
 The special vocabularies, which have thus far given, for practice, a part 
 of the words used in the exercises, will hereafter be omitted. It is desirable 
 that the student should learn, as soon as possible, to use a general vocabulary. 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 181. The (Auxiliary) Verb fein, to be. 
 
 Pres. Part. — f eienb, being. Perf. Part. — getuef en, been. 
 Perfect Infinitive — getoefen fein, to have been. 
 
 Indicative. • Subjunctive. 
 Present. 
 
 t(| bin, lam. K^ fei, I be. (§ 175.) 
 
 bu 6ift, thou art. bu feieft, thou be. 
 
 er ift, he is. er fei, he be. 
 
 h>ir finb, we are. tuir feien, we be. 
 
 il^r f eib, you are. i^r feiet, you be. 
 
 fie finb, they are. fie feien, they be. 
 
AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 79 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 \i) hjar, I was. 
 bu toarft, thou wast. 
 er toai", he was. 
 \6\x toaren, we were. 
 tl^r toaret, you were. 
 fie hJarcn, they were. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Past. 
 
 \6) toare, I were. 
 bu tocireft, thou wert. 
 er toare, ^^ a/^r^. 
 h)tr toaren, w^ o/^n?. 
 tl^r hjaret, jvow w^ri?. 
 fie hJoren, they were. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 id^ bin getoefen, T have been. 
 bu bift getoefen, thou hast been. . 
 er ift getoefen, he has been. 
 toir finb getoefen, we have been. 
 i^r feib getoefen, >(7a have been. 
 fie finb getoefen, they have been. 
 
 id^ fei getoefen, I {may) have been. 
 bu feieft getoefen, thou have been. 
 er fei getoefen, he have been. 
 totr feien getoefen, we have been. 
 \^x feiet getoefen, you have been. 
 fie feien getoefen, they have been. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 id^ toar getoefen, I had been. id^ toare getoefen, I had been. 
 
 bu toarft getoefen, thou hadstbeen. bu toareft getoefen, thou hadstbeen 
 
 er toar getoefen, he had been. er toare getoefen, he had been. 
 
 toir toaren getoefen, we had been, toir toaren getoefen, we had been. 
 
 il^r toaret getoefen, you had been, i^r toaret getoefen, you had been. 
 
 fie toaren getoefen, they had been, fie toaren getoefen, they had been. 
 
 Future. 
 
 id^ toerbe fein, I shall be. 
 bu toirft fein, thou wilt be. 
 er toirb fein, he will be. 
 toir toerben fein, we shall be. 
 i^r toerbet fein, you will be. 
 fie toerben fein, they will be. 
 
 id^ toerbe fein, I shall be. 
 bu toerbeft fein, thou wilt he. 
 er toerbe fein, he will be. 
 toir toerben fein, we shall be. 
 i^r toerbet fein, you will be. 
 fie toerben fein, they will be. 
 
8o 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 xi) toerbe 
 bu toirft 
 er ioirb 
 toir toerben 
 il)r iuerbet 
 fie toerben 
 
 Future Perfect, 
 I shall have been, td^ toerbe 
 .S thou wilt, etc. bu ixierbeft 
 "^ ^^ ze////, etc. er toerbe 
 
 toir toerben 
 i^r iuerbet 
 fie toerben 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 ■^ we shall, etc. 
 
 p 
 
 5 jytf« «;«//, etc. 
 
 i'/^ifj will, etc. 
 
 I shall have been. 
 .S /.^('w w///, etc. 
 "^^ he will. etc. 
 
 s 
 
 'ST w^ J^«//, etc. 
 
 S you will, etc. 
 
 Mtf)' ze////, etc. 
 
 Conditional, 
 id^ toiirbe fein, I should be. toir toiirben fein, we should be. 
 
 bu totirbeft fein, thou wouldst be. i^r toiirbet fein, you would be. 
 er toiirbe fein, he would be. fie toiirben fein, they would be. 
 
 Conditional Perfect. 
 id^ toiirbe getoefen fein, I should have been. 
 bu tourbeft getoefen fein, thou wouldst have been. 
 er toiirbe getoefen fein, he would have been. 
 toir toiirben getoefen feih, we should have ieen. 
 i^r toiirbet getoefen fein, you would have been. 
 fie toiirben getoefen fein, they would have been. 
 
 Imperative. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 feien toir, let us be. 
 fei (bu), be (thou). feib (il^r), be {ye). 
 
 fei er, let him be. feien fie, let them be. 
 
 See remark on imperative of '^Qbett. (§ 176.) 
 Inflect as in the inverted order : 
 ba toerbe id^ fein, there I shall be. ba Bin i^ getoefen, there I have 
 
 been. 
 ba toirft bu fein, there thou wilt ba bift bu getoefen, there thou hast 
 
 be. been. 
 
 ba toirb er fein, there he will be. ba ift er getoefen, there he has been, 
 etc. etc. etc. etc. 
 
DECLENSIOK OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 8i 
 
 Inflect as in the transposed order : 
 
 ba^ i^ (ba) fein toerbe, that I ttjmn i(| (ba) getoefcn toare, if I 
 
 shall be (there). had been {there). 
 
 ba^ bu (ba) fein totrft, //^a/ //5(7« h)ennbu(ba)getBefentt)arej't,5f//^oa 
 
 wilt be {there). hadst been {there). 
 
 ba^ er (ba) fein toirb, that he toenn er (ba) getoefen toare, ifht 
 will be {there). had been {there). 
 
 etc. etc. etc. etc. 
 
 And similarly, until such forms become familiar. 
 
 182. Declension of the Personal Pronouns. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 FIRST PERSON. SECOND PERSON. 
 
 N. .td^, I. bu, thou. 
 
 G. meiner, ^wi?. 'tim.'a,-oJ thee. 
 
 D. mtr, {to) me. bir, (to) thee. 
 
 A. mid^, me. bi^, thee. 
 
 THIRD PERSON. 
 
 fem. neut. 
 
 fie, she. e§, 2A 
 
 i^rer, of her. [feiner, (t/"//.] 
 
 il^r, (/^) her. [i§m, (^^) zV.] 
 
 fie, her. e§, ?V. 
 
 Tlural. ' 
 
 SECOND PERSON. THIRD PERSON. 
 
 t^E, you, ye. fie, i'.4i?j'. 
 
 euer, of you. il^rer, of them. 
 
 eud^, (/^) jyi^w. tl^nen, (z^) /'/4^»2. 
 
 euc^, you. fie, /'/5,f»2. 
 
 (a) In the singular genitive the shorter forms — mein, bein, 
 fein — are sometimes used in poetry and in familiar phrase. 
 And in the plural genitive, the longer forms — unfrer and eurev 
 (contracted for unfever and euerer) — are sometimes used. 
 
 masc. 
 N. er, he. 
 G. feiner, of him. 
 D. il^tn, {to) him. 
 A. i^n, him. 
 
 FIRST PERSON. 
 
 N. toir, we. 
 G. unfer, of us. 
 D. un§, {to) us. 
 A. un§, us. 
 
$2 LESSON XV. 
 
 Note. — i. Bear in ihind that a noun will be referred to by er, fie, fS, 
 according to its gender. For exception, see § 452, a. 
 
 2. For special uses of e8, as impersonal, introductory, or expletive subject, 
 corresponding to it, they, there, etc., see § 453. 
 
 183. The genitive and dative forms of the third person 
 are rarely used of things, their meaning being usually 
 supplied by a demonstrative pronoun (§ 208, note). 
 
 184. Instead of a dative or accusative of the third person, 
 referring to things, with a preposition, the adverb tn, there 
 (before a vowel, and sometimes before n, bat) is usually 
 compounded with the preposition ; as : bamit, therewith, 
 with it or them ; bafur, therefor, for it or them ; bogegen ; 
 babon; bartn; barauf; batiadE) or barnac^, etc. (For accents, 
 see § S3). Also, before r, colloquially : bran, brau§, britber, etc. 
 
 For be§ (genitive) in like compounds, see § 456, 2. 
 
 185. The Reflexive Pronoun. 
 
 THIRD PERSON. 
 
 Singular and Flural — all genders, 
 D. fi(^, {to) himself, herself, itself, themselves. 
 A. jid^. 
 
 Elsewhere the regular forms of the personal pronouns 
 are used reflexively ; as, tc§ fe^e mtc^, I seat myself; tc§ 
 fc£)metc§Ie nttr, I flatter myself, etc. 
 
 Use of the Pronouns in Address. 
 
 186. The German usage herein differs widely from our own. 
 In English the usual form is you, etc., for singular or plural 
 persons ; thou, etc., is restricted to the language of poetry or 
 of devotion (except among the Friends), though it was formerly 
 more widely used. In German, besides these uses, bu, etc., 
 is used also in familiar address; as, to members of the 
 
USE OF THE PRONOUNS IN ADDRESS. 83 
 
 family, to most intimate friends, to children, to animals, etc. ; 
 sometimes also to express contempt (as formerly in English). 
 In such cases bu is not properly translated by thou. 
 
 187. In all cases where bu is properly used in the singular, the 
 second person plural t^r, etc., is to be used in addressing more 
 than one person ; but only in such cases. 
 
 188. But the usual mode of addressing one or more persons 
 (except in the cases above noted) is by the third person plural, 
 which is then written with a capital initial letter. Thus : ©ie, 
 you ; ^Ijrer, of you ; ^^nen, to you ; ©te, you. 3Bo finb fie 
 getcefen, where have they been ? SBo finb ©ie getoefen, where 
 have you been ? Observe that the verb is always plural. 
 
 In the same way are used also the corresponding forms of 
 the possessive and reflexive ; as, '^^x, your, etc. 2Bie befinben 
 ©te ftd^, how are you ? (See § 63.) 
 
 189. Other forms sometimes occur. The third person 
 singular — <St and ©te — and the second person plural — ^^r 
 — were likewise at one time in use for addressing a single 
 individual, especially an inferior. 
 
 Note. — i. Remember, that the limits of bit and i^r, etc., are very closely 
 drawn in German society. No worse mistake could occur than to use them 
 out of place. Hence, hereafter, the form @ie, etc., should be carefully used 
 in all exercises, unless other forms are clearly required. Also, that iAou 
 must not be used to translate bit unless the English idiom requires it. 
 Nothing is a translation that does not satisfy idiom. 
 
 z. It would, however, be an error to teach these third plural forms as 
 alternative forms of the second person. The usage is purely idiomatic — ; 
 or conventional — as in English jo« for thou. Hence such forms are not 
 given in the paradigms heretofore. 
 
 3. Care must be taken to avoid ambiguity in the pronoun forms. The 
 use of it capital letter is distinctive only to the eye, and not even this, when 
 the pronoun begins the sentence. — Note, too, that the third person plural 
 forms belong, in part, also to the feminine singular — a practically serious 
 confusion of the pronoun forms in German. 
 
 4. Be carefitl always, in the same context, to use the same or corresponding 
 forms of the fronoun for the same persons. 
 
84 LESSON XV. 
 
 EXERCISE XV. 
 I. ©eib fttEe, metne ^leinen. 2. ^aU ©ebulb, il^r Sinber. 
 
 3. 2te6er SSetter, fei fo gut unb je|e bxd^ auf biefe Sanf. 
 
 4. ©eien 6te fo gut, §err ©raf, unb fe|en ©te fid^ auf biefen 
 ©tu|I. 5. 2)er {Jelb^err reitet in bie ©tabt; etn ©olb&t reitet 
 mit t^m. 6. llnfere g^reunbe fte^en urn ung. 7. ^6) \)aht ntd^ts 
 bagegen. 8. ©eib flei^ig, unb tl^r toerbet bie ^^reube eurcr 
 ©Item fein. 9. 5Kein Dnfel ift ein hJol^Il^aBenber SDlann. 10. 
 SJlein 3Sater ^at mir einen neuen §ut ge!auft. 11. ^^ toerbe 
 ^l^nen ein fd^arfereS 5Keffer geBen. 12. SKorgen h»erbe ic^ mit 
 gl^nen na^ bcr ©tabt retten, [meine] §enen. 13. SDie Snaben 
 hjurben nid^t in ber ©c^ule fein, hjenn bag SBetter fd&on toare. 
 14. 3)iefe St^fel hjiirben fd;Dn reif fein, voenn bag SBetter nid^t 
 fo fait getoefen toare. 15. 3)er Sel^rer fagt, ba^ er mit feinem 
 ©driller jufricben fei. 16. (gr toiirbe mit biefem ©c^uter nod^ 
 jufriebener fein, toenn er flei^iger toare. 17. 2Bir toiirben geftern 
 l^ier geioefen fein, toenn unfere SKutter ni(|t fran! getoefen toare. 
 18. S)ie ^rau fagt, ba§ i^r alter Dnlel fel^r reid^ fei. 19. 
 3Reine SCante l^at eine golbene Ul^r fitr meine ©d^toefter gelauft. 
 20. 5Die ©olbaten finb burd^ bie ©tabt gefommen. 21. 3)ie 
 ^inber finb urn bie ganje ©tabt gegangen. 22. SBiirben bie 
 ^inber um bie ganje ©tabt gegangen fein, toenn fie fran! getoefen 
 toaren? 23. SlSaS l^at er gegen f einen Dnlel? 24. ©r^atnid^tg 
 gegen i^n. 
 
 I. Be patient, my children. 2. Be quiet, you little [ones]. 
 3. My father has given me * a new knife. - 4. Have you 
 anything against it? 5. What have you against it ? 6. Have 
 patience^ith him, dear brother. 7. Have patience with us, 
 most graflous count. 8. Honour be to the king. g. The 
 soldiers ride with me into the town. 10. The general says 
 that he will be here to-morrow. 11. Here is my old knife; 
 
 * Note again the indirect object, with or without the preposition in 
 English — in German the simple dative — preceding the adjective in (13). 
 
AUXILIARY VERBS. 85 
 
 dear brother, be so good and give (gieb) me a new [one] for it. 
 12. My aunt would have been present if her children had not 
 been so impatient. 13. Be merciful to (</«/.)* us, O Lord. 
 14. My brother would have been in (the) school if the weathei 
 had been fine. 15. The old lady says, that her uncle is (subj.) 
 much richer than the young count. 16. The air would be 
 warmer, if the sky were not covered with clouds. 17. What 
 have you against the count ? 18. I have nothing against the 
 man. 19. This gentleman says, that he has bought a gold 
 watch for his little son. 20. The pupils have (are) gone with 
 their teacher around the town. 21. The professors have gone 
 with the students through the wood. 2 2 . The fields would be 
 already green if (the) spring were not so late. 23. I should 
 have been at home earlier if I had not been so tired. 24. The 
 apples would be ripe if the weather had been warmer. 
 
 LESSON XVI. 
 
 190. The (Auxiliary) Verb toerbett, to become. 
 
 SBarb is the older form of the singular of the past tense; 
 tDurbe is now most used, especially when auxiliary. SSSatb is 
 now rare, except in poetic style. (See § 256, c). 
 
 Infinitive. Pres. Part. Perf. Part. 
 
 hjerben, to become. toerbenb, becoming. geiDorben, become. 
 
 Perfect Infinitive. 
 geicorben jein, to have become. 
 
 Note. — In the future and conditional, Werbeit is its owTi auxiliary. (§ 173.) 
 • See footnote, page 84. 
 
86 
 
 LESSON XVI. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 r become, etc. 
 id) icerbe. hjir toerben. 
 bu tDtrft. i^r toerbct. 
 er tDxrb. fie toerb.en. 
 
 r became, etc. 
 
 id^ tourbe, or id^ ioarb. 
 
 bu tcurbej't, or bu tuarbft. 
 
 er tourbft, or er toarb. 
 
 h)ir hjutben. 
 
 il^r tourbet. 
 
 fte tourben. 
 
 r have become, etc. 
 id^ bin getoorben. 
 bu bift getoorben. 
 er ift geirorben. 
 tcir finb getoorben. 
 il^r feib getnorben. 
 fie finb getoorben. 
 
 / had become, etc. 
 id^ tear getoorben. 
 bu toarft getoorben. 
 er toar getoorben. 
 loir toaren getoorben. 
 il^r toaret getoorben. 
 fie toaren getoorben. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 Present. 
 
 I (may) become,* etc. 
 i^ toerbe. toir toerben. 
 
 bu toerbeft. i^r toerbct. 
 er toerbe. fie toerben. 
 
 Past. 
 
 I (might) become, etc. 
 
 ic^ toitrbe. 
 
 bu toiirbeft. 
 
 er toiirbe. 
 
 toir toiirben. 
 
 i^r toiirbet. 
 
 fie toiirben. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 I (may) have become, etc. 
 id^ fei getoorben. 
 bu feieft getoorben. 
 er fei getoorben. 
 toir feien getoorben. 
 i^r fetet getoorben. 
 fie feien getoorben. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 T (might) have become, etc. 
 id^ toare getoorben. 
 bu tocireft getoorben. 
 er toore getoorben. 
 toir toaren getoorben. 
 i^r toaret getoorben. 
 fie toaren getoorben. 
 
 * Se? remark, | 175, 2, on translation of the subjunctive fprraa. 
 
AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 8/ 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 I shall become, etc. 
 id^ toerbe toerben. 
 bu toirft toerben. 
 er toirb tnerben. 
 iDtr toerben toerben. 
 il^r toer^et toerben. 
 fie toerben toerben. 
 
 I shall have become, etc. 
 td^ toerbe gettjorben fein. 
 bu toirft getoorben fein. 
 er toirb getoorben fein. 
 etc. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Future. 
 
 I shall become, &tc. 
 \i) toerbe toerben. 
 bu toerbeft toerben. 
 er toerbe toerben. 
 toir toerben toerben. 
 i^r toerbet toerben. 
 fie toerben toerben. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 I shall have become, etc. 
 id^ toerbe getoorben fein. 
 bu toerbeft getoorben fein. 
 er toerbe getoorben fein. 
 etc. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 
 Conditional Perfect. 
 
 I should become, etc. 
 
 
 I should have become, etc. 
 
 i(^ toiirbe toerben. 
 
 
 id^ toiirbe getoorben fein. 
 
 bu toiirbeft toerben. 
 
 
 bu toiirbeft getoorben fein. 
 
 er toiirbe toerben. 
 
 
 er toiirbe getoorben fein. 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 iMPERATIVft. 
 
 become (thou). 
 
 etc. 
 
 toerben toir. 
 
 toerbe. --^^r-r- 
 
 -_ 
 
 ^tocrbet. 
 
 toerbe er. 
 
 
 Iperben fie. 
 
 Inflect, as before, for question : 
 
 bin id^ getoorben? toerbe id^ toerben? 
 
 have I become 1 shall I become ? 
 
 For inversion : 
 
 geftern toar id^ getoorben, 
 yesterday I hafi become. 
 
 morgen toerbe id^ toerben, 
 to-morrow I shall become. 
 
88 LESSON XVI. 
 
 For transposition : 
 
 ba^ td^ Iran! getoorben tear, tocnn i^ Iran! getoorben toare, 
 
 that I had become sick. if T had become sick. 
 etc. etc. 
 
 Contraction of Prepositions with the Article. 
 
 191. The definite article is often contracted with 
 prepositions. The most usual forms are : — 
 
 Dative Singular. 
 
 Masc. or Neut. am for an bem, at the. 
 
 beim " bet bem, by the, near the. 
 
 im " in bem, in the. 
 
 bom " toon bem, from the. 
 
 jum " 5U bem, to the. 
 
 Fem. jur " ju ber, to the. 
 
 Accusative Singular. 
 
 Neut. ang for an bai, to the. 
 
 aufg " auf ba§, upon the. 
 
 burets " bur(^ ba§, through the. 
 
 fiirS " fiir ba§, for the. 
 
 in§ " in baS, into the. 
 
 um§ " um ba§, around the., about the. 
 
 Note. — The accusative forms are no longer written with apostrophe. 
 The dative forms sometimes seem to imply the indefinite article — in cases 
 where no article is used in the plural. See § 443, d. 
 
 Possessive Adjectives. 
 
 192. The Possessive Adjectives are : — 
 
 Mas. Fem. Neuter. 
 
 Singular, mein, meine, metn, my. 
 
 bein, beine, bein, thy. 
 
 fein, feine, fetn, his {its). 
 
 t^r, t§re, i^r, her {its). 
 
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 89 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 unfer. 
 
 unf(e)re. 
 
 unfer, our. ^\ t.i 
 
 cuer. 
 
 eu(e)re. 
 
 euer, your. a,1~- 
 
 i^r. 
 
 i^re. 
 
 iifx, their, r- 
 
 (3^r) 
 
 (3^re) 
 
 (3^r) your (§ 188), 
 
 Plural. 
 
 These are declined in the singular like the indefinite 
 article, and in the plural like btefcr. As : mettt SSater, metne 
 SWutter, mettt Sftnb, ittcine greunbe ; but : biefe S5iic^er iinb 
 meiit. (§ 127.) 
 
 Possessive Pronouns. 
 
 193. When the possessives are used as pronouns — that 
 is, referring to a noun understood (as in English, mine, 
 ours, etc.), they take the full endings of btefer, like the 
 strong declension of adjectives, if used alone; or of the 
 weak declension of adjectives, if preceded by the definite 
 article. The forms will then be such as : 
 
 or, 
 
 Masc. 
 N. meinev, 
 G. ttteineS, 
 N. ber nxettxe, 
 G. be§ meinen. 
 Similarly, beiner, 
 
 uttj'(e)rer, 
 eu(e)rer, 
 or, ber il^re. 
 
 Fern. 
 nteitte, 
 meiner, 
 bte meitte, 
 ber meineit, 
 betne, 
 unf(e)re, 
 eu(e)re, 
 bte t§re. 
 
 Examples : ©tefeS ift trtein (adj.) S3u(i) ;^S£)re§, or ba§ Sf)rc 
 (pron.) ift bort. This is my book ; yours is there. 2Seilt 
 get)ort bie[e§93uc^? To whom does this book belong? (£§ 
 ift meitt, or "t^oS, meinc, it is mine. 
 
 Note. — ®o8 Sud^ ijl mein, or bag tneitie (rarely nteinea) — the former is 
 simply predicative ; the latter, distinctive (from yours, etc. ) or emphatic. 
 
 Neuter. 
 meineg, mine. 
 iTteineS, of mine, etc. 
 
 ba§ meitte, 
 be§ tnetnen, etc. 
 beitteg, thine. 
 
 unf(e)re§, ours. 
 eu(e)reg, yours. 
 ba§ i^re, theirs, etc. 
 
go LESSON XVI. 
 
 z. The possessive pronouns have the same form as the genitives of the 
 personal pronouns ; the possessive adjectives, as the shorter forms of the 
 same. (§ 182.) 
 
 194. A possessive pronoun, of recent origin, is formed 
 from the,, possessive adjective by adding the suffix tg. 
 These forms can only be used with the definite article, 
 and are generally employed when the definite article is 
 used. 
 
 bet, bie, bag meinige, mine. ber, bie, bag unfrige, ours. 
 
 ber, bie, ba§ beinige, thine. ber, bie, ba§ eurtge, yours. 
 
 ber, bie, baS fetnige, his (its). ber, bie, bag i^rige, theirs. 
 
 ber, bie, bag il^rige, hers (its). (ber, bie, bag Sl^rige, yours.) 
 
 EXERCISE XVI. 
 
 I. Ser Saum toir^ griin. 2. gd^ l&in jung gettefen unb bin alt 
 getoorben. 3. SBerbet ni^t ungebulbig. ' 4. SSag tft au^ i^m 
 getoorben? 5. SBag toirb aug mir luerben? 6. ®ie %x<m fagt, ' 
 ba^ fie arm getoorben fei. 7. Siefe %p\i\ toiirben retf toerben, 
 ioenn bag SSJetter nic^t fo latt icare. 8. ^d^ toiirbe fein greunb 
 getoorben fein, toenn' ic^ tnit i§m be!annt geirorben toare. 9. 
 5Der ^nabe tear fel^r gto^ getoorben. lo. Sag SBetter tourbe 
 fd^on. II. S)ie ^inber tuerben fc^Iafrig. 12. @g toirb SRad^t. 
 13. ®er ^nabe tntrb ein 9Jlann toerben. 14. ®er befte ©aft^of 
 in unferer ©tabt ift am 3;^ore. 15. !Die gro^ten ^aufer ber 
 ©tabt finb am SKarlte. 16. 5)er Sranfe Itegt ijn 58ette. 17. 
 ^inb, eg ift 3«it jur ©d^ule ju ge^en. 18. ®er ©raf fte^t am 
 {Jenfter. 19. gft biefer §unb bein? @r ift ber meinige. 20. 
 SBo ift bag §aug ^l^reg Dnfeig? 21. @g ift neben bem mei= 
 nigen. 22. Unfere ©tiil^Ie finb toeid^er alg bie S'^'^igen- 23. ^ft 
 bein beutfc^ier Setter in ber ©d^ulftube? 24. (gr ift in unferem 
 ©arten. 
 
 I. The trees become green. 2. The man became rich. 
 3. The air has become cold. 4. We shall grow sleepy. 5. What 
 
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 9 1 
 
 would have become of (aug) me if you had not been my friend ? 
 6. Your sons have grown very tall. 7. In (the) spring the days 
 grow longer, but in autumn they grow {invert) shorter. 8. What 
 has become of my boots ? 9. The oldest and best hotel is on the 
 market-place. lo. Do not grow impatient, my dear boy. 1 1. The 
 leaves of the trees become yellow in (the) autumn. 12. The 
 industrious poor [man] will become rich. 13. He says, that his 
 brother has fallen {become) ill. 14. The youngest child will some 
 day become an old man. 15. The sick [men] lie in (the) bed. 
 16. Frederick was great in (the) peace and in (the) war. 17. The 
 richest man would become poor in our most expensive hotels. 
 18. (The) children are quiet in (the) sleep. 19. This little dog 
 is ours. 20. My brother is taller than yours. 21. Your father is 
 older than mine. 22. Our orchard is larger than yours. 23. 
 Your brothers are more industrious than ours. 24. It is getting 
 {becoming) colder. 
 
 USToTE. — The materials of the exercises will now suffice for conversational 
 exercises of considerable extent and interest. Each teacher will, 6f course, 
 judge of the importance of such exercises for his own pupils ; also of the 
 importance of calling attention to German and English cognate forms (Less. 
 XLV.). 
 
 LESSON XVII. 
 The Conjugation of Verbs. 
 
 195. There are two distinct conjugations of verbs, the 
 strong- and the weak. The former is sometimes called the 
 oMand the latter the new conjugation. 
 
 196. Verbs of the strong conjugation form their past 
 tense, and usually their perfect participle, by changing 
 the vowel of the root ; they undergo an internal change. 
 For example : fingen, to sing; \i) fong, / sang; \i) t)abe 
 gefungen, / have sung. 
 
92 LESSON XVII. 
 
 197. Verbs of the weak conjugation are conjugated by 
 adding suflSxes to the stem ; they undergo an external 
 change only. ' For example : lofien, fo praise ; vi) lob-te, / 
 praised; id^ I)a6e geto6-t, F have praised. 
 
 igS. Weak, verbs form their perfect participle in et or t ; 
 strong verbs, in en. In both, the perfect participle usually 
 takes the prefix ge- 
 
 199. Strong verbs are almost all original German roots. 
 Weak verbs include also derivative and foreign verbs, and 
 represent the modern process in conjugation. Weak verbs 
 are greatly the more numerous. Hence, though not properly, 
 weak verbs are often called regular, and strong verbs irregular. 
 
 Note. — i. The terra strong here suggests the power of internal change, 
 or of inflection without the aid of suffix ;. weak, the absence of that power. 
 The strong is the primitive method, and belongs only to the oldest root- 
 verbs — except the two Latin derivatives, jd^reibetl, to write, ^Jreif en, to . 
 
 praise. 
 
 2. It is plain that these conjugations correspond closely to those in 
 English ; as, strong : give, gave, given ; sing, sang, sung, etc. : weak : 
 
 praise, praised, praised ; plant, planted, planted, etc. In English, the perfect 
 participle is always without the prefix ge-; and often, also, without the 
 suffix -en, or -ed (or -d). 
 
 200. There is a group of verbs combining the marks of 
 both these conjugations, which form the mixed con- 
 jugation. And a few verbs may be properly treated as 
 
 irregular verbs. 
 
 201. The weak conjugation, because the simplest and of 
 most frequent occurrence, will be given first. 
 
 The following are the regular endings of the weak verb : 
 
 Infinitive. Pres. Part. Perf. Part. 
 
 — en. — enb. ge — (e)t. 
 
Ind. Subj. 
 Present. 
 
 -(e)ft. 
 -(e)t. 
 
 -eft. 
 — e. 
 
 — en. 
 -(e)t. 
 
 — en. 
 
 —en. 
 — et. 
 — «n. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 93 
 
 Ind. Subj. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Sing. — e. — e. ■ — (e)te. — (e)te. 
 
 — (e)teft. — (e)teft. 
 
 — (e)te. — (e)te- 
 
 PI. — en. —en. — (e)ten. — (e)ten. 
 
 — (e)tet. — (e)tet. 
 
 — (e)ten. — (e)ten. 
 Imperative. 
 Sing. — e , pi. — (e)t. 
 
 {a) Tlie use of (e), where so marked, depends mainly on 
 euphony. (See next Lesson.) Generally, the e is more usually 
 retained in the subjunctive — and was also elsewhere more fre- 
 quent formerly than now. 
 
 (f) Observe that the third person singular is like the first 
 person, except in the present indicative ; and that in the 
 
 plural, the first and third persons are always alike. 
 
 *.■(* '■- ■'/ 
 Example of the Weak Conjugation. '' 
 
 Qobtn, to praise* 
 
 Pres. Part. Perf. Part. 
 
 loBenb. gelobt. 
 
 Perf. Inf. — geIo6t l^afeen. 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 td^ Io6e, I praise, etc. id; lobe. (See § 175, 2.) 
 
 bu lobft. (See § 17s, I.) bu lobeft. 
 
 er loBt. er lobe, 
 
 totr loben. \o\x loben. 
 
 tl^r lobt. il^r lobet. 
 
 fie loben. fie loben. 
 
 * Only the more usual forms are given in the paradigm. The forms with 
 (e) still sometimes occur, especially in poetry or in solemn style. See * p. 67. 
 
94 
 
 LESSON XVII. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 td^ lofcte, I praised, etc. 
 
 bu lobteji. 
 
 er lobte. 
 
 totr lobten. 
 
 tl^r lobtet. 
 
 fie lobten. 
 
 Subjunctive, 
 
 Past. 
 
 td^ Io6(e)tc. 
 bu Io6(e)teft. 
 er lob(e)te. 
 toir Io6(e)ten. 
 i§r [o6(e)tet. 
 fie Io6(e)tetu 
 
 Perfect. 
 td^ ^be gelobt, I have praised, xi) l^aBe gelobt. 
 
 bu l^aft gelobt. 
 er l^at gelobt. 
 toir l^aben gelobt. 
 il^r ^abt gelobt. 
 fie l^aben gelobt. 
 
 bu l^abeft gelobt. 
 er \<i!o% gelobt. 
 toir ^aben gelobt. 
 i^r ^abet gelobt. 
 fie l()aben gelobt. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 iS)'^attiiQihU,/hadpraised, etc. i(^ l^cttte gelobt. 
 bu ^atteft-gelobt. bu bStteft gelobt. 
 
 er l^atte gelobt. er ^atte gelobt. 
 
 toir l^atten gelobt. toir Ijatten gelobt, 
 
 xi)x l^attet gelobt. i^r l^attet gelobt. 
 
 fie l^atten gelobt. fie l^atten gelobt. 
 
 Future. 
 
 id^ toerbe loben, I shall praise, id^ toerbe loben, I shall praise. 
 
 bu toirft loben, thou wilt praise, bu toerbeft loben, thou wilt praise. 
 
 er toirb loben. er toerbe loben. 
 
 toir toerben loben. toir toerben loben. 
 
 i^r toerbet loben. i^r toerbet loben. 
 
 fie toerben loben. fie toerben loben. 
 
WEAK CONJUGATION. 95 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 i^ toerbe geIo6t l^a6en, 1 shall K&i toerbe gelobt I)aben, I shall 
 
 have praised, etc. have praised, etc. 
 
 bu toirft gelobt l^aben. bu toerbeft gelobt ^ben. 
 
 ?r toirb gelobt l^aben, er toerbe gelobt ^aben, 
 
 etc. etc. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 td^ toiirbe loben, I should praise, totr ioiirben loben. 
 bu hjiirbeft toben, thou wouldst t^r iDiirbet loben. 
 
 praise, etc. 
 er tourbe toben. fie itturben loben. 
 
 Conditional Perfect. 
 td^ toiirbe gelobt ^aben, I should have praised, etc. 
 bu h)urbeft gelobt Ijabeti. 
 er toiirbe gelobt l^aben, etc. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 loben toir, let us praise, 
 lobt, praise Qhou'). {o'i}{i)t, praise {you). 
 
 lobe er, let him praise. loben fie, let them praise. 
 
 See note on imperative of l)aBen, § 176. 
 
 Inflect for inversion : 
 yesterday I praised. to-morrow I shall praise. 
 
 geftern lobte id^, etc. morgen toerbe id^ loben, etc. 
 
 For transposition : 
 that I praised yesterday. if J should praise to-morrow. 
 
 ba^ id^ geftern lobte, etc. toenn id^ morgen loben toiirbe, etc. 
 
 Conjugate like loben : 
 
 Ueben, to love. f^ielen, to play. fragen, to ask, question. 
 
 leben, to live. f d^irfen, to send. tool^nen, to dwell, live. 
 
 U^xtn, to teach. lau^m, to 6uy. xt\\tv,, to travel. j> .: 
 
 lernen, to learn. fag«n, to say. madden, to make, to do. 
 
96 LESSON XVII. 
 
 lac^en, to laugh. toiinfc^en, to wish, brau^en, to need, want. 
 
 tpeinen, to weep, cry. pren, to hear. jeigen, to show. 
 
 202. Kules of Position. 
 
 1. A pronoun object will precede a noun object. 
 
 2. An indirect object will usually precede a direct object. 
 
 3. But e§ precedes any other object, except (often) ftd^. 
 
 4. An object without a preposition will precede an 
 
 object with a preposition. 
 
 5. An adverb of time will precede an object, except 
 
 pronouns; other adverbs usually follow an object. 
 
 6. An infinitive or participle stands after its modifiers. 
 
 203. Remember that the indirect object — in English 
 with or without preposition, according to its position — 
 is expressed in German by the simple dative without 
 preposition. 
 
 Demonstrative Adjectives and Pronouns. 
 
 204. The Demonstratives are : — 
 
 ber, bie, ba§, that. 
 
 biefer, bie[e, btefeS, this (here), the latter. 
 
 jener, jene, jeneS, that {there), the former. 
 
 folc^er, fold^e, foId^eS, such. 
 
 berjenige, biejemge, bagjenige, that. 
 
 berfelBe, biefelbe, baSfelbe, the same. 
 
 205. SDer, btefer and jener are originally demonstrative 
 adjectives; but they are used both as pronominal 
 adjectives with a noun, and as pronouns standing instead 
 of a noun : that or this one, he, etc. 
 
 206. S)er, bie, "tioS), as adjective, is declined like the 
 article, but is pronounced with a greater stress of voice. 
 As a pronoun, it has the following enlarged forms : 
 
DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 97 
 
 Sing. Gen. beffeit, beren, beffen, of him, of her, of it. 
 Plur. Gen. beren or berer, of those, of them. 
 
 Dat. benen, to those, to them. (§ 4s6,.2.) 
 
 207. (Soldier may be preceded by the indefinite article : 
 etn.joWjer 5Kann, eine foIcf)e graii, etrt fotc^eg Stinb, such a 
 man, etc. It is indeclinable when it precedes the article, 
 as in English : foIdE) etn 5D?ann, fotc^ eine grau, folc£) eiit ^tnb. 
 
 208. Serjentge and berfelbe decline each component : 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 M. F. N. 
 
 N. 
 
 berfelbe. 
 
 biefelbe. 
 
 bagfelbe. 
 
 btefelben.. 
 
 G. 
 
 besfelben. 
 
 berfelben. 
 
 begfelben. 
 
 berfelben. 
 
 D. 
 
 bemfelben. 
 
 berfelbeiT. 
 
 bemfetben. 
 
 benfelben. 
 
 A. 
 
 benfelben. 
 
 biefelbe. 
 
 bagfelbe. 
 
 biefelben. 
 
 N. 
 
 berjenige. 
 
 biejenige. 
 
 ba§jenige. 
 
 biejemgen. 
 
 G. 
 
 beSjenigen. 
 
 berjentgen. 
 
 beSjenigen. 
 
 berjenigen. 
 
 D. 
 
 bemjenigen.' 
 
 beqemgen. 
 
 bemjemgen. 
 
 benjenigen. 
 
 A. 
 
 benjentgen. 
 
 biejenige. 
 
 baSjenige. 
 
 biejenigen. 
 
 Note. — i. S)er, berfelbe, are frequently used as substitutes for personal 
 pronouns. (See Lesson lv.) 
 
 2. ©erjenige is most regularly used as antecedent to a relative ; as ber= 
 jenige, weld^er, he who, etc. 
 
 209. A compound of \iQL (bar) with prepositions is usual 
 
 instead of a dative or accusative of the pronoun ber, bie, 
 
 'iioM, referring to things. (See § 184). 
 
 Note. — Yet the pronoun may so stand when emphatic — especially 
 when antecedent to In 08 (§ 236, b). 
 
 210. This, that, these, those, immediately preceded or 
 followed by the verb to be, are rendered in German "by the 
 neuter pronoun btefe§ (usually bte§) and ba:§, without any 
 regard to the number or gender of the noun referred to ; 
 
98 LESSON XVII. 
 
 but the verb will agree with the following noun. 
 Examples : 5Die§ ift eine SRofe unb haS tft etne Sitte. 5)ieg 
 ftnb tirfcEien. 5Da§ fttib Sartoffeln. Sag ift be§ ^aiferg 
 SBilte. (For further statements, see Less, lv.) 
 EXERCISE XVII. 
 
 1. Der Lehrer lobt den fleissigen Schiiler. z. Wir lernen 
 Deutsch. 3. Main Vater hat ein Haus gekauft. 4. Kinder 
 lieben ihre Eltern. 5. Was sagen Sie dazu ? 6. Er sagt, dass 
 er Franzosisch und Deutsch gelernt habe. 7. Ich wiinsche, dass 
 main Sohn Deutsch lerne. 8. Ich bin durch ganz Deutschland 
 gereist. g. Er lachte. 10. Ihr weintet. 11. Ich werde Ihnen 
 etwas Neues sagen. 12. Ich wtirde es gesagt haben, wenn Sie 
 es gewunscht hatten. 13. Fragen Sie mich nicht. 14. Wo ist 
 meine deutsche Graramatik? Ich brauche sie. 15. Ich -wicrde 
 es meinem Vater sagen. 16. Spiele nicht mit des Nachbars 
 Kindern. 17. Der Konig horte, dass der beriihmte Feldherr- 
 krank sei. 18. Diogenes lebte zur Zeit Alexanders. 19. Mein 
 Freund hat mir gesagt, dass er ein Landgut kaufen werde. 
 ' 20. Ich wurde auch eins (eines, one) kaufen, wenn ich Geld 
 dazu hatte. 21. Ein spielender Knabe lernt niclits. 22. Ist 
 dies Ihr Buch? 23. Es ist das (dasjenige) meines Bruders. 
 24. Bind dies dieselben Schiiler, welche (wAo) mit uns in der 
 Schule waren? 25. Es sind nicht dieselben. 26. Lobten Sie 
 nicht gestern diesen Gasthof ? 27. Ich lobte denselben. 28. 
 Dieser Mann ist reicher als jener. 29. Was werden Sie damit 
 machen ? 30. Es wird (comes) nichts daraus. 
 
 I. I have asked him. 2. Where does he live {dwell)'*. 3. He 
 lives in the new house near the city-wall. 4. What have you 
 bought? 5. I shall buy a watch. 6. The children cried; we 
 heard them. 7. He does not hear you. 8. Would you buy an 
 estate if you had money? 9. What do you want (jiiish)1 
 10. I want (need) a new hat. 11. We have bought two 
 beautiful pictures. 12. What did he say to that? 13. Do 
 
WEAK VERBS (_CONTINUEDj. 99 
 
 not laugh. 14. If I were a wealthy man, I should (invert) 
 send my children to Berlin. 15. There they would learn 
 German. 16. He will send us a fat goose. 17. Show me 
 the house of the doctor. 18. Diligent scholars love their 
 teacher, ig. My mother has said it. 20. What would she 
 have said if she had heard it ? 21. Do not ask me. 22. This 
 dictionary is mine. 23. We played with the same children. 
 24. We use the same grammar as (tcie) your teacher. 25. 
 This tree is higher than that. 26. These streets ap longer 
 than those. 27. These gardens are not so beautiful as those 
 of our aunt. 28. Such a diligent scholar ! 29. We do not 
 want such books. 30. What has he done with it ? 
 
 LESSON XVIII. 
 Weak Verbs (Continued). , 
 
 211. Generally speaking, the retention or rejection of 
 the short vowel e in the terminations eft, et, ete, etet, eten, 
 depends on euphony — the e being usually omitted where 
 euphony will permit. (§ 201, a.) But there are some 
 instances in which the retention of the e is imperative. 
 
 212. Verbs whose stem ends in b or t, or in m or it pre- 
 ceded by a mute consonant, always retain the e. Thus : 
 
 Steben, to speak, talk. 
 
 Present. Past. 
 
 r speak. I spoke, talked. 
 
 ic| rebe. h)ir reben. id^ rebete. toir rebeten. 
 
 bu tebeft. t^r rebet. bu rebeteft. il^r rebetet. 
 
 er rebet. fie reben. er rebete. fie rebeten. 
 Past Participle — gerebet, talked, spoken. 
 
 Note — Contracted forms like rpb'ft; reb't, etc. are frequent. 
 
lOO 
 
 LESSON XVIII. 
 
 213. Verbs whose stem ends in a sibilant (f, ^, 5, fi^) retain 
 the e always in the second person singular of the present : 
 
 td^ tanje, I dance. t^ reife, I travel. 
 
 bu tanjeft, thou dancest. bu reifeft, thou traveUest. 
 
 er tanjt, he dances. er retft, he travels. 
 
 214. Verbs whose stem ends in et, er, drop e of the 
 stem before the ending c ; elsewhere they drop the e of the 
 inflection, as also in the infinitive (§ 85, note). 
 
 §anbeln, to act. 
 
 xi^ l^anble. 
 bu ^anbelft. 
 er l^anbelt. 
 h)tr l^anbeln. 
 tl^r l^anbelt. 
 fie l^anbeln. 
 ^anble (bu). 
 id^ l^a6e geljanbelt. 
 
 Conjugate like reben : 
 baben, to bathe. 
 ad^ten, to esteem, respect. 
 hjarten, to wait. 
 retten, to save. 
 leiten, to lead. 
 
 Like tanjen : 
 
 toiinfd^en, to wish. 
 fif^en, to fish. 
 
 Like f)aitbeln and rubern : 
 tabein, to bla77ie. 
 fd^iitteln, to shake. 
 la^eln, to smile. 
 
 SRubern, to row. 
 
 \&l rubre. 
 bu ruberft. 
 er rubert. 
 toir rubern. 
 i^r rubert. 
 fie rubern. 
 rubre (bu). 
 id^ ^aBe gerubert. 
 
 attnen, to breathe.. 
 troften, to comfort. 
 red^nen, to reckon. 
 jetd^nen, to draw. 
 bffnen, to open. 
 
 fe:|en, to put, place. 
 |affen, to hate. 
 
 anbern, to alter. 
 ^jtaubern, to chat, talk. 
 flettern, to climb. 
 
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. lOI 
 
 The Perfect Participle. 
 
 215. The perfect participle regularly takes the prefix 
 ge- in verbs of all conjugations. This prefix is called the 
 augment. 
 
 (a) But verbs of foreign origin ending in ter'en (old 
 spelling also ir'en), do not take the augment ge- Thus : 
 [tubteren, to study ; ftubiert, studied; marfd)ieren, to march ; 
 mftrfcfltert, marched. 
 
 Conjugate like ftubieren : 
 
 regieren, to rule, govern. Bombarbieren, to bombard. 
 J)robieren, to try. faHieren, to fail. 
 
 (b) Sud^fta&teren, to spell, is formed from a German word by 
 a foreign suffix, and forms its past participle buc^ftabiert. But 
 in jieren, to adorn, ter is not a part of the termination, but of the 
 root of the verb ; therefore gejtert, adorned. 
 
 216. Verbs formed with the unaccented inseparable pre- 
 fixes do not take the augment ge- These prefixes are 
 Be- emp-, ent-, er- ge-, tier-, ^er-, and some others. 
 (Lesson XXVIII.) Examples: erfaufen, p. p. er!auft; tier== 
 loBen, p. p. berloht ; Bejetc^neit, p. p. hejetcfinet. 
 
 Note. — Generally .the augment is not prefixed except immediately before 
 the syllable having the principal accent. 
 
 Interrogative Pronouns and Adjectives. 
 
 217. These are : — 
 
 loer, who ? 
 
 toag, whatf 
 
 toeld^er, toeld^e, ttield^eS, which i what (adj.)? 
 
 hJflg fiir etn, what kind of a t 
 
102 LESSON XVIII. 
 
 2i8. The declension of toer and toa§ is as follows : — 
 
 N. toer, who? toaS, wM^? 
 
 G. iot^'lm, w/iose f 'mi'{\t'n, of what ? 
 
 D. toem, to whom i (dative is wanting.) 
 
 A. iren, whom ? toaS, what ? 
 
 219. SBer is used in speaking of persons, for both genders 
 and numbers ; and luaS in speaking of inanimate objects. 
 Examples: SSer tft grOfeer, ^arl ober §etnrid)? SBer finb 
 biefe grauen ? SBaS |a6en @ie ba ? SBec and toaS are used 
 only as pronouns. 
 
 220. 2BeW)er is used both as an adjective and as a 
 pronoun. As an adjective : S!8el(f)e§ §au§ ^aten ®ie ge= 
 !auft? As a pronoun : 3BeIc§e§ bon bte[eii .^auferit etc.? 
 
 Note. — SBeld), uninflected, is often used in exclamations before the 
 indefinite article or an adjective, like ]oW) (§ 207); as, \odi) eitl 2)laun! 
 njelcf) Xt\d)tX ^inimet, wkat a rich sky ! 
 
 221. The phrase tt)a§ fiir ein, what for a, what (kind of), is 
 
 used as an interrogative adjective, in which etit is inflected; 
 
 as, toaS ftir ein iBaum ift \>oS,'i what kind of a tree is that? 
 
 h)a§ fiir einen @tod£ '§aben ©ie? what kind of a cane have 
 
 you ? Or without ein : toa§ fiir SBein — Unfinn — SStumen ? 
 
 what {kind of) wine — nonsense — flowers ? 
 
 Note. — SBa8 and fiir (ein) are often separated, as, 333a8 i|l ba8 fiir etn 
 @to(f ? aSaS ifl baa fiir Unftnn ? 
 
 3Ba§ fiir etner, y*/^*/ kind of one, occurs as pronoun. 
 
 222. id) Instead of a dative or accusative of maS with a 
 preposition, too, where, before a vowel luor, is used in 
 composition: as, Irotion, of what f IcoburdE), through what? 
 toomtt, with what? toortn, in what? toorauf, upon what? 
 
 Note. — With um, toaxwm, for what, why? is used for HJorum. 
 
 Yet a preposition may stand before toaS fiir (ein), 
 
 (b) Likewise the genitive rtieffen is rarely used, except 
 
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. IO3 
 
 of persons. A shorter form, lue^, is sometimes met witli ; 
 in compounds, toeS; as, toeS^alb, on what account f (See 
 also Lesson lv.) 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 auf elnen inat'ten, to -wait for some one. 
 
 ailf EtroaS red^nen, to count upon something, 
 
 gern, with pleasure, willingly. 
 
 \&i Jjlaubre gei'n, I like to chat. 
 
 EXERCISE XVIII. 
 
 I. Ich habe sie* getrostet. 2. Er hat den ganzen Tag 
 gewartet. 3. Dieser Mann redet zu vial. 4. Die Schiiler achten 
 ihren Lehrer. 5. Main Bruder wartet auf seinen Freund. 6. Er 
 rechnet darauf. 7. Er rettete das Kind. 8. Ich schiittle den 
 Baum. g. Du plauderst zu viel, main Kind. 10. Der Knabe 
 kletterte auf den Baum. 11. Er tadelte diesen Fehlar. 12. Sie 
 zeichnat schlacht. 13. Main Bruder hat zu {at) Heidelberg 
 studiert. 14. Mein armer Nachbar hat falliert. 15. Erlachelte 
 liber den Narren. 16. Sie tadelten uns. 17. In wessen Garten 
 sind Sie gewesen? 18. Wir waran in dam (or demjenigen) 
 unseres Nachbars. 19. Was haben Sie getadelt.' 20. Wen 
 tadelte dar Lehrer ? 21. Wessen Haus ist das? 22. Wem hat 
 unser Lehrer dieses Buch geschickt 1 23. Wem sagen Sie das ? 
 24. Was fiir eine Blume haben Sie da ? 
 
 I. The boys have, bathed in the deep river. 2. She has 
 denied it. 3. My daughter comforted the poor woman. 4. Dost 
 thou wait for thy brother? 5. The boys shook the trees. 
 6. The brave soldier saved the old general. 7. We have waited 
 the whole day. 8. I chat with my children. 9. I smile at (u6er, 
 acc^ the fool. 10. The general has bombarded the town. 11. 
 We have tasted {tried) this wine. 12. We opened the door. 
 
 * Her, or them. See note 3, § 189. In connected discourse, however, 
 §i}ch ambiguities will generally be avoided. 
 
I04 LESSON XIX. 
 
 13. The mother led her child by (an, dat^ the hand. 14. The 
 teacher blamed the pupil. 15. The prince chatted with the old 
 soldier. 16. The boys were rowing against the stream. 
 17. The maid-servant has adorned the nursery with beautiful 
 flowers. .118. Spell these words. 19. I have spelled them. 
 20. We like to chat with our friends. 21. Whom have you sent 
 to (the) town ? 22. Whose house have you bought ? 23. [To] 
 whom. did you show the castle of the count? 24. What have you 
 there ? — What kind of a stick is that ? 
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 The Strong Conjugation. 
 
 223. Strong verbs, as already stated, are distinguished 
 by a change of the root-vowel — that is, by internal 
 change — in conjugation. This change of vowel is called 
 Iblaut. 
 
 Note. — Hbtaut must not be confounded with Umlaut (§ 10.) From the 
 force of um, around, and Sout, sound, Uttltaut means a shifting of sound on 
 the same base, as of 0, 0, U, to 0, 15, ii. From aB, off, away, StBlaut means a 
 departure of sound, that is, the substitution of a different sound. The former 
 is called vowel modification ; the latter, vowel change. They are, historic- 
 ally, of different origin. The term vowel alteration is used when necessary 
 to include both of these processes. 
 
 General Kules of Conjugation for Strong Verbs. 
 
 224. The past tense is formed by a change of root-vowel 
 (Slblaut) and without any ending, as, f^jred^en, \)fxa6) ; fingen, 
 fang; liigen, log; fallen, ftel, etc. The past subjunctive 
 modifies, when possible, the root-vowel of the past indica- 
 tive, and adds -e, as, fprdt^e, fcinge, loge, fide, etc. 
 
 Note. — An earlier e is still sometimes found in the past indicative of 
 some verbs ; as, faf)e for ja^, etc. 
 
STRONG CONJUGATION. 10$ 
 
 225. The perfect participle ends in en. The root-vowel 
 of the participle is sometimes the same as that of the 
 infinitive; sometimes the same as that of the past; 
 sometimes different from both. As in the sequences : 
 
 I. I. 2. I. as, fef)en, faf), gefe^en, etc. 
 II. I. 2. 2. as, frieren, fror, gefroren, etc. 
 III. I. 2. 3. as, [tngen, fang, gefungen, etc. 
 
 Note. — i . This sequence of ■vowels will be found to be a convenient aid 
 to the memory. The groups as thus defined are sometimes called Con- 
 jugations I., II., III. See § 259. 
 
 2. The infinitive, past tense, and perfect participle, which exhibit the 
 vowel sequences, are known as the principal parts of the verb — as also in 
 English ; and, likewise, in the weak verbs. 
 
 Special Rules of Conjugation. 
 
 226. Certain strong verbs undergo modification or change 
 of the root vowel in the second and third persons singular 
 of the present indicative and in the imperative singular. 
 
 {a) Nearly all those which have the vowel e in the first 
 person of the present change it into i or ie in the second and 
 third, and in the second person singular of the imperative , 
 short e becoming short i, and long e becoming ie. For instance : 
 id^ bre^e, I break, bu brtd^ft, er 6rid^t, imperative: 6ri(^; icf) lefe, / 
 read, bu liefeft, er Iteft, imperative : lte§. These verbs usually 
 omit final e in the imperative. @e|en has [tef)'or fiel)e. 
 
 (J)) Most verbs which have a for their root-vowel modify a 
 into a in the second and third persons singular of the present 
 indicative, but not in the imperative : td^ fatte, I fall, bu fciEft, 
 er fiiEt ; imperative : faHe. 
 
 {c) The following modify the vowel only in the present 
 indicative : (aufen, to run, bu laufft, er ISuft ; faufen, to drink, 
 bu fciufft, er fauft; fto|en, to push, bu fto^eft, er ftb^t. ©rlofd^en, 
 to become extinguished, go out, becomes erlifd^eft, erlif^t, and 
 
.io6 
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 
 changes its vowel also in the second singular of the imperative : 
 erlifc^. Also berlijfd^en (§ 242, a). 
 
 {d) Verbs whose stem ends in t contract -tet to -t in the 
 third singular present if they alter the vowel, but not other- 
 wise ; as, gelten, gilt; raten, rat; but Keten, Btetet. (§ 212). 
 
 227. With the above exceptions (224, 226) the rules for 
 the personal endings are the same as in the weak con- 
 jugation. (§ 201.) 
 
 Further details and exceptions will be given under the 
 several classes, and in the Alphabetical List, p. 312. 
 
 Example of a Strong Verb. 
 ©^rct^en, to speak. 
 
 Principal Parts. 
 f^jred^en. f^jrad^. gef^3ro(^en. 
 
 Pres. Part. — f^jred^enb. Perf. Infin. — gef^jrod^en ^aben. 
 
 Indicative. 
 \i) f^jrec^e. 
 bu f^jrid^ft. 
 er fjjri^t. 
 tDtr y^jrec^en. 
 i^r f^jrec^t. 
 fie f^jre^en. 
 
 bu f^3rad;ft. 
 er f(3ra^. 
 iDtr f^rad^en. 
 if)r fi3rad;et. 
 fie f^jrad^en. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 tc^ Ijabe gef^jrod^en. 
 bu ^aft gef:prD(^en, etc. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 id^ f(3red^e. 
 bu f(3rcd^eft. 
 er fjjred^e. 
 toir f^jred^en. 
 i^r f^jred^iet. 
 fie fjjre^en. 
 
 '■t&j f^jrcid^e. 
 bu f^ra^jeft. 
 er fjsrad^e. 
 toir f^srad^en. 
 il^r f^rad;et. 
 fie f^jra^en. 
 
 id; '^<A% gefjsrod^en. 
 
 bu l^abeft gef^3ro(i)en, etc, 
 
STRONG CONJUGATION. lO/ 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 '\&i ^tte gefjsrod^ett. i^) l^citte geflprod^en. 
 
 bu l^atteft gefjjrod^en, etc. bu ^atteft gefJ)ro(|en, etc. 
 
 Future. 
 i^ toerbe f^jred^en. \&i toerbe f^jre^en. 
 
 bu toirft f^sred^en, etc. bu toerbeft f^)red§en, etc. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 id^ toerbe gef^)ro(^en ^aben, etc. ic^ tuerbe gef(3ro(!^en l^aben, etc. 
 Conditional. 
 id^ toiirbe f^rec^en, I should speak. 
 bu toiirbeft f^jred^en, etc. 
 
 Conditional Perfect. 
 i4» toiirbe gef^jrod^en l^aben, etc. 
 Imperative. 
 
 fjjred^en toir. 
 
 f)3red^e er. f^jred^en fie. 
 
 Classes of Strong Verbs. 
 
 228. Strong verbs may be divided, for the convenience 
 of the learner, into three classes, according to the root- 
 vowels (see Remark § 259) : 
 
 I. The first class contains all strong verbs virhich have 
 for their root-vowel i (ie) or e, with a few others. 
 
 This class contains by far the largest number of strong 
 verbs, and is subdivided into four groups according to the 
 vowels (9I£)faut) of the pa^i-' cense and perfect participle, 
 
108 LESSON XIX. 
 
 Examples : — 
 
 a) fingen, to sing. fang, sang. gefungen, sung. 
 
 b) f^jred^en, to speak, f^rad^, spake, gefjirod^en, spoken. 
 
 c) frieren, to freeze. ^wx, froze. Qt^X0Xtn,frozen. 
 
 d) fel^eh, to see. fa^, sa?^ gefel^en, seen. 
 
 229. 2. The second class contains all strong verbs which 
 have for their root-vowel ei, with one exception. (§ 247, n.) 
 
 This class is subdivided into two groups, the first 
 having in the past tense and perfect participle a short i, 
 and the second group having ie. 
 
 Examples : — 
 
 a) Bet^en, to bite. bi^, bit. gebifjen, bitten. 
 
 b) tretben, to drive, trieb, drove. ge'trieben, driven. 
 
 230. 3. The third class contains all strong verbs which 
 have for their root-vowel a, with a few others. 
 
 It is subdivided into two groups according to the vowel 
 of the past tense. 
 
 Examples : — 
 
 a) faHen, to fall. ^il,fell Qi^atitn, fallen. 
 
 b) f^tagen, to strike {slay), fcblug, slew, gefd^tagen, slain. 
 Note. — Only the usual forms will be here given. Other special forms 
 
 will be found in the Alphabetical List at the end of the book. 
 
 231. FIRST CLASS OF STRONG VERBS. 
 
 First Subdivision. 
 Vowels — i ; a, U. 
 
 Infinitive. Past. Perf. Part. 
 
 binben, to bind. banb. gebunben. 
 
 bringen, to press. brang. gebrungen. 
 
 finben, to find. .fanb. gefunben. 
 
 ^elingen, to succeed (impersonal), geiancj. gelungen. 
 
STRONG CONJUGATION. 
 
 109 
 
 Infinitive. 
 IHngcn, to sound. 
 ringen, to wring, ■wrestle. 
 fd^Iingen, to sling, twine. 
 fd^toinben, to vanish. ^ 
 fd^icingen, to swing. 
 fingen, to sing. 
 finfen, to sink. 
 f)jringen, to spring, leap. 
 fttnfen, to stink. 
 trinlen, to drink. 
 tcinben, to wind. 
 gtoingen, to force. 
 
 (a) To these may be added : 
 bingen, to bargain. 
 rpj^inben, to flay. 
 which have usually u instead of 
 
 I. Dieser Mann hat das Geld gefunden. 2. Meine Schwester 
 wird ein deutsches' Lied singen. 3. Trinken Sie gern Milch? 
 4. Er bindet das Buch. 5. Der Vogel hat gesungen. 6. Es 
 klang sehr schon. 7. Der Epheu schl-ingt sich um den Baum. 
 8. Er sagt, dass er das Buch gebunden habe. 9. Es ist miri 
 nicht gelungen (/ have not succeeded in, etc.), das Wort in demi 
 Worterbuche zu finden. 10. Zwingen Sie mich nicht. 11. Die 
 Kinder wiirden weinen, wenn der Lehrer sie zwange, dieses 
 Lied zu lernen. 12. Es wird Ihnen nicht gelingen, Deutsch zu 
 lemen, wenn Sie nicht fleissiger studieren. 13. Ich habe ein 
 Messer gefunden. 14. Die Kinder dieser Frau haben sehr 
 schon gesungen. 15. Die Frauen wanden einen Kranz. 16. 
 Worauf sitzen die Schiiler? 17. Wovon sprechen die Lehrer? 
 18. WQraus hat das Kind getrunken? 19. Wir fanden die 
 
 Past. 
 
 Perf. Part. 
 
 Hang. 
 
 gellungen. 
 
 rang. 
 
 gerungen. 
 
 fc^lang. 
 
 gefd^Iungen. 
 
 fd^toanb. 
 
 gefd^tounben. 
 
 fd^ioangl 
 
 gef^hjungen. 
 
 fang. 
 
 gefungen. 
 
 fanl. 
 
 gefunlen. 
 
 f|)rang. 
 
 gef^jrungen. 
 
 ftanl. 
 
 geftunlen. 
 
 tranl. 
 
 getrunfen. 
 
 toanb. 
 
 geiBunben. 
 
 Stoang. 
 
 gejtDungen. 
 
 added \ 
 
 bung. 
 
 gebungen. 
 
 fd^unb. 
 
 gef^unben. 
 
 tead of a in the past 
 
 tense. 
 
 EXERCISE XIX. 
 
 
no LESSON XX. 
 
 Biicher auf der Bank in der Schulstube. 20. Das Madclien 
 schlang den Kranz um den Arm des Knaben. 21. Der 
 Matrose sprang auf den Felsen. 22. Der Buchbinder hat 
 unsere alten Biicher sehr schon gebunden. 23. So sank das 
 Schiff. 24. In der Nacht schwanden die Wolken. 
 
 'i. I have found these books on the table. 2. This good 
 young lady wound a wreath around the boy's hat. 3. Whkt 
 would these children say if the teacher forced them to leave 
 (the) school? 4. The gentleman sang a German song. 5. Do 
 you like to drink milk ? 6. She liked to drink wine. 7. I have 
 drunk a cup [of] tea. 8. The boy leaped over the garden- 
 wall. 9. The boy has found this knife in the school-room. 
 10. I should drink a glass [of] water if I were thirsty. 11. 
 Would you be glad if we sang (subj.) a song? 12. He hoped 
 that you had found me here. 13. I have succeeded {it is to 
 me succeeded). 14. She will succeed. 15. You will find me at ' 
 home to-morrow. 16. The soldiers forced the general to speak. 
 17. You would succeed if you studied more. 18. Do not drink 
 this bad beer. 19. The boy swung himself over the wall. 20. 
 The birds were -singing in the woods. 21. The farmer has 
 flayed the ox. 22. What song had you been singing (sung)! 
 23. What kind of a song has the young lady sung? 24. What 
 kind of tea do you like to drink ? 
 
 LESSON XX. 
 
 232. FIRST CLASS OF STRONG VERBS. 
 
 Second Subdivision. 
 Vowels — e (i); 0, 0. 
 Infinitive. - Past. Perf. Part. 
 
 befel)len, to command; befie^Ift, beftel^lt. befall. befofjlen. 
 beginnen, to begin. begann. begonnen. 
 
FIRST CLASS OF STRONG VERBS. 
 
 Ill 
 
 Past. 
 Barg. 
 6arft. 
 brad^. 
 
 Perf. Part. 
 geborgen. 
 geborften. 
 gebrod^en. 
 em^fol^Ien. 
 
 erfd^raf. , erfd^rodfen. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Bergen, to hide; Birgft, birgt. 
 
 Berften, to burst; birfteft, birft. 
 
 bred^en, to break ; brid^ft, bric^it. 
 
 emjjfel^len, to recommend; em^jfiel^lft, 
 em})fte^(t. 
 
 erfc^redEen, to be frightened ; erfd^ridEft, 
 erfd^ridt. 
 
 gebaren, to bring forth; gebierft, gebiert. 
 
 gelten, to-be worth; gittft, gilt. 
 
 getoinnen, to win. 
 
 \z\\z-n, to help ; ^ilfft, ^ilft. 
 
 fommen, to eome. (See below.) 
 
 ne^men, to take; nimmft, nimmt. 
 
 rinnen, to flow. 
 
 fd^elten, to seold; fd^ittft, fd^ilt. 
 
 fc^toirtimen, to'swim. 
 ■ ftnnen, to meditate. 
 
 [|3tnnen, to spin. 
 
 fpred^en, to speak ; f^jrid^ft, f Jjrid^t. 
 . fted^en, to stick ; ftid^ft, ftic^t. 
 
 ftel^Ien, to steal; ftie^lft, ftiel^It. 
 
 fterben, to die; ftirBft, ftirbt. 
 -treffen, to hit, to meet; triffft, trifft. 
 
 Derberben, tospoil; berbtrbft, Derbifbt. 
 Toerben, to sue; toirbft, toirbt. 
 
 toerf en, to throw ; hjirf ft, toirft. 
 
 (a) All these verbs modify the vowel e to t, or ie, in the, 
 second and third person singular of the present and in-tlTe 
 second person singular of the imperative (f^Jrtc^, trtff, :c.). 
 
 In learning these and similar verbs, it is best, for uniformity and for the 
 memory, to name the past and the perf. part, first after the infin. (as in 
 § 231); then the third sing, pres., which will suggest the second; and finally 
 the imperative ; thus: bergen, borg, geborgen, bivgt, birg. 
 
 gebav. 
 
 geboren. 
 
 gait.' 
 
 gegolten. 
 
 gehjann. 
 
 getDonnen. 
 
 ^alf. 
 
 ge^olfen. 
 
 fam. 
 
 gefommen. 
 
 na^m. 
 
 genommen. 
 
 rann. 
 
 geronncn. 
 
 fd^alt. 
 
 gef^olten. 
 
 fd^toamm. 
 
 gefc^lBommen. 
 
 fonn. 
 
 gefonnen. 
 
 fjjann. 
 
 gef^jonnen. 
 
 f|)ra(^. 
 
 gefjjrod^en. 
 
 ftac^. 
 
 geftod^en. 
 
 fta^I. 
 
 gefto^Ien. 
 
 ftarb. 
 
 geftorben. 
 
 traf. 
 
 getrojfen. 
 
 tierbarb. 
 
 berborben. 
 
 tcarb. 
 
 getDorben. - 
 
 toarf. 
 
 getoorfen. 
 
112 LESSON XX. 
 
 {b) QJebaretl, fommen are irregular in this group, having 
 d, instead of (earlier) e in the infinitive. The modified 
 forms !6nim[t, fOmtnt, are rare. 
 
 {c) The verb toerben belongs to this class with its old past 
 toarb. With its modern past, trurbe, it is irregular (§ 256). 
 
 {d) Note change of quantity in fommen, netjmen, treffen. 
 
 Remark. — Observe that the verbs beginning with the 
 inseparabje prefixes Be-, em)3-, er-, etc. (§ 216), do not take 
 the augment ge-. Such verbs are given in the lists only where 
 the primitive verb is no longer in use ; as, gebctren, etc. 
 
 Relative Pronouns. 
 
 233. The German language, like the English, has no 
 special words to express the relative connection, but 
 supplies the deficiency* by using the demonstrative ber, 
 bie, bus, and the interrogatives ltielc£)er, e, e§, and mer, h)a§ ; 
 their use as relatives being shown by the construction (§238). 
 
 234. %zx, when used as a relative, is declined like the 
 demonstrative ber (§ 206), except that in the genitive 
 plural it has only beren (never berer). SBeldier, as a 
 relative, is declined like biefer, except that it lacks the 
 genitive case, both singular and plural. 
 
 235; In the genitive singular only the forms beffen, 
 beren, beffen, and in the genitive plural the form beren are 
 used. Examples : S)er SJiann, beffen §au§ id) ge!auft '^a6e, 
 tft geftorben ; the man whose house I have bought has died. 
 S)ie grau, beren tinber ©te neuticf) 6et un§ trafen, tutrb un§ 
 morgen 6efud)en ; the lady whose children you met lately at 
 our house will pay us a visit to-morrow. 
 
 236. («) SBer, toag, are used as indefinite relatives, and as 
 such include the antecedent, like the English {fie) whc, 
 
RELATIVE PRONOUNS. II3 
 
 whoever, what {tJiat which). Examples : SBer onbem eine 
 ®ru6egra5t, faHt felbfi t)tnem; he who digs for others a pit 
 falls into it himself. W>oS> er '^Ot, tft nic^t btel ; what he has 
 is not mtich. 
 
 {b) 3Ba§ is also of regular occurrence after a neuter 
 pronoun, personal, demonstrative or indefinite (e§, "Ha^, 
 Qlle§, ettnaS, ntd^t§) etc., and after neuter adjectives used 
 as nouns. Examples : 31tle§, toaS tc^ f)a6e ; all I have. S)a§ 
 erfte, toaS fie f)6rten; the first (thing) they heard. S^Jac^ bent, 
 toa3 td^ ge!^6rt f)abe, after [that] what I have heard. 
 
 237. Instead of the relative tuaS — or, usually, the dative 
 or accusative of relatives referring to things — with pre- 
 positions, the compounds of too, toor (§ 222) are employed. 
 
 238. Since every relative clause is- dependent, or sub- 
 ordinate, the relative pronoun throws the verb to the end 
 of the clause. When the verb is in a compound tense, the 
 inflected part of the verb goes to the end. (See § 177, 4). 
 
 239. The relative pronoun is frequently omitted in 
 English, but must always be expressed in German. 
 Thus : The news we heard yesterday, bte S'teutgfeit, tt)etdE)e 
 loir geftern f)6rten. 
 
 240. In English, in the interrogative, and in some forms 
 of the relative construction, the preposition is often 
 thrown to the end of the clause. This cannot be imitated 
 in German. As, what are you speaking of? 3Bot)on fpre^en 
 ©te {of what)} The man we spoke of; ber SKann, bon ttjelc^em 
 (bem) toir fprac^en {qfwhom), etc. (See also Less, lvi.) 
 
 EXERCISE XX. 
 I. Mein Bruder empfiehlt Ihnen diesen Wain. 2. Es ist 
 derselbe Wein, den ich Ihnen empfohlen habei 3. Hilf mir, 
 
1 14 LESSON XX. 
 
 Heinrich ! 4. Ich habe ihn gestern auf der Strasse getroffen 
 5. Wir trafen uns {each other) oft. 6. Er hat das Gelc 
 genommen. 7. Er birgt auch alles, was er stiehlt. 8. Ei 
 spricht Deutsch und Franzosisch. 9. Er nimmt kein Geld 
 10. Schiller starb zu («^) Weimar. 11. Woriiber sannenSiei 
 12. Die Fische schwimmen in dem Wasser. 13. Kommer 
 Sie nicht zu spat. 14. Ich habe den ersten Preis gewonnen 
 15. Sie hat sich mit einer Nadel ges'tochen. 16. Sie haben es 
 getroffen. 17. Das Eis bricht. 18. Dieser Knabe hat Steine 
 in den Garten unseres Nachbars geworfen. ig. Sein Vatei 
 schilt ihn. 20. Es ist derselbe Knabe, der die schonster 
 Elumen in unserem Garten gebrochen hat. 21. Was fiii 
 ein unartiger Knabe ! 22. Mein Vater empfiehlt sich Ihnen, 
 23. Dieser ist der Mann, von dem wir gestern gesprochen 
 haben (spoke). 24. Wovon sprachen Sie mit Ihrer Schwester? 
 
 I. Who commands here? 2. The teacher commands here, 
 3. He told me that he would help us. 4. I met him yesterday 
 in (the) town. 5. We came too soon. 6. She helps the pooi 
 (dat.). 7. Does your brother speak German ? 8. The soldiers 
 would be frightened if the enemy (//.) were to come (came). 
 
 9. These soldiers say, that they would not be frightened. 
 
 10. He has won this money, he has not stolen it. 11. The 
 women are spinning. 12. I have spoken with him. 13. At 
 what time does the concert begin? 14. The music has begun. 
 15. Take my pen, dear brother, it is better than yours. 16. Do 
 not be frightened, it is only a pin with which I have pricked my- 
 self. 17. My father sends his compliments to your mother. 18. 
 Here is the book which the teacher has recommended [to] you, 
 19. You have hit it. 20. With what can I help you? 21, 
 What are you meditating about (iifeer)? 22. This is the woman 
 I was speaking of (tjon) to you. 23. Here is the man whose 
 sons swam over the river. 24. All the poor [man] had is 
 spoiled or taken from him. ( Use comma before all relatives^ 
 
FIRST CLASS OF STRONG VERBS. 
 
 115 
 
 LESSON XXI. 
 
 FIRST CLASS OF STRONG VERBS. 
 
 Third Subdivision. — A. 
 * Vowels — te; 0, U. 
 
 241. The third subdivision of the first class contains a 
 larger number of verbs than any other class. The first 
 list contains only those which have for the radical vowel 
 of the infinitive ic. 
 
 In all the verbs of this group the root of which ends 
 in \ or c^, the long te of the infinitive is changed into a 
 short in the past tense and perfect participle (§ 41). 
 ©ieben changes its b to tt, with shortened vowel ; and in 
 3ie|ett f) is changed to g. 3;rtefen doubles its f. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Perf. Part. 
 
 btegen, to bend. 
 
 bog. 
 
 gebogen. 
 
 bieten, to bid, offer. 
 
 M, 
 
 geboten. 
 
 fltegen, to fly. 
 
 flog. 
 
 . geflogen. 
 
 fliel^en, to flee. 
 
 flo^. 
 
 gefto^en. 
 
 flie^en, to flow. 
 
 m- 
 
 gefloffen. 
 
 frieren, to freeze. 
 
 fror. 
 
 gefroren. 
 
 geniefien, to enjoy. 
 
 genoi 
 
 genoffen. 
 
 gie^en, to pour. 
 
 9oB« 
 
 segoffen. 
 
 Irted^en, to creep. 
 
 froc^. 
 
 gefeod^en. 
 
 rie^en, to smell. 
 
 roc^. 
 
 geroc^en. 
 
 yd^ieBen,/;? shove, push. 
 
 fc^ob. 
 
 gefd^oben. 
 
 fd^te^en, to shoot. 
 
 ]m- 
 
 gefd^offen. 
 
 fc^Iie^en, to shut, lock. 
 
 fc^IoB. 
 
 gefd^ifoffen. 
 
 fieben, to boil. 
 
 fott. 
 
 gefotten. 
 
 fjjrie^en, to sprout. 
 
 frro^. 
 
 gef^jrofjen. 
 
 ftiebetl/ to be scattered. . 
 
 ftob. 
 
 geftoben. 
 
 ■triefen, to drip. 
 
 - troff. 
 
 getroffen. 
 
 Jwbrie^ert, to vex. 
 
 tierbro^. 
 
 berbroffen. 
 
l^liSSUJN AAl. 
 
 Infinitive. Past. 
 
 berlieren, to lose. Derlor. 
 
 toiegen, to weigh (intransitive), toog. 
 
 Jtel^en, to draw (intr.), to move. jog. 
 
 Perf. Part. 
 berloren. 
 getoogen. 
 gejogen. 
 
 B. 
 Vowels — e, i; 0,0. 
 242. This list, besides the verbs with root-vowel e or t, 
 properly belonging to this class (see § 228), contains also, 
 by analogy of conjugation, a few with root-vowel a, au, 
 
 6, tt, and one with a (fc^aEett). All have in the past 
 tense and perfect participle. 
 
 . Infinitive.' Past. Perf. Part. 
 
 betoegen, to induce. betoog. betoogen. 
 
 \ix%\&l%v., to thrash ; 'i)V,\&ii\i,'rm\i^i. brofd^. gebrofd^en. 
 
 fec^ten, to fight; fid^ft, fi^t'. fod^t. gefoc^iten. 
 
 fled^ten, to braid; flid^ft, flid^t'. flod^t.' geflD(|ten. 
 
 ■gciren, I0 ferment. gor. gegoren. 
 
 (^\mxa,tv.i p glimmer. glotntn. geglommen. 
 
 I^eben, to lift. l^ob. ge^oBen. 
 
 Ilimmen, io climb. f lomm. gellommen. 
 
 .fitren, to choose. for. -geJoren. 
 
 Hjf^en,/(?^^(?«^(ofalight);ltf^eft,Iifc^t. lofd^. gelof^en. 
 
 liigen, to tell a lie. log. gelogen. 
 
 mellen, to milk ; miMft, tnttft. tnol!. gcmoHen. 
 
 'p^i%tn,'to practise, foster. ^ftog. ge:|3flogen. 
 
 ' <\mVi.m, to gush ; quiUft, quittt. quoH. gequoEen. 
 
 f auf en (of animals), to drink ; jauf ft, f auft. f off . gef off en. 
 
 faugen, to suck. fog. gefogen. 
 
 ■fd^aKen, to sound. fd^ott. gefc^otten. 
 
 fc^eren, to shear; fd^ierft, f^tiert. f^or. gefd^oren. 
 
 fd^meljen, to melt; f(^mil3eft, fd^tniljt. fd^tnolj. gefd^moljen. 
 
 fc()nauben, to snort fd^nob. gefd^noben. 
 
 Or fiilitfl, flii^tft, for fi(I)teft, flicf|tEft (232, a).. 
 
FIRST CLASS OF STRONG VERBS. 
 
 117 
 
 Infinitive. 
 fd^raulben, to screw. 
 fd^icaren, to suppurate. 
 fd^toeHen, to swell; f^toiUft, fc^toiHt. 
 fd^tooren, to swear. 
 triigen, to deceive. 
 tocigen, to weigh (transitive), 
 tueben, to weave. 
 
 242. {a) The verbs fiiren, I6f(f)en, fc^aHen, triigen rarely 
 occur as simple verbs, but chiefly with the inseparable 
 prefixes; erfiiren, erlBfi^en, Derlofc^en, erfc£)alten, berfc^aUcn, 
 betriigen. 5PfIegen, toagen are usually conjugated as weak. 
 
 (p) Note absence of vowel change (§ 226) in fiettegen, 
 I)e6en, lDe6en, fc^allen — and like cases hereafter. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Perf. Part. 
 
 fc^rob. 
 
 gefc^roben. 
 
 fd^hjor. 
 
 gefd^tooren. 
 
 jc^iBoH. 
 
 gef^iDoIlen. 
 
 fd^hjor. 
 
 gefc^tDoren. 
 
 trog. 
 
 getrogen. 
 
 toog. 
 
 getoogen. 
 
 tDOb. 
 
 getDoBen. 
 
 EXERCISE XXI. -A. 
 
 I. Die There der Stadt sind geschlossen. 2. Der Vogel 
 flog auf einen Baum. 3. Wir sind (have) aus der Stadt auf 
 das Land gezogen. 4. Die Feinde flohen. 5. Der Bruder 
 meines Vetters hat sein Geld verloren. 6. Es hat gefroren. 
 7. Friert es ? 8. Der Kaufmann hot mir hundert Thaler fiir 
 mein Pferd. 9. Die wilden Ganse ziehen im Herbst nach 
 Siiden. 10. Wie viel hat das Brot gewogen ? 11. Seine Kleider 
 troffen vom Regen. 12. Die Feinde stoben nach alien 
 Seiten. 13. Der Jager hat drei Hasen geschossen. 14. Wer 
 jung ist, geniesse sein Leben. 15. Karl, giesse Wasser auf die 
 Blumen! 16. Es verdriesst mich mein Geld verloren zu haben. 
 
 I. He has poured water into the glass. 2. Have you lost 
 your money? 3. The cat crept under the table. 4. He 
 pushed the table against (an) the wall. 5. The enemy (//.) 
 has (are) fled. 6. I have shot a hare. 7. How much has the 
 merchant offered you for your horse ? 8. He has offered me 
 
Il8 LESSON XXI. 
 
 [a] hundred dollars. 9. My uncle has (is) moved into the 
 village. 10. The leaves of the trees sprout in (the) spring. 
 II. The boy says that he has (sufy'.) lost his knife. 12. The 
 sportsman sent me three birds which he had shot. 13. The 
 gate is locked. 14. The trees are dripping with (bom) rain. 
 15. The rain was dripping from her dress. 16. (The) birds fly in 
 the air, fishes swim in the water, and worms creep upon the earth. 
 
 B. 
 
 I. Diese drei Regimenter haben tapfer gefochten. 2. Wenn 
 man von einem Menschen sagt, er saufe, so sagt man damit, 
 dass er wie ein Tier sauft, und nicht wie ein Mensch trinkt. 3. 
 Er hob das Kind auf den Stuhl. 4. Der Regen troff aus den 
 Wolken. 5. Was hat Sie bewogen, auf das Land zu ziehen? 
 6. Das Feuer ist erloschen. 7. Die Schafer haben die Schafe 
 geschoren. 8. Der Schnee ist auf den Bergen geschmolzen. 
 9. Die Magde melken die Kiihe. 10. Der Knabe hat gelogen. 
 II. Wer gelogen hat, liige nicht mehr ; und wer gestohlen hat, 
 stehle nicht mehr. 12. Das Eis schmilzt. 13. Dieser Kauf- 
 mann hat mich betrogen. 14. Das Wasser quillt aus der Erde. 
 15. Er hob den Stein auf. 16. Er galoppierte so schnell, dass 
 das Pferd schnob und die Funken stoben. 
 
 I. The rivers are swollen by the rain. 2. The peasant is 
 threshing. 3. Our soldiers have fought bravely. 4. The snow 
 is melting. 5. How many sheep have the shepherds shorn 
 to-day? 6. The fire had ('max) gone out; not -a (!ein) spark 
 was glimmering. 7. The merchant would have deceived me. 
 8. He who (toer) steals will lie. 9. He lifted the stone out of 
 the water. 10. A good soldier fights for his king. 11. All is 
 lost. 12. Tell shot the apple from the head of his little son. 
 13. The rain was pouring from the clouds. 14. The stranger 
 offered me (tia(.) his hand. 15. The girl who had milked the 
 cows weighed a pound [of] butter. 16, This old thief has 
 stolen a young sheep. 
 
FIRST CLASS OF STRONG VERBS. 
 
 119 
 
 243- 
 
 LESSON XXII. 
 
 FIRST CLASS OF STRONG VERBS. 
 
 Fourth Subdivision. 
 
 Vowels — c,i; 0, e. 
 
 Infinitive. Past. ^^ Perf. part. 
 
 bitten, to beg, ask. bat. gebeten. 
 
 effen, to eat; tfjeft, i^t. ' o.%. gegeffen- 
 
 freffen, to eat; friff^eft, frip (of animals), frafe. gefreffen. 
 
 geben, /(?^w/ giebft, giebt. gab. gegeben. 
 
 genefen, to recover (from illness). genag. genefen. 
 
 /^efd^el^en, to happen ; e § gefc^ie^t. gef(^ab. gef(^et)en'! ^ 
 
 Tefeit, to read; ItefeltjTte^ laS- gelefetu 
 
 tiegen, to lie, be situated. lag. gelegen. 
 
 tneften, to measure ; tnifjeft, mi^t. ma^. gemeff en. 
 
 fe^en,/^ j-^^/ fte{)ft, fie^t. fa^. gefe^en. 
 
 fi^en, to sit. fa§. gefeffen. 
 
 treten, to tread; trittft, tritt. trat. getreten. 
 
 bergeffen, to forget; tiergiffeft, tiergi^t. berga^^ bergeffen. 
 
 [a) In effen there is a double augment — geeffen, con- 
 tracted to geffen — then ge-geffcn. In fi^en, % is changed 
 to ^. 3;reten changes long e to short t, followed by tt. 
 
 (3) In this group the a of the past is long. Hence in 
 the subjunctive, d^e, fra^e, etc. (§ 41). For the contracted 
 forms bit i^t, fri^t, etc., see p. 312, note 2. 
 
 Indefinite Pronouns and Adjectives. 
 
 244. The indefinite pronouns are: — 
 jemanb, somebody. cinsr, one. 
 
 niemanb, nobody. feiner, no one; pi. none. 
 
 jebermann, everybody. etioaS, something. 
 
 wan, one, they, etc. ni^tg, nothing. 
 
I20 LESSON XXII. 
 
 {a) ^emanb, ntemanb have genitive -(e)§ ; dative -em, or -en ; 
 accusative -en ; but are often without ending in dative and 
 accusative, ^ebermann takes only -(e)§ in the genitive. 
 
 Note. — These words are all compounds of SKann, man. 
 
 {b) Siner, feiner are the pronoun forms of ein, fein. They are 
 declined like biefer. Compare the possessives (§ 193). 
 
 (c) The indefinite man (from 3Jlann, man) is the general 
 personal subject, variously translated : one, people, they, we, 
 etc. ; also often by the passive ; as, man fagt, it is said. It 
 is used only as nominative singular. (See § 460, i). 
 
 (//) ©tioaiS, nidjtS are indeclinable. They often occur with a 
 neuter adjective as noun : ettcag ©ute§ ; ni^tS ®ute§. 
 
 Note. — The English not any — one ox thing will be usually expressed 
 simply by fcin(cr), iiiciiianb, nidjts. 
 
 245. The indefinite adjectives are: — 
 
 !ein, feine, fein, no, not any. mand^er, e, e§, many {a). 
 
 jeber, iebe, iebe§, ) eintge, ] , , , , - 
 
 • V r = ( 7 ^^.? \ some (xA.), afctb. 
 
 ieglid^er, e, e§, > each, every. etiictie, ) \r / .> 
 
 jebtoeber, e, eg, ) btel, much ; pi. biele, many. 
 
 alter, e, e§, all. Wenig, Tittle ,• pi. hjenige, few. 
 
 Note. — To these may be added the indeclinable eiit IBCltig, a little : and 
 phrases like eiu t)aat, a/ew, ein bigc^en, a bit (of), used indeclinably ; also the 
 forms in -let, alteriei, of all kinds, etc. (§ 306). 
 
 {a) ^eber is used also with the indefinite article, usually with- 
 out a noun : ein jeber, every one; sometimes also, ein jegKd^er. 
 
 {b) 3)land^ is also used, in the singular, without declension, 
 followed by the indefinite article ; as, mand;er SUann, or mand; 
 ein 3Jlftnn, many a man. Also — chiefly in poetry — before an 
 adjective; as, mand^ bunte Slumen (for mand^e bunten Slumen). 
 
 (1^) SSiet and toenig are generally not declined in the singular, 
 but should be declined in the plural. For instance : aSiet @elb, 
 biel SGBein ; much money, much wine. But: @r l^at biele grcunbe, 
 he has many friends. 3SteIeg, h)enige§, occur as neuter pronouns. 
 
 (//) For special uses of a(l, see § 460, 4. 
 
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 121 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 bitte, pray ; for ic^ bitte. ttlie \y\A,how much ; pi. how many. 
 
 urn etmaS Mtten, to beg for anything. iii) raid bamit (ogcn, I mean by that. 
 
 EXERCISE XXII. 
 
 1. Bitte, lieber Vater, gieb mir eine neue Uhr. 2. Ich bitte 
 Sie um Verzeihung. 3. Der Arme bittet um Brot. 4. Sieh, 
 hier sind deine Biicher. 5. Der Blinde sieht nichts. 6. Es 
 geschieht oft, dass man etwas in der Eile vergisst. 7. Als der 
 Kranke genesen war, ass er einen Apfel mit dem grossten 
 Appetit'. 8. Ich vergass Ihnen zu sagen, dass ich Ihren 
 Freund gesehen habe. 9. Der Knabe isst Kirschen. 10. Der 
 Vogel sass auf einem hohen Baume. 11. Jedermanns Sache 
 ist niemandes Sache. 12. Ich habe die Sache ganz vergessen. 
 13. Tiere fressen, Menschen essen ; Tiere saufen, Menschen 
 trinken. 14. Wenn man von einem Menschen sagt, dass er 
 fresse, so will man damit sagen, dass er wie ein Tier esse. 
 15. Der Konig sass auf dem Throne, und seine Minister traten 
 vor ihn. 16. Tritt naher, mein Sohn, sprich lauter, und lies 
 deutlich. 17. Siehst du niemand(en) auf der Bank? 18. Ich 
 sehe niemand(en). ig. Alias ist verloren. 20. Viele waren 
 erwartet, aber wenige sind gekommen. 21. Welche Gegenden 
 der Schweiz haben Sie bereist? 22. Ich habe nur einige Stadte 
 der Schweiz gesehen. 23'. Lag viel Schnee auf den Bergen ? 
 24. Die Berge waren ganz frei von Schnee. 
 
 I. My friend gave me a dollar for the poor. 2. This scholar 
 reads more distinctly than that [one]. 3. My sister reads 
 Schiller's Wilhelm Tell. 4. I should read more, if I had more 
 time. 5. The books lay upon the table. 6. I have seen your 
 good old aunt. 7. It happened yesterday. 8. Have you seen 
 that famous general ? g. I have not seen him. 10. I beg (for) 
 pardon. 11. I should have asked you, if I had seen you. 
 12. The boys have eaten ripe cherries. 13. The blind [man] 
 sees no one. 14. You have forgotten the matter. 15. I was 
 
122 LESSON XXIII. 
 
 in [a] hurry and have quite forgotten it. i6. We shall eat with 
 [a] good appetite. 17. The minister stepped before the throne. 
 18. Do many [people] travel in winter? 19. Few travel in 
 winter, but many travel in summer. 20. I have little money. 
 21. He has, many books, but I have none. 22. He lives at 
 (in) peace with all men. 23. We read the whole night (ace). 
 24. One often forgets what one has read. 
 
 Kule of Position. 
 
 In the normal order, an adverb will follow the verb. — 
 Hence translate, one forgets often. 
 
 LESSON XXIII. 
 
 SECOND CLASS OF STRONG VERBS. 
 
 First Subdivision. 
 
 246. The second class of strong verbs contains verbs 
 which have for their root-vowel in the infinitive et. The 
 first subdivision contains those verbs which have in their 
 past tense and perfect participle a short i. 
 
 In order to show the shortening of the vowel the , 
 following consonant is doubled, except where it is double 
 already. In leiben and f(J)netben, b Jjecomes tt. 
 
 Vowels — ct 
 
 ;i, i. 
 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Perf. Part. 
 
 (ftd^) beftetfeen, to apply on^s self. 
 
 beflife. 
 
 befliffen. 
 
 bei^en, to bite. 
 
 n. 
 
 gebiffen. 
 
 erbleid^en, to turn pale. 
 
 erbli^. 
 
 erbltd^en. 
 
 glei^en, to resemble, to be like. 
 
 gli(^. 
 
 geglid^en. 
 
 gleiten, to glide. 
 
 glitt. 
 
 geglttten. 
 
 greifen, to seize. 
 
 Sriff. 
 
 gegiiffen- 
 
SECOND CLASS OF STRONG VERBS. 
 
 123 
 
 Infinitive. 
 feifen, to chide. 
 Ineifen, to pinch. 
 leiben, to suffer. 
 Jjfetfen, to whistle. 
 rei^en, to tear. 
 reiten, to ride. 
 -fd^teid^en, to sneak. 
 -fd^Ietfen, to whet. 
 -fd^Iet^en, to slit. 
 fd()mei^en, to fling. 
 fdfineiben, to cut. 
 fd^reiten, to stride. 
 fplei^en, to split. 
 ftreid^en, to stroke. 
 ■ftrettett/ to contend. 
 'toeid^en, to yield. 
 
 Past. 
 
 ftff. 
 
 Intff. 
 
 fitt. 
 
 m- 
 
 ritt. 
 
 f^Kd^. 
 
 fc^tiff. 
 
 \m>- 
 
 fd^mi^. 
 [(^nitt. 
 fd^ritt. 
 
 ftric^. 
 ftritt. 
 h)id^. 
 
 Second Subdivision. 
 
 Perf. Part. 
 
 geiiffen. 
 
 ge!niffen. 
 
 gelitten. 
 
 gej5fiffen. 
 
 gerifjen. 
 
 geritten. 
 
 gefd^Kc^en. 
 
 gejdiiliffetff 
 
 gefd^Itffen. 
 
 gefi^miffen. 
 
 gefd^nitten. 
 
 gefc^ritten. 
 
 gef)3liffen. 
 
 geftrii^en. 
 
 geftrttten. 
 
 gdtBtd^en. 
 
 247. The second subdivision contains those verbs which 
 have in their past tense and perfect participle long t (ie). 
 
 Vowels— ci; ic, ie. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Perf. Part. 
 
 6Ietben, to remain. 
 
 6Iieb. 
 
 geblieBen. 
 
 -gebeilen, to prosper. 
 
 gebtel^. 
 
 gebie^en. 
 
 leil^en, to lend. 
 
 lie^. 
 
 gelie^en. 
 
 meiben, to avoid. 
 
 mieb. 
 
 gemieben. 
 
 l»reifen, to praise. 
 
 Jjriei. 
 
 ge^jrtefen. 
 
 reifeen, to rub. 
 
 rieb. 
 
 gerieben. 
 
 ifd^eiben, to part. 
 
 fc^ieb. 
 
 gefd^tebe.n. 
 
 fc^etnen, to shine. 
 
 fd^ten. 
 
 gefd^ienen. 
 
 fcfjretben, to write. 
 
 fc^rieb. 
 
 gefc^rieben. 
 
 yd^reien, to scream. 
 
 fd^rie. 
 
 ge[d^rieen. 
 
124 
 
 LESSON XXIII. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 fc|)h)eigen, to be silent. 
 
 f^eten, to spit. 
 ■ fteigen, to mount, rise. 
 
 tretSen; to drive. 
 
 toeifen, to show. 
 -%i^m, to accuse. 
 
 Past. Perf. Part. 
 
 fc|)it)ieg. gefc^toiegen. 
 
 f^)ie. gef^Jteen. 
 
 ftteg. gefttegen, 
 
 trieb. getrieben. 
 
 toie§. getDtefen. 
 
 jiel^. gejiel^en. 
 
 Note. — The verb ^ei^ett, to call, be called, belongs to the third class 
 (next lesson). 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 C!lei(^en, to resemble (governs dative). 
 
 ouf I'djnetten ^Pferbeii, on swift horses, i. e. at full speed; 
 
 att (dat.) etWtlB (eibeit, to suffer from anything. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIII. -A. 
 
 I. Der Knabe schliliE sein Messer und schnitt Brot damit. 
 2. Ein Hund hat mich gebissen. 3. Kinder gleichen ihren 
 Eltern. 4. Unsere Soldaten ritten auf schnellen Pferden gegen 
 den Feind ; sie stritten wie tapfre Helden. 5. Der Feind wich. 
 6. Ich habe mich in den Finger geschnitteri. 7. Ich habe mein 
 Exercitium mit deinem verglichen und finde, dass ich zwei 
 Fehler mehr gemacht habe als du. 8. Der Sturm hatte das 
 Dach vom Hause gerissen. g. Der Wind pfiff in den Baumen. 
 10. Die Diebe schlichen in das Haus und stahlen alles, was sie 
 fanden. 11. Der Jager schritt iiber das Feld. 12. Ich wiirde 
 mit Ihnen nach der Stadt reiten, wenn ich nicht an Zahnweh 
 litte. 
 
 I. My mother suffers from (an) toothache. 2. My sister 
 suffered from headache. 3. She turned pale. 4. This dog had 
 bitten that little boy. 5. Charles compared his exercise with 
 mine and found that he had two mistakes more than I. 6. The 
 tailor cuts the cloth. 7. Who has been whistling ? 8. The 
 thief sneaked into our house and stole all (that) he found. 
 
SECOND CLASS OF STRONG VERBS. 12$ 
 
 9. My uncle has (is) ridden into the town. lo. The wind tore 
 the leaves from the trees. 11. The son resembles the father. 
 12. The sledge glided over the snow and (the) ice. 13. These 
 knives are sharp ; I have ground them. 14. Nobody yielded. 
 15. The huntsman whistled to his dogs. 16. He tore a leaf out 
 of the book. 
 
 B. 
 
 I. Bitte, leihen Sie mir zwei Thaler. 2. Verzeihen Sie, dass 
 ich Sie darum bitte. 3. Der alte Konig war gestorben, und sein 
 Sohn, der junge Prinz Heinrich, stieg auf den Thron. 4. Die 
 Englander sind oft auf die hochsten Berge der Schweiz ge- 
 stiegen. 5. Die Sonne scheint bei Tage und der Mond bei Nacht. 
 6. Der Hirt trieb die Ochsen und die Kiihe seines Herrn auf 
 das Feld. 7. Wiirden Sie antwdrten, wenn ich Ihnen schriebe? 
 
 8. Main Vater wiinscht, dass ich ihm offer schreibe [sui>/\. 
 
 9. Ich wiirde schreiben, wenn ich Papier und Tinte hatte. 
 
 10. Er hat mir seine deutsche Grammatik geliehen. 11. Er 
 schickte mir das Buch zuriick, welches ich ihm geliehen Jiatte. 
 12. Das Kind schrie ; es hatte sich in den Finger geschnitten. 
 
 I. Do you remain at home ? 2. My sister remained at home. 
 3. The moon and the stars shone brightly. 4. The boy was 
 silent; his teacher scolded him; he had not written his exercise. 
 5. A lady got out of (ftieg au§) the carriage. 6. We shall get 
 into this carriage. 7. Who has lent you this book? 8. Pray, 
 lend trie your German dictionary. 9. The king has pardoned 
 the prince (da(.) 10. Write to me more frequently. 11. I 
 should have written to you more frequently, if I had had time 
 for it (baju). 12. I should answer you, if'you should write to 
 me. 13. The count has shown us his pictures. 14. The old 
 general mounted (on) his horse. 15. Not everything that is 
 written is true. 16. They parted as friends. 
 
126 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 THIRD CLASS OF STRONG VERBS. 
 
 248. The third class of strong verbs contains verbs 
 which have for their root-vowel a, and in a few instances 
 au, 0, II or et. It is subdivided into two groups. 
 
 The first subdivision contains verbs which change the 
 
 root-vowel in the past into ie or i, but retain the vowel 
 
 or diphthong of the infinitive in the perfect participle. 
 
 Note. — Oel^en (earlier also gangon) belongs irregularly to this class. 
 §OUen has irregularly b in the past tense (from earlier to). 
 
 J^irsi Subdivision. 
 
 Vowels— ; 
 
 ie (i), 0. 
 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Pkrf. Part, 
 
 6Iafen, to Mow; btdfeft, blaft. 
 
 6lte§. 
 
 geblafen. 
 
 braten, to roast; Bratft, brat. 
 
 6riet. 
 
 gebraten. 
 
 fatten, to fall; fattft, fattt. 
 
 fiel. 
 
 gefdtten. 
 
 fangen, to catch; fangft, fangt. 
 
 fing. 
 
 gefangen. 
 
 ge^en, to go. 
 
 sing. 
 
 gegangen. 
 
 ^alten, to hold; ^altft, ^alt. 
 
 ^telt. 
 
 ge^alten. 
 
 fangen, to hang; l^angft, l^angt. 
 
 ^ing. 
 
 ge^ngen. 
 
 I^auen, to hew. 
 
 ^teb. 
 
 ge^auen. 
 
 l^et^en, to hid, be called. 
 
 ^te^. 
 
 ge]()ci^en. 
 
 lafjen, to let; laffeft, la^t. 
 
 Ite^. 
 
 gekfjen. 
 
 laufen, to run; laufft, Iciuft. 
 
 ttef. 
 
 gelaufen. 
 
 raten, to advise; ratft, rat. 
 
 riet. 
 
 geraten. 
 
 rufen, to call. 
 
 rief. 
 
 gerufen. 
 
 ^d^Iafen, to skep; fd^Iafft, fc^Icift. 
 
 f(^ltef. 
 
 gefd^Iafen. 
 
 fto^en, to push; ftij^eft, fto^t. 
 
 ftiefe. 
 
 gefto^en. 
 
 Second Subdivision. 
 249. The verbs of this subdivision have in the infinitive 
 and perfect participle a, and in the past u. 
 
THIRD CLASS OF STRONG VERBS. 
 
 127 
 
 Note. — ©te^en (formerly also ftontan) belongs irregularly to this class. 
 Its old past was ftunb. See alphabetical list. 
 
 Vowels — a ; 
 
 tt, a. 
 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Perf. Part 
 
 barfen, to bake; badft, MdEt. 
 
 bui 
 
 gebacfen. 
 
 fal^ren, to drive; fal^rft, fa£)rt. 
 
 fu^r. 
 
 gefa^ren. 
 
 graben, to dig; grabft, grcibt. 
 
 grub. 
 
 gegraben. 
 
 laben, to load. 
 
 lub. 
 
 getaben. 
 
 fc^affen, to create. 
 
 \m- 
 
 gefc^affen. 
 
 fi^Iagen, to strike; fd^Iagft, fd^Iagt. 
 
 Wn- ' 
 
 gefc^Iagen. 
 
 ftel^en, to stand. 
 
 ftanb. 
 
 geftanben. 
 
 tragert, to carry; tragft, tragi. 
 
 trug. 
 
 getragen. 
 
 trta^fen, to grow; toac^feft, toac^ft. 
 
 toud^S. 
 
 getoad^fen. 
 
 toaf(^en, to wash; tuafd^eft, toafc^t. 
 
 hjuf^. 
 
 getoafc^en. 
 
 {d) Note again e and a verbs without vowel change, as § 242, 3. 
 Reflexive Verbs. 
 
 250. A reflexive verb is one whose object is the pronoun 
 corresponding to its subject — the action is reflected. In 
 the third person there is a special reflexive object, fii^, 
 dative and accusative. Elsewhere the regular pronoun 
 objects are used reflexively. (See § 185.) 
 
 Hence, generally, fid) before the infinitive is used to 
 mark a reflexive yerb. 
 
 251. The conjugation offers no peculiarities. The re- 
 flexive object has the usual place, before an infinitive or 
 participle, but elsewhere immediately after the verb-form, 
 (169. 2) — subject, however, to inversion or transposition. 
 
 The perfect auxiliary of a reflexive verb is always fjaben. 
 
 Note. — The reflexive object may be accusative or dative — sometimes 
 genitive — but is usually accusative, as in the paradigm. Those with other 
 than accusative objects are sometimes calledy&te reflexives. 
 
128 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 Conjugation of fttj Maf^en, to wash {one's self). 
 
 Infin. Pres. Part. Perf. Part. 
 
 fid^ toafc^en. fid^ tnafc^enb. ftd^ getoafc^en.* 
 
 Perfect Infinitive. 
 ftc^ getoafd^en ^aben. 
 
 Present. 
 id^ Soafd^e mid^, I wash myself, tctr toafd^en unS. 
 bu toafc^eft bid^. i^r toaf^et eud^. 
 
 er fijofd^t fid^. fie toafd^en ftd^. 
 
 ■ :lj.'i>^. -I mperfect . 
 
 id^ tt)uf(^ mid^, I washed myself . bu iDufc^eft bid^, etc. 
 
 Perfect. 
 id^ l^abe mtd^ getoofd^en, I have washed myself . 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 id^ l^atte mid^ getoafc^en, I had washed myself . 
 
 Future. 
 id^ tcerbe mid^ toafd^en, I shall wash myself 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 id^ toerbe mtc^ geicafd^en ^aben, I shall have washed myself. 
 
 Imperative. 
 toafd^e btd^, wash thyself. 
 toafd^e er ji(^, let him wash himself. 
 toafd^en totr un§, let us wash ourselves. 
 toafd^t eu^, k/^j,^ yourselves. 
 toafd^en fie fid^, /fe^ //%f»2 zc«j/^ themselves. 
 
 * The perfect participle can here occur only in auxiliary forms. The 
 fid) which stands before the infinitive and participles will, of course, be 
 replaced by the proper pronoun, corresponding to the subject in every 
 instance — as in the paradigm — and often omitted in English. 
 
REFLEXIVE VERBS. I29 
 
 With inversion : With transposition : 
 
 f d^on ^ait id^ mic^ getoafd^en, etc. al§ ic^ mid^ getoafd^en ^tte, etc. 
 
 In Uke manner, with dative object : 
 id^ f (^metdfile mtr, I flatter myself. tt)ir f ^metd^eln un§. 
 bu f(^tnei^elft bir. i^r f(|metd^elt eud^. 
 
 er f^meid^elt fid^. fie fd^meid^eln fi^. 
 
 Or with genitive object-, 
 
 id^ fd^one meiner, I spare myself. h)tr f d^onen unf(r)er. 
 
 bu f^onft beiner. t^r fd^ont eu(r)er. 
 
 er f^ont feiner. fie fd^onen tl^rer. 
 
 252. A reflexive plural is often used in a reciprocal 
 sense ; as, toir fel^en un§ felten, we seldom see each other. In 
 case of possible ambiguity, the indeclinable compound 
 cinanber, one-another, is used instead of the reflexive ; as, 
 fie Itebeit etnanber, they love one another {each other). 
 
 Remark. — The reflexive form is used much more largely in German 
 than in English, and is variously translated. Some verbs are used ex- 
 clusively, or with special meaning, as reflexives. The reflexive meaning must 
 always be looked for in the dictionary. 
 
 2. Especially where in English the same form is transitive or intransitive, 
 the latter is in German usually expressed by the reflexive ; as, / mcnie, he 
 turns: Kic^ bettiege mic^; er wenbct ft^, etc. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 fpajieten, to walk, exercise. ftd^ freuen, to rejoice. 
 
 fpojiereti ge^en, to take a walk. flc^ irren, to be mistaken. 
 
 jpajieren reiten, to take a ride. ftc^ beftnben, to be [do). 
 
 i^jojteren fasten, to take a drive. bot einem 3a^re, a year ago. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIV.-A. 
 
 I. Der Koch hat das Fleisch nicht gut gebraten. 2. Die 
 Kochin wiirde es besser gebraten haben. 3. Der Tote lag da, 
 als ob er schliefe. 4. Schlafst du, main Kind? 5. Ich habe 
 die ganze Nacht geschlafen. 6. Man liess den Narren gehen. 
 
130 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 7. Wofiir halten Sie mich ? 8. Ich habe Sie immer fiir einen 
 reichen Mann gehalten. 9. Der Lehrer hielt ein Buch in det 
 Hand. 10. Ich stand auf einem Berge und sah in das tiefe 
 Thai. II. Lassen Sie mich gehen. 12. Wir gingen nach 
 Hause. 13. Die Freundin meiner Schwester ist ins Konzert ge- 
 gangen. 14. WoistdieHerrindes Hauses? 15. Sie schlaftnoch. 
 16. Der Blinde fiel uber einen Stein. 17. Die Koniginnen 
 Elisabeth und Marie waren eihander feindlich. 18. Wie heissen 
 Sie ? 19. Ich heisse Heinrich. 
 
 1. The [man] cook is roasting the meat. 2. The [woman] 
 cook has roasted a goose. 3. We ate a roast goose. 4. The 
 queen and her [women] servants went to (the) church. 5. The 
 wind blew from the North. 6. I wished that a milder wind 
 would blow. 7. A sleeping dog does not bite. 8. What is the 
 name of this street (say : how is this street called) ? 9. This 
 street is called (the) New Street. 10. In the kitchen the [man] 
 cooks are the greatest heroes. 1 1. A coat hangs on (an) the wall. 
 12. I shall call my man-servant. 13. We ran through the gar- 
 den. 14. A prince keeps his word. 15. She has left her books 
 at home. 16. I advised her to go home. 17. Henry pushed 
 Charles against (an) the wall. 18. I have knocked my foot 
 against a stone. 
 
 B. 
 
 I. Sie tragt noch dasselbe Kleid, welches sie vor zwei Jahren 
 getragen hat. 2. Der Backer backt Brot. 3. Die Magd wiirde 
 ihre Kleider gewaschen haben, wenn sie Seife gehabt hatte. 
 4. Man grabt mit einem Spaten. 5. Gott schuf die Welt aus 
 nichts. 6. Wenn dieser Baum Friichte triige, so wiirden wir 
 Ihnen gern einige davon schicken. 7. Ich stand am Fenster 
 und sah, wie der Knabe den Hund schlug. 8. Dieser Baum 
 tragt keine Frucht. 9. Wir fuhren gestern spazieren. 10. 
 Meine Schwestern werden spazieren reiten. 11. Die Schiiler 
 sind mit ihrem Lehrer spazieren gegangen. ' 12. Ich freue 
 
MIXED AND IRREGULAR VERBS. I3I 
 
 mich, Sie zu sehen, Herr Doktor ; wie befinden Sie sich ? 13. 
 Danke, ich befinde mich sehr wohl, seit ich auf dem Lande 
 wohne und die frische Luft geniesse. 14. Wie befindet sich Ihr 
 [Herr] Vater? 15. Ich danke Ihnen, [mein]. Herr, er befindet 
 sich recht wohl. 16. Wir freuen uns, Sie so wohl zu sehen. 
 17. Ich habe mich geirrt. 18. Er sagte mir, dass er sich geirrt 
 habe. 
 
 I. The baker has baked bread. 2. The coachman drives too 
 fast. 3. Who stands there ? 4. We stood and waited. 5. 
 This plant has (ift) grown very quickly. 6. He carried the 
 letters to (auf) the post-office. 7. The children are delighted 
 (rejoice); they will take - a - drive. 8. The heart beats. 9. 
 How are you, dear uncle? 10. I am very well, my dear child. 
 II. My aunt has taken a drive with her sister. 12. I should wash 
 (myself), if I had soap and water. 13. The rifle is loaded ; the 
 soldier loaded it. 14. We should take a ride, if the weather 
 were fine. 15. What do you take (fwld') me for, sir.' 16. You 
 are mistaken. 17. I beg [for] pardon, sir; I have been mis 
 taken. 18. Our friends will rejoice that their children love one 
 another so warmly. 
 
 LESSON XXV. 
 
 Mixed and Irregular Verbs. 
 
 253. A small number of verbs change their root-vowel 
 in the past indicative and perfect participle, and also add 
 the endings of the weak conjugation. These are called 
 mixed verbs. 
 
 Note. — This change of vowel is not historically the same as the Ablaut 
 of the scrong verbs. These are really weak verbs, which have undergone 
 a root-vowel change. The term mixed is used only for convenience. 
 
132 
 
 LESSON XXV. 
 
 254. In the past subjunctive most of these verbs follow 
 the weak conjugation, without vowel-change ; but brittgen, 
 ben!en, hJtffen follow the strong. SBringen and ben!en change 
 ng, nt to c^ in the past and perfect participle. SBtffen is 
 also irregular in the present singular. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Perf. Part. 
 
 Past Subj. 
 
 Brenneii, to burn. 
 
 brannte. 
 
 gebronnt. 
 
 brennte. 
 
 fenneu, to know. 
 
 lanttte. 
 
 gefannt. 
 
 fennte. 
 
 nennen, to name, call. 
 
 nannte. 
 
 genonnt. 
 
 nennte. 
 
 rennen, to run. 
 
 rottnte. 
 
 geronut. 
 
 renntc. 
 
 fenbcit, to send. 
 
 fanbte. 
 
 gefonbt 
 
 fenbete. 
 
 menben, to turn. 
 
 juanbte. 
 
 gemanbt. 
 
 wenbetc. 
 
 fivingen, to Wing. 
 
 bra^te. 
 
 gebrad^t. 
 
 broi^te. 
 
 benfen, to think. 
 
 bat^te. 
 
 gebad)t. 
 
 bad^te. 
 
 tDiffen, to know. 
 
 ttiu6te. 
 
 gehjugt. 
 
 mugte. 
 
 Present. — i(^ inelg, bu wetgt, er toeife, wir Wiffen, etc. 
 
 Note. — i. ©enben and roenben are also conjugated regularly as weak 
 verbs. (See § 212.) Sometimes also rennen. 
 
 2. With Wiffen compare the modal auxiliaries (next Lesson). 
 
 255. Stfiun, to do, is quite irregular. 
 
 It forms its past tense by reduplication and vowel change 
 (like di-d) ; its perfect participle and past subjunctive as 
 in strong verbs ; but it drops e before consonants in the 
 infinitive, perfect participle, and present indicative and impera- 
 tive. Thus : — 
 
 Infin. Past. Perf. Part. Past Subj. 
 
 t^un. tl^at.- get^n. tpte. 
 
 Present. Sing. : t^ue, t^uft, t^ut ; plur. : ti)vm, t^ut, t^un. 
 Imperative. Sing.: t^ue; plur.: t^ut. 
 
 256. The auxiliaries l^ahen; fein, toerben, are also irregular: 
 {a) §aben (weak) has in the present indicative l^aft, l^at, for 
 
 ^abft, f^abt ; in the past, ^tte for ^abte ; but forms its past sub- 
 junctive strong : l^citte. 
 
MIXED AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 133 
 
 (6) ©ein is wholly irregular, being made up like English am, 
 was, been, of different roots ; and has also, in part, exceptional 
 personal inflections. The infin. feiu is for feien (§ 75, a). 
 
 (/) SBerben has in the present toirft for toilbft ; and totrb as 
 § 226, d; but imperative tt>erbe. The past toarb (§ 232, c) was 
 formerly more common than now, in the sense of an aorist. 
 
 257. The following may be conveniently grouped to- 
 gether for special notice : 
 
 effcn (§ 243), ge^en, ^ouen, ^cigen (§ 248), tciben, j(^^neibett (§ 246), neljmen (§ 232), 
 ftebEii (§ 241), ft^en (§ 243), fte[)en (§ 249), tl)un (§ 255), jielien (§ 241) 
 
 with reference to special irregularities, as shown under their 
 respective classes. Also, those which double the root-con- 
 sonant after a shortened vowel (as § 246) ; and those which 
 drop one consonant after a lengthened vowel (as § 248-9). 
 
 258. Some verbs have special forms, outside of their 
 usual conjugation. 
 
 Such forms are sometimes archaic or poetic — sometimes 
 alternative forms, strong or weak. These will be given in the 
 alphabetical list. 
 
 259. The following table will present to the eye the several 
 forpis of the strong verbs as classed above ; also the conjugation 
 (§ 225) to which they may be referred according to the sequence 
 of the vowels, and the § where they may be found. 
 
 Remark. — The importance of these verbs — strong, mixed, and irregular 
 — is far beyond their numerical proportion. They are the most fruitful 
 roots of the language, and give rise to a great number of derivatives and 
 compounds of various classes. Hence they should be learned with especial 
 care. 
 
 The classification here given is for convenience only. A more scientific 
 arrangement — based on historical development — might be given, but with- 
 out advantage to the learner. This belongs properly to later study. The 
 conjugation by vowel sequences (§ 225) will be found useful in impre|ping 
 the forms on the memory. With the help of the table this can be applied 
 witfeout diffifHlty to the present arrangement ; or it may be omitted. 
 
134 
 
 LESSON XXV. 
 
 Synopsis of Strong Verbs. 
 
 CLASS. 
 
 INFIN. 
 
 PAST. 
 
 PERF. 
 PART. 
 
 CONJ. 
 
 § 
 
 I. I. 
 
 t. 
 
 a- 
 
 u. 
 
 III. 
 
 231- 
 
 2. 
 
 e,i. 
 
 a. 
 
 0. 
 
 III.* 
 
 232. 
 
 3- 
 
 it. 
 
 0- 
 
 a. 
 
 II. 
 
 241. 
 
 
 t, etc. 
 
 0. 
 
 0. 
 
 II. 
 
 242. 
 
 4- 
 
 e, etc. 
 
 a. 
 
 e. 
 
 I.t 
 
 243- 
 
 II. 1. 
 
 et. 
 
 i. 
 
 i- 
 
 II. 
 
 246. 
 
 2. 
 
 et. 
 
 tc 
 
 ie. 
 
 II. 
 
 247. 
 
 III. 1. 
 
 a, etc. 
 
 ic. 
 
 0, etc. 
 
 
 248. 
 
 ^. 
 
 a- 
 
 u- 
 
 a. 
 
 
 249. 
 
 IDIQMS. 
 
 UlKtitjt t^nn, io do wron^. bie ex^tt S:\a\^e, iAe/rsi class. \ 
 
 fein S3ejle« t^im, to do one's best. bie jwcite Slaffe, the second ( ., j 
 
 an jemonben ben!eit, to think of one. class. ' ^^^ ^°^ 
 
 Bon (_dat.) bcnf en, to have an opinion of. ein ®e(anbtev (p. p.), «« amtassador. 
 3entonben fennen ternen, to become acquainted with some one. 
 
 Note. — SBiffen is used when what is known becomes our mental prop- 
 erty ; femten, when it does not— Examples : 3d) fenne ben SKann, bos §au8. 
 Sd) meig, wic ev f)eigt, mo er wo^nt. 3d^ fenne bag IHeb too^t, ajer id) meig 
 68 nid^t. 
 
 EXERCISE XXV. 
 
 I. Ich thue mein Bestes, die deutsche Sprache zu lernen. 
 2. Ich weiss, Sie thun es'. 3. Da» Holz brennt nicht. 4. Die 
 ganze Strasse brannte. 5. Der Schwefel brennt mit einer blau- 
 lichen Flamme. 6. Geben Sie mir ein Schwefelholz. 7. Jemand 
 hat mich gerufen, aber ich weiss nicht, wer es ist. 8. Mit 
 welcher Klasse weirden Sie fahren ? 9. Wir wissen noch nicht, 
 
 * Except fommen (§ 222, b). t Except bitten, liegen, fifeen. 
 
MIXED AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 1 35 
 
 mit welcher Klasse wir fahren werden. lo. Wissen Sie auch, 
 dass mein Bruder Sie kennt? ii. Er hat Sie auf (at) der 
 Akademie kennen gelernt. 12. Was hat uns der Bauer ge- 
 bracht ? 13. Er hat uns eine fette Gans gebracht. 14. Jeder- 
 mann weiss, was ich von der Sache dachte. 15. Wissen Sie, 
 wo Herr Schmidt wohnt? 16. Ich weiss [es"| nicht ; ich wiirde 
 es sagen, wenn ich es wiisste. 17. Er nannte mich seinen 
 Freund. 18. Er hat Unrecht gethan. 19. Woran denken Sie ? 
 20. Ich dachte an meine Eltern. 21. Wir werden thun, was 
 Sie wiinschen. 22. Was hat man dir, du armes Kind, gethan? 
 23. Ich wusste nicht, was unsere Freunde thaten. 
 
 I. He has done his best. 2. Who has brought these books? 
 3. The coachman pf the count has brought them. 4. The 
 whole town was -burning. 5. Do you know Mr. Miller? 6. I 
 do not know him, but I know where he lives. 7. They called 
 him by his name. 8. You have done wrong. 9. She thinks 
 more than she speaks. 10. You are mistaken, if you think that 
 I know him. 11. What would she say, if she knew it ? 12. Of 
 whom (an, acc^ did you think ? 13. We thought of you. 14. The 
 boy ran and fell over a stone. 15. Do you not know me? 
 16, I know you very well. 17. The king has sent a messenger 
 to (nad^) Paris. 18. I thought you would keep your word, but 
 I have been mistaken. 19. The whole village stood in flames. 
 20. The coaches of the first class are better than the coaches 
 of the second class. 21. I thought of you, but I did not know 
 where you were then. 22. You would do wrong if you thought 
 %o of me. 23. What were you doing when (alS) the servant 
 brought you the ambassador's letter? 24. I did not know 
 what you would think of (t)on) it. 
 
 The use of a Reader — outside of the Grammar — should hardly be 
 deferred beyond this point. Indeed, in most cases, it might be begun 
 much earlier. 
 
136 
 
 LESSON XXVI. 
 
 LESSON XXVI. 
 The Auxiliary Verbs of Mood. 
 
 260. Besides the auxiliary verbs of tense (^afien, jetn and 
 loerbeit) there are in German six auxiliary verbs of mood. 
 These are used with the infinitive, as in English : 
 
 biirfen, to be allowed {dare). miiffen, to be compelled (mvst). 
 
 lonnen, to be able {can). fotten, to be obliged {shall). 
 
 mogen, to like {may). tooEen, to be willing {will). 
 
 While the corresponding English verbs are defective, 
 these verbs have in German a complete conjugation, 
 except in the imperative, which occurs in irotfen only. 
 
 261. Those which have the umlaut in the infinitive, 
 drop it in the past indicative and perfect participle, but 
 resume it in the. past subjunctive. SJJOgen also changes 
 g to d) in the past and perfect participle. In the present 
 indicative singular, they are inflected like the past tense of 
 the strong verbs. Other inflections are regular. Thus : — ■ 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Perf. Part. Past Subj. 
 
 biirfen. 
 
 burfte. 
 
 geburft. 
 
 biirfte. 
 
 fonnen. 
 
 fonnte. 
 
 gefonnt. 
 
 fonnte. 
 
 mogen. 
 
 moi^te. 
 
 gemodtit. 
 
 mb(f)te. 
 
 miiffen. 
 
 mugte. 
 
 gemufit. 
 
 mii§te. 
 
 foBen. 
 
 fonte. . 
 
 gefottt. 
 
 _follte. 
 
 iDotten, 
 
 ttJoHtc. 
 
 gehJoHt. 
 
 'moUte. 
 
 
 Present Indicative. 
 
 
 ii) barf. ic^ !ann. 
 
 id) mag. 
 
 ic^ mujj. i&i foil. 
 
 id) milt. 
 
 bn barffl. bu lannjl. 
 
 bu magfl. 
 
 bu mugt. bu follft. 
 
 bu miUfl. 
 
 er barf. er lann. 
 
 er mag. 
 
 er mug. er foH. 
 
 er mill. 
 
 ttiir biirfen. wir fonnen. 
 
 h)ir mogen. 
 
 wir miiffen. mir foUen. 
 
 mir moHen. 
 
 it)r biirft. i'^r lonnt. 
 
 iljr mbgt. 
 
 i^r miigt. il^r follt. 
 
 il)r rooUt. 
 
 fte burfeu. fie !onnen. 
 
 fie mogen. 
 
 fie miiffen. fie foUen. 
 
 fie wollen. 
 
USE OF THE AUXILIARIES OF MOOD. 1 37 
 
 Present Subjunctive. 
 ISf bilrfe. id) f5nne. ii) moge. td^ rnuffe. id) joHc. i^ woUe. 
 
 Imperative. 
 — r ttjolle. 
 
 The compound parts are formed regularly ; as : 
 
 Perfect. ic^ ^obe gebiirft, gefontit, gemoc^t, etc. 
 
 Pluperfect. ii) l^otte , „ „ etc. 
 
 Future. ii^ iDerbe bilrfen, fonnen, mogen, etc. 
 
 Conditional. id) IfDiirbc „ „ " „ etc. 
 
 Future Perfect. iii^ merbe geburft ^oBen, gelonnt ^abfii, etc. 
 
 Conditional Perfect, id) toiir^e „ „ „ _„ etc. 
 
 Use of tlie Auxiliaries of Mood. 
 
 -^26?, While these verbs correspond, generally, to the 
 English modal auxiliaries can, may, etc., they present 
 many differences of use which will require special 
 attention. These are due in part to their fuller con- 
 jugation. 
 
 263. As these verbs are defective in English, the German 
 verb will frequently have to be expressed by a phrase, for 
 instance : tc^ l^atte nid^t gefonnt, I had not been able. 2Btr toerben 
 miif jen, we shall be obliged. @r ^at geburft, he has been permitted.^ 
 @r mu^te lac^en, he had to laugh. 
 
 Note. — Special care must be taken to guard against ambiguity from the 
 defect of tlie Englisli forms. Forexample: /^oa/rf«o/^(7 may mean eitlier: 
 T was not Me (f onnte) — or, / should not be able (Ibtlltte) to go ; he could not 
 have done it, either he has not been able, or, he would not heme been able — tn 
 do it. Such forms will be clearly distinguished in German. 
 
 264. When a modal auxiliary, in the perfect or pluperfect, is 
 construed with an infinitive, it changes its own perfect participle 
 to the form of an infinitive. — As : x&j ^ijOloi- e§ gefonnt, but id^ 
 ^iilot el t^un fonnen (not gefonnt), / have been able to do it. 
 6r ^t gehJoEt, he has been willing, he has wished ; but er l^at 
 f(^ret6en tooHen (not geiooKt), he has been willing to write. 
 
138 LESSON XXVI. 
 
 265. A few other verbs have the same construction. These 
 are : l^et^en, ^elfen, l^oren, laffen, fel^en, sometimes lel^ren, lemen, 
 ma^en. — Examples : td^ ^abe fie tanjen fe^en, / have seen her 
 dance. 3<^ ^a6e il^n \a.<i,m^i>\tv., I have heard him say. @r ^at 
 mtci^ nid^t ge^en lafjen, he did not let me go. ■ 
 
 266. In such English phrases as could have, should have, etc., 
 care must be taken to see whether the perfect sense expressed 
 by have belongs properly to the infinitive or to the modal verb. 
 As, in the former case : he could-not have earned that money — er 
 lonnte ba§ ©elb nid^t berbient ^aben — he was not able to have earned 
 iV/'but : er ^atte ba§ ©elb ni^t berbtenen lonnen — he had not been 
 able to earn it. The latter is the usual form. 
 
 267. When such forms express a past contingency, or unreal 
 condition, belonging to the auxiliary, the modal verb will be in 
 the pluperfect subjunctive and the infinitive in the present ; as, 
 er ^atte gel^en lonnen, he could have gone (if he had wished) ; er 
 l^atte eStl^unfoEen, he should have done it (but did not). (See § 263.) 
 
 Note. — As above remarked (§ 263), the sense can always be made clear 
 by the substitution of equivalent phrases for the defective English forms. 
 It is also worthy of remark that the real difficulty in these idioms is 
 usually in English, not in German. 
 
 268. The modal verbs are used, much more freely than 
 in English, as independent verbs, or with omission of the 
 infinitive ; as : (£r fatttl !em (£it^)^, he knows no English; 
 man ntu^ nic^t miiffen, one must not be compelled. Especially 
 where a verb of motion is implied ; as : er fonnte nic^t ^ineiit, 
 he could not (go) in. 
 
 Note. — As before remarked (§ 173), shall, will, shouM, would in- their 
 proper sense as verbs — or modal auxiliaries — are represented by fottctl and 
 rooHen respectively — by Werben only in mere future or conditional sense. In 
 German, therefore, fotten, ItJOlIetl, Werbetl are always distinctive; and it is only 
 in English that, for want of a specific auxiliary of tense, any doubt can ari§e 
 as to the use or meaning of shall, will; should, would- 
 
USE OF THE AUXILIARIES OF MOOD. 139 
 
 269. Saffen (§ 248) is used with an infinitive, nearly like 
 the modal verbs, as a causative auxiliaryr in the sense ot 
 to make do, or to have {cause to be) done — and in many 
 idiomatic phrases. As, cr Itefe \iO.^ 5Pferb fprtitgen, he made 
 the horse jump; er liefe einett 33rtef fc§'rei6en, he had a letter 
 'written (the agent being here omitted). 
 
 Note. — These verbs have many idiomatic uses, which cannot here be 
 enumerated. Some of their leading meanings are (see § 472): — 
 
 biirfen — dare, may (permission, liberty, probability). 
 
 lonnen — can, may (possibility, ability). 
 
 mogcn — like to, may (preference, concession, contingency). 
 
 ntiiffeu — must, have to (compulsion, necessity). 
 
 foUcn — shall, is to, is said to (duty, command, hearsay). 
 
 tDOttcn — will, is about to, means (intention, assertion). 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 tc^ mag gern, Hike to. id^ mag HeBet, I prefer to. 
 
 id) mbc^te gem, I should like to. id) mo^Je tieber, I had rather. 
 
 cr foil fommen, he is to come. er foil reil^ jetll, he is said to be rich. 
 
 jemanben fommen laffen, to send for jemanbem fagen (affen, to send word to 
 
 some one. some one. 
 
 er Witt'eS gct^an ^aben, /iifrfamj^o " id) ^abe fagen l)oren, I have heard say 
 
 have done it. (or said). 
 
 EXERCISE XXVI. -A. 
 
 (diirfen, konnen, mogen.) 
 
 I. Er darf den Brief lesen. 2. Darf ich den Brief lesen? 
 3. Der Knabe darf in der Schule nicht spielen. 4. Main Vater 
 hatte gestern sein Pferd verkaufen konnen, aber er hat es nicht 
 gewollt. 5. Warum haben die Knaben nicht spielen diirfen ? 
 6. Ich darf keinen Wein trinken. 7. Ich mochte es gern thun, 
 aber ich darf nicht. 8. Er kann es vergessen haben. 9. Ich 
 mochte ihn nicht darum bitten, i o. Wir haben nicht spazieren 
 gehen diirfen. ii. Der junge Graf mag nicht spazieren reiten. 
 12, Mochten Sie gern spazieren fahren? 13. Ich mochte fas] gern, 
 
14° LESSOK XXVI. 
 
 aber ich kann es nicht; ich habe nicht Geld genug. 14. Es 
 mochte ihm schwerlich gelingen. 15. Sie konnen [es] mir 
 glauben. 16. Der Trage mag nicht arbeiten. 17. Ich hatte 
 mit ihm sprechen mogen. 18. Ich mochte gem mit Ihnen 
 sprechen. 
 
 I. May I water the flowers ? 2. You may (it), my son. 3. 
 Can your daughter read? 4. All my children can read. 5. 
 The sick man would like to (tnb(^te gern) speak with the phy- 
 sician. 6. The good old physician cannot know everything. 
 7. I did not like to ask him. 8. We shall not be able to remain. 
 9. He may be mistaken. 10. May he read these German news- 
 papers? II. He may read them, if he can read German. 12. 
 You might be right. 13. The fish can swim. 14. The poor 
 servant-girl would have written to you, if she could write. 
 15; The children have not been allowed to go into the garden. 
 16. The baker has not teen able to bake to-day. 17. You can 
 believe me, I should (toiirbe) come if I were able. 18. I have 
 not been able to come. 
 
 B. 
 (miissen, soUen, woUen, lassen.) 
 
 I. Ich habe den Schneider kommen lassen, er soil mir einen 
 neuen Rock machen. 2. Mein Bruder wird morgen zu Hause 
 bleiben miissen. 3. Konnen Sie heute mit uns gehen ? 4. Ich 
 kann heute gehen, aber morgen werde ich weder konnen noch 
 wollen. 5. Er soil hier sein ; man will ihn gesehen haben. 
 6. Wolle nur, was du kannst, und du wirst alles konnen, was du 
 willst. 7. Wir miissen unsern Feinden (dat.) verzeihen. 8. Die 
 Kinder miissen in die Schule gehen. 9. Der Bote sollte einen 
 Brief auf die Post tragen. 10. Er woUte [es] uns nicht glauben. 
 II. Habt ihr diesen Abend nicht singen sollen ? 12. Wir haben 
 gesollt, aber wir haben nicht gemocht. 13. Man muss mit Lust 
 arbeiten, wenn das Werk gelingen soil. 14. Wollen Sie so gut 
 sein und mir einen Thaler leihen ? 15. Ich mochte es sehr gem 
 
THE PASSIVE VOICE. I4I 
 
 thun, aber ich habe kein Geld bei mir. 16. Sie haben Recht, 
 ich hatte es thun sollen. 17. Wir haben ihn sagen horen, dass 
 der beriihmte Arzt morgen kommen werde. 18. Ich habe ihm 
 arbeiten helfen. 
 
 I. He has not been willing to do it. 2. He was wrong, he 
 ought to have done it. 1 3. I have been compelled to read the 
 book. 4. All men must die. 5. The boys are to learn German. 
 6. We have seen the children dance. 7. They have been 
 obliged to work the whole day. ': 8. I am to stay at home. 
 9. She did not like to work. 10. Do you know why Henry 
 was not allowed to visit us? 11. I shall send for the tailor ; 
 he is to make me a new coat. 12. I have been willing, but I 
 have not been able. 1.3. Thou shalt not steal. 14. I have 
 heard him speak. 15. V\^e have been obliged to pay two dol- 
 lars. 16. You should carry the letter to (auf) the post-office. 
 17. Why coiild you not come ? 18. I was unwell and was 
 obliged to stay at home. 
 
 LESSON XXVIl. 
 Tlie Passive Voice. 
 
 270. The passive voice is formed by the auxiliary verb 
 hjerben in combination with the perfect participle_of a 
 transitive verb. Ip^he compoiin'a^ tenses, the participle 
 getoorben loses the augment ge- as : vS) 6tn getobt toorben, 
 I have been praised. 
 
 (a) Each part o#the passive is formed by the corresponding 
 part of toerben combined with the perfect participle, under the 
 usual rules of position ; viz. : that the participle' will follow the 
 simple forms, but precede the infinitive or participle of the 
 auxiliary, as may be seen in the paradigm. 
 
142 
 
 LESSON XXVII. 
 
 (6) But for the convenience of the learner, the passive may be 
 regarded as a compound intransitive verb {to be -loved'). Its 
 compound parts may then be formed with the usual auxiliaries 
 from the {(Mowing principal parts, as in any other intransitive verb: 
 
 Infinitive — gelobt toerbe« ; 
 
 — whence future and conditional with auxiliary toerben. 
 
 Perfect Participle — gelobt toorben ; 
 
 — whence perfect and pluperfect with auxiliary fetti. 
 
 Perfect Infinitive — gelobt toorben fein ; 
 
 — whence perfect future and conditional with auxiliary toevben. 
 
 271. Conjugation of the Passive Verb. 
 
 ■ gelobt toerben, fo he praised. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 I am praised, etc. 
 ic^ toerbe gelobt. 
 bu toir[t gelobt, 
 er toirb gelobt. 
 totr toerben gelobt. 
 il^r toerbet gelobt. 
 fie tocrben gelobt. 
 
 id^ tourbe gelobt. 
 bu tourbeft gelobt. 
 er tourbe gelobt. 
 etc. 
 
 td^ bin gelobt toorben. 
 
 bu bift gelobt toorben. 
 
 er ift gelobt hjorben. 
 
 etc. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 Present. 
 
 I (may) be praised, etc. 
 
 i(^ toerbe gelobt. 
 
 bu toerbeft gelobt. 
 
 er ioerbe gelobt. 
 
 loir toerben gelobt. 
 
 t^r toerbet gelobt. 
 
 fie toerben gelobt. 
 Past. 
 
 id^ toiirbe gelobt. 
 
 bu toiirbeft gelobt. 
 
 er toiirbe gelobt. 
 etc. 
 Perfect. « 
 
 id^ fet gelobt toorben. 
 bu feieft gelobt toorben. 
 er fet gelobt toorben. 
 etc. 
 
THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 143 
 
 Indicative. ' 
 
 \&j t»ar geloM t»orben. 
 bu tcarft geIo6t hjorben. 
 er tear gelobt toorben. 
 etc. 
 
 id^ toerbe geloBt toerben. 
 bu toirft gelobt tuerben. 
 er toirb gelobt toerben. 
 etc. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 ic!^ tnare gelobt toorben. 
 bu toareft gelobt toorben. 
 er toare gelobt toorben. 
 etc. 
 Future. 
 
 \i) toerbe gelobt toerben. 
 bu toerbeft gelobt toerben. 
 er toerbe gelobt ttjerben. 
 etc. 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 id^ toerbe gelobt toorben fein. 
 
 bu toirft gelobt ioorben fein. 
 
 etc. 
 
 '\^ toerbe gelobt hjorben fein. 
 
 bu toerbeft gelobt toorben fein. 
 
 etc. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 ic^ toiirbe gelobt toerben. 
 
 bu toiirbeft gelobt toerben. 
 
 er toiirbe gelobt toerben. 
 
 etc. 
 
 toerbe gelobt. 
 
 Conditional Perfect. 
 
 xiij toiirbe gelobt toorben fein. 
 
 bu toiirbeft gelobt toorben fein. 
 
 er toiirbe gelobt toorben fein. 
 
 etc. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 toerbet gelobt. 
 
 Inflect, as heretofore, for inversion : 
 l)eute bin i^ gelobt toorben. ntorgen toerbe ic^ gelobt toerben. 
 
 etc. etc. 
 
 For transposition : 
 ba^ id^ gelobt toerben toiirbe. 
 etc. 
 
 toenn id^ gelobt toorben toare. 
 etc. 
 
 And note the infinitive forms : gelobt ju toerben ; gelobt toorben ju 
 ^ein, (§ 176, 2.) 
 
144 LESSON XXVII. 
 
 Use of the Passive. 
 
 272. German has no special forms for the English the 
 house is building — i^ being built, etc. These are trans- 
 lated by the simple, "tifi^ §au§ totrb gebaut (or as § 274, i). 
 
 273. It must be remembered that toerben is combined 
 with the perfect participle only to express the true passive 
 
 — that is the passive action. In English the perfect 
 participle with be often expresses only a state or result of 
 the action. In this case the German uses fetn, not toerben. 
 Thus : bte Slpre iDurbe urn a(f)t llf)r gefd^toffeh, the door was 
 closed at 8 o'clock (the closing took place at that hour) ; bte 
 2;pre tear urn adjt U£)r gefdiloffen — it was {^ound) closed 
 
 — (had been closed earlier). This distinction requires 
 careful attention. 
 
 Note i. — Practically the test may be made by turning the verb into the 
 active form: if the tense remains the same, use ttierben. 
 
 Note. 2. — It will be seen that here again, for want of a specific passive 
 auxiliary, there is a possible ambiguity in English which cannot occur in 
 German. (See § 268, note.) Sometimes, however, apparent ambiguity may 
 occur by the idiomatic omission of Worbeu, as : ol8 er ju @rabe getragen 
 (ttJOVben) wax, had been carried, etc. 
 
 274. The passive is less used in German than in English. 
 Unless the agent (Don with dat.) is definitely expressed, 
 other idioms are frequently employed : 
 
 1. Most frequently man (§ 244) with the active verb, as: man 
 fteHte ben ©tu^I anS lifer, the chair was placed, etc. ; er bat man 
 mo^te il^n ge^en taffen, he begged that he might be allowed to go. 
 
 2. The reflexive verb, as : ®er ©c^luffel l^at fid^ gefunben, has 
 been found. Especially, the reflexive use of laffen with active in- 
 finitive (§ 269). As : ®ag la^t fi^ erfiaren, that can be explained. 
 
 3. An impersonal idiom, as : eg bebarf feiner §ulfe, no 'help if 
 needed. 
 
USE OF THE PASSIVE. 1 45 
 
 275. In German only a direct (accusative) object can 
 become the subject of a passive verb. Other verbs are, 
 however, sometimes made passive with aja. impersonal subject 
 (e§ or tDO§), retaining their indirect object (if any) ; as, e§ ift 
 mir geraten "Icorben, I have been advised (= man |at mir gera= 
 ten); e§ luurbe baruber 6erQtfcf)Iagt, consultation was held about 
 it. Or, without e§: bariiber tourbe 6eratf(i)Iagt ; as §453, note. 
 
 276. Sometimes to preserve the emphasis of position, 
 the German active will be rendered by the English passive ; 
 as, ben ^onig ergB^te btefeS @c§au[piel, the king was delighted 
 with this spectacle. 
 
 Remamc. — It thus appears that the passive in English is widely extended, 
 beyond its use in German. Careful attention should be given to the various 
 equivalents in translating. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVII. 
 i.Der Schuler ist von dem Lehrer gelobt worden. 2. Das 
 Kind wird von seinen Eltern geliebt. 3. Die Knaben, welche 
 fleissig sind, werden gelobt werden. 4. Ein guter Arbeiter wird 
 immer gut bezahlt. 5. Wiirde jener alte Feldherr nicht von dem 
 Konige gelobt worden sein? 6. Was wurden Sie sagen, wenn Sie 
 jgefragt wurden? 7. Man sagt, dass die Stadt von dem Feinde 
 geplundert worden sei. 8. Wird das Werk diesen Sommer 
 gedruckt werden? 9. Es wiirde schon gedruckt worden sein, 
 wenn der Verfasser nicht krank gewesen ware. 10. Die verlorene 
 Borse ist von einem Schulknaben gefunden worden. 11. Das 
 Madchen wurde von seiner Mutter getadelt. 12. Das arme 
 Haschen wurde von dem Jager geschossen. 13. Ein junges 
 Baumlein lasst sich leicht biegen, ein alter Baum wird nicht so 
 leicht gebogen, 14. Diese Frage beantwortet sich leicht. 15. 
 Es wird auf Sie gewartet. 16. Man wartet auf Sie. 17. Was ist 
 Ihnen versprochen worden ? 18. Was hat man Ihnen versprochen ? 
 19. Das Haus ist mit frischen Blumen geziert. 20. Die Stadt- 
 mauer war schon zerstort. 21. Ein Brief wurde geschrieben. 
 
146 LESSON XXVIIl. 
 
 2 2. Das Buch wird gedruckt. 23. Es ist mir ein schones Feder- 
 messer gegeben worden. 24. Den Kaiser riihrte dieses Schauspiel 
 so, dass er vor {/or) Freude weinte. 
 
 I. The author of this book will be rewarded by (toon) the 
 king. 2. I should not be able to answer if I were asked. 3. 
 The town was ransacked by the enemy. 4. The knives have 
 been ground. 5. A messenger has been sent to the queen. 
 6. The house will be bought by my uncle. 7. I have not been 
 asked. 8. The rooms of the prince are -not shown to strangers. 
 9. The sheep are being shorn by the shepherds. 10. The girl 
 has been bitten by a dog. 11. He was feared and respected 
 by all. 12. The gates of the town will be opened. 13. The 
 apples fall when the tree is shaken. 14. This book has been 
 printed for the author. 15. A hare is roasting (being roasted). 
 16. He would not have been named. 17. It cannot (la^t) be 
 believed. 18. The books which were lost have beeri found. 
 19. The whole town was adorned with green boughs. -20. A 
 physician must be sent for (man). 21. That is easily under- 
 stood {reflex^. 22. I have been advised (say : to me [it] has 
 been advised — and: one has, etc.) to go to Carlsbad. 23. The 
 door was opened. 24. We allowed (laffen) ourselves to be 
 persuaded. 
 
 LESSON XXVIIL 
 Compound Verbs.— Inseparable. 
 
 277. In verbs compounded with the unaccented in- 
 separable prefixes 6e- emp- ent-, er-, ge-, tier- jer- 
 (§ 216), the prefix is always written in one word with the 
 verb. The preposition ju stands as a separate word before 
 the irifiaiitive. — Examples : fietritgen, to . deceive, p. p. 6e« 
 trogeti; erfd^reden, to be frightened, p. p. erfd^roden; entpfef)ten, 
 ft; veQommend, p. p. em^3fot)Ien ; entfpringen, to escape, p..p, 
 
SPURIOUS PREPOSITIONS. I47 
 
 entf^jrungen ; gefallen, to please, p. p. gefallen ; infin. with ju : 
 gu betrugeit, ju erf(i)recfeTl, etc. 
 
 278. Except for the omission of ge- in the perfect par- 
 ticiple, these compounds are .conjugated like their primitive 
 verbs. The few exceptions will be given in the alphabetical 
 list. Sometimes the compound is used when the primitive 
 is obsolete — as in English be— gin, etc. (§ 232.) 
 
 - Note. — Observe that unless thfere is vowel change, the perfect participle 
 of these verbs, if strong, will be just like the infinitive f as, gefaKen, er= 
 fallen, ocrgebeu, etc. Also, that verbs in gc- as gcbicten, gefaHen, etc., will 
 have the same p. p.'as their primitives, bleten, fatten, etc. 
 
 279. The inseparable prefixes form a large number 0! 
 compound verbs — as well as other derivatives — especially 
 from the verb roots of the strong conjugation, as v/ill be 
 more fully shown in Part II. They never take the accent. 
 
 Spurious Prepositions. 
 
 280. Lists of the most important prepositions and of the cases 
 they govern have been given §§ 164, 178, 179. A number of other 
 words, originally adverbs, nouns, adjectives or participles — some- 
 times compounds or phrases — are used as prepositions. 
 
 These are sometimes called spurious prepositions. A list of the 
 most important of these is here given : — 
 
 (a) Spurious Prepositions governing the Genitive. 
 
 anjiott or ftatt, instead of. WligS, along (sometimes governs a 
 OUger^alb, without, on the outside of. dative). 
 
 mmt):jaib, witiifi. iavA, conformably to {Aso Aai.). 
 
 oBer^alb, above.- ob (rarely^, on account of (see U). 
 
 unterl^alb, below. tro^, z'« sfite of (sometimes governs 
 ^olben or father, on account tf/" (always a dative). 
 
 follows case; in comp. t|alb). um — ttttten, /or the sake of (the case 
 bie8feit or bieSjeitS, on this side of. being inserted between).-", 
 
 jetlfeit or jenfeitS, on the other side of. ungeod^tet, notwithstanding (or with a 
 {raft, by virtue of. preceding dative). 
 
148 LESSON XXVIII. 
 
 unttett, anfcnt, not far from. a dative). 
 
 Bermittctfl (raittete, inittcl|l), by means hJCgen, on accouni of {precedes or fol- 
 
 ef. lows the case). 
 
 ttertnSge, iy dint of. jufolge, eucordingto (sometimes follows 
 tDo^renb, during (very rarely governs the noun and takes a dative). 
 
 Note. — For the special forms metaet^alben, tneincttBEgen, urn ntciitcfc 
 WiUen, etc., see § 452, *. 
 
 (^) Spurious Prepositions governing the Dative. 
 
 auger, outside of besides. gteld^, like. 
 
 Bitllten, mitkin (used only with regard Itad^fi, next to. 
 
 to time) — rarely genitive. neBfl, along with. 
 
 etltgegctt, against, towards (usually fol- oB, over (local) ^ see a. 
 
 lows the case). fammt, together with. 
 
 gegeituber, opposite to (stands usually feit, since. 
 
 after the case). jufolgc, according to (after the case)- 
 
 gemSg, according to (usually follows juttli^er, contrary to (after the case). 
 
 the case). 
 
 {c) Spurious Prepositions governing the Accusative. 
 
 Bi8, till, as far as. enttang, along (usually follows the case), 
 
 fonber, without. ' 
 Note. — S5i8 is frequently used in combination with another preposition. 
 Examples : Si8 att ba8 £^or, as far as the gate. S3i8 JUm (Snbe, down to, as 
 far as the end. Si8 auf biefen Sag, up to this day. 
 
 Ultt — gU WITH Infinitive. 
 
 281. The use of ju with the infinitive has been already men- 
 tioned (§ 176.) 
 
 To express purpose, in order to, the combination um 5U — urn 
 at the head of the clause, ju in its usual position with the infini- 
 tive — is generally used ; as, ici^ t^ue mein SefteS, um bie beutfd^e 
 ®^)rad^^J|i lemen, / do my best to learn the German language. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVlll. 
 I. Es ist verboten in diesem Flusse zu baden. 2. Ich hoffe, die 
 Rechnung binnen sechs Monaten bezahlen zu konnen. 3. Ein 
 Haus, der neuen Kirche gegenuber gelegen, ist zu verkaufen. 
 
SPURIOUS PREPOSITIONS. 1 49 
 
 4. Es ist nebst dem Garten schoii verkauft worden. 5. Ich habe 
 einige Freunde in Bonn besucht. 6. Der Regen' hat die Blumen 
 erfrischt. 7. Haben Sie meinen Brief erhalten ? 8. Er hat uns 
 seit langer Zeit nicht benachrichtigt. 9. Die Stadt war belagert. 
 10. Man muss nicht dem Verbote zuwider handeln. 11. Wer hat 
 das Pulver erfunden? 12. Gehen Sie den Fluss entlang, und 
 binnen einer Stunde werde ,ich nebst meinem Bruder Sie auf dem 
 Platze, der Kirche gegenuber, treffen und bis an das Thor begleiten. 
 13. Wtirden Sie uns benachrichtigt haben? 14. Wir woUen es 
 um des Friedens willen thun. 15. Er wohnt in einem neuen 
 Hause jenseits des Flusses, oberhalb der Briicke. 16. Die Schule 
 steht unweit der Kirche. 1 7. Wir werden des Regens ungeachtet 
 spazieren gehen. 18. Langs der Strasse hat man Baume gepflanzt. 
 19. Man ehrt ihn seines Alters wegen. 20. Er ist des kranken 
 Kindes halber zu Hause gebUeben. 2 1 . Wir erreichten das Ufer 
 vermittelst eines Bootes. 22. Es ist nicht leicht zu sagen, was das 
 Beste ist. 23. Ich habe jenes Haus verkauft, um ein besseres zu 
 kaufen. 24. Ich that es, um Ihnen zu gefallen. 
 
 I. The boy has watered the fiowers. 2. He has promised to 
 visit us in Berlin. 3. We have received his letter. 4. A German 
 monk (has) invented (the) gun-powder. 5. The snow has 
 covered the mountains and the valleys. 6. The gardener has 
 forgotten to water the flowers. 7. He has sold his house along 
 with the garden. 8. You will receive it within an hour. 9. Will 
 you accompany me as far as the old bridge ? 10. He is despised 
 by (toon) everybody. 11. I have forgotten my watch ; what am 
 I to (foil) do? 12. The shepherd seated himself beside {acc^ the 
 shepherdess. 13. Between him and my brother [there] is no 
 friendship. 14. The child has (is) come without its mother. 
 15. He has not understood what you say. 16. After we had 
 reached the shore by means of a boat, we went to an inn in 
 order to dry our clothes. 17. He has forgotten to inform you. 
 18. We shall do nothing contrary to this prohibition. 19. I 
 
ISO LESSON XXIX. 
 
 shall come instead of my brother. 20. The ladies have gone 
 for a walk on the other side of the river ; you will find them 
 below the bridge. 21. One part of the town lies on this side, 
 the other on the other side of the river. 22. The garden lies 
 outside the gate. 23. In spite of my prohibition you (bu) have 
 gone upon the ice. 24. For your mother's sake you should not 
 have done that (§ 267). 
 
 LESSON XXIX. 
 Compound Verbs. — Separable. 
 
 282. Prepositions and adverbs, when forming the first 
 part of a compound verb, are separable. 
 
 283. The words most usually occurring in this connec- 
 tion are : ah, off; an, on; auf, up; avS>, out; ht\, by; "ba or 
 bar, there; etlt (instead of in) in; empor, tip; fort, away; 
 entgegen, against; §er, hither; I)in, thither; mit, with; nad§, 
 after; nteber, down; 06, over; bor, before; toeg, away; irteber, 
 again, back; ju, to; jurM, back; jufantmeit, together. 
 
 284. {a) In principal clauses, in the simple tenses of the 
 verb, the prefix is separated from the verb and stands at the 
 end of the clause. (See Rem. p. 195-) 
 
 {])) But the prefix is written in one word before the infinitive 
 and participles ^- hence, also, in all the compound tenses. 
 ^ (c) The augment ge- of the perfect participle, and ju when 
 "used with the infinitive, are written in one word between the 
 prefix and the verb. 
 
 Thus: auffte^en, to rise; id^ ftel^e auf, / rise; id; ftanb auf, / 
 rose; ic§ bin aufcjeftanben, I have risen; tc^ tounfc^e aufjufte^en, / 
 wish to rise. Or, with intervening words : tc^ jianb ^eute 
 morgen fel^r friil^ auf, / rose very early this morning. Stel^en ©ie 
 ni(|t ju f:pat auf, do not rise too late. 
 
COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 ■ SEPARABLE. 
 
 ISI 
 
 285. But whenever the verb is removed to the end of the 
 sentence, that is, in dependent clauses (§ 177, 4), the prefix is 
 written in one word before the verb. For instance : 31I§ ic^ 
 ^eute SFlorgen aufftanb, when I rase this morning. 2Senn er ju f))at 
 aufftanbe, if he were to rise too late. 
 
 Note. — A separable prefix always has the principal accent. (§ 54.) 
 
 286. Conjugation of a Separable Verb. 
 
 ^nfangen, to begin. 
 
 Principal Parts. 
 anfangen. fing an, angefangen. 
 
 Pres. Part. Perf. Infin. 
 
 anfangenb. angefangen ^aben. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Past. 
 id^ fing an, I began. 
 bu fingft an, thou begannest. 
 er fing an, he began. 
 toir fingen an, we began. 
 ifyc fingt an, yoii. began. 
 fie fingen an, they began. 
 
 t^ l^abe angefangen. 
 
 id^ l^atte angefangen. 
 
 id^ toerbe anfangen. 
 
 ic^ toerbe angefangen ^aben^ 
 
 id^ toiirbe anfangen. ' 
 
 ic^ toiirbe angefangen ^aben. 
 
 fange an. 
 
 anjufangen, angefangen ju l^dben. 
 
 The subjunctive presents no new peculiarity. 
 Inflect for inversion: 
 
 l^eute fange id^ an, etc. morgen toerbe id^ anfangen, etc. 
 
 Present. 
 id^ fange an, I begin. 
 bu fangft an, thou beginnest. 
 er fangt an, he begins. 
 toir fangen an, we begin. 
 i^r fangt cm,' you begin. 
 fie fangen an, they begin. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Pluperfect. 
 Future. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 Conditional. 
 Conditional Perf. 
 Imperative. 
 Inf. with ju. 
 
152 LESSON XXIX. 
 
 For transposition : 
 
 ba^ td^ ^eute anfangen toerbe. tcenn ic^ fd^on angefangen l^abe. 
 etc. etc. 
 
 With infinitive: 
 
 §eute iDunj^e id^ anjufangen. ba tc^ l^eute anjufangen toun[d;e. 
 etc. ;. etc. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIX. 
 
 I . Die Sonne geht im Osten auf, und geht im Westen unter. 
 2. Als die Sonne aufging, Teisten wir ab. 3. Wir haben eine 
 grosse. Geldsumme ausgegeben. 4. Er sieht aus, als ob er krank 
 ware. 5. Die Kinder sahen nach diesem langen Spaziergange 
 miide aus. 6. Um welche Zeit fangt die Schule an? 7. Sie wird 
 um zwei Uhr anfangen. 8. Ziehe deinen Rock aus, Karlchen. 
 9. Heinrich hat seinen neuen Rock aiigezogen. 10. Ziehen Sie 
 sich sfchnell an. 11. 1st Ihr Freund angekommen ? 12. Er wird 
 morgen friih ankommen. 13. Um welche Zeit kommt der Zug 
 von Boston an? 14. Er kommt um sechs Uhr an. 15. Mit 
 welchem Zuge ist Ihr Bruder abgereist? id. Um welche Zeit 
 f^hrt der Schnellzug ab ? 17. Er wird um zwei Uhr abfahren. 
 
 18. Der arme Reisende verirrte sich und kam im Schnee um. 
 
 19. Ich stand heute morgen sehr friih auf, um mit dem Schnellzuge 
 abzufahren. 20. Kommen Sie. nicht zu spat an ; wir haben viele 
 Briefe abzuschreiben. 
 
 I. At what time does the sun rise? 2. The sun rises at six 
 o'clock. 3. The sun was setting. 4. It grows dark when the sun 
 sets. 5. I should have put on my new coat, if the weather had 
 been fine. 6. The express leaves at three o'clock. 7. The 
 scholars have copied their exercises. 8. This flower looks (auS= 
 fe^en) very beautiful. 9. The king has accepted the work which 
 the celebrated writer had offered him. 10. We dressed ourselves 
 very quickly; we wished to start by (mit) the express. 11. I copy 
 all my letters. 12. Put on your shoes. 13. Take off your coat. 
 
VERBS SEPARABLE OR INSEPARABLE. 153 
 
 14. The boys lost their way in the wood; they began to 
 ciy. 15. When (hjann) will you begin to copy your letters ? 
 16. I began yesterday and copied several. 17. The sun will 
 soon rise ; let us dress ourselves. 18. She Aas gone out in order 
 to begin her work. 19. You have forgotten what you had 
 promised me. 20. The prince spent (auSgefcen) a large sum of 
 money. 
 
 . LESSON XXX. 
 Verbs Separable or Inseparable. 
 
 287. The prepositions burc§, f)inter, iiber, unter, unt are 
 separable or inseparable, but with a difference of meaning. 
 When separable the compound has a primitive or literal 
 sense ; when inseparable, a defived or figurative sense. 
 The usual rules of accent and of conjugation are observed 
 in either case. As : — 
 
 Separable. Inseparable. 
 
 burc^'jiefjen, to pull through. burc^jiel^'en, to roam through. 
 burc^'Iaufen, to run through. burc^Iaufen, to peruse hastily, 
 ^in'tergel^en, to go behind. I^intergel^'en, to deceive. 
 
 ii'berfte^en, to project. iiberfte^'en, to overcome. 
 
 ii'Berf e^en, to put over, ferry over, iiberf e^'en, to translate. 
 ii'berlegen, to lay over. iiberleg'en, to consider. 
 
 um'f d^reiben, to write over again, umf (^reib'en, to express by cir- 
 cumlocution. 
 um'gel^en, to go round. umge^'en, to evade. 
 
 un'terl^alten, to hold under. unterl^alf en, to entertain. 
 
 288. (a) The prefix hjieber or toiber is sometimes added to 
 this list. But properly, by the present orthography, toieber is 
 separable, in sense of again, back ; tcteber, inseparable, in sense of 
 against. As : toie'bcrle^ren, to return ; toiberfte'^en, to withstand. 
 
54 LESSON XXX. 
 
 Note. — Except tnitber^olen, to repeat, and sometimes roieberlitttten, to 
 esound. 
 
 (b) The prefix mi^ is properly inseparable, but sometimes takes 
 le augment ge- in the past participle. The practice as to the 
 osition of the augment varies. In some verbs it is placed 
 efore the prefix, in others between the prefix and the verb ; as, 
 emipraud^t, abused; gemipiHigt, disapproved; gemi^l^anbelt, ill- 
 sed; mi^gead^tet, despised; tni^geartet, degenerate; mi^Iungen, 
 liscarried. Details must be found in the dictionary. 
 
 (c) SSoIt (/«//) forms a few inseparable verbs ; as, Dofffiri'ngen, 
 » accomplish, p. p. t)ottbra'(|t ; and some occasional separables ; 
 5, Doll'ftojjfen, to stuff full, p. p. bott'gefto^jft. 
 
 Verljs with Compound Prefixes. 
 289. Many verbs have a compound prefix. Such are : — 
 
 1. Those whose prefix is a compound adverb, especially such 
 s are formed with ba (bar), there; ^er, hither; ^in, hence. All 
 lese are separable ; as : — 
 
 eborftel^en, to impend. p. p. beborgeftanben. 
 
 orangel^en, to precede. " borangegangen. 
 
 orau§|e^en, to suppose. " »orauggefe|t. 
 
 abontaufen, to run off. " babongelaufen. 
 
 erfeeirufen, to summon. " l^e'rbeigerufen. 
 
 inauStragen, to carry out. " i^inauSgetragen. 
 
 mi)iXii^en, to go about. " uml^ergegangen. 
 
 Note. — For accents of prefixes see § 53. Note also distinction between 
 )rms like Ijinjil'.fe^eil, to add, and ^in'=3U=je(5Eli, etc. 
 
 2. A few verbs whose prefix consists of two parts, the first 
 eparable, the second inseparable. These are not uniform, 
 lome separate the first element, admitting ju but yet excluding 
 e-. Others never use the separated forms. As, anerlennen, to 
 cknowkdge ; '\i^ erienne an ; anjuerfennen ; p. p. anerfannt ; bor= 
 
VERBS WITH COMPOUND PREFIXES. 155 
 
 bel^alten, to reserve; id^ Bel^alte Dor ; borjuBel^alten ; but p. p. bDr= 
 bef)alten. But auferfte^en, to arise; p. p. auferftanben ; oxAtx-- 
 ioa^Ien, to select, p. p. auSertoa^It — the separated forms never 
 being used. (See also Less. XXXIX). 
 
 Remark. — Practically it is important to remember the few inseparable 
 and doubtful prefixes (§§ 277, 287). Then only those cases will need special 
 attention in which the latter are not determined, as usual, by form or 
 position; viz., in pres. part., infin. without 511, or transposed ^exh. 
 
 EXERCISE XXX. 
 
 I. Wer hat dieses Buch aus dem Deutschen in's Englische 
 iibersetzt? 2. Er iibersetzte Schiller's Wilhelm Tell. 3. Setzen 
 Sie uns schnell iiber, guter Mann. 4. Ubersetzen Sie diese 
 Seite. 5. Er hielt das Glas unter. 6. Sie unterhielt die Ge- 
 sellschaft. 7. Sie gingen zum Feinde iiber. 8. Wir iibergingen 
 die Sache. 9. Er umging das Gesetz. 10. Man hat mich 
 hintergangen. 1 1 . Die Feinde durchzogen das ganze Land. 12. 
 Der Verfasser hat das Buch von Anfang bis Ende umgeschrie- 
 ben. 13. Was sich mit i??W/« ((7w^) Worte nicht sagen lasst, muss 
 man umschreiben. 14. Wir traten wahrend des Regens unter ein 
 iiberstehendes Dach. 15. Gott {dat^ sei Dank, wir haben diese 
 Versuchung iiberstanden. 16. Der Plan ist misslungen. 17. 
 Der Herr ist auferstanden. 18. Ich erkenne meine Schuld an. 
 
 I. A man set us across in a little boat. 2. I have trans- 
 lated a whole page. 3. The roof projects. 4. He has over- 
 come this temptation. 5. If you will have [some] water, hold 
 your glass under. 6. He was wrong to evade the law. 7. This 
 young man is the degenerate son of a good father. 8. We shall 
 not abuse your kindness. 9. Consider the matter. 10. The 
 physician entertained the patient with old stories. 11. We* 
 went round the town. 12. The prince has abused his power. 
 13. The plan has been disapproved. 14. He has deceived you. 
 15. The servant has {is) run off. 16. The maid-servant carried 
 the dishes out. 17. The ambassador has accomplished his 
 work 18. It is the duty of every one to acknowledge his faults. 
 
IS6 LESSON XXXI. 
 
 LESSON XXXI. 
 Impersonal Verbs. 
 
 290. (a) Verbs which express phenomena of nature have 
 always thf impersonal subject c§, it. As : 
 
 e8 regnet, it rains. ti friert, it freezes. 
 
 e8 fdjneit, it snows. e8 bli^t, it lightens. 
 
 t% ^agclt, it hails. eS bonnert, it thunders, etc. 
 
 (^) Some other verbs are construed impersonally, to 
 express action without definite agent. As : 
 
 £8 tto))ft, there is a knock. eS jiebt (it gives'), there is. 
 
 eS liiutet, there is a ring. ttJte ge^t eS, how goes it ? 
 
 And in the passive; § 275 ; or reflexive, § 274, 3. 
 
 291. («) Some verbs expressing states of body or mind 
 are used as impersonal, with the person as object. As : 
 
 e8 ^ungert inid^, lam hungry. t% friert mic^, I am cold. 
 
 egburftet, or 1 . ^, . ^ ti\&xa\x&t\\.\xC\x, I am giddy. 
 
 ..-••n/ -J, \ I am thirsty. „'' ^ . ,',., 
 
 t% butftet mid), J -^ eS Bangt tntr, I feel afraid, etc. 
 
 Note. — When the personal object precedes the verb, the impersonal 
 subject — which would then follow the verb (§ 177, 3) — is usually omitted; 
 as, tntifi ^ungert ; mir traunit, etc. 
 
 (F) Often the impersonal form is used when the logical 
 
 subject follows. As : eg freut mtcf) @ie jit fet)en, or, "^(i^ @tc 
 
 fommen, I am glad, etc ; eg f d^eint — • eg bunit mid) — ba^ er 
 
 nic^t fommen hitrb, it seems — methinks — that etc. (or mi(^ 
 
 bun!t, etc.). 
 
 292. The impersonal form is much more usual in German 
 
 than in English. Some impersonal idioms are : — 
 
 » eS tl)Ut mir leib, lam sorry. e8 ifl mir lUO^I, I feel well. 
 
 e8 ifl mir Icib, I am sorry. eg ge^t mir gut, I am doing well. 
 
 e8 Berfie^t ftd), that is of course. eg fe^It mir etmag, something ails me. 
 
 eg fragt ftc^, it is a question. eS gelingt mir, I succeed, etc. 
 
 293. Weather and time are expressed with the impersonal 
 fein : e§ ift fait, it is cold; e§ ift je^n Ul^r, it is ten o'clock. 
 
IMPERSONAL VERBS. 157 
 
 294. The English phrases, there is, there are, are expressed 
 by the impersonal e§ with fein or with gebert, to give. With f ein 
 the verb agrees, as in English, with the following predicate 
 noun. With geben, this noun is object, and the verb remains 
 always singular. As : e§ h)ar ein ?(Kann ; e§ toaren 9RSnner. 
 But, e§ gab einen 9Kann; c8 gab 9Jldnner — there was a man; 
 there were men — more usually with plural nouns only. 
 
 In sense fetn is more definite ; geben more vague and indefi- 
 nite ; as, e§ ift ein ©ott, there is a God. %v. ber SJJ^t^otogie ber 
 ©riec^en giebt e§ biele ©fitter, there are many gods in the mythology 
 of the Greeks. 
 
 295. Almost all impersonal verbs form their perfect 
 tenses with the auxiliary f)a6en. 
 
 Use of the Auxiliaries ^nBctt and fetn. 
 
 The distinction indicated in Lesson XIII. will here be 
 stated more fully : 
 
 296. ^aben is used with all transitive verbs — with all 
 
 reflexive verbs — with the modal verbs — with nlost im- 
 
 personals — and with most intransitives which express 
 
 simple action, with or without indirect object. 
 
 Note. — By transitive verbs are meant strictly those which take an accu- 
 sative object — not always the same in German as, apparently, in English. 
 (See § 437). 
 
 297. ©ein is used with the following intransitives : — 
 
 1. Verbs which express a change of condition; as, fterben, to 
 die; toac^fen, to grow; erfranlen, to fall ill; gencfen, to recover, etc. 
 
 2. Verbs which denote motion to or from a place, of which the 
 most usual are (see also § 298) : — 
 
 fasten, to go in a carriage. fKe|en, to flow. 
 
 ^aUin,tofall. Qi^m,togo. 
 
 fliegen, to fly. lommen, to come. 
 
 flie^en, tofleel lanben, to land. 
 
158 LESSON XXXI. 
 
 laufen, to run. fin!en, to sink. 
 
 retfen, to travel. fjjringen, to spring. 
 
 reiten, to ride. ftetgen, to mount. 
 
 fegein, to sail. S^e^en, to move. 
 
 3. A few other verbs, some of which may have a dative object : -— 
 
 BIei6en, to remain. ireid^en, to yield (dat.). 
 
 Begegnen, to meet (dat.). fein, to be. 
 folgen, to follow (dat.). toerben, to become. 
 
 4. The following impersonal verbs : — 
 
 gefd^e^en, to happen. 
 gelingen, gliidfen, geraten, to succeed. 
 mi^Iingen, tnt|glUtfen, mi^raten, to succeed ill. 
 Note. — Observe that many compounds of (ein verbs take (jaben — the 
 sense being transitive. 
 
 298. Some intransitive verbs of motion are conjugated with 
 fein when 'the starting-point, direction, or extent of motion is 
 mentioned. But when only the action or motion is stated, without 
 reference to place, these same verbs are conjugated with l^aben. — 
 Examples : SWein SSruber tft nad^ £«t}>3ig g«reift, my brother is gone 
 to Leipzig. 6r l^at Siel geveift, he has been a great traveller, ©ie 
 finb nad^ bem nac^ften 3)orfe geritten, they are gone on horseback 
 to the nearest village, ©ie l^aBen ben ganjen S^ag geritten, they 
 have been riding the whole day. 
 
 Note. — Some of these verbs are, besides the most of those in § 297, 2 : 
 eiteti, Rettern, !riec^en, queUen, rinnen, fd^iffen, fii^winimcn, tnanbern. 
 
 299. A few verbs are used with either auxiliary, but in 
 a different sense ; and a few are doubtful. The use of 
 fein as auxiliary is generally indicated in the dictionary. 
 
 Note. — It has already been remarked that the use of be in English was 
 formerly more common than at present — approaching more nearly to the 
 German use of fettt. It may also be added that the use of l)aben has 
 increased in German. 
 
 For the'frffquent omission of ^aben or (cilt at the end of a transposed 
 clause, see § 350, 4. 
 
USE OF AUXILIARIES. 159 
 
 EXERCISE XXX). -A. 
 
 I. Es freut mich, Sie wieder zu sehen. 2. Wie geht es Ihnen, 
 alter Freund ? 3. Regnet es ? Nein, es schneit. 4. Hat es 
 gestern gedonnert ? 5. Nein, aber es hat gehagelt und geregnet. 
 6. Es versteht sicli, dass wir nicht ausgehen, sondern zu Hause 
 bleiben, wenn es regnet. 7. Was fehlt Ihnen ? 8. Es fehlt mir 
 nichts, ich befinde mich ganz wohl, 9. Was argert Sie ? 1,0. Es 
 argert mich, von diesem Menschen betrogen worden zu sein. 1 1 . 
 Es gab bessere Zeiten. 12. Es giebt kein Brot im Hause. 13. Es 
 giebt Brot fiir AUe. 14. Es ist 'ein Mann an der Thiire, der mit 
 Ihnen zu sprechen wiinscht. 15. Es jammerte den Feldherrn, in 
 die gepliinderte Stadt einzuziehen. 16. Es traumte mir, dass ich 
 auf einem hohen Berge stande ; es schwindelte mir, und mir bangte 
 herunterzufallen. 
 
 I. Is it cold .' No, it is hot. 2. Has it been freezing this morn- 
 ing? 3. Yes, it has been freezing. 4. It was snowing ; the children 
 rejoiced to see the snow. 5. Will he succeed? Yes, he will 
 succeed. 6. We were thirsty and hungry when we arrived at the 
 end of our journey. 7. What is the matter with you ? I feel giddy. 
 8. We were delighted to find you at home. 9. It has been raining 
 the whole day. 10. Is (giebt) there anything new to-day? 11. 
 No, there is no news (nothing new.) 12. There were giants in 
 ancient times. 13. We are sorry that you have not succeeded. 
 14. Has it been warm to-day ? 15. No, it has been hot. 16. He 
 denied that he had felt afraid. 
 
 B. 
 
 I. Der Soldat ist an semen Wunden gestorben. 2. Die Mad- 
 chen sind in den Garten gegangen. 3. Der Schiffer ist in den 
 Fluss gefallen. 4. Wir waren alle erschrocken. 5. Der Feind ist 
 geflohen. 6. Diese Apfel sind von dem Baume gefallen. 7. Das 
 Schiff ist gesunken. 8. Was geschehen ist, ist geschehen. 9. Der 
 alte Feldherr ist gestern angekommen. 10. Mein Vetter ist 
 
l6o LESSON XXXII. 
 
 wahrend des Sommers auf das Land gezogen. ii. Die Fremden 
 sind auf den Berg gestiegen. 12. Der Diener ist seinem Herrn ge- 
 folgt. 13. Wir sind zu Hause geblieben. 14. Meine Schwestern 
 sind spazieren gefahren. 15. Die Schiffer sind mit den Reisenden 
 nach Danzig gesegelt. 16. Der Knabe ist von der Bank gefallen. 
 
 I. The master has ridden with his servant to (the) town. 2. 
 They are gone to (the) church. 3. The boatmen have landed in 
 the harbour. 4. The ladies have taken a drive. 5. They have 
 landed in Dresden. 6. My friend has moved to the next street. 
 7. The bird has flown upon a tree. 8. I have met your friend 
 yesterday. 9. The old physician would have remained at home, 
 if the patient had not sent for (ttac§) him. 10. We should have 
 come, if we had been invited. 11. The leaves have fallen from 
 the trees. 12. The teacher has taken a walk with his pupil. 13. 
 I was frightened. 14. This gentleman has been a great traveller 
 {has travelled much). 15. The boy is tired, he has been running 
 and jumping the whole day. 16. He has recovered from a severe 
 illness. 
 
 LESSON XXXII. 
 Numerals. 
 
 300. Cardinal Numerals. 
 
 1 etn§ (etn, eine, ein), one. 10 je^n, ten. 
 
 2 jtoet, two. II elf, eleven. 
 
 3 bret, three. 12 Jtoolf, twelve. 
 
 4 i>ux,/our. 13 breijel^n, thirteen. 
 
 5 '^x\\,five. 14 tivayikjV., fourteen. 
 
 6 fec^S, six. 15 ^n^^tl)n,J/teefi. 
 
 7 fteben, seven. 16 fec^je^n, sixteen. 
 
 8 a^t, eight. 17 ficbje^n, seventeen. 
 
 9 neun, nine. 18 ad^t^el^n, eighteen. 
 
CARDINAL NUMERALS. l6l 
 
 
 Cardinal 
 
 ■ Numerals 
 
 3. 
 
 19 
 
 neunje^n, nineteen. 
 
 80 
 
 ac^tjig, eighty. 
 
 20 
 
 jtoanjig, twenty. 
 
 90 
 
 neunjtg, ninety. 
 
 21 
 
 ein unb jiDanjig, twenty-one. 
 
 100 
 
 l^unbert, a hundred. 
 
 22 
 
 jtoet unb stoanjig, twenty- 
 
 lOI 
 
 l^unbert (unb) etn§. 
 
 
 two. 
 
 102 
 
 l^unbert (unb) jtoei. 
 
 23 
 
 brei unb jtoanjig, twenty- 
 
 120 
 
 l^unbert (unb) jtoanjig. 
 
 
 three. 
 
 125 
 
 I^unbert f linf unb jtoans 
 
 30 
 
 bretpg, zv^zWji'- 
 
 200 
 
 jtnei l^unbert. [jig. 
 
 31 
 
 ein unb brei^ig, thirty-one. 
 
 300 
 
 brei l^unbert. 
 
 32 
 
 jtoei unb bret^ig, thirty-two. 
 
 1000 
 
 taufenb. 
 
 40 
 
 'oxttm, forty. 
 
 2000 
 
 jtcei taufenb. 
 
 5° 
 
 mm, fifty- 
 
 100,000 
 
 ^unbert taufenb. 
 
 60 
 
 fed^Sig, J2^(r. 
 
 1,000,000 
 
 eine SJliHion'. 
 
 70 
 
 fiebjtg, seventy. 
 
 2,000,000 
 
 jhjet 5KiEionen. 
 
 Note. — The old form ctif for etf is still occasionally met with. Often, the 
 forms funfseljn, funfjig ; \ti)%ii%n, fectjSjig; ftetienje^n, fteBenjig. Rarely — 
 poetic — the old forms jmeen, jmo, two. 
 
 301. (Sin is regularly inflected — ein, eine, ein — when before 
 a noun; when without a noun, eincr, eine, eineS; or with the 
 article, ber Sine, bie (Sine, ba§ (Sine, etc. The neuter form ein§ 
 (for eineS) is used abstractly in counting. In compound numbers, 
 like einunb jioanjig, ein is not inflected ; nor, frequently, in the phrase 
 ein unb berfelbe. (In other phrases (§ 245, note) ein is the indef.art.) 
 
 Note. — Sin, one, is pronounced with more stress than ein, an, a ; and, 
 for distinction, is often printed with spaced letters ; as, ein 25ort, a word ; 
 ein SSJort, one word. 
 
 302. ^'(Oti, brei have a genitive jtoeier, breter, and a dative 
 jtoeien, breien, which may be used when the case is not otherwise 
 indicated ; as, ba§ Urt^eil jhjeier g^reunbe, the judgment of two 
 friends; i^ \!i<i!c>i eS nur Jtoeien gefagt, I have told it only to two. 
 
 Note. — By ellipsis, the names of the numerals are construed as femi- 
 nines, and of the weak declension ; as, biefe (3a^I) 2t(i^t, biefe (Sinfen ; this 
 (figure) 8, these i'j. 
 
1 62 LESSON XXXII. 
 
 303. Other simple numerals sometimes take -en in the dative 
 plural, when used without a noun — more rarely a plural form 
 -e ; as, ber Kijnig fa^rt tnit feci^fen, the king drives with six 
 {horses); atte 3Siere, all fours. But they usually remain unaltered. 
 
 304. §unbert, taufenb, take a plural -e when used alone as 
 plural nouns : ^unberte, ja taufenbc toaren jugegen, hundreds, yes 
 thousands, were present. (Sin is used before ^unbert and taufenb 
 only in the numeral sense ; as, f)unbert, a hundred; but ein 
 taufenb ad^t l^unbert, one thousand eight hundred, etc. 
 
 Expressions of Time. 
 
 305. {a) For the hours of the day the cardinal number is 
 used with Uf)r (as indeclinable), and the fractions are counted 
 on the next hour ; as : gBie biel ll^r ift e§? What- o'clock is it? 
 
 ®§ ift titer U^r, it isfcrur o'clock. 
 
 (S§ ift ein 3SierteI auf-fiinf, it is a quarter past four. • 
 
 @§ ift \iii!& fiinf, it is half past four {half five) . 
 6§ ift brei SSiertel auf fiinf, it is a quarter to five. But also: 
 ein SSiertel tior fiinf ; or, brei SBiertel nadE) tiier. 
 
 Urn luietiiel U^r, at what o'clock 1 Urn fiinf (U^r), etc. 
 
 {b) The minutes are expressed by the prepositions in, tior, 
 and iiber, nac^, respectively. — Examples : @g ift in jel^n SJlinuten 
 elf ; e§ ift je^n 3)linuten tior elf, it is ten minutes to eleven. @g ift 
 neun SJlinuten nad^ tiier, or iiber tiier, it is nine minutes past four. 
 
 Numeral Compounds. 
 
 306. Various compounds are formed with cardinals : 
 
 I. With the suffix lei, appended to the ending er, indeclinable 
 numeral adjectives are formed, sometimes called variatives ; as, 
 einerlei, jtoeierlei, breierlei, etc., of one kind, two kinds, three kinds; 
 e§ ift mir einerlei, it is all one {the same) to me ; tiielerlei, of many 
 kinds, or many kinds of; hjie tiielerlei, of how mafiy kinds, or how 
 many kinds of 7 
 
CARDINAL NUMERALS. 1 63 
 
 2. With ntal, time, times, sometimes called iteratives; as, 
 einmal, once; jtoeimal, twice; ^unbertmal, a hundred times; biel= 
 tnal, many times, etc. 
 
 Note. — (Sinmat is distinguished in meaning by accent: ein'tnat, once 
 (definite), one time; einmat', once (indefinite), once on a time. 
 
 3. Multiplicative s are formed with fad^, or fdttig ; as, einfai^, 
 etnfattig, simple; jtoeifad^, jtoetfaltig, double, twofold, etc. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXll. 
 
 I. Sag %(i!cjX %<xi jtoijlf 3Jlonate. 2. SBie Diele S^age ftnb in einem 
 Sa^re ? 3. (gin ^a^r l^at 365 Sage. ^. ©in Sag ^at 24 ©tunben. 
 5. ^toeimal neun ift ac^tje^n. 6. 17 unb 19 ma^t 36. 7. SBie 
 f}3at ift eg ? 8. @§ f)at foeben ein§ gef(^tagen. 9. ajlulti^lijieren 
 <3ie 24 mit 5; toieDiet ift (mac^t) ba§? 10. @§ mac^t 120. 11. 
 ©ibibiere 363 mit 11; toaS lommt l^erau§? 12. 3lbbiere (ja^Ie 
 juyammen) 5, 8, 7 unb 10 ; it)tei)iel tnad^t bag ? 30. 13. 35a§ 
 giefultat ift 30. 14. (S§ ift je^n U^r. 15. (S§ toirb balb ^alb elf 
 fein. 16. ®er ncic^fte 3m9 "•^'^ Soften gel^t urn brei SBiertel auf 
 jhjolf ab. 17. Urn tcelc^e g^i* toirb ber 3"0 t'on Baltimore an= 
 lommen ? 18. Um ein SBiertel auf fieben. 19. SBiebiele SKinuten 
 finb in einer ©tunbe? 20. 60 SOlinuten. 21. ®ie ©d^Iad^t bei 
 Seij)3ig tourbe im ^af)re 1813 gefd^Iagen. 22. SBie toeit ift eg Don 
 ^ier nad^ Stid^monb ? 23. (Jg ift no(i) 67 SJJeilen. 24. (gg ift ung 
 einerlei. 
 
 I. The book has 253 pages. 2. How many miles is it from 
 here to Springfield ? 3. It is 56 miles. 4. At what time will 
 the express leave for Hartford ? 5. The express will leave at a 
 quarter past five. 6. At what time will the train from New 
 York arrive ? 7. It will arrive at a quarter to eleven. 8. 
 14 multiplied by 3 is 42. 9. How many kinds of wine have 
 you in your cellar? 10. We have three kinds of wine in our 
 cellar. 11. How many kinds of apples grow in your orchard ? 
 12. Five kinds of apples. 13. That is tenfold profit. 14. We 
 
164 LESSON XXXIII. 
 
 have been twice in London. 15. Three times three is nine. 
 16. Seven times seven is forty-nine. 17. Schiller was born in 
 the year 1759, and died in the year 1805. 18. How old was 
 he, at the (jur) time of his death ? 19. He was 46 years old. 
 20. How old is your youngest sister ? 21. She is seven years 
 old. 22. Thousands were present. 23. That is all the same 
 to me. 24. We rise (aufftel^en) every morning at half past six. 
 {Continue oral practice, until the numerals are familiar^ 
 
 LESSON XXXIII. 
 
 Ordinal Numerals. 
 
 307. The ordinal numerals from 2 to 19 are derived 
 from the cardinal numerals by adding the suffix t, and 
 from 20 upwards, ft. They are declined like adjectives and 
 are usually preceded by the definite article. ^x\i, first, is 
 the superlative of e{)e, before, cf)er, sooner; britt, third, 
 shortens the radical vowel ; ac^t, eighth, drops one t. In 
 compound numbers only the last takes the ordinal ending. 
 
 \st ber, bie, ba§ erfte, the first. 
 
 2nd „ „ „ jiueite, the second. 
 
 7,rd „ „ „ britte, the third. 
 
 4M „ „ „ bierte, the fourth. 
 
 Ith „ „ „ fiinfte, the fifth. 
 
 6th „ „ „ . f ed^fte (fed^Ste), the sixth. 
 
 "jth „ „ „ \\i\)iv.it, the seventh. 
 
 %th „ „ „ ac^te, the eighth, 
 
 igth „ „ „ neunje^nte, the nineteenth. 
 
 20th „ „ ., jtoanjigfte, the twentieth. 
 
 2ist ,„ „ „ m\ v.n'S) i\Ma.ni\%\ti, the twenty first. 
 
 22d „ „ „ jtoet unb jhianjigfte, the twenty-second. 
 
 2,0th „ „ „ brei^igfte, the thirtieth. 
 
EXPRESSIONS OF DATE. 16$ 
 
 31s f ber, bie, ba§ ein unb brei^tgfte, t^e thirty-first. 
 
 Z°th „ „ „ funfjigfte (funfjigfte), the fiftieth. 
 
 100th „ „ „ f)\m'bixt\ti, the huntiredth. 
 
 loist „ „ „ IjViXibvdviV.'t) i.x\tt, the hundred-and first. 
 
 200th „ „ „ jhjei^unbertfte, the two-hundredth. 
 
 1000th „ „ „ taufenbfte, the thousandth. 
 
 „ „ „ le|te, the last. 
 
 Note. — ®Er, bie, bag anbere, iAe other, is sometimes used for the second. 
 
 308. From tnie biel, how many, is formed an interrogative 
 ordinal, ber, bie, ba§ toiebtelfte, or toiebtelte ; as, ber toietiielfte ift 
 ba§, how many is that? ben toieDtelften (S^ag) ^ben toir ^eute, 
 what day of the month is it to-day ? 
 
 Expressions of Date. 
 
 - 309. (a) In giving the day of the month, the ordinal is 
 us^d elliptically, without preposition \%aa, Don being impli.ed] ; 
 as, fe ift ber fiinfte 3tuguff, it is the fifth (day) of August. 
 
 (b) In naming a date, the dative ordinal with an (an bem con- 
 tracted to am) is used, or — especially in dating a letter — the 
 simple accusative ; as, er ftarb am jel^nten SDtai, — or ben jel^nten 
 3)Jai — he died (on) the tenth of May ; Softon, ben je^nten ?Kat. 
 
 Note. — When figures are used, the endings -(f)te, -(j)tcn are sometimes 
 written, but often omitted ; as ber lOte or ber 10. SSSioX ; am 20ften or am 
 20. 3Jtoi — the period marking the abbreviated ordinal. 
 
 310. The date of the year is given by the cardinal number, 
 usually preceded by im (in bem) 3a^r(e), in the year ; as, 3JapD= 
 leon ftarb (im ^a^re) a(^tjel^n ^unbert 'ein unb Jtoanjig ; Nafokon 
 died in (the year) 182 1 . 
 
 311. From the ordinal numerals are formed: 
 
 I. The fr actionals, by the ending -tel — originally the noun 
 3:ejl, fart — except the half, bie §alfte; as,. ein ®rittel, a third; 
 fin ^i?rt?J/ a fourth, etc. 
 
l66 LESSON XXXIII. 
 
 2. The dimidiatives, by adding I;aI6, half, to the ordinal, de- 
 noting half a unit less than the corresponding number; as, 
 anbert^alb, one and a half; britt(e)]^alb, two and a half (i. e. the 
 third a half) — etc. These are indeclinable. 
 
 3. Ordinal adverbs, ending in -en8 (see § 399) ; as, erftenS, 
 firstly ; jtoeitenS, secondly, etc. 
 
 Expressions of Weiglit and Measure. 
 
 312. Nouns of quantity, weight, or measure, except feminines 
 in t, are used in the singular after a numeral. The English 'of 
 is not expressed. Thus : bret ^funb Sl^ee, three pounds of tea ; 
 ^el^n '%^x% lang, ten feet long. But bret 2;affen %\jit, three^ups of 
 tea ; jtoei ©Hen lang, two yards long, etc. 
 
 313. The names of the days and months are (usually with the 
 article) : 
 
 (Sonn'tag, Sunday. %a.xm.o.'^ , January, ^u'li, /«/>-. 
 
 3Jton'tag, Monday. gebruar', February. Stuguff , August. 
 
 3)ien§'tag, Tuesday. 3Rarj, March. Se^jtem'ber, September, 
 
 SKitf iDod^, Wednesday. W^xW, April. Dfto'Ber, October. 
 
 SDon'nerStag, Thursday. 9Kai, May. Sloijetn'ber, November. 
 
 grei'tag, i^nVaj/. '^•dvS.,June. 'iii^tm'htx, December, 
 
 ©onn'abenb, or ©amS'tag, Saturday. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIll. 
 
 1. Ste gro^en ©olbaten g^riebric^S be§ ©rften, ^onigS Don ^reu^en, 
 bienten in ben ^riegen feineg @nlel§ griebri(| beg 3*i'«it6"- 2. 
 Subtoig U^Ianb hjurbe am 26. 3l^)ril 1787 in 3;itbingen geboren, unb 
 ftarb bafelbft am 13. 9lot)ember 1862. 3. Sag §ou§, in toeld^em id^ 
 hJD^ne, tft brei ©to(f ^od^ ; '\i) tDofjne im britten ©torfe. 4. §einrid; 
 ber Std^te, ^ontg Don Snglanb, tear fed^gmal ber^ietratet. 5. 2)ret 
 3t^tel ftnb bte §dlfte tjon brei SBiertel. 6. ^eber ©olbat er^ielt 
 jhiei $aar ©tiefel(n). 7. @r tool^nt im Dierten §aufe urn bte ®de. 
 8. %%x neunte 3Jlonat beg ^al^reg ^et^t ©ej3tember. 9. 3Sie ^eifet 
 
ADVERBS. 167 
 
 ber le^te %a% ber 5Boc^e? 10. Wan nennt i^n ©onnaBenb ober 
 SamStag. 11. 3)?r 3u0 loii^b in anbertl^att ©tunben aniotnmen. 
 
 12. ®a§ Sanb^auS beg ©rafen tft britte§aI6 SJJeilen Don ^ter. 
 
 13. ®a§ Samj)f6D0t tcirb am 21ften nad^ften 9JJottat8 abfal^ren. 
 
 14. gtad^ften j^reitag loerben toir ben 25ften btefeS SJlonatS ^a6en. 
 
 15. S)en toiebtelften ^a6en"totr l^eute? 16. 2Btr ^aben ^eute ben 
 25. Sluguft ac^tgefjn (or taufenb ad^t) ^unbert feeing unb ad;tjtg. 
 
 I. Sunday is tlie first day of the week, Monday the second, 
 and Tuesday the third. 2. The last days of (the) January 
 were very cold. 3. He has bought a dozen bottles of wine. 4. 
 She drank two cups of tea. 5. Give me eight quires of paper. 
 6. Three is a fifth of fifteen. 7. The king will arrive on the 
 22d of May, at half past three. 8. He has bought five pairs of 
 boots. 9. Send me ten pounds of tea. 10. A third and a sixth 
 are three sixths, n. The train will arrive in three hours and a 
 half. 12. Last Saturday we had (were) gone to Dresden. 13. 
 I have read the first twenty pages. 14. The bridge is 153 feet 
 long, and 30 feet broad. 15. What day [of the month] is it to- 
 day? 16. It is Thursday, the 15th of February, 1885. 
 
 LESSON XXXIV. 
 
 Adverbs. 
 
 314. Most adjectives are used in their predicate form 
 as adverbs, not only in the positive, but also in the com- 
 parative and superlative degrees. Sari fc£)ret6t [c^on, §etn= 
 xv&j fcE)ret6t f^oner, aber Suife jc^rei6t am fd)ijn[ten. SBer fanit 
 am fd)neEften laufen? 
 
 Note. — Thus the adverb is often distinguished from the adjective only 
 by absence of inflection, or by the context. (See § 449, 2, d) 
 
1 68 LESSON XXXIV. 
 
 315. In the superlative the form with am is used when 
 actual comparison is expressed. But' in the absolute 
 superlative, which expresses simply a very high degree 
 without comparison, the accusative neuter with auf (ouf 
 \i<x^ contracted to auf§) is used. As, er Bebonlt fid) aufg 
 Befte, he returns his best thanks. (£r gtii^te mic^ auf§ l^oflid^fte, 
 he greeted me most politely. 
 
 316. A few superlatives use as adverbs the uninflected 
 form in -ft. And of these, the superlatives ^6(^ft, (tu^erft, 
 mogttd^ft, are frequently used to form a periphrastic super- 
 lative of adjectives or other adverbs. — As, t|un @te e§ 
 gefdHigft, do it, please; '^6c£)ft atigenel)tn, most agreeable; 
 
 . aufeerft fci)6n, extremely beautiful; mogliclft fc^neH, as quick 
 (or quickly^ as possible. 
 
 317. The following adverbs form their comparative and 
 superlative from other stems : — 
 
 tool^I or gut, well. beffer, better; am beften, best. 
 
 Balb, soon. e^er, sooner; am el^eften, soonest, 
 
 ^ixn, willingly, gladly. liibix,more willingly, rather; rnn 
 
 Itebften, most willingly. 
 
 318. AdverBs~are- of ten formed from adjectives by means of 
 suffixes ; as 6ttterKd^, bitterly (from Bitter) ; 6IinbKng8, blindly, 
 (from Blinb). Such forms will be more fully given in Less. XLIII. 
 
 Note. — Euphonic forms in -e occur, as §147, note; as, tatige, gcme, 
 Borne, for long, getn, Born, etc. 
 
 319. {a) Some adverbs derived from nouns or adjectives 
 take the sign of the genitive, § (§ 399) : — 
 
 abenbS, in the evening. ItnJS, to the left. 
 
 morgen§, in the morning. fc^onftenS, in the best manner. 
 
 anfangS, in the beginning. f})ateften§, at the latest. 
 
 teil§, partly. aHerbingg, certainly. 
 
 red^tS, to the right. anber^, otherwise. 
 
POSITION OF ADVERBS. 1 69 
 
 (6) Such forms are sometimes phrases, written as compounds ; 
 as, grD^tenteiI§,/^r tAe most part ; unterioegg, on the way ; feine§= 
 toegS, by no means, etc, 
 
 320. id) Many adverbial phrases are formed by combination 
 with a preposition; as, bon ^%v^, from above; bon \xv.itv.,from 
 below ; gerabe au8, straight on. Many adverbs are pure com- 
 pounds, as, Mm^six, past ; iiberaE, everywhere; 'okUtii^i, perhaps, 
 etc. For accent, see § 53. For compounds of ba, too, see 
 §§ 209, 237. 
 
 (b) The compounds with ]^er>. hither ; l^in, thither, are often 
 separable; as, tool^er lommen ©ie? or, too fommen ©ie l^er? 
 where do you come from 1 etc. §er and ^tn are used in many 
 idiomatic phrases. (§ 484). 
 
 321. There are also many simple adverbs, or adverbs proper ; 
 such as, |ier, here; bort, there; ^er, hither; l^in, thither; bann, 
 then ; toantt, when ; fo, so ; nur, only, etc. 
 
 Note. — Adverbs are classed, according to their meaning, as in Englisli, 
 into adverbs of place, of time, of manner, of degree, of predication (or 
 mood), etc. But such classification does not need to be explained here. 
 
 322. Position of Adverbs. 
 
 1. The adverb stands immediately before the adjective or 
 adverb it modifies. Except genug, enough; as, ftar! genug, 
 strong enough. 
 
 2. The adverb cannot stand, as it so often does in English, 
 between the subject and verb. For instance : We generally 
 dine at six o'clock, totr f^jeifeti geloo^nlt^) urn f ed^S U^r. He always 
 speaks the truth, er fagt imtner bie 3Bal^r^ett. Except in the 
 transposed oxA&r (§ 177, 4.) See also § 323. 
 
 3. The English "only" may either precede or follow the 
 noun ; the German nur must always precede it : My sister only, 
 or only my sister was present, nur meine ©d^toefter toar jugegen. 
 
I/O LESSON XXXIV. 
 
 4. When several adverbs or adverbial expressions occur in 
 the same sentence, the adverb of time is usually first, the ad- 
 verb of place second, and the adverb of manner last. Examples: 
 S§ l^at l^eute l^ier ftarf geregnet, it has been raining hard here to- 
 day. @r arbettet immer flei^ig, he always works diligently. (See 
 also § 202.) 
 
 Note. — The same rule applies to the corresponding adverbial phrases ; 
 as, ©8 ^at ^eute morgen in biejer ®egenb fe^r ftart^eregnet, it has been raining 
 very hard in this neighborhood this morning. 
 
 5. The adverb nid^t, not, when it negatives the verb, stands 
 after all objects or other adverbs. But when it negatives some 
 adjunct of the verb, it is placed before that adjunct. Examples '■ 
 %i) fe^e tfjn nii^t, T do not see him. ^d& l^abe tl^n 6eutc nic^t 
 gefe^en, T have not seen him to-day. SBir \<}Sim. t^n ntd^t ^eute, 
 fonbern geftern gefel^en, we have not seen him to-day, but yesterday. 
 
 323. When an adverb, or adverbial phrase, begins the 
 sentence, an inversion occurs (see § 177, 3) ; as, l^eute l^at e§ ^ier 
 ftar! geregnet ; or l^ier |at e§ l^eute ftar! geregnet ; or ftar! l^at e§ 
 l^eute l^ter geregnet. For fuller statements, see § 344. 
 
 Note. — Only one such adverb or adverbial phrase can precede the 
 verb. The others will occupy their usual places, as in the examples. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIV. 
 
 1. 2Bo ift ber SBal^nJ^of? 2. Sin!§ urn bte ©tfe. 3. 2Bo ift bet 
 ©aft^of ju ipf) ben bret Sonigen ? 4. ^n ber britten ©trafee red^tg, 
 ba§ bierte §au§ auf ber linien ©cite. 5. Sitte, jetgen ©te mir ben 
 SfBeg nad^ bent ©cm. 6. ©el^en ©te gerabe auS, big ©te an bag 
 5RatI;aug lommen; bort biegen ©te linfe urn bte ©dfe unb ne^nten 
 barauf bie erfte ©tra^e red^tg, toeld^e ©te birecf auf ben 9Jliinfter(3lo| 
 fu^rt. 7. SBo tooaen ©te ^tn? 8. %^ laufe auf ben- Sa^n£)of ; 
 td^ toerbe . balb toteber jurtidf fontnten. 9. 5Dte ©d^lafjimnter ftnb 
 obcn, ber ©))etfefaal unb bte SBol^njintmer finb unten. 10. ©inb 
 ©ie je in ®enf getoefen, unb fennen ©ie bte bortigen ®aftI;ofe? 
 
CONJUNCTIONS. 171 
 
 11. 3toar bin td^ ba getoefen, aber eStftfc^on lange l^er (fl^^j).' 
 
 12. SBir jinb borgeftern ^ier angelomnten, unb toerben iibermorgen 
 hjieber abretfen. 13. 2Bir ^aben bereitS bie ganje ©tabt gefef^en. 
 
 14. 3)ann ftnb ©ie toa^rfd^einlid^ a\x<S) fd^on im ®om getuefen? 
 
 15. ?5^retlic^ finb toir ba getoefen, unb ^ben t^n toon borne utib bon 
 l^inten, bon oben unb bon unten befe^en. 16. 3)aS ift ja red^t fd^on; 
 gie fd^einen ixbtxaU getoefen ju fetn. 17. 3Bo^er lommen ©ie 
 l^eute? SBo^tn tooHen ©ie ntovgen? 18. ^d) fomme ^eute bon 
 SSafel unb toiK morgen nad^ SBern. 
 
 I. He entirely forgot the names. 2. Which of the sisters 
 works most diUgently? 3. The air is cool in - the - morning 
 and in - the - evening. 4. We have waited [a] long [timej 
 5. She cried bitterly. 6. Which of these boys sings most 
 beautifully? 7. I expect him every hour (hourly). 8. He fell 
 backwards over the stairs, g. He can hardly have heard it. 
 10. The book is written partly in the English and partly in 
 the German language. \i. It rained yesterday and [the] day- 
 before- yesterday. 12. When did it happen ? 13. It happened 
 lately. 14. It. is very probable that it will rain to-morrow. 
 15. I had almost forgotten it. 16. He is by no means so 
 industrious as you think. 17. Is your brother at present (je|t) 
 in Basle? 18. No sir, at present he is in Strassburg. 
 
 LESSON XXXV. 
 
 Conjunctions. 
 
 324. Conjunctions which connect sentences of like kind 
 are called co-ordinating conjunctions. Conjunctions which 
 introduce dependent clauses are called subordinating con- 
 junctions. Conjunctions are important chiefly from their 
 influence on the order of words. (See Lesson xxxvi.) 
 
172 LESSON XXXV. 
 
 325. Co-ordinating conjunctions are either pure conjunc- 
 tions (the simple connectives) or adverbial conjunctions. 
 
 Pi^re Conjunctions. 
 
 326. The pure conjunctions cause neither inversion nor 
 transposition of the verb. These are [English, and, but, 
 or, for\ : 
 
 unb, and. fonbem, 6ut. 
 
 abiv, but, however. ober, or. 
 
 allein, but, yet. benn,/<?r. 
 
 {a) ©onbern is used only after a negative, and introduces an 
 opposite statement. Slber is used both after affirmative and 
 negative clauses, and merely qualifies, but does not contradict, 
 the preceding statement. As : ®r ift nt^t reid^, fonbern arm. @r 
 l)at bag §au§ gefauft, aber nid^t bejal^It. ^^i tomwe ntd^t bon ber 
 ©teHe, aber e§ ift (xa.^ fd^toer ; / do not make any progress, but 
 then it is difficult. * 
 
 (J)) Sonbern, allein, stand at the head of the clause ; aber, in 
 the sense of however, frequently after the introductory words. 
 As : @r ift tool^I \%\jX reid^ ; er ift aber f el^r geijig ; he is indeed very 
 rich ; he is however very avaricious. 
 
 (c) SlHein (literally atone, only') admits, but excepts from, a 
 preceding statement, either affirmative or negative; and is of 
 less frequent use than aber. As: ®r tear ein grower g^elb^err, 
 aEein er Befa^ nid^t bie ®abe umfaffenber Sered^nung, — but (yet) 
 he did not possess the gift of comprehensive calculation, etc. 
 
 Adverbial Con j unctions. 
 
 327. The adverbial conjunctions, or co-ordinating con- 
 junctions which partake of the nature of adverbs, when 
 they stand at the head of the sentence, influence the order 
 of words like adverbs — that is, they cause inversion of the 
 verb (§ 323). Examples: %6) bin Jranf ; be§f)alb fann i{| 
 
SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS. 1/3 
 
 nic^t au§gef)en ; / am ill; on that account I cannot go out. (£r 
 !am geftern ?tbenb fet)r fpat an, unb benno(^ i[t er fe^t fru^ ouf ; 
 he arrived very late last night, and, nevertheless, he is up 
 very early. But these same words do not change the order 
 of words when they stand as adverbs within the sentence : 
 3c^ t>in Iran!, id) !ann be§£)alb nii^t auggetjen. 
 
 328. The principal adverbial conjunctions are : 
 
 alK accordingly boc^, | ^^^^^^^^_ 
 
 au|erbetn, besides. bennod^, .> , 
 
 ha, there, then. j^bod^, 3 
 
 bann, then. foIgKd^, consequently. 
 
 balder, \ th f inbefyert, meanwhile, however. 
 
 barutn, ) " nod^, still, yet (time). 
 
 ^^§^«^^' \ on that account. \^>l<'^*hen. 
 
 begtoegen, ) , lonft, else, otherwise. 
 
 Note. — @o is frequenfly used to introduce >• principal clause, preceded 
 by a dependent clause, when no connective is expressed in English, — 
 especially after adverbial clauses of cause or condition — not of time (§ 486). 
 
 329. In the correlative or double connectives, ertttueber — Dber, 
 either — or; tceber — nod^, neither — nor, inversion occurs after 
 toeber and no^ — and usually, but not always, after enttoeber; 
 as : (gntloeber lotnmt er (or er !omtnt), ober er totrb balb fd^retBen, 
 either he zvill come or he will soon write. Sffieber iDtrb er lommen, 
 no(^ totrb er fd^reiben, neither will he come nor will he write. But : 
 er Wirb toeber fommen noc^ fd^reiben, he will neither come nor write. 
 
 Note. — The phrases joWot)!— ats aud^, both — and; ttiii)t nur— fonBcrn 
 aui), not only — but also, are also used as correlative connectives. 
 
 Subordinating: Conjunctions.' 
 
 330. Subordinating conjunctions transpose the verb to 
 the end of the clause which they introduce. Examples : 
 9iad)bem ic§ meineh SBrief gefd^rieben f)atte, trug td§ i^n auf bie 
 
174 LESSON XXXV. 
 
 5|Soft; after T had written my letter, I carried it to the post- 
 office. Sie (Sonne ging foeften auf, ate rt)ir auf bent (Stpfet beg 
 95erge§ aniamen; ^.^^ jm» was just rising as we reached the- 
 summit of the mountain. 
 
 331. When a dependent clause precedes the principal 
 clause, the latter is inverted. The dependent clause here 
 has the effect of an adverbial modifier preceding the 
 principal verb (§ 323). As : 9ta(i)bem cr feinc SRecEinung 
 bejatltt ^atte, retfte er ab : after he had paid his bill, he left. 
 Dbgleic^ er fe'^r retd§ ift, (fo) ift er bennocE) geijtg ; although he 
 is very rich, he is nevertheless miserly. 
 
 332. The most important subordinating conjunctions 
 are : — 
 
 al§, when, as. ob, whether, if. 
 
 «^^''^' \asif ^^^^"^'^'X although. 
 
 <M hjenn, > oBioo^l, ) 
 
 Bettor, before. feit, 
 
 ' >■ since (time), 
 
 itbem, i ' 
 
 bis, until. feitbem, 
 
 ba, as, since (cause). fobalb, as soon as. 
 
 ba^, that. ical^renb, while. 
 
 bamit, in order that. toann, when. 
 
 e^e, before. toenn, when, if. 
 
 *"^«'"' I while, as. \0%m^, wherefore. 
 
 tnbeffen, ) luie, how, as. 
 
 nac^bem, after. toeil, because. 
 
 Note. — Some of these words have other uses; as, ba, there, then ; al8, 
 than ; bi8, up to, etc. But the use as subordinating conjunction will always 
 be showji by the position of the verb at the end of the clause. 
 
 333. For the distinction between al§, when (definite past), 
 tuenn, when (future or contingent), and toann, when (inter- 
 rogative) ; also for the separable compounds it»enn — au^, ob — 
 gl?id^, although^ etc., see Lesson lxi. 
 
INTERJECTIONS. 175 
 
 334. The correlative comparison, the (more) — the (Jess) is 
 expressed by je~ — befto (or je — je), the leading, or dependent, 
 clause being transposed, the second inverted ; as, je teic^er ber 
 SKann toirb, befto ftoljer toirb er, the richer the man becomes, the 
 prouder he grows, ^e e^er, je lieber, the sooner the better. 
 
 Interjections. 
 
 335. The simple or natural interjections do not admit 
 of grammatical treatment. They are more or less the 
 same in all languages. 
 
 336. Sometimes words or phrases are used elliptically, 
 in an exclamatory way, as interjections : 
 
 1. Such are: ti»el^ ! toe^ ! woe is me I letber ! alas I ©ut ^eil! 
 hail! ©ottlob ! God be praised I itiol^lauf ! cheer up I 33etoal^re ! 
 God forbid! ttieg ! fort ! away ! Ijerein ! come in ! toeiter \ go on! 
 
 2. Here may be mentioned the frequent use of the infinitive 
 and perfect participle in German, instead of^the English impera- 
 tive: (Sinfteigen! eingeftiegen ! (on starting a train, etc.) get in! all 
 aboard! auSfteigen ! auSgeftiegen ! get out ! all out! And the ex- 
 clamatory infinitive: ^d^ bi(i^ berlaffen! unmfiglid^! f forsake 
 you ! impossible ! 
 
 3. Occasionally an interjection is brought into a kind of 
 connection with the structure of the sentence. For instance : 
 D be§ 3;]^oren! oh the fool! 5pfut fiber ben ^etgenl fe on the 
 coward! %&i, ba^ bu ba liegft! Alas ! that thou liest there! 
 
 EXERCISE XXXV. 
 
 I. jjrau (Mrs?) SBraun ^at un§ ju einer ©efeHyd^aft eingelaben, 
 aber toir ^aben \^xi ©inkbung nid^t anne^men fijnnen. 2. ®iefe 
 Tgolbaten l^aben in ber ^nfanterie, unb ntd^t in ber ^atiaKerie gebient. 
 
 3. gd^ tt)iE gerne fontmen, aber mein Sruber !ann nid^t lommen. 
 
 4. ©e^en ©ie je^t nid^t au§, benn e§ regnet. 5. SRein 3lr}t ^at «ttr 
 geraten, mid^ ru^ig ju berl^alten; begl^alb iann id^ ^eute nid^t 
 
176 LESSON XXXV. 
 
 auSgel^en. 6. ®r ift teilS in 3)eutf(^Ianb, teife in granfreid^ erjogen 
 toorben ; beS^alb fj)ri£^t er fotool^I 5Deutf4> toie g^ranjoftfi^ mit gro|er 
 g^ertigfett. 7. @§ regnet ; bei^alb bleibe id^ ju §aufe. 8. 3tl§ mein 
 3)tener in bag 3immer trat, fd^Iief i^ nod^. 9. S^ longer bie 3;age 
 fmb, beftofurjer finb bie 3ldc^te. 10. ^ie toilben ©anfe finb f^toer 
 ju fd^ie^en, tneil fie fc^neH unb fel^r l^o^ fliegen. n. 3« fleifeiger 
 man arbeitet, befto Uid^Ux hjirb bie Strbeit. 12. ©otoo^I nieine 
 gitern al8 aud^ biele meiner beften g^reunbe toaren auf bem Sal^nl^of, 
 al8 ic^ Sjon meiner SReife jurucffam. 13. SnttDeber toerben <Sie balb 
 einen Srief bon mir erl^alten, ober ic^ toerbe jemanben ju 3^"«n 
 fc^i(f«n. 14. 2Ba§rH% W"«H 0«f"'^""- 15- ®«ftem2tbenbful^r 
 id^ bon Sonbon ab, unb l^eute 9la^mittag urn bier U^r bin id^ fd^on 
 in bem fleinen 6elter8, ba§ burd^ fein SJlineral'hjaffer fo beriil^mt ift. 
 16. 2Ba§ 'i)aU i^ nid^t in biefcr furjen ^dt gefe^en ! 17. ©ottlob! 
 enblid^ finb itiir ba, unb hjotten un§ ein toenig auSru^en. 18. 3« 
 fritter, befto beffer. 
 
 I. When I arrived yesterday, it was quite dark. 2. Wait a 
 minute, till I have written my exercise. 3. It is raining, 
 therefore I shall stay quietly at home. 4. After I had taken my 
 ticket, I went into the waiting-room. 5. I sent the porter for 
 a cab, because I have so much baggage that I cannot carry it 
 myself. 6. He speaks as he thinks. 7. After it has lightened, 
 it thunders. 8. He slept, whilst I was reading. 9. It struck 
 twelve, when we arrived at Brandenburg. 10. The sun had set 
 before we arrived at our journey's end. 11. You will find the 
 gentleman either in the dining-room or in the sitting-room. 
 12. He can neither read nor write. 13. We could neither hear 
 nor see. 14. All aboard! the train starts in a moment. 
 
 15. Not only my books, but also my clothes, were burned. 
 
 16. Alas! all that (tool) I had is lost. 17. As he could not 
 come, (fo) he wrote me a long letter. 18. The more diligently 
 I study the German language, the more clearly I see that it is 
 very much (fe^r) like the English [language]. 
 
ORDER OF WORDS. — SUMMARY. 177 
 
 LESSON XXXVI. 
 
 Order of Words. — Summary. 
 
 Some of the rules on the order of words have already been 
 incidentally given (§§ 177, 202). It is now necessary to give a 
 more complete summary of this subject. 
 
 337. The principal point in the construction o£ the German sentence is : 
 
 I. The Position of the Verlb. 
 
 338. There are three forms of verb-position : — 
 
 I. Normal order — ■ the verb follows the subject. 
 
 II. Inverted order — the verb precedes the subject. 
 III. Transposed order — the verb stands at the end. 
 
 The first two of these belong, usually, to independent or principal sen- 
 tences; the last only to dependent or subordinate sentences (clauses). 
 
 Note i. — If we denote the subject by S.; the verb byV.; the adjuncts of the verb by A., 
 the forms will be as follows : — 
 
 I. Normal — N. = 8. V. A. 
 
 II. Inverted— I. = V.S. A. 
 
 III. Transposed — T. = S. A. V. 
 
 Observe that it is the verb that changes its position. Thus the position of 
 the verb indicates the character of the construction. 
 
 ■A. By the verb is meant always the affirming, or finite (^fersonal) verb. This in all com- 
 pound forms C§ 169) is the auxiliary, or inflected word. By the subject is meant not only the 
 nominative noun or pronoun, but the entire subject^ with all its modifiers. By adjunct is 
 meant all the rest of the predicate, except the adjunct which precedes the verb in II. (§ 323). 
 
 1. The Normal Order, 
 
 339. The normal (S. V. A.) is the natural and usual order of the inde- 
 pendent declarative sentence. 
 
 340. None of the adjuncts of the predicate can stand between the subject 
 and the verb (as often in English). Thus : he always wears a black coat, er 
 
 trogt immer einett fd^marjen SRod. (See also § 343). 
 
 Note. — Only seeming exceptions are such words as aber^ however ; boc^, jcbod^, yet; 
 namli^r namely ; Jttjar, indeed, which are really parenthetical. 
 
 341. The infinitive and participle of compound tenses stand at the end, 
 preceded by whatever qualifies them. When both occur, the infinitive stands 
 last (§ 163) — as in many examples already. 
 
178 LESSON XXXVl. 
 
 342. The prefix of a separable verb stands at the end in simple tenses. 
 In compound, it is written in one word before the participle or infinitive 
 (§ 284) — as in many examples already. 
 
 Note. — These three, — the subject, the verb (proper), and the non-personal part of the 
 verb tif any) , are the cardinal points in the order of words. Other words are less rigidly fixed. 
 
 343. {a) The subject itself may be complex — consisting of several words, 
 or including an adjective clause or clauses (§ 348). In all cases the rule 
 stands that the principal verb immediately follows the subject. Thus: 
 gtiebric^ ber ^^eite, Sbnig Don ^Preugen (subject), tuar bcr gro^te gelb^err 
 feincr 3eit. ©in §err, ber einem SDJanne, bem er nidit red)t traute, cine Ouinee 
 gelie^en ^atte (subject), loor (verb) erflaunt ju ftnbeii, etc. 
 
 Note. — Observe that in the latter case the final verb of the dependent adjective clause is 
 brought immediaiely before the principal verb. This position will often, in a complex 
 sentence, usefully show where the dependent construction ends, and the principal sentence is 
 resumed. 
 
 (b) But if the clause modify the predicate, it should not (§ 340) stand 
 between the subject and the verb, as often in English. Thus : T'he Komans, 
 after they had conquered the world, fell into luxury ; Sie 9iomer Berfteletl, nad&« 
 bem fte bie Sffiett evoicrt fatten, in Uptiiglett (not bie 3iotner, nodibem, etc.). 
 
 Note. — This rule is sometimes violated, but not in strict correctness. Rather, to avoid 
 crowding, let the dependent clause precede j as, SRac^bem bie RBmer, etc. . . netfteten fie, 
 etc. (§344). 
 
 For special case of normal order in dependent clause, see § 350, i. 
 
 ii. The Inverted Order. 
 
 344. The inverted order (V. S. A.) is assumed in independent declarative 
 sentences when introduced by any adjunct of the verb: — 
 
 (a) Only one such adjunct may precede the verb; but this may consist of 
 several words, forming, however, logically only one element of the sentence. 
 As : ®amol8 ^alf un« ein greunb au8 unjrcr 9Jot. Un« I)alf bamols ein guter 
 greunb au8 ber SRot. %■&% unferer 9'tot ^alf un8 bamats ein guter greunb. 
 
 (i) A dependent clause preceding the principal, wUl have the value of an 
 introductory adjunct, and cause the inversion of the principal verb. As : 31(8 
 iBir aniamcn, mar e8 fi^on Sag. SOSenn id^ SIteyanber toare, fo ttiirbe ic^ e8 
 annetinten. (§ 331.) 
 
 Note. — Observe that here again, as § 343, the two verbs will be brought together; or, in 
 this case, will be separated only by f (§ 328, note). 
 
 if) For the same reason, expressions like I think, said he, etc., when pre- 
 ceded by any of the words referred to, will be inverted, those phrases being 
 logically the principal sentence, of which the words quoted form the object. 
 As; ®o8, ben!e Idf), ifl meine <(Jfli(!^t (but id^ benfe, bo8 iff, etc.). 
 
ORDER OF WORDS. SUMMARY. 1 79 
 
 (li) Rarely the participle or infinitive of a compound tense, or even the verb 
 itself, may stand first, in case of special emphasis. As: ©efto^eu lt)ai' atte? ; 
 ©c^weigen ioiU ii^ nid^t ; Ermorben laffen fantt er tnid^, itict|t viijjtcn ; f ommt 
 ioi) ba? fcgentis oon oBen ; §ottcn toxx ei ja alte gcprt. 
 
 345. (a) The "pure conjunctions" (ani/, but, or, for, § 326) do not cause 
 inversion. They will, therefore, usually restore the normal order, after a pre- 
 ceding inversion, unless the cause of inversion is repeated. Thus: ®a tam et 
 ju mir, unb id) fragte t{)n fogletii) ; but unb (ogleli!^ fi'flgte \^ i'^n. 
 
 (b) Conjunctive words belonging to the subject alone will not cause in- 
 version; as, 3IU(^ ntein SSvuber irat 3Ugegeit. And sometimes an adverb may 
 be allowed to stand, parenthetically, in the same way; as, greilili^ (indeed), 
 id) lonn eg nic^t fagen. 
 
 346. The inverted is the regular order, without introductory adjunct: 
 
 (a) In direct questions, unless the interrogative word is subject; as, 3ft 
 bet §ert ju §aujc ? SBann toitb ei; ju §oufe fein ? But, SSer ift ber §err? SBer 
 bringt btefe 5Kad|rid^t {normal). 
 
 Note. — Indirect questions are construed like other dependent sentences, § 348. 
 
 ifi) In imperative and optative (wish) sentences ; except, sometimes, in the 
 third person; as, je^'en loir iiitS ; fd^ttieige (bii); Ware eg botti Sag, •would 
 it were day ; gebe ®Ott, or ®ott gebe, God grant, etc. 
 
 (c) Often also in exclamation (§ 344, d); as, t|l boc^ baS SeBeit fc^ltier! 
 
 Hence inversion, without introductory adjunct, indicates one of these forms. 
 
 Note. — Yet sometimes, colloquially, inversion occurs without introductory word, for em- 
 phasis; as, lam ein JSnoDe, for e§ tam — ; eS xaox sanj rujio unb rii^rte fid) ntijt§. (§ 429.) 
 
 For special case of inversion in dependent clause, see § 350, i. 
 
 3. The Xransposed Order. 
 
 347. The transposed order (S. A. V.) is used only in subordinate or de- 
 pendent sentences (clauses). 
 
 Note. — The transposed order can therefore occur only in complex sentences. Simple 
 sentences will be either normal or inverted. 
 
 348. A dependent clause stands to its principal clause in the relation of a 
 noun, or of an adjective, or of an adverb. Hence dependent clauses are 
 called noun clauses, adjective clauses, or adverbial clauses. 
 
 (a) A dependent noun clause is usually introduced by the conjunction ba§, 
 that; as : @r fc^rietl unS, bog et eS t^un roiirbe ; — or, in a dependent question, 
 by oB, whether, if; or Wag, what, or its equivalent (§ 222). As: 2Bir fragteit 
 
 ben SSebienten, ob fein §err ju §aufe mfire ; xi) tougte nii^t, wog er mir fagen 
 
 njoUte. (For exception, see § 350, '\). 
 
l80 LESSON XXXVI. 
 
 (b) A dependent adjective (relative) clause is introduced by a relative pro- 
 noun or its equivalent (§ 237). Example: ®a8 §ou8, wet^cS tioiige SHai)i. 
 abgebronnt ift, ge^brte einem ©d^u^madier ; aUeS, woriiSer id^ xaii) gefreut 
 ^otte, ifi serloren. 
 
 (c) Dependent adverbial clauses are usually introduced by subordinating 
 conjunctions (§ 332), expressing a relation of time, place, cause, manner, pur- 
 pose, condition or concession. Example : @8 Wor nod^ Kog, oIS Vt>ir in bem 
 ©afi^ofc anionien. Slbel roar ein ©c^ofer, tDal)reiib Soiit eiit SlderSmann xoax. 
 (For exception see § 350, 2.) 
 
 Note. — The same sentence may include several dependent clauses. For the effect of a 
 dependent clause preceding the principal, see § 344, h. In other cases, no effect is produced 
 on the order of the principal sentence. 
 
 349. The pure conjunctions, unb, etc. (§ 345) produce no effect on the 
 dependent construction. Thus a series of connected clauses, dependent on the 
 same subordinating word, will continue the transposed order to the end of 
 the series, each dependent verb standing at the end of its own clause. As : 
 Sin olter SKonn, ber in fciner Sugenb nai) Slnierita reifle, ftc^ bovt Berbeiratete 
 unb eiite grofie gatnitic erjog unb al8 Oreis nac^ ©eutfc^lanb juriicffam, ijl 
 neuliii^ ^ier gefforben. 
 
 II. Special Cases in Verb-Position. 
 
 350. The following special cases are of frequent occurrence in dependent 
 clauses : 
 
 1. In a noun clause, if the conjunction bo6, that, is omitted (as often in 
 English), the order will be normal. As : 3c^ gloube, er toirb balb lonimen 
 
 (for bo6 er bolb tointnen roirb). ®er Sebiente jogte, fein §err fei nid^t ju 
 
 §aufe ; the servant said (that) his master was not at home. (§ 467.) 
 
 2. In a conditional (adverb) clause, if the conjunction teienn, if, is omitted, 
 the order will be inverted. As : 3(1 ber §err JU §aufe, \o hjerbe id) i^n balb 
 ie^en (for wenn er ju §oufe ift, etc.). SBareK @ie geflern gelommen, (0 ptten 
 
 @ie un8 JU §aufc getroffen, had you come (for, iffou had come), etc. (§ 470.) 
 This form is especially usual after ol8, for al8 Wenn, asif. As : (Sr t^at, 
 at8 more er Uerriidt, he acted as if he were crazy (for: al8 hjenn er Bcrriictt 
 rodre). 
 
 Note. — But in the adjective clause, the connective {relative) is never omitted (§ 239). 
 
 3. The transposed verb will stand before other verb-forms : — 
 
 (a) When two infinitives stand together, the auxiliary verb will stand 
 immediately before them, the governing infinitive last (see also § 264). As: 
 Scf) t»ei§, bag i^ e6 ntd^t rtetbe t^mt lonnen. SBwm er e8 ptte t^un tiinnen. 
 
III. ORDER OF WORDS NOT VERBS. l8l 
 
 fo ptte er e8 gem get^an, if he could have done it, he would have done it 
 
 gladly. SBenn bu wirfl bettein ge^en miiffen, shall have to go orbegging. 
 
 ifi) The concurrence of ttjerben in two different auxiliary uses will likewise 
 be avoided. As: ^^ betfjjred^e, bag beine ©(^ulbett ttiEvben beja^tt luerbeit 
 (for bE30l)It ttierben tnetben). 
 
 (c) Sometimes also a transposed auxiliary will be inserted before two par- 
 ticiples or a participle and infinitive. As : 3(^ tt)ei§, bag nic^t atte ftnb beffraft 
 
 morben (for bejhaft luotben finb). ©obalb \i) i^n loerbe ge|el)en l^aben. 
 
 4. Often the transposed clause ends in the participle of a compound tense, 
 the auxiliary being omitted, when the meaning is already clear. As ; 9Jaii^= 
 bem er bie Sitte angeprt (^otte), fagte bet Sonig. ©obalb er in bag '^vcamtx 
 eiitgetretEit (War), fing er an ju fpre^en. SttS baS Urteit gef))roci)en toorben (War). 
 
 351. The following cases may also be noticed : — 
 
 I . When the sentence consists of only subject and verb, the normal order 
 (S. V. A.) and the transposed (S. A. V.), will be identical (S. V.). In this 
 case the construction is distinguished only by the connective, or by the 
 context. As: ii^ fann je^t niii^t ffielen, benn {for) \i) arbeite {normal); or, 
 roeil {because) tc^ arbeite {transposed). 9Jur luer eu(^ ci^nlid^ ifl, tierfle^t unb 
 fii^tt (nur ber aHein lonn rid^ten unb beto^nen). 
 
 2. Certain words are used both in demonstrative (independent) and rela- 
 tive (dependent) meaning; such as, ber, he or who ; ba, there, then; or when, 
 as ; inbeffen, meanwhile, or while, etc. In such cases the position of the 
 verb will show the meaning. As : ein SKonn ^otte brei ©b^ne, bie {they) liebten 
 il)n gletd^ — or, bie {them) liebte er gleid|; but, bie (who) l^n gtetd) liebten^ or, 
 bie {whom) er gteiif) liebte. 
 
 3. The use of eS as introductory subject causes inversion of the true or logi; 
 cal subject ; as, e8 ijl ni(^t8 befd^toffen; e8 jogen brei SSnrfdjcn iiber ben Wc\t\.n. 
 
 But without e8, unless mtroductory; as, befd^Ioffcn ifi nid)t8. 
 
 See Synopsis at end of this Lesson. 
 
 III. Order of Words not Verbs. 
 
 Note. — The arrangement of other words is not, generally, so rigidly fixed as the position 
 of the verb, and is more largely influenced by emphasis, etc. The leading rules will here ba 
 given. These may be reserved for later study, or for reference. 
 Adjuncts of tlie Noun. 
 
 352. I. The adjective will usually precede the noun, but may follow for 
 emphasis, or in special phrases. Pronominal precede qualifying adjectives; 
 
 as, ber gute grennb ; ber greunb, bet gnte ; gtiebri^ ber ®toge ; ber §elb, 
 tbet unb treu (see Lesson VIII.). 
 
1 82 LESSON XXXVI. 
 
 2. Adjective phrases with prepositions follow the noun ; as, grotltfurt ant 
 2Kaiii ; ba8 §au8 ouf ber §o^e. 
 
 3. (a) A limiting genitive usually follows the noun ; as, ber Slnfaiig be8 
 ^tiegc8 ; ba8 ®\M beS 2Kenjd^cn. 
 
 (i) But a personal (subjective) genitive will often precede, taking the plage 
 of the article : be8 S5ater8 §au8 ; @d)iUer8 SBerte ; be8 3iingling6 ©titnme. 
 
 (c) This usage is widely extended in poetry, or elevated prose, to geni- 
 tives not personal; as, graiitiei(^8 (Srbe ; in ber Stbenbttjotfen @lut; beS 
 sKeereS SCBaUen ; o^ne ber Sronen Si(i)t. 
 
 Adjuncts of the Adjective (or Participle). 
 
 353. An adjective, or a participle, will be preceded by its adjuncts : — 
 
 1. An adverb: ein {rt)r guter 5Kaun ; an object: feiniirguiibig. But an ob- 
 ject with j)reposition may follow; as, (ei nid)t bo)e ailf nitc^, be not angry with me. 
 
 2. Other dependent words, which, in English, will often require to follow, 
 or to be expressed by an adjective (relative) clause ; as, gricbrld) bcr ©rojjc, 
 Bon jeinem SSoIfe ber „S(lte grife" genannt ; in einem Don meiuem 33oter ncu= 
 \\i) er^oltencn Sriefe, in a letter (which has been) lately received by my father; 
 aiif eine bcr @^te eine8 giirften Witrbige SBeife ; ein iiber 20 gng Ijo^er SBauin. 
 This construction — often extended to great length — requires particular 
 attention ; but is not to be commended for imitation. (See § 483.) 
 
 Adjuncts of the Terh. 
 
 Note. — The infinitives and participles of compound tenses, and the separable prefixes, 
 are, strictly speaking, adjuncts of the verb; but these have been treated elsewhere (§ 341—2). 
 
 1. Objects. 
 
 354. I. Pronoun objects precede noun objects; as, er erjftftlte eg jeinem 
 greunbc ; er ^ot mir ein Sud^ gegeben. 
 
 ■i. The cases stand: i. dative; 2. accusative; 3. genitive. But if the 
 accusative is personal, or a pronoun, it will usually precede the dative ; as, 
 id) ^obe bem ^noben ein i8uc^ gelie^en ; ber S&ater ^at ben @ol)n einer jdjineren 
 ©iinbe bejd)ulbigt. But : mir miiffen ben ffliann feinein @d)i(ffole iiberlaffen ; 
 er l)at eS mir gcfagt. 
 
 3. Objects with prepositions follow simple objects ; as, er jd)i(f te jeincn 
 greunb gn mir ; er jdjrieb mir einen Sricf iiber jeine 8Jei(e. 
 
 4. The reflexive jtd) usually precedes all other pronouns, and personals 
 precede demonstratives ; as, er em^fiel)tt ftd) 3^nen ; er bat ftd) e8 gefoDen 
 laffen, he has put up with it; jogen @ic mir ba8 nii^t. But also e8 fn^ (§ 202,3). 
 
III. ORDER OF WORDS NOT VERBS. 1 83 
 
 5. Especially, in the inverted and in the transposed order, a pronoun 
 object will often precede the subject, unless the latter is a personal pronoun; 
 as, bo reid^te iljm bcr gvembe bie |)anb ; ots i^n ber SSater fo^, weinte er bor 
 greube. Rarely, also, a noun; as, iibtigeitS ge^Brt ®ott meine @ecte. 
 
 With this exception, the order of adjuncts is usually the same in all con- 
 structions. 
 
 3. Adverbs. 
 
 355. I. Adverbs will stand : i. time; i. place; 3. manner. 
 
 2. Adverbs of time usually precede objects, except pronouns ; as, er I)at 
 tnir gejiern einen SSrief gefc^rieben. 
 
 3. Adverbs of place follow simple objects, but precede objects with prepo- 
 sitions ; as, wir tonntett bo8 Sud) ttirgeubs im §auje finben. 
 
 4. Adverbs of manner usually precede, but may follow, objects with pre- 
 positions. — The rules for adverbs apply generally to the corresponding 
 adverb phrases ; but, in all cases, the position may be largely influenced by 
 emphasis. (For nid^t, see § 322, 5). 
 
 J. Of two adverbs of like kind, the more general usually precedes the 
 more specific; as, ^eute frii^ ; morgen um 10 U^r. 
 
 6. (For adverbs modifying adjectives, see § 353.) Generally, an adverb 
 will stand just before any word (not the verb) which it modifies ; as, nur 
 mein ©ruber Voat jugegen ; fount eine ©tunbe war oergangeit. (See § 345 b). 
 
 Prepositions usually precede objects (Exceptions § 280, and Appendix). 
 
 3. Predicates. 
 
 356. A noun or adjective standing as predicate (complement) will .usually 
 follow all other adjuncts; as, SKorgen wirb tt)o^r|(i^eintic^ Wcgen ber §oii&jeit 
 ein geiertag |ein ; Biel 3'i' ""J^ i""^ V^ U^i^ nicf)t mef)r librig ; fte flanb 
 jjloi^ftd) auf ber ©diroette ftiU. 
 
 357- Words, or phrases, which, by idiomatic usage, have come to be re- 
 garded as part of a verb-phrase (§ 379) — including also predicate or factitive 
 objects — will take the same position as a predicate complement. Such are : 
 gjebe |iel)en, to answer; fefl fallen, to hold fast; ftet)en btetben, to stop; ju 
 50littog cffen, to dine, etc., etc.; as. Wit a.%txi. gcjlern bei einem greunbe ju 
 SWittag; ba cr ben aSet6red)er nid^t fejl^alten lonnte, fo fc^Iug er il|n tot. 
 
 4. Tbe Infinitive. 
 
 358. I. For the infinitive in compound tenses, see § 341. 
 
 2. The same position will be held by a simple infinitive (without ju) 
 dependent on the verb; as, id) ttifl ntid^ gerne Ijiet bi8 iibermorgen uet^alten; 
 id^ jagc Stjnen, bog \6\ tnid) l)icr bi8 iibermorgen uer^otten WllL 
 
1 84 LESSON XXXVI. 
 
 3. The same position may be held by an infinitive with JU, dependent on 
 a verb in a simple tense ; as, ii) tounfc^e tnic^ Ifin Bi8 uBermorgen JU tier^al= 
 ten ; id) (age 3^nen, ba6 icf) raid) l)iev 618 iibermorgen jii Ber^ottcn \o&n\i)t ; et 
 fing JU jingen on. 
 
 4. But generally, to avoid too great complexity o£ construction, an 
 infinitive with JU, especially if accompanied by adjuncts o£ its own, will 
 be treated as a distinct clause ; that is, it will stand outside of the limits of 
 the principal construction (§ 342, note), with the infinitive at the end: 
 
 (a) After the non-personal part of a verb, or after a transposed verb : 
 @r fing an, ju fingen ; fogleicfi fing er an, Bon feinem Ungliide ju reben ; ie^ 
 l)abe lange gewiiufci^t, meincnt alten greunbe etneu 33e[u(^ ju tnoi^en ; id) fage 
 S^neu, bag i^ lange geroiiufd)! I)abe, 3^nen einen 53e|ud) ju mo^en; er 
 be^qu))tete, bog er etne SKet^obc le^re, ®olb jU moc^en. 
 
 {6) Or before the main sentence, which it will then invert (§ 344, i) ; as, 
 urn feinen SSater ju fel^cn, ift ber @o^n je^n SKeilen gegongen. 
 
 5. In a series of infinitives, the governing one regularly stands last, 
 reversing the English order. As : S^r ^abt mid) ermorben loffen WoUen, you 
 have sought to have me murdered; er Wirb e8 ni(!^t t^un tonneu, etc. Yet not 
 always if more than two infinitives : aWan Wirb mic^ WoIIen loufen laffen. 
 
 IV. Position of Dependent Clauses. 
 
 359. (o) For the same reason — to avoid too great complexity of con- 
 struction — a dependent clause will often be thrown outside of the usual 
 limits ; as, icb gebe freitBiUig bie ainfprilei^e ouf, n)etd)e Ki) ouf boS S3uc^ ^be ; 
 id) I)obe ben $rei8 ongenommen, Welii^en ber §err mir onbot. 
 
 (/5) Especially, in subordinate sentences, to avoid collision of dependent 
 verbs; as, er icorf il)ni etnen SSeutel ju, inbem er ftd) loegen ber geringcn 
 ®umme entf^ulbigte, bie er ent^ielt. 
 
 (<r) Also in comparison — elliptical: (Sr ^ot me^r gel^ler geutod^t, at8 id) 
 (gemoc^t ^obe). 
 
 360. Generally, it may be remarked, that dependent clauses will occupy 
 their natural position, logically ; but that ambiguity, or excessive involution 
 of structure, must always be avoided. This, however, is in large degree pre- 
 vented by the fi:ee use of the comma (§ 67), as well as by the distinctive 
 position of the verb. Thus German can often sustain periods which would 
 be intolerable in English — a power which, however, may be abused. 
 
 Remark. — The foregoing rules of position are naturally subject to ex- 
 ceptions, depending on emphasis, euphony, or individual style, and especially 
 in poetry, with the freedom of poetic license. Still, they should be thor- 
 
SYNOPSIS OF VERB-POSITION. 1 85 
 
 oaghly mastered and strictly observed by the student, who should be 
 required, whenever possible, to account for exceptions, real or apparent. 
 Once mastered, they become the key to almost all difficulties of construction. 
 
 NoTs. — No special Exercises are here added, because every German sentence is an exer- 
 cise in the order of words. 
 
 Synopsis of Verb-Position. 
 
 The following condensed view may be helpful in remembering the chief- 
 rules of verb-position : 
 
 Principal Sentences. 
 
 When introduced by subject — Normal. 
 
 " not " " " — Inverted- 
 
 Dependent Clauses. 
 When introduced by subordinating word — Transposed. 
 
 Special Cases. 
 
 Principal Sentences. 
 Interrogative, Imperative, Optative sentences — Inverted. 
 
 Dependent Clauses. 
 
 Noun clause — ba^ (that) omitted — Normal. 
 
 Conditional " — Wenit («/) " — Inverted. 
 
 The verb precedes two infinitives. 
 
 Note. — The "pure conjunctions" {flnd, buiy or ^ for) are not included. 
 
 See also Note at end of the Appendix, p. 378. 
 
 It is presumed that at this point — or even earlier — the pupil will 
 begin the reading of an easy German text, outside of the grammar. 
 In the following Lessons, therefore, the German-English Exercises 
 will be omitted. 
 
PART 11. 
 
 DERIVATION AND COMPOSITION. 
 
 Introductory Remark. — The German vocabulary is much more homo 
 geneous than the English. The introduction of foreign elements — mainly 
 French and Latin — from an early date, into the English language, has not 
 only added a large admixture of words not native in origin, but, by supplying 
 foreign terms ready made, it arrested the development of the native speech. 
 Hence the processes of derivation and composition, from native roots, have 
 been mucK more largely extended in German than in English. These pro- 
 cesses are, therefore, in German of much greater practical importance for 
 the acquisition of a vocabulary, and for the exposition of the relation and 
 meaning of words. A brief sketch of the most important classes of deriva- 
 tives and compounds will be given in the following Lessons. 
 
 Note. — Foreign words of course exist largely in German also; but there they are dis- 
 tinctly marked, while in English they are fully assimilated. In this respect, on the other hand, 
 the English vocabulary is more homogeneous than the German. 
 
 LESSON XXXVII. 
 Derivation of Verbs. 
 
 361. Most verbs of the strong conjugation, and many- 
 weak verbs of monosyllabic roots, are primitive verbs. 
 There are many other verbs, obviously derivative, in 
 which the origin and the process of derivation are un- 
 known. 
 
 Almost all derivative verbs are weak. (See § 199.) 
 
 362. (a) An important class of verbs are derived from other 
 verbs by modification or change of root-vowel. The primitive 
 is usually strong and intransitive ; * the derivative is weak and 
 
 * See List of Irregular Verbs. 
 
DERIVATION OF VERBS. 1 87 
 
 transitive. These are known as causative verbs ; as also in 
 English, to fell from to fall; to set from to sit, etc. As : — 
 
 Strong. Weak. 
 
 fol^ren, to go, drive. fU'^rcn, to guide, drive. 
 
 fatten, to fall. ffiUen, to fell. 
 
 itegen, to lie^ te8™f to lay. 
 
 ■ ji^CIt7^o sity^ feljen, to seat, set. 
 
 jpringen, to spring. ffirengen, /o ferj^, Hew up. 
 
 trinlen, to drink. tccinlen, to drench, make drink. 
 
 (V) In some cases there is no change of root-vowel, but only 
 a change from strong to weak inflection ; as : — 
 Strong. Weak. 
 
 fii^weltcn, to swell. fc^njetten, to puff up. 
 
 ertoWen, to go out. auglofr^en, to put out (lights), 
 
 erfd^reden, to befigktened. erjcfjredcn, to frighten. 
 
 (c) Sometimes other variations of meaning are marked by 
 the change from strong to weak inflection ; as :* — 
 Strong. Weak. 
 
 BeWegen, to OTow^ (figuratively), «W«i;^. Behiegen, to move (literally), 
 fi^offen, to create. fi^affenf '■" <io. 
 
 363. Some verbs are derived from other verbs by hardening 
 or strengthening the final consonant of the root, usually with 
 intensive meaning : — 
 
 biegen (strong), to bend. (ftd^) bflcfen, to bow, stoop down. 
 
 prcn, to hear. ]^orcf)en, to listen, hearken. 
 
 fd^narren, to creak, snarl. fd^nardien, to snore. 
 
 ft^mtngen (str.), to swing. fd^wenfen, to wave. 
 
 364. The verbal suffixes -ein and -em frequently convey the 
 sense of diminution or contempt — sometimes of repetition : — 
 
 floppen, to flap. fto)))jern, to rattle. 
 
 ftingen (str.), to sound, ring. Kingetn, to ring the bell. 
 
 lad^en, to laugh. tod^eln, to smile. 
 
 f(i^Iafen (str.>> to sleep. fd^lafem, to feel drowsy. 
 
 Note. — In both the preceding cases, there is also, usually, vowel 
 modification or change. 
 
l88 LESSON XXXVII. 
 
 365. Verbs in -ieren (-iren) are properly derivatives of 
 French verbs in -er and —ir. They retain their foreign accent, 
 and omit ge- in the perfect participle. (See § 2 15, a.) As ; — 
 
 fallieren, to fail. regieren, to reign. 
 
 tnarjt^ieren, to march. fiubieren, to study. 
 
 and, by analogy with these, from German stems, bud^ftafeieren, 
 to spell; ftoljieren, l^antieren, etc. 
 
 366. Many verbs are derived from nouns, with or without 
 root-vowel modification : — 
 
 bo8 Sitter, the age. altem, to grow aid, age. 
 
 bie garBe, the color. farben, to dye. 
 
 ber *^5flug, the plough. ^JftuBfiV to plough. 
 
 ber Sottel, the saddle. fattcln, to saddle. 
 
 bog Ww,t\,the seal. Itegeln, »erftegeln, to seal. 
 
 ber Evoft, the comfort. trojittl, to comfort 
 
 367. Other verbs are derived from adjectives, usually with 
 root-vowel modification : — • 
 
 rot, red. rbtcn, to redden. 
 
 jlort, strong. flfirfen, to strengthen. 
 
 tot, dead. tijten, to kill. 
 
 roiirbig, worthy. tniirbigen,' to hold worthy. 
 
 rein(ig), dean. reinigen, to clean. 
 
 \twim., pious. frbmmetn, to affect piety {§ 364). 
 
 {a) Or, with loss of e, from adjectives in -en ; as : — 
 
 offen, open. offnen, to open. 
 
 trod en, dry. trodnen, to dry. 
 
 (b) And from comparatives ; as : — 
 minbcr, less. minbcrn, to lessen. 
 
 nfi^er, nearer. tlii^ern, to bring nearer, 
 
 368. A few verbs are derived from adverbs ; as : — 
 
 Oliver, outside. onfeeni, to utter. 
 
 empor, up. ein^joren, to arouse. 
 
 All these classes of derivative verbs are weak. 
 
DERIVATION OF VERBS. 1 89 
 
 Remark. — As is seen from the foregoing examples, the 
 modification of the root-vowel (Umlaut), though by no means 
 constant, is a common process in derivation. As a rule, it qjay 
 be stated that the modified vowels do not occur in primitive 
 roots', but arise by the processes of derivation or of inflection. 
 Hence, in dealing with derivatives that present a modified 
 vowel, the Umlaut must be eliminated to find the root. See 
 examples in fpregoing lists and hereafter. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVII. 
 
 I. Who has put -out the light ? 2. No one has put -out the 
 light; it has gone -out. 3. The woodman has felled this tree. 
 4. A child has (is) fallen into the river. 5. My dictionary lies 
 on the table. 6. The boy jumped over the. ditch. 7. The old 
 tower was blown up. 8. She has sealed the letter. 9. He 
 rang the bell several times. 10. We will seat ourselves upon 
 this bench. 11. The old man sat on this chair. 12. The 
 sinking sun reddened, the clouds. 13. The king held -him - 
 worthy of the highest honors. 14. The peasant ploughed the 
 field; 15.. The autumn dyes the leaves yellow. 16. He has 
 aged very much. 17!^ strong man can easily walk himself 
 tired in a ploughed field. 18. He stooped - down and picked - 
 up the key. 19. The tailor has cleaned and dried the clothes. 
 20. (The) Queen Victoria has already reigned fifty years. 21. 
 The smiling girl rang the bell, and opened the door. 22. His 
 strong faith in (ju) God comforted and strengthened his last 
 hours. 23. The children listened and smiled, while the father 
 snored aloud. 24. The noble sentiment which the king then 
 uttered, has not lessened the devotion of his faithful people. 
 
I go LESSON XXXVIII. 
 
 LESSON XXXVIII. 
 
 Composition of Verbs. — Inseparable. 
 
 Compotind verbs have been already considered, so far 
 as was necessary to explain peculiarities of conjugation. 
 (Less. XXVIII., etc.) Their number is almost unlimited. 
 
 369. Very important is the large number of verbs com- 
 pounded with the inseparable prefixes be-, ent- (imp-), er- 
 t)er-, ger-, ge-. These prefixes, though once probably 
 independent words, now occur only in composition. They 
 modify variously the meaning of the primitive. 
 
 Note. — Strictly speaking, these prefixes, being always unaccented, and 
 having now no independent existence, form rather derivatives than com- 
 pounds. But, in accordance with usage, the verbs formed with them from 
 verbs are given as compounds ; those formed from other than verb-roots as 
 derivatives. As will be seen hereafter, they are largely used also in forming 
 other derivatives besides verbs. 
 
 370. (a) Se- (related to 6ei and to the English^ ^^-, as: to 
 take, to betake; to wail, to bewail) changes an intransitive into 
 a transitive verb. Prefixed to a transitive verb, it gives to it a 
 direction towards another object. Sometimes it is only inten- 
 sive. Examples: — 
 
 iauen, to build. Befiaueit, to build upon, to cultivate. 
 
 gtaben, to dig. ' begrabcn, to bury. 
 greifcn, to seize. begrcifen, to comprehend. 
 
 fatten, to hold. be^alten, to keep. 
 
 fii^retben, to write. befd^reiben, to describe. 
 
 ft^en, to sit. beft^ett, to possess. 
 
 (b) 93e- is also used for deriving verbs from nouns and 
 adjectives, generally with active sense : — 
 
 ber greunb, the friend. befreunben, to befriend. 
 
 ber ®eiji, the spirit. begeiftetn, to inspire. 
 
COMPOSITION OF VERBS. INSEPARABLE. IQI 
 
 ftn,/ree. Bcfreien, to liberate. 
 
 f anf t, gentle. 6e Jfinf t{ig) en, /i7 appease. 
 
 touB, deaf. detciuben, to deafen. 
 
 371. (ff) ®nt- (related to ant- in 3lnttoort) chiefly denotes 
 privation or separation : — 
 
 loffen, to let. enttaffeit, to dismiss. 
 
 touf en, to run. entlauf en, to escape. 
 
 jie^en, to draw. entjie^en, to withdmia. 
 
 (p) And sometimes origin or beginning, as : — 
 
 Brcnnen, to burn. entBrennen, to take fire. 
 
 lie^en, to stand. entjie^ett, to originate. 
 
 (<r) @nt- is also used in forming derivative verbs, as : — 
 
 bie ^oft, the strength. entfrSften, to weaken. 
 
 bie @(i^u(b, the guilt. entfii^utbigen, te excuse. 
 
 baS 35ol!, the people. entBolIertl, to depopulate. 
 
 Note. — The primitive sense of ent- (ant-) is clearly seen in a few verbs, 
 as entgeltcn, to pay back, entfpred^en, to correspond. In some adverbs, ent is 
 from in; as, entgegen, against, entgwei, in two. 
 
 (d) Beiore f, -nt is assimilated to -mp in the three verbs : 
 emjjfel^Ien, to recommend; em^jfdngen, to receive; emjjfinben, to 
 feel. 
 
 372. («) 6r- (related to the prefix ur- [§ 387, 4] and pro- 
 bably to the preposition ou§) generally expresses accomplish- 
 ment or acquisition by means of the action expressed by the 
 simple verb ; or growing, passing into a condition : — 
 
 gotten, to hold. erBtllten, to obtain, receive. 
 
 jagen, to hunt. crjagen, to obtain by hunting. 
 
 laufen, to buy. erfaufen, to obtain by purchase. 
 
 xaaiiStn, to grow. erttiod^fen, to grow up. 
 
 (p") And in derivative verbs, as : — 
 
 \n\il, fresh. erftifdien, to refresh. 
 
 f lar, clear. ertWren, to explain. 
 
 tot, red. erroten, to blush. 
 
 tpeitec, wider. erweitern, to extend. 
 
192 LESSON XXXVIII. 
 
 373. (a) 3Ser-, originally the same as bor- (English for- in 
 forgive, for{e)go, etc.), denotes removal, turning away ; often 
 with the idea of perversion or loss ; sometimes only the accom- 
 plishment of an action or result : — 
 
 Bietm, to bid. uerbieten, to forbid. 
 
 blii^en, to bloom. t)etbluf)en, to fade. 
 
 brennen, to burn. oerbrennen, /o bum up. 
 
 f ii^ren, to guide. Berfii^ren, to lead astray, seduce. 
 
 fennen, to know. uertenncn, to mistake. 
 
 fpielcn, to play. berf<)ielen, to lose by playing. 
 
 (b) And in derivatives ; as : — 
 
 baS ©olb, the gold. uergolben, to gild. 
 
 bet @tein, the stone. oerfleineni, to petrify. 
 
 oft, old. Deralten, to become antiquated, 
 
 inag, young. • t)tqfin%ttl, to make young. 
 
 groSer, greater. Uergrofeern, to enlarge. 
 
 fc^oner, more beautiful. Uerfd^blieril, to embellish. 
 
 374. (a) 3er- expresses destruction, dissolution : — 
 
 brec^en, to break. yttbu&ita, to break to pieces. 
 
 foBen, to fall. gerfaHen, to crumble to pieces. 
 
 reigen, to tear. jerreigen, to tear to pieces. 
 
 treten, to tread. jertreten, to crush, to trample. 
 
 (i) Aiid in a few derivatives ; as : — 
 
 ba8 %lei]i), jSesh. . jerfleifr^en, to lacerate. 
 
 bie ©lieber, the limbs. jergtiebern, to dismember. 
 
 375- ('') ®2- (probably the same prefix as the augment used 
 with the past participle, but of doubtful origin), has in some 
 cases no perceptible influence on the meaning of a verb; 
 as, braud^en or gebraud^en, to use. But in other cases various 
 meanings, mostly intensive ; as : — 
 
 benfen, to think. gebenfen, to remember. 
 
 fallen, to fall. gefallen, to please. 
 
 ptcn, to hear, ge^iicen, to belong. 
 
 ^or(^en, to listen. ge^on^en, to obey. 
 
COMPOSITION OF VERBS. INSEPARABLE. 1 93 
 
 loben, to praise. gelobett, to promise. 
 
 jle^en, to stand. gefte^en, to confess. See § 278, note. 
 
 (S) Many participial adjectives are derived by means of the pre- 
 fix ge- from nouns without corresponding verb (as Eng. gifted, etc.) : 
 
 tie SSIume, the flower. Qebliimt, flowery. 
 
 bit geber, the feather. qe^tbext, feat/iered. 
 
 ber glitgel, the wing. gejKiigelt, winged. 
 
 ber ©tern, the star. geftitnt, starry. 
 
 376. W\%- (§ 288, ^.) has the same force as the English prefix 
 mis : gliiefen, to succeed; tnifiglUdEen, to succeed ill; brauc|»en, to 
 use ; ttiipraud^en, to abuse, misuse. 
 
 Remark. — i. In some cases the compounds are in use, 
 where the primitives do not occur ; as : — 
 
 -bareii. gebSren, to iear {a child). 
 
 -feljlcn. ernpfel)Ien, to recommend. 
 
 -ginneit. beginnen, to begin. 
 
 -geffeii. bergeffen, to forget. 
 
 -tiirtn, rare. ertureit, to choose. 
 
 -lieren. Berlieren, to lose. 
 
 -Ungen. geltngen, to succeed. 
 
 ntiglingen, to fail, 
 
 — and some others. See alphabetical list. 
 
 2. These prefixes are widely used with all kinds of verbs, 
 but especially with the primitive roots of the strong conjugation. 
 A great variety of compounds are thus often formed from a 
 single verb, with widely various meanings ; as : — 
 
 ®t%«a.,togo; ieQtijtn, to celeirate ; entQeijtn, to escape ; ex^tiim, to happen ; 
 
 f\i^ crge^en, to move about for pleasure ; bergEtjen, to pass away ; jerge^en, to 
 pass away entirely, to melt. 
 
 ©d^logen, to strike; befc^tagen, to fasten on by striking, to stud, to shoe a 
 horse; ft(f( einet ©tlli^e entf(!^(ogeil, to cast off n. matter ; erj^lagen, to slay ; 
 Ber((i)logen, to drive out of one's course ; jer|li)Iagen, to knock to pieces. 
 
 ©te^en, to stand; befle^ett, to persist, insist; etttfte^en, to arise, to come 
 into existence; erjle^cn, to arise, to buy at an auction; »erjief)en, to undc}- 
 stattd ; geftel)en, to confess. 
 
194 LESSON XXXVIII. 
 
 Other examples are : — 
 
 beje^en, to inspect. entfjircd^cn, to answer (dat.). 
 
 betrogcn, to amount to. entne^tnen, to infer. 
 
 pd^ betragen, to behave. jt(^ ergeben, to surrender. 
 
 pc^ benei|men, to conduct one's self. erloffen, to remit. 
 
 befprec^cn, to talk of. Betgeben, to forgive, (dat.). 
 
 entfd^eiben, to decide. ft(^ oertaufen, to lose one's way. 
 ft^ Betttogen, to agree. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVIII. 
 
 I. I have lost my way. 2. We have inspected the new church. 
 
 3. They have ascended the highest mountains of Switzerland. 
 
 4. The town surrendered to the enemy. 5. All good children, 
 who agree with each - other, and conduct themselves well, shall 
 have (befotntnen) a reward. 6. The bill amounts -to twenty 
 francs. 7. The thief has {is) escaped. 8. They behaved thent- 
 selves quietly. 9. We shall decide the matter before we part. 
 10. He has lost his money in playing. 11. The wicked boy 
 has torn his book to pieces. 12. The teacher has pardoned 
 the naughty boy, and remitted the punishment. 13. The 
 drunken porter did not agree with the other servants, and he 
 was dismissed from (au§ bent) service. 14. I shall keep these 
 flowers until they fade. 15. The old castle has (is) crumbled 
 to pieces. 16. We were as if (tote) petrified. 17. A glass of 
 water suffices to refresh me. 18. He spoke winged words. 
 
 19. This promising writer has not answered our expectations. 
 
 20. He has talked-of things that no one can understand. 
 
 21. I infer from (au§) your letter that your ship was driven 
 upon a deserted island. 22. We can seize with the hand many 
 things which we cannot comprehend. 23 The old soldier 
 showed his torn clothes and his lacerated limbs. 24. That 
 (S)a§) is the curse of (the) kings, that they, divided, tear the 
 world to pieces. 
 
COMPOSITION OF VERBS. — SEPARABLE. I95 
 
 LESSON XXXIX. 
 Composition of Verbs.— Continued. 
 
 Separable Compounds. 
 
 377. The separable prefixes (Lesson XXIX) form loose 
 compounds, which have no exact analogy in English. 
 They are, also, practically unlimited in number. 
 
 (a) In the separable compounds, the meaning of the prefix 
 is often clearly seen in the compound ; as, auffte^en, to stand up, 
 rise; einlaffen, to let in, admit; abtoenben, to turn away, avert; 
 mitge^en, to go with, or along, etc. 
 
 (^) In many cases, however, the meaning is not so obvious, 
 the compound having often acquired a distinct secondary or 
 figurative use ; as, auff alien, to strike {the attention); einfaCen, 
 to occur (Jo the mind); mittl^eilen, to communicate; borgel^en, to 
 happen; jubringen, to pass {time); auSjie^en, to pull off (clothing) ; 
 fid^ auSjiel^en, to undress, etc. 
 
 (c) In many such cases, the literal meaning will be expressed 
 by the prefixes compounded with l^er, hither; l^in, thither; as, 
 ^erauSjie^en, to draw out; ^imm^atim, to /all into ; l^erborgel^en, 
 to go forth, etc. (§ 289.) 
 
 § 378. For the diiferent sense of certain prefixes as separable 
 and as inseparable, see §§ 287 — 8. 
 
 ^^ Remark. — The so-called separable prefixes are usually adverbs (§ 447,3) 
 which, by habit of use, have come to be written in one word with those vero- 
 forms that usually stand last — the infin., the parts., and the transposed verb ; 
 and which elsewhere occupy the emphatic position of a verb-modifier at the 
 end. As the verb is named from its infinitive, they are habitually called pre- 
 fixes; and hence the terms separable prefixes, separable compounds, etc. 
 The intimate relation to the verb is shown by the accent — which is, more- 
 over, always retained by the prefix, even when separated. 
 
1 96 LESSON XXXIX. 
 
 Special Forms. 
 
 I. Separable. 
 
 379. (a) After the analogy of the separable compounds, are 
 formed many verbs compounded with nouns or adjectives ; as : 
 i^auSl^alten, to keep house; teilne^tnen, to participate, to sympathize ; 
 ftattfinben, V(7 take place; freifjsred^en, to acquit; gleid^fommen, to 
 equal. 
 
 (b) These follow in all respects the accent, conjugation, and 
 construction of the separable compounds ; as, participle : ftatt= 
 gefunben, freigef^jrod^en ; infin. : ftattjuftnben, freijufjired^en ; or with 
 prefix at end, as : ber SRid^ter f)3rac^ i^n Son aHer ©d^ulb frei ; bie 
 SSerlobung finbet morgen ftatt, etc. 
 
 Note. — These are, however, often written as separate words, as @tatt 
 ftuben, Xti\ nj^raen, frei fprec^en, etc. Analogous to these are other verb 
 phrases which are never written together as one word, but are construed as 
 compounds. As: SRebe fte^en, to answer ; ju 5!Rittag effeii, to dine, etc. 
 (See § 3S7.) 
 
 {c) Many participial adjectives, without corresponding verbs, 
 are formed on this principle. Thus: friebebringenb, bringing 
 peace ; l^a(§brec|enb, neck-breaking; aUtoiffenb, all-knowing; 6oc^= 
 gee^rt, highly honored; btutbefledEt, stained with blood. These 
 are called incomplete compounds. 
 
 2. Inseparable. 
 
 380. (a) With these compounds must not be confounded 
 the small number of verbs derived'from compound nouns, such 
 as : frtil()ftu(f en, to breakfast; ratfd^Iagen, to deliberate; argtoo^nen, 
 to suspect; l^anbl^aben, to handle; h)ettcifern, to emulate; which 
 are derived from ba§ fjru^ftiitf, the breakfast; ber SRatfci^lag, 
 the advice; bet 3lrgtool^n, the suspicion ; bie ^anbl^abe, the handle; 
 ber SBetteifer, emulation; etc. These are conjugated and con- 
 strued like simple verbs ; as, p. p. gefrti^ftiidEt ; infin., ju frii^= 
 [tiiden. 
 
VERB-COMPOUNDS SPECIAL FORMS. 1 97 
 
 (b) Like these are a few verb-compounds, which are also 
 treated as simple verbs ; as : h)ei8|ageTi, to prophesy ; lufttoanbeln, 
 to walk for pleasure ; rec|tfertigen, to justify ; toillfa|rm, to com- 
 ply; Kebfofen, to caress. Past, geliefeJoft; infin., ju UeMofen, etc. 
 
 Note. — These, however, like the preceding class, are more properly 
 derivatives than compounds. They are all weak, even when f ormed_ from 
 strong verbs ; ^anbl)abte, vatfd^Iagte, luillfa^vte, etc. And in both classes 
 the principal accent is usually on the first component. 
 
 3. Mixed Compounds. 
 
 381. {a) A few inseparable compounds take also a separable 
 prefix; as, anerfennen, to acknowledge; x^ erfenne an; anju= 
 eriennen ; but anerlannt, without ge- in participle. (See § 289, 2.) 
 
 (1^) A few verbs which seem to take an inseparable before a 
 separable prefix are derivatives, as in §380 above; as, bero&s 
 fd^euen, from the noun 3t6fd^eu, etc, 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIX. 
 I. The accused was acquitted and immediately liberated. 
 2. He was accused of having {to have) stolen a watch. 3. 
 Waiter, bring me [some] tea, bread and butter, and two eggs ; 
 I wish to. breakfast. 4. We shall go into the garden ; will you 
 go with [us] ? 5. Where is the book which I brought with [me] 
 yesterday from the library? 6. Your brother took it with 
 [him]. 7. Your trousers are torn ; the tailor must mend them. 
 8. I shall tell the tailor to measure me for (tnir anjumeffen) a 
 new pair. 9. What o'clock is it ? 10. My watch is not wound 
 up; I have forgotten to wind it up. 11. The thief has run 
 away. 12. Had I not foretold it ? 13. We have spent a large 
 sum ; I acknowledge our improvidence. 14. He has invited us 
 to dinner. 15. The messenger brought the letter back. 16. At 
 what time does the concert begin? 17. It begins at eight 
 o'clock. 18. Porter, carry my portmanteau up. 19. He shall 
 carry it up immediately. 20. As (ba) it did not occur to him 
 
igS LESSON XL. 
 
 how near to the edge of the stream he was, (fo) he suddenly 
 fell in. 21. The parade will take place at lo o'clock; we 
 thought it had {subj.) already taken place. 22. Please (Sitte) 
 shut the door and open the windows. 23. This writer has 
 translated the greatest part of Schiller's works. 24. He un- 
 dressed himself hastily, sprang into the water, and drew the 
 sinking boy out (^erau§) . 
 
 LESSON XL. 
 Derivation of Nouns. 
 
 Nouns Derived from Verbs. — 1. Without Suffix. 
 
 382. Some nouns are simply the stems of verbs — 
 usually of strong verbs — sometimes an earlier form of 
 such stems. Such nouns are nearly all masculine : — 
 
 ber gaU (foUen), the fall. ber ©c^eiti (fdieinen), the semblance. 
 
 bet ®ang (ge^en), the walk, gait. bev ©i^log (fd^Iagen), the blow. 
 
 bos ®rab (groben), the grave. ber @i^ (ji<5en), the seat. 
 
 bet Sauf (laufen), the course, run. ber ©tanb (fle^ep), the position. 
 
 ber 9{at (raten), the advice. ber ©treit (jlreiten), the contest. 
 
 ber SRuf (rufen), the call, reputation. baS 0|)fer (o^jfetn), the sacrifice. 
 
 383. Many nouns are related to strong verbs by a 
 change of root-vowel (3t6Iaut) — sometimes also by modi- 
 fication of the final consonant of the root. In some cases 
 more than one such noun is formed from the same root. 
 Such nouns are also usually of the masculine gender : — 
 
 ber S3onb (binben), the volume. ber ©taub ((iieben), ttie dust. 
 
 bos SSanb (binben), the ribbon. ber £ran!, ber Srunf (trinlen), the drink. 
 
 ber S3unb (binben), the union. bet 'Stitt (treten), the step. 
 
 ber Slang (Hingen), the sound. bet Kto^if (ttiefen), the drip. 
 
 ber @(^u6 ({(i^iegen), the shot. bet 2Bud^8 (Woc^fen), the growth. 
 
 bet ©tltUI^ i^^xti^txi), proverb. bet 3U8 {3W^Wt)> tl" draft, train, feature. . 
 
DERIVATION OF NOUNS. 1 99 
 
 Note. — In the foregoing cases the nouns are, doubtless, equally primi- 
 tive with the verbs, or rather, both are derived from a common root. It is 
 usual, however, to speak of such roots as verbal roots, and hence to count 
 the nouns as derivative. 
 
 2. Derivatives with Suffix. 
 
 384. Many nouns are derived from verbs — mostly 
 strong verbs — by change of the root-vowel (3t6Iaut) — 
 sometimes also with modification of the final consonant — 
 and the addition of sufSxes, which variously modify the 
 meaning of the word. 
 
 1. The suffixes -b, -be, -t, -ft, and frequently -e, form nouns, 
 mostly abstract in meaning, and usually feminine : — 
 
 bet Sranb (brennen), the burning. bie Sunbe (lenncn), the news. 
 
 bie Su(J)t (Biegen), the bay. bie jfunji (Wnnen), the art. 
 
 bie ®obe (geben), the gift. bie ©d^rift (fdireiben), the ■writing. 
 
 bie ®rube (graben), the pit. bie ©(jrai^e (ftjred^en), the speech. 
 
 2. The suffix -er (English -er) is used to form nouns denoting 
 an agent or instrument. They are all masculine : — 
 
 ber SSder (baden), the baker. ber ©c^neibet (((^neiben), the tailor. 
 
 ber Solirer (bo^ren), the gimlet. ber ©c^nitter (fii)neiben), the reaper. 
 
 bet aieiter (relten), the rider. bet Efinjet (tanjen), the dancer. 
 
 bet ©iinget (ftngen), the singer. bet '^t\%tx (jeigert), the hand of a clock. 
 
 Note the irregular n in SJebnet (tebetl), the speaker. 
 
 3. The suffix -el (English -el, -le) is used to form nouns 
 denoting an instrument. Nouns in -el are masculine with rare 
 exception. A few are neuter diminutives : — 
 
 bet SJedel (beden), the ewer. bet SBiitfel (metfen), the die (pi. dice). 
 
 "Sitx gtiiget (ffiegen), the wing. ber 3«Bri (Jte^en), the bridle. 
 
 ber ©c^tuffel (fd^ttegen), the key. bo8 SBitnbet (blnbeit), the bundle. 
 
 4. -nig (related to the English -ness) is used to form abstract 
 nouns from verbs. Nouns in -ni§ are, to a great extent, neuter, 
 but some are feminine : — 
 
200 LESSON XL. 
 
 Bie SScbrongnlS (bringen), the tribu- bie ^enntnis (fcnnen), the knowledge. 
 
 lation. ba8 ®ejianbni8 f^^t^i^^m), the confession. 
 
 bie SrtaubniS (etianben), the per- bo8 SSer^ottniS (Ber^olten), the relation, 
 mission. bo9 3'"9"i* (jSUB^n), the testimonial. 
 
 5. -ung (related to the English verbal-noun ending -ing) is 
 used for forming a large number of nouns from verbs, most of 
 which are abstracts. All of these are of the feminine gender: — 
 
 bie HuSjiellung (ou8fieUen), the ex- bie Erftnbung (erfinbeit), the invention. 
 
 hibition. bie (Srjie^ung (erjie^en), the education. 
 
 bie S3emcrlung (bemer!en), the obser-. bie ©teHung (fletlen), the position. 
 
 vation. bie SSetbinbung (oerbinben), the con- 
 
 bie S5eh)egung (bewegen), the motion. nection. 
 
 bie 3eiii)tiiinB (geit^nen), the drawing. 
 
 6. (a) The suffix -en forms a number of masculine deriva- 
 tives, some of which are also written without -n (see § 99) : — 
 
 ber Siffeu (beifien), the bit. . ber ®ebonte[n] (benten), the thought. 
 
 ber ^raben (graben), the ditch. ber ®taube[n] (glouben), the faith. 
 
 (jb) -en is also the ending of infinitives (except § 214, fein, 
 tl^un) . Infinitives may be used as nouns, and are then neuter ; 
 as, ba§ Steifen, travelling; ba§ Singen, singing, etc. Most nouns 
 in -en, not infinitives, are masculine ; a few are neuter. (§ 75.) 
 
 7. A small number of nouns are derived from verbs by the 
 suffix -fal or -fel. They are of the neuter gender, with the 
 exceptions given in, the following examples : — 
 
 bo8 Sabjat (toben), the comfort. bie ©rougfol (bringen), the oppression. 
 
 baa @if)idial (f(^icfen), the fate. bie 5Kii^fal (mii^en), the trouble. 
 
 ba« aiatjel (roten), the riddle. bie Stubfol (ttuben), the tribulation. 
 
 ba8 Uberbteibjel (bleiben), the remnant. 
 
 8. The suffixes -ling and -et' are rarely used for forming 
 derivatives from verbs. They are mostly used for deriving 
 nouns from adjectives and other nouns. (Less. XLI.) 
 
 (a) -ling (English -ling) forms a few masculines : — 
 
 ber Se^rliiig (te^reu), the apprentice, ber ginbling (finben), the foundling. 
 
DERIVATION OF NOUNS. 201 
 
 (d) -ei (French -I'e; for accent, see § 51) forms a few 
 feminine abstracts (§ 386, 3.) : — 
 
 bie paubetei (plaubern), tAe chit- bie @^met(J^etei (fd^meici^eln), the flat- 
 chat, tery. 
 
 EXERCISE XL. 
 
 I. He killed two flies with one blow. 2. He awoke from his 
 (au§ bem) sleep with a scream. 3. What can I do ? I must 
 bear this blow of fate. 4. Horses and riders kept step (©d^ritt) 
 with the music. 5. He fell into the pit which he had dug for 
 others. 6. We saw a drawing of the new invention at the exhi- 
 bition. 7. The deeds of this general will live in the memory of 
 the people. 8. A short sleep will refresh you moire than food or 
 drink. 9. The education of this boy has been neglected. 10. 
 The testimonials of this clerk are very good. 11. This pro- 
 fessor teaches not only the German language, but he teaches 
 also (the) singing and (the) dancing {ittfin.'). 12. It is a riddle 
 to me, how he has learned all these arts. 13. The course of 
 this river is from north to south. 14. What you tell me is (a) 
 flattery. 15. Your clerk wrote [to] me that my letters had (were) 
 not yet arrived. 16. The matter had entirely vanished from my 
 memory. 17. With the permission of the judge I visited the 
 prisoner in his prison. 18. Talking and laughing (infin.) are 
 forbidden in (the) school. 19. The apprentice has received 
 (the) permission to send his work to the exhibition. 20. The 
 drawing of the features in this picture is very good'; but the 
 expression of the face is not so easy to hit (treffett). 21. The 
 knowledge of the fine arts is an important part of (the) edu- 
 cation. 22. The art of (the) swimming is easy to learn and of 
 (tion) highest value. 23. Two volumes of Schiller's Works are 
 in this bundle. 24. Speech is older than writing. 
 
202 LESSON XLI. 
 
 LESSON XLI. 
 Derivation of Xouns.— Continued. 
 
 JTouNS Derived from Adjectives or Nouns. 
 
 385. {a} It has been seen (§ 140) that adjectives may be 
 used as nouns, retaining their declension as adjectives. 
 
 {b) More rarely the root of the adjective is used without 
 addition, as a neuter noun ; as, ba§ ©run ber fjelber, tke verdure 
 of the fields ; etoa§ Stot auf ben Saden, some red on the cheeks; 
 but ettoa§ Sloteg, something red. 
 
 386.. Many nouns are derived from adjectives, or from 
 other nouns, by means of suffixes : 
 
 1. -e forms feminine abstracts from adjectives, modifying the 
 root-vowel : — 
 
 bie SBreite (Brelt), the breadth. tie §o^e (^oc^), the height. 
 
 bie Orijfie (grog), the greatness. bic Songe (long), the length. 
 
 bie ©iite (gut), the goodness. bie ©tSrfe (|iorf), the strength. 
 
 2. -er (§ 384, 2) forms, from nouns, masculine names of 
 agents, and other appellatives, usually modifying the root- 
 vowel :' — 
 
 ber ©artner (Oarten), the gardener, ber ^Patifer (^oti8), the Parisian. 
 ber 5Kbrber (5Worb), the murderer. bet Sd^ffieijer (©(i^njeig), the Swiss. 
 ber ©c^ofer (Sd^af), the shepherd. ber SBitWer (SBitme), the widower. 
 
 A few have irregular n, as ©lotfner (®IO(fe), etc. (See § 384, 2.) 
 
 3. -ei'(§ 384, 8) forms feminine abstracts or collectives, from 
 nouns — chiefly nouns in -er. Thus arises, also, a secondary 
 suffix -erei^ of like meaning : — 
 
 bie atbtei (Slbt), the abbacy. bie SReiterei (SReiter), the cavalry. 
 
 bie ®ru(f erei (©ruder), the printing- bie OuSlevei (Ouat), the torment. 
 
 office. bie ©KaBetei (SltoBe), the slavery. 
 bie gHi^eret (gi|(]^er), the fishery. 
 
DERIVATION OF NOUjJS. — CONTINUED. 203 
 
 4. (a) -l^eit (related to English -head, -hood) forms feminine 
 abstracts from nouns — more rarely from adjectives : — 
 
 bit ®Ottl)eit (®Ott), the Godhead. bie gvei^eit (,\xi\), freedom. 
 
 bie Sinb^eit (Sinb), childhood. bie @d)on^cit (Won), beauty. 
 
 Note. — Stems in -^ drop one ^; as, §ot|eit, SRo^eit, etc. 
 
 (p') -!eit (related to -tjett) forms like feminine abstracts from 
 adjectives — often with the ending -ig : — 
 
 bie Sitterfeit (bitter), bitterness. bie Meiniglett (f(ein), the trifle. 
 
 bie gitelteit (eitet), vanity. bie ©iigigteit (fiig), sweetness. 
 
 Note. feit is formed from old -ic (-ig § 395) and -^eit. It is thus used 
 
 with adjectives only — mostly those ending in -et, -er, -bar, -ig, -Hc^, -jam. 
 
 5. -in forms feminines from masculine nouns, usually modi- 
 fying the root-vowel (see § 95) : — 
 
 bie ®rafin (®VOf), the countess. bie Sbd^in (ffoii^), the woman-cook. 
 
 bie §irtin (§itt), the shepherdess. bie Sottlin (SblBC), the lioness. 
 
 6. -letn (akin to English -ling'), and -d^en (akin to English 
 -kin), form neuter diminutives from nouns, usually modifying the 
 root-vowel — often with sense of affection or of contempt : — 
 
 bos 33aura(!^en (SSaum), the little tree. ba8 SKabc^en (SKogb), the girl. 
 baS ^riiulein (^rou), the Miss. ba8 ffiannc^en (3)lon:t), the mannikin. 
 
 bo8 Sird^lein (Sirc^e), the little church. bo8 ©b^nleiu ( So^n), the little son. 
 Note. — With leiii, in -I stems, one t is dropped ; as, SBeutelein, etc. 
 
 7. -ling (akin to -letn, -ling) forms a few personal masculines 
 from adjectives, or nouns — as from verbs (§ 384, 8) : — 
 
 bcr gliil^tling (^tui^t), the fugitive. ber So^rling (3of)r), the yearling. 
 
 ber ®iinftling (®unft), the favorite, ber Siingling (jung), the youth. 
 
 8. -niS (384, 4) — used chiefly with verbs — forms a few 
 abstracts from adjectives : — 
 
 bo8 ©e^eimitis (ge^eim), the secret, bie gittftcvnia (jtnfter), the darkness. 
 
 ba8 ®Iei(i^ni9 (gleid^), the parable. bie SBilbnia (milb), the wilderness. 
 
 9. -f^aft (English -scape, -ship) forms feminine abstracts or 
 collectives : — 
 
204 LESSON XLI. 
 
 (a) From a few adjectives or participles : — 
 
 bie ©efangenjc^oft (p. p. gefangen), tie ®emeinf(i)oft (gemein), He commit 
 the imprisonment. nity. 
 
 (b) Usually from nouns : — 
 
 bie S)ienerf d|aft, the body of servants, bie gcinbfd^aft (5 einb), enmity. 
 bie ©orffdftaft (®orf), the village- bie Jteunbjc^aft (%Xt\m't>), friendship, 
 community. bie Sanb?(^Oft (?anb), the landscape. 
 
 10. -turn (old spelling -tl^um, English -dom) forms from, 
 nouns, and from a few adjectives, collectives or abstracts — all 
 neuters, except ber 3«tum, the error, ber Sleid^tum, riches : — 
 
 bo8 dlirijlcntum, Christianity. bo8 giirjlentum, the principality. 
 
 bo8 (Sigentutn (eigen), the property. baS ^bnigtum, the kingship. 
 
 A few other noun-suffixes are of isolated occurrence ; as, ber 
 ^ran-id^, the crane; ber ©nte-rid^, the drake; bie §eim-at, the 
 home, etc. For-tel, see § 311. 
 
 Nouns Formed by Prefixes.. 
 
 3^7. Some nouns are derived by means of prefixes : — 
 
 I. \@e- (the same as the unaccented verb-prefix, § 375) forms 
 chiefly collectives — sometimes intensives — most of which are 
 neuteri : — 
 
 (a) Usually from nouns : — 
 
 baS ©ebirge (®etg), the mountain- baS Oeftiigel (^(iigel), the poultry. 
 
 range. bie ©ebriiber (pi.), the brothers. 
 
 baS ®ebiifc^ (33u[li)), the bushes. bie Oeft^toifier (pi.), brothers and sis- 
 
 bag ©elDOlt (SBoIIe), the clouds, welkin. ters. 
 
 {b) Some from verbs : — 
 ba8 OcBet (Bcten), the prayer. ber ©efS^rte (fa^ren), the companion. 
 
 \)i\%%<Xa.vX\!&'Oii'!i),tlieringingofbells. ber ®e^ii(fe (fjelfen), the assistant. 
 
 ba8®eJ)3ra(^(jprec^eii),M^««w7-OTftV«. bie ®ebutb (oulbeii), the patience. 
 
 Note. — These derivatives — besides great variety of meaning — present 
 Also various vowel-changes, besides umlaut. Some have also a suffix, 
 usually -e. Before 1, n, ®e- is sometimes contracted, as : ®(aube, @Iieb, 
 
 ^itflbc. 
 
DERIVATION OF NOUNS. CONTINUED. 205 
 
 2. Tli^-' (here always accented) is the same as the verb- 
 prefix mi|- (§ 376) : — 
 
 ber SOtiggriff, tAe mistake. bie aKiffet^at,,?/?:? misdeed. 
 
 bie 2Ri6flUnft, the disfavor. 
 
 Note. — Many other nouns, apparently derived by means of verb-prefixes 
 — separable or inseparable — are really formed (as § 382 — 3) from the com- 
 pound verbs; as, ber Slitfc^lag, from aitfdjlogen; berSSerrat, from uerraten ; 
 ba8 ®ebiet, from gebieteti ; ber SMiprauc^, from miprauc^en, etc. (See note, 
 §383-). 
 
 3. Un- (see §51) has the same force as the English prefix 
 un- (Latin in-^ : — 
 
 ber UnbanI, the unthankfulness. ber Unftnit, the nonsense. 
 
 ba8 Unred^t, the wrong (unright). bie Unfter6li(|!eit, the immortality. 
 
 4. The prefix ur- (see § 51), akin to the unaccented et- 
 (§ 372), expresses origin : — 
 
 bag Urbilb, the prototype. bie Ur|ac^e, the cause. 
 
 ber UrgueU, the fountain-head. bie UrWelt, the primitive world. 
 
 5. @rj- (see § 51) is the same as the English arch— : — 
 
 ber (Srj^erjog, the archduke. ber Erjenget, the archangel. 
 
 Note. — Nouns formed with nti^-, un-, ur-, erj-, have the same gender 
 as the primitive nouns. 
 
 6. 3lnt-, akin to the unaccented ent- forms bie Slnttoort, the 
 answer (see § 122), ba§ 3tntU|, the face. 
 
 EXERCISE XLl. 
 I. "Will you measure the height of this tower? 2. We have 
 measured the length and breadth of this field. 3. The author 
 has sent his book to the printing-office. 4. This mountain-range 
 is covered with bushes. 5. He read us the parable of (Bon) the 
 good shepherd. 6. Who converted Germany from (the) heathen- 
 ism to Christianity ? 7. It was the Englishman Boniface. 8. 
 The Swiss died for their liberty, g. The king and the princes 
 were received with (a) ringing of bells. 10. The brothers 
 Grimm have written a very learned German grammar. 11. He 
 losthis way in the wilderness of the mountains. 12. TJie en- 
 
206 LESSON XLII. 
 
 mity of the count was the cause of his misfortune. 13. It is a 
 folly to plough the fields in winter. 14. The conversation of 
 the stranger was tiresome. 15. You should not talk such non- 
 sense. 16. On the summit (§51^e) of the mountain stands an 
 image of the archangel Michael. 17. The poorest village-com- 
 munities are found along the Rhine (Jind themselves). 18. The 
 years of our childhood are the happiest years of our life. 19. It 
 is nonsense to think of it. 20. You are wrong, sir, to give 
 me such an (a such) answer. 21. The countess considered it 
 {held it for) a folly to travel with so large [a] body of servants. 
 22. The length or (the) shortness of the days and of the nights 
 depends (abl^angen) on (ijon) the nearness or the distance of the 
 sun. 23. The conversation of my companion concerned (Betrefs 
 fen) the vanity of (the) human wishes and the immortality of 
 the soul. 24. The archduke and the archbishop entered (eins 
 treten) together into the little church. 
 
 LESSON XLII. 
 Composition of Nouns. 
 
 388. Compound nouns usually consist of two compo- 
 nents. The last is regularly a noun ; the first may be 
 noun, verb, adjective, adverb or preposition. 
 
 {a) The first component takes the principal accent; the last 
 has a distinct secondary accent. (See § 49.) 
 
 (b) The gender and declension of the corripound follow the 
 last component. For exceptions, see § 122. To these may be 
 added : — 
 
 iai ©egenteit (ber %t\\), the opposite (but also, bo8 %d\). 
 
 ber SKittrood) (bie SBoc^c), Wednesday (like other names of days, § 123) 
 
 bie O^nntac^t (pi. O^nmoe^ten), the swoon. 
 
 ble ajottmoc^t (pi. SSoUmodlten), the authority, 
 — jind perhaps a few others. 
 
COMPOSITION OF NOUNS. 20/ 
 
 Note. — The last part of some compound nouns has been gradually 
 shortened into a mere sufifix; as, baS ®rittel, the third part ; bo8 3Siertet, the 
 fourth part; where -tet was originally -teil. (See §311.) It is also probable 
 that the common suffixes of noun derivation (Less. XLI.) were originally 
 distinct words. 
 
 389. The relation between the components will be 
 various. Generally the first will in some way limit, or de- 
 termine, the second, and be syntactically dependent upon 
 it. , Hence this is called the determining component. The 
 grammatical relation is sometimes indicated by the form * ; 
 but is usually only implied by simple juxtaposition :^ 
 
 1. {a) Simple juxtaposition of two nouns : — 
 
 tie SBaumltiolIe, the cotton. bie ©i^ulflube, the school-room. 
 
 ber SSriefttoger, the letter-carrier. bo8 SBeinglaS, the wine-glass. 
 
 ber 6l6autn, the olive tree. ber SBetterlia^n, the weather-cock. 
 
 (J)) Rarely, with a connecting vowel : — 
 
 baa Sogemer!, the day's work. bie iSabetar, the water-cure. 
 
 2. (a) Frequently the first component takes the termination 
 of the genitive case : — 
 
 bo8 ©liidSrab, the wheel of fortune. bie SBiUenSfrei^eit, the freedom of will. 
 ba8 KageSU^t, the light of day. ba8 SBirtg^auS, the inn. 
 
 (J)) Sometimes a false, or apparent, genitive is exhibited, or 
 an earlier inflection is retained, even with feminine nouns : — ■ 
 ber®eburt8tog(bie@eBurt),</4^&Wy5- ber ©onnenfd^eiit (bie ©onne), the sun- 
 day, . shine. 
 
 3. The first component is sometimes in the plural : — 
 
 ia% SSitberbud^, the picture-book. baa Sinbermarii)en, the fairy-tale for 
 
 ber SSlumeilforb, the flower-basket. children. 
 
 baS SBorterbud^, the dictionary. 
 
 4. When a compound is formed of a verb and a noun, the 
 root of the verb is simply prefixed. Occasionally the vowel e is 
 inserted : — 
 
 * These might properly be distinguished as grammatical compounds- 
 
208 LESSON XLII. 
 
 ber go^r)3lon, the time-table. bo8 3ieift)ferb, the saddle-horse. 
 
 ber Soufburfd^e, the errand-boy. bie ©djreibfeber, the writing-pen. 
 
 baS 8e|ebud^, the reading-book. ber 3EiB?fin9"^» the forefinger. 
 
 5. {a) A compound of an adjective and a noun is formed by 
 prefixing the adjective-root : — 
 
 ber Sbelftein, the gem. bie ^urjmeile, the pastime. 
 
 ber Olei^mut, the equanimity. ber SSoUmonb, the full moon. 
 
 ber OrogBciter, the grandfather. ber 2Bei6born, ^/5^ hawthorn. 
 
 (S) Rarely with inflection of the adjective : — 
 
 ber §o]^epriefier, the high-priest. bie Songeroeile, the tedium. 
 
 6. A few words are compounds of nouns and adverbs or 
 prepositions, among them some grammatical terms : — 
 
 bie 3(u6eiljelte, the outside. ber 5tnlaut, the first sound of a word. 
 
 ba8 Slu8(onb, the exterior, foreign ber Stllaut, the sound in the middle of 
 
 parts. a word. 
 
 bo8 Sntanb, theinterior, home-country, ber ?l(u8laut, the last sound of a word. 
 
 ber 3J?ittnenj(i^, the fellow-creature. ber 3lbtaut, the change of sound. 
 
 baS SSorre(i^t, the privilege. ber Umlaut, the modification of sound. 
 
 7. A few compounds are really complete phrases : — 
 
 bag @tettbi(i)ein, the rendezvous. 
 
 ba8 SSerglgtneinniii^t, the forget-me-not. 
 
 390. Frequently the compenents of a compound noun — one 
 or both — will themselves be compound. In such cases the 
 relation of the component elements must be borne in mind. 
 The principal accent falls on the accented syllable of the first 
 chief component; the secondary accent on the accented syl- 
 lable of the second : — 
 
 bie geu'erBerjt(!^evmig9gefe'Ilf(^aft, the fire-insurance company. 
 ber Oeneral'lieu^tenant, the lieutenant-general. 
 
 ber §anb1d^uf)ma'(^er, the glove-maker. 
 
 bie 9ied)':iUng8a6'toge, the rendering of accounts. 
 
 Note. — In some cases, a different relation, and hence a difference of 
 meaning, will be indicated by a change of accent. As ; — 
 
COMPOSITION OF NOUNS. 209 
 
 ber Cber^C^tftte^rer, the principal teacher. 
 
 bet 0'bei;(d^uf=le'^rer, the high-school teacher, etc. 
 
 391. (a) There are also many occasional compounds — 
 chiefly nouns — made only for the nonce — such as will not 
 be found in any dictionary. In such cases, the meaning will 
 be known from the components. 
 
 {U) Compound nouns are sometimes extended to absurd 
 length ; as, Dberjjolijet'geric^tgljrdyibe'nt ; ©taaf §fd^u(bentilgung8= 
 loinmiffio^n§6ureau. But such forms are chiefly official or tech- 
 nical, and are not to be approved or imitated.* (See § 69.) 
 
 392. When the same component is common to two or more 
 compounds in succession, it will be written once only, its rela- 
 tion to the others being indicated by the hyphen. This will 
 occur not only in nouns, but also in verbs and adjectives ; as, 
 ^eft=: unb ©onntage, holidays and Sundays; ^JJorb; unb ©tib= 
 beutfd^Ianb, North and South Germany ; 5Rad^mittag§ fiel^t man 
 bie iOienfc^en auf= unb abftromcn, streaming up and down ; 3Sofal= 
 lange unb =Itirje, etc. 
 
 EXERCISE XLII. 
 
 I. Have you read the fairy-tales - for - children of the 
 brothers Grimm ? 2. Hang up your coat in the wardrobe. 3. 
 He has sent the errand-boy to (um — ju) fetch a time-table of 
 the Rhenish Railway. 4. The full -moon shone on (acc^ the 
 castle on (i/aA) the hill. 5. Put the wine-glasses upon the 
 
 • But Brandt, from whom we take these examples — and to whose 
 German Grammar we owe many obligations — adds in a note (§ 521) : "The 
 capacity of German for forming such compounds is generally exaggerated, 
 and that of English generally underrated. We might just as well write 
 them so in 'En^ish^ Fireinsurancecompany'soffice ; and we should have the 
 same compound." This remark is particularly suggestive, as showing how 
 much, in our view of language, depends upon the eye. English, with its 
 syntax of word-position, is full of such actual, but unwritten, compounds. 
 
2IO LESSON XLIII. 
 
 table. 6. He has lived long in foreign -parts. 7. We ought 
 not to sell the bear's skin before we have killed the bear. 8. 
 The grandfather has given the children a beautiful picture- 
 book. 9. Where shall I find the dictionary? 10. You will find 
 it in the sehool-room. 11. The weather-cock on the church- 
 tower shows whence (ioo^er) the wind blows. 12. Apple-trees 
 and cherry-trees grow in Germany ; olive-trees in southern 
 countries. 13. The hawthorn blossoms in (the) spring. 14. 
 He brought these gems with [him] from foreign parts. 15. The 
 little girl carried a flower-basket. 16. When a misfortune 
 befalls our fellowmen, we should assist them. 17. The letter- 
 carrier will bring the letters at five o'clock. 18. I have neither 
 gold nor precious stones. 19. The student should distinguish 
 (the) vowel-modification from (the) vowel-change, in the study 
 of (the) German grammar. 20. (The) Wednesday has its 
 German name because this day is in the middle of -the week. 
 
 21. The evening-sun-shine shone on the gilded weather-cock. 
 
 22. The freedom of will is the greatest privilege of humanity. 
 
 23. The forget-me-not is one of the loveliest flowers. 24. The 
 life and fire-insurance companies of London are the richest in 
 the world. 
 
 LESSON XLIII. 
 Derivation of Adjectives. 
 
 393. Some adjectives whose derivation cannot be traced, 
 may be regarded as primitives. Such are : gut, grfin, long, 
 alt, jung, etc. 
 
 394. Some adjectives are derived, like nouns (§ 382), 
 from verb-roots by vowel-change (3t6Iaut) without suffix. 
 Such are: Hard (from btinfeit, to glitter), bright; treu (from 
 trauett, to trust), faithful; gtatt (from gleiten), smooth, 
 slippery, etc. (See § 383, note.) 
 
DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 21! 
 
 395- But by far the greater number of adjectives are 
 derived by means of suffixes : 
 
 1. -bar (akin to the old bciren, to bear — as in \x\ii&i'&iOX, fruit- 
 ful) usually forms adjectives from verbs, with passive sense of 
 English -able, -ible : — 
 
 benfbar, imaginable. ftd^tbor, ■visible. 
 
 cgbar, eatable. triltfbar, drinkable. 
 
 2. -en, -em form adjectives denoting material, the latter with 
 vowel-modification, as if formed from a plural in -er : — 
 
 %tifixxa, golden. ptjcm (§otg), wooden. 
 
 filbem, siher{n). ftfi^Iem (@taf)l), of steel. 
 
 irben (@rbe), earthen. lietaent, af stone. 
 
 3. -er, added to names of places (§ 143) is properly a noun- 
 suffix (probably genitive plural), and forms indeclinable adjec- 
 tives ; as, ®r(anger S3ter, Serltner SfBurft, etc. 
 
 4. -^aft (perhaps akin to ^aBert, have) forms a few adjec- 
 tives : — 
 
 bog^aft, malicious. fcE|uto]^aft, like a school-boy. 
 
 tranl^aft, sickly. tugenb^aft, virtuous. 
 
 Note. — To -^oft is sometimes added -ig ; as, teib^oftig, bodily. 
 
 5. -ig, the most usual adjective suffix (English -y), forms 
 derivatives — usually with vowel-modification : — 
 
 (a) From nouns : — 
 
 giiniiig ffSiVi-a^), favorable. tnalbig (SBalb), woody. 
 
 mad^tig (SKad^t), mighty. jorntg (Boi^n)/ angry. 
 
 Note. — Unaccented e may be dropped in -I or -r stems ; as, bu(f (e)Iig, 
 lt)ciff(e)rig (§ 139). 
 
 (b) From compound stems (§ 400, 9) : — 
 
 breitfd^Uttrtg, broad-shouldered. Iof)IIobfig, bald-headed. 
 breiedEig, triangular. t)in^&%iQ, four-footed. 
 
 (c) From adjectives, and adjective pronouns : — 
 meinig, mine. giitig, kind. 
 
 beinig, thine, etc. (§ 194). jenig (jen-er), that (§ 208). 
 
 einige (ein), pi. some. boUig, complete. 
 
212 LESSON XLIIL 
 
 (d) From verbs, rarely : — 
 
 tXQitbiQ, protiuciive. gefadig, obliging. 
 
 (e) From adverbs and prepositions : — 
 
 biilft'lCiQ, previous. l^euttg, of to-day. 
 
 ba'malig, of that time. l^ieftg (t|ier), ofoxfiom here. 
 
 bortig, of ox from there. \t%\% present. 
 
 z\!!tXMX\a„ former. ior\%, former . 
 
 iibrig (iiber), retnaining. 
 
 6. -ici^t is an occasionaHorm, instead of -ig: — 
 
 jlcintd^t, stony. tiioivi)^, foolish. 
 
 7. The enlarged suffix -felig arose from the suffix -ig in con- 
 nection with the noun-suffix -f al (see § 384, 7) : — 
 
 mulifetta (flyju^fal), toilsome. feinbfelig (geinb), hostile. 
 triibfelig (Sriibfal), woefitl. gludjeUg (®Iii(f), happy, blessed. 
 
 8. (a) The suffix -ifd^ (English -ish) denotes relating to, 
 similar to, belonging to : — 
 
 berlinifl^, of Berlin. ^immlifc^, heavenly. 
 
 englifi^, English. irbif(ft (©ibe), earthly. 
 
 fpouifd), Spanish. ))OlitH(!^, political. 
 
 (6) Sometimes, as in English, with a depreciatory sense : — 
 tinbifc^, childish. toeibifd^, womanish. 
 
 9. -lei (§ 306), added to numerals, probably represents a 
 feminine noun in the genitive singular : — 
 
 einerlci, of one kind. man^erlei, of many kinds. 
 
 10. -lid^ (English -like, -ly), usually with umlaut — next to 
 -ig the most frequent suffix — denotes resemblance, character — 
 sometimes also with diminutive sense : 
 
 (fl) From nouns or adjectives : — 
 
 oltUl^, oldish. rotlid^, reddish. 
 
 f itrfllid^, princely. fiiSHl^, sweetish. 
 
 mannlid^, manly. XaviiXxis^, feminine, womanly. 
 
DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. 213 
 
 (p) Also sometimes from verbs; as, fd^abltd^, harmful; nti^s 
 lid^, useful; but more usually with passive sense oi possibility : — 
 
 begreiffid^, conceivable. tnoglitl), possible. 
 
 unbeflretflic^, inconceivable. unmbgtidft, impossible. 
 
 II. -fam (English -some) forms derivatives of both active and 
 passive sense : — 
 
 arbeitfam, industrious. tenfjont, manageable. 
 
 futc^tfam, timid. fparjam, saving. 
 
 396. The prefixes 6e-, ge-, mt^-, un- ur- and erj- are 
 used for forming derivative adjectives, their force being 
 the same as in derivative verbs and nouns. — Examples : 
 berett, ready; getpt^, certain; vax^'Otxaima,i, displeased; un= 
 gtiidfic^, unhappy; uratt, very old; ersbumnt, exceedingly 
 stupid. (See § 387.) 
 
 -^ — Derivation of Adverbs. 
 
 397. As already stated (§ 314) almost any qualifying 
 adjective may be used as an adverb without change of 
 form ; as, er fd^retbt gut unb fc^nell, he writes well and 
 rapidly. Hence there is no general adverb suffix like 
 
 English -ly. (For the distinction, see § 449, 2.) 
 
 398. A few adverbs are, however, formed by suffixes : 
 (a) The adjective suffix -lt(| forms a number of derivatives 
 
 which are used only — or chiefly — as adverbs: — 
 
 bitterlit^, bitterly. neuttd^, recently. 
 
 freitidt), indeed. fd^Werlic^, hardly. 
 
 giinjlid^, entirely. Wal^rlid^, truly. 
 
 (S) Some of these insert an irregular t : — 
 
 eigeutlic^, properly. l)offentlid^, as is hoped. 
 
 nomentUc^, by name. h)iffentli(^, wilfully. 
 
 399. Other adverb-endings are originally oblique cases 
 of nouns or adjectives. Such are : 
 
214 LESSON XLIIL 
 
 1. (a) Genitives : -lings : — 
 
 blinblingS, blindly. rSttUngg, baekwartU. 
 
 (J>) -h)art§ (^-wards') : — 
 
 - auf Warts, upwards. fubWSrtS, southward. 
 
 (/) -toeife (-wise); with genitive adjective prefix (properly 
 compounds): — 
 
 jufaUigertneifc, accidentally. mi^\i!itX.Xo€\\t, possibly. 
 
 — and sometimes with uninflected prefix : — 
 
 \ivA'tOt\\t, piecemeal. rudWeife, by starts. 
 
 (d) Often the genitive-ending -§, from nouns : — 
 
 abenbS, in the evening. anfangS, in the beginning, 
 
 morgenS, in the morning. ivXi, partly. 
 
 (e) Also from adjectives or participles : — 
 
 linfd, left (hand^. eileilbe, in haste. 
 
 red^tS, right " Bergebena, in vain. 
 
 {/) Sometimes -en§. as a kind of double adjective-geni 
 tive : — 
 
 tl^twi, firstly. ^oc^flenS, at most. 
 
 jtoeitene, secondly. fpfitefienS, at latest. 
 
 2. (a) Other adverbs are old datives : — 
 mitten, in the midst. unten, below. 
 
 (^) Or a dative with prepositions : — 
 
 anjlatt, instead (of). 3UfoIge> in consequence {of). 
 
 3. Others are old accusatives : — 
 
 l^cim, home. (eill)mal, {time) once. 
 
 4. Other adverbs are from pronominal roots : 
 
 («) Demonstrative : — 
 
 ba, then, there. bonn, then, 
 
 (b) Interrogative and relative : — 
 
 wo, where. Wanit, when. 
 
DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. 21$ 
 
 EXERCISE XLIII. 
 
 I. (The) to-day's political news is not favorable. 2. We 
 await his speedy return. 3. The elderly gentleman bought 
 several English and Spanish books. 4. The water of the 
 Rhine is of a greenish color. 5. The princes of that time 
 lived in houses which were not better than the cottages of the 
 laborers of the present day. 6. A virtuous man does not fear 
 the mightiest king. 7. Horses, sheep, cats, and dogs are four- 
 footed animals. 8. The old general wore a three-cornered hat. 
 9. Expect me at latest before midnight. 10. We returned at 
 10 o'clock in the evening. 11. The letter was accidentally 
 burned-up. 12. Berlin sausage is very famous. 13. Turn 
 (reflex?) first to the right, and then southwards around the 
 comer. 14. We could not find anything eatable or drinkable 
 in this inn. 15. A broad-shouldered hotel-porter carried my 
 portmanteau upstairs. 16. We thanked the prince in the most 
 humble manner. 17. Will you change your foolish and childish 
 conduct, and become virtuous, industrious and saving? i8. He 
 is an unmanageable, malicious boy. 19. I am glad to hear 
 that the news from there is favorable. 20. The timid girl 
 feared her angry mother. 21. After I have read the former 
 chapter once more, I will read the remaining ' chapters also. 
 22. Instead of the old wooden bridge, a new stone [one] will 
 be built over {acc^ this river. 23. He has made the assertion 
 on -oath and in -writing. 24. The news has {is) recently 
 arrived that the city is entirely destroyed. 
 
2l6 LESSON XLIV. 
 
 LESSON XLIV. 
 
 Composition of Adjectives. 
 
 400. In compound adjectives, the last component will ba 
 an adjective (or participle).* The first, which will alwayj 
 lake the chief accent, may be : 
 
 1. An adjective : — 
 
 bunf elgriin, dark-green. tauBflunim, deaf and duml. 
 
 ^ellblou, light-hue. tobtrant, dangerously ill. 
 
 2. An adverb or preposition : — 
 
 eingeboren, native. er[lgeboren,_/i?-j^i5or«. 
 
 iro^lgeboten, well-born. 
 
 3. A noun — sometimes with inflection : — 
 
 groSgriin, green as grass. Sollreic^, populous. 
 
 ^itnmclblau, sky-blue. gebantentei^, thoughtful. 
 
 feetran!, seasick. liebeSfron!, lovesick. 
 
 4. Especially frequent are the compounds with Io§ and boU^ 
 which have become almost mere suffixes : — 
 
 ^xmitnioi, joyless. aVii'atniii'OciS., expressive. 
 
 fopfloS, headless. ^offnungSBoU, hopeful. 
 
 5. Of the same sort are derivatives with the suffixes -orttg 
 (from atrt, kind) ; fad^ (§ 306, 3), or faltig (from jjalt, fold) ; 
 reic^ (rich) ; ma|ig (from 3Kaa^, measure), and others : — 
 
 grofiorttg, grand. einfattig, simple. 
 
 breifoc^, threefold. tioltteid), /»/«^i«Mv 
 
 gefe^mdfjig, lawful (see Remark p. 218). 
 
 6. Composition of adjectives with roots of verbs is rare : — 
 mcrtmiirbig, remarkable. glaubmiirbig, credible. 
 
 * A special exception is jufrie'beil, lit at peace. 
 
COMPOSITION OF ADVERBS. 217 
 
 7. More frequent is the composition of an adjective with the 
 infinitive of verbs used substantively in the genitive : — 
 
 IsBenSfro^, enjoying life, happy. fterben6!rant, dangerously ill. 
 
 liebensmiirbig, amiable. tobelnawevt, blamable. 
 
 8. Many compound adjectives are made up of a participle 
 and a dependent word, especially in poetry : — 
 
 l)eilbriugcnb, salutary. gottergebcn, resigned to God's will. 
 
 unl)cit[t)raiienb, mischievous. R)ei^ge(t)o[)nt, tenderly reared. 
 
 9. Some adjectives, apparently compounds, are derivatives 
 of compound nouns ; as, bteredig, square, etc. (see § 395, 5). 
 Others are formed by analogy to these, where the compound 
 noun does not exist : — 
 
 eutiiugig, one-eyed. ^OC^{)erjig, magnanimous. 
 
 10. Compound adjectives are rarely extended beyonvd two 
 components, and then only apparently (see § 390) ; as : — 
 
 ^OC^ac^tungSBoU, most respectfully. ^oc^ttio^tgeboren, highrwell-born. 
 
 Composition of Adverbs. 
 
 401. Compound adverbs are usually only adjectives used 
 as adverbs (§ 314). 
 
 I. In other cases they are grammatical phrases, with more or 
 less complete inflection. 
 
 (a) In such cases, where the first component is limiting, or 
 " determining," or an inflected word, it takes the accent : — 
 
 bem'lIOC^, accordingly. XatVB.'vc\'ix\&,for my part. 
 
 e^ematS, formerly. meift'etltEilS, for the most part. 
 
 (p) The second member takes the accent when it is dependent 
 on the first, or when a preposition : — 
 
 iibfr^autjf , especially. JUWeU'ett, at times. 
 
 Bor^aitb'en, at hand. bergab', down hill. 
 
 jule^f , at last. berg on', up hill. 
 
2l8 LESSON XLIV. 
 
 2. Many compound adverbs are made up of prepositions and 
 other indeclinable particles, especially ba (bar), there; ^va,here; 
 too (toot), where; |er, hither; l^in, thither: — 
 
 babei', therewith. l^illju', besides. 
 
 bo^erl, therefore. »orou«', before (place). 
 
 borin', therein. Borfib'er, /arf, over. 
 
 ^iermit', herewith. ttJobei', wherewith, 
 
 iinbot, forth; Border', before, ago (time). IDOrill', wherein. 
 
 (a) The accent is usually on the last component ; but some- 
 times varies with meaning or emphasis : — 
 
 bor'um or barum'; roav'uTn or warum'. 
 
 (f) So in a few other words; as, ein'mol, once, one time; ein= 
 mat', once upon a time, only, etc. 
 
 3. Some of the compound adverbs are also used as adverbial 
 conjunctions (see § 328) ; and some are used as separable verb- 
 prefixes (see § 289). 
 
 402. {a) Compound conjunctions are such as: aIlo,ben(n)i 
 ttocE), jebod§, fobalb, fotool)!, 'obgleidEi, ohwof)!, etc. 
 
 ip) Compound prepositions such as : Stnnen, gegeniifier, 
 juhjtber, etc. (See § 280.') 
 
 Remark. — i. It is not always easy to draw the line between composition 
 and derivation, or between derivation and inflection. These terms are at 
 best relative, and indicate only different stages of the same process. 
 Habitual juxtaposition leads to composition. So, habitual composition, 
 with loss of accent and, generally, abbreviation of form, changes a com- 
 ponent to an affix ; and, finally, when the distinct form or meaning is lost 
 with habitual use, the most constant of these are called inflections. Thus : 
 Go'd-li'ke, Go' d-like, godly ; ho'pe-ft^ll, ho'peful; pla'nt-di'd, pldnted,fA.c. 
 
 It is probable that all the affixes of derivation, as well as of inflection, 
 were once independent words — whose original form and meaning have, 
 however, in many cases been lost. Much depends — as has been seen 
 (§ 39'> foot-note) — on the habit of writing words; still more, however, on 
 the accent, which marks the relation of parts, and' thus the essential unity of 
 the word. In German, compounds are freely written together ; in English, 
 many words written apart are, in fact, true compounds; as, at all, in vain, etc. 
 
COMPOSITION OF ADVERBS. 2I9 
 
 2. Let it be remembered that the view here given of Derivation and 
 Composition does not pretend to be a full treatment of these subjects, but 
 only such as may usefully guide the earliest attention of the student. Their 
 more complete study belongs to a later stage of progress ; meantime, the 
 student may be directed to such help as may be found in Kluge's Etymo- 
 logisches Worterbuch; or in the more elaborate grammars, such as Whitney's 
 or Brandt's — both of which have given useful help in the revision of these 
 Lessons. 
 
 EXERCISE XLIV. 
 
 I. She wore a sky-blue dress. 2. Deaf people often become 
 deaf-and-dumb. 3. He is just gone by. 4. After I have vifalked 
 five hours up-hill, I am tired - to - death. 5. The physician is 
 very hopeful ; the patient can by no means be dangerously ill. 
 6. The bishop preached with an expressive voice. 7. I have 
 ordered our dinner beforehand. 8. Yesterday was one of the 
 most remarkable days of my life. 9. I am sea-sick even during 
 the shortest passage. 10. I am sorry to hear that. 11. It is 
 an illness which is soon over. 12. Yes, but it is most dis- 
 agreeable. 13. The weather is unfortunately to-day very un- 
 favorable. 14. He has missed the mark. 15. Have you seen 
 him pass by? (§ 265). 16. He went by an hour ago. 17. The war 
 is unhappily not yet over ; but at last we can foresee the end of 
 it. 18. Only once have I received a letter from him ; he was 
 then quite hopeless. 19. That magnanimous action of the 
 amiable young queen delighted her faithful people. 20. Allow 
 us one prayer, said the geese, that (bamit) we die not in our 
 sins ; afterwards we will stand in a row, that you may pick out 
 the fattest. 21. Go straight on (t)orau§); you will soon see a 
 four-cornered square (^Ia|) ; then turn to the right. 22. It is 
 easier to go down -hill than up— hill. 23. For my part, I have 
 nothing against it. 24. There (e§) was once a king, whose first- 
 born soij lay dangerously -ill. 
 
220 LESSON XLV. 
 
 LESSON XLV. 
 
 Relation of German and English. — Summary. 
 
 In every department of the grammar thus far — even without 
 suggestion from the text or the teacher — the student must 
 have observed the close resemblance between German and 
 English. A brief summary of this subject will now be made. 
 
 403. This resemblance is, of course, not accidental, but rests upon his- 
 torical kinship. The Angles and the Saxons, who conquered Britain before 
 A. D. 500 — whence the united name Anglo-Saxon, a.pplied to the people 
 and the language — and, from the Angles, the names England (Angle-land) 
 and English — were German peoples. These brought with them, of course, 
 their own German tongues, which, with some other admixture, formed 
 the Anglo-Saxon — sometimes called Old English — the basis of the English 
 language. 
 
 ' 404. But, though of the same Germanic stock, these peoples were of a 
 different branch from those whose language has given rise to the modem 
 literary German. The Angles and Saxons were Low-Germans — dwellers 
 on the low, or coast, lands, as distinguished from those who dwelt in the 
 high, or central, lands of the continent, whose language, known as High- 
 German, is the basis of the modern German. The nearest kinship of 
 English is thus with the Low-German tongues, as the modern Dutch, 
 and the dialects of common speech in North Germany, called !piott=®eutfc^ 
 — but all are included in the general term Germanic, or Teutonic. 
 
 405. There were thus already considerable diversities of speech between 
 the High-German and the earliest English, as will be more fully shown 
 below (§ 407, etc.). These diversities have been still further increased by 
 historical causes subsequently (§ 414, etc.), so that the kinship of English 
 to German is not always so obvious as its' relation to other languages (as 
 French or Latin). Still, this kinship is of fundamental importance — the 
 more so, as it shows itself especially in the most essential and important 
 elements of our own language — implying i:<;fwflfe origin, not mere derivation. 
 
 Note. — This subject, which is of capital importance for the study of English, will be 
 treated here only so far as may be helpful to the English student in learning German. 
 
 406. Of Germanic origin in English are : '^ — 
 
 * Condensed from Morris's Historical English Grammar, p. 27-31 
 
RELATION OF GERMAN AND ENGLISH. 221 
 
 1. All grammatical inflections, and all auxiliary words used as substitutes 
 for inflection. 
 
 2. The most important grammatical words: almost all numerals; all 
 pronouns and pronominals; most simple adverbs, prepositions, conjunc- 
 tions; all nouns, adjectives, verbs, inflected or derived by vowel-change, and 
 almost all other irregular verbs: in a word, the most important primitive 
 elements o£ form, construction and idiom. 
 
 3. The mgst familiar affixes of derivation, both prefixes and suffixes, as 
 seen in foregoing Lessons (XL., XLL, etc.). 
 
 4. And, generally, the great majority of simple monosyllables, expressing 
 the objects, ideas and feelings of common life and of universal experience. 
 
 These comprehend, as was said above, the most essential and important 
 elements of our language — its entire grammatical machinery and the most 
 indispensable part of its vocabulary; so that, in spite of all changes and 
 additions, English is still properly ranked as a Germanic language. 
 
 A great number of such forms and words are the same, or nearly the 
 same, in both languages, so as to be readily recognized. Many others present 
 difierences which require attention and explanation. 
 
 407. One most important set of changes follows a general law, based on 
 the relation of sounds, which, from its first great expounder, Jacob Grimm, 
 is known as "Grimm's Law." This law comprehends other languages — 
 including Greek and Latin — of the same family with German and English ; 
 but it will be here stated only with reference to these, and in the simplest 
 terms. > 
 
 GRIMM'S LAW. 
 
 408. The mute consonants, as is well known, are classed : — 
 
 {a) By the organs of their utterance into i. labials (lip sounds), ^. Unguals 
 or dentals (tongue or tooth sounds), and 3. gutturals or palatals (throat or 
 palate sounds) ; and these respectively : — 
 
 (b) According to the mode or degree of utterance into i. hard, or surds ; 
 2. soft, or sonants ; 3. aspirate; — as shown in tl^ following table (to which 
 are added the sibilants, s, 2) : — ,Ji^^'^ i^i'^^^ 
 
 Hard. Soft. Aspirate. 
 
 Labial. p b f, (Jif), v. 
 
 Lingual. t (t^) d th, s, z. 
 
 Guttural. k 51— g ^^ ifi. — . 
 
 Now it is found that consonant changes regularly occur : - 
 (a) Within the same organ; as labial to labial, etc. 
 
222 
 
 LESSON XLV. 
 
 {i) In the same direction, between any two languages ; that is, between 
 German and English, thus : — 
 
 German — iarii — sojl — aspirate — correspond to 
 English — soft — aspirate — hard respectively, — 
 
 as if by a circular permutation, in the direction of the arrows. 
 
 Note. — Letting H represent Hard; S, Soft; A, Aspirate; and — as a guide to the first 
 letters — letting H stand for High-German, and 5 for Saxon-English ; these changes may be 
 easily remembered by the following mnemonic words — the correspondmg symbols, up or down, 
 marking the regular changes :* 
 
 High-German = H. A. S. 
 Saxon-English =: S. H. A. 
 
 409. There are many exceptions which cannot be here discussed. Espe- 
 cially in the guttural series, and in other letters when initial, the chaiige 
 often does not occur. Frequently also a guttural has degenerated into a 
 semi-vowel or vowel, or is lost entirely; as g becomes/ («'), w ; g or 1^ 
 becomes silent gh, or is lost — English showing aversion to all aspirate 
 gutturals. Such examples are, of course, outside of Grimm's law. Also 
 the Ungual sibilants \, 3, usually represent English t, the German t^ being 
 hard. 
 
 The following examples will exhibit the most usual interchanges — in- 
 cluding exceptions, as above noted. Exaitiples where change has not taken 
 place need not be specially given, though some of them are included — and 
 some of the exainples illustrate more than one change (see Remark, p. 228). 
 
 Note. — i. In some of the examples, the change has occurred in English itself; but this 
 need not affect the present discussion, which has reference only to the relation of German to 
 modern English. 
 
 2. The student must bear in mind always purely orthographical differences; such as ^ 
 f=(often)r/ f(!^=jA/ ]^_y,etc. Such cases need not be included. 
 
 1. Ladials. 
 
 Gertn. Engl. 
 
 ^ b. . 
 
 b {,v. 
 
 f(«>f) P ■ 
 
 botjpel, aiippe, Jfrtppe, ^Polfler, @to))|)el. 
 
 double. 
 
 rib. 
 
 crib. 
 
 bolster. 
 
 stubble. 
 
 I)alb, 
 
 ab, 
 
 Seib, 
 
 Iteben, 
 
 jlevben. 
 
 half. 
 
 off. 
 
 wife. 
 
 seven. 
 
 starve. 
 
 t)etfcn, 
 
 auf, 
 
 teif, 
 
 aufet, 
 
 ^Pflaitje, 
 
 help. 
 
 up. 
 
 ripe. 
 
 apple. 
 
 plant. 
 
 * This arrangement is only seemingly different from that on p. 22 1 and above — that being 
 read from left to right, this vertically : down, for German to English ; «/, for English to 
 German. The object here is simply to give the mnemonic words- 
 
RELATION OF GERMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 223 
 
 2. LiNGUALS. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Germ. 
 
 Engl. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t(t|j) 
 
 
 tief, 
 
 Svaum, 
 
 SBort, 
 
 tf)U«, 
 
 S^at, 
 
 d . . 
 
 ■ deep. 
 
 dream. 
 
 word. 
 
 rfo. 
 
 deed 
 
 
 
 bid, 
 
 brei, 
 
 benten. 
 
 S3ab, 
 
 erbe, 
 
 11 
 
 th . . 
 
 • thUk. 
 
 three. 
 
 think. 
 
 toA. 
 
 earth. 
 
 
 
 bae, 
 
 0U8, 
 
 e«, 
 
 beffer. 
 
 §og, 
 
 8,ff, 6 
 
 t . . 
 
 • that. 
 
 out. 
 
 it. 
 
 better. 
 
 hate. 
 
 %.% 
 
 
 im\, 
 
 3o«, 
 
 2u, 
 
 Safee, 
 
 ftfeen, 
 
 t 
 
 ' two. 
 
 toll. 
 
 to. 
 
 fa/. 
 
 sit. 
 
 3. Gutturals. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Germ* 
 
 Engl. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 f,it 
 
 g ch . 
 
 g(fe, 
 e(d)ge. 
 
 SBi-iide, 
 bri{d)ge. 
 
 Soitl, 
 
 bench. 
 
 fouen. 
 
 flredtcn, 
 
 stre(f)ch 
 
 
 w{gh) 
 
 fotgcn, 
 
 ■Jalg, 
 
 Soger, 
 
 *^Pflug, 
 
 
 B 
 
 follow. 
 
 tallow. 
 
 fowl. 
 
 //(OT, or plough. 
 
 
 __ /;\ 
 
 ®orten, 
 
 Sluge, 
 
 legen. 
 
 frofitg, 
 
 5!Kagb, 
 
 B 
 
 y W • 
 
 ■ yard. 
 
 ^j^. 
 
 lay. 
 
 frosty. 
 
 maid. 
 
 d) 
 
 k . . 
 
 Su(^, 
 
 Soc^, 
 
 aRtlef), 
 
 madden. 
 
 gottlid). 
 
 book. 
 
 yoke. 
 
 milk. 
 
 make. 
 
 godlike. 
 
 
 
 bo(f|, 
 
 Moi), 
 
 Siii)t, 
 
 2;od)ter, 
 
 gottlli^, 
 
 4 
 
 gh(y) 
 
 though. 
 
 high. 
 
 light. 
 
 daughter. 
 
 godly. 
 
 410. The following examples will illustrate other frequent forms, more 
 or less irregular. But it will be observed that the changes are usually within 
 the same organ : — 
 
 Germ. Engl. 
 I. J w . . 
 
 ffelb, 
 
 yellow. 
 
 fd^rouben, 
 
 screw. 
 
 ©(^wolbe, 
 
 swallow. 
 
 l)(oldf)f . . 
 
 f V . . 
 
 SBoter, 
 
 • father. 
 Ofen, 
 oven. 
 
 »oU, 
 full. 
 
 rif, 
 eleven. 
 
 SBotf, 
 folk. 
 
 vixen. 
 
 to wh 
 
 tDfl8, 
 what. 
 
 tnenji, 
 when. 
 
 SBetle, 
 while. 
 
224 
 
 Gtrm. 
 
 Engl. 
 
 2. t 
 
 th. . 
 
 111) 
 
 sk . 
 
 14 
 
 s . . 
 
 3' S'4 
 
 gh (=f) 
 
 i!| 
 
 ch (tch) 
 
 4 
 
 lost . 
 
 s 
 
 lost . 
 
 LESSON 
 
 XLV. 
 
 
 fort, 
 
 3Better, 
 
 taufenb. 
 
 forth. 
 
 weather. 
 
 thousand. 
 
 ©(i^ule, 
 
 ©diiff, 
 
 ©i^aum, 
 
 school. 
 
 j-fa/: (■(.-{, 
 
 scum. 
 
 ©i^taf, 
 
 @(f)Ieim, 
 
 fc^metten, 
 
 sleep. 
 
 slime. 
 
 swell. 
 
 flcnug, 
 
 £rO0, 
 
 la^Eit, 
 
 enough. 
 
 trough. 
 
 laugh. 
 
 SBU(%C, 
 
 ?e(^, 
 
 wot^en. 
 
 beech. 
 
 pitch. 
 
 watch. ." 'V 
 
 i«, 
 
 ntid^, 
 
 bi(5, 
 
 I{o\6.ik). 
 
 ««? (old »««i-). 
 
 /;«« (old thee). 
 
 Siegel, 
 
 Ucgen, 
 
 liigen, 
 
 tile. 
 
 /«. 
 
 lie. 
 
 411. The liquids t, nt, n, r, in consequence of their semi-vowel charactei; 
 readily undergo change ; as : — 
 
 SJufen, §anf, geffel, ®egen, 
 
 bosom. hemp. fetter. dagger, 
 
 hjor, §afe, Berticren, frieren, 
 
 was. hare. lose. freeze. 
 
 al8, fol(^, ®au8, un«, aKunb, 
 
 as. such. s^oose. us. mouth. 
 
 @c^affot, 9{a^tigall, Sriiutigant, 
 
 a) Interchange 
 
 t with s, z 
 S) Omission . . 
 c) Insertion . . 
 
 d) Transposition 
 
 scaffo\d. ntghtragale. bridegroom. 
 
 brennen, burt^, ^unbert, breigig, 
 
 him. through, hundred, thirty. 
 
 412. Letters — usually initial or final — are sometimes also : — 
 glei^, gcnug, hicifen, Sljt, 
 
 like. enough. nip. ax. 
 
 (b) Added or re- jnmm, ®onner, Erie, Sde, 
 TAiNED . . lamh. thun&er. alier. e&ge. 
 
 (o) Omitted . 
 
 Sometimes with double forms, as : — 
 
 @(^atten, 
 shade, shadow. 
 
 f(^meljen, 
 
 (s)melt. 
 
 , ft)iimen, 
 
 spinner, spi(n)der. 
 
RELATION OF GERMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 22$ 
 
 (r) Silent . 
 
 ®nei§, 
 gneiss. 
 
 finic, 
 
 knee. 
 
 half. 
 
 raoOte, 
 
 would. 
 
 Note. — It must be borne in mind tbat the use of ^ and of the double consonant in German 
 is often purely orthographical J as, ©o^n, soHt 39ett, hed, etc. 
 
 413. For the vowels — the most changeable elements of speech — no 
 rules can be laid down. To a great extent they are the same in German 
 and English — or only orthographically different. The following are some 
 of the most frequent correspondences (not identical) : 
 
 etc. 
 
 Germ. Engl. 
 
 ei i . . 
 
 reiten, 
 
 ■ ■ ride. 
 
 toeit, 
 wide. 
 
 fi^einen, 
 shine. 
 
 ci 0. . 
 
 SBein, 
 
 ■ bone. 
 
 ein, 
 
 one. 
 
 meifl, 
 most. 
 
 ei oa . 
 
 breit, 
 
 ■ broad. 
 
 eib, 
 
 oath. 
 
 heifer, 
 hoarse. 
 
 ea 
 
 S3rot, 
 ■ ■ bread. 
 
 ear. 
 
 2;ob, 
 
 death. 
 
 au ea 
 
 SSoum, 
 
 beam. 
 
 Kroum, 
 
 dream. 
 
 laufen, 
 
 leap. 
 
 au ou . 
 
 mouse. 
 
 §0U«, 
 house. 
 
 taut, 
 
 loud. 
 
 etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
 Unaccented final e is usually lost; as, SIBeSpe, wasp: or silent; as, Safe, 
 
 cheese (this e in English being often purely orthographical). 
 
 Note. — The grammatical inflections — so largely lost in English — are purposely not here 
 considered. These would require a different treatment. 
 
 414. The relation of German to English is still further obscured by 
 historical influences operating — especially in English — since the separa- 
 tion of the two languages. Only the most important of these will be 
 indicated : — 
 
 1. The introduction of many foreign words into English — mainly Latin 
 or French — which have either: — 
 
 (o) Wholly displaced the original Germanic words; or, 
 
 {b) Usurped their meaning, causing them to be transferred to a different 
 sense. As, in the latter case : — 
 
 bieteti, to offer (bid). 
 SBlinb, union (bond). 
 
 S)eut|c^, German (Dutch). 
 ®eift, spirit (ghost). 
 
226 
 
 LESSON XLV. 
 
 Sompf, vapor (damp). @tu^l, chair (stool). 
 
 ©ede, cover (deck). £ier, animal (deer). 
 
 — and many others. Thus the English equivalent is not readily associated 
 in the mind with its corresponding German form. 
 
 2. Especially is this true with English derivatives or compounds. Often, 
 in the simple.,word, we retain the native, or Germanic, primitive; while in the 
 derivatives or compounds, we use foreign words whose simple root-forms do 
 not occur in English ; as : ^ — - 
 
 Primitive. 
 eye (Stuge). 
 hand ($anb). 
 foot (gug). 
 book (Sui^l). 
 house (§0U8). 
 light (?i(I)t). 
 deed (SE^at). 
 
 go (ge^en). 
 
 lead (leiten). 
 
 send ((enben). 
 overset (uber(c^en). 
 
 Derivative. 
 ocular, etc. 
 manual, etc. 
 pedal, etc. 
 library, etc. 
 domestic, etc. 
 illumination, etc. 
 benefit, etc. 
 pro-ceed, \ 
 re-cede, ) 
 ad-duce, 
 pro-duce, 
 re-mit, 
 pre^mise, 
 translate, etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
 3. Also, in English synonyms, the foreign word will often take the place 
 of the Germanic equivalent ; as : — 
 
 Germanic. 
 fright, 
 help, 
 last, 
 likeness. 
 
 small 
 
 Foreign. 
 terror, 
 assist, 
 final. 
 
 resemblance, 
 aperture, 
 minute, etc, etc. 
 
 Especially in the language of books, to which the student's attention is 
 first directed, the foreign element in English will occur most frequently. In 
 the language of common life and conversation the Germanic element is more 
 prominent. 
 
 415. All the causes above enumerated — with others not here mentioned 
 — tend to obscure the intimate kinship between German and English. On 
 the other hand, English words from Latin or Greek, and to a great extent 
 
RELATION OF GERMAN AND ENGLISH. 227 
 
 from French, are but little changed, and are readily recognized. Conse 
 quently, the relation of these languages to Enghsh is apt to be proportion 
 ately exaggerated, while that of German is depreciated or ignored. Yet il 
 must not be forgotten that the latter is far closer and of more fundamental 
 importance, though less obvious to the beginner; and especially that the 
 grammatical elements of English, and almost all of its simplest and mosi 
 necessary words, are of Germanic origin. 
 
 Note. — In consequence of the dtfierences above indicated, which, added to the strangeness 
 of a new type, give to German at first the appearance of a wholly foreign language, it has not 
 been deemed expedient to introduce this subject, except incidentally, at an earlier stage* 
 Now, however, it may in many ways usefully serve for instruction, not only as a help in acquir. 
 ing and remembering words, singly or in groups, but also by adding interest to the study of 
 German, as well as- of English, in various points of view. 
 
 Remark. — The difficulty has been fully recognized of presenting this 
 subject in a manner which should be wholly elementary and helpful for the 
 pupil, yet in a measure satisfactory for the teacher or scholar. The object 
 has been to give only what might be useful to a beginner in German. A full 
 or scientific exposition of this subject does not belong to an elementary 
 grammar, and of course has not been here attempted. 
 
 EXERCISE XLV. 
 
 The following examples are intended partly as illustrations, partly as an 
 exercise for the student. Such words as are identical, or nearly so, in the 
 same or similar meaning need not be included. 
 
 I. 
 
 German: to find English cognate form, 
 affc, §aufen, ipjanne, ^ftaume, ©eife, gaffen, fireifen, SBoH,f §ErB|l, @ieb, 
 ©d^oufel, fd^ieben, 5inn, 3e{)c, 3ungc, Seffel, SWug, Keufel, ©paten, gteiten, 
 ©(^rnicb, Stoeig, '^t\&)VSi, Seber, ^JSfab, @(i)u6, treten, bleiii^en, ©id^e, %\m, 
 (pfeife, aKogb, fd^lou, ^c^atc, glafd^e, ftrecten, ©totd^, @a(^e, SBad^e, mit, 
 mittel, ja^e, jo^m, Oarn, geflet(n), morg(en), felten, Sufcn, SBoIb, wetcft. 
 
 II. 
 
 English: to find German cognate form. 
 Apple, jfooi, ^amp, sheep, full, even, ovM,Jiav.en, ten, twenty,, net, salt, 
 heath, both, south, to bite, white, drink, to 3rench, deaf, wide, side, old, 
 blade, leaf, to snuff, scum, skiff, birch, to seek, Mckle, cook, crouch, might, 
 to fight, to yawn, year, penny, hail, rain, to say, said, sorrow, to borrow, 
 iron, fodder, ear, him, her, comb. 
 
228 LESSON XLV. 
 
 III. 
 
 Words transferred: to find the cognate form. 
 
 $aum, tree; JBein, leg; Sier, animal; Surg, eastU; Siirgcr, citizen:. 
 @tut)t, chair; ^itnttter, room; J^tntmemtonn, carpenter; ^O^en, to listen i 
 gtonjen, to shine; ®d)urje, apron; S5oben,^o»«i// |)Ultb, dog; iieten, tp offer, 
 fasten, to ride; to(b)ten, to kill; ^eben, to lift; groben, to dig; \0VQtn,tocaref 
 tie^en, to smell; trogen, to bear; ®egen, sword; bumm, stupid; SSogcJ, bird; 
 3Kut, courage; 'Mxx, field; %^i\,pen; 'iBte^,fiour; %vx^, prince; @raf, 
 count; S3unb, union; ©lode, bell; SBann, farmer; ^eUavi), lam'our; ^O^Ie, 
 cave; SSlnme, fiower; fonbern, to separate (but); %t\!i, part; Selcu^tung, 
 illumination; SBo^U^at, benefit; Uberfe^ung, translation; iiberbtlngen, to 
 deliver; Hufeinonberfotgc, ja«-«KV;«; ^avlc>\iiv.\i, glove ; ^a^xbnii, annual; 
 3a^l, number; ja^ten, to count; 3eit, time: ^\.t\)tn, to draw ; ^n^, dratight. 
 
 Remark. — The examples in this Lesson, as already remarked, do not imply 
 derivation but only common (cognate) origin, or divergence from a common 
 type. The German is given first, simply because that is the form the student 
 has to deal with, and needs to recognize. In fact, the English -form is, in 
 general, of a more primitive type than the German. But the more scientific 
 arrangement would have been less useful for elementary purposes. 
 
 Many of the examples used in this lesson have been taken, by permission, 
 from the excellent "Letters for Self-Instruction in German," by Dr. Solomon 
 Deutsch. They are purposely limited to such as will be most obvious. The 
 teacher may gradually introduce more difficult ones. 
 
PART III. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 In the following lessons the uses of the parts of speech will 
 be illustrated, and, at the same time, some irregular matter, 
 which properly belongs to the accidence, will be introduced. 
 
 The remaining portion of the grammar may either be studied 
 consecutively, or used by reference only, in connection with the 
 general work of the student ; and, as exercises, either the sen- 
 tences under the several Lessons or the continuous passages 
 at the end of the book may be used, as teachers may prefer. 
 For younger pupils the former, for more advanced the latter, 
 may perhaps be recommended. 
 
 LESSON XLVI. 
 
 Use of the Articles. 
 
 The use of the articles is, in the main, the same as in English. 
 Only the more important differences will be noted. 
 
 The Definite Article. 
 
 416. The definite article is used more largely than in 
 English : — 
 
 I. The definite article is used before nouns taken in their most compre-, 
 hensive sense, meaning the whole, idea, material, or class ; before abstract 
 and collective nouns, and infinitives used as nouns. Examples : 2)a8 Sebetl 
 .beg'SKenfcIien iji furj, the life of man is short. 2)ie 2;ugenb ift bo8 l)6ii)fte Out, 
 
 22g 
 
230 LESSON XLVI. 
 
 virtue is the highest good. ®0S ®otb tfl foPatcr ot8 baS Sifen, gold is more 
 precious than iron. ®a8 SRauc^cn tfl '^ier Berboten, smoking is forbidden here. 
 '^oAj bem @ffen, after dinner {eating), etc. 
 
 2. The definite article is used also before names of seasons, months and 
 days ; before the names of streets and mountains ; and other than neuter . 
 names of countries. Examples : 3tn ©otnnter tft e8 Worm. Ser ®egetnbev 
 ifl folt. 3i^ roerbe am gtcitag onlotntnen. @r tro^iit in ber griebri(^8jiva6e. 
 @ie ^aben ben SWontbtanc beflicgen. 3ft er in ber Kiirtei gewejcn ? 
 
 3. Proper names preceded by an adjective take the article. ®er atmc 
 §on8, bet to^jfere SBIiid^er, ba« fd^one <Pori8.- Sometimes proper names take 
 the article with the force of a demonstrative pronoun : ®o ijt ber KeU, there 
 is (that well-known) Tell; sometimes also in depreciatory sense ; as: ©Ofle 
 bent SBit^eta, cr fott lotnmen; — but often vrithout either implication. 
 
 4. Sometimes we are compelled to use the article before a proper name 
 in order to indicate the case ; as : 3^ jiebe Ootbe bent ©djiUer »ov. SfjerftteS 
 but ben 3lc^tUe3 ilberlebt. And, generally, the article may be used before 
 personal proper names in lieu of declension ; as : ®ie SSiid^er ber 3Jlarie ; bie 
 ^riege beS Stleyanber ; id) babe e8 bem SDiay gefagt (for : 5Karien8, SlleyonbetS, 
 aWayen). (See§ no-112.) 
 
 Note. — Before a common noun also the article is sometimes used merely to show the 
 case; as : Er jie^t SBiet ber SDliti^ nor, he prefers beer to milk; \i) lonn bet SSorMt nii^t gu 
 Diet gebraud^en, / cannot use too mxick (pf) foresight. 
 
 5. Frequently the English possessive is rendered in German by the 
 article, with or without an objective pronoun (§ 439), when the possessor 
 is sufficiently pointed out by the context. This is the case especially when 
 speaking of the parts of the body or of the clothing. @r fcbiittelte ben Sopf 
 unb ficdte bte §ailb in bie SCaj^e, he shook his head and stuck his hand into his 
 pocket. ®r bat ft(^ in ben ginger gejd^nitten, he has cut his finger. Kbranen 
 roUten i^r iiber bte SBongen {over her cheeks). 
 
 6. The definite article is used in German, where English uses the in- 
 definite article, with a distributive sense. For instance: ®ret Sb"'"^ ''•' 
 ©He, three dollars a yard. SBiermal bie SBo(^e,/o»>- times a week. 
 
 7. In some phrases the definite article is used where it is not used in 
 English; as: 3tt bie @(bule, in bie ^ircbe; to school, to church. 3n ber 
 @(bute, in ber Sxti^t ; at school, at church. 3n ber @tabt, in town. 35or 
 bem griibftud, before breakfast. ®ie le^te SBocbe, last week. 3m leljten 
 
 3cibre, last year, etc. 
 
 For the article with the possessive pronouns, see § 193. 
 
THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 23 1 
 
 417. On the other hand, the definite article is in a few cases 
 omitted in German where used in English : — 
 
 1. In a few pronominal or adjective phrases ; as, erflerer, le^terer ; the for- 
 mer, the latter ; Befagter, genannter ; the aforesaid; folgenber, the following, 
 etc. ; and in a few technical phrases ; as, SBeftagter, the defendant; SIciger, the 
 plaitttiff; ©C^reiBer, the writer ; UBcrBringer, the bearer, etc. — yet not always. 
 
 2. In phrases expressing direction to or from the points of the compass ; 
 as, Bon 9torben, gegen SBeften, gegen SlBcnb, towards the west, etc. ; and a few 
 others : as, Bor 2tugen, before the eyes ; oltc SSelt, all the world, etc. See oH 
 (§ 460, 4). 
 
 Note. — Generally — as also in English — the article is not used in phrases where a 
 common noun is joined with a preposition. S3ei Xif^e, at taile ; 6et ^of e, at court ; ju SQaffetr, 
 Iry sea ; ju £anbe, on land; ju Jfu^, on foot ; ju iffecbe, on horseback ; ju @aufe, at home ; naiS) 
 ^aufe, home ; 6ei Sage, Iry day ; bei Dlai^i, by night ; rait Sergnllgen, with pleasure ; and in 
 such idiomatic phrases as, S}ur[t \o^itn, to he thirsty; gu ©runbe ge^en, to be ruined, to 
 perish; ju Stanbe lommen, to succeed; jU ©tmibe bringen, to accomplish ; ju Sett gel^en, to go 
 to bed; Slbfc^ieb nc^mett, to take leave. (See § 379.) 
 
 418. The following cases, though the same in German as in 
 English, may be remarked : — 
 
 1. A dependent genitive preceding its noun excludes the article ; as : ®c8 
 fionigs SScfe^l ; metnes SSatcrS §au8. - 
 
 2. No article is used with nouns taken in a partitive or limited sense ; 
 as : @t trintt lieBer SBetn al8 Sier; SUbev unb ®olb ^obc i^ nii^t; nor with 
 nouns used merely as predicate; as, ber tieutlte 3Konot \i\%i @e})temBer. 
 
 3. The article is omitted in proverbial and abridged expressions ; as : SBeib 
 unb jf inb ; 3ung unb Sltt ; fiir ^onig unb SSotertanb ; Strmut ifl f eine S^onbe : 
 ®ebulb jibertBinbct SllteS ; E^re ifl ber Siugenb So^n, etc. 
 
 The Indefinite Article. 
 
 419. The indefinite article differs in a few cases from its Eng- 
 lish use : — 
 
 1. The indefinite article isonjitted before a simple predicate noun express- 
 ing occupation or condition, or before a descriptive noun after alS ; as : 
 SBletn ©o^n war Saufntann, ober er ifl je^t ©olbat gcworben. %\i (S^renmann 
 
 fonn i^ ba8 nid^t gugeBen, as a man of honor, etc. 
 
 2. For omission of the indefinite article before ^unbert, touf enb, see § 304. 
 For the phrases, a few, man}) a, § 245 ; what a, § 220 > twice a day, etc., 
 § 416. 6. 
 
232 LESSON XLVI. 
 
 3. No article is used in German in adverbial phrases like : in (Silc, in a 
 hurry; mit f(i^tt)ad|er ©titrnne, iiiith a feeble voice; in SBut, in a passion; 
 and in such idioms as : ic^ ^abe ^OpflDCl^, ^l^nwel^, / have a headache, u, 
 toothache ; id^ F|abE Sufi, I have a mind ; and some others. 
 
 4. For ein fotc^er, such a, see § 207 ; for ein jeber, ein jeglidier, every one, 
 see § 245 (»). 
 
 Position of the Articles. 
 
 420. I . The definite article precedes all other qualifying words, except 
 oUe, all. Examples: bie beiben ^noben, both the boys; ber boppelte ipreis, 
 double the price ; but an(e) bic SnoBett, or bie finaben aHe. 
 
 2. The indefiinite article precedes all other qualifying words except jol(i^ 
 (§ 207), ttjcli^ (§ 220), hjag fiir (§ 221), and man^ (§ 245), even where in 
 English it will sometimes follow a qualifying word ; as : SSBell^ ein STMnn ! 
 a!Bo8 fiir ein Suc^ ijl ba8 ? SWand^ ein SKonn, \<a\&i ein SKann (or ein fol(i^er 
 SJtann); also, ein fo fd^one8 3Jtabd^en, so pretty a girl; ein ju tottes 58ab, ^w 
 cold a bath ; eine ^albe ©tunbe, half an hour, etc. 
 
 Repetition of the Articles. 
 
 421. With two or more nouns of the same gender and number, if taken 
 together, the deiinite article need not generally be repeated ; but when the 
 nouns are not of the same gender and number, it must be repeated before 
 each of them. The indefinite article, from its individual nature, must be 
 repeated before each noun. As : ®ie ®nabe, SBeiSl^eit unb ?icbe @Ottee, the 
 mercy, wisdom, and Iwe of God. ®ie Sroft unb ber SKut beg Sbhien, the 
 strength and {the) courage of the lion. Er laufte eine Saube, eine ®on8 unb 
 einen Ci'IeU, he bought a pigeon, a goose, and a hare. 
 
 2. But the definite article must be repeated in every case if the nouns are 
 taken distinctively, or in contrast. As : 3d^ ^obe ben §errn unb ben ©iener 
 gefe^en. ®er §err unb ©ebieter, the lord and master, means one person. 
 
 EXERCISE XLVI. 
 
 I. At nine o'clock we shall go to school. 2. Have you been at church? 
 3. Do you prefer (lleber) to travel by day or by night? 4. Have you ever 
 seen such a flower ? s^i'How many German lessons did you take last month ? 
 ■\-(>. I have taken eight lessons, two a week. 7. The sick man spoke with a 
 feeble voice. 8. Life is short ; art is long. 9. Nature is an open book, the 
 leaves of which all can read who have eyes. 10. August is the hottest 
 month. 1 1. The boy fell from a tree and broke his (ftcf|) arm. 12. Why do 
 
ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON NOUNS. 233 
 
 you shake ^our head? Have you a headache? 13. No, I have a toothache. 
 
 14. I am Sony to hear that; go to a dentist, he will pull outyour(3]^Iien) tooth. 
 
 15. I live in Frederick Street; my brother lives in Broad Street. 16. The 
 soldier held a sword in his hand. 17. Poor Charles is ill. 18. Come after- 
 dinner and drink a glass of wine with me. ig. This wine costs only half a 
 dollar a bottle ; I would gladly pay double the sum for it. 20. During the 
 heat of summer we shall make a journey on foot in Switzerland. 21. In 
 the long wars of Alexander, the Greeks marched victoriously towards the 
 East. 22. The good [man] has ever the fear of God before [his] eyes. 23. 
 My brother's eldest son is a lawyer; the youngest will soon become a 
 preacher. 2^.' As a Christian, you cannot forget so clear a proof of the love 
 and goodness of God. 
 
 LESSON XLVII. 
 
 ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON NOUNS. 
 Number. 
 
 422. Some nouns are used only in the singular: — 
 
 I. Names of materials; as: boS ^lei](il,j2es/i, meat; bet §onig, honey ; bie 
 3tjd)e, ashes. Some words of this class can be used in the -plural, meaning 
 'kinds of; as: bie ©rfijer, kinds of gtass ; bie ©alje, kinds of salt, salts. 
 Sometimes the plural has a slightly different meaning ; as : bie ©clber, sums 
 of money ; bie *Papiere,/a/«rj, documents. 
 
 ^. Nouns of abstract meaning and infinitives used as nouns ; as : bie (S^re, 
 honor; ba8 ?ob, praise; ber SRot, counsel; ber Kob, death; bo8 Seftreben, the 
 effort, etc. 
 
 3. But for many such nouns, a plural sense may be expressed by other 
 forms; as, bie g^l^enbejeigungetl, marks of honor; Otatfc^lfige, counsels; 
 SobegfoUe, deaths; bie SSeftrebungen, efforts, etc. So : ber S'ol)l, cabbage; pi. 
 jtoljltopfe, cabbage-heads, etc. 
 
 4. For the singular, in expressions of weight or measure, see § 31 2. 
 
 423. A few nouns are used only, or usually, or with special 
 meaning, in the plural : — 
 
 bie §ofen or SBeinfleibcr, trousers. $fingften, Whitsuntide. 
 
 bie (Sinfiinfte, the revenue SBcil)ttacl)tctl, Christmas. 
 
234 
 
 LESSON XLVI. 
 
 Dilein, Easter. 
 
 bic gttfletl, Lent. 
 
 bie getiett, the vacation. 
 
 bie Seute, people. 
 
 bie ^ojlen, the expenses. 
 
 bie 9Kotten, whey. 
 
 bie Sriimmer, ike ruins. 
 
 bie 2tl})en, /14^ ^i^j. 
 
 bie ©ebriiber, the brothers. 
 
 bie ©efc^Wifier, the irother(s) and 
 
 sister(s). 
 bie EI tern, the parents. 
 
 bie @tiebmagen, the limbs, 
 and some others. 
 
 424. Some nouns have a double meaning in the singular, and 
 in the plural a separate form in each meaning : — 
 
 baS 33anb, the ribbon. 
 bag SBonb, the tie, bond. 
 
 bie S3anf, M^ fe«<r;4. 
 
 bie SBanf, M^ {commercial) bank. 
 ba8 ©eftc^t, the face. 
 
 bag ®eft(i^t, i/4« j/««o«. 
 bas Siif)t, /^« light. 
 
 bos IH^t, ^;5^ candle. 
 bcr ©troug, M^ nosegay. 
 
 ber @trau6, ^/^? ostrich. 
 ber 3on, ^^i? 'w^- 
 ber ^oH, ^/4if toll. 
 
 bie Sfinber, /y5* ribbons. 
 
 bie S3onbe, M^ a>j. . 
 
 bie SSfinfe, the benches. 
 bie SBonfcn, the banks. 
 bic ®e|td)ter, the faces. 
 bie @er«^tt( visions. 
 
 bie Sid^ter, //4« A^^fc. 
 
 bie Sidjte, the candles. 
 
 bie @trau6e, //4^ nosegays. 
 
 bie @trou6e(tl), //4? ostriches. 
 
 bie 3''^'f» ^'^^ inches. 
 
 bie 3005; //4? ;c//j, and others. 
 
 425. (a) The following have double plurals with different 
 meanings : — 
 
 bie §brner, the horns. 
 
 bie I'onber, separate 
 
 countries, 
 bie Ortcr, single places. 
 bie SBortcr, single 
 words, 
 (b) ®er Sabeit, the shop, shutter, uses both plurals : 
 Jput in the compound, bie gcnjleriaben, usually. 
 
 {c) The noun SJJatttt, man, presents several peculiarities : — 
 
 1. Nouns compounded with SKann form their plural with ioitt, people, 
 which is only used in the plural, as collective. As : — 
 
 ber 3lrBeit8mann, the workingman. bie 3lrbeit8leute, work-people. 
 
 ber Saufmonn, the merchant. bie fiaufleute, merchants. 
 
 ba8 §orn, the horn. 
 ba8 Sonb, the land. 
 
 ber Ort, the place. 
 ba8 SBort, the word. 
 and some others. 
 
 bie §onie, kinds of horn. 
 
 bie Sanbe, countries col- 
 lectively (or poetic). 
 
 bie Orte, places collectively. 
 
 bie SBortc, connected 
 words. 
 bie Saben, bie Sfiben ; 
 
ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON NOUNS. 
 
 235 
 
 ber Sanbmann, the countryman, rustic. btc Sanbteute, rustics. 
 
 bet SanbSmann, the (fellow) countryman. iieianiiUntt, (fellow) countrymen. 
 
 But the ordinary form 2Konnei" must be used when speaking of individuals : 
 e^rentnfinner, men of honor; ®taat8monner, statesmen; and also when 
 a distinction of sex is to be made: (S^eleute, married people ; Stjemfinner, 
 married men; (S^efraueil, married women. 
 
 i.. The plural bie SBJannen means vassals, warriors ; as: ©d^itft JU feinett 
 
 SDiannen aUen in bem Sanbe S^mijg, etc. 
 
 3. SJJonn, meaning soldiers collectively, after a numeral is construed as a 
 noun of measure and is indeclinable (§312). Examples: Sine 3Irmee Oon 
 
 breigig taufenb 3Jlann, an army of thirty thousand men. ©tit ©efrelter unb 
 
 jroei 3Ronn, a corporal and two privates. 
 
 For other special forms in plural, see § 105. 
 
 Gender. 
 
 426. Some nouns are of the same form, with different gender 
 and meaning. As : — 
 
 (a) With the same plurals : — 
 
 bet S^or, the chorus. 
 b08 (Eljor, the. choir. 
 bet §eibe, the heathen. 
 bie §eibe, the heath. 
 bet @rbe, the heir. 
 ba8 (Stbe, the inheritance. 
 and others. 
 
 (b) With different plurals : — 
 
 bet Sanb, the volume. 
 
 bag Sanb. 
 
 bet Sunb, the union. 
 bag Sunb, the bundle. 
 bet Sauet, the farmer. 
 bo8 Sauet, the cage. 
 bet ©d^ilb, the shield. 
 b08 ©d^itb, the sign. 
 bet VcfiX, the fool. 
 bae VcfUt, the gate. 
 
 bet @ee, the lake. 
 
 bie See, the sea. 
 
 bet Sell, the part. 
 
 baS Sell, M^ share. 
 
 bet SSetbienft, />i^ earning. 
 
 baS aJetbienft, *4^ »»?rjV, 
 
 pl. 
 
 bie SBonbe. 
 See § 424. 
 bie SSiinbe. 
 bie Simbe. 
 bie 58auetn. 
 bie SBauet. 
 bie ©d^ilbe. 
 bie @d^tlbet. 
 bie S^oten. 
 bie X^ote, 
 
 and others. 
 
236 LESSON XLVII. 
 
 Such details must be sought in the dictionaries. (See also § 105.) 
 For special cases in which the grammatical gender and the natural gender 
 do not correspond, see § 452. 
 
 Plural of Proper Names. 
 
 427. The plural of proper (personal) names is variously 
 formed : — 
 
 {a) Christian Names : Masculines ending in a consonant usually add e : 
 tie Subtotge ; in a vowel, 8 : ble §ugo8. Feminines in -e add n : bie SBJavien, 
 bie ff^orlotten ; in -a,add 8 : bie SauroS, bie ?Inna8; in a consonant, add e: 
 bie ©ifafiet^e. 
 
 {d) Surnames: ending in a sibilant add e : bic ?eiBni^e ; in other consonants, 
 add usually ?, sometimes e : bie ©rimmS, bie @(i)mibt8, bie ©toUberge ; in -e, 
 add sometimes n : bie ©d^utjeil : or, generally, remain unchanged : bie ©c^iUcr, 
 bie Sejfmg, bie ©cljteget. 
 
 (c) When several personal names are combined, only the last is declined : 
 aJfaria @tuart8 Sob, griebvid) 3iiitet8 @ebi(i)te ; or, ber Sob ajiario ©tuorts, 
 etc. 
 
 Note. — But Don excludes the declension of the following name, unless immediately be- 
 fore the governing noun. Thus : (yriebric^ oon ©(^IcgelS SBerCe ; or : bie SBerte ^riebric^S 
 Don @d^[ege[. 
 
 (d) Some foreign plurals are adapted or retained: bie ©icerotte(n), bie 
 3Jerone(n) (Latin) : bie Sapulettt, bie 2)f ebici (Italian) ; bie ^itt8 (English), 
 etc. And a few biblical names (besides 3efu8 and (S^riflu8, § 113) retain the 
 original forms ; as, SUJarin, 3ol)aitni8, SCfattpi (genitives), etc. 
 
 There remains, however, much irregularity in the forms of proper names 
 and foreign vpords generally. (See § 120, a.) 
 
 Titles. 
 428. The syntax of titles presents some peculiarities : — 
 
 I. {a) If the title (or an appellative noun), preceding the proper name, has 
 the article, the proper name is not declined (§ 416) : ®ie jE^tlten be8 fibtlig? 
 fiarl beg @r|lcn itnb feines @o^ne8 fiavl be8 ^ffiten. 
 
 (h) If the title is without the article, the proper name alone is declined : 
 ®ie gfegierung ^onig §einrid)8 be8 Sld&ten ; Soifer SartS Kliaten ; or, ble 
 Kl^oten Saifer jfavla. 
 
 (f ) The title, even with the article, is often left undeclined : ®ie SBerte 
 bc8 ^rofeffov(8) Dtto. Except §err, which must always be declined : ®08 
 
TITLES. 
 
 237 
 
 $0U8 be8 §crvn SSraun (or §en:n Sraun8) ; and on the address of a letter: 
 §ei-rn (or bem §errn) Sari Sraim. 
 
 2. (a) The title §err, with or without article, is often used where in Eng- 
 lish no such prefix occurs : (®er) §etc ISrofeffor Swiin, ber §err ®raf, 3l)r 
 §crr 35ater, etc. 
 
 (*) Often the wife of an official receives her husband's title, with the prefix 
 (bie) grau ; as : (Sie) grait <Profeffot Otto ; or, in absence of the proper name : 
 ®ie %tan 5|Srofefforin — the article being usual, except in address. 
 
 (c) Note the forms usual in address : §erv, Mr.; ^tClU, Mrs.; g^rauteitt, 
 Miss — before the name; or, omitting the name: aJiein §err, Sir; Wabame, 
 or, gnabige gtau, Madam; j^tiiulein, or, tnein (gnSbifleS) groukin, Miss; — 
 tneiiie §en-cn, Gentlemen, etc. 
 
 EXERCISE XLVII. 
 
 I. Are you not an Englishman.' I think we are countrymen. 2. The 
 country-people lost their cattle and horses during the war. 3. An army of 
 forty thousand men attacked the town. 4. Several merchants have failed ; yet 
 they are men of honor. 5. Have you [any] holidays at (311) Whitsuntide.' 6. 
 No, but we have a week at Easter, and a fortnight at Christmas. 7. These 
 (Sa8) were the last words of my dear old friend. 8. She has put out the 
 lights. 9. The banks are closed on (beS) Sunday. 10. Many benches stand 
 around the fountain, where one sees a crowd [of] work-people. 11. The Alps 
 are the highest mountain-range in all Europe. 12. The brothers Grimm 
 were professors in the University of (jlt) Berlin. 13. The largest lake in 
 Switzerland is much smaller than many lakes in America. 14. The heathen 
 was so called because in (the) old times he dwelt on the heath. 15. The 
 volumes of the great poet were adorned with blue ribbons. 16. What 
 would this world be if the fools were all dead? 17. The Gladstones and 
 the Brights are the glory of the English State. 18. The poems of the un- 
 happy Heinrich Heme are now the joy of the young and of the old. 19. You 
 will find these words in Wilhelm von Schlegel's Works, on the tenth page 
 of the third volume. 20. The Claras, the Lauras, and the Leonores of the 
 present are the same as (ttiie) the Adelheids and the Brunhilds of the past. 
 
 21. The Goethes and the Schillers of German poetry belong to the past. 
 
 22. The works of Professor Steinthal are known in all Europe. 23. The 
 reigns of King Charles I. and of his son Charles II. were the most unfortu- 
 nate of (the) English history. 24. Dr. Brown and his daughter, Mrs. Professor 
 Smith, were at" (bet) the marriage of Mr. John Rich with Miss Anna, youngest 
 daughter of General Wilson. 
 
238 LESSON XLVII. 
 
 LESSON XLVIII. 
 
 Use of the Cases. 
 
 Remark. — With a view to practical rather than scientific purposes, the 
 Cases will be treated chiefly with reference to their correspondences — or 
 the contrary — in English. 
 
 THE NOMINATIVE. 
 
 429, The nominative, having nearly the same uses in German 
 as in English, calls for but little remark. 
 
 I. The nominative stands as the subject of a sentence. But the subject 
 nominative is omitted : — 
 
 (3) Usually with the imperative proper (§ 176) ; but not when the third 
 plural pronotin is used in address (§ 188) — except sometimes to avoid repe- 
 tition; as, leben ©ie tDoljl unb griifeen bie S^rigetu 
 
 (*) With some impersonals, and some expletive forms, unless the subject 
 (e8) precedes; as, micf) ^utigcrt ; Hlir Witb geraten, etc. (See § 453.) And 
 often colloquially; as, tatn ein Suobe, for eS lam ein Snobe. (§ 346, note 2.) 
 
 (f) Also, colloquially, a personal pronoun ; as, bob'S Ilii^t getbatt, bflp'8 
 nid^t gettoffen — when the sense is clear. 
 
 3. With the verbs (ein, to be; werben, to become; bleibett, to continue; 
 beifeEtt, to be called; fcbeiltcn, to seem, to appear, and a few others of the same 
 kind; and vrith the passive of some verbs which take in the active a second 
 accusative zs factitive (or complementary) object — such as nettlteil, to name; 
 taufen, to baptize, etc., the predicate noun will be a nominative. Examples: 
 SBte^eigtbieler^pia^? (SStft ber fiai-l«pla(3. (Sr ift ein unmiffenber SWenfiJ) 
 geblieben. Sr tft mein greunb geroorben. ®a8 Sinb wurbe Sobann getauft. 
 
 Note. — SBerben often takes ju, as, § 443, d\ ber Zroyfen mitb ju ®ift, becomes faism. 
 
 3. The nominative — independent or vocative — is also the case of direct 
 address or exclamation : Su, §eiUge, rufe bein Sinb Jiiritd, Thou, holy one, 
 etc. ; ©(^anbticber, wretch ! 
 
 4. (a) A word in apposition with a nominative — subject, predicate, or 
 vocative — will also of course be nominative. As : 3i^, ein iunger ©(biiler, 
 lann i^n, ben bcle^rten SKonn, nicbt unterriibten; ©ie, guter, wevben mic^ boii) 
 xn6)i Berlaffcn. 
 
 (b) With ote, toxi, as, a nominative, in seeming apposition, will appear as 
 subject of an implied verb: Siefer Snabe \ifct\bi reie ein 5Diann. 
 
 Note. — With a reflexive verb the accusative may also stand; as^ er fil^It fi(^ cincn 
 (or ein) SUlotin — the former, perhaps, more usually. 
 
THE GENITIVE. 239 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 The Genitive with Nouns. 
 
 430. The genitive depends on nouns in various relations: — 
 
 (a) Regularly the genitive follows the governing noun. But it has been 
 seen (§ 352, 3) that a personal (subjective or possessive) genitive often pre- 
 cedes ; and that in poetry and elevated style, this use is widely extended — the 
 genitive then excluding the article (§ 418, i). This is sometimes called the 
 " Saxon Genitive," or Possessive : Ser ©O^n beg ©fatnerS, or be8 ®artner8 
 
 ©o^n ; bie ©latter be8 SaumeS ; ber ©Rotifer ber SBrit ; ber S^ein ber Sugenb ; 
 ba8 ®liicC bet Siebe ; etn SDtaim fto^en 3t(ter8 ; bie ^olbe ®abe ber Sic^tung, 
 etc. And in poetry : ®er ©ic^tuttg tjolbe ®Qbe ; beS 9ie(^te8 $robe ; ber 
 SBfiume bic^t ©eftroud) ; meiner Seiben brennenbes ®efii^l ; grautrei^'s feriier 
 Ocean, etc. 
 
 Note. — The effect of this position is to dignify, as if by personification. The same is 
 often done in English ; as ; The lightning' s fiash ; the cannon^ 5 roar ; England's Queen, etc.; 
 but with less freedom than in German. 
 
 (b) But ambiguity in the relation of the genitive must be avoided ; and, 
 when necessary for this purpose, the objective relation vrill be expressed 
 by a preposition. Thus distinguish : ®ie Siebe ju ®ott from bie Siebe ®otte§ ; 
 ber §a6 gegen ben geinb from ber §a6 be8 geinbeS (or bc8 5einbe8 §a6), 
 
 etc. (as in English, the choice of a friend trom a friend's choice, etc.). 
 
 (c) Especially when the corresponding verb is construed with a preposi- 
 tion, the objective relation after a noun will take the same preposition ; as : 
 ®er ®ebonIe an ®ott (benten an), the thought of God; bie giire^t Bor bem Sobe 
 
 (fic^ fiirdlten Dot), the fear of death, etc. 
 
 Note. — But on the other hand, in some phrases, especially of persons, the English to will 
 represent the German genitive: as: @in geinb jeineg SiaterlanbeS, an enemy to his country, 
 etc. 
 
 (d) The genitive of a personal pronoun is rarely used in relation with a 
 noun ; but, instead, the possessive adjective ; or, objectively, often a preposi- 
 tion ; as : ©eine Siebe ju mir (not meiner), his love of me ; ec mar i^t SSod^ter 
 
 einft (her keeper) ; bein 3lnblid, the sight of you. 
 
 (e) The English idiomatic this heart of mine is simply, inein Jperj ; a friend 
 
 of mine, ein greunb Son mir, or einer meiner greunbe {one of my friends). 
 
 The Partitive Genitive. 
 
 431, The genitive names the whole of which a part is taken; 
 er fcf)en!te bei 9Beine§, {some) of the wine. But this relation is 
 also largely expressed otherwise : 
 
240 ^ LESSON XLVIII. 
 
 (a) With numerals, pronouns, or a superlative, the same relation is often 
 expressed by the preposition Don, sometimes unter. Examples : SBelt^er 
 meiner greunbe, or reelcder Bon ntcinen grcunben, which of my friends; bie 
 fc^onfie aUer f^wuenr or bie fi^bnfie »on alien grouen, the fairest of all women; 
 Eeiner feiner ®a|ie, or {einer Don feinen ®ajten, no one of his guests; itnter aUcn 
 meinen Sienern fetner, etc. 
 
 (i) As § 430 ((/), the genitive of personal pronouns will not occur, but the 
 preposition instead; as : S53et(^er Bon un8 (not unfer), which of us; feinct Bon 
 ifinen (not i^er), etc. The phrase unfer eiiter, one of us (of our sort), is an 
 exception. Such phrases as e8 ftnb unfer Bier, there are four of us, etc., are 
 really not partitive. 
 
 (£■) After nouns of measure, weight, number "or quantity a simple noun 
 is construed without case-declension (§312); as: @e(i)8 J^'ofl^en SBeilt, «> 
 bottles of wine ; jlnei ®U^enb @icv, two dozen (of) eggs; etn ©tiitf SBrot, apiece 
 of bread ; ein Kropfett SSSaffer, a drop of water ; ein SRegintent ©olbaten, a regi- 
 ment of soldiers. But if the noun is accompanied by an adjective, the genitive, 
 or Bon, may be used. For instance: ^va.t'^tViO,tXt\\iX%.^\A, a great number 
 of ripe apples. Ein @ta8 biefcs SSSeiug, or ein ®Itt8 Bon biejem SBein, a glass 
 of this wine; but also, eine SDlenge reife %f\t\, etc. — now most usually. 
 
 Note. — But the older genitive still occurs in poetry, and in some phrases ; as : 3)en 
 6eflen Better iffieina ; nid^t uiel gebctle(en5 mac^en, to make not muck {of) ceremony, etc. 
 
 (d) By like apposition, the proper name of a country or town, or of a 
 month, preceded by the common name, is not declined; as: ®a8 S'onig= 
 vei(!^ @ac{)Jen, the kingdom of Saxony ; bie @tabt Sonbon, the city of London ; 
 int SKonat SKai, in the month of May. The same use extends to the name of 
 the month in dates : ®er \ti^\\.t SKfii (§ 309). 
 
 Preposition instead of Genitive. 
 
 432. In some cases, of, after a noun, is regularly translated 
 by bon instead of the Genitive. Such are : — 
 
 (a) In terms of rank or title; as : ber itonig BOH gliglonb. (See § in.) 
 
 (A) Before names of materials ; as : ®ine Sriicte Bon (Sifen (also eine etjerne 
 SSriide). 
 
 {c) Before cardinal numerals, and other indeclinables ; as: ©in SKann 
 Bon fe^Sjig 3a^«n ; ber SSater Bon bvei Sinbern (but also, biefer brei Stnber). 
 
 (d) And, generally, whenever the case is not made clear by inflection ; as : 
 ®ie gage Bon ^ari8 (but also, ber ©tabt ?pari8) : bie @tra§en Bon ?onbon, or 
 gonbonS (§ 109). See also § 43a 
 
THE GENITTVE. 24I 
 
 (e) Sometimes the preposition will be used to avoid a succession of geni- 
 tives ; as : S5er Sttejle Bon ben ©o^nen beg ^BnigS, or Don beS Sontgs @bl)nen. 
 
 Note. — Generally, the use of the genitive in such relations is less common than formerly, 
 and there is a growing tendency to use the analytic construction with preposition. This is in 
 conformity with the general tendency in modem languages. 
 
 It has already been seen that the genitive relation is often expressed by 
 a compound noun ; as : Sie SSnii)brudEertunfl, iAe art-of-the-printing-of-books, 
 etc. (§ 389.) 
 
 • EXERCISE XLVIII. 
 
 I. I want two pounds of raisins, three pounds of sugar, five pounds of 
 coffee, and four pounds of tea. 2. Which of my friends will in the hour 
 of need stand by me ? 3. The city of Rome is built on seven hills. 4. The 
 youngest of my sisters is still at school. 5. Bring me a glass of beer. 6. A 
 marble (adj.) statue of the King stands in the market-place. 7. The fear of 
 punishment is stronger than the hope of reward. 8. He died at the age of 
 seventy years. 9. The kingdom of Saxony is the smallest kingdom in Ger- 
 many. 10. The want of (cilt) water forced^the enemy to give up the siege. 
 II. William- the First, king of Prussia, was born on the twenty-second of 
 March, 1797. 12. How many sacks of potatoes has the farmer bought.' 13. 
 He is the best and oldest of all my friends. 14. Want of money compelled 
 us to give up ouf vacation-ramble in Switzerland, i sj^Where have you bought 
 this multitude of books .' You will never be able tofead them. 16. Send 
 me three dozen eggs ; do not forget it, three dozen n^-l^id (frifc!^) eggs. 17. 
 We shall have holidays in the month of August. 18. The thought of his 
 poor children drove the unhappy father to dare the utmost. 19. The Crown 
 Prince of Germany is son-in-law to the Queen of England. 20. This young 
 hero went into the war as [a] young captain, and returned as a celebrated 
 general. 21. He is a nian of high rank and of great dignity of (the) beha- 
 viour. 22. The Colossus of Rhodes was one of the greatest wonders of 
 (the) antiquity. 23. The false appearance of virtue is called hypocrisy. 24. 
 Unhappy man I he was a good friend of mine — his loss is grievous to me ! 
 
 LESSON XLIX. 
 The Genitive. — Continued. 
 
 Genitive with Adjectives. 
 
 433. With the following adjectives, and their opposites, the 
 genitive is used as limiting or defining object, corresponding 
 generally to English of. 
 
242 LESSON XLIX. 
 
 bcbitrftig, in want. mo^tig, master (of). 
 
 begierig, greedy. t miitie, tired. 
 
 tbewufet, conscious. t ?<>**» A^A ^'^ed. 
 
 eingeben!, mindful. fc^ulbig, guilty. 
 
 ffi^ig, capable. pti^er, sure. 
 
 fro§, glad. iiberbriijftg, weary. 
 
 gett)i6, certain. Berbodjtig, suspected. 
 
 tunbig, acquainted {with). f "oU (BoUer),yw//. 
 
 leer, empty. loert, worth. 
 
 t Io8, rid of. t Wurbig, worthy. 
 
 and a few others, of like meaning. Examples (§ 353)rbe8 SebcnS miibe; 
 jenes Untevne^menS ffi^ig ; feiner ©ae^e getoife; be8 SBegeS un!unbtg ; ooll 
 golbener ©efa^e; jmonjig ginger Bolter aiinge (see note). 
 
 Note. — But some of these adjectives (marked t) may take an accusative (§ 441, c); and 
 others maybe construed, preferably, with a preposition; as, begierig nad((; frol^ iiber; soQ 
 von, etc. The indecl. DoQer stands only just before a dependent noun. 
 
 -''' Genitive with Verbs. 
 
 434. As a like, limiting or defining object, the genitive is used 
 with some verbs : — 
 
 (a) As single object, with a few verbs : — 
 
 bebiirfcn, to need. barren, to wait (for). 
 
 benlen, gebenfen, to remember. la^en, to laugh (at). 
 
 entraten, to dispense (with). f^onen, to spare. 
 
 ermangeln, to be without^ tpotten, to mock (at). 
 
 and a few others. Examples : ©ebetite meiner ; fpotte ni(^t ber Unglii(fli(^en ; 
 ber arme beborf ber notmenbigjlen Sebensmittel ; wir babcn beiner long e geborrt, 
 etc. Sometimes, as a so-called_/5i/« reflexive: er {(^Otiet feiner {§ 251). 
 
 Note. — But some of them may be construed with an accusative; as, jentanben fc^onen ; 
 or with a preposition; as, iiber jemanben lac^en; an etisaS benfen, etc. With some, the 
 genitive is almost wholly poetical ; and generally its use, both with verbs and adjectives, is 
 much less common than formerly, the form with preposition being usually preferred. 
 
 2. Some other verbs, formerly used with the genitive, but now more usually with the accu- 
 sative' or a preposition, are ; ac^ten, bege^ren, bcauc^en, gebroui^en, geniegen, (o^nen, pflegen, 
 nerfe^Ien, vergeffen, na^ine^men, isacten. 
 
 (*) As secondary, or remote, object (of the thing) with some verbs having 
 direct object (of the person) in the accusative. Such are : verbs usually 
 followed in English by of; as, to accuse, acquit, etc ; to warn, convirue, etc. j 
 privative\eii)S,to roi, deprive, etc.} and verbs derived from adjectives govern- 
 ing a genitive (§ 433). As : — 
 
GENITIVE WITH VERBS. 243 
 
 anftagcit, i . Bcrouben, to fob, deprioe. 
 
 t ri <!.• ! to accuse. ,, , 
 
 Befd^utbigcn, \ ent^cBen, to relieve. 
 
 freif))rec^en, to acquit. entlebigen, to rid. 
 
 tna^nen, to warn. enttoffen, to dismiss. 
 
 uberfu^ren, to convict. uerjte^ern, to assure. 
 
 iibetjeugen, to convince. wiirbigen, to deem worthy. 
 
 and a few others of like meahing. Ejtamples : 5Kan Bef(i^utbigt t^tt einc8 
 fdimeren 5Berbre(f)en8; bet 9tiif)ter fpvad^ i^n aHer @il)n1b frei ; man I|at mid^ 
 tneineg 35ennbgen« BevauBt ; er ^at nti^ [einer greimb[d)aft gereuvbigt, etc, 
 
 Or^jis single object with the passive of such verbs : @r ifl eineS f(!^H)eren 
 SSei-Brei^enS Befc^utbigt morben ;' "ber SKonn ifl be« ®ienfie8 entloffen tnorbcn. 
 
 (c) As a like secondary object with some reflexive verbs, the direct object 
 being the reflexive pronoun. Generally, with omission of the reflexive 
 pronoun, this genitive will appear in English as direct object : — 
 
 p(^ anne^nten, to take interest (in). ftc^ entBoIten, to abstain from. 
 
 ft(^ Bebiencn, to make use. ftc^ entjil)tagEn, to get rid. 
 
 ft(^ Beflei§igen, to apply one's self. ftd^ erBarmen, to have mercy. 
 
 ftcf) bemoi^tigen, to take possession. ftd^ fteuen, to rejoice in, enjoy. 
 
 ftd^ Befmnen, to recollect. ft(^ riibmen, to boast. 
 
 (t(^ crinnern, to remember. ftl!^ {(^fimen, to be ashamed. 
 
 and a few others. Examples ; Sr rii^nite ftd^ fettiet: bo^en ®eburt ; er fc^amt 
 ft^ {eineS toBen Settagen? ; §err ! erBarme bid^ un|er ; id) tonn mid) beffeu 
 nid^t Bejinnen, I cannot remember [me of] that, etc. 
 
 (d) Likewise with a few impersonals, the personal pronoun standing as 
 direct object. As : 5!Jiid^ jommert be3 SSolteS, I am sorry for the people ; mid) 
 reuet mcine« ?eicBtftnn8, 1 repent of my folly; es Berto^nt fiii^ nid^t ber aHiit)e, 
 it does not pay for the trouble, etc. 
 
 Adverbial Genitive. 
 
 435. The genitive is used adverbially: — 
 
 (a) In various adverbial relations, qualifying the verb ; as: Place: renter 
 §onb, liuler §anb, on the right, — left ; Time (indefinite) : beS SWorgenS, beS 
 2lBenb8, beS ©onntagS, einc8 S:age8, etc. ; but time definite, by the accusative 
 or with preposition (§ 309, b) ; Manner: regularly with descriptive adjective: 
 fd)nenen @d)ritte8, swiftly; (ie^enben %)i.^ti, immediately; metnes SBiffen8, 
 
 of my knowledge; UnOCrtid^teter '^a&it, unsuccessfully ; frozen 'SSivXti, gladly, 
 etc. ; and especially in poetry : bitfteren Slicte8, mSdjtigen SRufe8, etc. 
 
 Note. — Many of these phrases are now treated as mere adverbs. (See § 399; also § 65.) 
 By analogy are formed the irregular na<$t§. be§ 9tac^t3, hy night (nights). 
 
244 LESSON I.. 
 
 {6) Analogous to this is the use of the genitive in some phrases with the 
 neuter verbs fete, lebett, fletben, etc. SBir jtnb oDe be? Sobe?, we are all 
 dead men ; t^ue WaS betacS SltnteS ifi, do what belongs to your office ; t(^ bill 
 bcr SKeinung, lam of the opinion; eineS gliidUd^en EobeS jlerben, to die a 
 happy death, etc. 
 
 (c) Seentingly analogous, but really depending on the interjection, is the 
 use {§ 336, 3) of the genitive in exclamation ; as, ol) be8 K^oren, oh the fool! 
 
 Note. — Id these uses, too, the genitive is less common than formerly. 
 
 For the genitive with prepositions, see § 280. For special form of femi- 
 nine genitive in -n, see § 106, note. 
 
 Remark. — The lists given in this lesson, and hereafter, do not aim to he complete, hut 
 only illustrative, and must be supplemented by the dictionary. 
 
 EXERCISE XLIX. 
 I. In the morning we go to school; in the evening we stay at home. a. 
 Old people like to sleep (ge«t) in the afternoon. 3. The prince assured us 
 of his favor. 4. Do you remember your absent friends ? I always remem- 
 ber them. 5. He is weary of life. 6. The man has been accused of theft. 
 7. I am by no means master of the German language. 8. I am not of your 
 opinion. 9. We never considered him capable of such a deed. 10. The 
 messenger was not acquainted with the way. 11. Have mercy on the poor. 
 12. I am not ashamed of his friendship. 13. They laughed at him for (luegeil) 
 his awkwardness. 14. Are you convinced of his innocence ? 15. I am not 
 conscious of any guilt. 16. The countess will interest herself for the poor 
 child. 17. Do you make use of .(the) steel-pens ? 18. The robbers deprived 
 me of all [the] money (which) I had. 19. The king has relieved him of his 
 office. 20. It is not worth while to remember every little misfortune. 21. 
 We read in the fable that a lion once deemed a hare worthy of his friendship. 
 22. Of my knowledge, the prisoner has never been accused of a crime. 23. O 
 the happy [man], that breathes the same (one) air with thee I 24. I think of 
 thee (belli) when the nightingales' song resounds through the grove ; when 
 think'st thou of me ? 
 
 .LESSON L. 
 
 Use of the Cases. —(Continued). 
 THE DATIVE. 
 436. The dative is the case of the indirect object, which may 
 be expressed in English, generally, by the preposition to or for. 
 
THE DATIVE WITH VERBS. 24$ 
 
 Note. — In Englishi by loss of case>itiflection, the indirect object is nowhere distinguished 
 by form. When next to the verb it is usually without preposition ; when separated from the 
 verb, it requires the preposition ; as : / will write you a letter : or, a letter to you, etc. In 
 German, on the other hand, with its specific case-form, the indirect object is regularly the 
 simple dative ; and the preposition expresses a distinct relation, such as motion^ etc. Thus 
 in both constructions the German is more specific and less liable to ambiguity than the Eng- 
 lish. (See Remark, § 459.) 
 
 The Dative with Verbs. 
 
 437- Tha dative is used as indirect (usually personal) object 
 with many verbs. 
 
 1. As second object with many transitives, that is, verbs which take a 
 direct object in the accusative. As : — 
 
 6icten, to offer. leipen, to afford. 
 
 Bringpn, to bring. tiefem, to deliver. 
 
 geben, to give. reicden, to reach. 
 
 ^mViXa, to grant. \a5m, to say, teii. 
 
 taffen, to leave. Wibtnen, to devote. 
 
 let^en, to lend. jeigen, to show, 
 
 and many others. For the position of the indirect object, see § 354. 
 
 Examples : S(^ Bc6e 36nen tnein SBort ; ber greunb bietet bem greunbe 
 ble §onb ; ber Sonig reid^te i^m bie 3tcil)te ; biefe gteube gbnne it^ bir ; et ^ot 
 mir ba9 gefagt ; ber Sote bra(i)te tnir baS ®elb, etc. 
 
 (b) Observe that when such verbs are made passive the accusative object 
 becomes subject (§ 275); the dative object remains; as: ®a8 Oetb tfi Utir 
 geboten morben ; bo8 ijl mir fi^on gelagt roorben, etc. The English alternative 
 forms — / have been offered the money ; I have been told that, etc., are not 
 possible in German. 
 
 Note. — The forms are also due to confusion of objects from loss of case inflection. Here 
 again we may see — as so often in English — how the loss oifomt leads to the extension of 
 idiom. 
 
 2. The dative is used as single object with many intransitives, suoh as : — 
 
 antroorten, to answer. ^elfen, to help. 
 
 ban!cn, to thank. roten, to advise. 
 
 bienen, to serve. fc^aben, to injure. 
 
 broken, to threaten. |l^mei(^etn, to flatter. 
 
 fe^Ien, to be wanting, ail. troucn, to trust. 
 
 folgen, to follow. tro^en, to defy, 
 
 and many others. 
 
246 LESSON L. 
 
 (a) Observe that in many instances this indirect object will appear in 
 English as direct object (usually, also, from loss of the case-form, as § 436, 
 note). Such verbs require special attention. Examples : 6r ontlnortete mir, 
 Ae answered (replied to) me ; \ij banfc 3l)nen, / thank (am thankful to) you ; 
 
 Was fe^lt bir ? what ails you ? xo\x loollen unferm gelb^errn folgen. 
 
 (b) A few verbs which in English, for the same reason, can take but one 
 object — of the person or of the thing — may in German take, besides the 
 dative of the person, an accusative — usually a neuter pronoun — of the thing. 
 Thus: r believe it, or I believe you; in German, also : i(^ glaube eg S^ncn, 
 etc. — as under group i, above. 
 
 (c) hs a dative object cannot become a passive subject (§ 275), intransi- 
 tives governing a dative can be made passive only in the impersonal form ; 
 not as in English, / was answered, etc. ; but : mir ttJUrbC geaitttuortct ; mil 
 toirb ge^otfen, etc. — the dative object remaining. 
 
 Note, — The force of the English passive is. however, often given by position only, 
 as § 276 : 3^m folgte bcr ©pion, he was/ollowed by ihe spy. 
 
 3. In both uses (i and 2) a great number of compound verbs govern the 
 dative, the meaning of the simple verb being so modified as to require the 
 dative. This is especially the case with verbs compounded with ab, an, 
 bei, entgegen, nac^, Bor, ju, and the inseparable prefixes. Be-, ent-, er- ge- 
 and miber. Examples : @ie liefen bem ®iebe nod), they ran after the thief; 
 
 wir prten bcm Stebnct ju, we listened to the orator; er ftattb mir mit feincm 
 
 SRote bei, he assisted me with his counsel; bag geffiUt mir nid^t, / do not like 
 that ; btefer getter ifi ber aufmertfomteit unjereg ScJirerg entgangen, this mis- 
 take has escaped the attention of our teacher ; eg ttiiberfa^rt SDlandjem me^r 
 Ungtiitf atg er Uerbient, more misfortunes happen to many a man than he 
 deserves. 
 
 4. A dative is also required by many verbal phrases which have the force 
 of simple verbs, and by a number of verbs, which form incomplete compounds 
 with adjectives and nouns (§ 379). As : — 
 
 letb t^un, to cause sm-row. gU §ittfe fommen, to come to one's 
 
 roe^e t^un, to give pain. aid. 
 
 MJO^t t^un, to benefit. JU Sell toerben, to fall to one's share. 
 
 xooiji tooUen, to wish well. bag SBort reben, to defend. 
 
 glei^ tommcn, to equal. Sro§ bieten, to bid defiance. 
 
 JU gut tommen, to benefit. §o^u jpred^en, to mock at, etc 
 
 As : eg t^ut tnir fe^r leib, / am very sorry; ber gute greuub fam mir ju 
 ^iitfe ; mir ttiirb ein ®tit(f ju Setl, toic id) eg nimmer gefiofft, etc. 
 
DATIVE WITH VERBS. 2/ 
 
 S- (a> Some impersonal verbs (§ 291), likewise require the dative 
 the person ; as : eg affttt mir, I forebode; e8 grout mir, lam afraid; e8 Bor 
 mir, I feel anxious ; eS clelt mir, I feel disgusted ; eg f(f)n)inbelt mir, If 
 giddy i e8 traumt mir, I dream ; e« bouii)t mir, methinks, etc. 
 
 (*) In some phrases the verbs fein, toerben, ge^cn and erge^cn, are' us 
 
 impersonally with the dative. As : (S8 ge^t mit TOO^I, it fares well with n 
 lam getting on well; mir Wirb fc^Iimm, I begin to feel sick; nun ift mir miel 
 tDof)I, now I feel well again ; mit ifl ttttt, lam cold; tnenn bem fo ift, if that 
 so, etc. 
 
 6. With a few reflexive verbs, the dative stands as reflexive (person; 
 object. These are sometimes caXleA false reflexives (§ 434). As : — ' 
 
 ftii) anmogen, to assume. ftci^ getrauen, to venture. 
 
 ft^ etnbilben, to imagine. ft(i^ tPOmel^metl, to purpose, 
 
 and some others. (See § 251.) As : ic^ mage mir ni(i^t8 on, it)a8 nic^t mein i| 
 icf) getroue mir nid^t boS ju fogen ; er bilbet ftd^ eiti er fei ein grogcr 2Konn, 
 
 imagines he is a great man, etc. 
 
 Note. — The address of a letter is often put in the dative, as if after an implied verb ; 
 (Bern) ^errit ; (Set) grau ; (3>em) ftfriiulein — '—, etc. (but also an with accusativ 
 
 For the dative in sense oifrom, see § 440. 
 
 EXERCISE L. 
 
 1. The young count flattered the old king. 2. He has served faithfu 
 his king and country. 3. This little boy resembles his mother. 4. How 
 you like your new house (how pleases you^'i 5. The poor old man thank 
 us. 6. The king wishes him well. 7. The robber defied me. 8. No o 
 will help me. 9. Order me a cup of coffee. 10. It seems to me that tl 
 matter will not redound to your praise. 11. This castle belongs to the ki 
 of Saxony. 12. Tell me how this hat becomes me. 13. You ought 
 answer your teacher. 14. What has happened to you? 15. The capts 
 threatened the soldiers, because they did not obey him. 16. I told him t 
 truth, but I am sorry to say I was not Relieved. 17. I will read to yoi 
 few pages from this book ; will you listen to me .' . 18. It gave me pain 
 refuse your request. 19. How are you getting on .' I am getting on ve 
 well. 20. The thief has run away from the ofiicer; run after him. 21. I 
 shall not escape us ; believe me (that). 22. I have been told that that you 
 man has been paid a large sum of money. 23. If that (dat^ is so, why dc 
 he not relieve his poor parents ? 24. Follow my advice, and yield to 1 
 request. 
 
248 LESSON LI. 
 
 LESSON LI. 
 The Dative. — Continued. 
 
 Dative with Adjectives. 
 
 438. The dative is used with many adjectives, or participles 
 used as adjectives, such as are usually followed in English by 
 to ox for. 
 
 {a\ With adjectives that signify nearness, likeness, fitnsss, inclination, 
 advantage, or their contraries ; as : — 
 
 O^ntid^, similar. ^olb, favorable. 
 
 ongene^m, agreeable. IfifltB/ troublesome. 
 
 eigen, own, peculiar. lieb, dear. 
 
 ftcmb, strange. ^ ixa\t, near. 
 
 geittein, common. fl^utbig, owing. 
 
 gtet(^, like. tXiXi, faithful. 
 
 gnabig, gracious. ttlibrtg, ctdverse. 
 
 fjeitfam, salutary. tDxHtoranten, welcome, 
 
 and many others. 
 
 (*) Many of these are participles used as adjectives, or adjectives derived 
 from verbs which govern the dative; as : — 
 
 belannt, known. Be^iitflid^, helpful. 
 
 geneig;t, inclined. bonftar, thankful. 
 
 ^tWa^tU, favorable. bieutid^, serviceable. 
 
 getBod)fen, equal to. ge^orfom, obedient. 
 
 Ucr^afet, hateful. ItitfeUli^, usefld. 
 
 ilberlegen, superior. f(i)abU(i^, hurtful, 
 
 and many others. 
 
 Examples: ®er @o^n iji bera SSater abniid) ; biefe ©efd^id^te ifl alien 
 bEtonttt ; biefe ScbcnSort tft t^m cigen ; it^ bin btefet 3trbeit no(^ nic^t 
 gewad^fen ; \i\ mic gnfibtg ; bag ^eUe ?id)t ift ben 3lugen fd^obltd^ ; bic §cu(^elci 
 ift mir Ber^agt ; fei mir iDilltommen, etc. 
 
 Note. — As in case of the genitive (§ 433-4) , so instead of the dative a preposition with 
 its case will sometimes occur, as an alternative construction, with an adjective or a verb; as: 
 f einblit^ or fteunbH(^ segeit jemonben ; out einen sttrnen ; nimm bief eS Sui^, i# ^o6'5 fUt bt<^ 
 [bit] geftidt, etc. 
 
THE DATIVE PRIVATIVE. 249 
 
 (c) A few such adjectives may take in German, besides the dative of the 
 person, a second object of the thing. Compare § 437, 2, d; as: id^ bin nitr 
 letner ©li^utb (gen.) BehJUJjt, lam conscious of no fault; bo« (ace.) binid^ if|m 
 nic^t fd^ulbtg, I do not owe him that, etc. 
 
 Dative of Interest. 
 
 439. A more remote relation, yet allied to the foregoing, is 
 expressed by the dative of the person concerned in, or affected 
 by, an action or its result. This is known as the dative of inte- 
 rest, or ethical dative. 
 
 (fl) Of the person for or against vfhom something is done ; as : tf^it' eS mir 
 bod), do it for me, please; fd^teiben @ie Itltv btefe 3lufgabe ab, copy me this exer- 
 cise; fte tft mir ein ^logegeifi, she is to me a tormenting spirit; tDO \i) tiiiv eine 
 jjtcube gejjftailjt, wherever I have planted me a joy, etc. 
 
 (b) Often this dative will take the place of the English possessive; as: 
 fiefiet bent Sntber Uin ben §at8, she fell on her brother's neck; bo8 ^crj 
 jitterte mir im Seibe, my heart trembled within me ; fie f djnitten bcm (f einbe 
 ben SRiitfjing ob, they cut off the enemy's retreat ; id) majc^e mir bie §anbe, / 
 wash my hands, eXc; and in phrases like: it)m JU (S^ren, in his honor; mir 
 JU ?iebe,yor my sake, etc. 
 
 Note. — Yet frequently the possessive will also stand ; as, ftveic^e tntr meine Jpfoten, smear 
 (me) mjfpaws — sometimes with, yet also without, special emphasis. 
 
 (c) In many cases the relation can hardly be expressed in English, but 
 only indicates the interest taken by the person speaking or spoken to ; as : 
 h)tt8 maiden @ie mir bo, what are you doing there (I should like to know) ; 
 btciben @ie mir gefunb, keep well (/ hope you may) ; 3()r Berfii^rt nitr tetncn 
 mel)r, you will seduce no one else (against my interests), etc. — Sometimes only 
 a reference to one's opinion or feeling: (Sin SBojlavb bin id) bir (you say). 
 
 (d) Here may be mentioned the dative in exclamations, though these 
 expressions are properly elliptical and the dative a true objective ; as : §eil 
 bem ©ieger, hail to the victor; roe^e bem Sefiegten, woe to the conquered; 9lu^e 
 fciner %\i!)t, peace to his ashes (as if 9iuf)e [ei), etc. 
 
 The Dative Privative. 
 
 440. The dative (usually to, for) sometimes corresponds to 
 the English from (of), both with verbs and adjectives. 
 
 This is sometimes called the dative privative, but is still really an indirect 
 object, usually of disadvantage, etc. (Compare English differ from, or with ; 
 
250 LESSON LI. 
 
 axerse/rtm or io, etc.) ; as : er no^m tnir mciti ganjeg SSermbgen, took from 
 me, etc. ; |te entteigt mir ben ©etiebten, ben Sroutigam raubt ftc mir ; ber 
 ®ieb"ifl jeiiien SSerfoIgern entflo^en ; bem®Iaiiben abtrunnig, recreant from 
 
 {to) the faith, etc. 
 
 Note In some cases, by a change in a relation of objects, an alternative fonn may be 
 
 used with the genitive. Thus, either : bet 3)te6 taiibte i^m fein @elb, or beraubte i^n feineS 
 @elbe3 ; and in other cases, a preposition (son, /mm) will be preferred : er na^m eS von mir ; 
 aUiiinnis von bet SRelision, etc. 
 
 For the dative with preposition, see §§ 164, i8o,_ 280; special forms, § io6 
 For the dative with ju, as the factitive object, see § 443i ^• 
 
 Remark. — Attention has already been called to the loss of the earlier case-inflection in 
 English, whereby the dative is no longer distinguished inform from the accusative. Many 
 instances now recognized in English grammar as direct object (accusative) were originally 
 dative. The student must therefore be cautioned against this defect of form in English, 
 to which it is chiefly due that the dative seems to be so much more largely used in German. 
 
 It is also to be remarked that the dative in German is more freely used with pronouns than 
 with nouns; an alternative form, with preposition, being more frequently used with the latter. 
 This also is due to the more explicit and convenient distinction of the pronoun inflections. 
 
 EXERCISE LI. 
 
 I. The prince is very favorable to us. 2. He owes his tailor five hundred 
 marks. 3. Be welcome to us. 4. Are you equal to the task ? 5. I do not 
 trust him, for he has not told me the truth. 6. Do not trust those who flatter 
 you. 7. Go out of my way. 8. The robbers took from me all (maS) I had. 
 9. The enemy was superior to us, therefore we retired behind (ace.) the walls 
 of the city. 10. This history was known to us all. n. Lying is odious to 
 me. 12. Everything seemed to me strange after such a long absence. 13. It 
 will be conducive to your health to take a walk every day. 14. The prince 
 thanked me in the most gracious manner. 15. The company of the stranger 
 was most agreeable to the ladies. 16. The conquered fell at (Ju) the victor's 
 feet and begged for mercy. 17. The entire army has fallen into the hands of 
 (dat.) the enemy. 18. This unworthy son has broken his poor father's heart, 
 ig. Too much eating (infin.) and drinking is injurious to the health. 20. Hail 
 to the saviour of his country, the friend of the oppressed ! 21. Don't climb 
 (for my sake, dat.firon.) too high, my son ; you might (Ibmtett) fall and break 
 your arm. 22. To the lazy, everything is (Werben) difficult. 23. Explain me 
 this exercise, if you please (if it pleases you). 24. To thee the highest jewel 
 is my memory (to thee is, etc.). 
 
THE ACCUSATIVE. 25 1 
 
 LESSON LII. 
 Use of the Cases. — Continued. 
 
 THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 Direct Object. 
 
 441. The accusative is the case of the direct object, that is, 
 the object reached or directly affected by an action. 
 
 (a) All transitive verbs have their direct object in the accusative. Ex- 
 amples are unnecessary. 
 
 Note. — It has already been seen that some verbs transitive in English are intransitive in 
 German, that is, take the object in genitive or dative, or with preposition (see §§ 434, 437). 
 Such cases must be carefully noted. 
 
 [6) The accusative is also the direct (usually personal) object of most re- 
 flexive and impersonal verbs (see §§ 251, 291). For exceptions, § 437, 5, 6. 
 
 {c) As has been seen already, a few adjectives, more usually construed 
 with the genitive, sometimes take an accusative, usually with (ein or Wcvbeil, 
 as if object of the combined idea. Such are : bewugt, gettia^r, I08, miibe, jntt, 
 Wttt, Wiirbig, juftiebcn, and a few others ; as : id) werbe i$n nid^t lo9, / can- 
 not ^el rid of him ; '\i\ bill C8 jufriebeil, I am content with it — most usually a 
 neuter pronoun. With tjoll (UoUer) a simple noun may stand as § 431, c ; 
 as : boll (BoHer) aHut ; but not with an art. or adj. (See § 433.) 
 
 Double Objects. 
 
 442. A few verbs take two accusatives — of the person and of 
 the thing. 
 
 These are : le^ren, to teach ; and sometimes fofiett, to cost; and, with neutei 
 pronoun only, \xa.^VA, to ask ; Bitten, to beg ; iiberteben, to persuade ; vs: et 
 
 le^rte meinen @o^n bie ®rammati{ ; bo8 ^at mii^ (or mir) Diet @elb getojlet j 
 baS foHten @ie mic^ nii'^t fragen ; baS fonnen @ie mid^ nid)! uberreben, etc. 
 
 Note. — But more usually, fragen nai^ ; Bitten urn ; UCerreben son : cr fragte m\i) bar« 
 nai^ ; and always: er fragte natf meinem So^n ; er bat mic^ um @e[b, etc. (with noun objects). 
 
 Predicate or Factitive Object. 
 
 443- A second accusative often appears as the result, or effect, 
 of the action, hence calledyarf2V«w (sometimes complementary, as 
 completing the idea of the verb). 
 
 (a) Verbs of naming or calling take the name as a second accusative ; 
 such are Ijcigen, tiennen; taufen, to baptise ; fd^e(ten, \i)\xa'^\tvi, to scold {call 
 
252 LESSON Lll. 
 
 had names). See § 429, 2 ; as : tuir itemtcn biefen SnoBcn ben f aulen §on8 ; et 
 
 jl^olt mi^ Silgner, he called me a liar, etc. 
 
 (*) In many cases the second accusative will be an adjective, expressing 
 the condition or quality resulting from the action. (S8 mori^t lllir baS ^evj 
 fc^mer, it maki^ my heart heavy; et a,i'^'i>V&%\<\%'at&, he poured the glass full ; 
 ber Sfigf'-' f'^''6 ^cn §ttfen tot, the hunter shot the hare dead. 
 
 (c) With verbs which express the manner of regarding an object, such as 
 fatten, au8geben, anne^men, betradjten, onfe^en, erlloren, and the like, fur, 
 sometimes al8, is used with the adjective. Examples : @r ^Qt bie ©a^e fitv 
 rid)tig ertlatt, he has declared the matter correct; man ^ott t^n fiir einen 58e= 
 triiger (.holds him for); @te fonnen bie ©oc^e al8 obgemod)t betrac^ten, ;/«« 
 may consider the matter as settled. (See § 429, 4, *.) 
 
 (d) But, contrary to the English usage, verbs of electing, appointing, 
 creating, etc., take the second object in the dative with JU and, in the siiigu- 
 lar.thecontractedartide (§191, note). As: lD0^len,ertt)a5leH,fc^/i»rf; erueiinen, 
 to name, appoint; modjCn, to make; befitmnien, BejleHen, to appoint; (atben, to 
 anoint; fdjlagen, to dub (a knight), etc. ; as : Won ^ot Jperrn %. jum ^rofeffor 
 ermimt; er na^m fte guv grou; but pi., ju ^JSrofeffoten, gn grouen, etc. 
 
 Note. — In all these cases it is only the direct or primaiy, usually personal, object that 
 can be subject of the passive (§ 275) ; as: ii^ raurbe barnac^ gefragt, barum gebeten; ba§ 
 ffinb iDutbe 3o^onn getouft ; ba§ ®[n§ routbc uoU segoften i fierr 21. ift sum Stobttot errofi^It 
 loorben. In case of double accusative (§ 443) the passive is better avoided. 
 
 Cognate Object. 
 
 444. Some verbs, properly intransitives, may take the accu- 
 sative of the noun, usually with a qualifying adjunct, of the 
 same or kindred meaning with the verb. This is called the 
 cognate object ; as: ^d^ traumte einen \i:ii)V.va.%xo.v.xa., I dreamed a 
 beautiful dream ; er ftarb einen i^elbenmiittgen S^ob ; er f d^lcift ben 
 3;obe§fd^Iaf. 
 
 Note. — This accusative is not properly objective, but adverbial ; as : he sleeps a deep 
 sleep^= he sleeps deeply ; he died a peaceful death = he died peacefully , etc. — the idea of 
 the noun being really in the verb. But the usage is much extended, especially in poetiy. 
 
 Adverbial Accusative. 
 
 445. Nearly allied with the accusative naming the (direct) 
 object reached, is the accusative expressing measure or extent: 
 how far, how long, how much, etc. 
 
ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE. 253 
 
 (a) This occurs with verbs of motion or duration or of measure ; such as : 
 hjiecjeil, to weigh ; gelten, to be worth ; {often, to cost, etc., and with adjectives 
 like alt, old ; breit, broad; grog, tall ; ^od), high; \anQ,long; t\i\,deep; tneit, 
 far, etc. ; as : er ifl je^n ajiettett gelaufen ; bet Srieg l)at je^n 3al)te gebauert ; 
 er l^ord^te einen SlugenBUd ; bie 'JRaiitt ift 30 gug iio&i ; ber Dberft ift 60 Sal^re 
 alt ; bev Soffer toiegt 60 IjBfunb ; id^ bin i^tn 10 %^a.\tx jc^ulbig, I owe him lo 
 
 dollars, etc. 
 
 Note. — i. To an accusative expressing duration of time the adverb tang is often added ; 
 as: 20 ^a^re Ittng, 20 years long; einen ^ag lang, a whole day, etc. ; and, in expressions 
 of distance, sometimes the adverb n)eit ; as ; fie gogen ben SQagen 10 SAeiEen nieit, /o miles 
 far, etc. 
 
 2. Sometimes also a preposition is appended adverbially; as: ben ganjen 2^ag burc^, the 
 while day through. Or an adverb of direction, as; er pel bie Kreppen i^inunter, downstairs; 
 er ftieg ben 99erg ^inauf, etc. 
 
 (b) The accusative is also used to express a definite time when; as: 
 fiomtjieit @ie ju tnir biefen 3lbenb, nac^ften SKitthioii), jeben £og, etc., and in 
 such expressions as gloeimal ben %a%, bie 2Boii)e, twice a day, week, etc. (See 
 for dates, § 309.) 
 
 Note. — This must be distinguished from the genitive (§ 435) of indefinite time, or repeated 
 occurrence. As: be§ Sonniog? bleibe i^ ju goufe, on a Sunday^ or Sundays; be8 MbenbS, 
 or abenbS, in the evening, etc. 
 
 Accusative Absolute. 
 
 446. The accusative is used in an absolute or independent 
 construction — yet really adverbial : — 
 
 (a) Frequently with a perfect participle ; as : bie ganje ©tabt lag in Stfc^e, 
 
 einige §oujer auSgenomnten, a few houses excepted; ben SBlid ouf bie grbe 
 
 gel^eftet, fd^ritt er langjatn §er, {^joith) his look fastened on the ground. 
 
 (b) Less frequently without participle, especially in poetical style : ©tolg 
 flnnb er ba, bie §onb ouf bem ©d^werte, with his hand on his sword. Note 
 this use of with. 
 
 For the accusative with prepositions, see §§ 178, 179, 280. 
 
 EXERCISE Lll. 
 I. We were a whole month in London. 2. A sack of potatoes costs three 
 marks. 3. My friend has been elected president of the Society. 4. I take 
 (hold) him for an impostor. 5. This news has made me happy. 6. The 
 painter has painted the door green. 7. The bridge is a hundred feet long 
 and thirty-three feet broad. 8. My grandmother is 74 years old. 9. I have 
 run myself tired. 10. The judge declared him (for) innocent, though he was 
 
254 LESSON LII. 
 
 one of the greatest thieves, ii. We were so hungry that we considered 
 ourselves very lucky to get a little bread and cheese. 12. We proposed [to] 
 ourselves to ascend the Brocken ; therefore we remained three days at Ilsen- 
 burg and waited for fine weather. 13. We fancied that the matter was 
 (fct) settled. 14. Do not imagine that you will ever be elected [a] town- 
 councillor. 1 5. He has been ill [for] three years, and has passed many a 
 sleepless night on his bed. 16. Goethe was born the 28th August, 1749. 
 1 7. The post arrives every day at siic o'clock in the morning and at four 
 o'clock in the afternoon. 18. My brother has been appointed professor of 
 (the) history at (ju) Berlin. 19. Date your letter thus : Boston, May 23d, 
 1887. 20. The king has appointed (thej Count B. ambassador at the Span- 
 ish Court. 21. [For] six months long, that old professor taught me danc- 
 ing (inf. «.) three times a week, two hours each day. 22. This stormy life 
 ended, the old hero sleeps the sleep of the just. 23. There she comes [with] 
 the crucifix in her hand, and pride in her heart. 24. They were followed by 
 [them follolaed) the sheriff, with a white staff in his hand. 
 
 Prepositions with Cases. — Summary. 
 
 447. In connection with the cases belongs properly the treatment of Pre- 
 positions. But it is impossible to bring this subject within the limits of 
 elementary statement. The very term preposition is not easy to define ; nor 
 is it easier to draw the line between words which may be called prepositions 
 primer and words which are only used as prepositions (sometimes called 
 spurious prepositions, as § 280). There is perhaps no word which is always a 
 preposition. 
 
 (a) Prepositions are, for the most part, properly adverbs, that is, verb modi- 
 fiers, and are still used as such in both English and German ; as : look up ; 
 come in ; go on ; how came she by that light (verb come by) ? etc. ; and in 
 German: erfing on ; et fianb auf ; er fdjrieb ben SStief ob, etc. When com- 
 bined with the verb alone they are properly adverbs, and should be so called ; 
 when limited or defined by an object also, they are properly prepositions. 
 Thus prepositions have been expressively called transitive adverbs. Some 
 words, however, which are habitually used with an object, are commonly 
 called prepositions, as a distinct part of speech, even when used only as 
 adverbs. 
 
 (b) In German, however, the use of the preposition must be considered in 
 connection with the case, a distinction no longer obvious in English. The 
 meaning of the entire phrase, preposition and object, is made up of the 
 case-relation, with the preposition, combined with the action, motion, con- 
 dition, etc, expressed by the verb. Primarily it is the verb that determines 
 
ADJECTIVES. 255 
 
 the case, and gives to the preposition its apparent difference of meaning — 
 its true relation being really always the same. (This may be clearly seen in 
 the use of the dative or accusative with the same prepositions, § 179; as: 
 cr fa6 auf bent SSaunte — Ilettctte auf ben SBaum ; bie SGBolIe ^tng iiber bera 
 33crge — 303 iiber ben 5Berg, etc.) But by habit of use, the preposition Is said 
 to govern the case, or to be used in such or such a sense with this or that 
 case, etc. The full explanation of these uses is made the more difficult in 
 German- — and still more difficult in English — because the form and force 
 of the original cases have often become obscured or lost. 
 
 (c) The primary meaning of the prepositions is usually a relation of place, 
 transferred often to lime, and thence extended, or transferred, to a wide 
 variety of figurative and often remote relations, in many of which the orig- 
 inal meaning of the preposition is difficult to traCe. The so-called spurious 
 prepositions are mostly of occasional use, and generally have only, or nearly^ 
 their primary signification. But the more important prepositions — them- 
 selves few in number and monosyllabic : an, auf, 0U8, bet, burd), fiir, in, mit, 
 nac^, urn, Don, Bor, JU — to which may be added fiber and unter — have 
 acquired tiie largest variety of idiomatic use, and of secondary or transferred 
 meaning. 
 
 The explanation of such uses, often difficult, sometimes perhaps im- 
 possible (and no less difficult in English than in German), cannot be at- 
 tempted within elementary limits. Their mere enumeration would be impos- 
 sible. For illustration only, and for reference, the more important uses of 
 some of the prepositions are given in an Appendix. Other idioms must be care- 
 fully noted as they occur, and compared with the corresponding English forms. 
 
 LESSON LIII. 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 See Lessons VIII.-XII. Some special uses will be here 
 added. 
 
 Use. 
 
 448. Some adjectives are used only attributively — others 
 only as predicates. This depends partly on the meaning — 
 partly, however, on usage only. 
 
 I. As attributives only are used : 
 
256 LESSON LIII. 
 
 (fl) Most pronominal adjectives. (Exception § 193.) 
 (6) The ordinal numerals, and superlatives. (§ 160.) 
 (c) Some adjectives oiplace and time; adjectives oi material in -en, -tm; 
 and some derivatives in -i|c^, -Ui) — such as : — 
 
 bojttg, of there. gotbeil, golden. 
 
 '^ieftg, of here.. ^&\txn, of glass. 
 
 ^eutig, of to-day. irbiyd^, earthly. 
 
 gejlrig, of yesterday. tfiglid), daily, etc. 
 
 Where such adjectives occur in the predicate, they will be coftstrued 
 attributively; as: bte 'ipofl ip eine tagli(i)e ; bie filaffe tft bie erite: — or a 
 preposition will be substituted ; as : bie X&fi ift Don ®olb, etc. 
 
 Note. — Exceptions are found in poetry ; fte^t er bort fteinerit, etc. 
 
 2. As predicates only are used: — 
 
 bereit, ready. funb, known. 
 
 gar, done: quer, across. 
 
 geWa^r, aware. quitt, quit, free. 
 
 ^abl)af t, in possession of. teill)0f t, participating in, 
 
 and some others; a few compounds, as : — 
 
 ob^olb, unfavorable. eingebenf, mindful. 
 
 anftc^tig, in sight of ^anbgeniein, hand to hand, etc., 
 
 with some words properly nouns ; as : — 
 
 feinb (fcinbtiii^), not (notig), 
 
 freunb (freunbtt(f)), niil? (ttii^Iiii^), 
 
 letb, ft^ulb (fi^ulbig), etc. 
 
 Inflection. 
 
 449. Some irregularities, and some diversities of usage, occur 
 in the declension of adjectives : 
 
 I . The principle which determines the strong or weak form of the adjective 
 admits occasional exceptions : 
 
 (a5- After personal pronouns, the strong form is strictly regular ; but the 
 mixed forms are used generally ; as : t(^ armet ; ®ie gutet SKann ; but mir 
 ovmen ; i^r guten aJMnner ; Wir Seutfc^en, etc. 
 
 (b) In the plural nominative or accusative the pronominals olle, einige, 
 etlii^e, Icine, ntandfe, jold^e, weld^e (as interrogative adjective), nte^rere, ber= 
 fdiiebenc, bide, toentge, often admit the strong instead of the weak form; but 
 the usage — formerly extended even to bicfe, j[ene — is hardly now correct. 
 
ADJECTIVE INFLECTION. 257 
 
 (c) Properly, successive adjectives of itie kind should have the same de- 
 clension ; as : bo8 S^uBni^ WSti meiiieS ©o^neS; guter, ftoiler, alter SSSein, 
 etc. But sometimes a second adjective will be weak if it stands in a nearer 
 relationto the noun; as: eine glafi^e Don gutem roten aSeine (= SRothiein); 
 nad) longem Bcrgeblic^en @ud)en, etc.; but the use is not to be imitated. 
 
 (d) A few words used idiomatically without article in certain phrases are 
 treated as pronominals and followed by the weak adjective. Such are : Bejagt, 
 aforesaid; \A%VCfi\s, fallowing; gebai^t, mentioned; Obig, above. As : Befagter olte 
 ajJann, the said old man; folgenbeS fd^OIie SBcrf, the following beautiful work, etc. 
 
 Notes. — Observe that the strong form stands properly after all indecUnables ; also after 
 aQ, niand^, toeld^, etc., when undedined ; and after a preceding genitive, etc. 
 
 2. In addition to the usual cases mentioned in Lesson X., the ending of 
 the adjective is omitted : 
 
 (a) In the first of two adjectives which together mark one definition — 
 especially in titles, as: baS Jfoniglie^ ^Pveufiifi^e aJtiniftetiunt ; blau mib 
 jdjroarje SSanber (of blue and black color), etc. 
 
 Note. — These are practically compounds, and might be so written, or with hyphen. 
 
 {b) This usage is widely extended in poetic style, in cases not admitting 
 of such explanation. Within a few pages occur : ein unertDttrtet Unge^eureS 
 @d)i(ffat : ben fo((i^ Bertoterifd^en SRat ; ein fed entfii^Ioffener ©d^ttiarmer ; in 
 einet finfier nngliidESboUen 3eit; Mcfe8 unftet fc^toanle 3lol)r; ein gefittet 
 fi-b^tid) ajolf. (§i4S-i. 
 
 (f) This poetic usage must be carefully distinguished from the adverb ; 
 bie fiebetBoft jitternbe Srlto ; bo8 Wunberlid^ graciofe SJlSbi^en ; inie ^intcr» 
 liftig treulos erfd^eint mein SRat, how deceitfully faithless, etc. (§ 314.) 
 
 ((/) Generally, it is important to remark that the adverb in German is 
 distinguished from the uninflected adjective only by the sense. Usually, the 
 distinction is obvious ; but sometimes it may be questionable, or im- 
 material ; as : ba8 STOobifien xMit fc^eu gur Seite ; ber Stubever errelc^t fiegrei^ 
 bag Ufet ; il)re 3Iugen teudjteten aertlart ; fte blidte uerhjirrt auf ; er »er= 
 fd)ttianb lautloS in ber aJlenge ; ba8 leije tier^oUenbe ©etiiute (bo8 teije, Ber= 
 ^aUenbe ©eioute), etc. — and many like cases \the ship arrived safe, or safely\. 
 
 (e) Rarely, in poetry, occur examples like lieb Snaht, for Ueber ^nabe. 
 
 Note. — This point will require the more attention because it is contrary to the usual 
 analogy — the grammatical relations being, in general, more largely distinguished by form in 
 German than in English. 
 
 3. In some cases the adjective is regarded as noun, and loses its adjective 
 inflection. This occurs : 
 
2S8 LESSON LIIl. 
 
 {a) In certain set phrases, as : 3IIt unb Sung ; bo8 Out unb SSofe ; bag 
 fReilt uub Unred^t, etc. 
 
 (6) In the names of languages : ba8 ©eutfli^, eiu reiueS ®eutf(^ ; and of 
 colors : bo8 SRot, ciu buuKeS Slau, etc. 
 
 Such forms must be distinguished from the adjective used as noun ; as, 
 bag ®Ute, bie 9lltcn. Compare etTOaS SRot, some red; etttJOg 9iote?, something 
 red (and English, sweets to the sweet, etc.). 
 
 Comparison. 
 
 450. In addition to the general rules already given (Lessons 
 XL, XII., XXXIV.), the following are important, with reference 
 to the comparative and superlative : 
 
 I. In German, generally, all adjectives admitting comparison — ^ including 
 participles used as adjectives — are compared alike, without regard to number 
 of syllables. But instead of the usual inflection, an auxiliary (adverb) com- 
 parison is used in some cases : 
 
 («) With adjectives that do not admit of attributive use ; as : er ifl Itie^r 
 baron fd)ulb al8 ic^ — am nieifien jc^ulb ; roeniger — am raenigften — eingebeni, 
 etc. (§ 448, 2). 
 
 ip) When two qualities are compared in the same subject ; as : ber ^abe 
 ift me^r leidjtftnnig at8 biife. — But the inflected form also occurs, as: bie 
 SCruppen Waren ta))ferer a(8 jabtretc^, more brave than numerous. 
 
 ((t) And, generally, in the superlative oi eminence, or absolute superlative ; 
 as: ein ougetft (d)bne8 Sinb ; ein IjiicEift (ettener gall (see § 316). But such 
 forms as : ein allediebfte8 ^inb ; mit tiefjier SRii^rung, etc., also occur. 
 
 i. After a comparison of superiority or of equality, alg and Itiie both 
 occur; but the better usage requires al8 in the former, njie only in the latter; 
 as : ba8 SKfibcfiEn ijl idjonet al8 i^re SKutter ; cBenfo (^6n lute i^re ajJuttet. 
 
 Rarely benn (then) is found after a comparative — usually when a(8 pre- 
 cedes; as: @r toax tud^tiger al8 gelb^erv benn al8 ©taotsmonn. 
 
 3. The distinction between the inflected superlative and the form with 
 om, in the predicate (§ 161) — though not always strictly observed, is import- 
 ant. The latter is really adverbial, defining the condition, not the subject; 
 the former is the true adjective superlative. As: bie Sonne fl^eint om 
 beUften — ijl om ^eUflen — im ©ommer ; biefe8 fiinb ijl om fd^bnfien, menn 
 eg f(^loft ; but we could not say: biefeg Sinb i|i am jungjten. The tendency 
 
CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE. 259 
 
 is to use the am form when the adjective superlative would be more correct. 
 Note also the distinction between the form with am and that with aufS 
 (§ 3 ' 5\ the absolute superlative. 
 
 4. The superlative is sometimes strengthened by the prefix oUet, of all ; 
 bev atlerbejie SWamx, the very best man; bo8 StUerl^eiligfte, the Holy of holies — 
 the most holy. 
 
 Note. — The compound nUerHeBft is the only superlative that can stand in the predicate 
 without inflection. As : baS ift alleriiebft, that is most charming. 
 
 5. It was remarked (§ 316), that a few words use the superlative in -jl ai 
 adverbs. Such are: fiugerft, ^oc^ft, tSngfl, meift, tiadjit; gefoHigfl, giitigft, 
 ge^orjamft and a few others. These forms are used only in the absolute sense. 
 
 For the correlative comparison, the the, see § 334. 
 
 Concord of the Adjective. 
 
 451. Outside of the general rules of agreement, it is import- 
 ant only to remark : 
 
 (a) The agreement of the adjective is with its own subject noun, which, 
 however, is often understood. As : ber ffi(et)^ont ift ba8 grb^te (Sier) unter 
 ben £ieren. For exception, see § 452, note. 
 
 {])) An adjective agreeing with the plural @ie in address will be singular, 
 if the pronoun means one person ; as, @ie, guter, etc. 
 
 For the position of the adjuncts of the adjective, see § 353. 
 
 Remark. — All the rules with regard to the inflection or concord of the adjective require 
 the more attention because, in consequence of absence of inflection in the English adjective, 
 they are likely to be neglected by students. 
 
 EXERCISE Llll. 
 
 1. In yesterday's paper I read the last news of the war. 2. Has to-day's 
 newspaper come ? 3. This young lady is not so amiable as her elder sister. 
 4. The weather is excessively cold. 5. We have received very favorable 
 news from America. 6. She is a most modest girl. 7. This carriage is 
 more useful than handsome. 8. The longer the day, the shorter the night. 
 9. The rose is the most beautiful of all flowers. 10. Charles was on the 
 highest (uppermost) step, whilst I was on the lowest. 11. He showed us 
 into the. interior apartments of the castle. 12.' Everybody wished to be (the) 
 first. 13. He wears a gold chain, but his watch is silver. 14. The boyran 
 up, in greatest haste, and told me the sad news. 1 5. We poor sinners need 
 
260 LESSON LIV. 
 
 the mercy of the good God. i6. The wise [man] is content when he has 
 only the necessary. 17. A truly modest man does not seek to seem wiser 
 than he is. 18. An old woman, unknown to me (a to me unknown, etc.) 
 delivered this most (^very) distressing letter. 19. Many incredible stories 
 are related of that poor old blind man. 20. The following event took place 
 in the year 1818. 21. Red, white and blue flags waved on all [the] streets. 
 22. A crowd of people — old and young together — rushed in highest ex- 
 citement over the narrow wooden bridge. 23. The testimony of these my 
 friends will refute that most unjust charge. 24. These children are the 
 worst that I know ; they are most agreeable when they are not present. 
 
 LESSON LIV. 
 The Pronouns. 
 
 The Personals. 
 
 452. See §§ 182-184, for declension and general statements. 
 The following special points are to be noted : 
 
 (a) In consequence of the different system of gender in English, the 
 agreement of the personal pronoun with the grammatical gender of its ante- 
 cedent requires attention. As : @r l)at feinen @d^Iiiffel Bertoren, er tann i^ii 
 ni^t finben, Ae has lost his key, he cannot find \t. Sie(e ©tal^lfeber ifl MX- 
 rofiet, i^ iuerbe fie reegttierfcn ; this steel-pen is rusty, I shall throw it away. 
 
 But the pronouns referring to baS SBetb, the woman, and the neuter dimin- 
 utives of sex, graulein, 2)iab^en, finiibteiii, @o^nd)en, etc., generally prefer 
 the natural gender. As: SBo ifl ba8 grciulein? @ie ge^t im Oorten fpajieren. 
 SEBaS mat^t 3^r @o^nd)en? 3d^ l)offe, er ifi beffer. Not so, however, when in 
 the same sentence with the noun, as: @in SOlfibt^ett, roel^eS bovt lebte, a girl 
 who, etc. — and, often, not so in poetic or familiar style. 
 
 Note. — This usage is sometimes extended to an adjective when it does not stand in 
 immediate connection with its noun; as, bie fc^onfie unter flUen Sniibc^eh. 
 
 (b) The prepositions l^alBen, TOegeii, Willen (§ 280) form compounds with 
 the personal genitives, et or t being inserted. Thus : mcinetWegen, for my 
 sake, as far as J am concerned; beinettuegen, for thy sake; unt feinettoiUen, 
 for his sake; itn|erttt)egcn,/(p;- our sake; euert^olben, S^ret^olben, etc. 
 
 Note. — But, as the earlier forms meinentroegen, feinentioillen, etc., show, these iorms 
 • were originally possessives with cases of nouns — t inserted as § 398, b. 
 
 (c) The anomalous forms meine8glei(!^en, beineSgleidjen, etc. (also meincs 
 
THE PRONOUNS. PERSONAL. ' 26l 
 
 ^en, etc.), the likes of me, my equals, etc., arose probably out of pronoun 
 genitives, dependent on the adjective. They are now practically compounds. 
 For further remark on the personal genitives, see §§ 430-1. For the use 
 of the dative where the English idiom requires possessive, see § 439. For 
 demonstratives used as substitutes for personals, see § 457. For the relative 
 after personals, see § 459. For the pronouns in address, see §§ 186-9. 
 
 453. The neuter pronoun e§ has some special uses, corre- 
 sponding largely to English it or there, but in part peculiar. 
 
 (o) Akin to its' use as impersonal subject (Less. XXXI.), is its use as in- 
 definite subject of verbs without known. agent — sometimes with poetic 
 effect. As: c8 Xai^it neben bem erjci^ev ^ell auf, there was a loud laugh 
 close by the speaker; ba jog e« trie mit wei^ii Stebelfd^teiern iiber bie §oibe, 
 then something passed, etc. 
 
 (b) As merely formal — expletive — subject, with intransitives in passive 
 or reflexive form. As : e8 toirb gebetet (§ 275) ; e« luirb mir gcvaten ; e8 
 fi^taft fid^ Ijier gut, here is good sleeping. But: tnir ttiirb geraten (§ 291, note). 
 
 (f) Especially as introductory — grammatical — subject, throwing the 
 logical subject after the verb, which then always agrees with the latter 
 (see §210); as: IDOg jtnb ba8? e8 ftnb ^ortoffeta ; what are those? they are 
 potatoes. Often this e8 is purely expletive, and is then variously translated : 
 I. By it; as: e8 ftnb oft unjere greunbc, bie«n8 qualen, it is often our friends 
 that torment us. 2. By there: £8 War eintnal ein SWonn ; e8 iDoren Saufenbe 
 
 jugegen; there was ; there were, tUi. ^ 3. Without English equivalent — often 
 with poetic emphasis : S8 fiir(i)te bie Oijtter ba8 2)tenfd^engcfd)teii)t ; e8 reben 
 uttb traumen bie SKenfi^en Oiel, etc., men talk and dream much of, etc. 
 
 Note. — In general in its purely expective uses, as in the last two and in h, e§ is omitted 
 unless introductory ; but not as true impersonal or pronoun subject. 
 
 id) As representative — often not translated — of an entire sentence pre- 
 ceding or following ; or of a predicate idea — noun or adjective : here often 
 translated by so. As: 3Rtv ttiivb etn ©tiid ju Sell, ttjic Ki) e8 itimtner gttjofft; 
 @te miiffen e8 mir erlouben, 3^nen ju fagen, etc. Sdi gtoitbe e8, I believe 
 so; ber ifl ntein grcunb, jo wenig er es jd^eint, however little he seems so, etc. 
 
 {e) In some phrases like English to trip it, lord it over, etc. As : bie 
 5Dieinung pit eS mit bem Ungliicflid^en — holds (sides) with, etc. 
 
 The phrases // is /{me?), is it you? etc., are in German id^ bin e8, 
 
 ftnb @ie c8? etc. 
 
 66 is often written '8, as: ic^ bin'8 (§ 70). 
 
 For substitute for e8 with prepositions, see § 457. The occasional use of 
 e8 witb a preposition is now only colloquial. 
 
i^jiasujN i^iv. 
 
 The Reflexives (§ 185). 
 
 454- I. The English compounds myself, himself, etc., are 
 sometimes reflexive, sometimes emphatic ; as: he himself killed 
 himself, etc. No such ambiguity of form exists in German. 
 
 (a) The reflexive object is expressed, specifically, by jtc^ only. Other 
 pronoun objects may be used reflexively. (§ 185.) 
 
 (b) The emphatic self, selves, is expressed by the indeclinable felbfl, or 
 fetber, which are used only in apposition, referring to either subject or 
 object, as the meaning may require. As: @r ^Ot ti \&o'^ O^tHsfiXi, he didit 
 himself; tx \ifixAt jeilier felbfl nic^t, he did not spare himself; er I)at ft(^ felber 
 getbtet, he himself killed himself, etc. 
 
 Note. — ©eC&ft before a noun has the sense aieven ; as : felbft ber ^Bnig, even the king; 
 but ber JtUnig felbft, ike king himself. 
 
 (c) ©etbft is also used sometimes, without special emphasis, to exclude 
 a possible reciprocal meaning (§ 252). As: ®ie Stngetlngteit Derrieten fid^ 
 jelbfl ; bteje Sinbet lieben ftti^ felbfl, etc. 
 
 Note — It has already been remarked {§ 252) that the reflexive idiom is used more largely 
 in German than in English. This is due in part to the want of any specific or simple English 
 reflexive. 
 
 The Possessives (§§ 192-4). 
 455. See §§ 192-3. Only a few points need further remark : 
 
 (a) Doubt as between the adjective forms and the pronoun forms can 
 occur only in the predicate. The former are simply predicative, leaving 
 the stress on the subject ; the latter are used for emphasis or distinction of 
 persons ; as : btefes SBui^ iji mein ; but biefes SBud^ ifi mcines, nic^t betne«. 
 aSem gef)ott biefeS SSud^ ? ©8 ifl meine8, etc. Unfer ijl bie airbcit, ober euer 
 ifl ber So^n. 
 
 (b) The forms with the article are often used as nouns, in the plural 
 meaning persons, friends, etc. ; in the neuter singular, abstractly, property, 
 duty, etc. As : 3(1) fanb bie SKeintgen gefunb »ieber, I found my family well; 
 role befinben p^ bie S^rigen? how are you all at home ? 6r ^ot bas ©einige 
 get^an, he has done what he could. Sd^ fle^e Quf bem SDJetnigeit ; jebem bas 
 Seine, etc. 
 
 {c) Before titles, on addresses of letters, etc., feine and feinet are often 
 abbreviated to @e. and ®r. ; and euer, cure, to (Stt). As : @e. SKajeflat bet fibnig ; 
 @r. SyceKenj bem getbmarfd^all ; Sttj. ©noben, your Grace. 3^to and ®ero 
 are old genitives, now out of use : 3^ro SKajefliit, your majesty, etc. 
 
THE POSSESSIVES. 263 
 
 {d) Colloquially, but incorrectly, occur such forms, as: mettteS SSotctS^ 
 or meinem SSatcr — fein §au8, etc. Like forms were current in older English : 
 John Smith his book, etc. 
 
 (e) The phrase, ju feiner ^tii, in due time, is idiomatic and of doubtful 
 explanation. 
 
 The rule for agreement in gender — and the exception — are the same as 
 with the personals (§ 452, a). In general, care must be taken that the 
 possessive shall correspond to its proper personal : as beitl to bu, 3^1 to 
 @ie, etc. This is often overlooked by students. 
 
 The rules for repetition of a possessive are the same as with the definite 
 article. (§ 421.) 
 
 For the article instead of possessive, see § 416, 5. For the phrases, a 
 friend of mine, etc., see § 430, c. For the dative possessive, § 439, b. 
 
 EXERCISE LIV. 
 
 I. Our wine is sour; we cannot drink it. 2. For your sake I have made 
 this long journey. 3. Even the name of this man is unknown to me. 4. In 
 (the) spring, the earth clothes itself with flowers. 5. Take my key ; you can 
 open your door with it. 6. We shall soon see each other again. 7. Think 
 no more of (an) it. 8. Is it you, dear mother? Yes, it is I. 9. Can you not 
 come yourself? 10. The poor man has done himself grfeat harm. 11. There 
 came lately a strange man to our town. 12. There is no other road that 
 leads to the village. 13. Will you please (geffiUigft) lend me your grammar; 
 I have lost mine. 14. It is not always the richest that are the happiest. 
 15. Will it rain to-morrow ? I believe'so. 16. My heart beat for joy at (iiber) 
 it. 17. Is this pen mine ? No, it is mine; you have yourself taken yours 
 away. 18. This vain girl speaks always of herself only. ig. The girl forgot 
 her fan. 20. What is mine I will maintain. 21. I shall never forget you 
 and yours. 22. Do you still remember me ? 23. There are many people in 
 the town that I do not know. 24. I am advised by my physician to make' a 
 journey to Switzerland. 
 
 LESSON LV. 
 The Pronouns. — Continued. 
 
 The Demonstratives (§§ 204-10). 
 
 456. The demonstratives may all be used as adjectives 
 or as pronouns. As pronouns, besides their specific use as 
 demonstratives, they are used largely where English uses 
 
264 LESSON LV. 
 
 1. ®iefer, jener, distinguish the nearer and the more remote : this — that, 
 
 the lattei the former. Without such distinction, bicfer is often used for 
 
 that one, he, etc. (just spoken of). Seiiet (=_j/o») properly means that yonder, 
 i. e. which can be seen ; but is not always so restricted. 
 
 Note. — The f)nglish one is not translated with the demonstratives ifhis OTie, etc.). 
 
 2. Set is the more general demonstrative of reference, without regard to 
 position, and with widest range of use. It has in part different forms as 
 adjective and as pronoun. Note also : 
 
 (a) The old genitive singular pronoun beg — now written be8 — is not now 
 used except in compounds : be8hiegeit, inbe8, etc. 
 
 (b) The genitive plural forms berer, bereit, are not always strictly distin- 
 guished: berev should be used before a relative or, other restrictive; other- 
 wise beren. As: bie i^teunbfcijaft bever, bie un« jdimeic^eln, ift gefa^riid). 
 
 (S8 giebt bercn Biele, there are many of them. 
 
 {c) ®cr — not biefer or jener — must be used as supplying ^xoxMawa. before 
 a genitive— il4a^ «/^— often in English omitted, as: tttcin §au8 Ullb baS 
 meineS S3vubev8, my house- and my brother's. In this sense bcrjenige is 
 sometimes less correctly used. 
 
 [d) The indefiniffe — or substantive — that is usually ba8: S53o8 ifl ba8? 
 ®08 weig ict) nic[)t. (See § 210.) 
 
 For bie3, ba8, as introductory subjects, see § 210. 
 
 {e) ®er, adjective, is the same word as the definite article, but is distin- 
 guished from it by stress of voice — often also by type — the article having 
 usually minimum stress. Thus, bev 3)tailtl, the man ; ber SKonn, that man. 
 
 The adjective phrase ber unb ber means such and such a. 
 
 Note. — 2)er gives rise to many compounds, such as : beSroeget!/ beS^alB, inbcffen, inbeS ; 
 bergeflalt, bergleic^en, beceinft, etc. ; and of the same root, bdfern, ba^eim, bamali, etc., as 
 w£ll as the usual prepositional compounds bavin, ba&ei, etc. — all of which are really demon- 
 strative. 
 
 3. ©erjetlifle is properly used only as antecedent to a relative. It is here 
 not distinguished from ber, but is preferred in general statements. As : ber= 
 jienige (SKann), ttield)erun8 (c^meid^elt, ifi lein treuer greunb. 
 
 In this use ber may include both antecedent and relative ; as, ber am le^teil 
 iDcgfling, wor ber 5lffe, he who, etc. 
 
 4. ©erjelbe — adjective, the same,Avi\. berielbe,M« very same — as pronoun 
 has its most important uses as substitute. (See § 457.) 
 
 5. ©flicker (f old^) properly implies a correlative : such — as, which may be 
 expressed by mie, or by a relative clause. As: cin foldjcr 3Jiaiin lt)ie@ie; 
 
THE DEMONSTRATIVES, 265 
 
 folc^e S3ad)er, bie man nid^t le(en lann,— as one cannot read. Its use as pure 
 demonstrative is rare and incorrect : e8 Inmen ju i^m niel^rere SBiirger unb 
 unter foltf)cn oitc^ jencr 'i&ixi,— among them, etc. 
 
 Suck, used idiomatically before an adjective, is the adverb fo : eine fo 
 f(^Iei^te geber, suck a bad pen; mit to 1(f|led^tcn gebern, with such bad pens. 
 
 Note the colloquial fo ein, for folc^ eiti; fo ettOClS (was), such a thing, etc. 
 
 Demonstratives as Substitutes. 
 
 457. The demonstrative pronouns are largely used in cases 
 where personals of the third person are used in English : 
 
 I. To distinguish things without life : 
 
 (a) Instead of the genitive and dative (feilter, ii^m) of the third personal, 
 which are identical in masculine and neuter, the demonstratives beffen, beg» 
 fetbcn, bemfelben are used of things without life. As : er ^at mir Oelb an= 
 flcboten, aber id) Bebarf beffen (besfelbeti) nidjt, J do not need it; id^ fd^fime mid^ 
 beffen, of it (feiner, of him); er ^at mir feiti SBort gegeben, oUein icf) troue 
 bemfelben nic^t, I do not trust it (iljtn, him). 
 
 {b) With a preposition, for all cases, things without life take instead of 
 the personal a demonstrative object — usually of ber, or berfelbe — or, more 
 frequently, a prepositional compound: of ba, ^ier, for dative or accusative 
 (§ 401) ; of be8 for genitive, where such exists. As : baS SWeffer ift fc^orf ; bit 
 fannft bid^ tnit bemfelben (bamit) leid^t fc^neiben. 3d^ ijaht nid^ts bogegen, 
 against it {itjn, him). (g8 regnct ; be«l|oIb bleifie id^ ju §aufe— or, tro^ beffen 
 ge^e i(^ au«. SWein greunb I)ot meinen ategenfd^irm oerloren ; o^iie benfelben 
 lonn id) nic^t ou«ge^en (t!)n, him). 
 
 The forms beffenttniHen, berent^alben, etc., are like those in § 452, b. 
 
 {c) Often, for the possessive, things without life use a demonstrative 
 genitive: ber SSaum unb beffen 3"'6ige; bie ©tabt unb beren Sinrool^nev. 
 Analogous with this is the use of the demonstrative to distinguish the 
 objective from the subjective genitive, even of persons. As: ein greunb 
 ift ein groges @ut ; ber iBefi^ besfelben er^o^t ben SBevt be8 I'ebena— fein 
 
 Seft^ would mean his property. 
 
 i. Sometimes a demonstrative is used to mark more closely the con- 
 nection between successive sentences. As : @8 roar ein otter SJiann ; biefer 
 ^atte brei ©ofine; er berteilte fein Out unter biefelbeu. 
 
 3. As indefinite (determinative) antecedent to a relative, he (who) is ber= 
 jenige (or ber); as, berjeuigc iBeId)er (= roer) gliidtid) ift, ift reld^. But if the 
 antecedent is definite, the regular personal will be used; as, er, ben id^ fiiv 
 tncincii i^reimb hielt. bat mid) oerroten. 
 
266 LESSON LV. 
 
 4. Sometimes for emphasis, or only for euphony : 
 
 a) Emphasis, as ber mug ein SRorr feitl, he (that fellow). 
 
 b) Euphony, as : er ^at eine Koti^tei: ; tennen ®ie biefelbe ? Siefer S33eiu 
 ift gut ; \6) lann 3^nen benjelben enH)feI)len. 
 
 5. Specially important, however, is the use of the demonstrative ber, ber- 
 fetbe, to refer to a foregoing object, the personal, or possessive, being used 
 to refer to the subject only. As : (Sr trof feinen Sruber unb beffen greunbe 
 (feine would mean his own). Sie Soditer fcf)rieb i^rer SWutter, bag biefelbe in 
 Sonbon ertoortet mcrbe (fie would mean the daughter). ®ev Setter lobt ben 
 ©d^iiler, aber betfelbe banft i^m nid^t bafiir ; ber ^onig bonfte bem SITJinifler 
 unb las beffen SRcbe burd^ ; fte matte tl^re ©d^tnefler unb beren iEod^ter, etc. 
 This distinction is especially important in long sentences, or in a sequence 
 of sentences. 
 
 Remark. — It thus appears that, mainly by help of its demonstratives, German is more 
 specific and distinctive than English in the use of pronouns. Every student knows the danger - 
 of ambiguity in the English personals. The old stoiy, "And he said, saddle me the ass; and 
 they saddled hint^' is good enough to be true. 
 
 The Interrogatives. 
 
 458. The interrogatives hjer, too§, toeld^er, h)a§ fiit ein, are 
 quite fully treated (§§ 217-222). Observe further: 
 
 1. As to their distinction, compared with English forms: 
 
 (a) 38ec corresponds fully to English who ? and is always substantive and 
 personal. 
 
 (i) English which? is always tvetd^er. But what? is metier only when 
 adjective, or definite ; Xoai, when substantive, or indefinite. As : In what 
 book do youfindthat? in Weldjem Suc^e ; what do you say? ttJOS fagen @te? 
 
 2. The interrogatives are often only exclamatory, and readily become in- 
 definite or adverbial : 
 
 (a) SBelc^cr is sometimes used in the singular, colloquially, in the sense 
 of some: ^aben @ie ®elb ? 3a, ii^ \a\it itielcJ)c9, some. 
 
 {b) SJBaS is sometimes used for etlDOS, something — especially before an 
 adjective; as, tt)08 ®ute8, something good, etc. Also, for hjatum, why; as: 
 3Ba8 fdjaut il)r mid^ fo fettf am an ? Why do you look at me so strangely ? And 
 for mie, how? As: SBaS ®ic broun gebtannt ftnb! How brown you are 
 burned! 
 
THE RELATIVES. 267 
 
 3. Colloquially, and irregularly, ma8 is sometimes found with prepositions; 
 as, tnit Wa?, etc., for Itiomit — even where the case would not be accusative. 
 
 In the indirect or dependent question, the interrogatives are nearly con- 
 nected in sense, as in construction, with the relatives. (See § 348.) 
 
 For the use of the prepositional compounds instead of IDttS with preposi- 
 tions, see § 222. The old ireS (tt)e6) — now used only in such compounds — 
 was formerly used also as an indef. adj., as: tneS ©tanbeS er 0U(^ \», "/ 
 whatever rank, etc. 
 
 EXERCISE LV. 
 
 I. How can you write with such a pen ? 2. jThe same sun shines over the 
 just and the' unjust. 3. This is my youngest brother, and those (sing.) are my 
 sons. 4. With this {fomp.) you will receive the books (which) I had promised 
 you. s- Take this money; I do not need it. 6. I have heard nothing of 
 that. 7. My friend arrived on the same train as the prince and his suite. 
 8. Those who help us in (the) misfortune are our true friends. 9. Bo you 
 know who has brought the letter ? 10. With what can we best pass our 
 time? II. Advise me what book I shall read. 12. What are you thinking 
 about? what letter are you speaking of? 13. Trust not him who always 
 flatters you. 14. In whose house have you heard that story ? I do not be- 
 lieve it. 1 5. Tell me what books you want, and I will send them [to] you. 
 16. Do you see that man, who stands at that corner [yonder] ? 17. I have 
 sold my horses and also my son's. 18. He is my friend who always tells me 
 the truth. 19. Such a man as he should not believe such stories. 20. The 
 trees with their green leaves are now very beautiful. 21. I have never seen 
 such a bad boy ; I am ashamed of him. 22. Those ladies are my daughter 
 and my brother's ; do you not know them ? 23. The king must respect that 
 man ; for he has just appointed his son an (jum) oiBcer. 24. I cannot write 
 with such bad paper. 
 
 LESSON LVI. 
 The Pronouns. — Continued. 
 
 The Relatives. 
 
 459. See §§ 233-240, where the relatives are somewhat fully 
 explained. Only a few remarks need to be added. 
 
 I. ®er, tocl^er, are the definite relatives ; Wer, JDO?, the indefinite. They 
 are all properly pronouns, not adjectives, in construction ; but ber, loetci^ej) 
 
268 LESSON LVI. 
 
 introduce adjective clauses, qualifying an antecedent; locic, WaS, noun clauses, 
 without antecedent noun. 
 
 2. The definite relatives bcr, ttJCId^er, are for the most part used indiffer- 
 ently — hjelc^er being only somewhat more formal. Except : 
 
 (a) In the genitive, only the forms of btt are used for both, because, prob- 
 ably, the genitive forms of tt)eld)er might be confounded with other cases. 
 
 Note. —The genitive relative never follows its governing noun; a book on thi pages of 
 •uihick — ouf beffen ©eiten, etc. 
 
 (b) ®et is always used if the antecedent is a personal pronoun of first or 
 second person, or @te, in address ; and then the personal is usually repeated 
 after the relative. If the personal is not repeated, the verb stands usually 
 in the third person. As: 3ii), ber tc^ itntiier fetn greunb gcraefen bin. S)u, 
 bet (fem. bie) bu mic^ nie Derloffen tBirji. @ie, bie @ie mir beifiitnntteu, you 
 ■who agreed with me. But: SBerod^tefl bu fo mid^, ber t)icr gebietet? Sd^ Bin 
 eine orme gvau, bie leineit SKenfd^eit ^ier fentit, etc. 
 
 Note. — Thus, while bcr and n}e[(^er cortespond in origin to ihai, whick^ respectively, they 
 are not distinguished in use or construction like English ihai and ivhich (or who). 
 
 Remark. — Referring to Remark § 457, it may now be added that English has the advan- 
 tage in the relatives as clearly as German in the demonstratives. This point — of relative 
 power or weakness of expression — is always of capital importance in the study of a foreign 
 language. For it should never be forgotten that a principal — if not /^ principal — object of 
 such study is the better knowledge of the mother tongue. But such matters must be left to the 
 teacher. 
 
 3. 2Ber, he who, whoever, and ItiaS, what, that which, whatever, are the 
 indefinite or " conipound " relatives and cannot have definite antecedent. 
 As : aSev frii^ ouffte^t, iebt lange ; tt)a8 bu tl^un ttJiUfl, t^ue Balb, etc. 
 
 (a) But, Wer, ItioS, may be followed hy a. Jiostcedent demonstrative, repeat- 
 ing the idea that hais been defined by the foregoing predicate. As : SBBer fcu^ 
 auffle^t, ber (i. c. the early-riser) tebt tange ; was bu t^un triUfi, bo8 t^ue balb, 
 etc. This is necessary if the case is changed. As : SBer etnmal liigt, bem 
 ttitrb nid^t gegtaubt ; Was mon ^ot, beffen bcbarf man nid()t, etc. 
 
 (b) In the sense of whoever, whatever, tner, ttiaS are sometimes followed 
 immediately by bo — or, with intervening word or words, by aud) — also 
 immer. As: iffier ba ttJoUte, mijd)te ftd; fejjen ; oHe8 h)a8 ba lebt unb mebt, all 
 that lives and moves ; n)o8 man aud^ gegeu i^n toorbringe ; mer bag immer 
 
 gefogt ^at, whoever has said thai, etc. 
 
 (c) 2Ba8 is sometimes used, most indefinitely, for Wet ; as : grii^ iibt ftd|, 
 
 mi ein aneiftet Iverben wiU. (§ 460, 4, d.) 
 
THE INDEFINITES. 269 
 
 {d) For ItiaS after indefinite antecedents, see § 236, 6. 
 
 4. For prepositional compounds instead of relative objects, see § 237. 
 This use is largely extended to all non-personal relatives (as in the demon- 
 stratives). The old genitive lue^ — now written tneg — is used only in geni- 
 tive compounds : hjes^atb, weSwegett, etc. SBcffent^alben is formed as § 452, 6. 
 
 5. Like the demonstratives ber, bci, the compounds barauf, batten, etc. 
 (1 184) — and some other demonstrative compounds, as bafertt, bergleid^eit, in= 
 beffeil, etc. — may be used also in relative (dependent) sense, the use being 
 distinguished by the construction. (See § 351, 2.) 
 
 For {0, as relative, see § 485, g. 
 
 The Indefinites. 
 460. (See §§ 244-5). The term "indefinites" is itself very 
 indefinite. It includes, like a " waste-hasket," a group of words 
 which lie along the dividing lines of pronoun, adjective and 
 numeral. Some of these are also called "indefinite numerals." 
 Only some of the most important uses will be here noted. — 
 
 1. SKatt supplies the want — so often felt in English — of an indefinite 
 personal subject. It is much used, and variously translated — most fre- 
 quently by our passive (§ 274). Its oblique cases are supplied by etner ; its 
 possessive by fein; reflexive by ftii^. As: Sffienn man ®elb tterftert, fo t^ut 
 e8 einem Icib ; matt ift frof), tt)fnn man feine Strbeit get^nn £|at ; menn man ^i<ii 
 
 irrt, wAen one is mistaken, etc. 
 
 Note. — SWan is often rendered by we,yoii, they, etc. But it must never be used unless 
 the subject is entirely indefinite. 
 
 2. (a) @inet, someone, anyone, is also used as indefinite subject ; but less 
 general than man: ttjenn einer 3^nen fagte ; if some one told you, etc. It is 
 also used with the article : ber ®ine, bet 3lnbere, the one, the other; bit (Sinen, 
 bie Slnberen, some, the others, etc. 
 
 (i) ®er Slnbere is sometimes used for the second (of two only). Another, 
 meaning one more is noi^ ein (-er), as : no^ eine £affe %\zt, another cup of tea. 
 
 3. The indeclinable irgenb is often used with ein (-et) and other indefinites, 
 jemanb, ettnaS, Welc^er, and some others, to strengthen the indefinite sense : 
 irgenb einer, anyone at all; was irgenb gered^t ifl, whatever is right. 
 
 4. StU, all, has some peculiar uses : 
 
 (a) Standing alone before a noun it is fully declined : Sitter 3tn|ang ift 
 fc^ttjer; olle 9Kent(i)en, all men. 
 
 (*) But preceding the article, or other pronominal, it stands often —b«t not 
 
270 LESSON LVI. 
 
 always, undeclined. As : all baS ®ctb ; ott bicf e aBciif(i)cn ; untct ott biefen Mm 
 
 fianben, etc. StUe stands for att in a few phrases ; 6ei ttUe bem, witA all that. 
 
 (c) In the plural, it is rarely followed by the article ; all the boys is, usually, 
 aUe Snoben, or bie ^naben oHe. 
 
 (d) In the plural, all often means every; oHe Sage ; oHe bier SBoc^en, etc.; 
 and in the neuter singular, sometimes, everybody : alleS fl^lnieg, everybody was 
 silent. (See § 459, 3, <•.) For all, meaning entire, whole (ganj), see § 144. 
 
 (e) Other neuters, eineS, feineS, jebeS, etc., are also sometimes used of 
 persons indefinitely, or where both sexes are included ; as : fieitteS niu6_ba8 
 Stnbere ungliidlicfi maci^en, neither (man nor woman), etc. 
 
 (S) iBeibe differs from English both. 
 
 (a) It follows instead of preceding the article or its equivalent : bie beiben 
 Jflittben ; meine beiben Sriiber. It thus often stands for two, where there are 
 only two : my two brothers. 
 
 (b) It is never followed by a partitive genitive, 'of : toir betbe, both of us; 
 biefe beiben §aufer, both of these houses, etc. 
 
 (c) It is sometimes used in the neuter singular, beiDeS, meaning either, 
 each of the two: belbe8 {onn ttiol^r fein, either may be true. 
 
 6. 95iet, Wenig. SSiel is sometimes declined in the singular, meaning 
 many kinds : Bieler SBein ; but Biel SSein, much wine. SBenig, little, and ein 
 rocnig, a little, are distinguished as in English. The plural toenige, is few; 
 a few is einige, etlid^e. 
 
 7. ®enug, tauter, are undeclined : @elb genug, enough money, or, money 
 enough ; tauter ®elb, nothing but money ; tauter ^teinigleiten, mere trifles. 
 
 8. Either, neither are usually eiuer, !einer — Bon beiben. For not any, 
 see § 244, note. 
 
 EXERCISE LVI. 
 
 I. Who are the ladies with whom you were speaking (the ladies you were 
 speaking with) ? 2. Those on whose help we most relied were the first to 
 forsake us. 3. The author that wrote the work you have just been talking 
 of, is an old friend of mine. 4. The subject of which we spoke yesterday is 
 more important than we thought. 5. The gentleman whose house I bought 
 is gone away. 6. I shall do what I have promised; you may rely on that. 
 7. The robbers into whose hands we had fallen took [from] us all [IDOS] we 
 had. 8. He was the best friend I ever had. 9. We went into a house, from 
 the windows of which we could see the whole procession. 10. My clerk, on 
 whose honesty I so much relied, has deceived me. 11. 1,whq am older than 
 
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 2/ 1 
 
 you, will assist you with my advice. 12. He who is industrious and faithful 
 will make progress. 13. I have no money; can you lend me some? only a 
 little? 14. Every one must help his neighbor in (the) need. 15. We (man) 
 forget easily what we have read without interest. 16. One must never for- 
 sake one's friends. 17. It is said that we shall never have peace. 
 18. Everything earthly is transitory. 19. All [the] travellers had to change 
 at that station. 20. We receive letters from Germany every two weeks, 
 during all the year. 21. All my happiness is in your hands. 22. Many 
 were invited, but few came. 23. Both of my sons were in Europe last sum- 
 mer. 24. What you tell me (that) I have long known. 
 
 LESSON LVII. 
 
 The Verb. 
 
 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. -CONCORD. 
 461. Only the more important departures from English usage 
 will be noticed. 
 
 I. The Subject. 
 
 (a) For the omission of the subject, see § 429. For the position of the 
 subject after the verb, § 344. 
 
 (b) The subject must be repeated with connected verbs, if the order of 
 words changes. As : tx fam ju mit, ging aber jogtei^ meg ; but: abet fogleic^ 
 ging er meg ; bit bettiigft niemanb, aber toon anbern bijl bu bctrogen. 
 
 (c) If the subjects are of different persons, the including plural pronoun 
 will usually be expressed before the verb. As : meill SBtuber Utlb i(^ (loir) 
 reifcn Batb oB ; bu unb er (i^r) feib im 3rrtuin. 
 
 2. The Verb. 
 
 (a) Introduced by e8, ba8, ttJaS, etc., the verb agrees with the logical, 
 not the grammatical subject. As : baS (tub grembe ; bieS ftnb SJloniiet, bie 
 3l(^tung berbienen; e8 ftnb unfere greuiibe, etc. (See § 210.) 
 
 (S) Collective nouns take a singular verb more uniformly than in English. 
 As : biefe8 Soil Bat eine groge grei^eit ; bie SKenge mac^t ben Siinftler irre unb 
 \i)t\X. But when a plural defining noun follows, the verb will be plural. As: 
 
 eine SDlenge ©(^tffe lagen im §afen ; eine Stnja^l S3iirger ^oBen fic^ beteinigt. 
 
272 LESSON LVII. 
 
 (c) More freely than in English, a series of singular subjects, unless ex- 
 pressly distinct, may take a singular verb. As: §ail8 UUb §of ift bettauft; 
 ©roll unb 'itadft jei Bergeffeit, etc. This is especially the case when the verb 
 precedes both or either of the subjects. As : §ier f^JVic^t Srfo^rung, SBiffeH' 
 fi^aft, @e((i)mo(i ; SKeijler ru^rt ftd) unb ©efette, etc. 
 
 ((/) With disjunctive singular subjects the rule is a singular verb, but 
 with exceptions. As : ftieber bie Unioti tioHi bie Sigue mi|c^ten ftfif in bicjen 
 
 ©treit, mixed themselves, etc. 
 
 (e) Exceptional is the formal use of plural verbs with certain exalted 
 titles. As : gure SKajeftot geru^en ; Sure ©yceUeng l^abeii Befo^len, etc. 
 For the verb after a relative with personal antecedent, see § 459, 2, b. 
 
 THE TENSES. 
 
 462. Here again will be noticed only the more important 
 departures from the ordinary sense, or from corresponding 
 English forms. 
 
 Simple and Compound Tenses. 
 
 1. The simple tenses (§ 167), are the same in German as in English : the 
 present and the past (preterit), sometimes — but in either language improp- 
 erly — called the imperfect. The compound tenses are less complete than 
 in English. 
 
 2. The English tenses formed with the auxiliaries be and do have no cor- 
 responding forms in German. Thus : Island, am standing, do stand ; I stood, 
 was standing, did stand ; I have stood, have been standing; I shall stand, 
 shall be standing, etc., are represented in German, respectively, by the single 
 forms only : ii^ fle^e ; ii!^ jlattb ; xi) t)abe geftonben ; id) ttierbe fte^eii, etc. The 
 English student must carefully discriminate these forms in translation. It 
 may be observed, also, that English has here a great advantage over not 
 only German, but all kindred languages. 
 
 Note. — An auxiliary use of t^un sometimes occurs as a vulgarism: id^ t^at eS nid^t 
 fageu : rarely, also, in poetry. In this use t^fit often stands for t^at. 
 
 3. The English auxiliary be must be carefully distinguished when verb 
 and when auxiliary (§ 169). Thus: she is charming, (te ift reijenb (part, 
 adj.) ; she is charming me with her singing, fie ceijt mic^, etc. Especially also 
 In its use as passive auxiliary (§ 273). 
 
THE PAST AND THE PERFECT. 273 
 
 USE OF INDICATIVE TENSES. 
 
 463. The Present. 
 
 (a) The present is used for the past, more frequently than in English, to 
 make a narrative more lively {historical present.) As : 2t(8 lutv baa @(f|Io6 
 nun angejunbet, ba fliivjt ber Siet^elm tjewor unb ruft, rushes out and ex- 
 claims, etc. Also often colloquially : bo fotnntt er ju mir unb jagt, etc. 
 
 {b) The present, usually with j^on, already, or feit, since, is regularly 
 used, corresponding to English perfect, to express an action or state continu- 
 ing in the present. As : ttlie lange ftnb @ie fc^on ^ier ? how long have you 
 been here? 3d) !enne i^n (fd)on) feit Reiner .tt'iub^eit, / have known him, etc. 
 In the same way the past corresponds to the English pluperfect : 3c^ tonnte 
 ,if)n j(^on jeit jeinet Sinbtjeit, / had known him since his childhood. 
 
 (c) The present is used, much more, freely than in English, in place of the 
 future ; usually with a future adverb ; often, also, with like effect as (a) : to 
 express an immediate or certain futurfe, as if actually present. As: ic^ 
 tomme togleic^ jurucf ; in jtuei Sagen bin id^ fertig ; biefe 3Jo(J^t erfieigcn Wir 
 bo8 @c(){o6; fw Icbt nicE|t mc^r fo bolb bu e? gebieteft. 
 
 Note. — This belongs to the earliest uses in both German and English, before the existence 
 of the auxiliary futures. In the same way the (present) perfect may be used for the future 
 perfect, as in English. As: ©obalt) ic^ iWai^rid^t beJomtticn ^abe, iDoQen tnir nic^t liingcr 
 verroeilen, as soon as 1 {shall) have received news, etc. 
 
 (d) With like effect, the present is sometimes used for an emphatic im- 
 perative: ®u ge^ft jogteid^, you {must) go at once; bu |(|ie§eft ober ftirbft, 
 shoot or die. 
 
 464. T-HE Past (Preterit) and the Perfect. 
 
 These tenses are not so sharply distinguished in German as in English. 
 The former is properly the simple historical past — sometimes imperfect ; the 
 latter, the tense of an action campleted with reference to the present — or, 
 in English, within a time including the present. But in German the perfect 
 is often used where in English the past would be employed. Thus : 
 
 (fl) The perfect expresses an action as simply completed, or absolutely 
 past, at the present time. As : ®Ott ^at bie SSett er|d)offcn, God created the 
 world ; id) ^obe 3^ren jjrcunb gcftern gefe^en, I saw your friend yesterday ; 
 
 bieje fiird^e ift tm 14. 3a^r^unbert erbaut roorben, this church was built, etc. 
 
 (i) The past usually expresses a past action as connected with other past 
 actions or circumstances, and is thus the usual tense of historical narrative ; 
 
274 LESSON LVII. 
 
 also of continuous or imperfect action. As: ®Ott fd^uf bie SBelt in fe(^8 
 
 . SCagen unb rul^te om fiebenten. SBo maren fte ju jener 3'it? ®cr Snabc fog 
 
 auf einem ©tu^Ie ate i(^ inS ^'"""ft trot. Einige SKonate »erftric^en e^e eine 
 
 JlntWort font, some months passed before, etc. 
 
 But in many cases the perfect is used, especially in familiar style, where 
 the past would be more strictly required. 
 
 Note i. — A further distinction is stated, that the past expresses what the speaker wit- 
 nessed or participated in ; the perfect, the simple fact : hut this can hardly he sustained. 
 
 Note 2. — It will be observed that in the English perfect, the present relation predomi. 
 nates; in the German, that oi completed aciXon, Thus: I have seen him to-day, but: /jaw 
 him yesterday, is a distinction that does not obtain in German. 
 
 (c) The imperfect sense is often more clearly expressed by the adverb 
 eben (fo eBen),y«rf: 3c^ fc^rieb eben, ate, I was just writing when, etc. 
 
 465. The Future. 
 
 (a) The future is frequently used instead of the present, and the future 
 perfect instead of the perfect, in order to express a supposition or proba- 
 bility. As: ©v Kiirb ^ungrig \tm, I suppose he is hungry; er ttitrb ^ungrig 
 gewejen fein, he has probably been hungry. The adverbs bod) or Wd\)\. are 
 sometimes added in order to bring out the sense more clearly : ®et SJoter 
 Wirb mol^I noc^ fl^tofen, I suppose father is still asleep; er Mjirb boi^ niii^t 
 longe bott geblieben fein, I suppose he did not stay there long, 
 
 (b) The future is sometimes used for an emphatic imperative. As : ®if 
 roirjt gtetd^ ge^cn, you will go at once. In this sense also it may be substi- 
 tuted by the present. (See § 463, d). 
 
 (c) The English forms I am going to, am about to, denoting an immediate 
 future, may be rendered in German by TOoUen, im SSegtiff Jein — often with 
 the adverb t)it\\ (fo ebcn),y»rf. As : ic^ tooUte fo eben fc^reiben ; id) rear (eben) 
 im SScgriff ju fi^reiben ; ate er eben ben ®eifl aufgeben tooUte, when he was just 
 
 about to give up the ghost. 
 
 (d) As already remarked (§ 268) the future must be carefully distinguished 
 from the modal use of fotten, shall ; reoUen, will ; shall or will, as future aux- 
 iliary, being in German always rocrbcn. The English shibboleth shall or will, 
 can be easily made clear by the German forms — the diiEculty being wholJiy 
 in English. 
 
 EXERCISE UVII. 
 
 1. In a few minutes I shall be back again.' u. Why does your brother not 
 come ? 3. I suppose he has no time. 4. The children are not yet (nod^ 
 nid^t) at home; they are probably m (Hit) school. 5. Sit down, or leave the 
 
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 27$ 
 
 room. 6, I shall come as soon as I have written my letter. 7. You will 
 carry this letter to (aitf) the post, and return immediately. 8. I was just 
 writing a letter when my friend arrived. 9. He will have left London before 
 we arrive there. 10. We were just about to go for a walk when it began to 
 rain. II. How long have you been learning German.' 12. I have been 
 learning it [these] three months, and now I am beginning to make more rapid 
 progress (pi.). 13. I have worn this coat [for] eight years; it is time to buy 
 a new [one]. 14. While I was [am) considering the matter, I received a letter 
 which relieved me of all further doubt. 15. Last year we made a trip up 
 ace.) the .Rigi and passed the night on the mountain. 16. The sun rose 
 splendidly, and we had a glorious view over (ace.) mountains and valleys. 
 17. I had hardly set my foot out of the door when it began to rain. 18. We 
 were just about to start when we received news of the death of a near 
 relative. 19. So we were obliged to give up our journey. 20. Of all poets 
 Schiller has most won the love of the people. 21. Before me stand the 
 present and the future together. 22. My people torment me to accept a 
 husband, and I see I must obey them (i'^m). 23. My friends and I have 
 read this book together. 24. It is the facts we want ; do you think we do 
 not know what you thought of the matter ? 
 
 LESSON LVIII. 
 
 THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Remark. — The subjunctive is the more difficult of explanation because, 
 except to a very limited extent, it has no corresponding form or use in Eng- 
 lish. Its English equivalents — besides the rare subjunctive — are various: 
 the indicative, the imperative, the infinitive, and the auxiliaries, may, might; 
 ;an, could ; shall, should; will, would, etc. — so that its idiomatic transla- 
 tion, as well as its wide use in German, will require the most careful at- 
 tention. 
 
 466. The subjunctive may be defined, in a word, as the 
 mood of the ideal (subjective) — as distinct from the indicative, 
 the mood of the a^r/wa/ (objective). Its conception varies widely, 
 from that which is simply not affirmed zs true, to that which is 
 represented as merely desired or possible, and finally to that 
 which is distinctly implied as unreal, or contrary to fact. 
 These shades of meaning it is difficult to analyse or connect 
 
276 LESSON LVIII. 
 
 logically. They will be here grouped under the several heads 
 of Indirect, Optatwe, Potential and Conditional. 
 
 As its name implies, the subjunctive is used most frequently 
 in dependent [subjoined') sentences ; but in German this is not 
 always true. Nor can it be said, generally, that certain con- 
 nectives govern ^— or require — the subjunctive. The use of 
 the mood always depends on the sense. 
 
 467. The Indirect Subjunctive {Oratio obliqud). 
 
 (a) The subjunctive is used in dependent sentences, expressing the 
 statement of another as related — not quoted — and not affirmed by the 
 writer or speaker. The tense is usually the same as would be used in the 
 indicative, if the words were directly quoted. This occurs especially after 
 verbs meaning to think, believe, say, tell, hope, fear, seem, and the like, ex- 
 pressed or implied. As : @r fd^rieB mir, ba^ er fein §ou8 Berfouft ^obe, he wrote 
 me that he had sold his house ; ber Ofirtner gtoubt, bag biefer SSaum im 
 nfic^ftcn Sal^re Jeine gruc^t tragen tuerbe, the gardener believes that this tree 
 will bear no fruit next year ; ber %x\i gab leine §offnmig, bag ber ^ranle 
 genc(En toerbe, the physician gave no hope thai the patient would recorver. In 
 these sentences the direct statement would be : 3c^ ^abe mein §au8 tierf auft ; 
 biejev Saum wtvb im nScfjften Sa^ve feine gru^t tragen, etc. 
 
 (b) But frequently the past subjunctive will be used for the present, with a 
 past tense oi the leading verb. This is especially the case when the present 
 subjunctive would be of the same form with the present indicative. As: ©r b:= 
 l)auptete, bog id) genitg bejat)tt ^atte ; i(^ fagtc it)m, bug mcine fiiitber me.oUein 
 ouSgingen; also, without such reason, less frequently. Sometimes, for this 
 reason, the tense will change in the same sentence; as: 3)cr j^reinbe liieiiit 
 e8 tn ii f f e bort fliU fein, itnb bie 2Rentd)en m ii g t e n (not miiffen) fiJ)meigen. 
 (You said) id) ptte etiten Stein in ber Srujl, unb bu ^abeft mein §erj. 
 
 {c) When, however, the statement is represented as a fact, confirmed or 
 admitted by the writer, the indicative will be used, and in the usual tense. 
 As : Et geflanb, bajj er Unre(i)t ^atte, he confessed that he was wrong; er 
 iBugte, bog i^ fraiil mor; gcfe^t, id^ that's, suppose I did it. 
 
 Note. — The omission of ta^ changes the order of words (§ 350, i), but does not other- 
 wise a£Eect the mood or tense. This omission is however less frequent with the indicative — 
 more frequent with the subjunctive, espedally where the form is distinctive (as ^). 
 
 id) The same rules, as to both mood and tense, apply also to the depen- 
 dent question (§ 348), when narrated indirectly. As: Sd) frogte t^n ob er 
 
THE POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE. 277 
 
 mic^ bejo^len liiniic (tbnnte) ober ni(i^t. But when stated directly the indica- 
 tive will be used: je^t firage id) bic^, ob bu mtr bejatjlen {annjl ober nic^t. 
 
 (e) Akin to the subjunctive of indirect discourse is the use of a past or 
 pluperfect subjunctive, in exclamatory (interrogative) form, to imply em- 
 phatic denial of a real or presumed assertion. As: @oftfTeuribli(^ ^fitte 
 ©nglanb fte em^Jfangen, England (you say) received her hospitably ! SSBonn 
 ptte xi) bo8 gettJOttt, when did I (as you say) attempt this? 
 
 (/) Sometimes the subjunctive shows only that the action is viewed from 
 the stand-point of another. As : er WoUte rtarteit bi8 fein j^tfunb tiime, until 
 his friend should come ; ei; mugte biciben bi3 bte glut Oeriiefe ; he had to wait 
 until {as he knew) the tide should subside. 
 
 Note. — But often the indicative occurs, to express 7L/aci or result: @r ^iclt barauf, bafi 
 lein3 feinet flinber ((^retben gelernt ^at {and they did not), 
 
 468. The Optative Subjunctive. 
 
 (a) The subjunctive is used to express a wish, request, permission, or 
 concession, the realisation of which is not affirmed. The tense will be 
 present, unless the leading verb is past. As: 3^ tniinjd^e, bo^ et nod) 
 einem 3lrjt f^icfe, I wish him to send for a physician; ic^ bitte, er tl)Ue bas 
 mit ju (SefoUen, Ibeghewilido it for my sake; id^ eriaube (ertaubte) nid^t, bog 
 mein ©o^n nod) ^poris reife (rcifte), I do (did) not permit my son to goto 
 Paris; gebc Oott, or @ott gebe, God grant; ?ofeie8, so be it ; e8 jci tt)ie eS 
 rooUe, be it as it will. (See § 346, b.) 
 
 Note. — This form ,of the subjunctive is used for the imperative in the first and third 
 persons (§ 176) and is so the usual form with ©ie in address. 
 
 (b) A past or pluperfect subjunctive, unless following a past verb, here 
 expresses a wish, etc., as unreal or impossible — closely allied to the con- 
 ditional subjunctive (§ 470). As: SBore er boi^ ^ier, were he only here, 
 
 (but he is not) ! O, ^otte \i!\ nimmer biefes SSort gef^iroc^en, would I had never 
 
 spoken, etc. 
 
 (c) As a more remote wish, a purpose is expressed by the subjunctive in 
 clauses introduced by bamit or bog, (ouf bog, nm bog). As : @r ipri(^t leife, 
 bomit if|n nlctnonb nerfte^c, in order that nobody may, eXc; er oerfteite jtd^, 
 bomit tnon i^n nil^t fonbe, in order that he might-'not be found; loft mir bfl* 
 §ers, bog i(^ baS (Sure riiftre, that I may move yours. 
 
 Note. — Sometimes this sense is involved in a relative pronoun, as: @ieb un3 beinen 
 @eift, ber un§ regtere, give us thy spirit to (which shaU) nde us. 
 
 469. The Potential Subjunctive, * 
 
 Closely allied with the foregoing is the use of the subjunctive to ex- 
 press possibility — a contingent or indefinite statement — sometimes only 
 
278 LESSON LVIII. 
 
 a softened affirmative. As : Ob et lorame ober ni^t, ittit: ijl "e8 eincrfei, 
 •whether he come or not; Wie e8 au^ jei, however it may be ; bag tttijdjte tOO^l 
 iDtt^rfein, that may be true; i(^ ioiigte ni(^t, I can't say that I know; 
 er tBore fafl cingefc^Iafen, he ^aa/ (probably) almost fallen asleep; nimtit ntciner 
 SRebe jeben ©tod^et, ber bermunben lonnte, that could (possibly) wound. 
 
 Note. — Yet in all these uses the indicative occasionally occurs where the subjunctive 
 might be expected, sometimes to mark the confident expectation of the assumed contingency. 
 
 470. The Conditional Subjunctive. 
 
 (0) Outside of the potential conditions included above, the subjunctive 
 in its past tenses is used in both terms of a sentence stating an Unreal con- 
 dition; that is, when the premise (protasis) is not fulfilled, and the conclusion 
 depending on it (apodosis) is therefore not realized. The past tense here ex- 
 presses present time — the pluperfect, past time. As: SBeim er fparfaillEr 
 Ware (or gemefen ware), fo mare er jefet eiit reitfier 5Kann, if he were (or had 
 been) more saving, he would now be a rich man (but he is not, etc.) ; Itjenn 
 ii) ba« gemugt ptte, fo ^otte id^ anbers ge^anbett, if I had known that, /should 
 iave, etc. (but I did not, etc.). 
 
 Note. — For the omis^on of tcenn, and consequent change in order of words, see §' 350, 2. 
 
 For the conditional in the apodosis, see below, § 471. 
 
 (b) Often the condition is only implied. As: 3n feiner Sage Ijotte xi) baS 
 nic^t gett)an, (if I had been) in his place, I should not have done that; boS t^fitc 
 id), gem, / would gladly do that (if I could, etc.). So in restrictive clauses 
 with bcnn, meaning unless, except. As : i(^ trage mein @(i)h)ert tiie ntc^r, e8 
 roare benn gegen bie Siirleii (that is : If I should, then it would be, etc.). 
 
 (c) Or the consequence is not stated, and then the form is like § 468, *. 
 
 (d) A condition — whether potential or unreal — is often introduced, 
 comparatively, by at8 (menn), ol8 (ob), asif. As: @r fte^t ou9 al8 trrenn er 
 Irani ware, as if he were sick; er t^ut al9 roare er uerriidt. (See § 350, 2.) 
 
 (e) The indicative may here also express the certainty of the result : SKit 
 btefem ^Pfeil burc^(iJ)o6 it^ eu^ (I had, etc.), roenn i(^ mein fiinb getroffen ^fitte. 
 
 Note. — In the modal verbs (Less. XXVI.) in consequence of their defect in English, care 
 must be taken to distinguish the sense of the indicative and subjunctive — the former in the 
 past tense often requiring to be expressed by Aaw«. As: SSBoS bu oerlangteft, fbnnte \ij btr 
 nii^t (jeben o^ne arm ju wcrben, / could not give you without, etc.; but lonnte i^, etc., / 
 could not have given you. 
 
 The tenses of the subjunctive do not require distinct treat- 
 ment. Outside of the special use of the present (§ 467) and of 
 the past (§ 470), the subjunctive tense is usually conformed to 
 that of the leading indicative verb. 
 
THE CONDITIONAL. 2^9 
 
 THE CONDITIONAL. 
 
 471. As has been seen (§ 173) the conditional, present and 
 perfect,' is really a past subjunctive of the future, bearing the 
 same relation to the future, present or perfect, that the past 
 subjunctive bears to the present. It is thus used as a sub- 
 stitute for the past subjunctive : 
 
 (o) In the principal member (apodosis) of a condition, expressed or im- 
 plied, when the statement has special reference to the future. As : Su 
 mitrbefl morgen frii^ ouffte^en, roetm bu bi^ jel^t jeitig ju Sette legteft ; auf» 
 jle^en toflrbe SnglanbS gonge 3ugenb, {o^e ber SSritte jeine ^bnigiit, would 
 arise, if, etc, 
 
 (b) Also, when the form of the past subjunctive would be like that of the 
 past indicative. As: Unter biejen Untftoiiben, iniirbe id) ni(f)t abveifen (for 
 teijlc — ab ); baS iriivbe ic^ niii^t gtaiiBen, I should not, etc. 
 
 Note. — Or, otherwise, whenever the form or meaning of the subjunctive might be ambig- 
 uous ; as, er meinte ba8 roiirbe gut fein, rather than loare, which might mean was or wmUd be 
 etc. — hence especially in indirect speech. 
 
 (c) Outside of these cases, but less frequently, the conditionals may be used 
 as equivalents of the past subjunctives in principal sentences. As : SSenil 
 ba8 aSetter ji^bn ware, fo roiivbe id) au8gel)en (or fogiiigeid^ au8) ; tnare mein 
 aSater om Seben, jo miirbe er 80 3at|re alt|ein (or jo ware er, etc.) 
 
 In any of these cases, the condition will often be only implied. (§ 470, i.) 
 ((/) The conditional cannot stand for the subjunctive in the dependent 
 member (protasis) ; thus, the forms are, for the unreal condition : 
 
 (I) (2) 
 
 aSeitn baS iJBettet fdjiin ware, ) ( fo ginge ic^ ou8. 
 
 aSore ba8 SBetter \i)ov., \ (jo tniirbe id) ousge^en. 
 
 B. 
 
 (I) (2) 
 
 3d) ginge au8, ) ( toenn ba8 SBetter fd^on trare. 
 
 I -I 
 
 Set) toiirbe auSge^en, j ' ( Wore bag SBetter fd)on. 
 
 in each of which either of (i) may be associated with either of (2). 
 
 {e) Irregularly however — especially in conversational style — fo is often 
 omitted (in A) and the principal member construed normal, especially in the 
 conditional lorca.. As:-3Benn ba8 SBetter fd^on tnore (or ffiSre bo8 SSetter 
 fl^on), Kit ttiirbe ouSge^en, etc. 
 
 EXERCISE LVIII. 
 I. He speaks loud in order that every one may hear him, z. The 
 
 ancients were pf opinion that the earth st90(i iri the centre of the universe. . 
 
280 LESSON LVIII. 
 
 3. I was asked in what year I was bom. 4. We are convinced that he is our 
 friend. S- The boy would learn more, if he were more industrious. 6. If I had 
 been unwell, I should hav« remained at home. 8. Had he not himself said 
 it, we should not believe it. 9. He acts and talks as if he were a rich man; 
 were he really rich, he would not act and talk thus. 10. I doubt whether 
 he will remain long in this house. 11. The physician feared the patient 
 might die of (an dat.) his wounds. 12. I should never have thought that you 
 could learn German in so short a time. 13. We wished that everything 
 might remain as it is at present. 14. It is feared that he will not come. 
 
 15. The porter maintained that he had carried our luggage to the station. 
 
 16. I should have paid the bill, if I had had money enough. 17. Although 
 the hotel was very bad, we should have remained in it, if the landlord had 
 been more polite. 18. Yesterday came the news that the King was dead; 
 but to-day we learn that it is not true. 19. You paid me that money ! you 
 have never paid it. 20. It is better that one [should] make one's enemies 
 dumb than one's friends. 21. The old man walks as if he were lame ; is he so 
 (eS) ? 22. That was an act that might have been very dangerous for you. 
 23. The proverb says, one must strike (((i^tltieben) the iron while it is hot. 24. 
 Oh, that the beautiful time of (the) young love might ever remain ! 
 
 MODAL IDIOMS -SUMMARY. 
 
 472. From the examples of the foregoing lesson, it appears that the 
 English auxiliaries may, might, etc. are to some extent represented in Ger- 
 man by the subjunctive mood. These auxiliaries are used in English as 
 equivalents for the almost lost — and, it is to be feared, still vanishing — 
 subjunctive. But such uses must be distinguished from those in which the 
 auxiliaries are represented by the corresponding German modal verbs (Less. 
 XXVI.). The subject is, in its details, a large and a difficult one ; and the 
 difficulty, though not sufficiently recognized in English grammars, is mainly 
 in English rather than in German (§ 268, note). No full statement will be 
 attempted here; but in illusiration, and also as a supplement to Less 
 XXVI., some examples of the German modal verbs will be added. 
 
 Note. — These examples are in part taken, by courteous permission, from that rich 
 treasury of German idioms, the " Letters for Self-Instruction," by Dr. S. Deutsch. 
 
 1. Sutfen. 
 
 Satf li) fragcn — fiittcn ? may I ask— beg ? etc. 
 
 SGBfntt id^ es) fagett borf, if I may be allowed to say so. 
 
 ©r barf nur befe^tctt, he need hut command. 
 
 (Er barf ftd^ bariiber nic^t munbern, he need not wender at it. 
 
MODAL IDIOMS. 
 
 281 
 
 (§8 biirfte bag ju jc^ttjev \tm, 
 ©r biirfte e8 Bergeffen ^aben, 
 ©iirfte eg nic^t ju fpat fein ? 
 
 tiai may be too hard, 
 he may have forgotten it. 
 might it not be too late ? 
 
 2. fibnnen. 
 
 S!Ba8lonni(f)bofar? 
 
 3d^ lann nii^t um^in p ladften, 
 
 3(1) fann nti(^ irren, 
 
 (gr lanit eg Bergeffen ^aBen, 
 
 Er lann nid)t Welter, 
 
 Er lonn granjofif^, 
 
 ®ag tonnte geffi^rltd) |ein, 
 
 ®ag fonntc gefal^rlic^ fein, 
 
 how can I help it ? 
 
 I cannot help laughing. 
 
 I may be mistaken. 
 
 he may have forgotten it. 
 
 he can go no farther. 
 
 he knows French. 
 
 that might be dangerous. 
 
 that might have been dangerous. 
 
 3. iDtiigen. 
 
 3d^ §abe eg ni(^t tt|un mbgen, 
 (gr ntog i^n nici^t feben, 
 Er mag fiii) in SCc^t ne^men, 
 @le mbgen gefaUigft marten, 
 Er mag tl)un tuag er miU, 
 3c^ mbdite Wol)l luiffen, 
 3^ mbii)te gent — Ueber, 
 gafl mbc^te ic^ glauBen, 
 3db mocbtc bag niii^t gtauben. 
 Eg mijgen jeijt brei SKonatc feitt. 
 Eg mag fein Wie bu fagft. 
 
 I did not like to do it. 
 
 he does not care to see him. 
 
 let him take care. 
 
 will you please wait ? 
 
 he may do as he pleases. 
 
 I should like to know. 
 
 I should like — had rather. 
 
 I am almost inclined to think. 
 
 I was unwilling to believe that. 
 
 it may be now three months. 
 
 it may be as you say. 
 
 4. SDluffen. 
 
 Eg mug nun einmat fb fein, it must needs be so. 
 
 Si) iiabt bog 3intmer pten miiffen, 
 
 3^ tn"6 foi^tj 
 
 3^ ntufite taii^en — raiigte laii^en, 
 
 Er mu6 Wol^t front Jein, 
 @ie miiffen miffen, 
 
 aSer mu6 eg gehjefen fein? 
 Er mug nod) nicbt bo fein, 
 @ie werben fommen, fte miifiten 
 bcnn Ber^inbert fein, 
 
 I have been obliged to keep my room. 
 
 lam obliged to go. 
 
 I could not help laughing — should 
 
 have to laugh, 
 he must surely be sick. 
 You must know (/ want you to 
 
 who can it have been ? 
 he surely cannot yet be there, 
 they will' come, unless they are pre- 
 -lented. 
 
282 
 
 LESSON LVIII. 
 
 5. iSoDen. 
 
 SBciSfoabog? 
 
 SBaSfoHmirbaS? 
 
 Sag foil ic^? 
 
 ®u fottfi e8 emt)finben, 
 
 ®a8 foHfl bu tiii^t umfonfl get^on 
 
 ^oben, 
 SBenn e3 fein foil, 
 SKan foilte tneinen, 
 SBie foUte bo8 tnogtid) fein, 
 ©oUtebaa tDQ^rfein? 
 Sic8 (on §err 91. fein, 
 @r foD fef)r reid^ fein — gehicfen fein, 
 (St foBte bo8 nidjt tf)un,* 
 
 •what does that mean ? 
 what is that to me ? 
 •what am I to do ? 
 you shall smart for it. 
 
 you shall pay for tifat. 
 
 if it must be. 
 
 one would think. 
 
 how could that be possible^ 
 
 can that be true ? 
 
 this (portrait) is said to be Mr. N. 
 
 he is said to be, to have been, very rich 
 
 he aught not to do that. 
 
 er foUte ein gwgeres Ungliicf erieben, he was destined to experience, etc. 
 
 6. aBoUen. 
 
 gSittft bu ftiHe fein ? 
 
 SIBo hJoHen @ie l)in? 
 
 gr raitt fort, 
 
 ®r njeig nid)t iDa8 er miH, 
 
 aBo8 ttJoUen ®ie bantit fogen? 
 
 2Bo8ft)ittba8fagen? 
 
 ®o8 miH Diet fogen, 
 
 3(^ moUte eben fagen, 
 
 Sem fci wie i^m rooHe, 
 
 Sa8 re ill ni^t ge!^en, 
 
 ®o8 ttiitt mir nicdt red^t gefollen, 
 
 3c^ win niii)t l^offen, bag @ie frani 
 
 ftnb, 
 gr Witt una gelannt tiaBcn, 
 SSSiU'8 ®ott — fo ®ott mill, 
 ®08 WoUe ®ott nid^t, 
 SBottte ®ott, eB iDore wa^r, 
 SBotten (woHten) @ie bie ®i:te l^aben? 
 
 will you be quiet ? 
 
 where are you going? 
 
 he wants to go, 
 
 he doesn't know what he wants. 
 
 what do you mean by that? 
 
 what does that mean ? 
 
 that is saying a great deal. 
 
 I was just going to say. 
 
 be that as it may, 
 
 that won't do. 
 
 that does not quite please me. 
 
 I hope that you are not sick. 
 
 he pretends to have known us. 
 
 please God. 
 
 God forbid it. 
 
 would God it were true. 
 
 will ipould) you have the kindness .? 
 
 etc. etc. See § r;^, note. 
 
 * Observe in this and the next example, that the past sujijunctive of follen, with present 
 meaning, — as also of rooKen, — is o( the same form as the past indicative. 
 
THE SIMPLE INFINITIVE, 283 
 
 LESSON LIX. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 473. The infinitive is the verb-noun. It presents the idea of 
 the verb as abstract {in-finite), without affirmation or predicate 
 relations of concord, mood, etc. 5y its meaning, it is akin to 
 the verb, and can have the usual modifiers of a verb (object, 
 adverb, etc.). By its construction it is a noun, and pan stand 
 in the usual relations of a noun. But in consequence of its 
 complex nature it presents, as in English, many peculiarities of 
 construction and idiom. 
 
 Note — The English infinitive has the forms love^ to love, loving. The first corresponds 
 to German tie&en ; the second, to 5U liebcn ; the third, which has no specific correspondence 
 in German, is of the same form as the present participle, and is often confounded with it — a 
 fruitful source of difficulty in English grammar. The student will note carefully the use of 
 this form. 
 
 Another source of difficulty is the wrong habit of learning that the English infinitive is, 
 specifically, to love. Against both of these errors the student must be guarded, in studying the 
 infinitive in German — or indeed in any other language. 
 
 As above remarked, the infinitive is not a mood, and has properly no tense. 
 In its compound form, the perfect infinitive, it expresses completed action ; 
 but the time is derived from the leading verb. 
 
 The infinitive will here be treated under its forms : I. the simple infinitive 
 (without ju) ; 2. the infinitive with ju. 
 
 474. The simple Infinitive — without ju. 
 
 (a) The infinitive is used as a noun — usually with article or other attribu- 
 tive (§ 416). As : ®a8 ©^mirnmen ffiivft bie ®Iiebet ; bie Sunft be8 @d)n)im« 
 men* ; ein etoigeS ®eben ; ein §ebeii unb 2:ragen ; bo8 ^eigt Siigen, etc. — 
 usually translated by English — ing. 
 
 Note. — But if preceded by an object or adverb adjunct, the infinitive is considered a 
 verb, and it is written without capital initial. As: gu Kiel eflen ift nicfit gut; boS ^te^e (Sott 
 Derfut^en, thai would be tempting God, etc. 
 
 {p) The infinitive is used with the auxiliaries : toerbett, in future and con- 
 ditional (§ 173) ; and the modal auxiliaries (Lesson XXVI). 
 
 Note i. — For the frequent omission of the infinitive after a modal verb, see § 268. 
 
 Note 2. — For the infinitive form of the modal, and some other verbs for the perfect parti, 
 (iple, see § 264. 
 
284 LESSON LIX. 
 
 (f) The infinitive is used after the verbs : l^eigen, to bid, order; ^elfen, to 
 help ; loffen, to let, to came (§ 269) ; le^ren, to teach ; Ictnen, to learn ; and the 
 jfKj«- verbs, fii^lcn, to/eif/; ^oren, to Aear j \t^tn, to see; also finbeil, to find. 
 As : <Sx ^ie6 utiS §inau8ge]|en, ^^ *ai& »j ^0 out; er ^ilft tnir f^reiBen, he helps 
 
 me write; bie Sinter lernen U\in — learn to read {reading); id^ prte i^lt 
 
 fingen; id^ fanb baa S3ud^ ouf bent S:if(^e Uegen — /yzw^, etc.; ii^ fjj^lte ben 
 '^xsSSiS&fi'x^fa.— beat Qx beating; tag e8 gut fcin, to iVf & ; lag mii^ ge^en, let 
 
 me go; xi) lieg i^n (ontnten, I caused him to come {sent for him); or, as 
 
 § 265, t^ ^obe i^n ftngen Ijoren — tanjcn fe!)en— (omnten laffen, etc. ; or, indef- 
 initely, t(i^ ^re fingen ; td^ t)brtc f[ot)fen — singing, knocking, etc. 
 
 Note. — With le^ten, terneit, sometimes su is used, if the infinitive have an object. As: 
 @ott le^rt una buri^ fein SSort auf i^n ju trauen. 
 
 {d) With fii^len, ^bren, fe^en, and especially with laffen, a transitive infin- 
 itive will often have the passive sense — the subject of the infinitive action 
 being indefinite, or omitted. As : 3(^ l)orte i^n taut rufen, / heard (some one 
 call him) him called ; tag if)n rufeil, let him be called; i(^ fal^ i^n ff^Iogcn, / 
 saw him struck, &ic. (Compare English : I have heard say, sxid. I have heard 
 said.) 
 
 Note. — Ambiguity must be avoided; as, the above examples might read: / heard kirn 
 call, etc. But, in fact, such ambiguity will rarely occur. 
 
 This usage is especially frequent with taffen in reflexive form, as an equi- 
 valent for the passive (§ 274). As: 2Bir taffen un8 nid^t fo tet(i)t iiberreben, 
 
 we cannot be so easily persuaded ; bo8 tSgt ft(^ ni^t onbetn, that cannot be 
 changed, etc. 
 
 Note. — The use of the reHexive fi(^ (not e§ or i^n) here shows that the pronoun is con- 
 ceived as object of the leading verb, and that the infinitive has actually become passive in 
 sense — an illustration of the extension of idiomatic usage to the disregard — here to the actual 
 conversion — of the original grammatical form. 
 
 («) In certain phrases the infinitive is used with bteiben, remain ; with the 
 verbs of motion, faf)ren, getjen, reiten, legen ; with mot^en, to make (cause) ; 
 nennen, to call; with ^oben; and with tbun (ni^ta atS). Thus: gr btieb 
 flebeil, he remained standing, stopped; er ift fd^tafen gegangen, he has gone to 
 bed; er tegte ftd^ fd^tafen, ;4^ laid himself down to sleep; er ffibrt — ge^t— rei> 
 tet — f))ajieren,/4f is gone to drive (o^ driving), etc.; baS mad)t mi(^ tacfien, that 
 makes me laugh; baS neune id^ laufcn, I call that running; er ^ot gut rebcn, 
 he may well talk ; er ^otte ein SWeffer ^U8 ber Safc^e ftedEen, he had a knift 
 sticking, etc.; er t^Ut nic^tS otS reben, he does nothing but talk, etc. 
 
 (/) The infinitive is used (elliptically) in an exclamatory, imperative, ot 
 interrogative sense. As: 3d^ bid^ Berloffen! I forsake you! SBarum OUS 
 
 metnem fitgen SSSa^n mi^ medcn? why wake me out of etc. (See § 336, 2.) 
 
THE INFINITIVE WITH JU. 28$ 
 
 For the position of the infinitive, with or without JU, and of successive 
 infinitives, see § 358. 
 
 475- The Infinitive with ju. 
 
 Note. — As already remarked, this form corresponds to English to &i/^ — origiaally a 
 preposition with dative infinitive; but now, in German as in English, with widely extended 
 uses, in many of which the force of the preposition is obscured or lost. The form, in both 
 ' German and English, is sometimes called the supiTte. 
 
 (a) The infinitive with ju stands rarely as simple subject ; but regularly 
 as logical subject. As : (®o8) SReifen iji ongenel)m ; but, e« iji angene^m ju 
 reijen ; e8 tft ntt^t gut ju Diet ju effen. 
 
 ifi) The infinitive with 311 depends on nouns, in various relations. As : 
 Sie Sunft reic^ ju toerben, the urt of growing' rich ; ^aben fte Sufi mitsugefien ? 
 ber SBiUe @ute8 ju t^un ; ba8 SBergniigen anbete gliidtiif) ju ma(J)en ; nid^t8 ju 
 effen ; ein §au8 ju detmieten, a house to let, etc. 
 
 (c) The infinitive with jU depends on adjectives, in various relations. As: 
 SBereit ju fterben, ready to die; ft^raev ju lefen, hard to read; id^ bin ftob @ie 
 JU fe^en, glad to see you; ba8 ift nili)t leii^t JU t^un, easy to da l^o be done). 
 
 (d) The infinitive jrith jju is used with verbs generally, except those men- 
 tioned in § 474, and in various objective relations. As: <Sx fing an JU 
 la^en ; wit fiirc^teten un8 e8 ju fagen, we were afraid to say so; ii) rate bit 
 JU f^meigen ; ic^ n)iinf(i)e|'fe^r Hu ju fel)eii ; es fveut ntic^ ba6 ju ^ijten, I rejoice 
 
 to hear that ; and, with subject unchanged, equivalent to ba^, etc. : er glaubt 
 ein fiunfller JU fcin, he believes he is an artist. (See § 478, a.) 
 
 Note. — Remember that/ ju stands immediately before the infinitive — and is repeated 
 before each one. / 
 
 _ 2. With this infinitive, ^aben and fein acquire a sort of periphrastic or 
 auxiliary sense. As : 3ii) ^abe einen Srief ju fc^reiben, / have a letter to 
 write, or to write a letter ; cr t)at diet ®elb auSjugeben, he has to spend much 
 money ; @ie l|abeu ni(^t8 jU \\iXi!i'VtXl.~ nothing to fear, need fear nothing. 
 
 With fein the infinitive has always a passive sense. As : (SS ifl fe^r JU 
 miinfdien, much to be wished; baS ifl nid)t JU gtauben, not to be believed —not 
 credible; bag ift nod^ JU ti)Vm,yet to be done, etc. 
 
 Note. — The same use sometimes occurs with fte^en. As : ®a§ ftc^t ni^t ju (tttbern, 
 that cannot he changed. 
 
 {e) The infinitive with JU is also used, elliptically, in an ^solute sense. 
 As: S)aDon nid^t JU fpiecj^en, not to speak of that; also in an exclamatory 
 way: %ii\ auf ba8 OTutige SRofi mic^ ju fi^ldtngen, Oh! to spring upon, etc. 
 
 if) The infinitive with ju is used with the prepositions onflatt (flatt), 
 O^ne, um, when the subject of the infinitive is the same as that of the leading 
 
286 LESSON LIX. 
 
 verb. The preiDosition stands at the head of the clause, ju immediately be- 
 fore the infinitive at the end. As: Stnftott feine ?lrbett JU t^un, fptette er ben 
 ganjett Sag, instead of doing his work, etc.; er rebete mic^ on, o^ne mid^ gu 
 Icnneu, without knowing me. 
 
 Note. — Sometimes, after a negative, a clause will follow independently, where o^tte . , . 
 ju (or o^nc bo^, § 477) would be expected. As : ntemaB Je^cte bev SSoter ^eim, er 6rO(^tc eu(^ 
 etroaS, never . . .-. (5m^) he brought (= without hringing) etc. 
 
 The use of unt — jU requires special notice. (For other prepositions, 
 see § 477). v^ 
 
 476. The Infinitive with um — ju. 
 
 [a) The infinitive vfith um — JU (§ 281) is the regular form to express 
 purpose (in order to), when (as above) the subject remains unchanged. As : 
 3i^ arBeite friil), um beS 2Kittag8 mit gutem St^ftit ju effen ; er ftieg auf ben 
 SBoum, um beffcr ju fc^en. 
 
 Note. — The subjunctive with batttit (§ 468, c) may be substituted for um — Ju ; but never 
 um — gu for bamtt if the subject is changed. See also below § 477, h. 
 
 {b) This form is usual after an adjective or adverb qualified by JU, too, 
 or genug, enough. As : (Sr ift JU j;ung, um ba8 ju Berfte^en ; ba8 ^tamer War 
 ni(f)t grofe genug, um bie SBerfaramlung ju l)(ttten — notjarge enough to hold the 
 
 assembly. 
 
 But in both these cases (a, b) ju, without um, ciften occurs. 
 
 EXERCISE LIX. \ 
 
 I. He did it in order to frighten us. 2. I never! saw this place without 
 thinking of my old friend. 3. I have to write sevej-al letters; 4. We eat in 
 order to live ; we do not live in order to eat. 5. It was a pleasure to see 
 these happy people. 6. I am ready to follow you everywhere. 7. We are 
 going to walk; will you go with [us]? 8. To err is human; to forgive is 
 divine. 9. He thinks he is (infin.) a great man. 10. Instead of working, he 
 went to walk. 11. Without considering the question further, we followed 
 the advice of the physician. 12. Keep your seat (remain sitting). 13. No 
 time is to be lost. 14. The art of flying is yet to be invented. 15. We found 
 him lying under a tree. 16. He was tired of waiting. 17. He has promised 
 us to bring the books with [him]. 18. The servant came to put out the 
 lights. 19. The patient is too weak to undertake such a long journey. 20. 
 He took it without asking me. 21. The count has not money enough to buy 
 this estate. 22. Fishing and bathing in this stream are (is) forbidden under 
 (bei) penalty. 23. I have heard tell (fagen Ijoren) that when (the) sailors see 
 certain hvcds Jlying, they think they are (infin.) near land. 24. Let [there] be 
 now an end of working (of working be now, etc.) 
 
INFINITIVE EQUIVALENTS. 287 
 
 LESSON LX. 
 
 INFINITIVE EQUIVALENTS. 
 
 477- For some cases of infinitive construction in English, 
 another form must be used in German. These will be grouped 
 by their English equivalents. 
 
 1. The infinitive in -ing. 
 
 (a) Prepositions other than attftatt (ftatt), o^ne, lim, cannot be used 
 directly with the infinitive, as in English. When the infinitive stands in the 
 relation of such preposition, the preposition is first combined, in the leading 
 clause, with ba (§ 209), and the infinitive with JU follows in apposition. As : 
 3(^ befte^e borauf, geprt JU mcrbeit, / insist upon {it, to be) being heard ; xi) 
 benic ntd^t boran, bag JU t^Utt, / don't think of doing that {of it, to do that) ; 
 16) bin flotj borauf, ein ®eut|li)cr 311 fein, lam proud of being a German; er ifl 
 bamit jufriebeit, ben jtoeiten ^reis er^alten ju ^aben, he is content with having 
 taken (to have taken) the second prize. 
 
 Note the punctuation, with comma, of the infinitive clause. 
 
 {b) If the subject of the action dependent on the preposition is not the 
 same as that of the leading verb, instead of the infinitive a noun clause 
 will be used, with ba^. As: 3(^ befte^e barauf, bag er geprt trerbe, I insist 
 on his being heard {thai he be heard) ; er benit xa&ti baran, bag @ie bag t^un 
 werben, he does not think of your doing that; er tft bamit jufrieben, bag feiit 
 @ol)n ben jtoeiten 5prci8 erbatten I)at, he is content with his son's having taken 
 {that his son has taken, ett.). 
 
 Note. — This construction is widely extended in noun clauses expressing various rela- 
 tions. Examples : ^d^ eriannte i^n baran, ba^ er ftammelte, / kTtew him by his stammering; 
 er entging baburc^, ba| er ben ^lu^ burt^fd^tuamm, he escaped by swimming; er ift 
 bacon Irani geioorben — feine Jtranldeit rii^rt ba^er— ba^ er ein julatte§ Sab genommen ^ot, 
 from taking too cold a tath; bag er Irani fei, fd^tog ic5 borau?, bag er nic^t lam—/ can- 
 eluded, frorn his not coming, ^tc. The mood — indicative or subjunctive — in such clauses 
 will be determined as usual. 
 
 In the indirect question, ob will take the place of bag (§ 348). As : SBaS 
 liegt bir baran, ob man eg glaubt ober nic^t, whatmatters it toyouwhether, etc. 
 
 {c) Similarly, with change of subject, the prepositions anftatt (ftatt), 
 O^ne, um (§ 475,/), cannot govern the infinitive, but must be followed by a 
 noun clause, with bag. As : @r gtng fort, o^ne bag Icb ein SBort fagte, with- 
 out my saying a word; anftatt bag mein @op noc^ guropo reifte, reifte ic^ 
 
288 LESSON LX. 
 
 felbft nad^ Stfrilo, instead of my son's travelling, etc. ; \i) gebe meine SReife ouf, 
 bamit (urn bag) mein @o^n auf ber UniBerfttat bleibe, in order that my son 
 may remain, etc. (See § 468, f.) 
 
 (d) Often the English infinitive in -i«^ with a preposition will express an 
 adverbial relation, which must then be expanded into an adverb clause, ;<nth 
 the proper, adverbial conjunction. As : Before leaning town, I shall call on 
 you, ef)e id^ bie @tabt Berlaffe (before Heave) ; after walking (having walked) 
 a mile, he was tired, nod^bem er eine SKeilc gegongeit war (after he had walked, 
 etc.) ; by persuading others we persuade ourselves, inbem Wit anbere ubcrrcben, 
 Uberreben Wir un9 felbft (while we persuade, etc.). 
 
 (e) The infinitive as noun (§ 474, a) is used in German only in an abstract 
 way. Generally, whenever a definite action is implied, the English infinitive 
 will in German be expanded into a clause. As : Your writing that let/er was 
 very fortunate, t% War fc^r gtiiilii^, bag @ie jcnen SBrief f(i)rieben ; I did not 
 
 like your writing the letter, eg geftet mir ntc^t, bag, etc.; his coming is dou/btful, 
 
 eg ift jwetfe({)oft, 06 er (ommen werbe (whether he will come). 
 
 Note. — It may again be remarked that the English infinitive in ~ing in such cases must 
 be carefuliy distinguished from the participle. (§ 480, ^th.) 
 
 2. 478. The infinitive with to will also often require to be 
 translated in German by other forms : 
 
 (a) Generally, in German, the infinitive with Jlj cannot be used unless the 
 subject — expressed or implied — of the infinitive action is the same as that 
 of the leading verb. If the subject is changed, instead of the infinitive a 
 noun clause will be used — usually with bag. Thus : 3<il Wiinfc^e eS JU t^Utt ; 
 but, i(^ witnfd^e, bag er eg t^ue, /wish him to do ii\; ic^ weig, bag er ein Sieb 
 ift, / know him to be a thief; bie ®ef(^Worenen g'faubten, bag er fd^utbig fei 
 (or gtaubten, er fei fd^ulblg), the jury thought him to be guilty ; gnglaiib er= 
 Wartet, bag jebermonn feine !PfK^t tl^ue, expects every man to do his duty. 
 (See § 475. <l-) 
 
 (b) In objective indirect questions. As : He did not know where to go, 
 er wugte iiid^t wo er ^ingel)en foUte (should go) ; show him how to do it, getgeit 
 @te i^m, wie er eg ma^en mug (how he must do it) ; tell him what to write— 
 wag er f^retben foil, etc. -^ 
 
 (c) In descriptive or limiting phrases. As : There are many things to 
 make us happy, bie UltS gliicftil^ maiden foUten ; / am not the man to do that, 
 
 ber bag t^un miirbe (that would do tKat) ; ein fotd^er SKonn, ber eg t^un wiirbe, 
 
 such a man as to do it; he ran so fast as to, etc., fo fc^nell, bag, etc. 
 
 (d) The infinitive as attributive, or complement, after passive verbs cannot 
 be imitated in German. As : He was seen to fall, man fo^ i^n fallen ; he was 
 
THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 289 
 
 known to be there, man ttJUgte, ba6 er bort M)Or ; it is believed to be true, man 
 flloubt, bag e8 rca^r fei. (See § 275.) 
 
 For the infinitive phrase about to, see § 465, c. For is to, see yoUen, § 269. 
 
 Remark. — It thus appears that the English infinitive has much more extended idiomatic 
 uses than the German — with advantage, it may be added, in brevity and precision of expres- 
 sion. Also, th* this is in large part due to the special form in -ing — the participial or 
 gerund infinitive — which has a more distinctly noun value than the other forms. 
 
 THE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 479. (a) The participles are verb-adjectives, having the 
 meaning and adjuncts of a verb, and the grammatical con- 
 struction of an adjective. The present participle expresses 
 continuing action, and is always active ; the perfect participle 
 expresses completed action and, in transitive verbs, is of passive 
 meaning. 
 
 ifi) Both present and perfect participles follow the usual rules 
 of adjective inflection, and may be used as simple adjectives. 
 When so used they may be compared : ©n bebeutenberer ^unft, 
 a more important point ; bie behJunbertfte SSJeiSl^eit, the most ad- 
 mired wisdom ; or, they may be used as nouns : ©in 2ie6enber, 
 a lover; p,vA ©eliebte^ a beloved one ; ber Sefenbe, the reader; ba§ 
 ©elefene, what is read; or, as adverbs : SSiitenb aufgebrad^t, 
 madly excited; au8ge|et^net fd^5n, exceedingly beautiful, etc. — 
 conforming in all these uses to the adjective, as heretofore ex- 
 plained. Their more special uses will be stated separately : 
 
 The Present Participle. 
 
 480. The present participle agrees in part with English usage, but in im- 
 portant points there is difference. 
 
 i. (a) The present participle is used freely as attributive. As: (Sin Ue« 
 benber Sruber ; bie aUeS crroarmenbe Sonne, the all-warming sun, etc. 
 
 (b) It is also used appositively. A's : (Sr fag weinenb ba ; beibe !amen 
 fc^hjeigenb betunter, etc. s 
 
 (c) More rarely, it has predicative force, as of a clause expressing manner, 
 or contemporaneous action. As : @i(^ liebtid^ on i^n fc^mtegenb, blictte fie 
 
290 LESSON LX. 
 
 l)inauf, tenderly leaning on him, she looked up ; un8 freunbli^ griigenb, DcrlieB 
 cr Un8, greeting us kindly, he left us. 
 
 2. More usually, the English present participle, used appositively, will be 
 expanded into a clause : 
 
 (a) When descriptive, into a relative clause. As : IVe met a man carrying 
 a fishing-rod, ttjir trafen einen SDtann, ber eine Stngelrute tritg ; a man doing his 
 duty has nothing to fear, cin SKann, ber |eine !P(K4t erfiiUt, etc. 
 
 (b) When implying adverbial relations of cause, time, etc., the present 
 participle will be expanded into adverbial clauses. As : This being the case, 
 I had nothing to say, ba bie8 bet §otl luar (as this was the case) ; going to the 
 horsefair, I met the farmer, illbem i(f) auf ben $ferbemavft ging {while I was 
 going, etc.) ; the enemy having been beaten fled, ber fjeinb flo^, ItCK^beill er gc» 
 jd)Iagcn War {after, etc.) ; walking uprightly we walk surely, ttienn IDir auf« 
 til^tig roanbcln (if we walk, etc.). Compare § 477, d. 
 
 3. As already stated, the present participle is not used in compound forms 
 like he is laughing, etc. (see § 462). Nor as a simple predicate, except where 
 the participle is used only as an adjective : ®ie ijl reijenb, she is charming; 
 ber iPuntt ift fe^r bebeutenb (ein fe^r bebeutenber), etc. 
 
 4. The following are idiomatic forms : 
 
 (o) With the verb fommcn, to come, the perfect participle of a verb of 
 motion is used, instead of the present, to expreiis the manner of coming. 
 As : (St lam gelaufen, he came running; ein. SBogeJ fam geflogen, a bird came 
 flying, etc. — the action being regarded as completiid. - 
 
 (i) In a few phrases the present participle seenks to have a passive sense : 
 Sine meltenbe fiu^, a milking cow ; bie betreffenbc l^acfje, the matter concerned. 
 
 (f) And, on the other hand, the perfect participle will sometimes have 
 the sense of an active participle. As: Ungegeffen ju 33ette geljen, without 
 eating; gottOergeffene SDSorte, Godforgetting words. 
 
 The Perfect Participle. 
 
 481. I. Unlike the present participle, the perfect participle is used in 
 compound tenses — with ^aben or (ein, see §§ 171-2 — and in the passive 
 voice, with Werben, see § 174. It is also used freely as a. predicate, see 
 § 273. More freely, too, than the present participle, it is used, with its 
 adjuncts, as the equivalent of qualifying clauses. 
 
 2. With intransitive verbs the perfect participle, which Is passive in tran- 
 sitive if erbs, expresses only the condition of completed action. As : ®o8 
 gcjunfene ©^iff, the sunken ship (that has sunk) ; baS Oefl^e^enc, what has 
 happened; but thus used only where the verb has the auxiliary Jein. (§ 297^ 
 
ADJUNCTS OF THE PARTICIPLE. 29 1 
 
 3. Many words in the form of perfect participle are now used — often 
 with special meaning — only as adjectives. Such are: htxtii, eloquent ; Be» 
 ja^rt, aged; belannt, known; er^abetl, exalted; gelet)rt, learned; bcrgniigt, 
 pleased ; Bei'bient, meritorious ; Sotlf Ottlrtien, perfect, and others. 
 
 4. The perfect participle is used elliptically in absolute construction. As : 
 gti(cf) gcioagt, ^atb geroonnett, well begun, half done ; gefeljt, id^ t^at es, sup- 
 pose I did it ; baS ttbgcrcc^net, that not counted, etc. See § 446 (but the case 
 will sometimes be nominative). 
 
 5. After ^ei^Ett, to he called, the perfect participle, implying a completed 
 action, is used as with the sense of an iniinitive. As: ®a9 ^eigt fc^neU 
 gelaufen, I call that quick running {quickly run). 
 
 For the past participle, exclamatory, as imperative, see § 336, 2. 
 
 For its use with fomtncn, and other seemingly active sense, see § 480, 4. 
 
 The Future Passive Participle. 
 
 48a. The so-called future passive participle — or gerundive — is formed, 
 after the analogy of the present participle, from the passive use of the infini- 
 tive with gu (§ 475, 2), and has the form of the present participle, preceded 
 by JU. Thus : ®ie|e Vofl.i ift JU loben— ir to be praised; hence, eine ju lobcnbc 
 £t)ot, an action to be praised; -eine tiid^t JU ertragenbe §i^e, » heat not to be 
 borne. It is formed only from transitive verbs, and is used only attributively, 
 and rarely. - 
 
 Adjuncts of the Participle. 
 
 483. For the position of the adjuncts of the participle, see § 353. This 
 construction, often extended to extravagant length, is required always if the 
 participle is attributive ; but the appositive participle will sometimes stand 
 first. The participle with adjuncts will generally be appositive in English, 
 and will often need to be expressed by a relative clause. Examples : ®er 
 SBIicf Don biefem TOGO gug iibcr bem aKeereSjptegel fie^enbcn 2:f)urme in bie 
 rings um^er Ucgenbe OebirgSWiifte, the view from this tower, which stands 
 •jooofeet above the sea level, into the wilderness of mountains which lies around ; 
 bie ^odifte Puppet geprt bet burc^ bie ifaijerin §etene gebouten ^ird^e on, the 
 highest cupola belongs to the church {which was) built by, etc. ; bet unter ber Sofl be9 
 fireujeS jum Kobe ®efi:f|rte, he who was led to death beneath the burden of the 
 
 cross; in bem einft burtfi ?lf(i)e unb gtu^enbe Saba aerfi^iitteten §erculanum . . . 
 befinben ftd^ . . . ou8 farbtgen ©teinen jufommengefeiste linferen ©tideteien o^n= 
 
 \y.^t ©entolbe, in H., which was once buried by ashes, etc., are found {mosaic) 
 paintings, which are composed of colored stones, like mr embroidery, etc. 
 
292 LESSON LX. • 
 
 Such examples are not to be imitated by the student. 
 
 In the following examples (appositive) the participle precedes : SBalb er= 
 blttert burd^ bos 3if<^En unb ©efd^rei, fliirjt bcr ©tier, soon exasperated by — 
 the bull rushes, etc. ; ^ier moc^te mart mo^nen, umgeben bon Uebenben Jperjcn, 
 here one would wish to live, surrounded by loving hearts ; but it usually follows. 
 
 EXERCISE LX. A. 
 
 I. He insists upon your obeying his orders. 2. His father desired him 
 to come home immediately. 3. The servant knew it to be his duty. 4. She 
 declared him to be a fool. 5. The old shepherd came down the hill, leading 
 his young child and attended by his faithful dog. 6. She was acquainted 
 with the world, having lived in her youth about (at) the court. 7. Having 
 missed the train, we were obliged to return home. 8. Having taken leave, 
 we went away. 9. Wishing to see him, I went to his house early in the 
 morning. 10. He died at the age of ninety (years), beloved and esteemed 
 by all. II. We saw a woman selling apples. 12. Having forgotten his 
 whip, the coachman went back to the stable to fetch it. 13. While speaking 
 with me, he was called out. 14. I gave him the letter without saying a word, 
 
 15. Having paid my bill, I ordered the porter to carry down my luggage. 
 
 16. A meritorious man does not always receive the deserved reward. 17. 
 The long-expected news has come at last. 18. We saw the rising sun from 
 the top of the mountain. 19. He saved himself by jumping through the 
 window. 20. The general took the town after having bombarded it [for] 
 three weeks. 21. It was not a learned man that taught me reading and 
 writing. 22. Excuse me for speaking (that, etc.) to you in my mother-tongue. 
 
 23. A righteous man, fighting with misfortune, is a glad sight for the gods. 
 
 24. We have often heard that song sung in England. 
 
 B. (LESSONS LIX-LX.) 
 
 I. Have (luff en) the coachman called, and the carriage driven up (Dot). 
 2. We have allowed ourselves to be deceived. 3. These books are to be 
 sold. 4. He did it without my knowing it. 5. Many a man loses his good 
 name by visiting bad company. 6. He began by (tltit) asking me for an 
 alms. 7. I do not doubt (on) your keeping your word. 8. He wondered at 
 (iibet) my still sleeping after 9 o'clock. 9. It matters (aniommen) not what 
 we learn, but how we leam it. 10. A man came running up in greatest 
 haste. II. My brother does not think of (an) leaving to-day. 12. I have 
 nothing against your going a-fishing to-morrow. 13. I knew nothing of his 
 being ill. 14. Looking down into the water, we saw a sunken boat lying on 
 
ADVERBS. 293 
 
 the rocks. 15. Going to the town I met a farmeii 16. I met a farmer going 
 to town. 17. Don't you see that he is laughing at us? 18. My coming yes- 
 terday was very opportune. 19. He is not a man ever to betray his friends. 
 20. Before opening the letter, he sat weeping a long time. 21. He did not 
 know what to do. 22. We have many things to think of (an) to-day. 23. 
 The balloon was seen suddenly to fall from a great height. 24. Granted 
 that I said it ; I only resented an intolerable (not-to-be-borne ) insult. 
 
 LESSON LXI. 
 Adverbs. 
 
 484. For the forms of the adverb, comparison, etc., see 
 Less. XXXIV. ; derivation and composition, §§397, 401; posi- 
 tion, § 355 ; adverbs as prefixes, § 289; distinction from unin- 
 fiected adjective, § 449, 2. 
 
 The use of adverbs in German corresponds, generally, to their 
 use in English. A few special cases will be briefly noted. 
 
 (a) Adverbs are sometimes used before prepositions, forming a kind of 
 compound preposition. As : SDtittctt unt bett Seib, midway around the body ; 
 mitten in bent Sriege, in the midst of the war; Tiig an bie @tabt, as far as the 
 town; bt9 OUfS Sugerfle, to the utmost. 
 
 (*) Or after a preposition, forming a compound adverb phrase. As : SBon 
 oben, from above ; -Bon Unten, from below; fitC jeljt, for the present, etc. 
 
 {c) The adverb ^ei' denotes motion toward the speaker ; l)tn, motion from 
 the speaker. As: SBo lommen @ie ^er? where do you come from ? 100 ge^en 
 Sic ^in? where are you going (to) ? Or in composition : SBo^erlomtnen @iE? 
 IDO^in ge^en @ie ? They often stand with a preposition phrase, in many 
 cases where they can hardly be translated in English. As : <Sx font Born 
 gelbc ^et, he came {in) from the field; vi ging nad^ bet ©tabt t)in, he went 
 (away) toward the town. 
 
 (d) Also, in composition with a preposition, ^er and ^in will repeat the 
 force of the preposition, originally with emphasis, but often only as an idiom- 
 atic phrase. As: Sn bie Stabt Ijinctn, into the city; ou8 ber ©tabt \ftXOX&, 
 out of the (ity; um bie @tabt ^erum, around the city, etc. 
 
294 LESSON LXI. 
 
 For f^tt and ^in, forming verb-prefixes — usually in literal sease — see 
 § 377, c. 
 
 For the adverbs ba (bar), >t)0 (iDor), ^ier (^le) in composition, in place of 
 pronoun cases, see § 401, z, and § 457. 
 
 Adverb Idioms. 
 
 485. Some adverbs have particular idiomatic uses which can 
 hardly be represented by* English equivalents. In some cases 
 the force is purely modal, expressing attitude of mind or feeling, 
 such as is indicated in English largely by the tone of voice only. 
 In other cases, special senses arise o\jt of particular combina- 
 tions. Such idioms can be learned only by practice. A few 
 are added for illustration. 
 
 1. 9(tt$, also, even. ' 
 
 @ie ftnb au^ .fo, Siner, you are one of them, too. — 'iiif fenne i^n oui^ iti^t, 
 
 / do not know him either. — @o fet)r Er aud^ laii^te, however much he laughed. 
 
 — SSSer e8 ouc^ Jei, whoever it may be. — SCBanlcn aud^ bte Serge felbfl ? do even 
 the m.ountains shake ? — SGBenn (ob) e8 au(^ roa^r tuare, even if it were true. 
 
 2. 2lOCf|, though. 
 
 ©od^, when used as an adversative particle, has a stronger accent. As : 
 (Sr ift gefl^idt unb ^at bOC^ citien gel)tet gemac^t, he is clever, and, nevertheless 
 (in spite of that), he has made a mistake. — @r ifl rei(^ unb bod^ tfl et unflIudE= 
 lid^, he is rich and, nevertheless, he is unhappy. — @t ^at e8 bod^ gefogt,/»r all 
 that, he has said it. — 3d^ Bit i^n, bod) Woltte er nic^t, I begged him, but he 
 would not. Sennod) is often used, emphatically, in this 'sense. 
 
 ®od^ sometimes stands, eUiptically, after a negative : @ie tommen ni(^t? 
 Sod), — you are not coming? Yes, I am. 
 
 Unaccented bo4 expresses a wish, a hope, a supposition : @ie jtnb boc^ 
 n)0l)t ? / hope you are well? @ie Wiffen bo^, bag er fort ifl, / suppose you 
 know that he is gone. — 'Sk<xi)fa. @ie mir bod^ biefe %Xt\ifii, pray, give me this 
 pleasure. — SBfire Ki) bod) jjttianjig 3a^re, would that I were twenty years oldl 
 
 — §atte er bo(^ gett)rDd[)en, would that he had spoken.— ^ait ii) e8 boc^ ge= 
 .fagt! didn't I tell you so 1 
 
 3. ^X^, first. 
 
 JJun erfl geflanb er f eitten ge^Ier ein, not till then did he confess his fault. 
 — 3((^ l^olie i^n erfi gefiern gefel^en, / saw him but yesterday. — 3c^ l^atte erfl 
 
ADVERB IDIOMS. 295 
 
 bretgig ©eiteit gctejeit, I had read only {Just) thirty pages.— 'j!&\t jtnb erfi am 
 g^uge be? Serges, we are only at the foot of the mountain. — @r ttirb erfl 
 iibcrtnorgen onf omnten, he will not arrive till the day after to-morrow. — ®ag 
 
 braud^t tii^t erfl bewiefen ju tnerben, that requires no proof. 
 
 4. ®ern, willingly; lieBet, rather; am Itefiftett. 
 
 3d^ t^ue eg gent — Xl&ii gerit, I do it with pleasure — with great pleasure. 
 — (Sr ^ort ftc^ gem reben, he loves to hear himself talk. — 3(!^ iDiK e8 gem 
 glauben, I am quite willing to believe it. — 3(^ I)abe e8 nid^t gertt get^an, I did 
 not do it intentionally. — 3d^ tno(f|tc leinett gem beteibigen, I should not like to 
 offend any one. — ®iefe ^Pftanje wad^li gent itt fanbigeitt Soben, grows well in 
 
 sandy soil. — Si) ttitttt lieber rot^Ctt SBeilt at8 XOd^en, f prefer red wine to 
 white. — aSir bleibeit lieber JU ^aufe, we had rather stay at home. — 3tm 
 Itebflen Wore eS ntir, mettit @ie ntid^ gleic^ bejaf|lten, / should much prefer 
 
 that you paid m,e at once. 
 
 5. 3o, yes, indeed. 
 
 3a,' ^oren ©ie etiimol, just listen to what I say. — ffiarum fragfl bu? bu 
 tt)ei§t e9 ja, why do you ask ? surely you know it. — @ic jel^eit ja ganj blag 
 0U8 1 dear me, you look quite pale! — Srittgeit @ie baS Sud^ jO ttlit, be sure to 
 bring the book with you. — (Sr ifl ja fl^Olt fort, he is already gone, you know. 
 — (5r ifl jo berruift, why, he is crazy. 
 
 6. SHoiJ, still,yet. 
 
 @inb @ie noS) imttter Ironf '? are you still «■//?— 3»obIf ober itoe^ nte^r, 
 twelve or even more. — ©r tnor ^ier noc^ Bor eittigcn Sogen, he was here but a 
 few days ago. — 'H) t^ue 68 IlOc!^ ^eute, /'// do it this very day. — <§x foU ttod) 
 fominett, he is still to come. — ^omtltt er nod^ nidjt? is he not yet coming? 
 iBitte, rtoc^ eitte Soffe Efjee, thank you for another cup of tea. 
 
 1. SlUlt, now, well. 
 
 (Sr tnog ititn fontmen ober nid^t, whether he come or not. — Wx famen unt 
 
 gttei Uf|r ait, unb nun ru^ten l»ir 0U8, we arrived at two o'clock, and then we 
 
 rested.— ^vm lebte ober bomols feinSJoter noi), but then his father was still 
 alive. — SSit \jabm e3 gefe^en, unb nun ftnb roir iiberjeugt, w? have seen it,. 
 
 now we are convinced: — (S8 ifl nun eininol fo, well, it can't be helped. — 
 
 Slun, ^otte id) e8 nid^t boxlittQe\aQt? well, had /not foretold it? — ^Jlurtfhai 
 ifl fe^r natitrttd^, why, that's very natural. 
 
296 LESSON LXI. 
 
 8. ®l^on, already, even. 
 3d^ ttjarte nun fc^on brci Sa^re, / have been waiting these three years. — 
 
 ©d^oit ber ©ebonfe ifi ein SBerbreii^en, the very thought is a crime — ©li^on urn 
 
 bcr S^re tUiUen tniiffen toir e8 tl)un, we must do it, were it m.erelyfor the sake 
 of honor. — 'B&l^Vi %vX, all right. — 'i&iXan'tit e8 i^nt j(f)on \anm, I shall tell 
 him, don't he a/raid.— iBifon Bor £age«anBrud^ ttjaren fte auf ben Seincn, 
 
 even before the break of day they were on their legs. 
 
 9. ®0, so. 
 
 SBle ber 58atet, fo ifl ber ©o^ti, like father, like jo«.— @o eine Oefdiic^te ifl 
 
 unglaubU(!^, such a story, etc. — Sie ift bie SOBett boc^ fo fc^ijll, how beautiful ' 
 the world is! — (St iji fort. @o! i|l eS tnogticft, indeed I is it possible > ~ 2>0 
 ober fo — C8 mug bod^ get^an toetben, one way or the other, it must be done. 
 
 As general connective, § 328; omitted, § 471, e. Also in subordinate 
 construction : — As relative : ®ie, fo vedjtfl^affen finb, they that are righteous. 
 As correlative: @o gete^vt ct ifi, fo bef(^eiben ift er aud^, he is as modest as 
 learned. As conditionar: @0 ber §err iBitt, if the Lord will ; fo grofi bic 
 SJorbereltling aU(^ \oax, great as was the preparation, etc.; and in phrases 
 like fo Botb, fo longe, etc. — as soon (as), with Ot8 omitted. 
 
 10. SBo|I, well, surely. 
 
 $eute nic^t, abetmotlt morgen, not to-day, but may-be to-morrow. — 'S>ai 
 ifl wo^t realjr, ober, that may be so, but, — S08 tfl Wo^I nid)t tnbglid^, that 
 is scarcely possible. — ^\x l^abeti e8 wo^l ge^ort, ober nid^t Berflanbeu, we have 
 heard it indeed, but not understood it. — @ie glaubten 100^1, il^ Ptte nt(i^t8 JU 
 t^Un, no doubt, you thought I had nothing to do. 
 
 11. Sii^t/ not (redundant). 
 The negative is sometimes used when not in English, as< — in exclama- 
 tion ; mie oft \fiX er nidjt gefagt, how often has he {not) said (compare : charm 
 he never so wisely) — or after verbs of hindering, etc. : ic^ fann tiic^t l)itlbetll, 
 bag fte nid^t ^bren, I cannot prevent them from hearing (Latin, ne audiant). 
 
 Adverbial Clauses. 
 
 486. Adverbial clauses are introduced by subordinating con- 
 junctions (§ 332) expressing the various relations of place, time, 
 manner, cause, condition, etc. 
 
 The relations of time, cause, condition are nearly related, and 
 easily run into each other. The most important uses are : 
 
ADVERB IDIOMS. 297 
 
 I. Time. 
 
 (a) 3tl8, as, when, expresses a definite past time. As : 5118 i^ ^eute ntotgen 
 auffloilb, when I rose this morning, etc. ; at8 ic^ na(i) SonbDit lam, befud^te et 
 mid) fogleilf), when I came — he visited me at once. 
 
 (i) aSetin, when, whenever, expresses time indefinite, future, or contingent. 
 As : aSenn er nad) Sonbott latn, befut^te er mic^ immer, whenever he came, etc. 
 SBenn er lommt, wirb er un« befud^en, when he comes, he will visit us. 
 
 Note. — As stated § 328, note, fo is not used after clauses of timt. With fo inserted, tlie 
 last example would be if he comes, etc. 
 
 (c) SBanil, when, is properly interrogative, and, when used as a conjunc- 
 tion, introduces an indirect question. As : SBann lomitlt er? when will he 
 comet xi) weifi nic^t loaim er tommen luirb, I don't know when, etc. 
 
 (</) SJSie, as, is sometimes used for al8, in more lively expression : Sie tr 
 mi^ fab/ tannte er mid^, as {soon as) he saw me, he knew me. (See 3, b). 
 
 (e) Snbetn, while, as, expresses simultaneous time, but more frequently the 
 
 occasion or ground of an action. As : 3nbem id^ ba ftaitb, tvat eiix grember 
 ju mir, while I stood there, etc. @r ginfl gtcic^ reieber weg, inbem er mi^ nid^t 
 
 JU §aufe fonb, as he did not find — OT, not finding — me at home. (See 
 (d) below.) 
 
 (f) SBal^reilb, while, expresses more definitely contemporaneous and con- 
 tinued time. As : 28al)retib ber Srieg bauerte, while the war lasted; er fd^rieb, 
 toa^renb i(^ ta8, while I was reading. 
 
 Note. — SBd^renb is originally a present participle, like our during. 
 2. Cause. 
 
 (a) SBeil, because, expresses a real and definite cause. As: ®ie %i\i)t 
 foiinen nid|t ge^en, loeit jte feine giige l)aben, because they have no feet. 
 
 (b) ®a, as, since, expresses a logical cause, or reason. As : ®a ber 2Binb 
 im Oflen tfl, )0 ffiirb e8 mo^l trodEeU bleiben, since the wind is from the east, 
 
 etc.; bo ber jf onig ni^t 2(d^t auf il^ti gab, fo fing er fclbflan jurebcn, as the king 
 
 paid no attention to him, etc. (§ 328, note). 
 
 Note. — .y/wc^, expressing ^/?«tf, is fettbem (fcit) ; <m, expressing manner, is rote. As: 
 St^ 6in umno^l geniefen, feitbem roir un§ fa^en, since we saw one another; tx fpriifit (fo) itiie 
 er bentt, he speaks as he thinks, 
 
 (c) 9Jun, now (that), is sometimes used in nearly the very sense of ba 
 As : Jlun er ba ift, fierbe ieJj ru^ig, since (now that) he is here, I can die in 
 peace. 
 
 (d ) 3ttbem (e above), is more slightly causal, and is often rendered by 
 Enriish narticiole (S s.9.n. 2. b\. 
 
298 LESSON LXI. 
 
 Note. — These causal reladons — subordinate — must not be confounded with the co- 
 ordinating benn« ,^r (§ 326). For the distinction of the conjunctive from the adverbial use of 
 ba, etc.} see § 351, 2. 
 
 3. Condition. 
 
 (a) SBeillt, if, is the regular conditional conjunction. For its omission, 
 see § 350, 2. • For jo, see § 485, 9 ; also note to i above. 
 
 (*) S33o, is sometimes used in a condition. As : 35So bu mir baS fogfi, if 
 you say that to me. Also in phrases like troferil, [in so far) in case that ; luo 
 ni(^t, if not, etc. ; and, colloquially, often in the sense of Itjetllt, or ol8, when. 
 
 (<r) For the conditions al8 ob, alS ttJemt, as if, see § 470, d. 
 
 4. Concession. The concession of a condition — though, although, even if, 
 however — isexpressed by loenn. . . flteii^, iBcnn. . .fi^on, toenn . . . aud), ob 
 . . . auc^, tt)ie . . . aud) ; or by obgteic^, obfd^on, obwol^t — which also may be 
 written separately, with intervening words. As: SBenn ba8 gteit!^ IBO^C 
 IDOre, even if that were true ; IDte e8 OUd^ jetlt mog, however it may be; obgletd^ 
 
 er fein SJermogen Berloven ^at, though he has lost his property, etc. 
 
 For the corresponding relative forms, tter. . . au^, etc., see § 459; 3, h. 
 
 Note. — The conditional tvenn, or 06, may sometimes be omitted, as § 350, 2. As : $ai vc 
 gleid^ fein SSermbgen nSrloren; TOfire eS om^ raa^r, etc. And sometimes, in poetry, au(^, 
 g[et0, etc., will be omitted. As: D6 ber 6ee mA fi^eibet, fo finb mir eineS StammeS 'itS), 
 though the take divides us, we are yet of otu race. 
 
 For the correlative clauses of comparison, je — bejlo, see § 334. 
 
 EXERCISE LXI. 
 
 I. I do not remember where I saw him last. 2. Now that he is dead, all 
 men begin to praise him. 3. I have never liked him since I have found out 
 what sort of a man he is. 4. Do not judge him until you know more of the 
 matter. 5. He cannot walk, because he has broken his leg. 6. He looked 
 as if he were thinking of past times. 7. He took leave, inviting me in the 
 (aufg) most friendly manner to dine with him the next day. 8. He listened 
 most attentively, whilst I translated the letter to him. 9. Although he is 
 not a rich man, he gives more to the poor than many a rich [one]. 10. 
 Although he is our friend, we are nevertheless dissatisfied with what he has 
 done. II. As soon as I arrived in Munich, I went out to look at the picture- 
 galleries. 12. Whenever he passed by, he looked up at (liad^) the window 
 where the old gentleman usually, sat. 13. Before going home, I must go 
 into another shop in order to buy an umbrella for my sister. 14. As the 
 gentleman wa§ introdviced tg me as an American, I addressed him in the 
 
REPETITION. — SUMMARY. ZQQ 
 
 English language. 15. The longer I know him, the more I love and respect 
 him. 16. That one language is more adapted to (gur) music than another is 
 surely incontestable. 17. In order that a mistake might (tonnetl) never 
 occur, the landlord himself looked after even the smallest accounts. 18. Had 
 you only told me that you needed money, how gladly I would have lent you 
 some (tnelC^eS) ! 19. Only yesterday have I learned what the whole town has 
 known for (felt) several months. 20. Well, I am sorry ; but it cannot be 
 helped (finberit laffen). 21. He would not tell where he came from nor where 
 he was going. 22. The fugitive ran straight into the forest (^inetlt) without 
 once looking behind. 23. I should have liked best {to me, etc.) to stay at 
 home in (bei) this bad weather. 24. I know a boy who has been studying 
 German six months and yet makes mistakes in every exercise. 
 
 Kepetltion. — Summary. 
 
 487. A grammatical term standing in a common relation to 
 several other terms must either precede them all or follow 
 them all. Otherwise the common term must be repeated. 
 
 1. This principle, which is of general application, will be illustrated here 
 only in the following important cases: 
 
 (a) Subject and verb. 
 
 {b) Object and verb. 
 
 (c) Auxiliary, with participle or infinitive. 
 
 2. (a) Exception will regularly occur in a normal clause connected by 
 unb, etc. {§ 345, a), to an inverted clause. Here, generally, the subject will 
 not be repeated. 
 
 {b) If the objects are in different cases, each must always be expressed. 
 
 3. Other seeming exceptions will be determined by emphasis, etc., 
 especially in poetry. 
 
 Note. — The principle seems to be that 'Ca^ line of reference shall always he in the same 
 direction. It is the same in English as in German. In the following examples — which might 
 be extended indeftnitely — observe that sometimes repetition is required in English when not in 
 German ; or the opposite, the principle remaining the same. 
 
 Examples. — i. (a) Subject and verb. 6r na^m bie ©ictotur an, jog 
 gegcn bie geiitbe unb erfo(i)t einen ©leg (subject not repeated, but :) @r f er= 
 tte6 fein Sanbgut unb Beim SESegge^en fagte er, etc. 3Kit furd)tbarer ©trenge 
 untcrbriidtc unb beprafte tier ffioi(er biefe 3lufftonbe, the emperor suppressed 
 and punished, etc. ®ev $f«ter, Set ein vei^tlici^er 3JI(tnn mgr, ben gWc^tUng 
 
jOO; LESSON LXI. 
 
 ailf na^m Utlb berfledte, who was . . . and who received and concealed, etc. ; and, 
 
 as the exception (2, a) : ©arnad^ ging OujlaB ttoc^ ©fi^reeben unb fui^te baS 
 Self ju geminnen. ®oti) tnertte er itii^ts unb ging meiter, etc. 
 
 (b) Object and verb. ®t "^ot mill gejel^en, ober ni(i)t gegviigt ; but : (gr jo^ 
 mit^, gtiifite mxi^ aber niii)t. Sni le^ten Sriege l^aben niit bie geinbe bci8 gclb 
 Bermujiet, bie grate jerftbtt, ben §of Derbronnt, etc. ®er *Pfarrer, ber ben 
 gliiditltng aiifna^m unb tierfledte, unb enbUdI) rettete, etc.,— a/,4o received, 
 
 concealed and finally saved the fugitive, etc. But with changed case (2, i) : 
 
 Set ©laubiger ^atte bo8 SRedit, bcm ©djulbner alleg ju ne^men, unb il^n al« 
 @!(ot)en ju ttertoufen. 
 
 (c) Auxiliary, gin SSilb, wetd^cs iiber l^rera Sette gebangen, unb an 
 Welches fte oft i^r ®ebet geric^tet ^otte. 3i^ ^offe, bag bie Sfad^roelt basjenige 
 unterfudien unb {jriifen, and) beurteilen hjirll, was, etc. ©inige nteinten, mon 
 fotte ba8 ffiora bem armen Solfe entlueber fd^enlen ober fe[)r biUig Berlaufen,— 
 
 should either give the corn to the poor people, or sell it to them, etc. (See 
 
 Note.) But with repetition : ®te liutf tctt nid^t in ben @enot lommen, aber on 
 i>er KbiiK bttrften fie jt^en, etc. 
 
 The examples might be extended to embrace also other elements of the 
 sentence. 
 
 Remark. — Examples under (3) would belong to rhetoric rather than to grammar. But in 
 reading, and especially in poetry, students should be taught to account for every departure 
 trom the ordinary forms ; for herein often lies much of the force and beauty of expression. 
 
 Idiom. — Concluding Remarks. 
 
 488. Outside of and beyond all that can be taught by formal grammar, 
 lies the subject of idiom — that is to say, that peculiarity of usage, in word 
 or phrase, which is characteristic of every language, and which, more than 
 anything else, is the expression of its genius and its power. A word, or a 
 phrase, may be entirely grammatical, yet wholly unidiomatlc ; and a form of 
 expression, perfectly idiomatic in one language, would often be ludicrous in 
 another. This idiom is comprehended in an immense body of usages, often 
 lying beyond the range of analysis or explanation — often seemingly capri- 
 cious — sometimes broad and rude, sometimes delicate and subtle — yet 
 constituting the most characteristic features of every language and of the 
 difference between languages, as well as the most interesting subject of 
 study in each. This idiom, with the Sprachgefilhl which is its only sure 
 touchstone, cannot be taught by any rules, or learned by any system of 
 lessons, written or oral. It can be acquired only as one, by reading or by 
 association, learns to think one's self into the language, and thus to think 
 
IDIOM. CONCLUDING REMARKS. 3OI 
 
 and to feel in it. The grammar can only guard against formal error, and 
 prepare the way for this higher mastery. It is a mistake to suppose that 
 any mode of instruction can take the place of wide and sympathetic reading, 
 or of an actual residence among those who speak the language. 
 
 Still, it may be remarked that idiom can be properly studied only through 
 idiom. We shall learn the force of the German idiom only by comparison 
 with our own. Hence it is to be insisted upon, that in all the processes of 
 language study the English idiom should be held sacred, as our own norm 
 of thought and of comparison. No English forms should be allowed in the 
 study of German, for example, that are not pure, idiomatic English. Mere 
 paraphrase is not translation, and it degrades the idiom of both languages. 
 Idiomatic German should be made to give idiomatic English, and vice versd. 
 Only thus can the full force of idiomatic difference be perfectly understood, 
 and the foreign idiom be surely acquired. And it should never be forgotten 
 that — within the limits of school and college at least — the chief end of the 
 study of a foreign language is a better knowledge and mastery of our own. 
 
CONTINUOUS PASSAGES 
 
 FOR TRANSLATION INTO GERMAN. 
 
 Remark. 
 
 The following continuous passages are added, for general review, in two 
 courses. These are of nearly equal difficulty, and may be used alternately, 
 or by selection from either, as may be found convenient. 
 
 Other exercises may easily be made as required, by paraphrasing any 
 text in hand, and gradually varying more and more the form of construction, 
 expression, etc., of the original. 
 
 In order not. to swell the size of the book, and also because the student 
 is now supposed to have a dictionary in hand, these exercises are not in- 
 cluded in the vocabularies to the grammar. 
 
 FIRST COURSE, 
 I. 
 
 Two boys were taking ' a walk and came to a nut-tree, under wl^ich they 
 found a nut which they wished to divide. The elder opened it, aiid left the 
 other" his choicef whether he would' have the inside* or the outside.* He 
 Chose the outside, and got only the shell. " The next time," ' said he to 
 himself, " I shall be wiser." Then they came to a garden and found a. ripe 
 peach. " Which will ' you have now ? " said the elder again. " The inside," 
 said the little ' [fellow], and so he got the stone. This story teaches that 
 experience is only then useful when we ' employ it with judgment. 
 
 1 fpajieren ge^en. ' dative. ' lOoUte, subjunctive. * inner, iiu|ra, as nouns. ' 9>la(. 
 nollen, use second pers. sing. ' adj. as noun. ■ matt. 
 
 II. 
 
 When the celebrated Franklin was yet a youth of eighteen years, he once 
 visited a well-known ' preacher in Boston. The latter " received him kindly, 
 and as he was going away, accompanied him a short distance' from the 
 house. The door, however,* was so low that a grpwn' man had to' bend' 
 
PASSAGES POR TRANSLATION. 303 
 
 in order to' pass through. While Franklin was speaking, and not noticing' 
 the beam, he struck'" his head sharply against it. "Ah," said the old 
 [man], " you are young, and have the world yet before you ; remember this 
 accident. Bend when you should, and you will save yourself " many a hard 
 blow in life." '^ 
 
 ' belannt. ' demons, pron. ' Sttecle. * oEier. ' ermad^fen. " ntUffcn. ' reflexive. 
 ' urn ... ju, ° verb-tense: Sld^tgeSen auf. " fto^en. ''dative, "article. 
 
 III. 
 
 One day,' as an ass laden with salt was passing " through a stream, he 
 stumbled and fell into the water. After he had risen ' and gone a little 
 way, he felt that his burden became lighter; for a great part of the salt had 
 melted. " So,"* thought he — for he was only an ass — " whenever' I go 
 through the water, I will lie down." 
 
 The next day,' laden with sponges which his master was carrying to 
 market,' he came to the same stream. Thinking ° himself now very wise, 
 he let himself purposely down into the water, as ' he had resolved. When 
 he tried to rise, the sponges had become so heavy that he could '° not, and 
 so the poor ass was drowned. 
 
 ' Indef. time. ' ge^en. ' auffte^en (omit auxiliary). * Stlfo. ° indefinite. « definite 
 time. ^ article. ^ Ashe, etc., reason. ® manner. "* (it). 
 
 IV. 
 
 Diogenes, one of the seven wise men ' of Greece, lived in n. tub. King 
 Alexander the Great, who had heard-tell ^ much of him, thought it worth the 
 trouble ' to visit the philosopher. When the latter * saw the king, with his 
 splendid retinue, coming' up to him, he was lying in his tub, and warming' 
 himself in the sun. Instead of rising' and greeting the king, he remained 
 lying ' still. After the king had looked at him a while; he said : " I see, 
 Diogenes, you seem to be very poor ; is there * any petition you would like' 
 to make to me .' If it '° is possible, it " shall be granted you." " I do not 
 want anything," replied the sage ; " but if you will " do me a favor, step a 
 little out of my " sun." 
 
 ' Adj. noun. * fagen §i)rett. ^ genitive. * dem.pron. ''infinitive. * verb-tense ; add 
 e6en. ' infinitive. " gieH eS. ° iniigen. "> impersonal, "^demonstrative. '^ tvoUen. 
 '* dative pron. 
 
 V. 
 
 Baron ' Miinchausen relates the following " story : One evening, as I was 
 
 riding in deepest winter towards a little village in Russia, darkness over. 
 
 took me. Nowhere was a house to be seen.' The whole road lay buried 
 
 under a deep snow. Tired of riding,* I at last dismounted and tied my horse 
 
304 PASSAGES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 to' a post which stuck out of the snow. Then I laid myself down, and 
 slept till it was bright day. 
 
 When I awoke, I was lying on the ground, but I could nowhere find my 
 horse. At last I heard him neighing ' above me, and then I discovered that 
 he was hanging to '' the church-steeple. The snow had melted during the 
 night, and ^^at I had taken for a post was the steeple one hundred feet 
 high.' I took a pistol, shot through the halter, and brought the horse down. 
 Then I continued my journey, without stopping ' longer in the village. 
 
 ^ Article. ^ uq article. ^ idiom. * infin. noun. ''an — case ? " infinitive. 
 ' attributive. ' ft(^ auf^alten, infin. 
 
 VI. 
 
 A blind man, who possessed a large sum of money, determined, for ' fear 
 of being ^ robbed, to hide his money where no one could' find it. Accord- 
 ingly he went by * night into his garden and buried it in the neighborhood of 
 a large tree. But one of his neighbors had watched him at ' his work, and 
 the next night he dug up ' the hidden treasure and carried it off.' The blind 
 man soon missed his money, and at once conceived ° suspicion against this 
 neighbor. 
 
 One evening, as they were talking together, he told him ' confidentially 
 what a sly plan he had adopted to '" keep his money, and asked him whether 
 he would advise him to bury a second sum in the same place. The neigh- 
 bor, greedy to get a still larger sum, told him he could ' do nothing better 
 with it ; and the same night he brought back what he had already stolen, 
 that" the blind man might not miss it. Thus the blind man succeeded" 
 in recovering " his money, and the other, instead of getting allj lost all. 
 
 ^ au§. - 2 infinitive. ^ indirect (as ^ thought). * in the. ^ bei. ® ^erauS. ' bauon. 
 » f o(fen. ' demonst. » um . . |u. " bamit. " impersonal with dat. » infinitive. 
 
 VII. 
 
 When the celebrated Wallenstein was a student at' the University of^ 
 Altorf, he was always the first in the wild tricks of the students. Just at this' 
 time a new career was built. The rector of the university, desiring * that 
 it might' remain long unoccupied, declared that the prison should' be 
 named after him who should ' first ' come * into it as [a]*prisoner.° For fear 
 of sueh a disgrace, the students were restrained ' [for] a long time, and the 
 career remained empty. 
 
 At last, however, Wallenstein was condemned to this punishment. He 
 had a favorite dog that followed him '° everywhere; and as he was about" 
 to be shut in, he begged (for) permission to take his dog in " with [him]. 
 This was granted, whereupon Wallenstein suddenly seized the dog and pushed 
 
PASSAGES FOR TRANSLATION. 305 
 
 him " in before him.'* So the career was called the Dog, and thus this future 
 general practiced in his youth the art of outwitting " his enemies. 
 
 • ouf. ' J«, or omit. ' At (ju) just this time. • adv. clause. » subjunctive. « note 
 different uses of iAoxS;. ' suetft. « Perf. part, as noun. « jutild^ttltcn. ""case? " im 
 SBegriff 311. " ^iitein. " demonst. " reflex. ^ infinitive. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 In a certain town [there] lived three brothers. They heard [it] said ' one 
 day that the king of another country had ' a daughter who was in the power 
 of a magician with seven heads, and that the king had said he would give 
 her for ' a wife to any one * who could bring her back to him. They all ' 
 wished to try to deliver her, and set out together; but finally they had to' 
 separate, and then each one tried alone to find the magician's castle. After 
 many days two of the brothers became tired and went home again without 
 having ' heard anything more ; but the third found the castle, stepped in,* 
 and there was the king's daughter sitting ' all alone. 
 
 She told him that the magician would certainly return soon, and that he 
 would kill and eat him if he could.'° And in [a] short time came the 
 magician and tried at once to kill the young man with his sword ; but he " 
 defended himself well and cut off six of the magician's heads. Then the 
 magician begged for a moment's " rest, and at once all his heads came back 
 to him. But the young man did not lose courage, and finally succeeded " in 
 cutting " off all his " heads. Then the magician was really dead, and the 
 princess went back to her father's palace with the young man. 
 
 * infinitive. * following clauses all indirect. ^ jur. * that one. ^ they wished all. 
 s inilffeti. ' infinitive. ' corapound. ' tense. ^° [it], subjunctive. " this (one) however. 
 " accusative. " impers. " infin. " dem. pronoun. 
 
 IX. 
 
 There was once a king who had three sons, but he was blind, and though 
 he consulted all the ' physicians that came to that country, no one had been' 
 able to cure him. One day there came one who said: " There is no remedy 
 that can cure the king except the water from the fountain in the garden of 
 Queen Angelica." " I will go to seek it," said the eldest son. He started 
 and searched [for] a long time, but without finding any one who could' tell 
 him where this fountain was.' After a year had passed without news of him, 
 • the second son said he would go and get the water, and also bring back his 
 brother. He too searched in vain ; he could neither find his brother nor 
 hear anything about the queen. 
 
 At last the king's youngest son said he would ' try to find his brothers, 
 and get the water which would' cure his father. The king was unwilling tQ 
 
305 PASSAGES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 let * him go, but finally consented ; and the prince was told ' in a dream 
 where he should ' seek the qaeen's garden with the fountain, and also how, 
 with the aid of the same water, he could ^ find his two brothers. He found 
 the garden and the enchanted fountain, took as much of the water as he 
 could carry, then easily found (he) his brothers and went back with them to 
 the palace, and the water* he brought did' indeed cure the king, as' the 
 physician had said. 
 
 * omit. 2 idiom. ' indirect. * ge^cn laffen. ^ impersonal passive. " relative pron. 
 ' verb-tense. ^ wie. 
 
 X. 
 
 There was once a king's daughter who Aad fallen in love ' with a poor 
 young man, and since her father would not consent ' to her marrying him, 
 they were married secretly. When the king found it out, he drove her away 
 from the palace, and iAe two fled into a forest and lived there for many years. 
 The husband used to go ^ hunting * daily to * get something to ' eat, and one 
 day he saw on a tree a large black bird ' he did not remember having * ever 
 seen before. He tried to kill it, and immediately it changed ' into a magi- 
 cian with seven heads, who came down and began to fight with him, soon 
 killed him and then disappeared. Now this man had a son, who, having ' 
 heard from his mother how his father had '° been killed, wished, if " possible, 
 to avenge his '^ death. He lived there till he was twenty years old without 
 seeing the magician, and began to believe he never should " see him. 
 
 But one day, when he was sitting under the same tree, he saw the black 
 bird flying '* through the air, and soon the magician stood before him and 
 said : " I killed " your .father, and now I will kill you too." Hardly had 
 the magician said these words when a lion appeared and attacked him and 
 quickly killed him. Then the lion changed into a beautiful lady, who told 
 the young man that she was " a fairy, and that the magician had " been her 
 greatest enemy, and that it was "' only possible for her " to overcome him 
 under that tree, where he never came " when he thought she could " be 
 there. And because this young man was the cause of the magician's coming " 
 there, she was always friendly to him afterwards, and helped him" to 
 become king of that country when the old king died."° 
 
 ' nerliebt in (ace). ' (to it) that. " verb-tense. * ouf bie Sagb. » note difference. 
 relative. ' infinitive ^ reflex. ^ clause :*when he had, etc. ^^ omit auxU. ^ n)0. ^ 
 ^' demonst. " conditional. " infin. ^ tense ? " indirect. " dative, or clause, iAai she, 
 etc. ^ fia.v&s\ thereof ihiU the m, had come, t\Q. ^^ case. ^ was dead. 
 
PASSAGES FOR TRANSLATION. 307 
 
 SECOND COURSE. 
 I. 
 Everybody ought to " know'that he has five senses : seeing," hearing, 
 smelling, feeling, and tasting; that the year has four seasons: spring, 
 summer, autumn, and winter ; that the earth turns ' on its axis, and moves ' 
 round the sun ; that the world is composed * of land and water, and is divided 
 into five parts : Europe, Asia, Africa, America, and Oceania ; that there 
 are four cardinal points ', : east, west, north, and south ; that metals, [such] 
 as ' gold and silver and lead, are dug ' out of the earth ; and that diamonds 
 are found on the land, and pearls in the sea. 
 
 1 [ollte. ' infin. noun. » reflexive verb. * beftel^en ouS. * ^aupts^imnteUgegenben. 
 « roie. ' ^etauSgraten. 
 
 II. 
 Charles V.' was born at* Ghent on the twenty-fourth [day of] February, 
 in the year [one] thousand five hundred. His father, Philip the Handsome, 
 Archduke of Austria, was the son of the Emperor Maximilian,' and of Mary, 
 the only child of Charles the Bold, the last prince of the House of Bur- 
 gundy.* His mother, Joanna, was the second daughter of Ferdinand, King 
 of Aragon,* and of Isabella, Queen of Castile.' 
 
 1 ordinal with art. ' ju. " undeclined. • Surgunb. » SIragonien. « Eaftitien. 
 
 III. 
 A petition from Taunton was presented to King ' Charles II. " How 
 dare' you deliver me ' sucA a paper? " said the king to the person who pre- 
 sented it. " Your Majesty," replied he, " my name is Dare " " For* this 
 saucy reply, but under other pretences, he was accused, fined ' and thrown 
 into prison.' Thereupon, the House of Commons ' addressed ' the king and 
 prayed that Dare might' be set at liberty'" and the fine remitted." 
 
 1 use article. » reagen .. . Ju. "dative. * roegctt. ^ ju (gctbBuJe oerurtcUen. » in3 
 (SefangtiB roetfen. ' baa §ouS ber ©emeinett. » fi^ loenben an. ' subjunctive. i» freis 
 lafien, in bie grei^it f ejen. " erlaffen. '" Translate Sffiage, to preserve the play on the 
 word. 
 
 IV. 
 A famous physician was attending' a nobleman, from whom he had a 
 right to expect a fee ' of five guineas ; he received, however, only three. 
 Suspecting ' some trick on the part * of the steward, from whom he received 
 it, he at ' the next visit contrived ' to drop the three guineas. They were 
 picked up, and again deposited in Ai's hand,' but he still continued to look " 
 on the garpet. Hi§ Igrdghip a?k?4 if all the guinea? had be§n foynd-' 
 
308 PASSAGES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 "There must be two guineas still (lying)'" on the carpet," replied the 
 doctor, " for I have but three." The hint was taken as he meant (it). 
 
 < 6e^cini>e[n. >ba3$onorat. ' c)ikuse: asie,etc. • oon Seiten. » 6ei. '"let fall 
 as if (roie) accidentally." ^ case? * fut^en (search). ^ subjunctive intUrect. ^^ infinitive. 
 
 V. 
 
 The land tirhich is now called England was not always so called; for 
 there were not always Englishmen living ' in it. The old name of the land 
 was Britain. We still call the whole island Great Britain,^ of which Eng- 
 land is the southern part, and Scotland the northern.' It is called Great 
 Britain, because there is another land also called Britain, namely, the north- 
 western part of France. In the old times, when the laijd was still called 
 Britain, Englishmen ♦ had not yet begun to live in it. The forefathers of 
 the English then lived in other lands, and had not yet come into the land 
 where they now live. It is a long time,' fourteen hundred years and 
 more, since they began to come from their old land by the mouth * of the 
 Elbe, and to live in the isle [of] Britain. 
 
 And when they came, they did not come into a land where no men were 
 dwelling, so that they could ' settle ' and live in it without trouble. They 
 found a land in which men were already living, and they had to' fight 
 against the men whom they found in the land, and to take their land [from] 
 them (dot.). The men whom the English found in the isle of Britain were 
 not men of their own nation or their- own speech. The old inhabitants of 
 Britain were called Britons,'° but the English called them the Welsh," and 
 so'" the descendants of the old inhabitants of Britain are called "the 
 Welsh " to" the present " day. 
 
 ' there lived not always. > @rogs39tittannien. ' of which England the southern and 
 etc. 'article. ° fc^on lange ^er . . . bag. ° bie Slliinbung. ' subjunctive of unreal 
 (implied) condition. » p"^ niebertaffen. » milffett. " ber Sritte. " bet aBelMe. " ot(o. 
 " Ui ouf. " 6eutiB. 
 
 VI. 
 
 Everyone knows that the moon is inhabited by a man with a bundle [of] 
 sticks on his back. The story as told' by nurses is, that this man was 
 found by Moses gathering" sticks on a Sabbath,^ and that, for this crime, he 
 was doomed* to live in the moon till' the end of all things. The German 
 tale is as ^ follows : 
 
 Ages ago ' [there] went one Sunday morning an old man into the wood 
 to cut sticks. He cut a bundle, fastened it to his staff,' slung it over his 
 shoulder,' and began to walk home ' with his burden. On his way he met a 
 handsome man in {his] Sunday suit,'° walking^^ towards the church. Thi$ 
 
PASSAGES FOR TRANSLATION. 3O9 
 
 man stopped '* and asked the bundle-bearer : " Do you " know that this is 
 Sunday on earth," when " all must rest from their labors ? " " Sunday on 
 earth, or Monday in heaven ; it is all the same " to me 1 " laughed the wood- 
 cutter. " Then bear your burden forever," answered the stranger, " and as " 
 you do not keep Sunday holy on earth, yours shall be a perpetual Moon-day 
 in heaven, and you shall stand for eternity " in the moon, a warning to all 
 Sabbath-breakers." " Thereupon the stranger vanished; and the man was 
 caught up ^ with " his stick and his bundle into the moon, where he stands 
 yet. 
 
 ' as it is told, erja^Ien. 2 as he, etc. ' bet Sa66at. * Betbommen. » 6i8 an. » loie. 
 ' oor geiteti. « accus. « tiai^ ®ou[e. i» ket SttlJUfl, compound. " who, etc. " on|aIten. 
 " use second pers. sing, pronoun. " auf (Srben. " too. i" gang ba3fe[&e, einerlei. ^^ ba. 
 " in gmiflleit. » Sa6t)otf(^anber. 20 ^inauf^e6en. '^ iatnt. 
 
 VII. 
 We use' so many things every day' which we could' not make for our- 
 selves, and of which we could not even * tell how or by whom they are 
 made, that we are apt to think that they have existed ' in all times, and that 
 they were always to be bought ^ in shops. We forget that many of these 
 things which make our lives more comfortable, and without which we could 
 not ' now live, have been made after much thought ° and labor by those 
 who lived before us. These men had their joys and sorrows ' just like '° our- 
 selves, although they lived Mke the savages " that we now find in Africa and 
 America. They could neither read nor write, and had no books to tell 
 them " what had happened in by-gone " times. They could do " little to 
 make the world richer or better than it had been before them. Even '^ the 
 earth was different " in those times ; there were great forests where now 
 [there] are cities and smiling plains; vast swamps where there are now 
 ploughed fields, and valleys and hills where there are now seas, across " 
 which many ships carry the products " of distant countries from one part of 
 the world to the other. 
 
 ^ reflexive, genitive obj. '^ use aQ. ' subjunctive. * eintnal. ^ ba fein. '^ infin. active. 
 ' now not. ' infin. noun. ' greube unb Eeib. "> roie. ^ rotib, as noun. " that could 
 tell them. " oergangen. " baju beittogen, etc. ^ ietbft. '» anberS. " iiber, accus. " bo3 
 sprobult. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 In the beginning of the year 366 the whole military force' of the 
 Germans passed ' the Rhine during the severity of a northern winter. Two 
 Roman counts were defeated and mortally wounded ; and the standard of 
 the Batavians ' fell into the hand of the conquerors, who displayed,* with 
 insulting shouts and menaces, the trophy of their victory. The standard 
 
3IO PASSAGES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 was recovered,' but the Batavians had not redeemed' the disgrace of their 
 flight in the eyes of their severe judge and emperor. It was the opinion of 
 Valentinian that his soldiers must ' learn to fear their commander before 
 they could ^ cease to fear the enemy. The troops were solemnly assembled, 
 and the trembling Batavians were enclosed within the circle of the Imperial 
 army. 
 
 Valentinian then'ascended his tribunal, and, as if he disdained * to punish 
 cowardice with death, he inflicted' a stain of indelible ignominy on the 
 officers whose misconduct and want of courage had been the chief cause of 
 the defeat. The Batavians were degraded from their rank, stripped of 
 their arms, and condemned to be sold as slaves. At'° this tremendous 
 sentence the troops fell on the ground, and protested, that, if he would " give 
 them another trial, they would" prove themselves not unworthy of the 
 name of Romans and of his soldiers. Valentinian, with affected reluctance, 
 yielded to" their entreaties. The Batavians resumed" their arms, and 
 with their arms the invincible resolution of wiping away " their disgrace in 
 the blood of the Germans. 
 
 • bie §eer5mo(5t. ' flBerf(^reiten. ' bie SatOBer. « jur S^ou ou§ftelIctt. » toiebets 
 erobetn. « {U^nen. ' indirect. » oerfc^ma^ien, subj. cond. » an^ongen, dat. person, 
 •» auf, accus. " subjunctive. " conditional, i" nai^geben, dat. " roieber aufne^men. 
 " infinitive. 
 
 IX. 
 
 Some writers have maintained that Europe was' much colder formerly 
 than it is at present; and the most ancient descriptions of the climate of 
 Germany tend exceedingly' to confirm their theory. The general com- 
 plaints of intense frost and eternal winter are perhaps little to be re- 
 garded,* since we have no method of reducing ' to the accurate standard ° of 
 the thermometer the feelings of an orator born ' in the happier regions of 
 Greece or Asia. But I shall select two remarkable circumstances of a less 
 equivocal nature.' First,' the great rivers which flowed through'" the 
 Roman provinces, the Rhine and the Danube, were frequently frozen over, 
 and capable of supporting " the most enormous weights. The barbarians, 
 who often chose that severe season for their inroads," transported," with- 
 out apprehension of danger, their numerous armies, their cavalry, and their 
 heavy wagons, over a vast and solid bridge of ice. Modern " ages have not'* 
 presented an " instance of a like phenomenon. 
 
 1 subj. perfect, indirect. ' gc^ett fe^v roett. ' iibct. • in SSctrac^t ne^mcn, infin. act 
 infin. 6 ba3 5Ro6. ' who was born. » bie art. » ffirftenS. '» compound verb. 
 >i infiuitivSf " i>er SinfaK. " ^infibftlc^offcn, " nwer, '" teilt. 
 
PASSAGES FOR TRANSLATION. 3II 
 
 X. 
 
 Secondly, the reindeer, that useful creature from whom the savage ' of 
 the North derives the best comforts ^ of his dreary life, is of a constitution ^ 
 that sustains, and even requires, the most intense cold. He is ♦ found on 
 the rock of Spitzberg, within ten degrees of the Pole ; he seems to delight = 
 in the snows of Lapland and Siberia; but at the present he cannot subsist, 
 much less multiply,^ in any country to the south of the Baltic/ The modern 
 improvements sufficiently explain the causes of the diminution of the 
 cold. The immense woods, which intercepted ° from the earth the rays of 
 the sun, have been gradually cleared.' The morasses have been drained," 
 and, in proportion" as the soil has been cultivated,"' the air has become 
 more temperate. Canada, at this " day, is an exact picture of ancient Ger- 
 many. Although ^* situated in the same parallel '' with the finest provinces 
 of France and England, that country experiences the most rigorous cold. 
 The reindeer are very numerous, the groimd is covered with deep and last- 
 ing snow, and the great river [of] St. Lawrence is regularly frozen, in a. 
 season when " the waters of the Seine and of the Thames are usually free 
 from ice. 
 
 s ber SIBitbe. ^ ba§ giilfStnittet. = jjje acWaffen^eit. * matt, etc. » (eine grcube 
 5aben..-on. 'reflex. ' bie Dfljee. » ptUit^oIteit, » licrjtcn. i" trodcn legcn. " in bem» 
 fcBen SKoge roie. " bebouen. '= ^eutjutage. " clause : although it is, etc. '^ imter 
 bemfelben Bteitengrabe. '^ in which. 
 
ALPHABETICAL LIST 
 
 STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 For pedagogical reasons these verbs were fully given, in their usual forms, 
 under the several classes. For like reasons, as well as to avoid needless 
 repetition, they are now referred to by their respective §§. This list, which 
 is intended to be only supplementary, or for alphabetical reference, adds 
 such rare or irregular forms as are not given under the several classes, with 
 explanatory remark when necessary. (See Remark at end of list.) 
 
 Compounds are given only where the primitive is not in use. (See § 
 376.) An English cognate (not always a verb) is added sometimes, but only 
 when not suggested by the usual meaning. 
 
 For strong past subj. see § 224; for imperative, § 226. The figures 
 I, 2, 3, refer to the foot-notes. 
 
 See? 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Remaeks. 
 
 
 249. 
 
 taden .... 
 
 . Also weak, except perf. par:. 
 
 
 232. 
 
 6cfc5Icn (-fcl)leu) 
 
 . Past subj. also bcfo^te.' 
 
 
 246. 
 
 fieflcifteii (-fleigen) 
 
 . 2nd sinjg. pres.^ 
 
 
 232. 
 
 BcBtnncit (-Btnnen) . 
 
 . Past subj. also begiinne.' 
 
 
 246. 
 
 bcifeen 
 
 . 2d sing, pres.' 
 
 
 1 In verbs with root c, and some with i, having past a, another form of the past subjunc- 
 tive in 13, sometimes ti, is preferred, to distinguish more clearly in sound from the present 
 indicative ; as Befijfile, begijnne, ^Ulfe. These are marked '. 
 
 2 Verbs in sibilant stems, f, fi, fcl), J, often contract the 2d pers. sing. pres. indie, both in 
 sound and spelling, so as to be identical with 3d pers., as: bu [jei^eft, or ^ci^t; erl^eigt: bu 
 iDlitt^eft, or njaft^t ; et n)(itcl)t, etc. These are marked '. (See also § 41). 
 
 3 An old 2d, 3d pers. prcs. ind. and imper. in eu still occurs (in poetry, etc.) in some verbs 
 with ie roots: 6iegcn, Bietcn, ftiegeii, flie^en, fliegen, geniegen, giegen, Iciec^eii, liigen (old 
 liegen), riet^ieti, Misficii, f ^liejen, f djitiebcn, fpttegen, triefen, tjerbriegen, sie^en ; as : Deugft, 
 Deugt ; beug, etc. (the imperative always without ty These are marked ^ and are given in full 
 when they show any other change, as : fiieten, flie^cn, gie^en. 
 
STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 3I3 
 
 See § Infinitive. Remarks. 
 
 232. (etgen Past subj. also biirge.' [Eng. bury.] 
 
 232. fie^en Past also borjl; subj. fibrfte.' Also weak. 
 
 242. bctDCQCn Weak, except in sense to induce. [Eng. 
 
 way.] 
 241. biegeit old forms (eu).' [Eng. bow.] 
 
 241. Bitten Old pres. Beuteft, bcut ; imp. beut.= [Eng. 
 
 bid.] 
 
 231. iintlCn Past subj. rarely biinbe. 
 
 243. fittten [Eng. bid, bead.] 
 
 248. firitfen ....'... 2d sing, pres.' [Eng. blaze, blast.] 
 247- (leibcii. 
 
 246. filcif^en Also weak, except erbteicfjen, Betbletd)en. 
 
 As trans, always weak. 
 
 248. bmtctt Sometimes weak, except perf. part. 
 
 232. Hsci^cn. 
 
 254. brcnnch Mixed (weak) verb. [Eng. brand.] 
 
 254. Sringctt " " " 
 
 254. bcnfcn " " " 
 
 2313. btngcn . ... Past also (rarely) botig. Also weak. 
 
 242. btefl^cn Past also bra|d), subj. briijdje. Also weak, 
 
 except perf. part.^ 
 
 231. Jjringcn Past subj. old btiinge (rare). [Eng.throng.] 
 
 261. tlittfcn Modal verb. 
 
 232. cnHifcftlcn See befe^Ien, also § 3710^. 
 
 2433. cffcn 2d sing. pres. iffeft or \%i? 
 
 249. tojrc^ [Eng. fare.] 
 
 248. faHcii. 
 
 falten ■ • • '?e.xi. part, sometimes gcfaltett. 
 
 248. fangen. . • • New spelling fing, not ftetig,etc. [Eng. fang.] 
 
 242. fcAtCn ■ • ... Sometimes weak, except perf. part. 
 
 231. flnben. 
 
 . ^ ^ 
 
 1 c f — » ««ffl T n ^T.5 2 Slpff fnnt.note 2. i). aT2. * See foot-note ^. D. ^12. 
 
314 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF 
 
 See g Infinitive. Remarks. 
 
 242. flec^tcn Sometimes weak, except perf. part. [Eng. 
 
 flax.] 
 
 241. fltcgcn Old forms (eu).' 
 
 241. flicScit Old pres. fleuc^fl, flcud^t ; imp. fleuiii.' 
 
 241. flie^cn 2d sing, pres.^ Old forms (cu)-' [Eng. 
 
 fleet, floss.] 
 f tagClt Rarely strong, as § 249 (but not perf. part.) 
 
 243. frcffen 2d sing, pres." [= Bereffen. Eng. fret.] 
 
 241. fricrcii (Old frie|en.) 
 
 242. gii(^)tcn Sometimes weak, except perf. part. [Eng. 
 
 yeast.] 
 23215. gebiircn (-bSten, for -beten) Rarely pres. and mper. weak (geboreP, etc.) 
 
 243. gcBcn New spelling giebft, giebtjgieb; not gibjl, 
 
 etc. ^ 
 
 247. gctici^en (-bei^eii) . . . Old perf. part, gebiegeit (now adj.). 
 
 248. Qt^ttt New spelling ging, not gieng, etc. [Eng. 
 
 gang.] 
 
 231. gelingen (-linnm) . . . Only in 3d pers. sing. 
 
 232. gcltctt Past subj. also gbtte ' (old giitte). 
 
 243. gtncfcn (-ttefen) ... 2d sing, pres.' 
 
 241. genie^en (-tticgcn) ... 2d sing, pres." Old forms (cu).' 
 243. flCfdlC^en (-idjefien) . . Only in 3d pers. sing. 
 
 232. getntnncn (-luinnen) . . Past subj. also getoonne.' 
 
 241. gic^cn 2d sing, pres." Old forms (eu).'[Eng.gush?] 
 
 246. glcil^eit Usually weak when trans, to liken. [Eng. 
 
 like.] 
 
 BletftCtt Rarely strong, as § 246. [Eng. glitter.] 
 
 246. glcitcn Rarely also weak. 
 
 242. gUntntCn Rarely also weak. [Eng. gleam, gloom.] 
 
 249. groBcn [Eng. grave, grub ?] 
 
 246. gvcifcn [Eng. gripe, grab.] 
 
 ^ See foot-note i, p. 31?, 2 g^g foot-note 2, p. 312. ^ g^ foot-note 3, p. 312. 
 
STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 3 IS 
 
 See § Infinitive. Remarks. 
 
 256a. ^abcn Weak irreg. Compounds regular. 
 
 248. j^Bltcn [Eng. halt!] 
 
 248. l^angen Pres. rarely ^angft, l)ongt. Trans. l)angen, 
 
 weak. New spelling ^tng, not^ieng,etc. 
 
 248. l^auen Rarely also weak. (6 in ^ie6,from old tlJ.) 
 
 242. leBcn Past also ^ub; subj.^iibe. [Eng. heave.] 
 
 248. ^et^Cn 2d sing, pres.* Note perf. part. (§ 247, 
 
 note). [Old Eng. hight.] 
 
 232. I^ctfctt Past subj. also ^ii/fe,' 
 
 246. feifcn ■ Also weak, usually. 
 
 254. lenncn Mixed (weak) verb. 
 
 fiefcn (Old form of liiveit ; see frieren) As § 242. 
 
 [Eng. choose.] 
 242. {lentntetl Rarely strong, as § 242, except, usually, 
 
 Bettemmen. [Eng. clamp.] 
 fltetcn Rarely strong, as § 241. [Eng. cleave.] 
 
 242. fltntincn Also weak. [Eng. old past clomb.] 
 
 231. flingcn Past subj. also tliinge (rare). Rarely 
 
 weak. [Eng. clink.] 
 
 246. fneifcn Rarely weak. 
 
 fnci)ICn • • • Usually weak. 
 
 232a. fomtnen • ... Pres. foramft, tijmnit, rare. (Old queman.) 
 
 261. Ibnnen . ... Modal verb. 
 
 241. Irie^en Old forms (CU)-' [Eng. crouch.] 
 
 242a. liiren Rarely weak. (Old fiefen). 
 
 249. latien Sometimes weak, except perf. part. 
 
 248. loffcn 2d sing, pres.2 
 
 248. loufcn [Eng. leap, lope.] 
 
 246. Iciticn Trans, derivs. of I'eii), weak. 
 
 247. Itt^en. 
 
 243. lefen 2d sing, pres.* 
 
 I [Eng. nip.] 
 
 1 See foot-note i, p. 312. ^ See foot-note z, p. 312. ' See foot-note 3, p. 312. 
 
3l6 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF 
 
 See g Infinitive. Remarks. 
 
 243. Hcgttt. 
 
 242a. lof^cn As trans, usually weak ; sometimes as 
 
 intrans.* 
 
 242. liigcn Old forms (cu).' (Earlier liegen.) 
 
 nia|Ien Strong, as § 249, now only in perf. part. 
 
 genial)len. [Eng. meal, mill.] 
 247- metbeit. 
 
 242. mclfcn Also weak. 
 
 243. nteffcn 2d sing. pres.= [Eng. mete.] 
 
 000. mifeUtiBcn (-gelingcn) . See getingen. 
 
 261. tnogen Modal verb. 
 
 261. miiffen Modal verb. 
 
 232a. ncjmcn. 
 
 254. ncnnen Mixed (weak) verb. 
 
 246. Jifeifcn [Eng. pipe, fife.] 
 
 242a. |)flcgcn Now usually weak. 
 
 247. Iircifen 2d sing, pres." (Earlier weak. Deriv. 
 
 Low L,3it. ^reti'are.*) 
 
 242. qucQcn As trans, to soak, weak. 
 
 tiidltn Rarely now strong, as § 242 ; except perf. 
 
 part, gcroc^cn. [Eng. vyreak.] 
 
 248. roten Present rarely weak: ratefl, rotet. [Old 
 
 Eng. rede.] 
 
 247. reiBcn. 
 
 246. tei^en 2nd sing, pres.' [Eng. write.] 
 
 246. rcitcn. 
 
 254. tcnncit Mixed (weak) verb, sometimes regular. 
 
 (Deriv. of rinnen.) 
 
 241. tie^en Old forms (eu).' [Eng. reek.] 
 
 231. ringen Past also (rarely) ntng, riinge. 
 
 ^ See foot-note 1, p. 312. ^ See foot-note 2, p. 312. ^ See foot-note 3, p. 312. 
 
 * See j(^tet6en. These two are the only strong verbs that are not of original German 
 roots. 
 
STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 3 17 
 
 See g Infinitive. Remarks. 
 
 232. rtnncn Past subj. also (usually) roitne.' 
 
 248. rufen. 
 
 faljcn Strong only in perf. part, gefaljert. 
 
 242. faufen Trans, faitfctt, weak. [Eng. sup, sip.] 
 
 242. faugen Rarely weak. Trans, ffiltgen, weak. 
 
 249. f^affett Weak, except in sense to create. [Eng. 
 
 shape.] 
 2420. f^allcn Also weak. 
 
 247. {^eibcn Trans, weak, to sever. 
 
 ■2-1^. ftjetntn [Eng. shine.] 
 
 232. f^cltcn Past subj. also fd)o(tC.' 
 
 242. f^ctCn Sometimes weak, except perf. part. 
 
 241. f^icBcn. 
 
 241. ft^iegcn 2d sing, pres.' Old forms (eu).' 
 
 231a. f^tnben Rarely past fc^aitb, subj. fc^cinbe. Also 
 
 (rarely) weak, except perf. part. [Eng. 
 
 248. ftjlofen. skin.] 
 349. f^lagcn [Eng. slay.] 
 
 246. ftftlci^ClJ [Eng. slink, sleek.] 
 
 246. f^Ietfcn Weak, except in sense to whet. [Eng. 
 
 slip.] 
 
 246. ftfllct^m 2d sing. pres.» 
 
 f^IiCfen Old strong, as § 241 (replaced by flI)tii\J' 
 
 fen). 
 
 241. fl^Ite^cn 2d sing, pres.' Old forms (eu).' 
 
 231. ftftlinBcn. 
 
 246. ft^ntciftcn 2d sing, pres." 
 
 242. fcftmcljcn zd sing, pres.^ [Eng. smelt.] 
 
 242. f^nitulien l This form now usual ; also weak. 
 
 f^JnicBcn 'Old forms (cu).' 
 
 246. ff^neibcn. 
 
 1 See foot-note i, p. 312. ^ See foot-note 2, p. 312. ^ See foot-note ^, p. 312. 
 
3l8 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF 
 
 See § Infinitive. Remarks. 
 
 242- f^rouklt Also weak, usually. 
 
 232. f^redcn (usually erlc^rccten) Trans, weak. 
 
 247- f^tCtBcn (Deriv. Lat. scribere; see \)tei(en.) 
 
 247- fiftrcieit. 
 
 246. fc^rciten. 
 
 242- fttitnoren Pres. also fdiwierjl, fdjWiert. 
 
 247- UtOtigcn Trans, weak, to silence. 
 
 242. f^tncHcn Trans, weak. 
 
 232- fd)!tltramc'll Past sutj. also jc^roomme' (rarely past 
 
 jc^VDomm.) 
 
 231. f^lninbcn Rarely past fd)tt)iinb, subj. fcf)ttiunbe. 
 
 231. f^tningcn Rarely past fc^tniing, subj. fdittjungc. 
 
 242- fdltniireit Past also ((^ItJut, subj. f(i^lDure' (earlier 
 
 fc^lreren). 
 
 243- fCJCtl Imperat. also fte^e. 
 
 256*. fctlt .... . . Anomalous. Diverse roots. 
 
 254. fenllCn . . . Mixed (weak) verb. Also regular. 
 
 241. fictlClt Also weak. [Eng. seethe.] 
 
 231. ftngcit. 
 
 231. jtnfcit. 
 
 232. fmnen Past subj. also fbnne.' 
 
 243«- fifeen ... . . 2d sing. pres. ft^ejl or ft^t' 
 
 261. foBcn Modal auxil. 
 
 f^altcn ... . . Strong only in perf. part, gejpattetl, split. 
 
 247. f|icien . ... Rarely weak. [Eng. spew.] 
 
 232. fjiittncn . . . Past subj. also fpbnne.' 
 
 246. f))Ietgcn 2d sing, pres.'' - Usually weak. 
 
 232. fjirc^cit. 
 
 241. fJiric^Elt 2d sing, pres." Old forms (eu)-' 
 
 231. f^iringen. 
 
 232. petften. 
 
 ^ See foot-note i, p. 312. * See foot-note 2, p. 312. ^ See foot-note 3, p. 312. 
 
STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 319 
 
 See g Infinitive. Remarks. 
 
 ficdcn Rarely strong, as § 232. Trans, always 
 
 weak, also p. part, intrans. 
 
 noU. \ ft'^^" ^^^^ ^"^i- ^^^° f "nilf ; rarely past jluitb. 
 
 232. jlc^lcn Past subj.. also fto^te.> Rarely past flo^l. 
 
 247- jiciBcn. 
 
 232. ficrben Past subj. also ftiirbe.' [Eng. starve.] 
 
 241. flielieit Sometimes weak. 
 
 231. fiinfcn Rarely past ftunf, subj. ftun!e. 
 
 248. fio^en 2d sing, pres.^ 
 
 246. jlreit^cn [Eng. strike.] 
 
 246. ftrcitcit. 
 
 255. tjun (tf)at for t^at, vulg., as aux. before infin.) 
 
 249. tragen [Eng. drag, draw, dray.] 
 
 232. trcffcn [Eng. drub.] 
 
 247- treiBcn. 
 
 243a. tretcii. 
 
 241. tttcfcn Also weak, esp. in perf. part, (see treffen). 
 
 Old forms (CIl).' 
 
 231. trinfen Rarely past tninf, subj. triinh. 
 
 2420. ttitgen (Earlier tricgen.) 
 
 232. tietlletbcn (-bevbeil) Trans, usually weak. Past subj. also 
 
 tierbiirbe.' 
 241. BerbticSen (-briegen) . 2d sing, pres.^ Old forms (cu).' 
 243. acrgeffctt (-geffen) ... 2d sing, pres." [Eng. get.] 
 
 241. tierliercn (-lieren, earlier [Eng. forlorn.] 
 
 liefcn ; see fcieren.) 
 
 249. loaflfcn 2d sing, pres:' [Eng. wax.] 
 
 2423. tniigftt More properly weak, as trans, to Wiegen. 
 
 See § 362. 
 249. lonfcbcn 2d sing, pres." 
 
 242. toebcn ■ ■ .... Also weak. 
 
 1 See foot-note i, p. 312. 2 See foot-note 2, p. 312. 8 See foot-note 3, p. 312. 
 
320 STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 See g Infinitive. Remarks. 
 
 246. tnet^Cn Trans, weak, to soften. [Eng. weak.] 
 
 247. tnetfen (Formerly weak.) [Eng. wise.] 
 
 254. tOCntlen Mixed (weak) verb ; also regular. [Bhg. 
 
 wend, went.] 
 
 232. tnctfiett Past subj. also ItiiirBe.' 
 
 2561:. llicrtlen (also 232 c) . . [Eng. poet, worth.*] 
 
 232. tncrfcn Past subj. also Wiirfe." [Eng. warp.] 
 
 241. totcgcn Trans, to rock, weak. (See mSgen.) 
 
 231. ttinicit. • 
 
 tnirren Strong only in perf. part., »ertt)orren. 
 
 254. taiffen Like modal verbs. [Eng. to wit, etc.] 
 
 261. toollcn Modal.verb; 
 
 247. jelftctt. 
 
 241. jicjcn Old pres. 3euc()fl, jcud^t, imp. ytMii,? [Eng. 
 
 tow, tug.] 
 231. jtninBen. 
 
 Remark. In the foregoing List the usual conjugation and meaning of 
 the verbs is purposely not given, in order that the student may be aided in 
 learning these by constant reference to the verbs in their respective classes. 
 This advantage will soon repay the temporary trouble of the double 
 reference. 
 
 1 See foot-note i, p. 312. 2 See foot-note 2, p. 312. 3 See foot-note 3, p. 312. 
 
 * In the phrase, " Woe worth the day." 
 
ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 The books of this series are printed according to the 
 rules prescribed ^for the Prussian schools, and now 
 generally followed in Germany. These rules, and the 
 words to which they apply, are fully given in a painphlet 
 entitled, „9tefleln unb aBortev^SSevjei^niS fiir bte beutf^e 
 9te4tfd)rei6unfl, jitm Oebroud) in ben ^)reii§if^cn Stouten," 
 which can be had at small cost. But for the immediate 
 guidance of students who may have to use dictionaries, 
 etc., printed after the old orthography, the following selec- 
 tion of the most important changes is given for reference : — 
 
 I. VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 The modified capitals — even in Roman type — always 
 t, £), it ; A, 6, U — not 9le, £)e, etc. 
 C, not 0, in ec^t, ©vcnje, Oveiiel, Bering, ftctS, hm(t)k, 
 
 leugn«n, and some others. 
 i, not ic, in ftng, gtng, ^tng ; but : — 
 te, not i, in gie6, gieBft, gieBt, and in verbs like fiitbieren, etc. 
 e added in plurals like Sntee, ©eeen, 9lrmeeen, etc. 
 Single vowel for double vowel in ; — 
 
 6or (SBavfrfioft), ©(f)of, 
 
 §erb, ©c^ar, 
 
 §erbe, ®^o§, 
 
 goS (lofen), ©tar, 
 
 Sofung, SESage, 
 
 Tta^i aSave, etc. 
 
The following are distinguished by spelling : — 
 
 ^xbn,^dre. ^khtx, fever. 
 
 ©eifel, hostage. ©eigel, scourge. 
 
 8tb, lid. 8ieb, song. 
 
 flvaulid), grayish. greulid), terrible. 
 
 ilKafiie, mare. 2Wore, story. 
 
 SDftne, mine. S)Jftene, wz?V«. 
 
 Stil, style. ©tie!, handle. 
 
 ttjiber (insep.), against. hJteber (sep.), again, etc. 
 
 II. CONSONANTS. 
 
 r, not ^, in German words : 
 
 «) Initial, where ^ is not radical or necessary to 
 mark a long vowel : %o.\x, tauen, jTeil, %\zx, 
 teuer, bcrtetbigen, %v.xm (short); but tl^un, 
 %\)oX, %\)m, etc. ; 
 V) In the sufiBx -turn: ^gentum, S^leid^tum, etc. 
 c) Final or medial, as: SKut, Slrmut, 9?ot, rot, 
 raten, Stlem, tnie^en, SBirt (short), etc. 
 f, not )^, in all German words, except @p^eu. 
 8, not §, in the pronoun compounds : beSroegen, beS^atb, 
 iceS^alb, inbeS, etc. And in the suifix^ -niS (but 
 plural -niffe) : ®tet^ni§, ®let(f)tiiffe, etc. 
 Note. — f , in Roman type, must be ss (more strictly fs). 
 
 t, not bt, in Srot, Srnte, ©d^mert, tot (adj.), toten, etc. 
 
 f for t in many foreign words ; as : ^anon, tovreft, tontret, 
 ^onjunftion, furfio, etc. 
 
 ^ for c in many foreign words ; as : Offtjiev, ^roaefe, 
 ^onjert, etc. ; while in many others, not so fully 
 naturalized, c is retained ; as : Socent, fecial, etc. 
 
 III. CAPITALS. 
 
 The use of capitals is limited, more closely than here- 
 tofore, to nouns and words used strictly as nouns. 
 
VOCABULARIES 
 
EXPLANATORY. 
 
 These 'V'ocabularies, being part of a Grammar, are intended not to take 
 the place of, but to assist — and, indeed, compel — grammar study. Hence 
 only such help is given as the student ought to need. Thus, word forms 
 are indicated only where they may not be known under the most general 
 rules ; for example, in nouns : the plural of Stjlfel, 2trm, but not- of SSadEer, 
 SSab, etc. ; and such indications are not unnecessarily repeated, as in ^dit' 
 tag," etc. (but given in i8a|tt^of, etc., because §of does not occur). Special 
 forms, as SltttlDOl't, SSonb, etc., are, however, not only given, but referred to 
 the appropriate §§. Also, no more indication is given than is necessary; as, 
 in general, where the plural sufficiently indicates the genitive, etc. 
 
 In verbs, all peculiarities of conjugation are referred to the respective §§. 
 Separable compounds are indicated by hyphens, as on=fattgen; inseparable 
 are simply written in one word. The auxiliary jeitl is given ; in other cases 
 l^obett must be understood. , 
 
 Accents are indicated only when foreign or otherwise unusuaj. Import- 
 ant points of syntax are indicated by references. The parts of speech are 
 named only in case of double uses of the same word, or when the English 
 equivalent might possibly be ambiguous. Inflectional forms that are fully 
 explained in the grammar are omitted. 
 
 Compounds (except verbs), and sometimes obvious derivatives, are grouped 
 under a common title-word. Adverbs, unless of special form, are included 
 under the adjectives. Separable prefixes are classed as adverbs (§ 447, a). 
 
 Cognates are purposely not indicated, because (as explained in Lesson 
 XLV.) this subject does not properly belong to the most elementary 
 reading, such as is alone included in this grammar. It may not the less, 
 however, be made a useful topic for class-room instruction, or for exercise. 
 
 Only such meanings are given as occur in the grammar, or as are necessary 
 to explain these. The object has been to secure the utmost possible brevity, 
 and, at the same time, to furnish all the help needed in a working grammar. 
 
 The abbreviations employed are such as are generally understood. Out- 
 side of these, the straight line — indicates the title form unchanged, as 
 2(cf)tel, //. — , for. 3td)tel; Strm, pi. -t, for Slvme, etc.; while -^ indicates 
 vowel modification, as Strjt, //. "e, for jttjle, etc.; and similarly in com- 
 pounds, as nd)t, — se^n, for adjtje^n, etc. 
 
 For special notes on prepositions, see Appendix, p. 368. 
 (324) 
 
GERMAN -ENGLISH. 
 
 06, off, from, away, down. 
 
 Sticn)), m. (pi. -e), evening, the west ; 
 beg —8, or obenbS {adv.), evenings, 
 in the evening (indef.). 
 
 vAtX, but, however. 
 
 ofisfo'Sren (fein, 249), to drive off, de- 
 part. 
 
 afi^gc^en (fein, 248), to go off, leave ; 
 result. 
 
 afi=Teifen ((eiit, 213)1 to start off, set 
 
 out (on a journey). 
 aB=f<^l-Ctben (247), to write off, copy. 
 mi, m. (pi. "e), abbot. 
 Or^t, eight; — jefin, eighteen; —jig, 
 
 eighty; ber — (t)e, tlie eighth. 
 ««tcl, n. (pl. — ), eighth (part). 
 a^ten (212), to regard, esteem. 
 
 abbic'rcn (215), to add. 
 
 Sllttftcmic',/, academy. 
 aU (460), all, every ; nlleS, everything, 
 everybody; attcv — , gen. pl. as sup. 
 pre/., alterljeiligfl, most holy, etc. 
 allctn', alone ; conj., but, only. 
 St^lCIl,//., Alps. 
 
 a\i, adv., as, than; conj., as, when 
 ^ {def..past) ; — (Wenn, oB), as if. 
 _alt, old; bie 3lltcn, (often) the an- 
 cients. 
 SUtcr, n., age, old age. 
 altcrn (2I4)> to age, grow old. 
 
 am, /or on bent. 
 
 Slmettfoncr, m., (an) American. 
 
 an, adv., on; prep, (dat.), near, by, 
 on (of dates); (ace), to, towards, 
 against ; benten on, to think of (ace). 
 
 anber, other; second; — tl)0lb, one 
 and a half (311). 
 
 On=crtcnnen (254, 289), to acknowledge. 
 
 Slnfong, ft. (pl. "e), beginning; on= 
 fangs (adv.), at first. / 
 
 aitsfangen (247), to begin. «^.^ 
 
 angene^nt, acceptable, agreeable. 
 an^fommen, (fein,232), to arrive;— onf, 
 
 impers. w. ace, to depend on, matter. 
 
 ansnefimen (232), to accept, assume ; 
 reflex., to take interest in (gen^. 
 
 Slnttnort, / (//. -en, 122), answer. 
 
 anttOOrten (212), to answer (<&<.). 
 
 attsjiel^Cn (24i),_to draw on, attract; 
 intr. (|etn), to draw near, approach; 
 reflex., to dress (one's self). 
 
 Sl^jfel m. (pl. '^), apple. 
 
 StJUiettt', m. (pl. -e), appetite. 
 
 8li)ri(', m. {gen. -«), AprU. 
 
 8lr6tit, /, work, labor; — er, m. la- 
 borer; — SniQim,//. — ateutc, work- 
 man, workpeople (425). 
 
 orkittlt, to work. 
 
 iitBCrn (214), to vex, anger; reflex., 
 to be angry. 
 
 8ttm, m. {pl. -e), arm (Umb). 
 
 orra, ipoor. 
 
 Ottig, kind, good, polite. 
 Mrjt, m. (pl. ^e), physician. 
 Slfieit, « , Asia. 
 
 W, m- (/'• "e)/ bough, branch. 
 (3^5) 
 
326 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 and), also, even (485); lucr, ma8 — , 
 whoever, whatever ; Wenn, ob — , 
 even if, although (486). 
 
 Ottf, adv., up, open; prep, (dat), on, 
 upon, at ; (ace), upon, to, towards ; 
 for (time) ; after, according to ; — 
 bajj, in order that. [the dead). 
 
 oufcrficjen (iein, 289), to rise (from 
 
 SlufBOlit,/-, exercise, task. 
 
 aufsgeTjen (fein, 248), to go up, rise. 
 aufsl^cBen (242), to lift up, raise, put 
 away. 
 
 auNflc^en (feitt, 249), to stand up, 
 
 rise (from bed). 
 
 SlUBC, n. {gen. -?, pi. -«), eye ; —n-- 
 blict, m., moment. 
 
 9ttt9Ufl', m. {gen. -?), August. 
 
 0U8, adv., out, forth, throughout; 
 prep, (dai.), out of, from, by, on ac- 
 count of. 
 
 OUS»9C6cn (243), to give out, spend; 
 reflex., to give one's Self out (fi'V)- 
 
 OUSsBE^t" (ffi"' 248), to go out, pro- 
 ceed, end. 
 
 0U8=tlll^en, to rest, repose. 
 
 OltS:feI|en (243), to look, seem; as 
 noun, look, appearance. 
 
 tttt^et {dat^, outside of, without, ex- 
 cept ; — bem, adv., besides. 
 
 nu«=3icjen (241), to draw out, pull off; 
 intr. (Jeitt), to move out, march out ; 
 reflex., to undress (one's self). 
 
 Joilcn (249), to bake. 
 
 SBtttfcr, m., baker. 
 
 SoS, «, bath.'^ 
 
 fiatien (212), to bathe. 
 
 SBaJn'Jof, m., comp. {pi. *e), station 
 
 (of railway). 
 6altl> soon ; jo—, as soon (as). 
 
 SBonti, «. {pi. Hx), ribbon; (//. -c), 
 bond; ;«. {pi. "e), volume (424, 
 426). 
 
 fiangcn, impers. w. dat. : mir Bangt, I 
 
 feel afraid. 
 SBont, /. (//. -e), bench ; (//. -en), 
 
 bank (commercial, 424). 
 Soucr, m. {gen. -%,pl. -11), peasant, 
 
 farmer. 
 Soum, m. {pi. "e), tree. 
 
 fflttum^en, SBttumlcin, «., dim., little 
 
 tree. 
 Beantttiortcn (212), to answer, reply 
 
 to {acc^. 
 bcbtcfcn, to cover. 
 Iieftnbcn (231), reflex., to find one's 
 
 self, do (in health). 
 (CBlcttctt (212), to attend, accompany. 
 6et, adv., by, near ; prep. {dat. ), by, 
 
 near, at, in, with, among, at the 
 
 house of, on condition of. 
 fcCisffcl^Cn (249). to stand by, help 
 
 {dat.). 
 fici^en (246), to bite. 
 bcfannt, part, adj., known ; acquaint- 
 ed ; as noun, acquaintance. 
 fielngCtn, (214), to besiege. 
 
 Benot^tt^tigpn, to inform. 
 bereifen (213), to travel tBrough. 
 
 £ttcit§, adv. gen., already. 
 
 ISerg, m., mountain. 
 
 beritl^tnt, part, adj., celebrated, fa- 
 mous. 
 
 (efcbcn (243), to look at, inspect. 
 
 SeforgniS, / (pi. -ffe), care, appre- 
 hension. 
 
 bcffer, BeH, l^^- camp, and sup. gut, 
 better, best. 
 
 fiefu^en, to visit. 
 
 Betreffeit (232), to befall, concern. 
 
 ((tritgcn (242), to deceive, cheat- 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 SSttt, n. {gen. -e8, pi. -cn or -e, 105), 
 
 bed. 
 beloegcn {242), to induce; weak: to 
 
 move, excite. 
 BCtOU^t, conscious (of, ^^«.). 
 fiCJO^Ien, to pay. 
 8iBItOt|cr,/, library, 
 fiicgcn (241), to bend. 
 Sicten (241), to offer, bid. 
 Binbeii (231), to bind. ' 
 binncn (</«/.), within (time). 
 Big, adv., so far as ; prep. («cc.), up to, 
 
 till; conj. {for blB bag), until. 
 »if$Of, m. {pi. "t), bishop. 
 
 Bitten (243), to beg, pr^^iBitte, I 
 beg, pkase. ; 
 
 SBIdtt, «., leaf, sheet (of paper). 
 
 Blau, blue. Bliiutic^, bluish. 
 
 BIctBcn (fein, 247), to continue, re- 
 main ; ftel)en — , to stop. 
 
 Blinll, blind. 
 
 SBIume, /, flower. 
 
 SBoot, «. (pi. -tor igote, 105), boat. 
 
 SBorfe, f., purse. Bourse. 
 
 Bbfe, bad, angry. 
 
 SBotC/ m., messenger. 
 
 Sotfc^aft, /, message. 
 
 SBraimttVetIt, m. comp., brandy. 
 
 Braten (248), to roast. 
 
 SBtttten, m. {pi. —), roast (meat). 
 
 Bmu^eit, to use, need {rarely gen.). 
 
 Broun, brown. 
 
 Srout, /. {pl. "e), bride. 
 
 Brciftcn (232), to break. 
 
 Brcit, broad. 
 
 Brcnncn (254), to bum. 
 
 Sricf, m., letter. ^ 
 
 Bringcn (254), to bring. 
 
 SBrot, »• (//• -e), tread. 
 
 fflritrfC, /, bridge. 
 
 I, «., book; — Blnbcr, m., bi 
 binder. 
 Bunt, variegated, gay. 
 
 © {see &). 
 '', /., chemistry. 
 (PrijtuS, 113), m., Christ. 
 SJl'if}, f'i; (//. -en), christian ; - 
 turn, «., Christianity. 
 
 3). 
 
 ba, adv.dem,, there, then; conj. 
 
 when, as, since (486) ; in camp. 
 
 fore vowels bar (401). 
 Stttft, K-, roof. 
 
 llOllUrt^ (184), thereby ; through, 1: 
 tiagepn (184), against it or them ; 
 
 the contrary. 
 Same,/, lady. 
 bamit, adv., therewith; with it 
 
 them (184) ; conj., in order 
 
 (468) ; — fOjfen, to mean. 
 ^jntflfBosi, m. comp., steamboat. 
 
 "^iaftf , m . ; t han ks. 
 
 ianlen, to thank {dat.). 
 
 ftnnn, then (time). 
 
 bat, for ba in comp. before vowels, 
 
 tiarauf (184), thereupon; upon, 
 
 after — it or them; — bag, in o 
 
 that. 
 bataUS (184), thereout; out of i 
 
 them, thence. 
 barf, pres. biirfen. 
 barum (184), thereabout ; around, 
 
 it or them ,• therefore, on that 
 
 count ; — ba§, in order that {\t 
 bafelBfl, comp. bo, in that same pi 
 
 there. 
 boft, conj., that, so that, in order t 
 babon (184), therefrom, thereof; 
 
328 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 bnjU (184), thereto; to it or them ; in 
 addition ; for that purpose. 
 
 bcill/ foss. adj., thy, your ; ge7i. pen. 
 (for beiner), of thee, of you ; — et, 
 poss. pron., thine, yours; gen.pers., 
 of thee;5,of you (186). 
 
 bOlIcn (254), to think. 
 
 fccnn, conj., then, for. 
 
 feet, art., the ; dem., that, that one, he ; 
 rel., wlio, which, tliat (234). 
 
 betjcnigc (208), that one, he (who). 
 
 bei'feibe (208), the same ; as substitute, 
 he, it, etc. (457). 
 
 tlCSl^alb, comp., on that account, there- 
 fore (456). 
 
 liefio, correl. je — (334), so much the 
 (more). 
 
 tieutlitf), plain, clear. 
 
 llCUtfl^, German; as noun, (a) Ger- 
 man ; — lonb, ». Germany. 
 
 iiftt, tight, close. 
 
 Steb, m., thief. 
 
 btencn, to serve {dat.). 
 
 Wiener, m., servant; —in, / {pi. 
 -nen), woman-servant. 
 
 SicS, for biefcS. 
 
 IliefCt, dem., this, this one; the latter; 
 he, etc. (457). 
 
 Sing, n. {pi. -e), thing. 
 
 bitecf , direct. 
 
 tltt)t))te'ren (215), to divide. 
 
 lioft, though, yet, however, surely, at 
 any rate, please (485). 
 
 SoftOV, m. {gen. -g, pi. -en, 117), 
 doctor. 
 
 ^in, m. {pi. -e), dome, cathedral. 
 
 banncrn (214), to thunder. 
 
 Sorf, »., village ; — fdjaft, /, village 
 community. 
 
 Sorn, m. {gen. -eS, pi. "ef or -e or 
 -cn, 105), thorn. 
 
 bOtt, there ; — tC|, adj., of there. 
 irei, three; — je^n, thirteen; — gig, 
 
 thirty. 
 britt, third; — e^alb, two and a half 
 
 (3")- 
 fttUlfcn, to print. 
 bu, thou, you (i86). 
 bUl'^r adv. (as pref, 287), through, 
 
 throughout; prep, (ace), through, 
 
 throughout, by, by means of. 
 bur^JtC^en (241), sep., to draw through; 
 
 insep., to jjass through (287). 
 bitrfcn (261), to be allowed; modal: 
 
 may, need, etc. (472). 
 
 ®. 
 
 Cfitlt, even, level; adv., just, exactly. 
 
 @rfc, f, corner. 
 
 Cfjrcn, to honor., 
 
 ©tBentUm, «. property. 
 
 dile, /., haste, hurry. 
 
 Cin, indef. art., an, a; emph., one; 
 
 pron., -er, one, some one ; ^8, one. 
 Cin=, «^2'. /c?"?* ly In, as prefix. 
 CinnnbCt, comp. indecl., one another, 
 
 each other. 
 Ctncilei, indecl., of one kind, all the 
 
 same. 
 etnige, pi-, some, several, a few. 
 
 ein=labcn (249), to invite. 
 
 ©inlnbung, /, invitation. 
 tins (in counting), see ein. 
 einsjieleit (241), tr., to draw in; intr. 
 
 (fein), to move in, march in. 
 6t8, «., ice ; — lalt, ice-cold. 
 (Sifen, K., iron. 
 Cifetn, of iron, iron. 
 Clf (Cilf), eleven. 
 f item, pi; parents. 
 CmtlfCl^Icn (232), to recommend; reflex. 
 
 to send one's compliments (to, dat^. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 329 
 
 6nfte, n. (gen. -8, fl. -n), end. 
 
 enblil^, final, last ; usually adv. : 
 finally, at last. 
 
 @ngliint)er, m., Englishman. 
 
 cngUftft, English. 
 
 ®nfcl, "'; grandson. 
 
 entlang, adz:, along; as prep. {ace). 
 
 ClltlOCllcr, either. 
 
 6<)SeU, m. {gen., -8), ivy. 
 
 Cr, ftff 68, he, she, it. 
 
 ®rbe, /, earth ; Oltf (Sfben (106). 
 
 Crfintien (231), to find out, invent. 
 
 crftifften {213), to refresh. 
 
 CV'^alten (248), to obtain, receive; 
 keep, sustain. 
 
 frtoiijcn (242), intr. (fcin), to go out; 
 (alight). 
 
 errei^en, to reach to, attain, arrive at. 
 
 crf^rCtCcn (232), to be frightened; tr. 
 weak : to frighten. 
 
 erfl, ord. num., first; bev — eve, 
 the former (157); «(&., first, only. 
 
 crtoatteit (212), to avt^ait, expect. 
 
 crjtejcn (241), to bring up, train, edu- 
 cate. 
 
 e8 {impers. or expletive), there. 
 
 Cffcn (243). to eat. 
 
 ettnaS, something, anything. 
 
 ^ttrOjIO, n. {gen. -8), Europe. 
 
 fDonBc'Uum, «• {gen. -8, //. -ien, 
 
 Ii8), gospel. 
 
 ©jercitittm, «• (^<r«. -S,//.-ien, iiB), 
 exercise. 
 
 fasten (249, aux. 298), to drive, ride 
 (in a carriage) ; jpajicren — , to take 
 a drive. 
 
 fallen (fein, 248), to fall. 
 fnUtc'ren (215), to fail, become bank- 
 rupt. 
 
 fetjten (242), to fight. 
 
 ^CilCtmcffci, K. comp., penknife. 
 fel^Icn, to fail, lack, miss; usually 
 
 impers., to ail {dat. obj.). ^-^ 
 
 Strict, ■m., fault, mistake. 
 t^eiettag, m. comp., holiday. 
 i^cinil, m., enemy ; as adj. pred. for : 
 fctnilltdl, hostile (448). 
 ^cltl, «., field; — ^ei'i;,w2., commander, 
 
 general. 
 gcIS or gelfeit, m. {gen. -en or -em, 
 
 pi. -en, loi), rock. 
 Scnflcr, n., window. 
 Serttgfcit, /, readiness, skill. 
 fctt, fat. 
 gcuer, «., fire ; — BerfK^eruug, /, fire 
 
 insurance. 
 
 flnben (231), to find. 
 
 jytnpr, m., finger. ^ 
 gifd), m., fish. 
 {^lammc, /-, flame. 
 giofC^e, /, flask, bottle. 
 Slcif^, »; flesh, meat. 
 flct^ig, industrious, diligent. 
 fltcgin (241), to fly {aux., 298). 
 
 flicjcn (fcin, 241), to flee. 
 
 I^Iitgel, m., wing. 
 SIttS, m. {pi. 'ffe), river. 
 
 fotgen (fein), to follow (dat.). 
 
 Sfl^l', n. {gen. -8, pi. -ten, 
 'fossil. 
 
 ^ta^t, /., question. 
 ftagen, to ask, inquire. 
 gronfrci^, «., France. 
 gronjofc, m.. Frenchman. 
 franjoftfd), French; as noun, n., 
 
 French (language). 
 ^rou, /. (//.-en), woman, wife; in 
 
 address, Mrs. 
 l^tiilllein, n. dim., young lady, miss; 
 
 in address, Miss. 
 
330 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 fret, free; in comp. (379), — ft)reci)en 
 (232), to acquit (of, gen.). 
 
 frCtlt^ {adv.), indeed, truly. 
 
 gVCitog, m. comp., Friday. 
 
 frcnti), foreign, strange ; as notm, for- 
 eigner, stranger ; /, bie — e, foreign 
 parts. 
 
 frcffen (243), to eat (used of beasts). 
 
 greube,/, joy (106). 
 
 fteucn, to make glad; usually reflex., 
 
 to be glad, rejoice (gen.). 
 ■grcunti, m., friend ; —in, /. (//. -lien), 
 
 friend {fern.). 
 
 Sriel)E(n), m. (gai. -ns, pi. -n, 99), 
 
 peace. 
 gfticbrid), m., Frederick. 
 fl'icrcn (241), to freeze; impers., to be 
 
 cold (ace. obj., 291). 
 frti$, fresh. 
 fro^, glad, joyous. 
 
 gruftt,/(//.^tc), fruit. 
 
 friij, early ; in early morning. 
 grueling, m., spring (season). 
 fiilrcn, to lead, conduct, drive, carry 
 
 (on). 
 fiinf, five. 
 gunfc(n), m. (gen. -nS, //. -n, 99), 
 
 spark. 
 fur (ace), for, instead of. 
 giirjl, m. (pi. -en), prince. 
 
 giirlJcntutn, «• {pi- -tiimer), princi- 
 pality. 
 
 Suft, m. (pl. -e), foot (312). 
 
 ®. 
 
 galo|H)ic'rcn (215), to gallop. 
 
 ®OnS, /. {pl. "e), goose. 
 B0n5,all, whole, entire (144). 
 ®ortCn, m. (pl. "'), garden. 
 ®af}, m. (pl. -"e), guest; — f|of, m., 
 (pl., ^e), hotel, inn. 
 
 gefiiiren (232), to bear, bring forth. 
 gcBcit (243), to give ; e8 gtebt, impers., 
 
 there is, there are. 
 @c6irge, «• (//• — ), mountain range, 
 
 mountains. 
 geBorcn, /./• gcbfircn, /n,borne ; intr. 
 
 as adj .,\>ofa.. 
 @cbantc(n), m. (gen. -V.%,pl. -W, 99), 
 
 thought. 
 ©Ciulll, /, patience. 
 @efnl|r, / (pl. -en), danger, risk. 
 gcfottcn (247), to please (dat.); fid) 
 
 — taffen, to submit to. 
 @efaUen, m., pleasure ; mir git — , for 
 
 my sake. 
 gefiiHtgfl, sup. adv., if you please. 
 gcgetl (ace), against, towards, about 
 
 (number), in comparison with, for. 
 @egcn)l, /, neighborhood. 
 gcgcniifittr'a'fo., and prep, (dat., 280), 
 
 over against, opposite to. 
 gcjcn flein, 248), to go, walk, fare; 
 
 ftjajieren — , to take a walk. 
 gclB, yellow. 
 @eltl, «•, money ; — yumme, /, sum 
 
 of money. 
 gelegcit,/./. licgen, situated; asculj., 
 
 convenient. 
 gclingcil • (?ein, 231), impers. (dat., 
 
 292), to turn out, succeed. 
 ®eniaO)C, «• {pi- — ), painting. 
 gencfcn (fein, 243), to recover, get 
 
 well. 
 ®cnf, Geneva. 
 gClliC^cn (241), to enjoy {sometimes 
 
 gen.). 
 gcnug, indecl., enough. 
 gCtdbC, straight, direct; usually adv., 
 
 exactly, just. 
 
 gcraten, to turn out (jein, 247); also 
 /. p. rateii. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 331 
 
 ^etn (485), willingly, with pleasure. 
 gefc^elcn (fetn, 243), to happen, oc- 
 cur, be done. 
 ®CfcIIf(^ttft, /, company. 
 ®Efc^, «. (//. -e), law. 
 gcjlcrn, yesterday. 
 gctotnnen (232), to win. 
 
 gCWOBCn, /. p. Wiegcn; as adj., in- 
 clined to, favorable {dat). 
 
 gtcgcn (241), to pour. 
 
 ®ln8, «., glass. 
 
 glnufien, to believe (dat. pers., ace. 
 thing, 437). 
 
 ®loufic(n), m. (gen. -n«, pi. -n, 99), 
 faith, belief. 
 
 glcit^Cn (246), to be like, resemble 
 {dat). 
 
 ®luil, n., happiness, fortune. 
 
 gliidlt^, happy, fortunate. 
 
 BOlllCn, golden, (of) gold. 
 
 @Ott, /«. ipl.'tx), god; God; —lob 
 (interj.), praise God! 
 
 groben (249). *» dig. 
 ■®raf, m. (pi. -en), count. 
 
 ®rOinino'tif, /, grammar. 
 
 groft, groger, gro^t, great, large, tall. 
 
 grun, green. 
 
 gut, bcffet, beft, good; as adv., well. 
 
 ®ut, »., property, estate ; //. goods. 
 
 ®utf, f; goodness, kindness. 
 
 l^aBcn (256), to have (as auxil., 296). 
 
 I)Ogellt, to hail. 
 
 l^nlB, half ( 144) ; — Oli^t, half past 
 seven, etc. 
 
 -Jotll, in comp., as beS^ClIb, for : 
 
 IJoIficn, 5ol6cr (gen., 280), on ac- 
 count of, for the sake of ; nieinet — , 
 etc. (452, b). 
 
 gftlftC, /, half. 
 
 l^alten (248), tr., to hold, keep, con- 
 tain ; (fill') to hold for, consider; 
 intr., to hold on, halt, last. 
 
 §onS,/ (pl.'^t), hand. 
 
 Qantcln (214), to act, deal, trade. 
 
 @it$d)Cn, n. dim., little hare. 
 
 §afc, m., hare. 
 
 §0)1$, n., house, home. 
 
 l^cBcit (242), to heave, lift, raise. 
 
 §Cft, n. (pi. -c), copy-book, note- 
 ■ book. 
 
 Ijeilt^, holy. 
 
 §Ctnri(J, m., Henry. 
 
 jcift, hot. 
 
 ^Ci^cn (248), tr., to bid, call ; nsiially 
 intr., to be called; to mean. 
 
 Qeiter, cheerful. 
 
 §CH), m. (pi. -:n), hero. 
 
 ftclfen (232), to help (dat.). 
 
 §emll, «■ (gen. -ti, pi. -en), shirt. 
 
 \ltXr hither, along; ago; as pref. in 
 comp. (377, 484). 
 
 ftcrouSsfammen (fetn, 232), to come 
 
 out, come forth, result. 
 §Cr6ft, m., autumn, fall. 
 getr, m. (gen. -11, pi. -en), master, 
 
 lord, gentleman; sir, Mr. (428); 
 
 — enl)au8, «., House of Lords. 
 ^errin, /■ (pi. -ncn), lady, mistress. 
 jcrrlicft, noble, glorious.. 
 
 teruntcr=foIIcn (fein, 247), to fall 
 
 down. 
 
 , n. (gen. -enS, pi. -en, 102), heart. 
 ^eutC, to-day ; — Slbenb, this evening ; 
 
 — jn Eage, at the present day. 
 \\tXt here ; in comp., — ntlt, herewith, 
 
 with this (401). 
 gtmntel, m., heaven, sky. 
 ^inteil, adv., behind. 
 l^intet, adv. (as pref., 287), behind, 
 
 back ; prep. (dat. or ace), behind 
 
332 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Stntergejen, sep. (fein, 248); to go 
 
 behind; insep., to deceive (2S7). 
 gttt, m. (pi. -en), shepherd. 
 
 IjotI), pl)er, ^ij(^ft — ^^^ e, I)o^ — 
 
 high. 
 l^OffCtt, to hope. 
 §0l3, «., wood. 
 pren, to hear. 
 
 gunb, «. (//. -e), dog. 
 
 Juniert, (a) hundred. 
 §Ut, m. {pi. ^e), hat. 
 gittte, /., hut, cottage. 
 
 % 
 t*, I- 
 
 ijrig (ber — e), hers, theirs; Stjrig, 
 yours (188). 
 
 im, for in bent. 
 
 immcr, always, ever ; ttier . . . immcr, 
 
 whoever. 
 in prep. {dat. or ace), in ; into. 
 3nfO«tertC', /, infantry. 
 tnnct (158), inner, interior. 
 
 ins (in'g), fir in bag. 
 
 Snftff , n. ,(gen. -e«, //. -en), insect. 
 tiren, to wander, err; reflex., to be 
 mistaken. 
 
 jn, yes, indeed (485). 
 
 3<i9Cti m., hunter, sportsman. 
 
 3o|r, n. {pi. -e), year; — egjeit, /, 
 
 time of the year, season. 
 jontmctn (214), to lament, mourn; 
 
 impers. [ace), it grieves. 
 iC ever ; correl., je . . . bcfto (334), the 
 
 (more) . . . the (more). 
 jtiev, each, every; ein — , every one. 
 jcbermann (244). everybody. 
 icmanti (244), somebody. 
 jener, that, that one ; the former. 
 
 je«fcit(J) {gen. 280), on that side of, 
 
 beyond. 
 jc^tg, of now, present (time)-. 
 je^t, now. 
 jnng, young. 
 Sitngling, m., youth, young man. 
 
 :, m. {pi. -^e), boat. 
 Satfcr, m., emperor; —in {pi. -nen), 
 
 empress. 
 lolt, cold. 
 
 @a|llan', m. {pi. -one), chaplain. 
 RttxX, m., Charles. 
 fforll^en, «■ dim., (Uttle) Charley. 
 ffiattoffcl,/., potato. 
 lottfen, to buy. 
 fioufniann, m. {pi. -leute or -man= 
 
 ner, 425), merchant. 
 ftoDOdClie', /, cavalry. 
 fein, no, not any; pron., — er, no 
 
 one, none. 
 fennen (254), to know, be acquainted 
 
 with. 
 fiinS, n., child; —erjluBe, /, nursery. 
 
 fiireje, /, church. 
 
 ffiirf^e, /, cherry. 
 
 ffllOffe,/, class. 
 
 flieiti, «-, garment, dress: pi., clothes. 
 
 flein, little, small. 
 
 flettern (214), climb, clamber. 
 
 flingcn (231), to sound, resound, ring. 
 
 iiloficr, n. {pi. -^), cloister, convent. 
 
 8nn6c, m., boy; — njii)ule, /, boys' 
 
 school. 
 I, m. {pi. "c), cook (man). 
 
 fi^in, / (pl. -nen), cook (woman). 
 Siiln, Cologne; Solner, inded. (143), 
 
 (of) Cologne. 
 fommcn (fein, 232), to come; — au8 
 
 (dat.), to come — result — from. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 333 
 
 flontO, m., king; — Sdrage, /., King 
 Street ; —in, / (pi- -nen), queen. 
 
 lontglic^, kingly, royal. 
 
 lijltnen (261)1 modal: to be able; 
 can, may (472) ; to know. 
 
 fionjeif , K-, concert. 
 
 froni, sick, ill. 
 
 liranj, m. {pi. -"^e), wreath, garland. 
 
 ftrieg, m., war ; — iijUt, «., army. 
 
 fiu5,/(//-''e), cow. 
 
 fUtjV short, curt; adv., briefly, in 
 short. 
 
 8. 
 
 fioBorota'ritttn, «• (gen. -a, //. -ien, 
 
 118), laboratory. 
 
 lii^cln (214), to smile. 
 
 laftcn, to laugh. 
 
 goiti, n. (pi. "-tx or -e, 425), country, 
 land; — gut, «., farm; — ^au8, »., 
 country house; — leilte, pi., coun- 
 try people (425). 
 
 lonB(e), long; adv., — F|er, long ago. 
 
 liiligf (gen. or dat., 280), along. 
 
 laffcn (248), to let, leave; causative 
 (269), to make (do), have, cause 
 to be (done) ; reflex, for pass. 
 (274), can be (done). 
 
 laufen (248, aux., 298), to run. 
 
 lout, loud; adv., aloud. 
 
 Ie6cn, to live ; noun, getctt, n., life. 
 
 leScn'nig, living, alive. 
 
 legen, to lay, put. 
 
 Sel^ter, m., teacher. 
 
 Itfd)t, light, easy. 
 
 Iciaen (246), to suffer. 
 
 lelgcn (247). to lend. 
 
 IcrtlEJI, to learn. 
 
 IcfCn (243). to read. 
 
 le^f, last; ber —ere, the latter (157). 
 
 fiettte, pi; people; (in comp., 425). 
 
 IteB, dear; adv., — ei', am —(Ien, lief- 
 er, liefest (485). 
 
 Itelicn, to love. 
 
 fiieb, «., song. 
 
 liegen (243), to lie, be situated. 
 
 Itnf, left ; adv., links, on the left. 
 
 lofeen, to praise. 
 
 Sorb, m. (pi. -S, 1 20), lord (English). 
 
 fiOtne, m., lion. 
 
 Suft, /.(.?>/. -^e), air. 
 
 litgcn (242), to lie, speak falsely. 
 
 Suj}, / ipl.-^t), pleasure, desire; — 
 l^abm, to have a mind (to). 
 
 ina^cn, to make, do. 
 
 9DliiII$CI1, n. dim., girl, maiden. 
 
 SRogll, /. (pi. -"e), maid (-servant). 
 
 man, inde/. (460), one, we," they, peo- 
 ple, eie. J or by pass. 
 
 SKnnn, m. (pi. ^cv), man (425). 
 
 iSlantel, m. (pi. '^), mantle, cloak. 
 
 SSIloric' (gen. -nS), Mary. 
 
 SBlorft, m. (pi. -"e), market, market- 
 place. 
 
 SDlatvofc, m., sailor. 
 
 aUnncr, / (pi- -n), wall. 
 
 Xax^X (irr. comp. Biel, indecl.) more ; 
 
 — ere, pi. (157), several. 
 SKetle,/, mile. 
 metncn, to think, mean. 
 
 mcinig (ber — e), mine. 
 ntelten (242), to milk. 
 
 SMcnft^, m. {pi. -en), man, human 
 being. 
 
 SMcffcr, «•, knife. 
 
 aUctoE', n. {pi. -e), metal. 
 
 SKilfl),/, milk. 
 
 SBincral' (gen. -S, pi. -ien, 119), min- 
 eral ; — Waffev, n., mineral water. 
 
 SMtni'jiCV, m., minister. 
 
334 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 SKina'tC,/, minute. 
 
 OTiftltngCn (impers., fcilt, 231), to fail. 
 
 tntt, adv., along (with one) ; prep. 
 
 {dat.), with, along with, in company 
 
 with. 
 ntOgen (261), modal: to like; may, 
 
 can, etc. (472). 
 SKonot, m. (pi. -e), month. 
 Wimii, m. (pi. -e), moon. 
 SBJonttincnt', «. (pi- -e), monument. 
 SBtOIgCn, m. (pi. — ), morning, the 
 
 east; be8 — C or movgen?, of a 
 
 morning. 
 tnOtgcn, adv., to-morrow. 
 mitlir, tired. 
 ' inuItiflKcic'rcn (215), to multiply; — 
 
 mit, by. 
 SftitnllCr, «• (or ^■), minster, cathe- 
 dral ; — ^pta^, m., — square. 
 
 SDlufe'um, «• (gen. -8, //. -en, 118), 
 
 museum. 
 ntiiffcn (261), modal: must, have to 
 
 (472). 
 SKttttcr,/ (//.''), mother. 
 
 S«. 
 
 tin$, adv., after, behind ; prep, (dat.), 
 after, according to, towards; — = 
 bent, conj., after ; — l)er, adv., after- 
 wards. 
 
 SRod)6or, m. (gen. -8, pi. -It), neigh- 
 bor. 
 
 92a(^intttag, m. comp., afternoon ; be8 
 — 8, of an afternoon. 
 
 nii^fi, irr.sup. no^; as prep., neyA. (to, 
 dat.). 
 
 9Ja^t, /. (pi. "t), night. 
 
 JlnJiel, /, needle. 
 
 na|(e), mX)VC, nod^ft, near (dat.). 
 
 SRame(n), m. (gen: -ns, pi. -n, 99), 
 name. 
 
 SBorr, m. (pi. -en), fool. 
 
 ncBcn, adv., near, beside ; prep, (dat.), 
 beside, by, near, along with(oro«.). 
 
 ncBfl, prep, (dat.), along with, be- 
 sides. 
 
 SJJeifC, m., nephew. 
 
 ncAnien (232), to take (from, dat. 
 pers.). 
 
 ncin, no. 
 
 ncnnen (254), to name, call. 
 
 nCU, new ; — ltd), adv., recently. 
 
 ttCUn, nine; — je^n, nineteen; bet 
 — te, the ninth. 
 
 Iticflt, not. 
 
 ni^tS, nothing. 
 
 nicmonil (244), nobody. 
 
 no^, still, yet; — ein, one more; — 
 — ni^t, not yet; (meber) . . . no(f), 
 nor. 
 
 9Iflr!l(en), m., north. 
 
 92otietnbct, m., November. 
 
 nUW, now, then, well (485) ; as conj., 
 now that, since (4S6, 2). 
 
 nur, only, merely; >t) 08... nut, what- 
 ever, etc. 
 
 niiljli^, useful. 
 
 ©. 
 oB, eonj., whether, if; atS ^, as if; 
 
 — gleid), although. (486). 
 06cn, adv., above, up (stairs). 
 Obcr^alB (gen., 280), above, over. 
 Dt^fe, m., ox. 
 Oifr, or. 
 
 Dffljtc'r, m. (pi. -e), officer. 
 oft, often, frequently. 
 O^ne (ace), without, but for; — JU, 
 
 without . . . infin. ; — bog, (477, c). 
 D|t, »■ (gen. -68, //. -en), ear. 
 Dnfcl (//. — ), uncle. 
 Ofl(en), m.^ the east. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 335 
 
 SPoar n., pair (312). 
 
 SPontoffcl, m. {gen. -S, //. -II), 
 
 slipper. 
 SjJopicr', n. {pi. -e), paper. 
 SPopjl, m. {pi. "E), pope. 
 iPoflor (i?vf«. -8, //. -en, 117), pastor. 
 <)fcifcn (246), to whistle, pipe. 
 ipfctti, n. {pi. -e), horse. 
 
 Ijflonjen (213), to plant. 
 
 It, m. (pi. -"e or -e), plan. 
 %, m. {pi. ■'e), place, square (in a 
 city). 
 
 Jilauiicrn (214), to chat. 
 
 illitnticrn (214), to plunder. 
 
 SPoft, / (//. -Etl), post-office, mail. 
 
 SPreu^e, /«., Prussian. 
 
 SPrinj, m. {pi. -en), prince. 
 sprofeffor, m. {gen. -?, //. -En, 117), 
 
 professor. 
 Quitter, n. {pi. —), powder. 
 
 qUCUen (242, aux., 298), to spring, 
 well. 
 
 9t. 
 
 SRonti, m. {pi. -^ev), edge, brink. 
 rafen (248), to advise {dat). 
 jRatllllUS, n. comp., council- house, 
 
 town-hall. 
 rCI^nen (212), to reckon, count. 
 
 SRctJnung, /. account. 
 
 rC(f)t, straight, right, just; right 
 (hand) ; — g, adv., on, to, the right. 
 
 fSttijit, n. {pi. -E), right, justice, law; 
 — l^aben, to be right. 
 
 rthcn (212), to speak. 
 
 fllrgcit/'w-, rain. 
 
 jRcgtment, »• [pi- -«), regiment. 
 
 rcgncn (212), to rain. 
 
 rcid), rich. 
 
 rcif, ripe. 
 
 Oicife, f; travel, journey. . 
 
 rcifcn (213, aux., 298), to travel, make 
 
 a journey. 
 rcifcn (246), to tear. 
 tctfcn (246, aux., 298), to ride (on 
 
 horseback). 
 SJefuHot', n. {pi. -e), result. 
 tetten (212), to rescue, save. 
 9iO(f, m. {pi. "e), coat. 
 rot, red. totlid), reddish. 
 tUfen (248), to call, summons. 
 rul)iO, quiet, peaceful. 
 rit^rcn, to move, excite. 
 OlU^Inntl, «■ comp., Russia. 
 
 '«, for 68, it. 
 
 @ad|C, f., thing, affair, business. 
 
 fog en, to say. 
 
 ®atn§tag, m. comp., Saturday. 
 
 fOUCr, sour. 
 
 faufen (242), to drink (of animals). 
 
 @c()at, n. {pi. -e), sheep. 
 
 @(()ofcr, m., shepherd. 
 
 fli)affen (249), to create, make. 
 
 f^orf, sharp. 
 
 ®(^auf))iel, n. comp. {pi. -p), spec- 
 tacle, play. 
 
 ft^einen (247), to shine, seem. 
 
 ft^eltcn (232), to scold, call (a bad 
 name). 
 
 f^cren (242), to shear, cut. 
 
 f^tlfen, to send. 
 
 f(f[te§en (241), to shoot. 
 
 @(Jiff, n. {pi. -e), ship, boat. 
 ®t()iffcr, m., skipper, boatman. 
 ©^locftt, / (//. -En), battle. 
 
 fct)lnfen (248), to sleep. 
 
336 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 frftliifrtB, sleepy. 
 
 Sc^lafjimnter, «■ comp., sleeping- 
 room. 
 
 fd|(agen (249), to strike, beat, knock, 
 fight; reflex., — each other. 
 
 fd|led)t, bad, poor. 
 
 fl(|(ei$en tfsin, 246), to creep, slink. 
 
 {d)leifen (246), to whet, sharpen. 
 
 f^Hc^en (241), to shut, close, lock. 
 
 ft^lingen (231), to sling, twine. 
 
 ®^lO$/ »., castle, palace. 
 
 S^Iiifftl/ »«■. key 
 f^mcljen (242), to melt. 
 ®4inct3, m. (loi), pain. 
 f(^n0ttlicn (242), to snort. 
 ®l^nce, m. (gen. -%], snow. 
 
 fiftneiieit (246), to cut. 
 
 S^neiiCr, m., tailor. 
 
 ftftncien, to snow. 
 
 f4nell, quick, fast ; — JUg, m., fast 
 
 train, express. 
 {(^On, already, even, surely (485). 
 fi^Olt, fine, beautiful, handsome. 
 f^rttftcn (247). to write. 
 ft^rticn (247). to cry (out), scream. 
 f(^rcitcn (jein, 246), to stride, step. 
 ScJnS, m. {p!. -e), shoe. 
 ®tf)«li, /. {pi- -en), debt, guilt; as 
 
 adj.pred., iit fault, to blame (448). 
 ®d)Ulc, /, school. @d)ul!noBe, m., 
 
 schootboy ; — ftuBe,/., school-room. 
 Sc^ittci/ »«■) scholar, pupil. 
 S^iiffel, /, dish. 
 ftftuttein (214), to shake. 
 f^toOi^, weak. 
 
 jtfttoarj, black. 
 
 ©^loefcl, m., sulphur; — ^otj, »., 
 
 (sulphur) match. 
 ©^tteij, /, Switzerland (416). 
 f^tnCTr heavy, difficult; — licf|, adv., 
 
 hardly. 
 
 ©tjtoeflcr, /, sister. 
 
 fdllOintmcn (232), to swim {aux., 298). 
 
 fljtnillJleln (214), impers. (dat.), to be 
 giddy. 
 
 fl^tDtniDCIt (fein, 231), to vanish, dis- 
 appear. 
 
 fei^S, six; — mol, six times; — jeljtl, 
 sixteen ; — gig, sixty. 
 
 See, m. (pi. -tu), lake; /, sea (426). 
 
 fegeln (214), to sail (aux., 298). 
 
 felen (243), to see, look. 
 
 (c^T, very, much. 
 
 fetben, silken, of silk. 
 
 Sctfe, /, soap. 
 
 (till (256, b), to be; (as aux., 297). 
 
 fcit, prep, (dot.), since; as conj. (for 
 feitbem), since (time, 486). 
 
 ®eitC, /, side ; page. 
 
 Se^tCmBer, m., September. 
 
 fc^cn (213), to set, put; reflex., to 
 take a seat; p. p. gcjt^t; suppose. 
 
 ftefien, seven ; — (en)3e^n, seventeen. 
 
 ftngcn (231), to sing. 
 
 fintcn (I'ein, 231), to sink. 
 
 ftnncn (232), to think, meditate. 
 
 fi^cn (243), to sit. 
 
 fo, so, thus, then; often not transl.; 
 
 for special uses, 485 ; — Ebcit, just-; 
 
 fo . . . trie, as ... as ; ebeit — , just 
 
 (as) ;-^lt)O^I, as well as, also. 
 ®oSn, m. (pi. -"e), son. 
 Soltiat' (//. -en), soldier. 
 foUcn (261), modal: shall, is to; is 
 
 sai'd to (472). 
 ®Ominer, m. (pi. — ), summer. 
 
 foiibcm, but (326). 
 
 SonnoBeni, m. comp., Saturday. 
 ®annc, /, sun; — ll(c^ein, m., sun- 
 shine. 
 ®D|l]^te (gen. -118), Sophia. 
 ®|innien, n. (gen, -«), Spain. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 337 
 
 fpiit, late; — eflenS, gen. adv., at 
 latest. 
 
 S^iotcil, m. (//. — ), spade. 
 
 f^iajie'rcn (215), to walk, exercise ; — 
 fa^ren, gel)en, veitEn, to take a drive, 
 walk, ride. 
 
 S^jnjier'gOtig, m. comp. (pi. ^e), walk. 
 
 SJieifcfool, m.comp. (//. -ffile), din- 
 ing-room. 
 
 fjlielcn, to play. 
 
 @|iroftC,/, speech, language. 
 
 fprctftcn (232), to speak. 
 
 f))rtngcn, (231, aux., 298), to spring, 
 jump. 
 
 Stoat, m., (gen. -zi,pl. -en), state. 
 
 Stttbt, / (pi. "e), city, town ; —- 
 mariei-,/, city-wall. 
 
 flarf, strong. 
 
 flec^cn (232), to sting, prick. 
 
 flel^cn (249), to stand; — Dletben, to 
 
 stand stilt, stop. 
 
 jlejlen (232), to steal. 
 
 ^eigen (feitl, 247), to mount, rise. 
 @tcin, m., stone. 
 
 {leUen, to place, put. 
 fierficn (|eitt, 232), to die. 
 
 jlicScn (241), to scatter, fly (like dust). 
 ©tiefcl, m. (gen. -«, //. — or -n, 
 
 105), boot. 
 fiill, still, quiet. 
 StOcF, m. (pi. -^e), stick, cane ; story 
 
 (of house). 
 Sfraftc,/., street. 
 @treid)16t>I}, «• comp., match. 
 fitcittn (246), to contend, quarrel. 
 ©tuBe,/, room. 
 StullCtlt' (pi. -en), student. 
 ftuiic'rcn (215), to study. 
 Stulltttin, n. (gen. -4, pi. -ieh, 118), 
 
 study. 
 StuJI, m, (//. ^e), chair. | 
 
 Stttltbe,/, hour, hour's walk. 
 ©ttttm, m. (pi. "-t), storm. 
 
 SiiJKen), m., south. 
 
 fiift, sweet. 
 
 3;. 
 
 tabcin (214), to blame. 
 
 2og, m. (pi. -e), day. 
 
 Xannr, /, fir, pine. 
 
 SontC, /, aunt. 
 
 tonjcn (213), to dance. 
 
 ^attjlcl^tet, m. comp., dancing-master. 
 
 ta^fer, brave, bold. 
 
 tottfcni, (a) thousand. 
 
 %t\\, m., part; — i,gen. adv., partly. 
 
 2cm|iel, m., temple. 
 
 3I5oIr«-> valley, vale. 
 
 Xjolcr, m. (pi. — ), dollar. 
 
 Jjot,'/. (pi. -en), deed, fact. 
 
 Sieologie', /, theology. 
 
 Xfior, m. (//. -en), fool. 
 
 25ar, «. (//. -c), gate. 
 
 25ronr»2- (//• -e o?--eu, 105), throne. 
 
 tjun (255), to do, make ; intr., to act. 
 
 2pt(e), /, door. 
 
 tief, .deep. 
 
 %\tX, n. (pi. -e), animal, beast. 
 
 Sinte, /, ink. 
 
 Z\\il), m., table. 
 
 Jot^tcr,/, (//. ''), daughter. 
 
 %0'6, m., death, tot, dead. 
 
 trOB(C)^.lazy. 
 
 ttagcn (249), to carry, bear ; wear. 
 
 trdumcn, to dream. 
 
 treffcn (232), to hit, strike, meet with. 
 
 ttCtBcn (247), to drive, pursue ; intr 
 
 (au^., 298), to drift, move. 
 trctcn (feilt, 243), to step, tread. 
 trtcfen (241), to drip, drop. 
 ttinfcn (231), to drink. 
 troficn (212), to comfort. 
 
338 
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 u. 
 
 iillCt, adv (oi fref. sep. or insep, 287), 
 over, above; prep, (dat^, over 
 abovp ; (acc^, over, above, beyond ; 
 about, concerning. 
 
 iiberoE everywhere. 
 
 iifierBcScn (287) sep. (fcin), to go over, 
 
 cross ; insep. tr., to pass over, omit. 
 ubertttorgcn, day after to-morrow. 
 itfictfe^en (287), sep., to set over, put 
 
 across; insep., to translate. 
 uBcrflcSen (287), sep., to project, jut 
 
 out; insep., to overcome, outlast. 
 Uftr, K., shore, bank. 
 UJr, f. (pi. -tn), watch, clock ; (z«- 
 
 decl) o'clock. 
 ItJtl, adv. (as pref. sep. or insep., 287), 
 
 around, about ; prep, (ace), around, 
 
 about, concerning, for, at (time) ; 
 
 um . . . toillen [gen., 280), for the 
 
 sake of; um . . . lVi{infin.), in order 
 
 to (281). 
 utngcl^cn (287), sep. (fein), to go 
 
 around; insep. tr., to evade. 
 
 itntsfotnmen (fein, 232) to perish. 
 
 ttinft^rciben (287), sep., to write again ; 
 
 insep., to paraphrase. 
 unarttg, unkind, naughty. 
 Un'flOr (pi. -n), Hungarian. 
 WM^tVii^iti, part. adj. as prep, (gen.), 
 
 disregarding, in spite of (280). 
 unacinllliB/ impatient. 
 Unitterfltof , /, university. 
 ttlttC^t, wrong ; as noun, — l^abett, to 
 
 be wrong. 
 unreif, unripe. 
 unten, adv., under, below. 
 untet, adv. (as pref. sep. or insep., 
 
 287), under; prep. (dat. or ace.), 
 
 under, beneath, among. 
 
 ttntct=8e6ett (fein, 248), to go under, 
 sink, set. 
 
 ttlttcrftotttn (248), to maintain, enter- 
 tain ; reflex., to converse. 
 
 Unmeit, adv., not far; prep, (gen., 
 280), not far (from). 
 
 Safer, m. (pi. ^), father. 
 Dcrfitetcn (241), to forbid. 
 SBcrBof , K. (pi. -e), prohibition. 
 tierliricScit (241), to vex, annoy. 
 SBcrfofTcr, m. (pi. —), author. 
 BerBcficn (243), to forget. 
 BcrBlcidien (246), to compare. 
 SScrBniigen, «., satisfaction, pleasure. 
 »Crl)Oltcn (248), to hold back; reflex., 
 
 to hold one's self, be related. 
 tlCt^eitatcn (212), to give in marriage ; 
 
 reflex., to marry, get married. 
 ticrirrcn, reflex., to go astray, get lost. 
 BCrfttufcn, to sell. 
 
 Bcrlievcn (241), to lose. 
 
 bermittelfi (gen., 280), by means of. 
 l)Cr((irCCjcn (232), to promise. 
 Derftcjen (249), to understand. 
 SBcrfudjUHB, /■ t"al, temptation. 
 Bcrjetjen (247), to pardon (dat). 
 SBcrjeiJunB, /, pardon. 
 SBcttCV, m. (gen. -g, //. -n or — , 
 
 105), cousin. 
 6iel, much ; pi., many. (245, c). 
 |)icr, four; biT — tE, the fourth. 
 SBiCrtel, »•. fourth (part), quarter. 
 «OBCl, m.(pl. ^), bird. 
 SBoIt, n., people, nation. 
 bom = Son bem. 
 
 Uan (dat.), from, of, by, concerning. 
 Hot, adv., before, forward; prep. 
 
 (dat.), . before, in front of ; for ; 
 
 ago ; (ace), before, to the front o£ 
 
• VOCABULARY. 
 
 339 
 
 tlOtge|lCtn, day before yesterday. 
 bOlig, preceding, previous, last. 
 aSormunb, m. (pi. "er), guardian. 
 !iant(C), adv., forward, in front. 
 
 as. 
 
 rtO^renb, prep, (gen.), during; as 
 
 conj., while. 
 Wttlftrllof'tifl, true, real. 
 tna|lftt)CinIit^, probable. 
 SBalb, m. (pi. Hx), wood, forest. 
 
 toartcn (212), to wait. 
 
 tOatum, inter, or rel. (tt)iU" for lUOV, 
 222), for what, wherefore, why. 
 
 tOOS/ inter, or rel., what,' whatever; as 
 adv., why, how; for etluaS, some- 
 thing. 
 
 ftofi^cn (249). to wash. 
 
 SBoffCV, K. (//. — or ••■), water. 
 
 toetiev, neither ; . . . nod), nor. 
 
 SBcg, »«•> way, road; as sep. pref, 
 away, off. 
 
 tOCgcn (gen., 280), on account of, 
 for. 
 
 tnctd), soft. 
 
 tnct^cn (fein, 246), to yield, submit. 
 
 iBCil, while ; usually, because. 
 
 2BcilI, m , wine. 
 
 tDcincn, to weep. 
 
 SBcifC, /., way, manner. 
 
 It)eif(c), wise. 
 
 lOCiS, white ; — Ud), whitish. 
 
 lOCit, wide, broad; far. 
 
 Incll^er, inter., which, what; rel.,y&iO, 
 
 which, that. 
 aSelt,/ (//.-en), world. 
 
 ttcmg, little; ein — , a little; //., 
 
 few (245, <r). 
 tocnn (486), when, whenever; if; — 
 
 ou^, gleid), although (386). 
 
 tBj;-;, inter., who; rel., whoever. 
 
 taetben (fein, 232), to become; (as 
 aux., 173-4). 
 
 Inerfcn (232), to throw. 
 
 aaScrt, n. (pi. -e), work. 
 SBcfte, /, vest. 
 
 2Bc|l(Ctt), m. west. 
 
 SBcttct, «•, weather. 
 
 tnte, inter., how ; rel., how, as, when. 
 
 tUtliev, adv. and insep. pref. (288), 
 again, against ; prep, (ace), against. 
 
 tOtebCr, adv. and sep. pref. (288), 
 again, back. 
 
 tniegen (241), to weigh. 
 
 tnietticl, comp., how, much; pi., how 
 many; ber — fie, as ord. num., what 
 number, what (day of the month). 
 
 tniltl, wild, savage. 
 
 2Btni), m., wind. 
 
 tointlCII (231 ), to wind, twine. 
 
 SBintcr, m-, winter. 
 
 tOif(cn (254), to know, know how, un- 
 derstand. 
 
 too, inter, and rel., where, when, if; 
 in comp., before vowels IBOI' (222). 
 
 aBoiJc, /, week. 
 
 tOOfiit (222), wherefor, for what. 
 
 tOO^Ctr whence, where from (also sep., 
 484). 
 
 tOO^tll, whither, where to (also sep., 
 484). 
 
 tOOl^I, well, surely, indeed (485). 
 
 tOOl^IOdBcntl, part, adj., well off, 
 wealthy. 
 
 loo^nen, to dwell, live. 
 
 aBolJnjimmcr, «•, dwelling-room, sit- 
 ting-room. 
 
 aBolfe, /., cloud. 
 
 tOoUcn (261), modal: to will, wish, 
 
 intend, pretend (472). 
 tOOtan (222), whereon; on, at, what 
 
 or which. 
 
340 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 tOOtnuf (222), whereupon; upon, after, 
 
 what or which. 
 ttlOtaui (222), whereout ; out of, 
 
 from, what or which. 
 aSott, K. (fl. "er or — e, 425), word. 
 aBortcrBud), «. comf., dictionary. ' 
 tnoritbCC (222), wherover; over, on, 
 
 concerning, what or which. 
 tOOttOn (222), wherefrom; from, by, 
 
 of, what or which. 
 2BunSC, /, wound. 
 
 tounfi^en (213), to wish. 
 3- 
 
 3o|l, / (//. -en), number. 
 
 JOjlcn, to pay. 
 
 jiiBIen, to number , cou nt. 
 
 Solftn, m- [pl-^i), tooth; —XOt\ n., 
 
 toothache. 
 jejn, ten ; ber — tc, the tenth. 
 JCi^nen (212), to draw, design.- 
 jeigen, to show. 
 Stitj /• (P^- ~"')' t™^; — alter, «., 
 
 age (of the world). 
 Scitung,/, newspaper. 
 
 jerfiijrcn, to destroy. 
 
 jieicn (241), to draw, pull ; intr. ([eiu), 
 to move, march. 
 
 jieren, to adorn. 
 
 Simmer, «•, room. 
 
 ^1ll,adv.(w. verb.) to; (w. adj.) too; ^rep. 
 (dat.), to, in addition to; at, in, on; 
 — gug, on foot; with infin., to; 
 Utn . . . JU, in order to. 
 
 JUfrtetlCtt, adj. comp., content, satis- 
 fied. 
 
 3119, m. (pi. "e), draught, train 
 march; trait, feature. 
 
 jum, for ju bem. 
 
 jnr, for ju ber. 
 
 JUtiilf, adv., back, behind. 
 
 juriiifsfommcn (fctn, 232), to come 
 back. 
 
 JUTUdift^itfen, to send back. 
 
 JttfammCII, together. 
 
 JUtnilier (dat., 280), contrary, repug- 
 nant (to). 
 
 JtnonjiB, twenty; ber — jle, the twen- 
 tieth. 
 
 Jlnor, indeed, truly. 
 
 jtoei, two; — mat, twice; ber — te, 
 
 the second. 
 Jtningcn (231), to compel, force, 
 jtnijlf, twelve. 
 
11. 
 
 ENGLISH "GERMAN. 
 
 a, an, ein (419); many, such, what — 
 
 (420) ; not — , tein. 
 abbot, ber Stbt (//. "e). 
 able, tiic^tig ; to be — , fbnneii (261 ; 
 
 modal, 472), 
 
 aboard. Oil Sovb ; all — I ein=f}etgeit 
 
 (336). 
 
 about, adv., um (287), utn^er, l)erum ; 
 prep, (around) Itm (acc^ ; (on ac- 
 count of) iDcgen (gen.) ; (concern- 
 ing) iibcr (ace); (near) gegen iacc.); 
 to be — to, im SSegriff (ein . . . 3x1. 
 
 absent, abttiefenb {part, adj.); ab- 
 sence, bie SlBiDefen^eit. 
 
 abuse, v., inipraui^en (288) ; (in 
 words) fc^imiJfen; «., ber W\%-- 
 brau^. 
 
 accept, an^ite^inen (232). 
 
 accidental, juffittig ; adv., — ly, — er« 
 weife (399). 
 
 accompany, beglcitetl (212). 
 
 accomplish, toollbringen (a88). 
 
 account, bie 9ie(i)nung; on — of, it)e= 
 gen {gen.) ; on that — , be8l|alb. 
 
 accuse, an=flogeu,be((^uIbigen (434, i5)- 
 
 acknowledge, an=crlennen (289). 
 
 acquainted (with), be!annt (mit, dat. 
 person); tunbig {geti. thing). 
 
 acquit, frei4))Veif|en {ace., gen., 379). 
 
 across, adv., iiber, , ^tnflber ; prep., 
 iiber {ac'c.). 
 
 act, v., I)onbeIn (214), tl^un (255) ; n. 
 same as: 
 
 action, bie §anblung, bie !E()at {p/. 
 
 -en). 
 adapted, gceignet dpart. adj., to, jn). 
 address, v., an=reben ; «., bie Sinrebe ; 
 
 {of a letter) bie Sbveffe. 
 adorn, jieren, jc^ntiidEen. 
 advice, bev 9iat (422); u., advise, ra» 
 
 ten {dat. 248). 
 affair, bie Stngelegen^eit. 
 afraid, bange ; to be — , ftc^ fiirc^ten ; 
 
 to feel — , bangen {impers., 291). 
 after, prep., noc£) {dat.) ; conj. nai^= 
 
 bem ; —wards, nad)l)er, barnod). 
 afternoon, ber *Jfail)mittag ; in the 
 
 — , be8 —8, or nac^mittagg. 
 again, Wieber, tnieberum ; once — , 
 
 noc^mala, nod^ cinmal. 
 against, gegen (ace.), luiber {ace.); — 
 
 it, bagegen. 
 age, n. (old age), baS filter ; — of the 
 
 world, s^eitalter ; v., altera (214). 
 ago, Oor {dat.), \tx ; a year — , Sot 
 
 einem So^re ; long — , lange ^er. 
 agree, ftcf) tiertragen (249), iiberein= 
 
 tommen (fein, 232). 
 agreeable, ongene^m (to, dat.). 
 air, bie ?uft {pi. "e). 
 alas, aiJ) 1 leiber {inverts verb). 
 all, oH (460); (entire) gonj (144). 
 allow, erlauben {dat., ace, 437) ; be 
 
 — ed, bitrfen {modal, 472). 
 
 1340 
 
342 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 almost, faft, I)cincil)e. 
 
 alms, bciS Sttmofcil (pi. — ). 
 
 along, prep., IfingS (gen.), entlanj 
 
 (ace); — with, ntit, nebji (dat.), 
 
 adv., (with one) ntit. 
 aloud, laut. 
 Alps, bie StUieti, pe. 
 already, [d)Ott. 
 also, auc^. 
 although, obgleii^, obfii)ott, oBtno'^l; 
 
 also Sep. 06 . . . gteid), etc. (486). 
 always, imtner, ftetS. 
 ambassador, ber Oejonbte (part. 
 
 fenben, as noun). 
 American, ber 2lmei'lfaner ; — , adj., 
 
 nmevitani|(^. 
 amiable, UeBcnSltiurbtg. 
 amount, ^«., bie ©umrne; v., — to, 
 
 betragen (249). 
 ancient, alt, c^emalig ; the — s, bie 
 
 ailtcn. 
 and, unb; both — , (otnoBI. . ■ als. 
 angry, jovnig, Vo\t ; to be — , jiiinen. 
 animal, baS Kier (//. -e). 
 another, ein atlberer ; (additional) 
 
 nod) ein.. 
 answer, «., bie 2lnt>tiort (pi. ,-eii, 
 
 122); w., antttiOftcn((/aA, 212); (cor- 
 respond to) ent(t)ve^ett (232, dat). 
 antiquity, bo8 Stttevtuni (pi. -tiimer). 
 any, ivgcnb nn;pron., — body, —one, 
 
 jemanb; — thing, etruaS; not — , 
 
 tein ; not — thing, tlid)t8 ; often not 
 
 trans. 
 apartment, ba8 ^imtner, ba8 @emad) 
 
 (pi. -er). 
 appearance, bie etfd)einimg, ber 
 
 @d)eiu (seeming). 
 appetite, ber Stppctif (gen. -S). 
 apple, ber apfcl (pi. "■) ; — -tree, ber 
 
 apielboum. 
 
 appoint, befiimmen; (to office, 443, (^) 
 eniennen (254). 
 
 apprentice, ber IL'ei)rling. 
 
 arch-, prefix. Erg'- ; — angel, ber 
 ©rjengel ; —bishop, ber Erjbifdiof 
 (pl.H)\ —duke, ber@rs^et3og (pi. 
 -e). 
 
 arise (from), tietBor^ge^en (fein, 248, 
 au8, dat). 
 
 arm, (limb) ber Strm (pi. -e); (wea- 
 pon) bie SBaffe; coat of — s, ba« 
 SBappen (pi. — ). 
 
 army, bie Strmec' (//.-en); baS §cer 
 (pl. -e). . 
 
 around,/?-^/., urn (ace), unt...Ber; 
 adv., nmt)cr, l)erum. 
 
 arrive, on=totnmeu (jein, 232). 
 
 art, bie Simil (pl. H). 
 
 as, adv., at§, iute (450, 2) ; as . . . as, 
 (eben)fo.^.n)ie; conj., njie, ba (rea- 
 son, 485); — if, ats (ttienn), ol8 
 
 (oB) (350. 2)- 
 ascend, tr., Befteigen, erfieigen (247); 
 
 intr., (l)in)auf-jleigen (fein). 
 ashamed, Be[dE|amt; to be — , fti^ (d)a= 
 
 men (gen). 
 
 ask, (question) fragen; (petition) bit 
 ten (243) — (for), — um (ace). 
 
 assertion, bie SSeBauptung. 
 
 assist, bei»ftef)en (249), Ijetfen (232), 
 both dat. 
 
 assure, Berfti^ern (214). 
 
 at, an, gu, bei, in, auf (dat), um (ace); 
 
 — home, ju §auje ; — noon, jn 
 iKittag; — 10 o'clock, um 10 Uljr; 
 
 — once, ouf einmal; — one's house, 
 bei (dat). 
 
 attack, «., ber Slngriff; v., an-grcifcn 
 
 (246). 
 attend, (company) begteiten (212); 
 
 (presence) bei=tt)o^nru 4^t.). 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 343 
 
 attentive, aufmerlfant. 
 
 August, ber Sluguft' {gen. -8). 
 
 aunt, bie Sahte. 
 
 author, bee SJerfaffer (//. — ). 
 
 autumn, ber §ei'bft. 
 
 await, cmarten (212). 
 
 awake, v. tr,, tuetfen ; intr., auf=tt>a» 
 
 djen (fein). 
 away, tueg, ab, fort. 
 awkwardness, bie Ungejc^tdliclteit. 
 
 B. 
 
 beck, «., ber SRitdeti; adv., gliriid, nie» 
 
 ber; —wards, riidroSrtS, 
 bad, fi^Iec^t; (active) bijje. 
 baggage, bie SSaggage, boS ©etiod. 
 bake, badeit (249). 
 baker, ber Sader. 
 balloon, ber SaHon'. 
 bank, (shore) ba« Ufer (pi. — ); (com- 
 mercial) .bie fflattl {pi. -en, 424). 
 bath, ba§ S3ob. 
 bathe, babetl (212). 
 be, (etn; pass, auxil., Werbeti (273); 
 
 is to, foUen (472) ; (in health) ^li) 
 
 befinben (231). 
 bear, n., ber S3or (//.-en); — 's skin, 
 
 bag fflarenfeH. 
 bear, v., (carry) tragen; (suffer) er» 
 
 trogen(249). 
 beat, jd^Iagen (249) 
 beautiful, fc^iin. 
 because, ttjeit. 
 become, (grow) icerben; (suit) gejie« 
 
 men {dat.)\ — of, merben au8 {dat). 
 bed, bo8 SSett {gen. -eS, fl. -en, 105). 
 beer, bag S3ier. 
 
 befall, Begegnen (fein, dat., 212). 
 before, prep., tior {dat. or ace.) ; adv., . 
 
 Bortier ; cm/., bebor, e^e ; — hand, 
 
 t>or]^er ; {also sep.pref.). 
 
 beg, bitten (243); — for, — unt 
 
 {ace). 
 
 begin, Beginnen (232) ; ansfangen 
 
 (247)- 
 behave, ftc^ Betragen (249); ftc^ Be= 
 
 ne^nten (232). 
 behavior, bo8 SBetragen, bo8 ©ene^> 
 
 tnen {inf. nouns). 
 behind, adv., Winter (287), ^inteu; 
 
 prep., Winter {dat. or ace). 
 believe, glauben {dat., ace. 437, 2). 
 bell, bie ©lode. 
 belong, gel)bren {dat^. 
 beloved, gelieBt {part. adj.). 
 below, adv., unten; prep., unter (dat. 
 
 or ace). 
 bench, bie SBanf (//. -^e), 424). 
 beside, prep, (dat., ace), neBen. 
 besides, prep, (dat.), auger; adv., 
 
 augerbem. 
 
 best, Beft (irr. sup., gut); to do one's 
 — , fetn SSeftea t^un. 
 
 betray, Berraten (248). 
 
 better, beffer (irr. comp., gUt). 
 
 between, prep. '{dat. or ace), JtDia 
 fc^en. 
 
 big, grog. 
 
 bill, (account) bie 5Red^nung; (of ex- 
 change) ber aSSec^fri. ' 
 
 bird, ber Soget (//. % 
 
 bishop, ber S8if(i|of (pi. ^c). 
 
 bite, beigen (■246). 
 
 bitter, bitter; — ly, Bttterlid^. 
 
 black, ft^warj. 
 
 blame, tabeln (214). 
 
 blind, blinb. 
 
 bloom, blut)en. 
 
 blossom, blii^en. 
 
 blow, «., ber @ii)Iag (pi. -"e). 
 
 blow, v., btafen (248) ; —up, fjjrengcn, 
 
 blue, BIflU, bluish, blnuIicEi, 
 
344 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 boat, ber Sot|n {pi. H), boS Soot 
 
 (105); — man, ber @(f)iffer. 
 body, ber itHa {pi. -er), ber Sbr))er; 
 
 any — , etc., see any. 
 bombard, bomborbie'ren (215). 
 Boniface, SBonifociuS. 
 book, boS SBuc^. 
 
 boot, ber ©tiefel (gen. -%,pl. 105). 
 born, geboren, p.p. gebaren {as adj.). 
 both, beibe, bte SSeiben; belbeS (460) ; 
 
 conj., both . . . and, fottJO^I . . . atS. 
 bottle, bie gtafc^e. 
 bough, ier aft (//. "e), ber Sttjeig. 
 boy, ber AMabe; — s' school, bie ^na= 
 
 benfd^itle. 
 brave, topfer, brab {also adv.). 
 bread, bag Srot (pi. -e). 
 breadth, bte iBreite. 
 break, bredtien (232); —out, au8»bre» 
 
 c^en; — in pieces, jerbredEien.. 
 breakfast, «.. bag grii^ftutf ; v., to — 
 
 frul)ftucteit (380). 
 breathe, atnten (212). 
 bride, bie SSraut (//. "e). 
 bridge, bie Srtide. 
 bright, !^en. 
 bring, britigeit (254) ; — with (one's 
 
 self), along, mit= — ; back, JuriiS^ — . 
 broad, breit; — -shouldered, Breit= 
 
 jf!)iittrtB. 
 brother, ber SBrubcr {pl.-'^); or pi. bie 
 
 Oebvflber (387). 
 build, bauen; — ing, «., ba8 OebSube 
 
 (//. -). 
 bundle, baS Sunb {pi. -e, 426), ber 
 
 (ha«) SBiinbel. [iieii. 
 
 burn, brennen (254) ; — up, ocrbren» 
 bush, ber SuftI) (//. "e), coll. -es (387). 
 but, con/., obet, aflein, jonbern (326) ; 
 
 adv., (only) nur ; prep,, (except) 
 
 Qujjer {dat.). 
 
 butter, bte SButter. 
 
 buy, faufeit. 
 
 by, prep., (place) bet, Itebeit {dat.)\ 
 (agent) Son {dat.) ; (means) burd) 
 {ace.) ; adv., (near) boBet ; (past) 
 Borbei. 
 
 C. 
 
 cab, bie ®rofd)te. 
 
 call, rufen (248); (name) nennen; — 
 out, auS=rufen; — on, (visit) be|u= 
 
 - d)en;— out (local), berau8=rufett. 
 
 can, tonnen (261) ; modal (472). 
 
 capable, faf)ig {gen.). 
 
 captain, ber ^aujitmatm (//. -mart= 
 Iter), ber Sapttott' {pi. -e). 
 
 carriage, ber SBagett (//. — or '^). 
 
 carry, (bear) tragen (249), brtngett 
 (254); (lead) fii^reit; — out, (exe- 
 cute) ait8=fiil)reit, (local) binau§=tra= 
 geii ; — up, l)ittauf=tragen, 
 
 castle, bo« ©cEitoS. 
 
 cat, bie ta^e. 
 
 cattle, bag S8ie^. 
 
 cause, n., bie Ur'fad|e; (reason) ber 
 ©ritnb [pL'^t); v., 6eritr|ad^en. 
 
 celebrated, tr., beru^mt {part. adj.). 
 
 cellar, ber Setter. 
 
 center, ber aKitteI)JUltft {pl.-t); —of 
 gravity, ber @(f|tt)erputtlt. 
 
 certain, geWife, beftinttttt {pari. adj.). 
 
 chain, bie Sette. 
 
 chair, ber ©tltljl {pi. '^e). 
 
 change, onberit, lr>ec^|eln (214) ; tntr., 
 fid) — J — cars, utn=ftci9«i (247)- 
 
 chapter, bag ii'api'tel (//. — ). 
 
 charge, (accusation) bie Scfc^ltlbii 
 flttitg; (attack) ber Stitgriff. 
 
 Charles, Sari. 
 
 chat, ptaitbwn (214). 
 
 cheese, ber tfife {gen, -g, //, — ), 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 345 
 
 chemistry, bie Sf)emie'. [bauin. 
 
 cherry, bie ^irfcf)e ; — tree, ber Sirjc^= 
 child, bas ^inb ; —hood, bie ^inb^cit ; 
 
 — ish, finbifd) ; — like, Iinbti(f|. 
 Christian, bet (St)rifl (//. -en) ; adj., 
 
 c^rijllict). 
 Christianity, bag S^riflentum (386). 
 Christmas, bie SBeil^tiac^ten,//. 
 church, bie ^\xi^t ; — tower, -steeple, 
 
 bet flirc^tutm. [Stabtmauer. 
 
 city, bie ©tabt {pi. -^e) ; — wall, bie 
 class, bie Slaffe. 
 clean, adj., teitt ; v., teinigen. 
 clear, fiat, beutliii^. 
 clerk, bet SomntiS' {French). 
 
 climb, Kimmen (242). 
 
 cloak, bet SRantet {pi. "'). 
 
 cloister, baS Sloftet {pi. "). 
 
 close, fiJ)tie6en (241), ju=ntac^en. 
 
 cloth, ba« Sucf); clothes,//. bieSIeibet, 
 
 clothe, Keiben (212). 
 
 cloud, bie SBoIfe ; coll., — s (387). 
 
 coach {see carriage); — man, bet Sut= 
 
 coat, bet Sftod {pi. -^e). - [|ii)er. 
 
 coffee, betSaffee {gen. -8). 
 
 cold, lat't ; it is — , e8 ftiett ; I am — , 
 
 es ftiett micf), mi(| ftiett. 
 Cologne, ^ote ; as adj., tbtnet (143). 
 color, bie gotbe ; v., fatten. 
 Colossus, bet S0I06' {gen. -t%,pl.-t). 
 come, fomrnen (fein, 232); — of, H)ei» 
 
 ben aus {dat.). 
 comfort, ».,bev S:toft;z/., troften(2i2). 
 command, v., (order) befe^len (232) ; 
 
 (control) gebietcn (iiber, ace). 
 companion.bet ©efatittE;/. @efat|rtin. 
 company, bie ©efettjcfiaft ; {milit.) bie 
 
 Eomfiognie' (French). 
 compare, Betgteic^en (246). 
 comparison, ber SBetgleict), 
 
 compel, jiDingen (231). 
 compliment, ba8 Compliment' (//.' 
 
 -e) ; to send one's — s to, fid) em=- 
 
 t)fe^ten (232, dat.). 
 comprehend, bcgreifen (246). 
 concern, betteffen (232) ; on=get)en 
 
 (248) ; both ace. 
 concert, ba8 Conjett' (//. -e). 
 conducive, bientic^, be^iitflic^ ; both 
 
 dat. (438). 
 conduct, v., (lead), fii^ten ; — one's 
 
 self, fici^ benetjmen (232) ; n., baS 
 
 SBene^men (infin.). 
 conquer (a place), erobern (212); (an 
 
 enemy) bcftegen. 
 conscious, betBugt (gen. 433). 
 consider, trans., bebenten (254), uber» 
 
 te'gen ; intr., \\i) beben!en ; — as, 
 
 fatten fiit (ace). 
 contented, gufrieben. 
 contrary : — to, jjuWibet (follows 
 
 dat.) ; on the — , bagegen, im @egen= 
 
 teil. 
 convent, bo8 Ctoftev (//. '^). 
 conversation, ba8 Oefptfic^ {pi. -t), 
 
 bie Untet^attung. 
 convert, v., oerwanbeln (214); (moral) 
 
 befe'^ten. 
 convince, iibetjeugen {ace, gen. 434). 
 cook, (man) bet Cod) {pi. "e) ; 
 
 (woman) bie ^id)xn (pi. -nen). 
 cool, lii^l. 
 
 copy, v., ab=f(f)teiben (247). 
 corner, bie EcEe. 
 cost, v., toften {ace, 442). 
 cottage, bie §utte. 
 coimt, n., ber @rof (//. -en) ; —ess, 
 
 bie @taftn (//. -nen). 
 count, v., ja^ten ; (reckon) reii^nen 
 
 (212). 
 country, baS 8ani) (//■ "er, ar -t, 
 
346 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 425) ; — man, ber Saitbittann, or 
 
 Sanbsmann (425ir) ; —people, Sonb= 
 
 leute. 
 course, btr Sauf {gen. -eg); of — , na= 
 
 tiirlicft, e8 Berfte^t ftd). 
 court, ber §of (//. -^e). 
 cousin, ber SSettev {gen. -8, //. -n, or 
 
 — , 105); bie Soufine. 
 cover, v., becEen, bebeden ; n., bie 
 
 ®ecfe, ber Bedel. 
 cow, bie kv&i {pi. H). 
 creep, Iciec^en (241), (slink) jc^teii^en 
 
 (246). 
 crime, ba8 SSerbrec^en. 
 cross (over), ilber^fe^en (287). 
 crowd, bie SKenge (431, c). 
 crown, bie Stone ; — prince, berSron- 
 
 (Jrinj. 
 crucifix (cross), bo9 ifveuj (//. -e). 
 crumble (to pieces), jerfaUen (fein, 
 
 247)- 
 cry, (out) f(^reien (247); (weep) H)ei= 
 
 neit. 
 cup, ber Sed)er, bie Saffe. 
 curse, «., ber gtud) {pi. "e) ; v., oer= 
 
 f(ud)en. 
 cut, v., fd)neiben (246). 
 
 D. 
 
 dance, n., ber Sonj {pl.'^t) ; «'•, tan= 
 
 jett (213). 
 dancing-master, ber Eanjletirer. 
 dangerous, gefo^rlid^. 
 dare, raageti, biirfen (261), modal{i,T2). 
 dark, buntel; to grow — , bunfeln (214). 
 date, n., bag ®atum ; v., batie'ren. 
 daughter, bie Sociiter (//. ''). 
 day, ber Sag {pi. -e) ; to — , [)eute ; 
 
 adj., of to — , Ijeutig; some — , einfl. 
 dead, tot. 
 deaf, tau6 ; — and durob, tctubftumm. 
 
 dear, lieB, teuer. 
 
 death, ber Sob (422). 
 
 deceive, Betriigeti (242), l^intergel^en 
 
 {248, 287). 
 decide, entfiftcibeit (247). 
 declare, erHfiren, 6et)auJ)ten. 
 deed, bie 'Vifl.i {pi. -en), 
 deem, %a\in\ (248) fiir; — worthy, 
 
 Wiirbigen {ace, gen). 
 deep, tief. 
 defy, tro^cn {dat) ; %xi>% bicten {dat., 
 
 437)- 
 degenerate, adj., tniggeartet (288). 
 delight, «., bie greube (106) ; v., vc-- 
 
 freiien; intr., ftc^ freuen {gen.); 
 
 to be — ed,fid) \xfa.fa.firimpers.{2()\). 
 deliver, liefent (214); iiberliefem (287). 
 dentist, ber ^tt^itorgt 
 deny, ISugnen (212), Berneiiien. 
 depend, ob^^aitgen (248) Bon {dat). 
 deprive, raubeu, berouBeit (440). 
 desert, v., Derlnffen (248). 
 desert, n., bie SBiifle. 
 deserve, berbienett. 
 desire, Berlangcil ; aZso impers., mid^ 
 
 Berlaiigt (nad)). 
 despise, Bera(^ten (212). 
 destroy, gerftoren, (spoil) BcrberBen 
 
 (232). 
 devotion, bie ©rgeben^eit. 
 
 dictionary, bag Sffi5rterbU(i^. 
 
 die, flerben (232). 
 
 difficult, fd)met. 
 
 dig, graben (249). 
 
 dignity, bie SBiirbe. 
 
 diligent, fteigig. 
 
 dine, %\\ SKittng effeit (243, 379). 
 
 dining-room, ber @))eifefaat \pl. 
 
 -ftile). 
 dinner, bo8 iKittageffen {inf. noun). 
 disagreeable, uncingcne^ro (to, <fe^.). 
 
V(Jt.AaUL.AKX. 
 
 ;54/ 
 
 disapprove, ntipiUigen (288). 
 dish, bie ©djiiffct. 
 dismiss, entlaffett (248, 434). 
 dissatisfied, unjufrieben. 
 distance, bie Sntfcvimug, bie aSeite. 
 distinct, (clear) bcutlid^; (different) 
 
 Berfc^ieben. 
 distinguish, nuterfcfteiben (247) ; — 
 
 one's self, ftd) au8=3eid)nEn (212). 
 distress, «., bie 9f ot, ba« Etenb; — ing, 
 
 adj., etenb, peinlidi. 
 ditch, bcr ®raben (//. ''). 
 divide, biBibie'ren (215); (separate) 
 
 entgweien; (distribute) Bci'tetlen. 
 divine, gottlt(^. 
 do, tl)un (255),mo(^cn; (in iiealth) fid) 
 
 befinben; as aux. not transL 
 doctor, ber ®0ltcir (117) ; (physician) 
 
 bet %xii {pi. "e). 
 dog, ber §unb (//. — c). 
 dollar, ber 2;t)aler (//. — ). 
 door, bie K^iite. 
 double, bo))t)eIt. 
 doubt, n., ber 3weifel; v., jtoeifetn 
 
 (214). 
 down, niebcr; ^er= or ^in=ali, =unter 
 
 (484); — hill, bergab. 
 dozen, ba8 ®U^enb. 
 draw, (attract) giel)en (241) ; (design) 
 
 geidjncn (212); — ing, bte ^etc^nitng. 
 dress, m., bo8 Meib, bie ^leibiing; v. 
 
 tr., tieiben (212) ; intr., fid) aitjicl)en 
 
 (241). 
 drink, v., tvinlen (231), (of animals) 
 
 Inufen (242) ; n., bas Oettonl. 
 drinkable, trintbar. 
 drip, triefen (241). 
 
 drive, fr., treiben (247); (a carriage) 
 tr., fii^reii ; intr., fabren (249) ; to 
 take, go for a — , ftjajieren fa^ren 
 (feiii). 
 
 drunken, betruufm. 
 
 dry, adj., trocfen; v., trodiieti. 
 
 dumb, ftltmin; deaf and — , tOUb» 
 
 ftumm. 
 during, tufibrenb {gen., 280). 
 duty, bie *PJTid)t [pi. -en). 
 dwell, irol^neiu 
 dye, n., bie garbe; v., farben. 
 
 E. 
 
 each, jeber; — ■ one, jebfr, ciii jeber; 
 
 — other, eittanbcr (indecl.). 
 eagle, ber Slblcr (//. — ). 
 ear, bag O^r (gen. -eg, pi. -en). 
 early, fviil). 
 
 earth, bie Erbe (ic6) ; — ly, irbtfc^. 
 easy, Ieid)t. 
 
 East, ber Often ; (Jig.) ber 2Rorgen. 
 Easter, Dftcrn (pL). 
 eat, cffcn (243), (of animals) freffcn 
 
 (243)- 
 eatable, epar. 
 edge, ber Stanb (//. ''cr); (knife) bie 
 
 @d)nEibc. 
 education, bie Erjie^ung. 
 egg, bag @i. 
 eight, ad)t; — (t)teen, ad)tsel)n; — (t)y, 
 
 ndjtjig. 
 either, beibeS (460) ; carrel, conj., ent= 
 
 irebcr . . . obev (or), 
 elderly, altttl^. 
 
 elect, v., tnobien, erroii^Ieri (ju, 443). 
 eleven, elf; the — th, ber elfte. 
 emperor, ber Saifer. 
 end, «., bag (Snbe (gen. -g, //. -V.) ; 
 
 •^., enbigen. 
 enemy, ber gcinb; coll., the — , //. 
 England, (bag) ®ngtanb. 
 English, englifd^; —man, ber Sng= 
 
 Icinber. 
 enmity, bie geinbfd^oft. 
 
348 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 enough, geniig {usually follows). 
 enter, (()er» or I)in=) etn=ge^en (|ein, 
 
 248) ; ein=tteten (fein, 243). 
 entertain, untert|atten (248). 
 entire, gonj (144); adv., also ^au^xi). 
 equal, glei^ (dat.), getoac^ien (dai.); 
 
 v., gIeiif||ommen (379, dat.). 
 err, ftd) trren. 
 
 errand-boy, b£r Saufburjc^e. 
 escape, entgel)en (fetii, 248); (run off) 
 
 enttaufcn (fein, 248), both dat. 
 estate, bo8 @iit ; country ^ Sanbgut. 
 esteem, ad^ten (212), I)atten (248) 
 
 fiir. 
 Evfrope, (boS) ©urotja. 
 evade, umgeljtn (248, 287). 
 even, -adj., cben ; adv., aud^ (485), 
 
 felbft (454). 
 evening, ber Slbenb (//. -e); in the 
 
 — , beS — 8 or abenbs (435). 
 event, bie fflegebenljeit, baS (Sreignis 
 
 (pl- -ffe). 
 ever, jc, jetnatS; (always) imtner. 
 every, jeber, afler (460); —body, 
 
 —one, ein jeber, jebcrmann; — thing, 
 
 alte8; —where, iiberaH. 
 except, v., ou6»neI)men (232) ; as 
 
 prep., auger (dat.), of)ne [ace.) ; 
 
 part., oiiSgenommen. 
 excessive, iibermogig ; as adv., ou= 
 
 fierft (450). 
 excitement, bie 3lufregitng. 
 excuse,!'., entft^utbigen; «., bie (5nt= 
 
 jc^itlbigmig. 
 exercise, bie libiing ; (lesson) baB 
 
 Ejercitiunt (118). 
 exhibition, bie SluSfieHuiig. 
 expect, erlDortett (212) ; «., — ation, 
 
 bie Erroortung. 
 expensive, teitcr, tojlbor. 
 explain, erfliireti. 
 
 express, zr., au«=brii(Ien ; «., — (train), 
 
 ber @^neU3ug. 
 expression, ber 2lu8bru(f (//.'"e). 
 expressive, auSbrudSboU. 
 eye, baS Stuge. 
 
 F. 
 
 fable, bie gftbel. 
 
 face, bag @ertti)t (//. -er). 
 
 fact, bie Sfiatfad^e; in — , in ber 
 
 fade, Bctbleic^ett (fein, 246), »crbliil)cn. 
 fail, fel)ten; (bankrupt) foUie'ren. 
 fairy-tale for children, ba8 ^inber= 
 
 mard)cn. 
 faith, ber ©laube {gen. -n8, 99). 
 faithful, treii. 
 fall, fatten ((ein, 248) ; -- in (^cr= or 
 
 l)in=) ein»faUen. 
 false, falfd). 
 
 famous, berii^mt (part adj.). 
 fan, ber gScfjer. 
 
 fancy, v., meinen, ftdj ein«bi(ben(437). 
 far, fern, weit ; as — as, fo fern (a(8), 
 
 bi8 (prep.). 
 farmer, ber SSauer (104). 
 fast, (firm) feft ; (rapid) fd^nell. 
 fat, fett. 
 
 fate, bo8 ©d^icEfal (//. -e). 
 father, ber SBoter (pi. •^). 
 fault, ber getter ; in—, fc^utbig, f(^u(b 
 
 (448). 
 favor, bie ®nnfi (see 106). 
 favorable, giinftig, getrogen (part. 
 
 adj.), both dat. 
 
 fear, «., bie gurc^t; v., filrdjten (212); 
 
 fic^ fiir(i^ten (»or, dat.). 
 feature, ber 3ug, ber ©ejtd^tBpg 
 
 (pl- "e). 
 February, ber gefiruar'. 
 feeble, \ifma6). 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 349 
 
 feel, fasten, ficft fu^ten; — afraid, 
 Bangen ; — giddy, f^hitnbeln (214), 
 
 both impers. {dai.). 
 fell, fatten. 
 fellow, &er SSutfc^e; — man, ajJits 
 
 nienfi^. 
 fctcb, ^olen. 
 
 few, itienige (//.) ; a—, einige (//.). 
 field, has getb. 
 
 fifteen, funfje^n {or funf jel^n). 
 fifth (the), ber fiinfte. 
 fifty, fiinfiiig {or funfjig). 
 fight, fec^ten (242) ; «., bo8 ®cfecl)t. 
 find, ftnben (231), — out, evfo^ren. 
 fine, (size) fetn ; (look) fd^bn. 
 fire, ba? geucr ; — insurance, bie geuet= 
 
 Berftd^erung. 
 first (the), ber erfte ; adv., erft (485) ; 
 
 — ly, erfteng ; at — , juerft, anfangS ; 
 — born, erftgeboreti {part. adj.). 
 fish, «., ber gtfd) ; v., fijd^en. 
 five, fitnf ; of— ^ kinds, fiinfertei (306). 
 flag, bie gtagge, bie ga^tie. 
 flame, bie gtamme. 
 flatter, fii)tneid)eln (214, dat.). 
 flattery, bie ®i}mtii)elei'. 
 flay, f(^inben (231). 
 flee, ftie^en (jeiit, 241). 
 flow, fliefien (241); rinnen (232). 
 flower, bie S3Iume; — basket, ber 
 
 — nforb ipl. -^e) ; — -garden, ber 
 
 — ttgarten. 
 fly, v., ftiegen (241, aux. 298). 
 fly, «., bie gliege. 
 follow, fotgen (fein, dat.). 
 folly, bie 2:t)or^eit. 
 food, bie @j3eife, bie iJJa^rung (««/«., 
 
 bag (Sffen). 
 fool, ber SJarr, berE^or {both pi. -en); 
 
 — ish, nSrrijc^, tpvic^t. 
 foot, ber gu6 (//. "c); on — , ju gitg. 
 
 ior,prep., fiir (ace), (cause) Bor {dat.), 
 
 wcgen {gen.) ; conj., benn. 
 forbid, Berbieten (241). 
 force, jwingen (231); «., ber 3>Bang. 
 foreign, fremb ; — er, »., ber grembe: 
 
 — parts, bie grembe, baS Stuglanb. 
 foremost, ber erfte. 
 foresee, Borf)er=feI)en (243). 
 forest, ber SEBatb (//. -^er). 
 foretell, Borf)er»fagen. 
 forget, (BergeffctI (243, rarely gen); 
 
 — me-not, bag iBergiBmetnnid^t. 
 forgive, Bergeben (243, dat.). 
 former, Borig; (the) — erfterer (157, 
 
 417), jener. 
 forsake, Bertaffen (248). 
 fortnight, Bierje^n Sage ; a — ago, 
 
 Bor — n {dat.). 
 forty, Bierjig. 
 "fossil, bos t^oifit' (^ra. -8, //. -ien, 
 
 1 18). 
 fountain, bie Ouette, ber SBrunnen. 
 four. Bier ; — cornered, — edig ; — 
 
 footed, — fuj3ig ; —teen, — je|n. 
 franc, ber gronfe. 
 Frederick, griebri(^ ; — Street, — 8s 
 
 ftrage. 
 freedom, bie greitjelt ; — of will, bie 
 
 SBSiUeng— . 
 freeze, frieren (241). 
 French, adj., franjoftic^ ; «., (lan- 
 guage) bag granjbfif^ ; the — , n., 
 
 bie granjofen. 
 frequent, ^ouftg ; adv., also oft, iifterg. 
 friend, ber g-reunb ; — ly, — tid^ ; — 
 
 ship, bie — f(i)Qft. 
 frighten, tr., weak, erfd^reifen ; intr., 
 
 be — ed, erfdjrecfen (232), bangen 
 
 {impers., dat, 291). 
 from, Bon {dat.), aug {dat.); (cause) 
 Bor {dat.), ttiegen {gen). 
 
3SO 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 fruit, bie grud)t (pi. "e). 
 
 fugitive, ber )^Iu(i)tting. 
 
 full, Doll {gen.). 
 
 further, tteiter {comp.). 
 
 future, «., bie ^ntunft ; aiij-> jufiinftig. 
 
 garden, ber ®arten (pi. ^) ; — wall, 
 
 bie ©artenmauer. 
 gardener, ber ©ortner. 
 gate, bos t^ox (pi. -e). 
 gem, ber Sbelftein. 
 general, ber gelb^err, ber Oeneral' 
 
 (pl. -ate). 
 gentleman, ber §err (gen. -it, //. 
 
 -en) . . 
 German, adj., beutjd^; as noun, a — , 
 
 ein ®eutfd)er; — (language), bo8 
 
 ®eut((f). 
 Germany, (baS) ®eut((^tanb. 
 get, (obtain) befomtnen (232); intr., 
 
 (become) ttierben; — in, — out, ein=, 
 
 augsfteiSEi (247) ; — on, ge^en (tm- 
 
 pers. dat.); —well, gene|en (243); 
 
 all these, |ein. 
 giant, ber 8iteje. 
 giddy, jcl)n)inbelig; to be, feel — , 
 
 fdjKlinbeltt (impers. dat). 
 gilded, Bergolbet. 
 girl, baS aJlfibc^en (dim). 
 give, gebeii (243) ; — up, auf=geben. 
 glad, fro^; to be — of, ftd) freuen 
 
 (gen.) ; adv., — ly, gern (485). 
 glass, baS ®(a6; adj., glafern. 
 glide, gleiten (246). 
 glimmer, glimmen (242). 
 glorious, f|errlid|. 
 glory, (fame) ber SRu^m (gen. -e8); 
 
 (splendor) bie §errUd)feit. 
 go, ge^en ((ein, 248); — by, t)orbei» 
 
 gcl)en; — out (a light), eriofdjen 
 
 (feiti, 242); — to walk, ftjajieren 
 ge^en ; — with, along, mit=ge^en. 
 god, ber @ott (//. ^er) ; God, @ott. 
 gold, ba8 ®otb; adj., golben. 
 good, gut; also adv. (for well) ; noun, 
 
 baS ®ut (//. ^er). 
 goodness, bie ®Hte. 
 goose, bie ®ati8 (//. "e). 
 gospel, bas (SBongetium (118). 
 gracious, gndbig. 
 gradual, aHmolig. 
 grammar, bie ®rammo'ti{. 
 grand, grojjartig ; (rank) Borne^m ; 
 
 —father, ber,®ro§Bater ; — mother, 
 
 bie ©rogmutter. 
 grant, 3U=geBen (243), Berleil|eti (247); 
 
 God — , gebe ®ott. 
 great, grog. 
 
 Greek, «., ber ®riec^e ; adj. grie^ifc^. 
 green, griin ; «., baS ®riin ; — ish, 
 
 griinlid). 
 grievous, fd^merjlic^ ; (heavy) fc^lBer. 
 grind, (corn) marten ; (a knife) fd^Iei. 
 
 fen (246). 
 grove, ber §oill. 
 grow, tnadjfen (jein, 249) ; (become) 
 
 merben ; — dark, buntelii (214, 
 
 iTnpers). 
 guest, ber ®oft (pl. ^e). 
 guilt, bie S^ulb (pl. -en, debts), 
 gun-powder, bag ©(^iefjpitlBer. 
 
 H. 
 
 hail, «., bcr§aget; v., ^agcln (214, 
 
 impers). 
 hair, baS §aat (//. -e, as coll). 
 half, I)alb (144); — a, the ,(420); «., 
 
 bie §atttc. 
 hand, bie §anb (pl. -^e) ; the right, 
 
 left — , bie SRe^te, Sinfe. 
 handsome, fd^bn. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 3SI 
 
 hang, intr., t)angen (248) ; tr., weak, 
 
 ^dngcn ; — up, auf^angen. 
 happen, gefc^e^ett (\m\, 243). 
 happiness, bo8 ®lud; (joy) tie grfube. 
 happy, glu(IU(^. 
 harbor, ber §ofen (pi. ^). 
 
 hardly, jc^tnerlid) ; (scarcely) taum. 
 
 hare, bee §afe. 
 
 harm, ber @d)obe(ii) (100); v., j(i)aben 
 
 (dat). 
 haste, bie ©tie ; hasty, eilig. 
 hat, ber §ut (i>/. "e). 
 have, l)oben {as aux., 296) ; — to, 
 
 miiffen. 
 hawthorn, bev SBeigborit. 
 he, er ; ber, biefer, ber|elBe (457) ; — 
 
 (who) bcrjenige (208). 
 head, ber ^opf (//. "c) ; —ache, bog 
 
 Sopfme^. 
 health, bie ®e(unb^cit. 
 hear, pren ; — tell, fagen l)oren. 
 heart, baS §er; {gen. -en8, pi. -en, 
 
 102). 
 heat, bie §i^e ; v., ^ijen (213). 
 heath, bie §eibe. 
 heathen, ber §eibe ; — ism, bo9 §ei= 
 
 beiitum. 
 heaven, ber §immel. 
 height, bie §ol)e. 
 help, I)Elfen (232), bei=j}e^en (249), 
 
 both dot. ; «., bie §ilfc. 
 Henry, §einri(i). 
 her, /.?«., jte, {dat., to) i^r \ pass, adj., 
 
 Vc\X\ — self {reflex.), ft(^ ; {emph.) 
 
 felbft (4S4)- 
 here, l^ier ; adj., ^iejtg ; — with, l^ier^ 
 
 mit (401). 
 hero, ber §elb (//. -en), 
 high, \)ai),before e, 1)0^ (156). \_—-!A. 
 hill, ber §iigel; up, down — , bErg=oiif, 
 him [ace), il)n, {dat., to) if|m ; —self 
 
 {rejlex.), fid); [emph.) felbft (454). 
 his, adj., f?in ; pron., feiner ; beffen, 
 
 begfelBen (457). 
 history, bie ®e|d^ic^te. 
 hit, tveffen (232). 
 hold, I)alten (248) ; — for (consider), 
 
 — '\\Xt{acc.); — worthy, iniirbigen 
 
 (qcc, gen^, 
 
 hdliday, ber geiertag. 
 
 home, bie §eimat (//. -en) ; adv. (to), 
 
 at, from — , nad), ju, Bon §aufE. 
 honesty, bie @^rUd|fett. 
 honor, k., bie &iXt (106) ; man of — , 
 
 ber E^rentnann; v., efiren. 
 hope, v., l^offen; n., bie §offnimg; 
 
 — ful, ^offmmgSboH; —less, ^off= 
 
 nungSloS; — of, or for, auf {ace.). 
 horse, bo8 *Pferb (pi. -e). 
 hospital, bag §o8pitaI (//. ''er). 
 hot, ^eig. 
 hotel, ber ®oftl)of {pi. "e); — -porter, 
 
 ber §au8fned|t. 
 hour, (duration) bie ©tunbc; (o'clock) 
 
 bie U^r; — ly, ftiinblid). 
 house, bus §au8; —of Lords, ba8 
 
 |)erren— . 
 how, n)ie. 
 human, menfd^Iic^ ; — being, ber 
 
 5Kenfd) {pi. -en), 
 humanity, bie 2Jtcn((^^eit ; (feeling) 
 
 bie aKcnfd)(id)feit. 
 humble, bemiitig. 
 hundred (a), bunbert. 
 Hungarian, ber Ungar (//. -n). 
 hungry, l)ungrig ; to be — , ^ungern ; 
 
 impers. {ace). 
 huntsman, ber SSger. 
 hurry, bie Eilc; in a — , in (Site, 
 husband, ber SSSimm, S^emonn (425), 
 hut, bie §iitte. 
 hypocrisy, bie §eu(!^elei'. 
 
352 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 I. 
 
 I, id^. 
 
 ice, baiS eiS; c-old as — , ei8!alt. 
 
 if, IDCHII {omitted, .350, 2) ; even — , 
 
 Wenn . . . aai) (486); (whether) oB. 
 iU, Iranf; dangerously — , |levben§» 
 
 frani; — ness, tie ^vanlljeit. 
 image, bag SilbniS (//. -ffe). * 
 
 imagine, ft(^ (dat.) einbilben (212). 
 immediately, fogIei(^. 
 immortality, bie UnjlerbIi(I)leit. 
 impatient, ungebulbig. 
 important, toic^tig, bebeutenb. 
 impostor, ber SSetriiger. 
 improvidence, bie Uni3orft(^tig!elt. 
 in, prep., in [dat.), into [ace.) ; adv., 
 
 (place) bariti; (motion) herein, ^in^ 
 
 ein ; as sep.pref., ein=. 
 include, cin4i^IiE6en (241). 
 incontestable, unflreitig. 
 incredible, tmgloubUc^. 
 industrious, fieigig. 
 infer, jt^Uegen (241) ; — from, nu8, 
 
 {dat.); (from one's look) an=fe^En 
 
 (243, dat. pers.). 
 
 inform, beiniljvii^tigen. 
 
 injurious, fl^ablid^ {dat.). 
 
 inn, bo« 5D3irt«^au«. 
 
 innocence, bie Unfd^utb. 
 
 innocent, irafd)ulbig. 
 
 insist, beftel^en (249); — on, ouf 
 (ace, 477). 
 
 inspect, beje^en (243). 
 
 instead (of), anjlott, fiott (gen.); be- 
 fore infin., 475, ji. 
 
 insult, v., beleibigen; «., bie 53eteibi= 
 gung. 
 
 interest, «., bo8 Sntereffe (gen. -«, 
 pi. -11); v., an=ge^en (248); —one's 
 self in, fic^ on=ne^men (232, gen:). 
 
 interior, inner (158); as «., bas Snnere. 
 into, prep., in {ace); adv., I^erein, 
 
 ^inein. 
 intolerable, unertvoglic^ (part., 482). 
 introduce, einsfiil)ren; (a person) bor= 
 
 flellen. 
 invent, erfinben (231). 
 invention, bie Erfinbung. 
 invite, etn4aben (249). 
 iron, bci« gifen ; adj., eifem. 
 island, bie Snjel, ba8 (gitanb {pi. -e). 
 it, eS (452-3) ; its, fein, or dem., gen. 
 
 (457)- 
 
 J- 
 
 January, ber Sonuar'. 
 
 jewel, bo8 ,SIeinob (pi. -t, or -ien). 
 
 journey, bie Steife. 
 
 joy, bie greube (106) ; for—, Dor — n. 
 
 judge, urteilen ; (oiiScial) rtc^ten ; n., 
 
 ber 3tidE|ter. 
 jump, Ipringen (231 ; aux., 298). 
 just, adj., gered)t ; adv., gerobc ; (time) 
 
 foeben, erjl. 
 
 keep, gotten; (retain) bel^alten (248); 
 
 intr., ftd) fallen, bleiben (247). 
 key, ber @ci)luffet. 
 kill, tijten (212). 
 kind, bie Slrt (pl.-iv)\ —of, by suffix, 
 
 — ertei (306) ; what — of, iroS fiir 
 kind, giitig : —ness, bie ©iite. 
 king, ber jfonig ; — dom, ba6 Sonig= 
 
 reic^ (//. -e). 
 kitchen, bie Siic^e. 
 knife, \iO& 2)}effer. 
 knock, Hopfen ; (hit) flofecn (248). 
 know, lennen, miffen (254, see note, p. 
 
 134); Knnen (268). 
 known (well — ), belannt (part. adj.). 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 353' 
 
 knowledge, bie ^etmtnis, bag SBiffen 
 {infin.) ; of my — , tneiiieg 3Biffett8. 
 
 laboratory, ba8 Saborato'rium (ii8). 
 
 laborer, ber Strbeiter. 
 
 lacerate, gerfleifd^en (213). 
 
 lady, bie ®ame. 
 
 lake, ber @ee (104, 426). 
 
 lame, la^ni. 
 
 land, «., bas Sanb (425) ; v., lanben 
 
 (|etn, 212). 
 landlord, ber SBirt, ber §ait8^err. 
 language, bie ©^jrac^e. 
 large, grog (156). 
 last, Ie^t^(i57)'; (preceding) Dorig ; 
 
 adv., at — , enblic^, jiiteljt. 
 late, fpat ; — ly, nculicE) ; at latest, 
 
 fpateftfng (gen.). 
 laugh, lac^en ; — at, tod^en (gen>i, 
 
 au8=Iad^en (ace). 
 law, bas @e|e^ (pi. -e). 
 lawyer, ber 2lbt)otat', ber Ste^tSgele^rte 
 
 (adj., noun). 
 lay, legen. 
 lazy, trSge. 
 
 lead, fii^ren, teiten (212). 
 lead, bo8 SSIet. 
 leaf, bo8 SBIatt. 
 leap, f))ringen (231 ; aux., 298). 
 learn, leruen (infin., 474); — ed, %t= 
 
 le^rt (part., adj.). 
 leave, v., taffen, oerlaffcn (248) ; intr. 
 
 (depart) ab^fa^ren (jein, 249). 
 leave, «., (permission) bie grtaubniS ; 
 
 (departure) ber Stbfd^ieb. 
 - leg, ba8 S8ein (pi. -e). 
 lend, lei^en (247). 
 length, bie ?(inge ; adv., at — , cnb» 
 
 Iid|. 
 lessen, (oer)minbern (214). 
 
 lesson, (task) bie Stufgabe; (hour) 
 
 bie ©tunbe. 
 let, loffen (248) ; or by imperat. 
 letter, ber SSrief; (of alphabet) ber 
 
 S8u(^ftabe (99); — -carrier, ber S8rief= 
 
 troger. 
 liberate, befreien, frei4affen (379). 
 liberty, bie grcif)eit; to set at — , in 
 
 — fe^en. 
 library, bie SBibliot^ef. 
 lie, (posture) liegen (243). 
 lie', (falsehood) liigett (242); n., bie 
 
 Siige; to tell a — , lug en. 
 life, ba8 I'eben; — insurance, bie Se^ 
 
 benSberfu^erung. 
 lift, tjeben (242); — up, aiif^eben. 
 
 light, ba8 Sic^t (pi. 424) ; — of day 
 lighten, (flash) bli^en. [(389,2). 
 
 like, v., (love) licben; — to, mogen 
 
 (472), or adv., gem (485). 
 like, adj., gleid), af)rtlicft (dat.) ; adv., 
 
 njie; to be — , gfeii^en (246, dat.) ; 
 
 adv.. — ly, roa^rfd^einlid). 
 limb, ba8 ®[ieb. 
 lion, ber Sbine. 
 
 listen, [jori^eiT, 3U=I)bren (to, dat.). 
 little, (size) tiein ; (quantity) njertig; 
 
 a — , ein IDcnig; (often tr. by dim.). 
 
 live, leben ; — to see, erieben. [-fu). 
 load, v., lobeit (249) ; n., bie Soft (pi. 
 lock, fcf)(iegeit (241), uerfdjlicgeii. 
 long, adj., lang(E); adv., lang(r); — 
 
 ago, lange t)er, ISngft. 
 look, blidcn, jebcn (243) ; (seem) nii8= 
 
 feben; — for (seek), fiicben ; (expect) 
 
 ermorten; — at, amfe^en, befel)en. 
 lord, ber §crr (gen. -v., pi. -en). 
 lose, Berlicren (241); — one's way, 
 
 ftc^ Bertrren, fi^ Berlaufen (248); 
 
 — at play, tierf))ieten. 
 loss, ber 95erlu(i. 
 
354 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 loud, Inut. 
 
 love, v., lieoen; — to, adv. gent (485) : 
 
 «., bie Siefie; — letter, ber Siebeg= 
 
 Brief. 
 lovely, liebttc^, UebenSttJiirbig. 
 •low, niebrig (see also 158). 
 lucky, gliidlid). 
 luggage, baS ©e^iad. 
 
 M. 
 
 magnanimous, grogmiitig. 
 maid-servant, bie 9J?agb l^l. ^e). 
 maintain, (assert) be^au^jten (212); 
 
 (support) ert)alten (248). 
 make, maiden ; — haste, etlen. 
 malicious, bo8l)aft. 
 man, (sex) ber3K«ttn(^/.^er,«^425); 
 
 (human) bcrSyjenfdf) (//. -en). 
 manner, (mode) bie SSSeife ; (custom) 
 
 bie ©itte. 
 many, »iete (//.); — a, niaiti^er, mand) 
 
 ein; how — , wie Biele. 
 marble, ber 2Karmor; adj., mormorn. 
 March, ber Wax\. 
 march, niarf(i)ie'cen (215; aux., 298) ; 
 
 jie^en (fein, 241); tr.,—\o.\\tv. (269). 
 mark (coin), bie 3Kort (312). 
 market, ber SKavIt (//. ''e) ; — place, 
 
 — , ber ajJar!t()tafe. 
 marriage, (state) bie ®t)e ; (wedding) 
 
 bie §o^jeit. 
 Mary, 5Koric {gen. -118). 
 mast, ber ajfaft (gen. -t%, pi. -en). 
 master, ber §err (gen. -v., pi. -en) ; 
 
 —of, tnSdjtig (gen.). 
 material, bo8 ajfatericif (^<'«. -?,//. 
 
 -ien, 119). 
 matter, »., (affair) bie ©ttC^e ; to be 
 
 the — , fe^Ietl (impers., with dat. ) ; 
 
 it matters, e8 fommt borouf an. 
 May, ber SUiai. 
 
 may, modal: ntbgen, fonnen, biirfeit 
 
 (472) ; — be, adv., titettei(f|t. 
 mayor, ber SBiivgermcifter. 
 me, mic^ (ace.) ; mir (dat.). 
 mean, meiiien. 
 mean(s), bag 3)ftttel ; by — of, 6er= 
 
 mittetft (gen.), buvd) (ace.) ; by no 
 
 — , feinesroegS (399). 
 measure, k., baS SBfajj (pl.-e); v., 
 
 meffen (243); take one's — , nn= 
 
 mcffen (dat.pers.; for ace). 
 meat, ba« gleifc^. 
 meditate, finnen (232). 
 meet, begcgnen (fein, dat); —with, 
 
 treffen (232). 
 melt, fii^mcljcn (fein, 242). 
 memory, ba8 Oebac^tniS. 
 mend, beffern, ou8=beffern (214). 
 merchant, ber ^aitfmann (pi. 425). 
 merciful, bormlierjig, gnobig (to,dat.). 
 mercy, bie SBarmljevjigfeit; to have—. 
 
 ftd^ crburmcn (on, gen.). 
 
 meritorious, Oerbient (part. adj.). 
 
 messenger, ber ffiotc. 
 
 Michael, ajHdjcl. 
 
 middle, «., bie SKitte; adj., mittler 
 
 (comp., 158). 
 midnight, bie SWitternodjt. 
 mighty, niad)tig. 
 mild, mitb(e). 
 mile, bie SWeile, bie ©tirabe (hour's 
 
 walk). 
 milk, bie ajJild^ ; v., niel!cn (242). 
 mine, nteiner, tneinig ; in pred. also 
 
 mein (193). 
 minister, ber SOlini'fter. 
 minute, «., bie SKinu'te (time), 
 misfortune, baS UngWd. 
 miss, Bcrfel)tcn ; (feeling) ticrmiffcn ; 
 
 - the mark, Borbei»fi^ic5cn (241). 
 miss, «., bn8 griiufein; (title, 428). 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 355 
 
 mistake, «., ber gel)ler ; (error) bev 
 SiTtum {pi. -tiimer) ; v., to be — n, 
 
 modest, Bef(^eibctt (part. adj.). 
 moment, ber Stugeitblid. 
 Monday, bcr SKontag. 
 money, btlS ®elb ; sum of — , bie 
 
 ©elbfummc. 
 monk, ber SJJonii^. 
 monkey, ber 3lffc. 
 / month, bet 3JJoiiot (pi. -e). 
 monument, baS ajionument'. 
 moon, ber SJionb (pi. -e) ; full — , ber 
 
 Sotttnonb. - 
 more, tne^r (indecl.); noc^ (485); or 
 
 by comp. inflection ; the — (334)- 
 morning, ber 2JlorgeU (pi. — ) ; in the 
 
 — , beg — 8, or adv., morgeng. 
 morrow (to-), morgeii; day after — , 
 
 iibermorgen. 
 most, meijl, am ineiften ; abs. superl., 
 
 f)OC^jl, au^erft ; or by sup. inflection. 
 mother, bie SKutter (pl."-n)\ — 
 
 tongue, (lie 3)'iutter|prad)e. 
 mourn, fteigen (jein) ; ir., befteigen 
 
 (247) ; — up, ouf=fteigen (iein). 
 mountain, ber S3crg; range, bag 
 
 ©ebirge (pi. — ). 
 mouse, bie SKaug (pi. -e). 
 move, tr., beinegen; (excite) rii^reit; 
 
 intr., giet)en ((ein, 241). 
 Mr., (ber) §err; Mrs., (bie) groit (428). 
 much, adj., Biel (245), also adv. ; (de- 
 gree) fe^r (adv.). 
 multiply, multipUcie'ren (215) ; ■ — 
 
 by, mit (dai.). 
 multitude, bie 3Jtenge (431). 
 museum, bag SJiufe'nm (gen. -g, //. 
 
 -en, 118). 
 music, bie SJiufif. 
 roust, tniiffen (261; modal, 472), 
 
 my, tneitt; —self (subj.), fetbft; (obj. 
 reflex.) tnlii), mir (|elbft, 434). 
 
 N. 
 
 name, «., ber S'foine (gen. -nS, //. -tt, 
 99) ; his — is, er I)ci6t; v., nenneti 
 (254); be — d, l)ei6en (247). 
 
 narrow, enge, jc^mal. 
 
 nature, bie S)?atur'. 
 
 naughty, imartig, Bofe. 
 
 near, adj., nat), nol)er, nci^ft (dat.); 
 
 prep., Iteben, bci (dat.); adv., — ly, 
 
 beina^e. 
 nearness, bic ^Jfci^e. 
 necessary, tiotig. 
 need, «., tie Jftot ; v., Brauc^en, Bebiir« 
 
 fen (gen. 434) ; modal, bitrfen (472). 
 needle, bie S'Jabel. 
 neglect, bernad^lofftgen. 
 neighbor, ber 9iO(J)Bar igen. -g, pi. 
 
 -II). 
 neither, pron., feiiter (Bott Beiben); 
 
 conj., toeber... (nor) noc^. 
 never, nie, niemalg. 
 nevertheless, bennod), beffen unge» 
 
 ad)tet (280). 
 new, neu; — laid (egg), frifd). 
 news, bie fenbc, bie 5yjad)ric^t; — 
 
 paper, bie ^Eitung. 
 next, adj. (see nal)); (following) fol= 
 
 gcnb; adv., juncid^ft. 
 night, bie 9Jaii)t (//. -^e). 
 nightingale, bie 9Jacf)tigaII. • 
 
 nine, nenn; — teen, — ge^tt; — ty, — gig. 
 no, adj., fein; — one, — body, teitier, 
 
 niemanb; — thing, ni(i)tg; adv.,-am\. 
 noble, ebcl; —man, ber (Sbeltnann (pi. 
 
 425). 
 none, pi., teinc. 
 nonsense, ber Uufmn. 
 nor, (neither).. ., (tt)et)er).,.nOd^, 
 
3S6 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 north, ber 9fotb(en). 
 
 not, nic^t; — yet, no(^ ni(5t ; — any, 
 
 one, fein, feiiter; — anything, nidjtS. 
 nothing, nid)t8. 
 now, (time) je^t; nun (485) ; adj., (of 
 
 now) je^ig. 
 numberj bie 3a5t (/''• -en) ; (amount) 
 
 bie SInjof)!. 
 nursery, bie Sinberfiufie. 
 nut, bie S«u6 {pi. H). 
 
 O. 
 
 O, oh, Of)! acE|! 
 
 oath, ber (Sib; on — , eibtic^. 
 
 obey, gef|orc^En {dat.), 
 
 obliged, Betbunbcn (/a?-^. Berbinben); 
 
 to be — ed, (must) miiffen (472). 
 occur, Bot=fonraien (fein, 232) ; (to the 
 
 mind) ein^faUen (fein, 247, dat.). 
 o'clock, mt (hour) ; what — ? luie 
 
 Btcl U'^r ? at two — , um jwei Ul)r. 
 odious, bet^agt {part, adj.). 
 of. Boil, (out of) an?, (among) nnter, 
 
 all dat.; (on) an, iiBeV {ace.) ; or by 
 gen. case. 
 
 off, ob, baBon. 
 
 offer, bteten (241), an»bieten. 
 
 office, ba8 atmt. 
 
 officer, bev Offijicr' (//. -e). 
 
 often, oft, iifterS. 
 
 old, alt; grow—, altera (214). 
 
 olive-tree, ber Olbaiim. 
 
 oi», (place) anf, (time) an {dat.) ; (di- 
 rection) aitf, iiber {ace.) ; — foot, ju 
 gufi; adv., fort, bin. 
 
 once^inmal (401, 2); — more, noc^ — . 
 
 one, fli^'., ein; (in counting, ««aA) einS; 
 indef. pron., einer, man (460) ; — 
 another, einanber; every — . (ein) 
 iebcr; no — , teiner. 
 
 only, adj.^ einjig; adv., aUcin', niir; 
 
 not — . . . but, nid&t nur . . . fonbern. 
 open, adj., offen; v., offnen (212), ouf= 
 
 madden. 
 opinion, bie SKeinnng; to be of — , 
 
 ineinen, ber ajieinung fein. 
 opportune, gclegen. 
 oppress, unterbriicfen. 
 or, ober. 
 
 orchard, ber Saumgarten. 
 order, -v., (person) befebten (232); 
 
 (thing) befteHen; «., ber S3efef)l, bie 
 
 Sefiettung; in — to.nm ... gu (281). 
 other, anber; each — , one an — , ein» 
 
 anber (indeel.) ; (one more), nod) 
 
 ein. 
 ought, foKen {modal, 472). 
 our, unfer; pron., ours, unf(e)rer, un= 
 
 f(e)rig; ourselves (j»^'.), IBir felbfl; 
 
 {obj. reflex.), un8 (felbft). 
 
 out, adv., au8, ^eraua, ;^inau8, (out- 
 side) brau^en; .— of, prep., ou8, 
 ouger {dat:). 
 
 outside, adv., braugen; — of, prep., 
 anger {dat.), ougerbalb {gen.) ; n., 
 bas tugere (158), bie augenfcite. 
 
 over, adv., liber, ^ers, ^in=iiber; (past) 
 Boriiber> Borbei; prep., iXb^x {dat, 
 ace.). 
 
 overcome, iibertulnben (231). 
 
 owe, fc&utbig fein (438). 
 
 ox, ber 0159(e). 
 
 page, bie ©cite. 
 
 pain, ber ©d^merj (loi); to give — , 
 
 niele tf)un (437, 4). 
 paint, maten; — er, beraDfaler {pi.—); 
 
 — ing, ba8 Oemolbe (//. — ). 
 pair, bo6 $aar (431, «■.). 
 pale, bleic^; turn — , erb(eid)en (246). 
 paper'^b«8 ^O^Jtev'; news— bie ^'ituitg, 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 357 
 
 parable, bie !Pora'beI; ba8 Oteid^niS 
 
 pi. -ffe). 
 parade, bie $aro'be. . 
 pardon, Berjeiljen (247, dat) ; n., bie 
 
 SBer^ei^irag ; I beg — , ic^ bitte 
 
 urn IB. 
 parents, bie Sltern. 
 part, (divide) teilen; (separate) fd)ei= 
 
 ben (247; also intr., fein) ; «., ber 
 
 SEeil; on the — (of), Bon ©eiten 
 
 (106) ; for my — , meinerfeits (399). 
 partly, teilS (gen. adv.). 
 pass, (away) bergeijen (248) ; (happen) 
 
 Borgc^en; (by) Borbei^ge'^en (a/Zlein); 
 
 (time) 3u=bringen (254). 
 passage, bie Uberfatjvt. 
 past, adj., Bergangen (part, adj.); 
 
 ai^., Borbei; «., the — , bie 25ergan» 
 
 gen^eit; of the — (adj.), Bor^erig ; 
 
 half _ — , eic. (305.) 
 
 pastor, ber ^JSaftor (pi. -en, 117). 
 patience, bie ®ebulb. 
 patient, gebulbig; «., ber patient'. 
 pay, bejatjlen; (for, penalty) biigcn; 
 
 — a visit, einen 58e|ui^ mac^en. 
 peace, ber griebe (gen. -n3, pi. -n). 
 peasant, ber 33auer (gen. -g, //. -n). 
 pen, bie geber. , 
 penalty, bie ©trafe ; under — of 
 
 death, bei Sebenaftrofe. 
 people, ba8 SSoH (coll.), bie Seute 
 
 (pi.) ; indef., man (460). 
 permission, bie SrIaubniS (pi. -ffe). 
 persuade, iiberreben (212). 
 petrify, Bevfteineflt (214). 
 physician, ber Stvjt (//. ^e). 
 pick, lefen (243); — out, au84efen; — 
 
 up, anf=^ebert (242). 
 picture, bo8 S3ilb; — -book, ba« SSiI= 
 
 berbnc^; — -gallery, (painting) bi? 
 
 @etnatbeg(iUerie', 
 
 pin, bie ©tetfnabel. 
 
 pit, bie ©rube. 
 
 place, K., ber Ort (pi. 425); v., ftellcn; 
 
 (lay) legen. 
 plan, ber *pian (pi. -^e or -e). 
 plant, K., bie ^Pflanje; v., ijffanjen. 
 play, «., bag @})iel; v., f})ielen; to lose 
 
 by — , Berf):ieten. 
 pleasant, angene^m. 
 please, gefallen (247, dat.); (pray), 
 
 bitte; if you — , gefaUigft (sup. adv.). 
 pleasure, bo8 SBergniigen; (joy) bie 
 
 gvcube. 
 plough, K., ber 5Pf(ug (//. ''e); v., 
 
 ^Jpgen. 
 poem, ba8 Oebi^t. 
 poet, ber $oet, ber ®id)ter. 
 Joetry, bie *}5oefie', bie Siii^tung. 
 polite, l)bf(i(i). 
 political, politiji^. 
 poor, orm; (quality) fd^Ied)t. 
 porter (hotel), ber §ougfucd)t. 
 portmanteau, ber Soffer (pi. — ). 
 post-office, bie $oft (//. -en). 
 potato, bie ^artoffel. 
 pound, ba8 $funb (312). 
 pour, giegen (241). 
 power, bie SJiadit (pi. ^e). 
 praise, 6-., loben, Jiteijen (247) ; «., baS 
 
 Sob; to my — , mir ju Sobe. 
 pray, beten (212); (I) — •, (id^) bitte. 
 prayer, bag Oebet'. 
 preach, })vebigen; — er, ber ^JSrebiger. 
 precious, !oftbar, fbfttid); — stone, 
 
 ber @belftein. 
 prefer, Bot-jieben (241); see gern (485). 
 present, «., (gift) ba8®e|(f)enf; (time) 
 
 bie ©egentBort ; adj., gegenhjartig; 
 
 (place) anhjefenb; at — , je^t; pl the 
 
 — iefeig- 
 president, bev.^roftbent'. 
 
358 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 prick, jied^en (232). 
 
 pride, btr ©totj. 
 
 prince, bn ^rinj, bet giirfl {ph. -en). 
 
 print, btudcn; — ing-office, bie Srurf= 
 
 evei'. 
 prison, ba8 ©effingitiS; — er, ber @e= 
 
 fangMte {part. noun). 
 privilege, baS S5orreii)t {pi. -e). 
 probable, ioa^rfd^einlid); idiom., 465. 
 procession, bet 3Iufsug (//. "c). 
 professor, bet *Profeffot (117). 
 profit, ber SJu^en; (money) ber @e= 
 
 ffiinn; v., nii^eii {dat.). 
 progress, bie gottjd)titte (//.)■ 
 prohibition, baS SSerbot {pi. -e). 
 project, v.,(]nt over) ubet^jle^etl (287). 
 promise, tierfptcd)en (232) ; also n. ; 
 
 — ing {part, adj.), ^offnimgSBoH. 
 
 proof, bet Seroeia. 
 
 propose, Bor=fd|lagen (249) ; intr., fici) 
 
 Bor»nel)men (232). 
 proverb, bet ©ptu^ {pi. "e), baS 
 
 ©ptidjiBort {pi. "er). 
 Prussia, (ba8)$teu6en; — n,))reu6ifcf); 
 
 «., ber *P:feu6e. 
 pull, giel)en (241); —out, I)erau8= — . 
 punishment, bie ©ttafe. 
 pupil, bet @d)uler; {/em.) bie — in. 
 push, {(^ieben (241); (strike) ftofieu 
 
 (248). 
 put, (set) fe^en (213) ; (place) ftcHcn; 
 
 (lay) legen; — off, oerf^iebcn (241); 
 
 — on (clothes) on»jieI)en (241); — 
 
 out (a light) au84o((^en (242, a). 
 
 quarter, baS S5iettel. 
 queen, bie Sbnigiii {pi. -nen). 
 question, bie ^xa^t] it is the — , eS 
 
 frogt ftd). 
 quick, (rapid) fd)nelj, 
 
 quiet, tu^ig, (liU; v., beru^tgett. 
 quire, bci8 Sui^ (^Papier, 312) ; (choir) 
 
 bet S^or {pi. "e, 426). 
 quite, gattj, butc^nuS. 
 
 railway, bte @i(enbo^n (//. -en); — 
 -station, bet i8at)nl)of {pi. ^e). 
 
 rain, n., bet 9Jegcn; v., regnen. 
 
 raisin, bie 9tojtne. 
 
 rank, ber SRang {pi. "e) ; (social) ber 
 @tonb (//. -^e). 
 
 ransack (plunder), ^jliiiiberit (214). 
 
 rapid, jd)nell, gefc^lDtnb. 
 
 reach, teid^eit; (attain) etreic^en. 
 
 read, te(en (243); — (aloud), Bot= 
 
 lefen; —ing, «., bie Sectu're, bas 
 
 Sefen. 
 ready, beteit; (finished) ferlig. 
 real, Wlrllid). 
 
 receive, empfangen (248), er^atten 
 
 (248) — usually things {get). 
 
 recent, ncu; adv., — ly, neuttd|. 
 
 recollect, ftd) befmnen (232, gen.). 
 
 recover, intr., genefcn (fein, 24J). 
 
 rector, bet SReftor (//. -en, 117). 
 
 red, rot; — as fire, feuettot. 
 
 redden, ^»-.,toten; intr., erroten (214). 
 
 redound, gereic^en {dat.). 
 
 refresh, erfrifd)cn (213). 
 
 refuse, (deny) Berweigctn (214); (re- 
 ject) ab4ii^Iagen (249). 
 
 refute, miberlegen (287). 
 
 regiment, bag 5Regimcnt' {pi. -er). 
 
 reign, tegic'ten (215); «., bie 9Jegic'» 
 rung. 
 
 rejoice, intr., fii^ freuen {gen. 434) ; 
 or impers., eS freut {ace, 292) ; tr., 
 erfreueu. 
 
 relate, (tell) erjat)Ifn; be — ed, fid) Ber» 
 Ijolten (248); (akin) BcvBpanbt fetn, 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 359 
 
 relation, baS SSerl^altniS (//. -ffe); 
 
 (kinsman) ein SBerttJanbtcr. 
 relieve, ju §itfe fommen {dat., 437) ; 
 
 (of) ent^eBen (242), entlebigen (both 
 
 gen., 434). 
 rely, ftii) tiertaffen (on, auf, ace). 
 remain, bleiben (fein, 247); — ing, 
 
 iibrig (adj.). 
 remarkable, nterfttJiirbig. 
 remember, gebenfen (254) ; fid^ erilt« 
 
 nern (214) ; bot/i gen., 434. 
 remit, (send) iiberfenben (254) ; (let 
 
 off) etlaflen (434)- 
 reply, entgegncn (212, dat.). 
 request, v., bitten (243) ; »., bie 
 
 SSitte. 
 resemble, gteic^en (246, dot.). 
 resent, rttii^en. 
 resound, eridjaUen (242). 
 respect, ac^ten (212). 
 result, l}erou8»fomnten (jein, 232). 
 retire, aB»treten (jein, 243); fic^ ju= 
 
 riidsjiclieit (241). [fe^r. 
 
 return, o., juvuWeljren; n., bie 5Riid= 
 reward, belo'^n'en; n., bie SeIof|nung. 
 Rhenish, r^einifd). 
 Rhine, ber SRljein. 
 ribbon, baS SBanb (pi. "er, 424). 
 rich, rcid^. 
 riddle, ba8 Diotfel. 
 ride, rciten (246, atix., 298) ; take a — , 
 
 fpajieren — ; — r, ber SRettcr. 
 rifle, n., bic SQixi)\t. 
 right, rec^t ; — hand, bie 8le(5te; on, 
 
 to the — . red^tS ; «., ba« 3ied)t; to 
 
 be — , gfted^t ^aben. 
 righteous, gerei^t, veif|tf(^affen, 
 ring, 71., ber 3ting. 
 ring, v., (resound) flingeu (231); (bell) 
 
 Jtingeln (214); — ing of bells, baS 
 
 ©etaut. 
 
 ripe, reif. 
 
 rise, (get up) auf»ftel)en (249) ; (go up) 
 
 auf=geI)Ctt (248) ; (from the dead) 
 
 oufetftefien (289) ; all fein. 
 river, ber glug (pL -^e). 
 road, ber SBeg, bie Sanbftrage. 
 roast, Broten (248) ; »., ber SBroten. 
 robber, ber 3iouBer. 
 rock, »., ber gets, gelfen (loi). 
 roof, ba8 Sad). 
 room, (space) ber 9Jaiim; (of a house) 
 
 bag 3tetnti-'- 
 rose, bie 9{o|e. 
 row, n., bie 9iei^e. 
 row, v., rubern (214). 
 royal, foniglic^. 
 run, rennctt (254), laufen (248) ; botk 
 
 aux., 298 ; — after, \\ad)= — (dat.); — 
 
 off, batJon= — ; — up, l)erott= (loufen); 
 
 — away (from) etttlailfen {dat.). 
 rush, ftiirgett (213). 
 Russia, (bQ?) 3?u6tanb. 
 
 S. 
 sack, (bag), ber @orf [pi. -"e). 
 sad, traurig. 
 sailor, ber SKatrofe. 
 sake, for the — , Iregen, urn . . . WiHen 
 
 [gen., 280) ; for my — , nteinet — , etc. 
 same (the), berfclbe (208) ; all the — , 
 ■ ganj berjelBe, einerlei; at the — time^ 
 
 jugleid^. [aBcnb. 
 
 Saturday, ber @am«tag, ber @otin= 
 sausage, bie ffiBiirft {pi. -^e). 
 save, retten (212) ; (spare) fparen. 
 saving, jporfam. [§eilanb. 
 
 saviour, ber 5Retter; the Saviour, ber 
 Saxony, (baS) ©adjfen. 
 say, fageii; be said to, foUen (472). 
 scholar, (pupil) ber ©c^ijler; (learned) 
 
 ber ®e(el)rte (part. noun). 
 
36o 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 school, bie ©c^ule; — room, bie @(^ul» 
 
 ftiific; boys' — , bie Snabenj^ule. ' 
 scold, f^elteu (232). 
 scream, fc^teien (247); «., ba8 ®e= 
 
 fi^rei ; or infin. noun. 
 sea, X>m SUtcer (//. -e), bie @ee (pi. 
 
 -cii, 426) ; —sick, feell'ont. 
 seal, «., bos ©iegel; v., fiegein, Ber|ie= 
 
 ge(n (214). 
 season (of the year), bie Sa^regjeit. 
 seat, n., bet @i^; v., fe^en; to take a 
 
 — , fid) ie(3en (213). 
 second (the), bcr gtoeite, ber anbere 
 
 (of two). 
 see, fe^en (243) ; call to — (visit), be« 
 
 fitc^eii. 
 seek, fuc^en. 
 seem, ff^einen (247), bor^ominen (feiu 
 
 232). 
 seize, greifen (246). 
 self, (empk.) felbfl, felber; (object) the 
 
 refl.prons. (434). 
 sell, Bcrtoufett. 
 send, fc^iden, fenben (254) ; — for, 
 
 (person) fotitmeiilaffcn; (thing) ^olea 
 
 laffeit. 
 sentiment, bie ®eftnnung. 
 servant, (man) ber Sieiicr; (woman) 
 
 bie ©ienerin; — -girl, bieSMngb (pi. 
 
 "e); body of — s, bie ®ienetf(^aft. 
 serve, bienen (dat.) ; (wait upon) be= 
 
 bieneit (ace.). 
 service, ber ©ietifi. 
 set, tr., \t%t\\ (213) ; intr., (go down) 
 
 unteivgel)en (jeiii, 248); — across, 
 
 over, ubei;4efeen (287). 
 settle, tr., (arrange) orbnen; (quiet) 
 
 bcni^igen. 
 seven, ficben; — ty, fie6(cn)3ig ; — 
 
 — times, fiebenmal. [mnl8. 
 
 several, lltcljrcre (157); — times, ine^r= 
 
 severe, (strict) fireng ; (grievous) 
 
 fcfjsuer. 
 shake, fc^iitteln (214). 
 shall, modal : \oUm (472) ; as Jut. 
 
 aux., 173. 
 sharp, f(i)arf. 
 she, fie, e8 (452, 457). 
 shear, f(^eren (242). ' 
 sheep, bo8 ©d^of (//. -e). 
 sheet (of paper), ber Sogen (431). 
 shepherd, ber ©djafer; — ess, bie 
 
 ©djfiferin. 
 sheriff, ber ©d^eriff (Eng.). 
 shine, fc^einen (247) ; (glitter) glanjcn 
 
 (213)- 
 ship, baS @il)iff (pi. -t). 
 shirt, bag §emb (gen. -eg, pi. -en, 
 
 105). 
 shoe, ber @d)«l) (pi. -c). 
 shoot, f^iegen (241). 
 shop, ber Soben (pi. "en, m- — ). 
 shore, bo§ Ufer. 
 short, turj; also adv. ;—\y (time), botb, 
 
 in fnrjem; — ness, bie ^'iirje. 
 show, «., bie ©i^ou; v., jeigen, meijen 
 
 (247), (guide) ful)ren. 
 shut, fdjUegen (241), ju^madieu, 
 sick, Iranf. 
 side, bie ©eite; on this, that — of, 
 
 bie8|eit(9), jenfcit(8) (gen. 280). 
 siege, bie-Setogerung. 
 sight, ber Stnblid, bie ainrtc^t (//. -en) ; 
 
 in — of, anftd)tig (gen.). 
 silent, fd)ltieigenb (part. adj.). 
 silver, boS ©itber; adj., of — , filbern. 
 sin, bie ©iinbe; — ner, bcr ©iinbcr. 
 since, prep., feit (dat.) ; conj., (time) 
 
 (cit, feitbem; (reasdn) bo (486). 
 sing, fingen (231). 
 sink, ftnteu (fein, 231). 
 sir, §err, ntciii §crr (428). 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 361 
 
 sister, bie ©d^iBefler. 
 
 sit, fifeett (243) ; — down, ftd) je^eti; 
 
 — ting-room, baS SJBotjnjimmer. 
 six, (cd)8; — th (the), berfec^fte;— part, 
 
 bas @e(i)8tel. 
 skin, K., bie §aut (//. -"e) ; (pelt) bas 
 
 gett (//. -c); z/., fd)inbEn (231). 
 sky, ber §immel; — blue, t)inraiel= 
 
 b(au. 
 sledge, ber ©c^Iitten. 
 sleep, v., fd^lofen (248) ; — ing-room, 
 
 b»S ©djlafjimmer; »., ber ©li^Iaf; 
 
 — y, fc^lafrig; —less, jd)lofto8; go to 
 
 — , ein^c^Iafen (fein). 
 slipper, ber ipontoffet (^^».-8,//.-n). 
 small, tlein. 
 smile, ISc^ctn (214). 
 sneak, jd^tefc^en (246). 
 snore, fc^nar(i)en. 
 snow, n., ber ©c^nee; v., fii^tieieti; — 
 
 white, fc^neettieig. 
 so, fo (485) ; (then) atjo. 
 soap, bie ©eife. 
 society, bie ®ejetlf(^aft, 
 soldier, ber ©olbot'. 
 some, einige (//.) ; Wetii^ea {sin^-) ; 
 
 as part. adj. often not transl. ; 
 
 body, one, jemonb; — thing, etrooS; 
 
 —times, jumeilen; — where, irgenbs 
 
 nio ; — day, einjl, 
 son, ber ®ol)n {pi. ^e); — in-law, ber 
 
 @d)n)ieger|ol)n. 
 song, ber ©efang (pL'^t); bo8 Steb. 
 soon, balb; comp., e^er; (earlier) fvii= 
 
 Ijer; (rather) lieber; as — (as), Jobalb. 
 Sophia, ©op^ie (gen. -eng). 1 
 sorry, betriibt (part, adj.) ; I am — , 
 
 c8 tljiit tnir letb (437). 
 sort, bieSorte; what — of, was fiir. 
 soul, bie @eele. , 
 sound, u., tUngen (231) ; »-. ber ,SIang. 
 
 sour, jauer. 
 
 South, ber ©Ub(en); —em, fiibtid^; 
 
 —wards, fiibtDCirtS. 
 
 Spain, (baS) ©panien. 
 
 Spanish, fpanifd^. 
 
 spark, ber gunte (gen. -nS/pl.-V, 99). 
 
 speak, \pniien (232). 
 
 speech, bie ©pracfje; infn. «., bag 
 
 ©prec^en. 
 speed, bie (Site; — y, eilig. 
 spell, buii^ftabie'ren (215, li). 
 spend,(money) au8=geBen (243); (time) 
 
 Sii--bringen (254). 
 spin, fpinnen (232). 
 spite, ber SBiberwitte (99); in — of, 
 
 tro^ (gen. 280). 
 splendid, proi^tig. 
 spoil, Berberben (232). 
 sportsman, ber Soger. 
 spring, (jump) Ipringetl (231) ; (well) 
 
 qucUen (242), dotA aux. 298 ; «., ber 
 
 @)jrung (pl.'^t)\ bie Ouette; (sea- 
 son) ber grii^Iing. 
 sprout, v., fpriejjen (241). 
 square, (figure) baS SSieretf; (place) 
 
 ber !pia^ ("c); adj., BierecEtg. 
 stable, ber ©taU (pi. "e); —boy, ber 
 
 ©toMneii)t. 
 staff, ber ©tab (pi. ^e). 
 stair(s),bie j£re})l3e; up — , obeti; down 
 
 — , uttten, (motion) l)er=, ^in»unter. 
 stand, fte^en (249) ; (endure) 0U8= 
 
 I)alten (248) ; — by (help), beiftef)en 
 
 (dat.) ; — still (stop), fte^en biciben. 
 star, ber ©tern. 
 start, (depart) ab»fat)i.'en (fein, 249), 
 
 ab»reifen (fein, 213). 
 state, ber ©taot (gen. -ti,pl. en). 
 station, bie ©totion'; (house) bei 
 
 SSaf)nliof. 
 statue, bie S3iIb(oule. 
 
362 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 stay, Bleiben (fcin, 247); (a time) »er= 
 
 meilen. 
 steal, flel|ten (232). 
 steel, ber @ta^I; — pen, bic ©tal^l. 
 
 fcber; adj., ftoI)lErn. 
 step, -a., trcten (jeiti, 243); «., ber Sritt; 
 
 stair—, bie ©tufc. 
 stick, ber ©tod. 
 still, adj., ftill(e); adv., (time) no(!^; 
 
 (however) boct) (485). 
 stone, ber ©tein; of — , jleinern. 
 stoop (down), fi(^ biiden. 
 storm, ber Sturm (//. ^e) ; — y, fiur= 
 
 mift^. 
 story, (tale) bie (Sef^ic^te, bie ©age; 
 
 (of a house) ber ©tod (//. -"-e). 
 straight, rei^t, gerabe; — on, gerabe 
 
 aii8. 
 strange, (foreign) fretnb; (odd) fon= 
 
 berbar; «., — r, ber grembe (adj. n.). 
 stream, ber ©trotn (//. -^e); v., flri)= 
 
 men. 
 street, bic ©tra^e. 
 strength, bie ©tfirfe; v., fiSrlen. 
 strike, f ^lag en (249); (hit) trtff en (232) ; 
 
 (the mind), oufsfatten (247, dai.). 
 strong, flarl. 
 student, ber ©tubenf. 
 study, v., ftubie'ren (215); «., bo8 
 
 ©tubium (gen. -8, i»/., 118). 
 subject, ber Oegcnftanb (//. ■'e). 
 succeed, gelingen (231, impers. dat.) ; 
 
 (follow) fotgen (dat.). 
 such, fot(i)er; — a, eln told^er, folifi 
 
 ein(207); before adj., \o(^<i6). 
 sudden, pIo^tilf|. 
 
 suffer, tciben (246) ; (allow) erlaubcn. 
 suffice, geniigen, gcnug Jcin. 
 sufficient, genug, ^inrei^enb (part.). 
 sugar, ber ^Mdvc. 
 suite, bag ©efolge. 
 
 sum, bie ©umme. 
 
 summer, ber ©omnter. 
 
 summit, ber Oipfel, bie Co^e. 
 
 sun, bie ©onne ; —shine, ber ©on^ 
 
 nenf(J^ein. 
 Sunday, ber ©onntag. 
 sunken (part, adj.), gejunfen. 
 superior, iiberlegen; — to (dat.). 
 suppose, on^ne^tnen (232); idiom, 
 
 see 465; — (that), angenommen, ge= 
 
 ?e^t (480). 
 sure, ftdier, gewife adv., — ly, getoig; 
 
 boct), jo, hjo^t (485). 
 surrender, tr., iibergeben; intr., fid) 
 
 crgeben (243). 
 sweet, fiig. 
 
 swell, fc^nictten (242; intr., fein). 
 swim, fi^njimmen (232; aux., 298). 
 swing, fc^vuingen (231). 
 Swiss, adj., jii^ioeisertfc^; «., ber 
 
 ©i^meijer; /, bie —in. 
 Switzerland, bie ©d^hjeij (416). 
 sword, ba8 ©d^Wert, ber ®egen. 
 
 table, ber %\\6), bie %<x\A. 
 tailor, ber @ii)neiber. 
 take, ne^men (232); — from, dat. 
 pers.; — off (clothes), OUg^ijlel^en 
 
 (241) ; — place, flatt^fiubcn (379); — 
 
 a drive, ride, walk (see these words). 
 talk, ft)re(^en (232) ; — of, beftjre^en; 
 
 «., bag Oejprfid^. 
 tall, l)0(i);" (person) grog, 
 task, bie Slnfgabe. 
 taste, jc^meden; (try) Jjrobieren (215); 
 
 «., ber ®efd)mQd. 
 tea, ber %iitt. 
 
 teach, leljren (442) ; — er, ber Se^rer. 
 tear, reigen (246) ; — to pieces, jer^ 
 
 reigen. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 363 
 
 tell, fagen; (a story) er3al)len; — a 
 
 lie, liigeii (242). 
 temptation, bie SJerfiic^ung. 
 ten, je^n; the — th, ber je^nte; — 
 
 -fold, ge^nfai^. 
 testimony, (testimonial) baS StVLQ^ 
 
 ni8 (//. -ffe). 
 than, al6; rarefy benil (449, 2). 
 thank, bonfeti {dat.) ; «., — s, bcr 
 
 ®ant. 
 that, dem., ber, jetier, biejev (456) ; rel., 
 
 ber, mclt^er (459) ; ccmj., bag ; in 
 
 order — , bomit (468, c). 
 the, ber {de/, art., 416) ; adv. correl., 
 
 the...the, je...befto(334). 
 thee, bid) \acc^, bir {dat:). 
 
 theft, bet ®iebftaf)t (^^«. -8). 
 
 their, i^r; — s, i^rcr, bev i^rigc. 
 
 them, fie (ace), i^nen (dat.) ; «?- dem., 
 457 ; -^selves {emph.), \tVa\i, felber; 
 (r?/Zr;i:.) ft^ (felbft). 
 
 then, (time) bann, bomatS ; (infer- 
 ence) benn, alfo. 
 
 theology, bie E^eologie'. 
 
 there, bort, bci {in comp., 184) ; exple- 
 tive, — (is, are), e8 (294); adj., borttg, 
 
 therefore, be8l)alb, ba^er, otfo. 
 
 they, fte, or dem. (457). 
 
 thief, ber SieB {pi. -e). [nigc. 
 
 thine, adj., bein; pron., bciner,ber bei= 
 
 thing, bag ®ing (//--e); any— ,some- 
 — , etmos; not any — , nid)t8. 
 
 think, ben!cn (254); — of, {as object), 
 gen. or on (acc^; (opinion) Bon {dat^; 
 (believe), glouBen (437, 2). 
 
 third, adj., (the) ber britte; «., bag 
 Srittet (part). 
 
 thirst, «., ber SDurfi; v., bitrilen (or 
 burften); — -y,. burftig; I am — , eg 
 biirftet miii) (293). 
 
 thirty, breigig. 
 
 this,- biefer, ber; in comp., t)ier (401). 
 
 thou, bn (186). 
 
 though, adv., bod|, jeboi^; conj. (al- 
 though) obgleid), wenn . . . au(^ (485). 
 
 thought, ber Oebanfe {gen. -nS, //. 
 
 . ~f/ 99)> — of> on {ace). 
 
 thousand, (a), taujenb. 
 
 threaten, broken {dat^. 
 
 three, brei; — cornered, — edig; — 
 times, — mat; of — kinds, — erlet. 
 
 thresh, brefi^en (242). 
 
 throne, ber S^von (//. -e, or -en). 
 
 through, adv., bnrd) (287); prep., 
 bur(^ {ace!) ; (motive) aug {dat.). 
 
 thunder, ber ®onner; v., bonnern. 
 
 Thursday, ber ©onnergtag. 
 
 thus, fo (485) ; alfo (inference). 
 
 thy, bein. 
 
 ticket, bag SSiUet' {pi. -e). 
 
 till, prep., Big, big auf {ace.) ; conj., big, 
 
 big bo§. 
 
 time, bie '^ni {pi. -en) ; (counting) 
 bag SDtat, in comp., =mal ; of that 
 — , adj., bamalig ; — table, ber 
 ga^rtjtan; at (what) ~, nm {ace). 
 
 timid, furc^t[ani. 
 
 tired, miibe; — to death, tobmiibe. 
 
 tiresome, tnu^jam, tangttjeilig. 
 
 to, ju; (place) nad) {dat); on, auf, big 
 {ace.) ; or by dat. case; before injin., 
 gu (urn . . . gu). 
 
 together, gujommen. 
 
 too, adv., gn; conj., (also) flUC^. 
 
 tooth, ber 3i^n (//. "e); — ache, bag 
 3ol^nttie^. 
 
 top, bie §oI)e, ber (Sipfet. 
 
 torment, quoleu. 
 
 tovyards, noc^ {dat.), gegen {ace). 
 
 tower, ber Eurnt {pi. "e). 
 
 town, bie ©tab* {pi. "e); — -coun- 
 cillor, ber ©tobtrat. 
 
364 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 train, ber 3ug (pl.^e); express-—, 
 ber ©c^nelljug. 
 
 transitory, Bergangtid). 
 
 translate, iiberfe^en (287). 
 
 travel, reijen {aux., 298); «., — er, 
 ber 9iei|enbe (pari. «.)■ 
 
 tree, ber iBaum (//. ''e). 
 
 trip, (journey) bie SRetye. 
 
 trouble, «., (pains) bie 9Kii{)e; (afflic- 
 tion) bie Sriibjal (//. -e). 
 
 trousers, bie Seinfleiber (//.)■ 
 
 true, Wa\jx; (faithful) treu; aiiv., — ly, 
 njatjrliii), h)a^rl)aftig; jwar. 
 
 trust, trauen (dat.). 
 
 truth, bie SBafir^eit. 
 
 try, Berfuc^en; (test), proBie'ren. 
 
 Tuesday, ber ©ienStag. 
 
 turn, bre^cti, IBenben (254); — in, 
 etn=fc]^ren ; — out, geraten (fein, 
 248); — pale, erbleid^en (246). 
 
 twelve, JtDoIf. 
 
 twenty, jltianjig; — second, ber gBDei= 
 unb— fie. 
 
 twice, jreeimat. 
 
 two, 5tt)et, beibe (460). 
 U. 
 
 umbrella, ber SJegenfi^irm. 
 
 uncle, ber O^eim. 
 
 under, adv., unten, unter (287) ; prep., 
 
 linter {dai., ace). 
 understand, Bcrftcf|en (249). 
 undertake, unternel)nien (232). 
 undress (one's self), ftd) auS^jie^en. 
 unfavorable, ungiinftig (to, dat.). 
 unfortunate, ungliictlid^; as adverb, 
 
 usually, — crBJcije (399). 
 unhappy (same as preceding). 
 universe, bo8 SBeltatt (gen. —8). 
 university, bie UniBerfttdt'. 
 unjust, iiiigercctit. 
 unknown, unbefaiint (part, adj.). 
 
 unmanageable, unlen!fant. 
 
 unripe, uiireif. 
 
 until, prep., btS, 618 auf (ace); conj^ 
 
 bi8, bi8 bag. 
 unwell, unlBO^J. 
 unworthy, unl:)itrbig. 
 up, adv., auf, berauf, ^inauf; — hill, 
 
 bergan'; — stairs, oben. 
 upon, prep., ouf, fiber (dat., ace). 
 upper (the), bev obere; —most, ber 
 
 oberfte (158). 
 us, un8 {dat. ace). 
 use, brauc^eit (rarely gen. ) ; — up, 
 
 Berfirau(i)en; make — of, ftd| bebie= 
 
 nen (gen.). 
 useful, nii^Iid^ (dat.). 
 usual, geiBii^ntid). 
 utmost (the), ber ougerflc (158). 
 utter, v., fiufsern (214). 
 
 vacation-ramble, bie ^etictireife. 
 
 vain, eitel; in — , Bergeben8. 
 
 valley, ba8 S^ol. 
 
 value, ber SBert. 
 
 vanish, fi^lBittben (fein, 231). 
 
 vanity, bie (Sitetfeit. 
 
 very, fe^r; abs. sup., f)OCt)ft, fillfjerft. 
 
 victor, ber Sieger; — ious, fiegreid). 
 
 view, (sight) bie 3lu8fld)t; (opinion) 
 
 bie a(i:fid)t (pi. -en), 
 village, ba8 ®orf; — community, bie 
 
 ®orffd^aft. 
 virtue, bie Sugenb. 
 virtuous, tngenb^aft. 
 visit, befud^en; «., ber 93efu^. 
 voice, bie ©timme. 
 volume, ber Sanb (pi. "e, 426). 
 vowel, ber S5o!aI' (pi. -e); — change, 
 
 ber ablaut; — modification, ber Um« 
 
 taut. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 3^5 
 
 w. 
 
 wait, IBtiVten (212); — for, — rarely 
 gen., 434 ; usually aitf {acc.)\ — ing- 
 
 room, bcr 2Barte(aat ; «., — er, ber 
 
 wake (up), aiif=tDac[)en; /?-., vneilen. 
 walk, v., gel)en (fein, 248) ; go to — , 
 
 fpajie'ren — ; «., ber ©(jajier'ganfl. 
 wall, bie SUioiter; (of a room) bie 
 
 SBottb (//. H). 
 want.w., braui^en, bebiirfen (261, ^^».) ; 
 
 «., (need) ba8 SebiirfniS; (lack) ber 
 
 iKanget (an, dat.). 
 war, ber j?rieg. 
 wardrobe, bie Oarberobe. 
 warm, ttiarm; I am — , ntir ijl — . 
 wash, ttiafd)etl (249) ; also reflex. 
 watch, madden; tr., Demadfien; «., bie 
 
 SDBo(i)e; (time) bie Ut)r (//. -en). 
 water, baS SBaffer; v., iDciffern (214), 
 
 begiegen (241). 
 wave, »., bie SBelle; v., we^en; tr., 
 
 fc^tringen (231). 
 way, ber SSeg; (manner) bie SBcife. 
 we, h)ir. 
 weak, fc^Wadi. 
 
 wealthy, reic^, Bermiigenb {part. adj). 
 wear, trogcn (249). 
 weary, miibe, ermiibet (part. adj.). 
 weather, baS SBetter; — cock, ber 
 
 Sffietterljaljn {pi. "e). 
 Wednesday, ber SKittWodi (388). 
 week, bie SBoc^e. 
 weep, raeinen. 
 
 weigh, iDiegen (241) ; tr., hjcigen (242). 
 welcome, milltommen. 
 well, adj., ttiof)!; adv., gut, Xooijl (486). 
 what, inter., rel. pron. WaS ; inter. 
 
 adj., wetc^er ; —ever, alles lt)a«, 
 hjoa . . . ouii^ (459). 
 
 when, inter., roann ; indef., itienn; 
 
 def., nis, ba (486) ; — ever, roenn. 
 whence, rooI)et, or sep. (483). 
 where. Wo; {in coinp., before vowels, 
 
 roor, 222). 
 whether, conj., ob. 
 which, inter., ttjeli^er; rel., roeld)er, 
 
 ber (234). 
 while, n., bie SBeilc; conj., (whilst) 
 
 roa^renb, inbent, inbeffen (486). 
 whip, bie *Pcitf(^e. 
 whistle, ^)feifcn (246). 
 white, ttjei^. 
 
 Whitsuntide, ^^fingften {pi). 
 who, inter., toer; rel., melc^ir, ber 
 
 (234); (he) — , — ever, (Der, Wer... 
 
 aucEi (459)- 
 whole, gang (144); n., ba8 ©ange. 
 whose, inter., roeffen ; rel., beffen, 
 
 beren (234). 
 why, roariim, tneSljolb, tna8 (458). 
 wicked, BBfe. 
 v/ife, bie jjrau {pi. -eu). 
 wilderness, bie SBiifte, bie SBilbni?. 
 will, «., bcr SBille {gen. -nS, pi. -n, 
 
 99) ; (last) bnS Seftoment'; v., ttio(="~ 
 
 ten (261 ; modal, 472) ; as fut., 173. 
 willing, tniUig; to be — , aBitteii? jein. 
 win, getoinnen (232). 
 wind, bcr SBinb. 
 wind, toiuben (231); — up (a clock), 
 
 auf«giel|en (241). 
 window, bo? gciifter. 
 wine, ber 2Bein; — glass, ba8 SBcin« 
 
 gta8. 
 wing, ber gliigel ; — ed, gcfliigelt. 
 William, SBilljetm. 
 winter, bcr SSSinter. 
 wise, toeifc. 
 wish, «.. ber 2Bimf(!^; v., toiinj^en. 
 
366 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 with, (together) mtt, fommt, bei ((&<.) ; 
 
 (means) butd) {ace). 
 within, adv., innen, barin ; pre^., 
 (time) binnen {i/ai.) ; (place) inner* 
 
 l)0lb {g-en.). 
 without, adv., braugen ; pre^., o^ne 
 
 (ace), ojiger {liat.), aitfeer^atb igen.). 
 woman, boS SBeib, bie grau (//. -en), 
 wonder, ;;., baS ilBunber (//. — ) ; v., 
 
 fid) ttiuubknT^i^viiber^ofc.). 
 wood, (material) bo6 -^otj ; (place) 
 
 ber SBalb (//. -^er); —en, botjent. 
 woodman (cutter), ber ^oljbauer (//. 
 
 -)• 
 word, bo8 aSort (pi. "er, -e, 425). 
 work, K., bag SBerf (//. — c), bie airbeit; 
 
 v., arbetten (212); — people, bie 
 
 airbeitsleute ( pi. 426). 
 world, bie iSSelt {pi. -en), 
 worm, ber aBurm {pi. "er). 
 worth, adj., Wett {g^en.); — while, 
 
 ber SKii^e roert. 
 wound, «., bie SSunbe; v., berttjunben. 
 wreath, ber Sronj {pi. ^e). 
 write, fc^retben (247). 
 writer (author), ber @(f)riftf}fller. 
 
 writing, n., bie @(i)rift {pi. -en); in 
 
 — , f^tiftti^. 
 wrong, adv., unredjt; «., bag Unred^t; 
 
 to be — , Unred^t ^aben. 
 
 Y. 
 
 year, bag Sa^r (//. -e). 
 
 yellow, gelb. 
 
 yeoman, ber fflauer {g^en. -i,pl. -n). 
 
 yes, jo. 
 
 yesterday, geftern; oi^'., of — , gejirig; 
 
 day before — , Borgeftem. 
 yet, (time) nod); not — , nocb nid^t; 
 
 (however) bod^, jebod^ (485). 
 yield, toei(i)en (246), nad^^geben (243); 
 
 both dat. 
 yonder, adj., jener; adv., bort. 
 you, (//.) ibr: {sing) bu; {s. or pi.) 
 
 @ie (189, }iote). 
 young, jung; — man, ber Siingling; 
 
 — lady, bag graulein. 
 your, yours, adj. and pron. {see you) ; 
 
 — self, selves {emph.), felbfl; or refl. 
 
 objects (454). 
 youth, bie 3ugenb; (young man), 
 
 ber Siingling. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 1. Plural of IsTouns. 
 
 See Foot-Note, p. 46. The following lists are added foi 
 reference : — 
 
 1. Strong I. (a) The following masculines modify the vowel (§ 76). 
 ®er 3ltjfel, Slcter, Sobcii, Snibcr, ©arteij, §afe«, §ammet, §ammer, Jpanbel, 
 aRongel, SKantel, 'UlaQd, Ofen, ©attef, @d)ncftiet, ©d)mager, Sater, S5ogel. 
 
 (A) Variant are : ®er gobcn, (Sraben, Saben, Dfabcl, @(^abe(n), Sffiagen ; 
 and the neuter, baS Sagcr — with a few others, rarely, as ber fflogeil, ber 
 2>Jogen,etc. j^, ^,^^ , — ;_ 
 
 2. Strong II. (a) The folloMfflgmasculihe moi)(6syllables do not modify 
 the vowel (§ 83, *) : ®ct Stat, SIttr, Sitrm, iBorb, iBorn, ©ocl)t, ®oId^, Srud 
 (but imcoi^p. ?lu6briicEe, etc.), ^oxiu @rab, @urt, §aud^, §uf^^§unb, SacfiS^"' 
 Stmt, ilxiji, Woldi', ajJonb (SKonben = mont/is), $fab, <Por,npul8, <Pmitt, 
 '@cf|Uft, @(^H^, ©toff, Sag, 3"!! (inch), and a few others, with some of variant 
 usage (§ 424-s). 
 
 (b) But the following foreign masculines modify the vowel of the last 
 syllable : ®er Stltar', Sifc^of, Sf)orat', ©enerat', fianal', totjlon', jfarbinal', 
 SKoraft', ipdoft' — to which may be added the neuters, baS §ofl)ital', @))i» 
 tat' (pi. -dter). 
 
 3. Strong III. For masc. plurals in -er, see pp. 29-30. There may be 
 added — though with Variant forms — Set ®orn, ©traug (nosegay), SBidjt, 
 SBoiemi(J)t (§ 105), 
 
 4. Weak. For masculine monosyllables of weak declension see p. 34. 
 There may be added: Ser get« (§ loi), gin!, ®e(f,9^etB, @t)a^; aIso(§ 121), 
 ©tetnrne^, SJorfa^r. Ser iBurfdt), ber -@efeE (as also ber §irt, ber Dc^«, and 
 others rarely) occur with or without final e. 
 
 5. The strong feminines (§81) are the monosyllables: ®ij Slngjl, 3tyt, 
 SSaiil (bench),f8xaVii, #unft, Sruji, goujt, grucl)t, ®an«, ®^, §onb, §aut, 
 Stiift, firoft, Suti, .Suttft, 8au§, 8uft,,2uft, aKadjt, 3Kagb, 2«aug, 'Ula&ii, !Kaf|t, 
 iKu6, i^gjl^t^ttnb, iffiurft, 3wf ''and, with variant forms, ?fot, @au, 
 piysmx, Su^tJAIso, =ftu^t, 4unft in comp., 3trmbrufi, ©efd^Wtilft; and 
 abutter, 2:oii)ter')(§ 77) ' /,, ,,..,:;,. 
 
368 APPENDIX. 
 
 6. Neuter monosyllables with plural -e (§82) are : 
 
 (a) In -r : ®a8 §aar, §eer, Sa^t, SKeet, 5Poor, Mo'^r, Sier, S^or (^a/?), 
 and the following : 
 
 {6) Sa8 iSeet, Sell, Sein, SBoot, SBrot, ®ing {(Amg), Erj, geH, ge(l, Olft, 
 §eft, 3o(£), Snic, fireuj, S(o)o8, 5K(o)oS, SJelj, ^ferb, *45funb, *PuIt, 5Red)t, 9iet), 
 SRei^, 5Riff, SRofi, ©alj, ©djaf, ©c^iff, @d)tt)etii, ©eil, @ieb, ©tiiel, ©tudf, 
 2Bert, 3^^? 3cug, Si^^r ^i'h ^ f^w others, and soma of variant usage (§ 105). 
 
 7. The most important nouns of mixed declension are given ^ 99-104. 
 There may be added, though with some variation of usage : ®ev OtUntter, 
 Sorbecr, *Pfau (?), ©traujj {ostrich), Untevt^an, B'^tot, and the neuter, ba8 
 Seib, with a few fweign words, as fflon'jut, Sntetef'fe, 3uiBet', ©totuf . 
 
 8. Other lists might be added, but hardly with advantage to the student. 
 For special irregularities, variant or double forms, etc., reference must be 
 made to the dictionaries. (See also §§ 105, 424-6). 
 
 II. Uses of Some Prepositions. 
 
 See § 447. The following are selected for illustration. The 
 arrangement is made alphabetical, for reference : 
 
 fttit, with dative or accusative, at or to a point. 
 
 I. With dative : (a) Place at or near : (i) er fie^t an ber K^iive, on ber @(fc, 
 (nal)) an bet SBSanb, etc. ; (2) on: ber §ut pngt an ber SBanb; an bcm lifer 
 fteljen ; bie SEBadjt ant 9J^ein ; and (3) of, of battles named for rivers : bie 
 @d)(a(j^t an ber 5!llma (see bei). 
 
 {b) Relative point or degree (see pred. superl. § 160) : ®ie S^age ftnb je^t am 
 tdngften, {at the) longest. 
 
 {c) Definite specification, (i) primarily of place, in: tofim an einem gngc ; 
 (2) manrur, by: an ber §onb gtetfcn, fiit)ren, l^alten, sie^en, by the hand; 
 hence, »2?3«J-, by: an ber ©timme t'd^^Xlyt^^, to know by the voice; {-^plenty 
 or want, of, in: reic^, orm, flarl, f(i)mad) on ; liberflujs, SKongel, on ®elb ; 
 excess, want, of money. (4) cause, from : leiben, jierben, on ; from, or of 
 (a disease; see Bor). (5) And with verbs, as fe^Icn, l^inbeni, jmelfeln, to 
 doubt of; teilne^mcn, ?uft finben, to take pleasure in, etc. 
 
 {d) Time, definite without duration, at, in: om SUforgen gel^t bie ©onne 
 auf; om 3lnfange; am ©nbe. On: am ajfontog; am neunten SKoi (dates 
 § 309) ; on meinem ®eburt8togc (see ju ; and for time of day, um). 
 
 {i\ In many phrases, as, eg ijl on ntir ju reben, tny turn to speak; eS iji 
 
USES OF SOME PREPOSITIONS. 369 
 
 ntd)t« an ber ©efc^idite, nothing in the story; am Sebcn, alive; on jeincv ©telle, 
 in his place; on beffcn ©telle, instead of that, etc. 
 2. With accusative, motion or direction to. 
 
 (a) Place — to, on, against: er ge{)t an bie (Sde, fietlt ben %\\i) an bo6 
 genfter, l)ougt ben §Ht an bie 2Banb ; ttofjft an bte Stjiire ; ftogt ben gug an 
 einen @tein ; lel^nt fic^ an bie 3)Jnuer ; and in phrases like : Stn bie Strbeit 
 Qeijtn, go to laor/i, etc. So, with motion implied (where sometimes dat. of 
 ind. object) : eincn Srief fd)reiben; ein 58iii^ I'enben; einc Sftebe I)atten — an, to; 
 and in address, without verb — letters, poems', etc., as: on (Smnia, an bie 
 greube. 
 
 {6) Figuraitively, direction of mind: beujen, erinncrn, moljnen, an, of; 
 glauben, on, in; geltlbl)nen on, to, etc., and the corresponding nouns : ber 
 ©ebonfe, ®lflube, an; as, ic^ glaube on einen ®ott, in one God (see bcnten 
 Don). 
 
 (c) A'umber or time; here on, alone, denotes indefinite amount, up to, or 
 nearly: eS foflet on bie jeljn Scaler; more usually with bis, to, till: biS on 
 bos Enbe ; oont 3Jtorgen bi3 on ben Stbenb, etc. 
 
 Slltf, with dat. or accus., on, upon, a surface. 
 
 1. With dative: (a) Place, on, upon, literally, as: onf bem Sijli^e, bent 
 SBevge, ber @ee, bem @(J)iffe, ber ©troge, fein, etc. Hence ifi), with places 
 implying elevation or imfortance, at : ouf mcinem dimmer («/ stairs) ; ouf 
 bem @d)Ioffe («/ at); and so, ouf ber UniBcrfitfit, ber 3tii8ftettung, bem SBoue, 
 bem SKorfte, ber !pofl, jein, etc. Also Kc), local occupation or conditioti, at, 
 on : gr ift ouf ber S^nle (= still a pupil, while in school — in ber ©i^ule); 
 ouf ber Sog^'i "^uf einer SReije, etc. And hence in phr:ises like ouf bemSonbe, 
 in the country; auf ber ©tette, on the spot; anf ber %\o,\., in the very act, etc. 
 (d) Methaphorically, resting or standing on: bouen, Bem^en, be^arren, 
 befle^en {insist) ouf (yet also accusative). 
 
 2. Much more largely, sometimes when dative might be expected, ouf is 
 used with accusative : 
 
 (fl) Place, with verbs of motion or action, corresponding to a, b, c above; 
 as, on: auf ben SSerg, bie See, bie ©trage, gel)cn; to: onf ben SSall, ben 
 SKorH, bie ^oft, baS I'anb, getjen ; on or for : auf bie 3agb, eine Steije, 
 ge^en, etc. 
 
 (b) (Up) to, a point, or degree ; as : bi8 auf ben Sob ; er ^at mid) aufs 
 OU^erfte gebrad^t; — and here the absolute superlative (§3is)-' luf* fii^iinfie 
 griigen, etc. 
 
 (<r) Direction, on or aitei : ©C^Iag ouf ©d^log, blow upon (after) blow; 
 
 ber ©onnenftftein folgt auf ben 9iegen. Hence, on, as occasion; ba8 t^ue ic^ 
 
370 APPENDIX. 
 
 ouf S^ren S3efel)l, on your order. And so, in phrases expressing manner, 
 in: auf bicje aSeifc, in this way; ouf Seut(d), zk German; ouf8 neue, «««(/, etc. 
 
 (of) Direction on or toward an object or purpose: fie ^at immer ein 3tuge 
 auf baSfiiub; er giebt Diet Oelb auf Silver <Mi, on ox for books (thus, auf 
 bafe, for, in order that ). Hence, as prospective condition, on : auf bie ®efal)t 
 ^aubeln, on the risk; auf Seib unb Sebcn ; auf biefe Sebingung ; or in: auf 
 biefeu gall ; auf atle goUe (literally, for all cases) ; or at : auf meinc Soften, 
 ai my expense, and other phrases. 
 
 (c) So, with verbs and adjectives, denoting direction of mind on or towards 
 as, for : tjoffeu, roavtcn ; to: ontroorten, pren, merten : er antroortet ntir; but; 
 auf mciue grage ; er l)ort auf nieiue Sftebe ; on: redjucu, ft^ uerlaffen, e8 tnagen, 
 ja^len; — adjectives, of : ciferfii^tig, neibifd), ftolj ; at: bofe, erBoji, etc. 
 
 (/) Time (i) on, towards: e8 ge^t auf ucuu ; eiu 95iertel auf brei, a quar- 
 ter fast two; (2) prospectively for a point, or period: eine Sieife auf beu 
 evfien SDlaifeftfe^en— auf eine SBod)e Berfd)ieben; er reiji auf eine SGBodje ab, 
 for a week. (3) On or at a point, precisely : ilommcu @ie auf bie SKinute, 
 at the minute; auf eitmiat, all at once; and in phrases like : auf ininter,/o?- 
 ever; auf 3Bieberfel)en, till we meet again, etc., m. prospective sense, for, till. 
 
 Note: — 9luf is much used adverbially («/, open, etc.), and in adverbial phrases. 
 
 ?lu§, with dative only — out of (from within). 
 
 (a) Place — motion out of: (i) Stua bem ^aufe tommen; @elb au8 ber 
 Safi^e nel)men ; au§ betn genfter fel)en, to look out of the window ; sometimes 
 from (yet strictly from within) : 0U§ ber ©tabt fomilicn, etc. 
 
 (2) More rarely removal away from : au8 ben Stugen ; au« ber SJiobe, out 
 of sight, fashion, etc. 
 
 {b) Source — iTom,hy: (i) 3d) fef)e au8.3l)rem Sriefe— au8 fcinemS5etra» 
 gen ; id) Voeig au§ (grfa^rnng — au8 Bielen ®riinben ; au8 Sevje()en, by mistake. 
 
 Hence, (2) origin, from : ©r ftammt oii8 etuet alteu ganiitie— au8 SBcrtin; 
 eiu SUiorc^en aug alien 3eiten; iKad)rid)ten— Sriefe— au8 ®eutfd6Ianb, etc 
 
 (c) Material —out of, oi: 2lu8 @oIb geniad)t; ou8 Sc^ra gebrannt; ber 
 aKenfdi befle^t au8 Seib unb ©eele ; au8 nidjts witb ni^t8 ; nierben au8, to 
 become of, etc. 
 
 {d) Motive— fTom, for: 2tu8 Eitelleit, ®ei}, 9Jot l)anbeln ; au8 2Kangc( 
 an (Sdi,for want of money ; au8 3l(^tung gegen ®ie, out of respect, etc. 
 
 SBet, with dative only — by, near. 
 
 (o) /Va<r«— properly (near) by: gt ti3oI)nt bet ber SSx&jf, id) flonb bei bem 
 jiijnig. So in many phrases: bei Sifd^e, at table; bei §ofe, at court; beim 
 
USES OF SOME PREPOSITIONS. 371 
 
 Sein ft^en ; id) ^abe fete @rib bet ntir, aioui me; bie @ii|Iad^t bei Seifjjig, of 
 (with names of towns) ; bei ©innetl fein, in one's senses; bei Seite, aside, etc. 
 
 (b) More especially at one's house: (i) Sfiei bent ©C^neiber, at the 
 tailor's (house or shop); cr iDO^nt bei mir, wit/i me (at my house — mtt mtr, 
 elsewhere). Hence (2) as characteristic — with, among, in: ®0S i|l bei 
 w& aJtobe — bet ben ®eutfc^cn iiblii^, viitk us, among the G.; bag SJBort ftnbet 
 fii^bei ben Sid)tent — bei ®oett)e, in the poets, etc. ®a8 jle^t bei 3t)ncn, 
 stanck with — depends on — you; fragen @ie bei i^tn nati), inquire of him, etc. 
 
 (f) Instrument — by (less frequently than in English) : (i) SSei ber §anb 
 nel^mcn ; bei f einem SJantcn nennen, to call by his name. So (2) in adjuration : 
 bei @Ott, by [the help of) God; bei nieiner ®I)ve, by, or oii my honor ; and (3) 
 condition — on: bei CebenSftrofe, on penalty of death ; bei alle bem, with (in 
 spite of) all that. 
 
 {d) Time — (i) on, as occasion : ^nWtStX ®t\t0^tvi!!)tSX, on this occasion ; 
 bei bie(en SBorten, at these words. And (2) in phrases, during, by: beiSZadjt; 
 bei £oge ; bei Sicijtc, by candlelight; bei ^eUem Sage, in broad day ; bei bicfent 
 SBetter ; beint Sefen, while reading. Rarely with numbers, meaning nearly. 
 
 Sut$, with accusative only — through. 
 
 (a) Place — motion through : ®ur(^ bie ©titbt — ben 28alb — reiten; buvc^ 
 einen gtufi {ifiraininien, across a river; burc^ olte ©efa^ren ftegretc^, etc. 
 
 (b) Means — through, by: ®er Srief lam burc^ bie ^ofi, through [by] the 
 mail; ev warb reic^ bnrd) ben §onbe(— bnrd) 3I)ren SBeijianb, by trade, etc.; 
 bur^ einen 5PfeiI Berwunbet, by an arrow, etc. 
 
 (<r) Time — extension through : here burc^ usually follows the noun (more 
 frequently, ^inbutc^) : ba8 gonje 3al)r burc^ ; ben %a% I)inbur(^, all day long. 
 
 Note. — ®ur(^ is^much used adverbially (throughout); and, as prefix, is separable or 
 iDseparable, with changed sense (§ 287). 
 
 Siir, with accusative only — - for. 
 
 (a) Primarily, place — in front of; hence, in behalf of, for: Wit fSnUJfen 
 fiir SiJnig unb SJoterlanb ; meine greunbe ftimmen fur mid), vote for me; \i) 
 forge fiir bid), etc. 
 
 (b) Hence, in place of, for : (i) ^x'^ix\iisAi'\\a.xm&\,for me {asmy agent); 
 biUige aB(a)aren fiir b(o)areS (Selb, dieap goods for cash; id) ne^mc eS fiiv 5Be= 
 ja^Iung aw, for, ox in, payment. (2) Price — for: fiir je^n Xijaln foitfeil — 
 berlaufen. (3) And for, as : in phrases like oc^ten, erfloren, gelten, tjaltcii, 
 ftd) ousgeben — fur (§ 443, c), etc. 
 
 (c) Hence, fitness, destination — for: S06 ©liidC ift ni(£|t fiir mic^ ; @()iet= 
 yi\\a,t\\\X ^Kv^tX, toys for children, eXz. Or {z) proportion, correspondence: 
 
372 APPENDIX. 
 
 6r til olt fiir feine Sa^re, old for his years; and phrases like ajjaiin fiirSyjann; 
 Eag fiir Sag ; SBort fiir SBort, etc. (3) Restriction: fiir ^ciitc, fiir biefcS SJial, 
 for this time ; fiir tnicEl, as for me ; an unb fiir fili), 2« and for itself, per 
 se, etc. 
 
 3n, with dative or accusative — in, into. 
 
 1 . With dative — position in (nearly as in English). 
 
 {a) Place or time— ia, within: in biefem ^aufe — bicfemSo^re — bernacij= 
 flen SBodje ; in®erlin; im SBinter, etc. ; at: in ber Sirdje— bcr 'B6)ii\t,at 
 school (see auf) ; in Surgem, in a short time; in aUer Srii^e, as soon as 
 possible: im 2t[ter Bon 60 3a^ren, at the age, etc. 
 
 {b) Condition: in ©ebanlen ; in SScrgweiflung ; in cincr ungliidElic^cn Stige 
 
 — ©timmung — f ein, etc. 3m SSegriff fein ju fc^reibcn {in the idea) on the 
 point of writing (§ 465). 
 
 {f) Manner: im ®eiftc beten, in spirit; ill ber (Site, in haste, in einem 
 beleibigenben £one, in {with) an insulting tone; in SEBa^r^eit ; in ber Eljnt, 
 in fact; befteben in, to consist in. 
 
 2. With accusative — motion into. 
 
 {a) Place— vato: in ba6 §au8 — ben ®arten — gel^en, etc.; to: in bie 
 ^\xi)t — bie @d)ule — ba8 Sweater — ge^en, fc church,etc.; in: er '.i^nittfid) 
 in8 ffiein — ^atte einen @d)nitt in bie SBange, a cut in his cheek. 
 
 {b) Condition — change into: SBaffer in SBein — Srourigfeit in {Jreube — 
 bermonbein; Kv. ixoix ^iviit iaSxa., into two pieces ; in U)3})iglcit berfoUen; in 
 bie glu^t jagen, to put to flight; einwittigen in, to consent; fti^ mifdien in, to 
 meddle with. 
 
 NoTB. — 3n, as prefix, is &in — see also herein, ^inein. 
 
 SDlit, with dative only — company, participation writh. . 
 
 {a) Usually with: iDol)ncn — effen^mit (see bei); also to: fpredjen mit; 
 •otVcamiiSi'irm.i, related to; on: SKitletb I)aben mit, to have pity on; by: ein 
 2Jiann mit 92amcn @d)mibt, by name (see bei), etc. 
 
 {b) Time — coincident with : iffiit bem griiijling lommen bie ©d^malben; 
 mit biefen SBSortcn ging er ob ; mit 2^age8onbruc^, at {with) daybreak, etc. 
 
 {c) Instrument — with: SJJit einem SKeffer fcbneiben; mit einem ©oti^e 
 ftcdften, etc.; mit gii^cn treten, underfoot; mit b(o)arem @etbe laufcn, to buy 
 for cash; mit ber !poft fi^iden, by mail; \6) fage bamit, I mean ; multipticiereu 
 
 — bioibicren— mit, by. 
 
 (d) Manner— with: mit Sergniigen ; mit grogen Stugen anfe^en, with 
 surprise ; mit SJorfo^ — Sieig, on purpose, and various adverbial phrases. 
 Note. — iWit, often stands as adverb, without object — with, along (with). 
 
USES OF SOME PREPOSITIONS. 373 
 
 Slni^t with dative only (properly near) — towards, to, after. 
 
 [a) Place — direction towards, to (not of persons) : 3d^ reif e nac^ @flg= 
 lanb— nad^ SSeriin — na{^ bent ©iliben ; nac^ ber @tabt — nad^ §a«fc — flel)en, 
 home. 
 
 {b) Hence, of object aimed at — -after, for: taufeit noi^, to run after ; na^ 
 ben ©tcrnen greifen, to grasp at. So, frngcn, jel)en, ftreben, fc^iden — unc^, 
 after, or for ; jc^iegen, tvac^ten, Werfcn, jtelen — nac^, at, etc. ; and with ad- 
 jectives, bcgievig nad), etc. 
 
 (<r) 7»Mf— after: (i) 9f oc^ D'leujal^v ; nad) je^n U^t ; nac^ einer SUiinute ; 
 (2) succession after, next to : nac^ bit ift et ntein Hcbjier Sreunb, next to 
 you, etc. 
 
 (d) Hence, after, according to (in this sense often follows) : 9'Jac^ eincr 
 S5or|c^vift fd)veiben, after a copy; nadi 58efe^l ^anbeln ; nad) meiner SKeinung ; 
 nod) nteincr U^t, hy my watch; no'd) ben ©efc^en ; bent Sitter nac^, according 
 to age; ber 9Jeil)e nnd), in a row. And in phrases like riii^ten, urtetlen— 
 nad), to judge by; ried)en, fd)meden — nod), to taste of. 
 
 Uict/ with dat. or accus., over, above. 
 
 1. With dative, position over. 
 
 (3) Place, over: ®er Stebel ftel)t iiber bem SSerge ; nietnonb fiebt fiber bent 
 ^onig (in rank). 
 
 [b) over, beyond: Uber bem SKeere lag eine neue SBelt. 
 
 [c) over, during : Uber bent Sui^e, bent Sefen, fcblief er ein, while reading; 
 fiber bent ©piele entflanb bet ©treit, during the game {over, concerning =uha 
 bag @pie(), etc. 
 
 2. More freely with accusative, of motion, extent, action, expressed or 
 implied, over, above, beyond, about, etc. 
 
 (a) Direction over: Uber bie Srfltfe get)en; fiber baS §auS ftiegen ; ben §ut 
 fiber ben Sifc^ I)cingen; eine 58riide fiber ben gtng fc^Iagen, over (across) the 
 river, etc. Here belong such verbs as f)errfcben, rcgieren, ftegeit — fiber, etc. 
 
 (b) Over, beyond: (i) Uber baS '^\A fd)te6en, beyond the mark; fiber ben 
 jtonig fe^en ; fiber eine SKeile ineit ; fiber ntcine ^rofte ; fiber alle SUafeen ; fiber 
 60 Sabre att. Also (2) past, by : liber !Pari8 v.is.6) Sonbon, via Paris ; and (3) 
 after, in addition to: Sttefe fiber SBriefe fd^reiben, letters upon letters ; cinen 
 Sag fiber ben anbent, one day after another, etc. 
 
 (c) Time beyond, after: (i) Uber ein 3o^r fet)en Wiv un8 Wieber, in 
 (after) a year ; ^eute fiber gel^n Sage, ten days hence; fiber furj ober lang, 
 sooner or later; (2) In some phrases, during (here usually follows the case): 
 
374 APPENDIX. 
 
 iiber 9}aii)t, <mer night (in the night) ; bie SRodjt iiber, all night; ben ©omrne* 
 iibcr, all (through) the summer. 
 
 [d) Frequently of object or cause : about, concerning, of, etc. Thus : 
 
 (i) With verbs, as ftjredjen, jdjteiBen, crjaljten — iiber, about (see Don); (2) 
 especially of emotions and their expression, as: fic^ orgern, ftc^ freuen, fid) 
 munbern, ei'jd)rec£en ; flagen, Iad)cn, trauern, tneincn — iiber, and with lilte ad- 
 jectives, frot), traurig, etc., iiber, of, for, at, etc. 
 
 Um, with accus. only, around, about. 
 
 (fl) Place: Um ben j^ifc^ fi^en, taufen ; etmaa urn ben §al8 binben, trogen ; 
 bie ©egenb um fflofton, etc. 
 
 (b) Time, ox number — (i) indefinite, about: um SKlttevnadjt ; um Jttiei= 
 ^unbert, about 200; but (2) of the time of day, definite, at: um >t)el^e3eit? 
 um gtnet U^r, at two o'clock, etc. Also (3) excess, by : um cin Sa^r filter, 
 a year older. (4) Succession, after : eiuer um ben anbent, ojie after another. 
 
 (c) Rotation around, (i) alternation: einen Eog um ben aViitxa, every other 
 day ; (2) Exchange, for: Huge um ?luge, an eye for an eye; um Ciuen I)ol)eit 
 $rei8 faufcn, for (at) a high price. (3) End, or loss ; um ba8 Seben bringen, to 
 defri-ve of life ; um ba6 ®elb !ommen, to lose one's money ; es ift um mid) ge= 
 f^e^en, all over with me. Compare bie ^tx'i ift um, over (as of a circuit com- 
 pleted), and so in many phrases. 
 
 (d) 'Sfi-.x^ largely with remote object, about, for: um etlDttS fireiten, um 
 Srot, SSerjPiljung, bitten ; um @elb f)3ielen ; um Jiat fragen ; um §iitfe vufen ; 
 um Ootte? SBiflen,y57r God's sake. And with still more general reference: 
 SBic fte^t eS um i^n, um feine @efunbf)eit? how is it about, etc.? (Ss ift um 
 fein Seben jU t^un, his life is at stake, etc. 
 
 Note. — ©ic ftrittcn fi&er, wm, einen SIpfel: iiber expresses cause of quarrel, um, the 
 object of contention. This more remote setise of Uin is seen in the infin., um . . . JU, oi purpose. 
 Um has many uses in adverb phrases. 
 
 Untet, with dat. or ace, under. 
 
 I. With dative, position under, beneath, (o) Place : Uuter cinem Saiime 
 fie^en ; er ftel)t tief unter bir {in rank) ; unf er ber §anb, underhand, secretly ; 
 uuter &es<^\, under sail ; UUter .mciuem @d)U^e '\it\)m, under my protection : 
 unter ben ®efe^en, subject to the laws ; uuter biefer iBebinguug, under (on) 
 this condition. So (2) time : uuter ber 9ifgicrHng 3?a))oleon8 ; uuter bcu 
 beutfdien ^atfcrn, under, etc. 
 
 {&) Among, frequently : {1) mxiex aniexn, among other things ; bie ft^ouflc 
 unter alien (so, often, for part, gen., §431): uuter einanber, in confusion; 
 
USES OF SOME PREPOSITIONS. 375 
 
 sometimes (2) between : unter Un8 gefagt, entre nous ; untct Sriftern, con- 
 fidentially, etc., or (3) amid : unter 3u6rin, amid shouts. 
 
 if) Below, less 'than: Unter bem SBert angcben, itnter $rei« tietlaufen, 
 below value; unter stoanjig So^ren alt; unter oHer ^rltif, beneath all criticism. 
 
 2. With accusative, motion, under, beneath (a) : unter eincn 33aum 
 tveten, fi) fliic^tcn, to take refuge under ; tx \ai ttUe ®inge unter (eine giigc 
 get^an,/a^ under ; ic^ ne^me bi^ unter nteinen ©diu^, etc. 
 
 (*) Among: Untraut unter ben SBeijen \am,to sow tares among the wheat; 
 unter bte ©olbaten gel^cn, to enlist. 
 
 SBon, with dative only, from, of, by : 
 
 (a) Place (i) motion from : @c tontmt Bou ber ©tobt; retfi Don 5Pari8 nac^ 
 Sonbon ; and in phrases, Bon oben, Bon ^inten ; Bon einanber gcljen, to se- 
 parate, etc. (2) Transition from : Bon SBorten JU ©d)tagcn, from words to 
 blows ; Bon einer ^ronf^eit gene[en, recoTJer from. (3) Separation from: fcd^S 
 SKeilen Bon SBertin ; rein Bon ; frei Don @d)ulben, free of debt; fteigej))ro(^en 
 
 Don, acquitted of. 
 
 (i5) Time,.i^ora (often with added adverb) : Don 3JJorgen btSStbenb; Bon 
 ^eute ; Bon Sinb^eit an ; Bon 3ugenb auf ; Bon Slttet« (Beit) ^tx, from olden 
 times, etc. 
 
 (c) Source, from: (i) Don e^rtic^eu gftern geboren; etmas Don einem Der« 
 langen, er^alten, etc., to ask from, or of; Don ^txyfa, from the heart; Don 
 felbft, voluntarily, etc. (2) Material, from, of : @ine Sriidc Don (Sifen (but 
 au6 Sifen tnac^en), etn ^erj Don ©tein (for the adj. § 432). (3) Means, from, 
 by: cr lebt Don feinem ^anbet; Don ber Suft leben, on air ; nag Bom SRegen ; 
 Don groft erflarrt, etc. 
 
 (d) Agency, by, especially of passive verb, usually personal (Less, xxvii). 
 
 (f) Specification, of (and here often for genitive, § 432) : 
 
 (i) ber ^bnig Don Engtanb ; feiner Don uu8 ; trinlen @ie Don bte(ent SBein ; 
 and with adjectives : Dott Don, full of, etc. (§ 433). (2) Description : (Sin 
 2Konn Don S^re, Don 60 Satiren ; ein ©djaufpieler Bon iprofe(fion, by profession; 
 ein Keufel bon einer fjrau, u, devil of a woman ; and in many phrases. So 
 ■mHa. names, primarily from: thence of, as sign of nobility: giirft Don SBi?« 
 
 mard, etc. 
 
 (/) Limiting object, of, concerning; with verbs li! benlen, fatten, 
 pren, fagen, fc^retben, fpreijen, Dsiffen, etc.: was benten C', c Bon il)m? your 
 opinion of(s^& an) ; ic^ \)fxad) babon, of it, mentioned it (81 iiber, aimt it, in 
 detail). 
 
376 APPENDIX. 
 
 SBor, with dat. or accus., in front of, before. 
 
 1. With dative: (a) Plaa, (i) position before : Dor bem S^ore flel)en; Dor 
 meinen 3tugcn ; ©(i)titt Bor ©c^ritt, step by step. (2) In presence of, before: 
 »or bem ®ettc^te, bem SRid)tev, fte^en. 
 
 (*) Time, (i) priority before : Bor 28cit|na(i^ten ; Dor S^rifli Oeburt; (2) 
 preference before : Bor alien Siliflen, before all, first. (3) Especially of time 
 past, ago: uor eincm Sa^re ; Bov 3fiten, in times past. 
 
 (c) In presence of before, from: (i) Bov einem flie^eit, to flee Uom; Bor 
 bem Sobe eiicfii-eden ; and with like verbs: fid| fiit^ten, gittern; fid) l)iiten, 
 Detbergen, Berjleden — Bor, before, or from (to avoid), loatnen Bor, to warn 
 against, etc. Hence (2) Cause, from, or for : Bor 2lngfl flie^en ; Bor grcube 
 Weinen ; Bor §unger fterben (see au8). 
 
 2. With accusative, motion before : ttlir fe^eii un8 Bor bag S^or (go out 
 and, etc.) ; bie §anb Bor bie 3Iugen ^olten ; Bor boS @eri(^t geforbert merben 
 ^with motion implied), pe^e Bor bid), look before you (direction) ; but id) fat) e8 
 
 Bor mir liegen (place), etc. 
 
 gu, with dative only, properly to, but with various uses, (a) Primarily, 
 motion to — (i) a person (for place, see imc^) : cv (am ju'mir, ttefgu jeiner 
 aitutter. Hence (2)' to one's house (see bei) : ju bem ©djneiber ge^ert, to the 
 tailor's. Also (3) of actions directed to persons ; er jprad^ JU mir, fang ju 
 mir, spoke, sang to me, etc.tc. 
 
 (S) Outside of persons, (i) motion to (yet with motion of arrival at, thus 
 distinct from nai^) : @r gel)t tfiglic^ jur @tobt, to town (ifj imi^ bcr @. ge= 
 gangen, has gone (started) to the town ; jte legteii bo3 Oelb JU feinen SiifeeU/ «' 
 his feet; BOU Ort JU Ort, from place to place ; and in many phrases: Jll Enbc 
 fommen ; ju ©runbe getjen ; ju ©c^onben merben, etc. (2) In addition to: 
 er uimmt SBaffer ju f eincm SBein, with his wine; jubem, baju, besides. 
 (3) Limit, degree — up to: baS ifl (djiin jum (gutjiideu ; baS ift jum ?a(i)en; 
 jum Sobe betriibt ; jum mcnigflen, at least. 
 
 (c) Direction to, (i) Object: bie I'iebe JU ®Ott, love to God; 8u|i Jum Saujen, 
 desire to dance, (z) Purpose, fitness, iot: ®a8 SMeffer blent Jum @d)netben, 
 mein ®o^u ift jum Saitfmann beftinimt,/o7-a merchant; bereit jum Sobe ; and 
 in phrases : ju @ofte bitten, as a guest; ju SRate gel)en, ne^men ; ju Sette gel)cn 
 (for sleep); JU Kifc^e ge^en (/o eat—wa&t bem %., to the table); mir JU ®e« 
 faUeu ; Jum SeiftJteI,/(i>- example, etc. 
 
 (d) Effect, (i) Transition to : ®o8 SBaffer mirb JU (Si? ; ber ^nobe rnoi^ji: 
 jum SDJonne l)eran ; and iu phrases : ju @tanb& bringen, to accomplish ; ju 
 ®e|td)te belommen, to get sight of ; jum 9?arreu Ijaben, to make a fool of, etc 
 Hence (2) a.s factitive object (§ 443, c). 
 
USES OF SOME PREPOSITIONS. 377 
 
 {e) without motion, at (see i) : (i) Piace (towns, etc.), gu ^ai'iS ; bie Uui= 
 bevfitot 3U SSerliii; and in phrases: ju Jpaufe; jur §anb, oif Aand; jut See, 
 at sea; einem gU SuScn Uegetl — especially with following adverb: ^Utlt 
 S^Ote, genjier — ^inau8, ou/ of {at), etc. (2) Time, at, in general expres- 
 sions (see an, urn) : B" SSSei^uat^ten (but am 25. Secember); ju 9JJittag (but 
 um 12 U^r) ; jur 3eit bet ajJebicaet ; ju gleic^et '^vX; ju fcinct ^t% in due 
 time; also for: ein ©efl^Cllf jum ®ebutt8tage, a birthday gift. (3) Propor- 
 tion. — to, for : SaS ©tiilf JU JlViei ®tofcf)en, two groschen a piece ; baS !Pfunb 
 JU 16 Unjcn geredjUEt ; jum Eeit, in part; ju Saufenbeu, by thousands {at a 
 time); je JU JlDotf, twelve at a time. (4) Manner, in many phrases, on, by, 
 
 etc. : JU ?onb, JU SBoffet, ju «Pfetb, ju gug, ju SSBngen, ju SKut, etc. 
 
 Note. — For Ju with infinitive, see § 475* 
 
 Remark : — The foregoing examples may suffice to illustrate the idiomatic 
 uses of prepositions, and their wide extension of meaning. A full exhibition 
 of this subject would require a volume. It may be worth while to add here 
 the well-known doggerel lines of the German grammars : 
 
 I. Genitive. II. Dative. 
 
 Untoeit, mittels, Itaft unb loo^renb ©djreib : 
 
 laut, Bettnoge, ungeacfttEt, mit, nad), nftd^ft, nebfl, (amt, 
 
 obEtbalb unb untetf)alb, bei, feit, Sou, ju, guwibet, 
 
 inuEtbatb unb aufeEtbalb, cntgegEn, ouget, au8, 
 
 biegfeit, lEnfeit, I)albEn, njEgen, ftet8 mit bem Sotio ntEbEt, 
 
 llatt, ou(^ tangg, jufotge, trofe : 
 
 flEben mit bem ©enitlB, ™- Accusative. 
 
 obet auf bie gtoge meffcn? S3Ei ben StBottEtn : butdj, fitt, oljne 
 
 ®o(i) i(i biev nlcbt ju Betgeffen, fonbet, gegen, um unb mibet, 
 
 bag bei biejen lefeten btei idjieibE ftEtS ben BiEttEU gall, 
 
 oui^ bet ®atiB ticbtig \n. Hie einen anbetu niebet. 
 
 §ietju !cmmt nod) „um — millen." 
 
 IV. Dative or Accusative. 
 
 Sin, ouf, bintet, neben, in, 
 ubet, untet, Bot unb jmi|(ben 
 fleben mit bem Btetten gaU, 
 wenn man fragen fann : mobin? 
 SKit bem btitten fteben fie fo, 
 bog man nut tonn ftagen : wo? 
 
378 APPENDIX. 
 
 NOTE ON THE ORDER OF WORDS (LESS. XXXVU 
 
 The following mnemonics have been found useful for beginners. Of course 
 they do not cover all possible cases. 
 
 Referring to the formulae, p. 177, let also a denote any single verb-adjunct, 
 and c any subordinating connective; also let P stand for Principal, and D 
 for Dependent sentence. Then: 
 _ ( N = S. V. A. I 
 ^ = |l =«V. S. A.h^°^°'''"^- 
 15= T ^ cS. A. V. — one form; 
 
 the verb, V, being the Variable. 
 Note. — 1. a may also be an introductory clause (§ 344, S), 
 -£. In a relative clause, c is included in the pronoun. 
 
 In Complex sentences: (i) the Principal preceding: 
 
 PD = NT, or = IT — two forms. 
 (2) The Dependent preceding — here P = I — hence: 
 
 DP = TI — one form. (For Exceptions, see § 350.) 
 
 The order of possible verb-adjuncts may be indicated by the following 
 formula : 
 
 A = I. Pron. Objects: a. accusative, b. dative; 2. Adverb Time; 
 3. Noun Objects : a. Dat., b. Accus., c. Gen. ; 4. Adverb : o. Place, 
 b. Manner; 5. Objects with prep.: a. person, b. thing; 6. Pred. 
 noun or adj. ; 7. Last, the non-personal part of the verb : Sep. 
 pref., part., infin., in their order (see also § 357). 
 Of course all such adjuncts will not occur together; and exceptional 
 cases are not here included. 
 
INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 
 
 (REFERENCES TO §§.) 
 
 Ablaut, verbs, 223 ; nouns, 383-4; adjectives, 
 394- 
 
 Absolute, ace, 446; superl., 450; infin., 475; 
 part., 481, 4. 
 
 Accentuation: 48-55 ; foreign, 56-60; com- 
 pound, 379, 390, 400-1. 
 
 Accusative: with prep. 178, 280 (or dat.) 179; 
 direct obj., 441 ; ^vith adjs., 441, c. ; double, 
 442 ; factitive, 443 ; cognate, 444 ; adverbial, 
 445 ; absolute, 446. 
 
 Address: pronouns, 186-9; nouns, 428-9; (let- 
 ter) p. 247, note. 
 
 Adjectives: declension,i27-3o; strong, 131-3; 
 weak, 134-5; mixed, 136-8; as nouns, 140; 
 as adverbs, 142; neut. end. dropped, 145; 
 successive, 147 ; compared, i49~58) 45° \ 
 synopsis, 166 ; derivation, 393-6 ; compo- 
 sition, 400; with gen., 433; with dat., 43S; 
 with accus. 441; special forms, 448-50; 
 concord, 451; participial,! 479, 48'!, 3. 
 
 Adjective pronouns, 86-8; possess., 192; de- 
 monst., 204-10; interr., 220-1; indef., 245; 
 clauses, 348, ^; adjuncts, 352. 
 
 Adjuncts of noun, 352; of adjective, 353; of 
 verb, 354-7 ; of participle, 353, 483- 
 
 Adverbs, 314-21; compared, 315-7 ; position, 
 322, 355 ; derivation, 397-8 ; composition, 
 401 ; dist. from adj., 449; special uses, 484; 
 idioms, 485. 
 
 Adverbial phrases, 320; conjunctions, 327-8; 
 clauses, 348,^,350,2,486; gen.,435; ace, 445. 
 
 Alphabet, i ; script, at end. 
 
 Apostrophe, 70. 
 
 Apposition, 429. 4 ; foJ^ gen-, 43i» ^• 
 
 Article: ^, decl., 72; contr. with preps., 
 191; use, 416; omitted, 417; repeated, 421 j 
 
 indef., decl., 79; use, 419; position, 420; 
 repeated, 421. 
 Auxiliary verbs, 167-74; distinguished, 296-9; 
 omitted, 350, 4 ; of mood, 260-8, 472. 
 
 Capital letters, 61-66 ; modified, 66. 
 
 Cardinal numerals, 300-4 ; compounds, 306. 
 
 Case (see nom., gen., etc.); with preps., sum- 
 mary, 447. 
 
 Causa tive verbs, 362.^ taffen^ 26^^ 
 
 Cause, clauses or74SD^^^^^^^ 
 
 Clauses, dependent, 330-4; 348; 486; posi- 
 tion of, 359-60. 
 
 Comparison, 149-55; irreg., 156-8; of ad- 
 verbs, 315-7; correl., 334; special forms, 450. 
 
 Composition of verbs, insep., 277-9, 369-76 J 
 Sep., 282-5, 377 J sep. or insep., 287-8, 378; 
 special forms, 289, 379-81 ; of nouns, 388-92; 
 of adjs., 400; of adverbs, 401; summary, 
 402, re-nt. 
 
 Compound nouns, decl., 121 ; exceptions, 
 122, 388; accent, 53, 390; verbs, etc. (see 
 Composition); phrase compounds, 389, 7; 
 successive, 392; verbs with dat., 437, 3. 
 
 Concession, clauses of, 4S6, 4. 
 
 Concord, adj., 451; pron., 452; verb, 461, z.. 
 
 Condition, potential, 469; unreal, 470; con- 
 tracted, 350,2, 471; clauses of, 486, 3. 
 
 Conditional (the), form, 173 ; use, 471. 
 
 Conjugation, 195^00; weak, 201, 211-4 ; 
 strong, 223-7; niixed, 253-4; modal, 261; 
 passive, 271 ; reflexive, 251 ; (see alph. list). 
 
 Conjunctions, 324-5; pure, 326, 345, 349; 
 adverbial, 327-8; subordinating, 330-4. 
 
 Correlative, comparison, 334 ; pronouns, 
 456; adverbs, 485. 
 
 Countries, names of, iii, 416, i. 
 (379) 
 
38o 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Dates, 309-zo. 
 
 Dative, ind. obj. verbs, 203, 437 ; with prep., 
 164, 280, (or ace.) 179; with adjs., 438; of 
 
 ■ interest (for poss.), 439 ', privative (from), 
 440; factitive, 443, d; special forms, 106. 
 I Days and months, 313 ; in dates, 309-10. 
 < Declension — of nouns, 73 ; strong, 74 : — 
 ' class I., 75-8; II., 81-5; III., 89; weak, 
 I 92-6 ; mixefii, 104 ; peculiarities, 99-107; 
 proper names, 109-13 ; foreign, 115-20 ; 
 compound, 121-2 ; synopsis, 124. Of ad- 
 jectives, 127-30 — jstrong, 131-2, weak,r34-5, 
 mixed, 136-8 ; special cases, 139-147. Pro- 
 nouns (see their classes). 
 
 Demonstrative, adj. and pron., 204-10, 456; 
 as substitutes, 457 ; as relative, 459, 5. 
 
 Dependent clauses, 348, 359; verb (position), 
 347-50- 
 
 Derivation — of verbs, 361: by root-change, 
 362-3; by suffix, 364-5; from nouns, 366; 
 from adjs., 367; — of nouns: from verbs, 
 382-4 ; from adjs. or nouns, 3S5-6 (without 
 suffix, 382-3; with suffix, 384-6); by prefix, 
 387 ; ^ of adjectives, 393-6 (suffix, 395 ; pre- 
 ^> 396); — of adverbs, 397 ; summary, 402, 
 refn. 
 
 Digraphs (and trigraphs), consonant, 33-43. 
 
 Diminutives, 78, 386,6. 
 
 Diphthongs, 16-20. 
 
 Emphasis, (type) 70; ber, 206; ein, 301. 
 English — relation to German: summary. 
 Less. XLV. 
 I Euphony, in nouns, 85; adjs., 139; verbs, 
 ^ 2 1 1-4. 
 
 ' Exclamation, 336; with dat., 439, </; infin., 
 474,// part., 336,2. 
 Expletive (e§), 291,- 453- 
 
 Factitive, ace, 443 ; dat. (gu), 443,'^- 
 
 Feminine, dat. in -n (106). 
 
 Foreign words pronounced, 47; accented, 56- 
 
 60; declined, 115-120, 427, /£. 
 Future tense, form, 173 ; use, 465. 
 
 Gender, 71, 125-6; special forms, 426. 
 
 Genitive, 71 ; with prep., 280; position, 352 ; 
 with nouns, 430; partitive, 431; with adjs., 
 433 ; with verbs, 434 ; adverbial, 435 ; exclara., 
 
 German — relation to £i^lish; summary. 
 
 Less. XLV. 
 Grimm's Law (on tline), 408. 
 
 Honr (o'clock), 305. 
 
 Hyphen, in comnounds. 69, 392. 
 
 Imperative forms, 176; vowel change, 226; 
 
 sentences, 346 ; infin. or part, for, 336, 2. 
 Impersonal verb, 290-5; for passive, 274; 
 
 with gen., 434, i£.; with dat, 436, 5; subject, 
 
 453- 
 Incomplete compounds, 379, 437, 4. 
 Indefinite, pron. and adj., 244-5; use oi, 
 
 460; relat,, 236, 459, 3. 
 Indirect object, 203, 437; mood and tense, 
 
 467; question, 348, 467, d* 
 Infinitive, form of past part., modal, 264-5; 
 
 exclam.,336; position, 358; uses, 473 ; sim- 
 ple, 474 ; with ju, 475 ; with urn — ju, 476 ; 
 
 equivalents, 477-8; as noun, 75, 416, i. 
 Inseparable verbs, 277-9; 369-76 j special 
 
 forms, 380. 
 Interjections, 335-7; with gen., 435, c/with 
 
 dat., 439, d. 
 Interrogative, pron. and adj., 217-22 ; use of, 
 
 458;infin., 474,/ 
 Inverted order, 165 ; 344-6. 
 
 Measure (terms of), 312, 431, c. 
 
 Mixed nouns, 99-104 ; adjectives, 136-8 ; 
 verbs, 253-4; prefixes, 381. 
 
 Modal verbs, 260-7; with omitted iniin., 268; 
 idioms, 472. 
 
 Modification of vowel, 10 ; in nouns, 76, 83, 
 8g, 124, rem.; in adjs. (comp.), 151-2; in 
 verbs, 224, 226 ; in derivation, rem.-, p. 189; 
 written, 10, 15, 66. 
 
 Monosyllables — nouns: masc. 82; fern. 92, 
 &; neut. 82, 89; plurals, rem., p. 189; adjs., 
 151. [309-10. 
 
 Months and days (names), 313; in dates. 
 
 Mood — indie, (tenses), 462-5; imper., 176; 
 subjunct, (see siibjunct.)\ aux. of (see 
 ntodat). [4851 II. 
 
 Ifegatlve, 322, 5; idioms, 460, 8 ; redundant, 
 
 Nominative case, 429. 
 
 ITormal order, 339, 350; restored after pure 
 con). 345; in dep. clause, 350. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 381 
 
 Konns, declension, 73 ; strong, 74 — I., 75-8; 
 II., 81-5; III., 8g; weak, 92-6; mixed, 
 99-105; proper, iog-13 ; foreign, 115-20; 
 compound, 121-2; derivation of: from verbs, 
 382-4; from adj. atjiouuSj^ 383-6; by pre- 
 fi^c, 3S7; composition of, 388-02 (aBd^tccent.)■ 
 
 Noun clauses, 348 ; normal, 350 ; objective, 
 477- 
 
 Namber, 71; special cases, 422-5; verb, 461, 2, 
 
 Numerals, cardinal, 300-4 ; compounds, 306 ; 
 ordinal, 307-8; compounds, 311. 
 
 Objects, position of, 354; indirect, 203, 437 ; 
 direct, 441 ; double, 434, 437, 442 ; factitive, 
 443 ; cognate, 444 ; repeated, 4B7. 
 
 Optative, sentences, order, 346; subjunct., 
 468 : adverb (bod^), 485, 2. 
 
 Order of words ; see position. 
 
 Ordinal nums., 307-8; compounds, 311, 
 
 Participles, decl., 141; perfect: — augment, 
 215-6; in modal perfects, 264-5; exclam., 
 336, 2 ; in comp. tenses, 341 ; uses of, 479-81; 
 absolute, 481, 4; — present, 479-80; — fut. 
 pas5.,4S2; adjuncts of part., 483. 
 
 Participial adjectives, 479; 481,3; equiva- 
 lents, 480, 2. 
 
 Partitire, no art., 418 ; gen., 431 ; apposition, 
 431, £", d. 
 
 Passive conj,, 270; use of, 272-3, 437, c; sub- 
 stitutes for, 274-76. 
 
 Past tense, 464. 
 
 Perfect tense, 464 ; part. ^'&& participle). 
 
 Personal pronouns, decl., 182; address, 186-9; 
 special forms, 452; demonst. for, 457; with 
 relat., 459, 2, h. 
 
 Personification, by attrib. gen., 430, note. 
 
 Floral, of nouns, 124, rem.; foreign, 115-20, 
 427, di special forms, 424-5; double, 424-5; 
 of proper names, 427 ; pi. verb with titles^ 
 461, 2, c; pron. address, 187-8. (See App.). 
 
 Position (order of words), first rules, 177, 
 202 ; summary (Less. XXXVI.) : — verb, 
 338; normal, 339-43 ; inverted, 344-6; trans- 
 posed, 347-9; special cases, 350-1; — ad- 
 juncts : of noun, 352 ; of adj., 353 ; of part., 
 483; — objects, 354; infin., 358; dependent 
 clauses, 359-60; synopsis, p. 185. 
 
 Possessive, adjectives, 192; pronouns, 193-4; 
 
 for personal, 430, d; art. for, 416; tr. by 
 
 dat. pers., 439; special cases, 455. 
 Potential subjunctive, 469. 
 Predicate, adj., 127; superl., i6o-i; concord 
 
 of, 461. 
 Prefixes, insep., 277-9; sep., 282-5; sep. or 
 
 insep., 287-8 ; compound, 289 ; special forms, 
 
 379-81 ; — meaning of, insep., 369-76; sep., 
 
 377; in nouns, 387 ; in adjs., 396. 
 Prepositions, with dat., 164; ace, 178 ; dat. y 
 
 or acc, 179; contr. with art., 191; (spurious)/^ 
 
 280; compound, 402; for gen., 431-2-3-4; 
 
 for acc, 442; summary, 447; with infin., 
 
 475; adverbial, 445, note. (See Appendix). 
 Present tense, vowel change, 226 ; use of, 463. 
 Privative dat., 440. 
 Pronouns, personal, 182-4, 452-3; address, 
 
 186-9; reflexive, 185, 454; possess., 193, 
 
 455 ; demonst, .204-10, 456-7 ; interrog., 
 
 217-22, 458; relat., 233-40, 459; indef.,244, 
 
 460 ; expletive (e§), 453 ; position of objects, 
 
 354; concord, 452. 
 Pronunciation, vowels, 3-9 ; mod. vowels, 
 
 10-15; diphthongs, 16-20; consonants, 21-43; 
 
 double letters, 44 ; foreign words, 47. 
 Proper names, decl., 109-113 ; article, 416; 
 
 plural, 427; titles, 428. 
 Purpose, subjunct., 468, c; infin. (unt — ju), 
 
 476. 
 
 Beilexive pronouns, 185,434; verbs, 250-2; 
 
 for pass., 274; (false) with gen., 434, c; 
 
 with dat., 437, 6. 
 Belative pronouns, 233-40, 459; indef., 236, 
 
 459»3. 
 Repetition, of art., 421; i f possess., 455; of 
 
 subject, object, auxil. (siunmary), 487. 
 
 Schrift (alphabet), at end. 
 
 Separable prefixes, 2S2-5; compound, 289; 
 position, 342, 357; meaning, 377; special 
 forms, 379. 
 
 Strong decl. of nouns, 74-89; of adjs., 131-3; 
 (or weak) adj. forms, 449 ; conj. of verbs, 
 223-7; classes of (see synopsis, 259; and al- 
 phabetic list); change to weak deriv., 362, 
 
 Subject, omitted, 429; repeated, 461,487; cod- 
 cord with, 461, 2 ; change of, 477-8. 
 
382 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 SnbjnnctiTe mood, 466; indirect, 467 ; opta- 
 tive, 468 ; potential, 469 ; conditional, 47^-1 ; 
 purpose, 468, t.. 
 
 Snbordinating conjs., 330-4. 
 
 Siibstitntes, for pron. obj. with prep., 184, 
 222, 459, 4; for passive, 274-6; demons, for 
 pers. pron., 457; adv. for adj. inflect., 450. 
 
 Suffixes of derivation : verbs, 364-j ; nouns, 
 384-6; adjs., 395-6; adv., 398. 
 
 SuperlatiTe, 149, 155; predicate, 160-1 ; ab- 
 solute, 316, 450. 
 
 Supine, infin., 176, z. 
 
 Syllables, 68. 
 
 Synopsis, noun decl., 124; adjs., 166; strong 
 verbs, 259; verb-position, p. 185. 
 
 Tenses, indicative, 462 ; present, 463 ; past 
 and perfect, 464 ; future and f ut. perf ., 465 ; 
 — subjunctive, 467, 470. 
 
 Time, 293; of day, 305; date, 309-10; indef. 
 (gen.), 435 ; def. (ace), 445; clauses of, 486. 
 
 Titles, 428, 455, 461, c. 
 
 Transposed order, 347-9; special cases, 350-1. 
 
 Umlaut, 10, 223, note; p. 189, rent.; written, 
 xo, 15, 66. 
 
 Terbs, auxiliary, 167-74 i conjugation, 19^- 
 200 ; weak, 201, 2 1 1-4 ; strong, 223-7 > classes 
 of strong, 228-30 (see synopsis, p. 134, and 
 alph. list) ; mixed, 253-4 ; modal, 260-1 ; ir- 
 regular, 255-6 (see list); reflesdve, 250-2; 
 passive, 270-6; impersonal, 290-5. Compo- 
 sition of: — insep., 277-9; 369~76 J sep., 
 282-5, 377; sep. or iiisep., 287, 378; com- 
 pound prefixes, 289; sfiecial cases, 379-81. 
 Syntax of: with gen., 434; with dat., 437 ; 
 with ace, 441; double objects, 434,^,437, 
 443; cognate obj., 444; infin. obj., 474. 
 Concord, 461. Position of, 338 — normal, 
 339-43 ; inverted, 344-6 ; transposed, 347-9 ; 
 special cases, 350-1 ; synopsis, p. 185. 
 
 Vowels, quantity, 3 ; pronunciation, 4-9 ; 
 modified, 10-15 » doubled, 44 ; change of 
 (ablaut), 223, ?wie ; sequence in strong verbs, 
 225, note. 
 
 Weak, decl. of nouns, 92-6; of adj., 134-5; 
 
 (or strong) adj. forms, 449; conj. of verbs, 
 
 201, 2 1 1-4. 
 Weather, 290, 293, 
 Weight (and measure), 312, 431, c. 
 
 INDEX OF A?VORD-FORMS. 
 
 Note. ■ — Forms not here indexed are referred in the Vocabulary. 
 
 ofier, 326. 
 
 nff, 420, i; 460,4; tkMtX^, sup. pref., 450,4. 
 
 aHzXn, 326. 
 
 did/ adv., 153-4, 450, 2 ; (apposition) 429 ; 
 
 conj. (condition) 470, d; (time) 486. 
 flm, with sup., 160, 450, 3 ; dist. from auf§, 
 
 315- 
 anber (second), 460, b ; — tl^alB, 311, 2. 
 nnftait, infin., 47s,/; — ba§, 477, c. 
 siWix^, adj., 400, 5. 
 nud^, with rel., 459, 3 ; with conj., 486, 4; 
 
 idioms, 485. 
 
 ics, 370, I. 
 
 beibe, beiheS, 460, 5. 
 
 h\%, prep., 280; conj., 332. 
 
 sl^en, dim., 78, 386, 6. 
 
 ?t)/ nouns, 384, X. 
 
 bo (bor), in comp., 184, 209, 457 ; dem. orrel., 
 
 351, 2; indef., 459, 3 ; conj. (reason) 486, 2. 
 bclS, bic3, gram, subj., 21a. 
 ba^r omitted, 350, i ; clauses, 477, b. 
 ?be, nouns, 3S4, I. 
 
 bemt/ conj., 326; adv., 450, 2 ; 470, b. 
 ber, art., 79; dem., 206, 456, 2 ; 457 ; rel., 234, 
 
 459; dent, orrel., 351,2. 
 berjetiiflc, berfelfif, 208, 456-7. 
 2cro, 455, c. 
 bcS, pron. cotnp., 456, 2. 
 biefer, 456-7 ; bicg, 210. 
 breier/ breien, 302. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 383 
 
 t>S), 485, 2. 
 
 t, dropped: nouns, 85, 8g, 92, c, 94; adjs. 139, 
 
 150; verbs, 201, 214, 367; changed to ie, or 
 
 1,226; — added, 147,318,389,5. 
 sc, nouns, 384, 386: adj., adv., 147, 318. 
 cben (ioe&cit), 464, ,.. 
 seU nouns, 384, 8, 386, 3. 
 eilf (elf), 300, note. 
 ein, art., 79; num., 301: — er, 244. 
 sel, nouns, 75, 384, 3 ; adjs., 139; verbs, 364. 
 eiini=, 371, d. 
 sen, nouns, 75, 384. 6 ; adjs., 139, 395, 2 j for 
 
 se3, gen. adj., 133. 
 •enS, adv., 311, 3 ; 399, /• 
 ent=, 371. 
 entmcticr. 329. 
 ers, 372. 
 str, nouns, 75, 384,2, 386,2; adjs., 139; in- 
 
 decl., 395, 3 ; verbs, 364. 
 iSx, address, 189. 
 serlei (see =tei). 
 sera, adj., 395, 2. 
 
 erft, adj., 307 ; adv., 485, 3 ; — er=er, 157, 417- 
 ni-; 387, 5- 
 eB, pron. (position), 202 ; pass., 275 ; impers., 
 
 290-4; idioms, 453. 
 st%, neut. f7^'.,. dropped, 145, 449,2. 
 set, in pron. comp., 452, 5. 
 gW., titles, 455, c. 
 
 sfBiS/ sfnUig, adj., 306, 3; 400, 5. 
 
 folgenb, 417, 449* i» ^. 
 %xmx, ^taulein, titles, 428. 
 funfa %t%v., sjig, 300, note. 
 
 ()e= (augment), 215-6; double, 243, a; (prefix), 
 verb, 375 ; noun, 387. 
 
 gesejfen, 243, ». 
 
 Oejeit, impers., 437, 4, *• 
 
 gcnug, 322, 460, 7- 
 
 gem, 317. 485, 4- 
 
 gieSt (e§), 294. 
 
 gleiiS (iDctin, oB), 486, 4. 
 
 igleii^cn, pron. co^p., 452, t. 
 
 (nben, «K.r., 171, 296; with infin., 475, 2. 
 sjofl, -tnftiS' adj., 395, 4. 
 4al&, 144; comp., 311. 2. 
 E^alb, 280, comp., 459, {. 
 
 4ctf|cn, with infin., 474, c; p. part., 481, ,5. 
 
 slieit, noun, 386, 4, 
 
 ^er, 484, c; prefix, 377, c. 
 
 \f\tXt in comp,, 401, 457, 1, b. 
 
 ^in, 484 ; pfefix, 377, c. 
 
 sirftt, adj., 395, 6. 
 
 =ien, pl.,.118-9. 
 
 siereit, verbs, 215, 365. 
 
 =i(), adj., 395, 5. 
 
 Siir, address, 189 ; 3^to, 455, c. 
 
 sin, nouns, 386, 5 ; pi., 95. 
 
 inbem, 486. 
 irgcnti, 460, 3. 
 sijij, adj., 395, 8. 
 
 iO' 485, S- 
 jeticr (citi), 245. 
 jtner, 456. 
 
 steit, nouns, 3S6, 4. 
 
 lontmen, with perf. part., 480, 4. 
 
 Inutcr, indec!., 460, 7. 
 
 sict (serlei), 306- 
 
 slein, dim., 78, 386, 6. 
 
 leliterset, 157, 417- 
 
 slilj, adj., 395, 10; adv., 398. 
 
 IteSer, comp., 485, 4- 
 
 .ling, noun, 384, 8 ; 386, 7. 
 slingS, adv., 399, 1. 
 sioS, adj., 400, 4. 
 sttlfll, in comp, 306, 2. 
 
 tnnn, 244, 274, 460. 
 raoni)(et), 245. 
 siiiSftig, adj., 400, 5. 
 mcSr, 156, 450 ; —ere, 157. 
 
 sn, dropped, 103, 384, 6; inserted, 3S4, 2, 386, 2. 
 
 sniS, noun, 384, 4; 386, 8 ; pi., 83. 
 
 naif, adv., 328; conj., 329; — cin, 460, 2; 
 
 idioms, 485, 6. 
 nun, adv., 485, 7; conj., 486, z. 
 
 Dt, prep., 280; prefix, 283; conj., 332, 477, 
 b; omitted, 350, 1, 470, d; — au^, etc., 
 486, 4. 
 
 oSnc, (ju) infin., 475, / ; — bo^, 477, t. 
 
 spant (ein), 312, 431, c; ein poor, 245, note. 
 
384 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 =KilS, adj., 400, 5. 
 
 s8., plur., 120; adv., 399, d. 
 
 'S for eS (it), 453 J for ba§, 72 »<;fe. 
 
 sfnl, sfel, noun,, 384, 7. 
 
 sfnm, adj., 395, II. 
 
 sftfjnft, noun, 3S6, 9. 
 
 fcfton, with present, 463, b; idioms, 485, 8. 
 
 @e., St. (titles), 455. 
 
 fcii^83cQn, or Ict^je^n, etc., 300, note. 
 
 fein, z'., auxj, 172, 297; dist. from mevben, 
 
 273; impers., 293-4; witii gen., 435, b; with 
 
 dat. 437, 5, b; with infin., 475, 2. 
 frit, prep., 280; with pres., 463, b; conj., 
 
 486, 2. 
 idiit, felBcr, 454. 
 sjelig, adj., 39S, 7. 
 
 fii^, for einanber, 352 ; position, 354, 4. 
 ®ie, address, 188; concord, 451, b {/em. 189). 
 ficlie»3cl)n, for fiebje^n, etc., 300, note. 
 fo, with comp., 153 ; connective, 328 ; (such), 
 
 456, 5; omitted, 471, e; idioms, 485, 9. 
 fol*(er), 207, 456, 5. 
 fon&ern, 326. 
 ft. fl, 41. 
 
 sfi, adj., 149, 307; adv., 316; noun, 3S4, i. 
 Utttt, anfiatt, (ju) infin., 475, /; — ba^, 477, c. 
 
 st, noun, 384, I ; for stet, verb, 226, b. 
 
 sts inserted, 398, b. 
 
 sM, 311, 388, naie. 
 
 stct, contr. to at, 226, b. 
 
 t^, length of vowel, 42. 
 
 stum, noun, 386, 10 ; pL, 89. 
 
 TXiv, idioms, 305. 
 
 um . . . }u, 476 ; — bo^, 477, c. 
 
 Ull=, 387. 3- 
 
 =1111(1, noun, 384, 5. 
 Ut=, 387, 4- 
 
 tiers, 373. 
 
 biel, 156, 460, 6. 
 
 bolls, 288, C] sDOlI, 400, 4; ad/., 433. 
 
 boiler, 433, mie. 
 
 Vlttittni, prep., 2So; conj.,.a^,f. 
 bmiin, 486, r. 
 taiarb, 190, 256, c. 
 
 stOOrtS, 399, b. 
 
 1008, int., 219,458; rel., 236-7, 459; — fttr, 
 
 221 ; iiidef. and adv., 458, 2, 459, 3. 
 toeber (ttot^), 329. ' , 
 
 tneil, 486, ^. _.J 
 
 stueijc, adv., 399, c. 
 
 Ulcl^n, int., 220, 458; rel., 234, 459; indef. 45! 
 ttienit, (time) 486, r ; (cond.)486,3; (concess.) 
 
 486, 4; omitted, 350, 2. 
 tuer, int., 219, 458; rel., 236, 459. 
 lueft (IUC8), 222, b ; 4S8, 3 ! 459. 4- 
 
 lucntg, 245, 460, 6. 
 
 Uierben, aux., 173-4; 273; position, 350, 3; 
 
 impers., 387, 4, b. 
 Intbet, Isieber, prefixes, 288. 
 tote, adv., 153, 450, 2; (apposition) 429; 
 
 (time) 486, d; — bitiyt, 308. 
 lUO (itjor, 222, 237) ; cond., 486, 3. 
 molll, 485, 10; ob . . ., 486, 4. 
 Uotbeit, 270. 
 
 3et=, 374- 
 
 3tt, infin., 176; 475-6; factitive dat., 443, d; 
 
 adv., 476. 
 3taicen, 3IIIO, 300, note. 
 3taieier. 3liieien, 302. 
 
German Handwriting [Sd^rtft], 
 
 The Large Alphabet. 
 
 a^j:^^ 
 
 H I J K L M N 
 
 O P Q R S T U 
 
 ^ ^^ ^ f^ 
 
 V W X Y "Z 
 
 The Small Alphabet 
 
 abed ef ffghi 
 
 \ k. \ m. n o p q r 
 
// 
 
 St 
 
 /' ^-^/^ ^1^ ^M^ ^ -^ ^ 
 
 t u V w X y z 
 
 a 
 
 Modified Vo'wels. 
 
 6 6 
 
 U u 
 
 
 Diphthongs. 
 tf 
 
 
 CM^^f^/^ CytM^.^i^-^^ J^/^y^f!f^^ 
 
 All au All au ^ ^Eu eu 
 
 Ai ai Ei ei 
 
 Double Consonants. 
 
 sz = ss 
 
 Note. — As has been stated, p. i, it is not necessary — at least not at first — to write the 
 German Sckrifi. But it may become necessary to learn to read it. This can be done only 
 by practice in reading actual handwriting. As an introduction, a few pages of the Schrift will 
 be added. 
 
<-^**^> ^^^t-f^-^^^/M-^^n-ft^ 
 
 
 
 
 .f^'Pf^P'*--*^ .^^iC^y^*^-' ^ 
 
 ,^7&/A'^.--'i&^ 
 
.^--TJ^-IT^ »^^-^-J!^4b-»-»»^^< 
 
 
 ^^^-tt^ ^^tJ^TO!— '^r^-^^i^SVS**^ 
 

 
 e-- ^^^ '<^ 
 
 
 

 
 t-O'f^ ^'*-*-',^-f^t-^'-iir^^»---f't^^.-^:.».-^^^^ — ' 
 
 
 y^^c-'V^ ^^A^^ ,,*Je*yj .-t'^^^TIi^ '^^^E-*-*-**-- ,v*^:*!«.-- 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 l^^J^-- 
 
 
 ^■^v-^ *^ 
 
 ,-7!f-TS^ ^j^sfi-^r*^ ^^t*-^-^ 
 
l^/^*i^^-*-#— ' 
 
 ..^^Tt--***^ ^e^t^i^ ^jj#%!*i»*^ /^«:*^i^ ^t^ 
 
 i-t-*-^ „ 
 
 
 
 ^.^ 
 
 
 
 
 
^^e'il'^*?^if''P^^ /2'H^ ^^^^«<^»'»'/^ . 
 
 
 
 ^^ae-^-^-^^T^-^^^iat-*^ 
 
 ,«X 
 
 
 /. 
 
 ^^^7*#J 
 
 ..^t.^ty/^^^^^K'-^^O*-**^^*^^ 
 
 'T^'-*'^, c^^^/t'-l^ 
 
 -^^^^"^^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
y^7t^^^,^il^^»^-'1t~-t''^*-^^^^ /f ^-tSty^-^MT^ 
 
 
 ^■tC"**-" 
 
GERMAN. 
 
 29 
 
 A German Reader for Beginners in School 
 
 or College. By EDWARD S. JOYNES, Professor of Modern Languages in the 
 University of South Carolina. Half leather, 28a pages. Price by mail, 
 $1.00. Introduction price, 90 cents. 
 
 ''PHE most valuable qualities of this popular Reader are : — 
 1 (0 ^* begins very simply, and is steadily progressive. (2) The 
 selections are of general interest to all readers, and are of the highest 
 order in literary merit. (3) It is representative in character, including 
 some Roman type (35 pages out of 150), Schrift, and new and old 
 orthography. (4) The notes are thoroughly helpful, and are sug- 
 gestive and stimulating, as well as explanatory. (5) The vocabulary 
 exhibits the formal relation of German words clearly to the eye : i.e. 
 derivation, composition, etc., teaching the beginner to group words by 
 form and meaning. (6) The brief appendixes include a unique list 
 of Irregular Verbs, summary view of Accent, the Declension of Nouns, 
 and the Order of Words, and of German and English cognates. 
 
 Space permits only a brief selection from the m.any commendations 
 received. A detailed pamphlet will be sent on application. 
 
 Calvin Thomas, Prof, of German, 
 Univ. of Mich. : The best Reader there 
 is in the market. All three of my assist- 
 ants will use it. 
 
 O. Seidensticker, /V-o/ of German, 
 Univ. of Pa. : A superior book, excel- 
 lently adapted for the object intended; 
 prepared with great care and judgment. 
 
 H. C. White, Prof, of German, Cor- 
 nell Univ.: It matches well the Grammar. 
 The two books have their place well 
 defined and will do a good work. 
 
 Waller Deering', Prof, of German, 
 Vanderbilt Univ.: An admirable book 
 for the purpose the author has in view, 
 viz., to " smooth the way into German " 
 for beginners. 
 
 A. W. Spanhoofd, Teacher in St. 
 Paul's School, Concord, N. H. . The 
 Reader pleases me extraordinarily; '1 
 shall make use of it here in my classes- 
 
 W. H. Van der Smissen, Prof. 
 of German, Univ. of Toronto : A most 
 
 admirable book. I am particularly 
 pleased with the gradation in difficulty 
 and with German script. 
 
 P. B. Bice, Inst, in German, III. Nor- 
 mal School, Dixon, III. : We have used 
 Joynes' German Reader for two terms 
 and like it very much. We are satisfied 
 that we have introduced the best text. 
 
 Fred. Leop. Schoenle, Teacher of 
 German, High School, Louisville, Ky. : 
 It is exactly the kind of class-book I have 
 been looking for, ever since I began 
 teaching German to American pupils. 
 
 C. F. Kroeh, Prof, of Mod. Langs., 
 Stevens Ins., Hohoken, N. J. : Students . 
 will find in it excellent judgment and 
 mature scholarship. 
 
 Hermann Schonfeld, Teacher of 
 German, Swain Free School, New Bed- 
 ford, Mass. . It could not be better 
 arranged and annotated. Of its many 
 merits, the principal one is its excellent 
 gradation. 
 
3° 
 
 GERMAN. 
 
 Selections for German Composition. 
 
 By Charles Harris, Prof, of German Lan^age and Literature in Oberlin 
 College. 150 pages. Cloth. Introduction price, 50 cents. By mail, 60 cents. 
 
 THIS book consists of progressive selections, each complete in 
 itself, accompanied by notes and vocabulary. It is intended to 
 give abundant material for exercise in the writing of simple German, 
 and is compiled in the belief that the first need of the student is much 
 practice in easy exercises, rather than the slow and laborious writing 
 of more difficult ones. Great pains have been taken to make the vo- 
 cabulary complete and accurate. 
 
 Gustav Gruener, Instructor in 
 German,Yale Univ., New Haven, Conn.: 
 It strikes me as a very sensible book. I shall 
 give it a trial. It is based on the right 
 ideas. (Oct. 11, 1890.) 
 
 S. Primer, Prof, of Modern Lan- 
 guages, Colorado Coll., Colorado Springs : 
 An excellent book ; just adapted to class 
 work. (Oct. 19, 1890.) 
 
 E. P. Norton. Prof, of Modern Lan- 
 guages, Olivet Coll., Mich. : The variety 
 and scope of the selections and care in the 
 arrangement of notes all go to make up a 
 most excellent book, (01^,11,1890.) 
 
 Alfred. B. Nicliols, /nst. in Ger- 
 man, Harvard Univ., Cambridge, 
 Mass. : I shall make use of the book, 
 which seems to be well planned and exe- 
 cuted. (Oct. II, 1890.) 
 
 Os'wald Seldensticker, Prof of 
 German, Univ. of Pennsylvania, Phila- 
 delphia: I have used the book in two 
 classes since October and can now say 
 that the favorable impression which it 
 made upon me at the lirst and which led 
 to its introduction has been confirmed and 
 strengthened by three months' test. 
 
 (Jan. 12, 1891.J 
 
 German at Sight. 
 
 By Eugene H. Babbitt, recently Instructor in German, Harvard University. 
 30 pages. Paper. Price, 15 cents. 
 
 THE object of this pamphlet is to serve as a sort of syllabus of 
 elementary grammar, to be used in connection with Sheldon's, 
 Brandt's or Whitney's Grammar (the usual grammar with exercises 
 being designed for another purpose) . Every teacher or student using 
 either of these grammars should have this valuable if not indispensable 
 accompaniment. 
 
 James A. Harrison, Prof, of Ger- 
 man, Washington and Lee Univ., Va.: 
 An interesting pamphlet, very ingenious 
 in its way, which sums up for beginners 
 the main difficulties in the acquisition of 
 Qerman, 
 
 Mrs. J. B. Dietz, Prof, of German, 
 1$0aie Univ., Iowa, Iowa City: It is by 
 far the best instruction I have ever seen 
 upon the subject. I shall try to put it in 
 the hands of every student I have. 
 
GERMAN. 
 
 31 
 
 Boisen's Preparatory Book of German Prose. 
 
 Containing the best German Tales, Graded and Adapted to the Use of Begin- 
 ners in Colleges and High Schools, with Full Notes. By Hermann B. Boisen. 
 Cloth. 305 pages. Price, by mail, gi.oo. Introduction price, 90 cents. 
 
 INTENDED to furnish the learner with material for copious reading 
 of easy, correct, and interesting prose. In making the selec- 
 tions, the main requisite for the end proposed, an easy style, has been 
 kept steadily in view. With one exception, the selections are com- 
 plete in themselves and include the best tales of Bechstein, Grimm, 
 Andersen, HaufE. Hebel, Engel, Wildermuth, Jean Paul, some of the 
 " Musikalische Masrchen," by Elise Polko, and selections from " Tales 
 of Antiquity." The editor has taken such pieces as would best stim- 
 ulate curiosity by variety, encourage diligence h^ facility, and reward 
 application hy pleasure. 
 
 The notes are intended to supersede in a great measure the time- 
 wasting drudgery of reference to a dictionary, but they are, for the 
 most part, merely suggestive, throwing the burden of work upon the 
 student : some, in the nature of a concordance, calling the student's 
 attention to passages where a given word or phrase has occurred 
 before ; others recalling kindred or synonymous words ; others, again, 
 leading him to discover for himself the precise meaning of a word by 
 calling his attention to its constituent elements. 
 
 Hermann Hubs, Prof, of German, 
 Princeton Coll.: I have been using it 
 with mature students, though beginners in 
 the study of German, and it gives me a 
 great deal of satisfaction. 
 
 Alfred Hennequln, Deft, of Mod. 
 Langs., Univ. of Mich. : I consider this 
 small book superior in every respect. 
 
 Charles P. Otis, Prof, of German, 
 institute of Technology, Boston : 1 have 
 used this book for the past two j'ears, and 
 I have found it very satisfactory. 
 
 A. H. Mixer, Prof, of Mod. Lang., 
 Univ. of Rochester, N. Y. : It answers 
 my idea of an elementary reader better 
 than any I have seen. I shall use it. 
 
 R. B. Babson, Teacher of German, 
 English High School, Boston, Mass. ; It 
 
 is better than anything of the kind hith- 
 erto published. The selection of pieces is 
 excellent. The notes perform the office 
 of an intelligent, earnest teacher, and will 
 surely stimulate the learner to exercise 
 his powers of observation, memory, and 
 reasoning. 
 
 W. C. Collar, Prin. of Roxhury Latin 
 School, Mass. : It seems to me to supply 
 a want that many teachers of German 
 must have found embarrassing. I mean 
 the lack of a body of literature consisting, 
 not of fragments, but of literary wholes, 
 offering the fewest difficulties of matter 
 and of language, and yet written in fine 
 and charming style. I cannot express too 
 emphatically my approval of the plan anJ 
 purpose of the notes. 
 
GERMAN. 
 
 35 
 
 Trdumereien : Marc hen, by Richard leander, 
 
 (Professor Volkmann, University of Halle.) Selected and adapted to use in 
 schools, with Notes, by Alphonse N. van Daell, Professor of Modem Lan- 
 guages in the Mass. Institute of Technology. io8 pages. Paper. Price, 25 
 ■ cents. 
 
 THESE charming stories offer excellent material for elementary- 
 reading, and can also be used by more advanced classes for 
 rapid or sight reading, or for conversational exercises. The notes 
 are comparatively few, on account of the great clearness of the text. 
 They consist of clear and careful explanations of any expressions 
 which could not easily be found in the small dictionaries in common 
 use, and also of the small number of unusual constructions. For 
 colloquialisms and provincialisms the corresponding expressions of 
 the usual language are given. 
 
 The style throughout is good and easy. 
 
 Wm. T. Strong', Instr. in German 
 Yale Univ.: Traumereien seems admirably 
 suited to succeed Grimm's Marchen. It 
 is appropiiate, and adapted to our various 
 courses here. 
 
 H. H. Boyesen, Prof, of German, 
 Columbia Coll.: It is well adapted for 
 beginners and intermediate classes, and 
 particularly for reading at sight. 
 
 O. SQ\6jsa.s,\Aa)iSI, Prof, of German, 
 Univ. of Pa.: Such' attractive specunens 
 of modem German prose as Leander's 
 Traumereien, Frangois' Phosphorus Hol- 
 lunder, and the Novelletten, edited by Mr. 
 Bernhardt, all of which are entertaining, 
 spirited, and well suited for rapid reading, 
 form a very welcome addition to the stock 
 of good German texts, of which we can- 
 not have too many. 1 trust your neat, 
 well printed editions will find their way 
 into many schools. 
 
 J. E. Ro.essler, Instr. in German, 
 Northern Indiana Normal School, Val- 
 
 paraiso, Ind.: The Traumereien and 
 Zwerg Nase are exceedingly interesting, 
 and are just the thing for sight reading by 
 intermediate students. Have often been 
 asked for easy German reading matter, 
 and I now know where to send for it, 
 
 Harold "W. Jolinston, Prof, of 
 German, III. Coll., Jacksonville, III.: I 
 have read it through, and have no hesita- 
 tion in pronouncing it the best book I 
 have seen for sight reading with -a class 
 not too far advanced. 
 
 Miss Anne La-wtou, New Bedford, 
 Mass. ; recently teacher of German, Os- 
 wego Summer School: I find it of great 
 value. The stories are excellent for sight 
 reading. I also have pupils relate them in 
 their own words. For this purpose they 
 are better than Grimm. 
 
 Ida L. Shimp, Teaclier of German, 
 Mt. Union Coll., Ohio: I read the Trau- 
 merein with keen enjoyment — the little 
 stories are very bright and piquant. 
 
36 
 
 GERMAN. 
 
 Deutsche Novelletfen, Volume I. 
 
 German Novellettes. Selected and annotated by Dr. Wslhelm Bernhardt, 
 of the Washington (D. C.) High School. 192 pages. Cloth. Price by mail, 65 
 cents. Introduction price, 60 cents. 
 
 THIS series is intended to furnish material for copious and 
 rapid reading. The boolcs contain only short stories from the best 
 contemporary German novelists. The etymological relations of Ger- 
 man and English are treated fully, to illustrate the formation of Ger- 
 man words. Notes upon art, science, history, and literature are lib- 
 erally provided, thus increasing the interest of the student; and 
 as some of the notes are in German, the double purpose of ma- 
 terial for the study of German composition, and of correct and avail, 
 able models for German conversation is attained. 
 
 Volume I. contains the following stories: 
 
 "Am heiligen Abend," von Helene Stokl; "Mein erster Patient," 
 von Marc. Boyen ; " Der Wilddieb," von E. Werner; " Ein Friihlings- 
 traum," von E. Juucker; "Die schwarze Dame," von A. C. Wiesner. 
 
 Deutsche Novelletten, Volume II. 
 
 Selected and annotated by Dr. Wilhelm Bernhardt, 
 by mail, 65 cents. Introduction price, 60 cents. 
 
 162 pages. Cloth. Price 
 
 THE purpose and plan of this volume is given under Volume 
 I. above. This second volume contains the six following stories: 
 " Vor Sonnenaufgang," von Helene von Gotzendorff-Grabowski ; "Der 
 gjite alte Onkel," von Heinrich Seidel; "Leberecht Hiihnchen," von 
 Heinrich Seidel; "Der Simpel,"von Helene von Gotzendorff-Gra- 
 bowski; "Sphinx," von Karl Peschkau; "Eine Weihnachtsge- 
 schichte," von Helene Stokl. 
 
 H. H. Boyesen, Prof, of German, 
 Columbia Coll., Admirably selected, well 
 edited, and furnished with excellent notes, 
 which give neither too much nor too little 
 information. I shall probably use them." 
 
 Sylvester Primer, Prof . of Modern 
 Lang's, College of Charleston, S.C.; After 
 a careful examination I am convinced that 
 they can be employed with excellent results. 
 The stories are from authors of acknowl- 
 
 edged merit in their own country. The 
 notes are well adapted to the class of stu- 
 dents for whom they were intended, and will 
 aid tho learner to overcome real difficulties 
 without becoming too helpful to the lazy. 
 
 H. C. G. Von Jag-emann, Asst. 
 Prof, of German, Harvard Univ.: A 
 very interesting and instructive book for 
 rapid reading. I intend to use it again tor 
 the same purpose. 
 
GERMAN. 
 
 41 
 
 Die braune Erica. 
 
 Annotated for schools by E. S. Joynes, Prof, of Modem Languages, University 
 of S. C. So pages. Paper, Price, 25 cents. 
 
 ON repeated perusal, one will be more and more impressed with 
 the exquisite beauty of this "prose idyl," and with its special 
 fitness,' in matter and style, for use in class-reading. The language 
 is well suited for pupils of some advancement, and the charming 
 story, with its picturesque descriptions and its delicate touches of 
 character and sentiment, keeps up the interest and sympathy of the 
 reader throughout. 
 
 James A. Harrison, Prof, of Ger- 
 marij Washington and Lee Univ.^ Va.: 
 I used it a year or two ago and liked it, 
 — may use it again. 
 
 Anne Lawton, Teacher of German, 
 New Bedford, Mass.; My class at the 
 Y. M. C. A. are reading it with enthu- 
 
 Petev Schlemihl's JVundersame Geschichte. 
 
 Mitgetheilt von Adelberi van Chamisso. Nach des Dichter's Tode neu heraus- 
 gegeben von Julius Eduard Hitzig. Edited, with an Introduction and Explan- 
 atory Notes, by Sylvester Primer, Ph.D., Professor of Modern Languages 
 Friends School, Providence, R. I. Paper. 100 pages. Price, 25 cents. 
 
 '"pHIS is a fantastic tale by the French refugee Chamisso, belong- 
 1 ing to the later phase of the Romantic School in Germany. 
 Written for the amusement and delight of the wife and children of 
 his friend Hitzig, it has not lost its power of pleasing at the present 
 day, and may be read with profit and pleasure by those wishing to 
 acquire a knowledge of the German language. 
 
 Dr. A. TW. Spanhoof d, Prof, of Mod. 
 Lang, in St. PauPs School, Concord, N. 
 H. : Chamisso, the French emigrant, who 
 was a genuine German poet is too great a 
 phenomenon in German literature for one 
 of his works not to awaken special interest 
 among those who are to study the German 
 language. His chSrming story-novel, 
 " Schlemihl," which has deservedly become 
 a favorite work of the German people, 
 shows what success this Frenchman has 
 attained ly his persistent diligence, and 
 
 what power of narrative he has required. 
 
 G. E. H. 'We&ver, Prof.of German, 
 Swarthmore Coll., Pa.: I am well pleased 
 with these texts. I shall no doubt have 
 occasion to use them. 
 
 Chas. Woodward Hutson, Prof. 
 of Mod. Lang., Univ. of Mississippi: 
 Many thanks for Schlemihl. You are cer- 
 tainly making admirable selections lor 
 your series. 
 
42 
 
 GERMAN. 
 
 Phosphorus Hollunder. 
 
 Novelle by L. v. FRANgois, from Spemann's collection, with notes, by OscAR 
 Faolhaber, Professor of Modern Languages in Phillips Exeter Academy. 
 77 pages. Paper. Price, 20 cents. 
 
 IN this melodramatic little novel, the authoress has so vividly 
 sketched the character and feelings of the persons she introduces 
 to the reader, and has so graphically pictured the social conditions 
 in which they moved, that one's interest is aroused in the first para- 
 graph and held to the very last. 
 
 The editor, by the advice of numerous colleagues, has adapted 
 the story to the class-room, by adding such notes as he deemed of 
 greatest importance to the average student in the second year of his 
 work. 
 
 H. H. Boyesen, Prof, of German, 
 Columbia Coll.,N. Y. City: Well adapted 
 for beginners and intermediate classes, and 
 particularly for reading at sight. 
 
 Victor "WUker, Prof, of Mod. 
 Langs. J Baldwin Univ., Berea, Ohio : An 
 interesting novel, well annotated. 
 
 Wm. L. Pearson, Prof, of Mod. 
 
 Langs., Penn. Coll., la. : A choice selec- 
 tion well edited. 
 
 Miss A. C. Pendleton, Prof, of 
 Mod. Langs., Bethany Coll., W. Va. : A 
 very interesting story, especially available 
 as a basis for oral practice, and most satis- 
 factorily annotated. 
 
 Nie/s Klims JVallfahrt in die Unterwelt. 
 
 Edited, with introduction and a few notes, by Eugene H. Babbitt, Instructor 
 in German, Harvard University. Paper, 64 pages. Price, 20 cents. 
 
 NIELS KLIM is a Danish classic, occupying somewhat the same 
 position in that literature as Gulliver's Travels in English. The 
 German version, like most other translations into German, is smooth, 
 and presents generally fewer diflSculties of idiom than works written 
 originally in German. The selections given, however, are probably, 
 on account of the rather extended vocabulary, better adapted to the 
 use of students who have read a few months than to beginners. By 
 such students they will be read with interest and^pleasure. 
 
 Cornell Era : This is a very neatly 
 gotten up book in pamphlet form, and 
 furnishes some very interesting and yet 
 not difficult German. 
 
 Wellesley Prelude: It is well 
 adapted to fulfil the purpose for which it 
 was edited, namely, for rapid reading in 
 classes in German. 
 
GERMAN. 43 
 
 H off manfis Tales from History. 
 
 Historische Erzdhlungen. Edited, with notes and index, by H. S. Beres- 
 ford-Weeb, Assistant Master at Wellington College, England, no pages. 
 Paper, 25 cents. 
 
 THIS book is intended to supply a want, felt by many teachers, of 
 some historical reading either as a first text or for sight reading in 
 the latter part of the first year. The pure and easy style of these 
 tales, their impressive and pathetic descriptions and their well sus- 
 tained interest, combined with the author's power of enlisting the 
 sympathy of his readers, render them especially well adapted for 
 this purpose. 
 
 The contents are as follows: Conradin of Suabia, The End of 
 Charles the Bold, The Execution of Louis XVI. and his Queen, The 
 Franco-German War (1870-187 1 ). The latter is by far *^he longest of 
 these tales. 
 
 A US dem Staat Friedrichs des Grossen. 
 
 Von Gustav Freytag. Edited, with notes, by Herman Hager, Ph.D., 
 (Lips.), Lecturer on the German Language and Literature in Owens . College, 
 Victoria University, Manchester, England. 123 pages. Paper, 30 cents. 
 
 FOR a brief estimate of Frederick's character and work as a whole, 
 nothing better than this masterly essay can be found. Gustav 
 Freytag is at once famous as a novelist and as a historian; and nowhere 
 perhaps is the skill of the narrator more happily combined with 
 the insight of the historian than \T\*Bilder aus der deutschen 
 Vergangenheit, the series of historical sketches from which this essay 
 is taken. Freytag's style is peculiarly suited to its subject, being 
 vigorous and terse to a marked degree, yet rising at times to real 
 eloquence, in spite of the studied compression, which may seem at 
 first a little perplexing to the reader. 
 
 Since the text has been edited as historical reading for students 
 somewhat advanced, the notes are mainly historical and explanatory, 
 though the attention is frequently directed to the developement of 
 meaning in words. In an appendix, a list of the Foreign Words 
 occurring in the text is given together with their German Equivalants. 
 This book follows well Hoffman's Tales from History. 
 
GERMAN TEXTS. 
 
 Grimm's Mdrchen and Schiller's Der Taucher. (Price, 75 cents.) 
 
 With full notes and vocabulary. 
 
 Meissner's German Conversation. (Price, 75 cents.) 
 
 Exercises in Conversation. German, with English Equivalent. 
 
 Van DaelFs Leander's Trdumereien. (Price, 25 cents.) 
 'Super's Anderson's Mdrchen. (In press.) 
 Hauff's Das kalte Herz. With Vocabulary. (Price, 75 cents.) 
 Hauff's Der Zwerg Nase. (Price, 15 cents.) 
 AH Babi and the Forty Thieves. (Price, 15 cents.) 
 Bernhardt' s Novelletten-Bibliothek. Vol. /., Vol. II. (60 cents each.) 
 Hoffmann's Historische Erzdhlungen. (Price, 25 "cents.) 
 Primer's Chamisso's Peter Schlemihl. (Price, 25 cents.) 
 Babbitt's Holbergs Niels Klim. (Price, 15 cent's.) 
 Hagers Freytag's Aus dem Staat Friedrichs des Grossen. (25 cents.) 
 Faulhaber's Francois' Phosphorus Hollunder. (Price, 25 cents.) 
 Toy's Frey tag's Die Journalisten. (Price, 30 cents.) 
 Joynes' Jensen's Die braune Erica. (Price, 25 cents.) 
 Thoynas's Riehl's Fluch der Schdnheit. (Price, 25 cents.) 
 Buchheim's Dichtung und Wahrheit. First three books. (In press.) 
 Van Daell's Heine's Die Harzreise. (Price, 25 cents.) 
 Joynes' Schiller's Der Geisterscher. ( Price, 25 cents.) 
 yohnson's Schiller's Ballade. (Price, 60 cents.) 
 Wells' Schiller's yungfrau von Orleans. (Price, 60 cents.) 
 Huss's Goethe's Sesenheim. From Dichtung und Wahrheit. (25 cents.) 
 Hodges' Course in Scientific German. (Price, 75 cents.) 
 Primer's Lessing's Minna Von Barnhelm (Price, 60 cents.) 
 White's Heine's Poems. (Price, 75 cents.) 
 Thomas's Goethe's Torquato Tasso. (Price, 75 cents.) 
 Wenckebach's Deutsche Literaturgeschichte. Erstes Buch. (50 cts.) 
 Heath's German Dictionary. (Retail price, ii.50.) 
 
 Sufficient for students' use in school and college. 
 
 Many other texts are in preparation. 
 
 D C. HEATH & CO., Publishers, 
 
 t BOSTON, NEW YORK AND ClIICACJO. 
 
FRENCH TEXTS. 
 
 Super's de Mus set's Pierre et Camille. (Price, i j cents.) 
 
 Le Bon's France^s Abeille. (Price, 25 cents.) 
 
 Super's Souvestre's Le Maride Mme. de Solange. (Price, 15 cents.) 
 
 Fortier's de Vigny's Le Cachet Rouge. (Price, 15 cents.) 
 
 Sanderson's Daudet 's Le Sidge de Berlin and La Derniere Classe. 
 
 (Price, 15 cents.) 
 Barrer^s Lamartin^ s Jeanne d'Arc. (Price, 30 cents.) 
 Spiers' de Vigny's La Canne dejonc. (In press.) 
 Warren's Sandeau's Mile, de la Seiglilre. (In press.) 
 Super's Souvestre'* Confessions d'un Ouvrier. (Price, 25 cents.) 
 BoielUs Daudet 's La Belle-Nivernaise. (Price, 25 cents.) 
 Boielle's Victor Hugo's Bug Jargal. (Price, 40 cents.) 
 Prices Choix d' Extraits de Daudet (Price, 15 cents.) 
 Delbos' Piron's La Mitromanie. (Price, 40 cents.) 
 Case's Moliere's Le Mddecin malgri lui. (Price, 15 cents.) 
 Case's Moliir^s Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme. (Price, 25 cents.) 
 Case's Moliere's Le Tartuffe. (Price, 25 cents.) 
 Matzke's Victor Hugo's Hernani, (In press.) 
 Fortier's Comeille's Polyeucte. (In press.) 
 Fortier's Sept Grands Auteurs du XI Xe Siicle. (Price, 60 cents.) 
 
 Lectures in French on (.amartine, Hugo, de Vigny, de Musset, Gautier, M^rim^e, Copp^. 
 
 Warren's Primer of French Literature. (Price, 75 cents.)^ 
 
 An historical handbook. 
 
 Fontaine's Historiettes Modernes, Vol.I.y Vol. II. (Price, 60 cents each.) 
 
 short, pure and unusually interesting stories for second year work. With notes. 
 
 Fraser's Souvestre's Un Philosophe sous les Toils. (Price, 80 cents.) 
 
 In cloth, with notes and vocabulary. 
 
 Curme's Lamartine's Meditations. (Price, 75 cents.) 
 
 Selections with biographical sketch and notes. 
 
 Heath's French Dictionary. (Retail price, $1.50.) 
 
 Sufficient for students' use in school and college. 
 
 Many other texts are in preperation. 
 
 D. C. HEATH & CO., Publishers, 
 
 BOSTON, NEW YOKK AND CHICAGO. 
 
\